I
LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY •
A
'm.-^
THE
COMBINED SPANISH METHOD.
A NEW
PRACTICAL AND THEORETICAL SYSTEM OF LEARNING
THE CASTILIAN LANGUAGE,
BMBEACING THE MOST ADVANTAGEOUS FEATUEES OF THE BEST KNOWN-
METHODS.
WITH A
PROIOUNCIXG VOCABULARY,
CONTAINING ALL THE WORDS USED IN THE COURSE OF THE WORK, AND REFERENCES
TO THE LESSONS IN WHICH EACH ONE IS EXPLAINED, THUS ENABLING
ANY ONE TO BE HIS OWN INSTRUCTOR.
BY
ALBERTO DE TORNOS, A.M.,
POBMEBLT DIRECTOR OF frORMAL SCHOOLS IN SPAIN. AND NO"W TEACHER OF SPANISH \V
THE NEW YORK MERCANTILE LIBRARY, NEW YORK EVENING HIGH SCHOOL, AND
THE POLYTECHNIC AND PACKER INSTITUTES, BROOKLYN.
JOH|« S. PRELL
Civil & Mechanical Engineer.
SAN FKANCISCO, CAL.
NEW YOEK:
D. APPLETOIsr AND COMPANY,
1, 3, AND 6 BOND STREET.
1892.
Bntbbbd, according to Act of Congress, in the year 186T, hy
D. APPLETON & COMPANY,
Ijx the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for tne Sonthem District
of New York,
IrdMtolfo^
KoTiCE. — ^A Kej^ to the Exercises of this Grammar is
published in a separate volume.
Add toliib.
I i 1
PREFACE.
It is an undoubted fact that in teaching, not only lan-
guages, but any other science or art, there neither is, nor
can be, any other method than that of uniting theory
with, practice ^ and the various modes of applying the one
to the other, the extent of the application, and the time at
which it should be commenced, have produced the great
number of methods hitherto published.
This fact is now universally acknowledged, and each new
author proclaims himself to be the only one who has put it
into execution. The most insignificant little phrase-book
does not fail to announce, in its introduction, that it com-
bines theory and jpractice / and grammars containing noth-
ing more than confused masses of rules, heaped one upon
another, are entitled " Theoretical and Practical^ It is
admitted on all hands that much progress has been made
within the last few years in the art of teaching languages ;
and, in testimony of this, we have only to mention the ex-
cellent oral and practical methods of Jacotot, Manesca, Ollen-
dorff, Boulet, Hobertson, and others who have followed in
their footsteps, all of which are ably treated, and have done
much good in their way. But each one of the grammarians
referred to, satisfied with his own invention, looked with
disdain upon that of his predecessor. Hence the enmity
747
iV PEEPACE.
and the almost unaccountable diversity of opinion which we
observe amongst them. Had they studied each other with
impartiality, and endeavored to profit by the experience
and even the defects of the several systems, their labors
would certainly have been attended with still more favora-
ble results, and of course more considerable benefit would
have accrued thereby to the art in general. Numberless
points of excellence are to be found, scattered here and
there, throughout the various ancient and modern systems,
and chiefly those abeady alluded to; and it has been
thouglit that, if carefully sifted out and judiciously com-
bined, they would foi-m a new method which would be in
details essentially superior to any of the old ones.
This conviction, joined to twenty years' experience
in teaching the Spanish language, sometimes through the
medium of one, sometimes of another of the before-men-
tioned systems, has led the author to prepare and publish
the Combined Method, which he now offers to those desir-
ing to learn the noble language of Cervantes.
Wliether he has successfully attained his object, the pub-
lic will decide.
OBSEEYATION"S
ON
SOME OF THE ADVANTAGEOUS FEATURES OF THE " DE TORNOS'S
COMBINED METHOD."
1st. The advantage of presenting the verb as the first and
principal part of speech, which serves as the axis upon which
all the other parts revolve. These, too, have been introduced
in their turn, not in grammatical order, nor by mere chance,
but in the logical and natural order in which they occur in
discourse, whether written or spoken.
2d. That of explaining these parts of speech in the order
just mentioned, not in an isolated manner, but united to form
a homogeneous whole, and in such a way that the learner will
have no difficulty in finding the explanation relative to the use of
each one of them respectively, as often as occasion may require.
3d. These explanations, which embrace the whole theory,
and form a complete grammar of the language, are separate
from and independent of the exercises ; the latter being com-
posed in strict accordance with the examples accompanying
each lesson, in such a manner that those unacquainted with
grammar in general, and those who have no desire to enter
into the theory of the language, or, finally, those who are too
young or too old to learn grammar, may acquire a thorough
conversational knowledge of Spanish, by merely committing to
memory the Vocabulary, studying the Compositions, and care-
fully writing the Exercises.
4th. From the arrangement alluded to, arises another great
advantage, namely, all the elements are found in the vocabu-
lary of each lesson, separated and detached from the examples
and rules given in the explanation ; thus enabling the student
to see at one glance all that he has to commit to memory for
each recitation.
Vi OBSBBVATIONS.
6th. And this division of the lessons into Elements, Compo-
sition, Explanation, Version, and Exercise, enables the teacher
to divide each lesson into two, three, or even four parts, accord-
ing to the age and capacity of the learner.
6tll. Repetition, and constant repetition, is indispensable for
acquiring any language ; but by repetition should not be under-
stood the simple reiteration of single words and easy phrases ;
but repetition of the idioms, and of those forms of expression
differing" most widely from the idiomatical construction of the
learner's native tongue. It is true, that though this is the
proper plan for acquiring a thorough knowledge of a language,
that feature might tend to make the present work appear, at
first sight, more difficult than the books hitherto used ; but
such will not be found the case ; for when there is frequent
change of matter there cannot be monotony ; and variety ren-
ders study at the same time easy and agreeable. This repetition,
then, of useful forms of expression, and contrast of idiom, will
be found in every page of our " Combined Method," in which
it has been our endeavor to introduce gradually and with the
necessary explanations of each, the most important idioms of
the Spanish language.
7th. Although we are of opinion that to learn a language,
and, above all, to learn to pronounce it, it is always preferable
to have the assistance of a skilful teacher, and one who speaks
his native tongue with purity and correctness ; yet, as it is not
always possible to procure such, we have placed at the end a
Vocabulary, containing all the words used in the course of the
work, and the pronunciation of each, so that nothing may be
wanting to second the efforts of those who, from choice or
necessity, may be their own instructors.
8th. The Vocabulary, besides giving the pronunciation and
meaning of the words, indicates the lesson in which the expla-
nation of each has been given in the Grammar. By this means
the learner can with ease refer to the explanation of all those
words of which it has been deemed essential to give one.
CONTENTS.
rkon
PRKFACE, iii, iv
A FEW REMABK3 ON THE CoifBIKED METHOD, . . . . . V, vl
Contents, .......... vii-xvi
Pbeliminart Lesson on Orthography and Pbonunciation, . xvii-xxiv
LESSON I.
BUI.B
1. Regular verts, classified in three conjugations, ..... 1
2. Eoots, .......... a
8. Terminations of the three model verbs, corresponding to all the regular verbs, 2
— . Suppression of the nominative pronouns, . .... 2
4. F. iUiied) requires the verb in the tliird person, ..... 8
LESSON II.
6. Senor, senorito, sefiora, senorita, use of these words, . . , . 4
6. Don and Bona, use of these words, ....... 5
7. iV'o, placed before the verb, ....... 5
LESSON III.
8. The conjunction y changed into I, .... , ,7
9. Que, interrogative pronoun, ... . . 7
10. Sino.—Wheu but is to be translated by sino, . . . . .7
11. P^ro.— When ftz/Ms to be translated by pen), ..... 7
12. jE'*:pam);, iM5'/es, &c., one word may belong to different parts of speech, , 7
LESSON IV.
13
10
A, preposition to, used after active verbs, when the object is a person, . lu
14. De, used to express position or the material of which any thing is made 10
15. ^, the article <A€, used to determine a noun masculine singular ' * 10
^. Contraction of the article el and the prepositions a and de into al, del, . 10
16. ^«, the indefinite pronoun used before masculine nouns, . . 10
— . t/«o Is only used as a numeral adjective, .10
LESSON y.
17. Gender, how ascertained, ....... 1.<J
— . Una, used before feminine nouns, ....,,. 13
18. Tour, how translated, . . . . . .','.' IZ
VIU CONTENTS.
LESSON VI.
BULK rxOB
19. The terminations of the persous of the present indicative ; how they differ
in the three conjugations, . . . . . . * . .16
20. Muy^ how translated, ........ 16
21. Noons ending in o change that vowel into a for the feminine, . . .17
LESSON VII.
22. Adjectives ending in o, an, or on form their feminine in a, . . 20
— . Adjectives signifying nationality and ending in a, . . . .20
— . Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns, .... 20
— . Adjectives used metaphorically are always placed before the nouns, . . 20
— . Some adjectives drop their last letter or syllable, .... 20
LESSON VIII.
23. The endings of the second and third conjugations, how they differ, . . 28
24. The conjunction b when changed into w, . . . . . 23
25. iW, how translated, ......... 23
26. The plural of nouns, ........ 23
27. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case, . . 24
28. The article agrees also, ........ 24
— . Feminine nouns that take the masculine article, 24
.89. The neuter article fo, 34
LESSON IX.
80. Papd^ mama, pie, are exceptions, ....... 27
81. Nouns which are not monosyllables and end in s, their plural, . . 28
— . Words ending in z, their plural, ....... 28
82. Words which are compounds of two nouns, their plural, ... 26
33. The days of the week, when they take the article, . . . .28
84. Donde, adonde, cuando, placed before the verb, .... 28
85. Donde, adonde, cuando, in interrogations require an accent, . . .28
LESSON X.
86. trregular verbs, ......... 31
— . Tener not included in the seven verbs, . . . . . .81
— . Objective case of the third person fe, los, la, las, lo, . . . . ^
87. Lo and le, the difference between them, ,,.... 82
— . If. and so are translated sometimes by to, . , . . . 82
88. Q>/ien, curd, qiie, de quien, used interrogatively do not take the article, . 32
89. When the interrogative is governed by a preposition, the same preposition
must be repeated in the answer, . . . . . . .88
LESSON XI.
W. Alrrt/ien, akruno, the difference between them, . . . .85
— . Any one or any body, when translated by cualquiera, ... 86
41. Nadie, ninfruno, their distinction, . . . • • . 8R
42. Alfjuno and nin/funo, when they lose the o, . ~. . » . 86
48 Algo, alguna cosa, used affirmatively, ...>.. 86
CONTENTS. ix
44. I^ada, ninguna cosa, used negatively, ...... 36
45. Negatives, when placed before the verb, . . . . . .36
— . Two negatives render the negation more emphatic than one, . . 36
46. A or an, when not translated, ....... 36
LESSON XII.
47. Tener and haber, their distinction, ...... 39
— . To have and to be, followed by an infinitive, how they are translated, . . 39
48. Preterit Indefirdte, ......... 40
LESSON XIII.
49. Mio, tuyo, «&c., change the into a for the feminine, . . . .43
BO. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the name of the thing
possessed, ......... 43
51. As pronominal adjectives, mio, tuyo, myo precede the noun and drop their
final syllable, .......... 43
52. Mio, when placed after the noun, ..... 44
53. Possessives used as pronouns agree in gender and number with the nouns
they represent, and take the article, . . . . . ,44
54. When used indefinitely they take the neuter article, ... 44
55. Whenconnected with the verb to &e, the article is omitted, . . .44
56. Vuestro, vuestra, when used, ....... 44
LESSON XIY.
57. Formation of compound numbers, ....... 48
58. Numbers are indeclinable, except ujio and the compounds of dento, , 48
59. Uno, its agreement ; when it loses the 0, . . . . . .48
60. Ciento, its agreement ; when it loses the last syllable, ... 48
LESSON XV.
61. Ordinals, their agreement and place, . . . . . .51
— . Primero and tercero, when they drop their final letter, ... 52
62. Ordinals, when used, ......... 52
— . N. B.— When ordinals do not require the definite article, ... 52
LESSON XVI.
63. Preterit Definite, 56
64. Ante, its meaning, .......•, 57
65. Mas and menos, how used, ....«.,. 57
LESSON XVII,
66. Qiiien, how used, ......... 61
67. Who, when translated by que, and when by quien^ . , . .61
68. 0>/al and qve relate to persons and things, ..... 61
69. Cijyo refers tc persons and things : its agreement, . . , • . 61
— . It partakes of the nature of the relatives and of the possessives, . . 61
CONTENTS
BULK
rA«<
70. The preposition placed before the relative, . . . • .61
71. Relative pronouns can never be suppressed in Spanish, , , • 61
LESSON XVIII.
72. Declension of the demonstrative pronouns este, ese, aqud, . . .66
78. Esie, how used, .....•••• 66
74. Este, ese, forming one word with the adjective otro^ . • • .67
75. The demonstrative pronouns used as neuter, ..... 67
78. The former and the latter, translated by aqud and este, . . - .67
T7. That of, that who, or that which, translated hYelde,elqm, . . 67
78. English personal pronouns rendered in Spanish by demonstrative pronouns, 67
79. Aqui, ahi, oca, aUd, how employed, . . . . • • . 6»
LESSON XIX.
80. Para and ;?or, how they diflTer, ....... TO
81. Entre, its meaning, ......... "73
^ Hasta^ its meaning, . 73
LESSON XX.
83. Tanto and cuanto, when they lose the last syllable, . . . .77
84. Comparison of equality, how formed, ...... 77
85. Cuan may be employed, ........ 77
86. Comparison of superiority, how formed, ..... 77
87. Comparison of inferiority, ........ 77
88. Mayor, menor, m^or, peor, are already in the comparative degree, . 77
89. Than, translated by de and que, ....... 78
90. Comparison relating to nouns, verbs, and adverbs. .... 78
LESSON XXI.
91. Superlatives ending in est, or formed by most, how translated, . . 82
92. 3fost, or most of, when translated by la mayor parte, or by mas, . . 83
93. In, preposition, when translated hy de, , . . . . .83
94. Superlatives formed by very, most, etc., when formed in Spanish by muy and
when by isim/), ......... 83
95. Adjectives drop the last vowel on taking the termination isimo, . . 83
96. Other superlatives ending in errimo, ...... 83
97. Adjectives which change their endings before the termination isimo, . . 83
98. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed, ..... 84
99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives, . . . . . .84
— . These make also a superlative in isimo, ..... 84
— . Also with muy, and a comparative with mas or rTienos, . . . .84
100. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of comparison, . . 84
LESSON XXII.
101. Ser and estar, the distinction between them,
102. " " their employment,
CONTENTS. XI
LESSON XXIII.
V.VL* PAOI
103. Ihiture simple, .......... 96
IW. The definite article used with numerals, indicating the hour of the day, . 96
105. Evening and night, translated by noche, . . . . . .96
106. The conjunction si, when it governs the subjunctive, and when the indica-
tive, .......... 90
LESSON XXIV.
107. Compound future, ......... 100
108. Acabar de, its meaning, ........ 100
— . N. B.— How the pupil may learn a great number of words with little or no
difficulty, 101-
109. Nouns ending in tion are the same in Spanish, changing the letter t into c, 101
110. The days of the month are counted by the cardinal numbers, preceded by the
article, .......... 101
LESSON XXV.
111. Saber and conocer, how they differ, . ..... 107
112. Aun, ya, todaiyh, their different meaning and uses, . . . .107
— . Once, twice, &c., translated by una vez, dos veces, &c., . . . 107
— . Mzedo, valor, &c., take the preposition de after them, . . . .107
11.3. To be afraid, to be thirsty, &c., how translated, .... 107
114. Jamas and nunca, how used, ........ 107
LESSON XXVI.
115. Pronoun subject, or nominative, ...... 112
116. Two objective cases of the personal pronouns, how used, . . .113
117. The objective case, when not preceded by a preposition, is affixed to infini-
tives, gerunds, &c., ........ 113
118. When the verb drops the final letter followed by nosoros, . . . 113
— . The reason of this, ........ 113
119. When the objective case may follow the verb, . . . . .113
120. When the objective may be placed before the first verb, or after the second, 113
121. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the second objective case, . 113
122. Mi, ti, si, when preceded by con, . . . . . .Hi
123. Entre, how used, ......... 114
124. The second objective case is used after comparatives, ... 114
125. When the first objective case is used, . . . . , .114
126. The objective case of the third person is rendered by le, les, if the preposition
to govern it in English, 114
LESSON XXVII.
127. The third person rendered in Sp^-nish hy se, . . . . . 119
128. The object of the verb is to be placed last, when two first objective cases
occur in the sentence, ...... .119
129. Placed first when the object of the verb is the reflective pronoun, , . 12G
130. Both of the objective cases belonging to the same person used together, . 120
131. The expressions a ei quiero, a ti amo, are incorrect, . . .120
Xii CONTENTS
132. The pronouns U, la, lo, los, and las, how dibtingulshed from the artldes el, la,
lo,los,la8, ^20
133. The adjective mismo, how used, .,..•.. 120
LESSON XXVIII.
134. When the imperfect is used, ....... 125
135. When the pluperfect is used, ........ 126
136. How the expressions to have just and to be just are translated before a past
participle, ^26
LESSON XXIX.
137. The preterit anterior, its use, 130
138. Derivation of adverbs of manner and quality, .... 131
139. How adverbs are formed from adjectives, . . . . . . 131
140 Adverbs terminating in mente admit, like adjectives, the degrees of compari-
181
141. How these adverbs can be substituted, . . . . • .131
LESSON XXX.
142. What impersonal verbs are, ....••• ^^T
143.
144,
Amanecer and anocher, used in the three persona, . . . .137
jEfofter and /tocer, and other verbs used impersonally, ... 137
145. The pronoun it, accompanying impersonal verbs, not translated, . . 138
— . Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article, .... 138
— . Nouns used in their most general sense take the article, . . .138
J46, Names of nations, countries, mountains, &c., take the article, , ,138
147, Nations, countries, and provinces, when preceded by a preposition, do not
take the article, ,..••'••*
— . Names of some places that always take the article
138
138
LESSON XXXI
148
144
148. Gttstar, Bignifying to give pimmre to, hocused, ....
149. G^^^ar, followed by the preposition rfe, . - • • ^^
152. The\eThpesar,vfhenmiiaams to regret,
LESSON XXXII
149
163, How the passive voice is ^"^^^^ , \^ ^,,i„ tbe present "and im'perfeci
154. When the passive form is used with tne vero set iu k, i' ^^^
tenses of the indicative, • • • ' * , ' haq
155. When the preposition d. or por is to be used after passive verbs, ^ ' . ' 1^
156. Passive voice formed by ^e, • • ' / ' ' .150
157. When the passive, formed with ^€, is to be preferrca, .
LESSON XXXIII.
168. Elective verbs, what they are, .
165
CONTENTS. XIU
BULB PAOB
159. When are the verbs made reflective ? . . , . . .156
160. When a verb denotes reciprocity^ how it is conjugated, ... 156
LESSON XXXIV.
161. Which are the irre^lar verbs, 161
162. Verbs which, although they undergo slight changes in their radical letters,
are not to be considered as irregular, ..... 161
163, 164. Verbs which change i into y, . . . . . . .162
165. How the irregular verbs are divided, ...... 162
166. What is to be observed relative to the object of the verb pagar, . . 163
LESSON XXXV.
167. Irregularity of the verb acostar, ....... 168
168. Imperative mood, when used, ....... 168
169. The s of the first person plural, and the d of the second, suppressed before
nosaxidos, ... ...... 168
170. The subjunctive, used when the imperative is negative in English, . . 168
171. The future of the indicative, used for the imperative, ... 168
172. Adjectives ending in ous, how rendered into Spanish, . . . .168
173. Nouns and adjectives ending in Englie'h in ic or iccU, how rendered into
Spanish, .......... 169
LESSON XXXVI.
174. Irregiilarity of the verb tnoKer, • . . . . 173
175. Se, as the Spanish indefinite personal pronoun, . . * , * . * 173
176. The pronoun se, in its four functions, . . .'.'.' 174
177. Nouns ending in English in «y, how rendered into Spanish * * 174
178. Doler, how used, ... *^ ' ' * .'*
LESSON XXXVII.
179. Irregularity of the verb a<fen(?er, , . ^^
180,181,182,183. Subjunctive Mood, when UBed in'spanish, . ' .' ' iso
184. Present tense of the subjunctive «- » ' ' ^Z
185. Perfect tense, . . ' l^
•••..... 181
LESSON XXXVIII.
isa Present Participles, .
187. Oerunds, . . ^ ^^^
1^' ^.^ '^^'^^^^^^^^'l^t*^ the gerund in Spanish, ' .*.'.*.* iS
iby. When m English the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used
how rendered into Spanish ;,87
190. The infinitive used as a verbal noun, . . .*.*.' 187
191. The infinitive governed by an other verb, how rendered into English, ' . 187
LESSON XXXIX.
192. Irregularity of the verb pedir, jgg
193. The usual forms of salutations, . . . * . * . * . * . 192
XIV CONTENTS.
LESSON XL.
194. Conducir, its Irregularity, ....... 197
195. iSegun as a preposition and an adverb, . . . , . .198
196. CoUective nouns, ......... 198
LESSON XLI.
197. Defective verbs podrir, placer, &c., . . . . . . .903
198. Yacer, its use, ......... 203
199. Soler, its use, 203
200. Desde, its meaning and use, ....... 203
201. Contra, rendered into English by against, . . . . . .204
202. Sobre, its signification, ........ 204
203. 7'ms, its meaning, ......... 204
204. Tlie conjunction pues, its use, ....... 204
LESSON XLII.
305. Conjunctions, their classification, . . . . . . .209
206. What is to be observed in relation to the government of conjunctions, . 210
207. Some conjunctions that govern the subjunctive mood, . . . .210
208. Compound conjunctions which require the infinitive mood, . . 210
209. Compound conjunctions which require the indicative, . . . .210
LESSON XLIII.
210. Imperfect and pluperfect of the subjunctive, ..... 215
211. How to render into Spanish the auxiliaries maj/, might, can, could, will,
would, and shotdd, ......... 217
212. What the imperfect subjunctive denotes, ..... 217
213. What the pluperfect denotes, 217
ESSON XLIV.
214. Augmentative and diminutive nouns, ...... fi2S
215. Irregular terminations of certain diminutives, . . . . .294
216. Diminutives may be formed from adjectives, participles, gerunds, and ad-
verbs, .......... 234
217. Some of the primitive words do not admit all the diminutive terminations, . 224
218. There are derivatives which, although they appear to be augmentatives or
diminutives, are not so, ....... S2S
LESSON XLV.
219. The fhture simple of the subjunctive, . . . . . .230
220. How the present of the subjunctive may be substituted by the future, . 230
221. The future compound, ......... 890
222. The compound present of the subjunctive may be Babstitated by the future
compound, ......... SSI
828. What is to be observed in order not to misapply the imperfect and plu-
perfect, .......... 881
194. Gtovemment of the fhture simple and compound fhtnre of the subjunctive
mood, .......... SSI
CONTENTS. XV
LESSON XLVI.
226-226. Inteijections, 237
LESSON XLVII.
227. Use of the article, ......... 242
228. The definite article used with common nouns taken in a general sense, . 242
229. The article before the names of the four parts of the globe, names of empires,
kingdoms, &c., ......... 243
230. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when they require the article, . .243
231. The article repeated before every noun enumerated, ... 243
232. The definite article used before nouns indicating rank, oflace, &c., . . 243
233. Used instead of the possessive adjective, ..... 244
234. Used as in English, before nouns, taken in a particular or definite sense, . ^4
LESSON XLVIII.
235. Correspondence of the tenses with each other, .... 249
236. When the determined verb is put in the Infinitive, . . . .250
237. When the determining verb is ser^ or any impersonal verb, and the governing
verb has no subject, ........ 250
238. Put in the subjunctive when the determining verb has a nominative, . . 251
239. When the governing verb is put in the present or future of the subjunctive, 251
240. Government of the preterit indefiBite, and compound future of the indica-
tive, 251
341. The nominative being the same for both verbs and the governing one in the
indicative, in what mood the determining verb is put, ... 252
LESSON XLIX.
942, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, MS, 249, 250, 251, 252. Derivative nouns, . . 257
LESSON L,
253. Compound nouns, ..••■••*
LESSON LI.
254. The natural construction,
264
270
255, 256. Figurative construction, ' * * * * ' 071
257. Which of the two constructions Is preferable, *^
LESSON LII.
258. Past Participles, .....•••'
259. Agreement of past participles, . . . • • • *
260. When a verb has two past participles, one regular and the other Irregular,
how they are used, ....•••*
261. Irregular past participles that may be used with the verb Mber,
262. Extraordinary irregularity of the verb rrwrir, . . .
263. Some past or passive participles take an active siernification, .
264. Past participles may sometimes take the place of substantives, . . 278
265. Other tenses in the infinitive mood, ^"^^
276
277
277
277
278
XVI CONTENTS.
LESSON LIII.
5J66. Idiomatic expresBlons, in which the English preposition differs In meaning
tirom that which most generally constitutes Its proper signification, . 284
LESSON LIV.
267. Conjunctions In English that are frequently used as substitutes for other
words, how rendered into Spanish, , . . . , .289
268. Spanish conjunctions used as substitutes for other words, ... 289
— . Different uses of the conjunction si, ...... 289
LESSON LV.
269. Some of the principal uses of the conjunction^?^, . . . .396
LESSON LVI.
270. Epistolary correspondence, ....... 801
LESSON LVII.
271. Observation in regard to verbs that change their meaning according to the
preposition by which they are followed, ..... 310
LESSON LVIII.
272. The verbs to be glad and to be r^oiced, how translated, . . . .814
273. The verbs to be sorry and to grieve, how translated, .... 814
274. How the verb caber is used, . . . . . . . .814
LESSON LIX.
275. Idioms with the verbs caer, dar, decir, echar, ..... 820
LESSON LX.
276. Idioms with the verbs entrar, hacer, ir, Uevar, mandar, oler a, saber 4, salir,
servir, tardar, and volver, ... .... 828
LESSONS LXI TO LXV.
On the Principal Idioms of the Spanish Language, . . . . . 829 to 8B4
General observations on some grammatical and idiomatical peculiarities of the
Spanish language, not hitherto treated of In the Grammar, . . . .365
Recapitulation of all the rules of the Grammar, .... 866 to 888
Complete list of the conjugations of all the Spanish verbs, . . . 883 to 438
List of all the Irregular verbs, ........ 439, 440
VocABUiiABT, containing all the Spanish words used In the grammar, . 441 to 470
ly
PRELIMINARY LESSON
ON
ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION^.
THE AL.PHABET.
The Spanish Alphabet contains twenty-seven letters, ex-
clusive of IT and W, which are used in foreign words only,
and are pronounced as in English. The W appears in a very-
few historical names, like Wamba, Witiza. The letters are all
of the feminine gender, and theii' names and pronunciation are
as follows :
A,
a,
ah.
B,
•h,
lay.
c,
c,
thayl
CH,
ch,
chay.
D,
d,
day.
E,
e,
ay.
F,
f,
ay-fay.
G,
g,
hay.
H,
h,
at-chay.
I,
h
e.
J,
J,
hotah.
L,
1,
a-lay.
LL,
11,
ail-yay.
M,
m,
dymay.
N,
n,
aynay.
%
fi,
ain-yay.
0,
0,
0.
P,
P,
pay.
Q,
q,
Jcoo.
R,
r,
air-ray.
s,
s,
ayswy.
T,
t.
tay.
XT,
"'.
00.
V,
V,
my.
X,
X,
ayJciss.
Y,
y,
e-gree-ay'-gah.
z,
z,
thay-tah.
XVlll PEELIMINAEY LESSON.
All the letters are invariable in sound, except c and ^, which
have each two sounds, as will be seen in the proper place; and
every letter is pronounced in all positions, except the A, w^hich
is always silent, and the w, which is not sounded in the sylla-
bles ffue, gui, and que, qui.
So that, with a few exceptions, the Spanish language is
pronounced exactly as it is written, and does not present those
difficulties met with in the orthography and pronunciation of
most other languages. The system of representing, in each les-
son, the pronunciation of each word by an incorrect orthography
only augments the doubts and labor of the learner, besides in-
creasing unnecessarily the size of the work ; one lesson of an
hour's duration with a native Spanish teacher will do more toward
the acquisition of a pure Castilian pronunciation, than all the
works that could be written on the subject.
As the English vowels differ in sound from those of all
other languages, great care ought to be taken to learn the
true sound of the Spanish vowels ; they are :
a, e, i, o, u.
ah, ay, c, o, oo.
Y is sometimes a vowel. (See the letter Y.)
A has an invariable sound, as heard in the words art, father;
as, arte, padre (not varying as in the English words fare, fat,
far, fall, swallow, many, courage, mustard),
E has the sound of a in made ; as, hecho,
I sounds like the first e in even ; as, ingles. (See letter 3^.)
O is pronounced like the English o in the word ode ; as, amo,
XJ sounds as the English u in bull; as, bula: it is silent in
the syllables gue, gni, guerra, except it has a diaeresis marked
over it, agiXero. In the syllables que, qui, it is always silent.
SOUNDS OF THE CONSONANTS.
B has the same sound as in English ; but in Castile and
Aragon (where in other respects the Castilian language is most
PEELTMINAEY LESSON. XIX
purely spoken and pronounced), they do not press the lips
quite so close as the English do, which causes it very frequent-
ly to be confounded with the v, although they are distinct
letters, and should be pronounced as in English.
O, when followed by a, o, u, or any consonant, sounds like
/c ; before e and i, it sounds like th in thanks ; as, graclas, lee-
cion, caballero. (See letter Z.)
CH is not a double consonant, but a letter which, although
of a double form, has by itself a particular denomination and
sound ; it is pronounced like ch in chess ; as, chico, chocolate.
Formerly, in words of Hebrew and Greek origin, it had the
sound of k, when the vowel following it was marked with the
circumflex accent ; as, archmigel, chimica : but this practice is
obsolete, and such words are now written arcdngel, quimica.
D is pronounced like the English <7, except when found be-
tween two vowels or at the end of words, when it sounds
softer than the English c?, like th in the article the^ but not like
th lisped, as in thin, as Madric? (like the), not Madrid (like
thin) ; Ustec? (like the), not Ustes; (like thin). This lisped
pronunciation on the d is considered vulgar.
P is always pronounced like the English/, and is now used
instead of jo/i ; 2^,^, Filosofia, Filadelfia, iustesid of JPhilosophia,
Philadelphia.
G has two distinct sounds : one, before a, o, u, or a conso-
nant, is the same sound as in English go, good', as, gato, gra-
cias : before e and i it has another strong, guttural, aspirated
sound, for which the English has no equivalent, and which
even a very strongly aspirated h, as in the words hot, holy, does
not represent ; as, gente, people ; gesto, gesture ; gigante, giant.
H is never pronounced in the Spanish language ; as, hace,
higo, pronounced as if no such h were there. It is, properly
speaking, only a sign used to mark the etymology of words,
and is now omitted in many words in which it was formerly
used ; as, Crista, Filosofia, Teatro, Pitdgoras, Filadelfia.
XX PEELIMINAEY LESSON.
This letter is always written before the words that begin
by ue and ^6, and here it has a very soft, almost imperceptible,
aspiration ; as, huevo, egg; hueso^ bone; huesped, guest; hierro,
iron ; hielo, ice : but great care must be taken not to pronounce
it too strong, as the lower classes of certain provinces do, pro-
nouncing juevo, or guevo ; jueso, or giieso, which is considered
vulgar.
J has always an aspirated guttural sound, like that which
the g has before e and *, and is written before the vowels a, o,
M, instead of the letter ic, which formerly represented the same
aspirated sound ; as, Alejandro^ Alexander ; Don Quijote, Don
Quixote.
li always sounds as in English.
LL is, like the cA, a single letter, although of double form,
which therefore cannot be divided at the end of a line. It has
a liquid sound, resembling that of the English U in William,
brilliant; as, Guillermo, hrillante.
M, N, and P have the English sound.
N is always pronounced like ni in the English word pinion.
Q is pronounced like the English k before W6 and ui, in
which combination alone it is now used ; in all other positions
it has been replaced by c ; as, cuando, cama, comer, quien, qiierer,
R, when single, is sounded soft, as in English ; as, querido,
oro: and when double, or at the beginning of a word, and
when it comes after /, w, or 5, or in compound words, in which
the second begins by r, it is pronounced with a very strong
rolling sound ; as, reloj\ malrotar, enriquecer, Israel, prerogati-
va, maniroto, cariredondo, &c.
S is pronounced like the English 8 in say\ as, sahio, -^jise;
solo, alone ; senor, sir.
T is pronounced as in English.
V has the sound of the English v. (See letter B.)
PRELIMINAEY LESSON. XXI
X has the sound of the x in the English word tax\ as,
exdmen^ extrangero. It no longer represents its former guttu-'
ral sound, as has been observed. (See letter J.) Some replace
it by the letter «, when it comes before a consonant, and write
estrangero instead of extrangero. The grammar of the Span-
ish Academy does not authorize this practice.
Y is a consonant letter, but use makes it serve as a
vowel when it stands alone, used as a copulative conjunction
(meaning and) ; it is also used instead of the vowel ^, in the
combinations «^, ei^ ui at the end of a word ; as, verdegag, reg,
leg, convog, mug.
When used in its proper place, that is to say, as a conso-
nant, it has the same sound in Spanish as in the English words
goung, gear.
Z has always the sound of th, as heard in thank, hath.
SYL.L.ABLES.
Such syllables only will be noted here as may be subject
to doubt as to the pronunciation and orthography.
ca,
kah.
que,
Tcay.
qui,
lee.
CO,
ho.
cu,
koo.
za,
thah.
ce,
thay.
ci,
thee.
zo,
tho.
zu,
tlioo.
az,
ath.
ez,
aith.
iz,
eeth.
oz,
oth.
uz,
ooth.
S^
gue,
g"i,
go,
g^»
gah.
gay.
ghee.
go.
goo.
ja,
hah.
ge,
My.
hee.
jo,
U.
J",
hoo.
ya,
ye.
yi.
yo.
yii.
This sound cannot be
properly repre8eBt*^-d
in English,
(See letter T).
cha,
tchah.
che,
tchay.
Chi,
tehee.
cho,
tcho.
chu,
tchoo.
XXll PEELIMINAEY LESSON,
Ua,
Ue,
)
m,
Uo,
Un,
lyah.
lyay.
lyee.
ly'o.
lyoo.
na,
fie,
>
fii,
DO,
flu,
nydh.
nyai.
7iy«.
nyO,
nyoo.
cua,
cue,
cui,
cuo,
Tcwah
kway.
ifct^^.
hwo.
gua,
giie,
gtli,
gao,
gwah.
gway.
DIP]
P'MJ^.
gwo»
HTHOXGS.
ai,
as in
dabais,
dah'-hah-eess.
Yon gave.
ay,
(I
hay,
ah'-e.
There is.
au,
u
pawsa,
pah'-oo-sa.
Pause.
ei,
a
veis,
vai'-eess.
You see.
ey.
u
%,
lai'-e.
Law.
ea,
u
linea,
U'-nai-a.
Line.
eo,
ii
virgfneo,
teer-he' -nai-o.
Virginal.
eu,
i(
dewda,
dai'-oo-da.
Debt.
ia,
i(
gracia,
grah'-the-a.
Grace.
ie,
((
cielo,
the-ai'-lo.
Heaven.
io,
(1.
precio,
prai'-the-o.
Price.
iu,
ik
ciwdad,
the-oo-dath
.',
Citj.
oe,
u
h6r6>^,
ai'-ro-ai.
Hero.
oi,
u
sois,
8o'-ee88.
You are.
oy,
u
Yoy,
To-e.
I go.
ua,
u
{rsigua,
frati-gwa.
Forge.
ue,
il
dwefio,
doo-ain'-yo
Owner.
ui,
a
rwido,
roo-e'-do.
Noise.
«y,
((
mwi/,
moo'-e.
Very.
uo,
((
ard?/o,
TRII
ar'-doo-o.
\,
Ai-duous.
•HTHOIVOS
iai.
1
as in
L prcc?Vig, prai-t?ie-ah'-ee98.
H
((
vacms, mh-the-ai'-eess.
uaU
i(
BRnti^itais, mn
-fe-fpraTi' -eess.
vny,
(t
Tarnpvny, pal
i-raTi-girah
'-f.
uei,
i(
averigwtfts, n^-
mi-r^-gwai-eeM,
twy,
u
bw^y,
hwai-i.
DE TOEI^OS^S
SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSOISr I.
REGULAR YERBS.— First Conjugation,
Eabl-ax, | To speak.
INDICATIVE PEESENT.
Yo habl-0.
I speak.
Tti habl-as.
Thou speakest.
El or ella habl-a.
He or she speaks.
Usted (Y.) habl-a.
You speak.
Nosotros, or ) , , ,
Nosotras, [taW-amos.
"We speak.
Yosotros, or ) ,, .
Yosotras, [ ^^^^■^^^•
You speak.
Ellos, or ellas, habl-an.
They speak.
Ustedes (Yds.) habl-an.
You speak.
Si (adverb).
Yes.
No "
No, or not
Sefior.
Sir.
COMPO
3ITI0N.
iHablaV.?
Do you speak ?
Si, aenor, yo hablo.
Yes, sir, I speak.
i Hablan Yds. ?
1
Do you soeak ?
LESSON I,
No, senor, ellas hablan.
^ Hablais vosotras ?
No, senor, ellos hablan.
I Habla elk ?
No, senor, ella no habla.
i Hablas tu ?
No, senor, ^1 habla.
i Habla V. ?
Si, senor, hablo.
I Hablan ellas ?
No, senor, no hablan.
6 Hablamos nosotros ?
Si, senor, hablamos.
I Hablais vosotras ?
Nosotras no hablamos.
No, sir, they speak.
Do you speak ?
No, sir, they speak.
Does she speak ?
No, sir, she does not speak.
Dost thou speak ?
No, sir, he speaks.
Do you speak ?
Yes, sir, I speak.
Do they speak ?
No, sir, they do not speak.
Do we speak ?
Yes, sir, we speak.
Do you speak ?
We do not speak.
EXPLANATION.
1. Regular Veebs. — All the verbs of the Spanish language
have their endings, in the infinitive mood, either in ar, er, or
ir; hence their classification in three conjugations: 1st, those
ending in ar; 2d, those ending in er; and 3d, in ir; as, habl-ar,
aprend-er^ escrib-ir.
2. Roots. — The letters before the terminations «r, er, iV, in
the preceding verbs, are hahl^ aprend, escrlb, and are called the
roots.
3. Terminations. — All regular verbs of the^r^f conjugation
vary the endings in their respective tenses, so as to correspond
with those of the A^erb hahl-ar; all those of the second conjuga-
tion correspond to the terminations of ap)'e7id-er ; and all those
of the third correspond to escrib-ir.
Consequently, when the student has learned how to conju-
gate one of the regular verbs of each conjugation, lie can con*
jugate all the regular verbs of the Spanish language (about
8,000). For this reason we recommend the scholars to devote
|;beir attention, in the Jirst place, to committing to memory the
different moods and tenses of these three model verbs. They
will be found complete at the end of the book.
The terminations of the verbs being diffiirent for each per-
son, as well in the plural as in the singular number, the nomina-
tive pronouns are ordinarily dispensed with, and are only used
LESSON I. 3
i
to give emphasis ; except the pronoun ZTsted^ which must
always be expressed. — Usted, meaning You, is a contraction
from vtcestra merced. Your Honor ; and, being a title, its omis-
sion would be considered impolite.
4. You. — In addressing an individual in Spanish, the third
person is used with the pronoun Usted: as, Usted hahla, you
speak ; the second person is employed only in speaking to rela-
tives or intimate friends.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Hablan ellas? Si, sefior, ellas hablan.
2. I Hablais vosotros ? No, sefior ; ellos hablan.
3. I Hablamos nosotras ? NTo, sefior ; ella habla.
4. I Hablais vosotros ? No, sefior ; ^1 habla.
5. I Habla ella ? Si, sefior, habla.
6. 2 Habla 61? No, sefior, no habla.
7. ^Hablas tii? Si, sefior, yo hablo.
8. ^Hablais vosotras? Si, sefior, nosotras hablamos.
9. I Hablo yo ? Si, sefior, Y. habla.
10. ^ Habla 61? No, sefior, no habla.
11. ^No hablan ellos? Si, sefior, ellos hablan.
12. I Habla Y . ? No, sefior, yo no hablo.
13. ^No habla Y.? No, sefior, yo no hablo.
14. ^No hablan ellas? Si, sefior, hablan.
15. I No hablais vosotras ? No, sefior, nosotras no hablamos.
EXCERCISE.
1. Do you speak? I speak.
2. Do they speak ? Yes, sir, they speak.
3. Dost thou speak? No, sir, he speaks.
4. Do you speak ? No, sir, we do not speak.
5. Dost thou speak ? No, sir, I do not speak.
6. Does he not speak ? Yes, sir, he speaks.
v. Do you not speak ? No, sir, we do not speak.
8. Does she not speak ? No, sir, she does not speak.
9. Do we not speak ? Yes, sir, we speak.
10. Do they {fern.) not speak? No, sir, they {fern.) do not speak.
11. Do we {fern.) not speak? Yes, sir, we {fern.) speak.
12. Do you speak? No, sir, I do not speak; they {fem.) speak.
LESSON II,
LESSON II.
MASOTTLnfE NOrNS.
FEMININE NOUNS.
Sefior (Sr.).
Oaballero.
Sefiorito.
Don. (Dn.jOr
Sir, Mr., or
Gentleman,
Young geni
D.). Mr., Esq.
Emanuel.
Lord.
Sir.
ieman.
Sefiora (Sra.). Madam, or Mrs.
Lady, or My Lady.
Sefiorita (Srita). Miss, or younglady.
Dofia (Da.) Mrs.
Manuel.
Espafiol.
Ingl6s.
Frances.
Spanish.
English.
French.
Luisa. Louisa.
Aleman.
German.
COMPO
3ITI0N.
Sefiorita, ^ habla Y. espanol ?
Sf, senor, bablo espanol.
Luisa, ^ hablas frances 1
No, senor, no hablo frances.
6 Hablan Vds. ingl6s ?
Hablamos ingles.
l Hablan alios, 6 ellas, frances ?
Sefiora, i habla V. espanol ?
Don Manuel, ^ habla V. aleraan?
Caballero, i habla V. espanol ?
Sefiorita Luisa, i habla V. frances ?
Do you speak Spanish, Miss ?
Yes, sir, I speak Spanish.
Louisa, dost thou speak French ?
No, sir, I do not speak French.
Do you speak English ?
We speak English.
Do they speak French ?
Madam, do you speak Spanish ?
Mr. Emanuel, do you speak German ?
Sir, do you speak Spanish ?
Miss Louisa, do you speak French?
EXPLANATION.
B. SeS^or. — ^This word, used alone, i. e., in the vocative case,
implies inferiority on the part of the speaker, and answers to
the word Xorc? in English. It is used in addressing God, or
the King ; or by servants when speaking to their masters.
With an equal, the proper term is caballero, gentleman ; never-
theless, Sefior may also be used among equals : in the affirma-
tive, Si, sefior, or in the negative, no, sefior, in which cases it
means sir ; or together with the name of the person ; as, Sefior
Kemp, which means Mr. Kemp.
Sefiora, Sefiorita. — In addressing ladies, the word Sefiora,
Madam, and Sefiorita, Young Lady, or Miss, mny bo used
LESSON II. 6
alone; as, Senora^ or Senmnta, ^hahla V. espanolf Madam,
or Young Lady, or Miss, do you speak Spanish ?
Senorito, like Senoi\ implies inferiority on the part of the
speaker, for which reason it is seldom used, except by servants.
6. Don, Mr., applies to gentlemen, and Dona^ Mrs., to la-
dies. These terms are only used in conjunction with the Christ-
ian names ; as, Don Manuel^ Dona Luisa^ and, still more re-
spectfully, Senor Don Manuel^ Senora Dona Duisa. This
title, conferred, in old times, only upon members of noble
families, is now used in addressing all persons, except those
of very humble station, and is written in abbreviation thus,
Dn., Da.
7. The negative no^ is always placed immediately before
the verb.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Habla y. espafiol? Hablo espafiol.
2. Luisa, ^hablas frances? Hablo frances.
3. I Habla Manuel ingles ? Habla ingles.
4. Caballero, ^ habla V. aleman? Si, sefior, hablo aleman.
5. I Hablan Vds. frances ? Hablamos frances.
6. I Hablan eUos ingI6s? No, sefior, no hablan ingles,
7. I Hablan eUas espafiol ? No, sefior, no hablan espafiol.
8. ^ Habla Luisa frances? No, sefior, no habla frances; ella habla
espafiol.
9. I No habla Manuel aleman ? No, sefior, no habla aleman ; 61 Labia
ingles.
10. I Habla Y. espafiol ? No, sefior, no hablo espafiol.
H. ^ Habla Manuel espafiol ? Si, sefior, 61 habla espafiol.
12. Don Manuel, i habla Y. frances ? No, sefior, no hablo frances.
13. Sefiora Da. Luisa, ^ habla Y. espafiol? No, sefior ; hablo ingles.
14. Sefiorita Da. Luisa, ^ habla Y. frances? Yo hablo frances.
i5. Caballero, i habla Y. aleman ? No, sefiorita, hablo espafiol.
EXERCISE.
1. Do they speak French? They speak French.
2. Do you speak English ? "We speak English.
3. Do they speak Spanish ? No, madam, they do not speak Spanish.
4. Sir, do you speak German ? Yes, madam, I speak Gennan.
5. Does Emanuel speak French? No, sir; he speaks English.
6
LESSON III.
6. Do you speak Spanish ? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish.
7. Does not Louisa speak German ? No, sir, she does not speak Ger-
man ; she speaks French.
8. Emanuel, dost thou speak EngUsh ? I speak English.
9. Does Louisa speak Spanish ? Yes, sir, she speaks Spanish.
10. Do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak English.
11. Sir, do you speak French? No, sir.
12. Miss Louisa, do you speak Spanish ? Yes, madam.
13. (Don) Emanuel, do you speak English? Yes, sir, I speak Eng-
lish.
14. Do we speak Spanish? We do not speak Spanish; we speak
French.
LESSON III
Eatudi-Qi.
To study.
Estudi-o.
I study.
Estudi-as.
Thou studiest.
Estudi-a.
lie studies.
Estudi-amcs.
We study.
Estudi-aia.
You study.
Estudi-an.
They study.
El {masc. sing.),^
/ .
The.
Y or 6. (i ' ^.C
.)M**-f*'^
z .
And.
Qu6 {interrogative pronoun).
What or which.
Pero, sino.^, c
But.
Bien {adverl).
WeU.
Mai "
Badly.
(
ADJECTIVES.
Espanol.
Spaniard.
Ingles.
Englishman.
Frances.
Frenchman.
Aleman.
German.
Americano.
American.
MASCULINE NOUNS.
FEMININE NOUNS.
aXv
Alejandro. Alexander.
I Margarita. Margaret.
LESSON m,
COMPOSITION.
I Estudia V. espanol ?
No, senor, el Frances estudia espanol ;
pero yo estudio ingles.
i Qu6 estudia el Americano ?
Estudia espanol y frances.
Alejandro, ^ estudias frances y aleman ?
No, senor, estudio espanol e ingles.
Manuel no estudia sino frances.
I Qu6 hablan ellos sino espanol ?
I Habla bien ingles el Espanol ?
No, senor, el habla el ingles mal, pero
habla bien el espanol.
Do you study Spanish ?
No, sir, the Frenchman studies Spanish ;
but I study English.
What does the American study ?
He studies Spanish and French.
Alexander, do you study French and
German ?
No, sir, I study Spanish and English.
Emanuel studies but (only) French.
What do they speak but Spanish ?
Does the Spaniard speak English well ?
No, sir, he speaks English badly, but
speaks Spanish well.
EXPLANATION.
8. Y. — The conjunction y is changed into ^ when the fol-
lowing word begins with i or A^; as, espanol 'e ingles^ Spanish
and English ; algodon 'e hilo^ cotton and thread.
9. Que, interrogative pronoun, is written with an accent,
to distinguish it from que, relative pronoun, or conjunction.
10. Sino. — When we translate hut into Spanish, we must
first ascertain its meaning; because this conjunction is used in
English to express many very different things. In Spanish it
is translated sino, when it is used in antithesis, that is, when it
means except; and also after an interrogation, or a negation.
The verb is not repeated with this conjunction ; as, £l no habla
sino ingles. He speaks but (only) English. ^ Que habla sino
espanol ? What (else) does he speak but Spanish ?
11. Pero is used when it is not preceded by a negative,
and the verb is repeated ; as, hahlo espanol, pero no hablo
frances. I speak Spanish, but do not speak French.
N. B. — We will see hereafter that but, according to its dif-
ferent meanings in English, must bo translated by different
words in Spanish.
12. We have again introduced the words espanol, ingVes,
frances, and aleman into this lesson, because, while they were
given before as substantives, they are now employed as adjec-
tives. The pupil will observe that, in Spanish, as in English,
some words are, at different times, different parts of speech ; as,
8 LESSON III.
El Espanol habla Men frances. The Spaniard speaks French
well. Here the word Espanol is used as an adjective,
meaning Spaniard-^ and the word frances as a substantive,
meaning the French language \ hien is employed as an ad-
verb, meaning well, and it will appear hereafter as a substan-
tive, meaning good. Consequently, the learner, before trans'
lating a word, must first ascertain the part of speech to whict
it belongs.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. J Habla espafiol Margarita? Margarita no habla espailol, pero
habla ingles.
2. I Habla V. espailol ? No, seflor, hablo frances y aleman.
3. Alejandro, i hablas ingles ? Si, sefior, hablo ingles.
4. I Hablan Vds. espailol ? Ilablamos espailol 6 ingles.
. 5. I Qu6 hablan ellos ? Hablan aleman.
6. Oaballero, i estudia V. espafiol ? Si, sefior, estudio espafiol 6 in-
gles.
7. I Qu6 estudia el Aleman ? Estudia espafiol.
8. jEstudian Vds. espafiol? Estudiamos frances y aleman.
9. I Habla bien Luisa el ingl6s ? Habla bien espafiol 6 ingles.
10. ^ Habla bien Manuel el aleman? No, sefior, habla mal el aleman,
pero habla bien el frances.
11. ^ Habla bien ingles el Americano? Habla bien ingles, pero habla
mal el espafiol.
12. Sefiora, j estudia V. frances? No, sefior, estudio espafiol.
13. ^ Que estudia Alejandro ? El no estudia sino frances.
14. I Qu6 hablan ellos sino espafiol ? EUos hablan frances.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you study German? We study French and Spanish.
2. Does Alexander speak Spanish ? Alexander does not speak Span-
ish, but he speaks English.
3. Margaret, do you speak French ? No, sir, I speak German and
Spanish.
4. ^Vhat do they speak ? They speak Spanish and German, but do
not speak French.
6. Do you speak Spanish? No, sir, I do not speak Spanish, but I
speak English.
6. Does Louisa speak French well? She speaks French badly, but
speaks German well.
LESSON" IV
9
7. "What do you study? We study Spanish, and Alexander studies
French.
8. What does the German study ? He studies Spanish.
9. Does he study well ? No, madam, he studies badly.
- 10. Do you speak Spanish, madam? JSTo, sir, I do not speak Spanish,
but I speak English and German.
11. Does the Frenchman speak English well? No, madam, he speaks
English badly, but the Spaniard speaks English well.
12. What does the German study ? He studies English, and the Eng-
lishman studies German.
13. What does Alexander study? He studies French only.
^ 14. What do they speak but Spanish ?
What else do they speak but Spanish '
y
]r They speak
French.
LESSON IV.
Cora'pT-2X
To buy.
Compr-o.
I buy.
Oompr-as.
Thou buyest.
Compr-a.
He buys.
Compr-amos.
We bay.
Compr-ais.
You buy.
Compr-an.
They buy.
Busc-an
To look Tor, to seek.
A.
To.
De.
Of, or from.
Al.
To the.
Del.
Of the, or jfrom the.
Tin irriasc, sing.).
A, or an.
Libro.
Book.
Cuaderno.
Copy-book.
Papel.;
Paper.
Madera. Wood.
CabaJIo.
Horse.
Tintero.
Inkstand.
COMPO
SITION.
i Qud compra Y. ?
What do you buy ?
Compro un libro.
I buy a book.
10 LESSON IV
I Compran Vds. papel ?
^No, senor, no compramos papel,
compramos un cuademo.
Busco al Americano.
^1 busca el libro.
El caballo del Frances.
El tintero de madera.
Do you buy paper ?
No, sir, we do not buy paper, we buy
a copy-book.
I look for the American.
He looks for the book.
The Frenchman's horse.
The wooden inkstand.
EXPLANATION.
13. A. — The preposition d, to. Active verbs govern their
objectives with the aid of the preposition d, if that objective be
a person ; as, JBusco al Americano^ I look for the American ;
Busco el papel, I look for the paper.
14. De. — The preposition de, of, ov from, is used to ex-
press possession, being always placed before the possessor; as,
^l caballo del Frances: The Frenchman's horse. It is also
used to denote the material of which any thing consists, or is
made ; as, El tintero de madera, The wooden inkstand.
15. El. — The article el, the, is used to determine a noun
masculine singular ; as, el libro, the book.
N", B. — When the article el comes after the preposition d
(to), or de (of, or from), the e is suppressed, and the two words
compounded into one ; thus, al, del, instead of d el, de eL
16. Un. — Th« indefinite pronoun un is used before mascu-
line nouns ; as, un ingles, an Englishman ; un caballo, a horse.
N. B. — Uho is only used as a numeral adjective.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jQu6 compra el Frances? Compra el caballo del Ingl6a
2. I Qu6 comprais vosotras ? Compramos un cuademo.
3. I Qu6 compra Y. ? Compro un libro.
4. I Compran Yds. un cuademo ? No, sefior, compramos un tintero
de madera.
6. I Qu6 buscas tti ? Busco un libro espaflol.
6. I Qu6 buscais vosotros ? Nosotros buscamos un tintero.
7. ^Qu6 buscan ellas? Buscan el papel.
8. Alejandro, j buscas el papel? No, sefior, busco el cuademo.
9. ^Estudia Margarita ingl6s? No, sefior, estudia francos.
LESSON IV. 11
10. I Qu6 estudia cl Americano ? Estudia espatiol.
11. gEstudian Vds. frances? No, sefior, estudiamos ingl^a.
12. ^Qu6 estudia ella? Estudia aleman.
13. ^Que compra V. ? Corapro el caballo del Espafiol.
14. gQu6 compran ellos? Compran un tintero de madera.
15. ^Buscais vosotros al Aleman? No, seiior, buscamos al Frances.
16. ^Ilablais vosotros aleman? Si, senor, hablamos aleman.
IT. ^Hablan ellas espafiol? No, senor, hablan frances.
18. ^Que estudia V. ? Estudio ingles y espafiol.
19. ^Compra ella un libro? Si, sefior, compra un libro.
20. gBusca 61 al Frances? No, sefior, busca al Aleman.
21. ^ Que habla el Americano ? Habla espafiol.
22. Manuel i qu6 estudias tti ? Estudio aleman.
23. I Que compran ellos ? Compran un caballo.
24. I Que buscan Vds. ? Buscamos el libro espafiol.
EXERCISE.
1. "What do they look for? They look for an inkstand.
2. What does she look for ? She looks for a book.
3. Do you look for a copy-book? Yes, sir, we (fern.) look for a
copy-book.
4. Do they (Jem.) buy a wooden inkstand? Yes, sir, they buy a
wooden inkstand.
5. What do you buy ? We buy the Frenchman's horse.
6. Do you buy paper? No, sir, I buy a book.
v. Do you buy a copy-book ? Yes, sir, I buy a copy-book.
- 8. What does the Frenchman study? He studies German,
9. Do you study Spanish ? No, sir, I study French.
10. What does she study ? She studies English.
11. What do they (fern.) study? They study Spanish.
12. Do you speak French ? Yes, sir, I speak French.
13. Does she speak English ? No, sir, she speaks German.
14. Do you speak German ? No, sir, we (fern.) speak English.
15. Do you look for the Frenchman? Yes, sir, I look for the French-
man.
16. Do you look for paper? No, sir, I look for a copy-book.
17. What do they look for? They look for a book.
18. Do you look for the German? Yes, sir, we (fern.) look for the
German.
19. Do you speak French? Yes, sir, I speak French.
20. What does Margaret speak ? She speaks English.
12
LESSON V.
21. What do they buy? They buy a wooden inkstand.
22. What dost thou look for? I look for a horse.
23. What do you study ? We {fern.) study Spanish,
24. What do you speak ? I speak English.
LESSON V.
Necesitar, , ^
Necesit-o. -t/uu/-"^-^^
Necesit-as.
Necesit-a.
-M-
To need, or to be in want o£
I need.
Thou needest.
He needs.
Necesit-amos.
Necesit-ais.
Necesit-an.
Mi.
Su.
Su {n) de Y., or
El {n) de V.
We need.
You need.
They need.
My.
His, her, its, their.
Your.
GENDER.
El papa.
El abogado.
El comerciante.
El lacre.
El polio.
El algodon.
..^Eljabon.
,n^ El patiuelo.
- (/t« El zapatero.
The papa.
The lawyer.
The merchant.
The sealing-wax.
The chicken.
The cotton.
The soap.
The handkerchief.
The shoemaker.
La mamd.
La pluma.
La tinta.
La gramatica.
La gallina.
La seda.
La lavandera.
La camisa.
COMPOSITION.
The mamma.
The pen.
The ink.
The grammar^ ,
The hen. Q^ ~y^ '^i^
The sUk. ^ ^
The washerwoman. .
The shirt, fi^ -o^.f^ux.
I Necesita el abogado la pluma ?
Sf, senor, necesita la pluma y el tintero.
i Qu6 necesita comprar la lavandera ?
Necesita comprar jabon.
i Necesita cl comerciante mi algodon?
Does the lawyer want the pen ?
Yes, sir, he wants the pen and the ink-
stand.
What does the washerwoman want to
buy?
She wants to buy soap.
Does the merchant want my cotton ?
LESSON V
13
Necesita comprar el algodon de V. y
la seda del Frances.
6 Necesita V. su pafiuelo de algodon ?
No, senora, necesito su pafiuelo de seda
deV.
i Que necesitan Yds. ?
Necesitamos un polio y una gallina.
He wants to buy your cotton, and the
Frenchman's silk.
Do you want your cotton handkerchief?
No, madam, I want your silk handker-
chief.
What do you want ?
We want a chicken and a hen.
EXPLANATION.
1 7. Gender. — In Spanish all nouns are either masculine or
feminine ; the neuter gender is only applied to those things so
indefinitely used that their gender cannot be discovered.
The gender of nouns may be ascertained either by their
signification or their termination.
Nouns which signify males, or which denote dignities or
professions, &c., applicable to men, are masculine; and those
which signify females, or professions, &c,, applicable to women,
are feminine, without regard to their terminations: so that,
hombre, man ; caballero, gentleman ; polio, chicken ; zapatero,
shoemaker; ahogado, lawyer, are masculine; and mitjer, wo-
man ; senora, lady ; gallina, hen ; lavandera, washerwoman,
are feminine.
Nounds ending in a, d, or ion, are generally feminine, and
those ending in other letters are masculine ; as.
't
Papel.
Tintero.
:^^'Billete.
Paper.
Inkstand.
Billet.
Leccion.
Lesson.
Pluma.
Pen.
Ciudad.
City.
N". B, — Una {indefinite article) is used before feminine nouns.
To facilitate the pupils in the distinction of gender, the left-
hand side, in the vocabulary, is reserved for masculine, the
right for feminine nouns,
18. When your is preceded by you, it is sometimes trans-
lated by Su ; otherwise, it is generally rendered by el de V.,
or su de V.': as.
V. necesita su carta.
/ Que necesita el papd de V. ?
Necesita su libro de V.
You need your letter.
What does your father need ?
He needs your book.
14 LESSONV.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jNecesita V. mi gramutica? No, sefior, no necesito sa gram^tica
deV.
2. I Necesita ella el pafiuclo de seda? Si, sefior, ella necesita el pafiuelo
de seda.
3. I Necesita Y. comprar un libro ? Necesito comprar un cuaderno.
4. ^ Necesitan ellas el lacre ? No, sefior, necesitan el pafiuelo de al-
godon.
6. I Que necesita comprar el abogado ? Necesita comprar una pluma.
6. ^Qu6 necesita comprar la lavandera? Necesita comprar jabon.
7. I Busca V. su pafiuelo ? Si, sefior, busco mi pafiuelo.
8. I Busca V. el cuaderno de Manuel ? No, sefior, busco el cuaderno
deV.
9. I Habla V. bien el aleraan ? No, sefiorita, hablo mal el aleman.
10. ^Estudian Vds. frances? No, sefior, estudiamos espafiol.
11. ^Compra V. un caballo ingles? Si, sefior, compro un caballo
ingl6s.
12. ^ Qu6 compran ellos ? Compran una pluma j tinta,
13. ^Qu6 comprais vosotras? Nosotras compraraos un pafiuelo.de
beda.
14. ^Qu6 compra la lavandera? Compra jabon.
15. I Busca V. k mi abogado ? Si, sefior, busco al abogado de V.
16. ^ Compra la lavandera un polio ? Compra una gallina.
17. i Compra jabon el comerciante? No, sefior, el comerciante com-
pra algodon.
18. I Buscan ellas el pafiuelo de V. ? Buscan el pafiuelo de V.
19. ^ Necesita V. hablar al abogado? Si, sefiora, necesito hablar al
abogado.
20. I Necesita V. comprar un libro ? No, sefior, necesito comprar una
pluma y papel.
21. J Necesita V. estudiar ingles? Si, sefior, necesito estndiar ingles.
22. I Qu6 necesitais vosotras ? Necesitamos comprar lacre.
23. ^Necesita V. hablar al Frances? No, sefior, necesito hablar al
Aleman.
24. I Qu6 necesita Y. ? Necesito un pafiuelo de algodon.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you need ? I need a book and paper.
2. Wbat does she need ? She needs your handkerchief.
3. Do you need a horse ? Yes, sir, I need an English horse.
4. What do you need ? I need soap.
LESSON VI.
15
5. Does the American need the Spanish book ? Yes, sir, he needs the
Spanish book.
6. Do thej need a lawyer ? Yes, sir, they need a lawyer.
7. Do you buy a silk handkerchief? No, sir, we {fem.) buy a cot-
ton handkerchief.
8. Do you look for the Frenchman's horse ? Ko, sir, I look for the
Enghshman's horse.
9. Dost thou study German ? No, sir, I study English.
10. "What does the merchant buy ? He buys cotton.
11. What does the washerwoman buy ? She buys a hen and a chickei?
13. Does the lawyer buy a book ? No, sir, he buys paper.
13. Do they {fem,) speak well? No, sir, they speak badly.
14. Do you speak French, sir ? No, sir, I speak English.
15. Do yoH study much {muclio) ? No, sir, we study very Uttle {poco).
16. Do you study fast {aprisa) ? No, sir, I study slowly (despacio).
17. Do you buy cotton from the merchant? No, sir, I buy silk from
your brother (hermano).
18. What does your papa need ? He needs the lawyer's book.
19. What are they looking tor ? They are looking for paper.
20. Do you need a copy-book? No, sir, I need a book.
21. Do you study Spanish ? Yes, madam, I study Spanish.
22. Do you need paper and pen ? Yes, sir, I need paper and pen.
23. What do they need ? They need a silk handkerchief,
24. What do you need ? I need an Enghsh horse.
A"
LESSON VI.
Aprend-er,
Aprend-o.
Aprend-es.
Aprend-e.
Aprend-emos.
Aprend-eis.
Aprend-en.
To leam.
I learn.
Thou leamest.
He learns.
We learn.
You leam.
They leam.
Tender.
To sell.
16
r^
/, i^^vO/C
LESSON VI.
/ —
Muy. 'yvx.ro -J^ Very.
Mucho. Much, a great deal.
Poco. /) , / ^^ Little.
Aprisa. C^-^ j^ f Quickly.
Despacio. cLoa^ ^jdi^ilz- o Slowly.
Estudioso. n
Holgazan. -Hjl -p^ dA^^^^^
Studious.
Idle.
Hombre.
Mucliacho.
Padre. t/
Hijo.-^-^^
Hermano.
Man.
Boy.
Father.
Son.
Brother, n ^
Mujer. '^^^^ - '^^^^^^oraan.
Muchacha. Girl.
Madre. Mother.
Hija. Daughter.
Hermana. Sister.
COMPOSITION.
^ Aprende muy aprisa el muchacho ?
El muchacho estudioso aprende muy
aprisa; pero el muchacho holgazan
aprende muy despacio.
^Aprenden ingl6s su padre y su her-
mano de V. ?
Sf, senor, y mi madre y mi hermana
aprenden frances.
i Aprende mucho la muchacha ?
No, senor, aprende poco.
^Aprenden aprisa su hijo y su hija
deV.?
No, senor, aprenden despacio.
Does the boy learn very fast ?
The studious boy learns very fast ;
the idle one learns very slowly.
but
Do your father and brother learn Eng-
lish?
Yes, sir, and my mother and sister
learn French.
Does the girl learn much ?
No, sir, she learns little.
Do your son and daughter learn fast ?
No, sir, they learn slowly.
EXPLANATION.
19. The teemination of \h^ first person in the present in-
dicative is always o in all the verbs of the Spanish language,
to whatever conjugation they may belong, except six irregular
verbs, as we shall see in future ; so that the only difference be-
tween the termination of the second and first conjugations is
the changing the a into e in the second and third persons
singular, and in all the plural.
20. Muy is generally translated by very or very much ; as
mxcy Men, very well ; muy bueno, very good, &c. ; but it can
LESSON VI. 17
never qualify a verb nor stand alone in discourse ; as, Does
he speak very well ? Yes, very. ^ Habla el 7nuy bien f jSi,
mucho.
21. Many masculine nouns ending in o, change this letter
into a for the feminine ; as,
Hermano.
Brother,
Hennana.
Sister.
/ Hijo.
Son.
Hija.
Daughter.
Muchacho.
Boy.
Muchacha.
Girl.
CONYERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Aprende Y. hien elfrances? No, sefior, aprendo muy mal el
frances.
2. I Aprenden ellas aprisa ? No, seilor, aprenden despacio.
3. I Aprende mucho el muchacho holgazan ? No, seiior, aprende muy
poco.
4. I Aprendeis vosotros aprisa ? Si, seiior, aprisa y bien.
5. g Que vende el hermano de su padre de Y. ? Yende algodon.
6. g Yenden eilas papel ? No, sefior, venden plumas y lacre.
7. I Qu^ vende Margarita ? Yende una gallina.
8. I Yende lacre el comerciante ? No, sefior, vende papel.
9. I Necesita Y. el pafiuelo de su hermana ? No, sefior, necesito el
pafiuelo de su hija de Y.
10. ^Busca su mama de Y. el pafiuelo de seda? No, sefior, husca el
pafiuelo de algodon.
11. ^Qu6 necesita su hija de Y. ? Necesita hablar al hermano de Y.
12. ^ Necesita la muchacha comprar papel ? No, sefiora, necesita com-
prar un cuaderno.
13. g Habla Y. del Frances? No, sefiorita, hablo del Aleman.
14. I Que compra su padre de Y. ? Compra el caballo del hijo del
abogado.
15. I Qu6 busca Y. ? Busco un libro y una pluma.
16. I Qu6 busca la muchacha? Busca el jabon de la hermana de Y.
17. g Aprende mucho el muchacho estudioso? Si, sefior, aprende
mucho.
18. I Aprende Y. su leccion de frances ? No, sefior, aprendo mi lec-
cion de aleman.
19. ^ Habla bien Don Manuel el espafiol? Si, sefior, habla muy bien
el espafiol.
20. ^Estudia Y. gramatica inglesa? No, sefior, estudio gramatica
francesa.
21. I Compra Y. un tiutero y papel ? No compro sino un tintero.
18 LESSON VI.
22. I Busca V. d mi padre ? Si, sefiorita, busco i su padre de V.
23. I Necesita "V . coraprar un tiutero ? No, sefiora, necesito hablar i
mi hermana.
24. ^Necesitamos nosotras aprcnder espafiol? Si, sefior, necesitamos
mucho aprender espafiol.
EXERCLSK
1. Does your sister learn English ? Yes, sir, she learns English,
2. What does your brother learn ? My brother learns Spanish.
3. Do you learn quickly ? No, sir, we learn very slowly.
4. Does the studious boy learn well ? Yes, sir, he learns very welL
5. What does your brother sell ? He sells cotton and silk.
6. Do you sell paper ? No, sir, I sell sealing wax and ink.
7. Do they (fern.) need a French book ? No, sir, they need a copy-
book, a pen, and ink.
8. Do you need the English grammar ? No, sir, I need the Spanish
grammar.
9. Do you want to speak to my father ? Yes, sir, I iTant to speak to
your father.
10. Do you want to speak to my sister's son ? No, sir, I want to
speak to the Frenchman.
11. Does he want to buy a horse ? Yes, sir, he wants to buy a horse.
12. Do you need my book? No, madam, I need youi* wooden ink-
stand.
13. Do you look for the merchant? No, sir, I look for your father.
14. Do they look for papa? No, sir, they look for the lawyer.
15. Do you buy a book ? No, sir, we buy a copy-book and paper.
1 6. Do they study English ? Yes, sir, they study English.
17. Do you study German, sir? No, I study Spanish, madam.
18. Do you speak English well ? No, sir, I speak English badly.
19. Does your sister speak French very well? No, sir, she speaks
very little French. . :> ^i ; /- <
20. What does your father speak ? 'He speaks but (only) English.
21. Does he not speak German ? No, sir, he does not speak German.
22. Does your daughter speak to your sister ? Yes, sir, she speaks to
my sister.
23. Do you learn very quickly ? Yes, sir, I learn very quickly.
24. Do you sell your book ? No, sir, I sell my paper.
LESSON VII
19
LESSON
Le-Q>v. Ji^uu^e*^^^^^^
Le-o.
Le-es.
Le-e.
Le-emos.
Le-eis.
Le-en.
Comer. . JrU ■- ^^^-^yux^LA^'
Beber. 4-CiA^~ 'v-ccU^iJ
MASCULINE ADJECTIVES.
Good, ^^-uatx-^^-^-vu^
Handsome. ^
Ugly. -^c^yL-^O
Little or small.
Grande {rn. &/.)• Large.
Espafiol. Spanish, also Spaniard.
Americano. American.
Bueno.
Hermoso.
Feo.
Pequeno.
Pan.
^ ^fudv-^ Pescado.
^c>u> Queso.
■tJ-y^"^ Vino.
r
,'fc>^ Billete.
Bread.
Fisb.
Cbeese.
Wine.
Billet or note.
VII.
To read.
I read.
Thou readest.
He reads.
We read.
You read.
Tbey read.
To eat, to dine.
To drink.
FEMININE ADJECTIVES.
Bucna. Good. ^ ^
Hermosa. Handsome. (^^--^^^^^-^Ji-w
Fea. Ugly.
Pequciia. Little or small. , ^4
Espafiola. Spanish, cu^i/i -.a,**-*^
Americana. American.
Carne. Meat. , x/ p '
Lecbe. Milk. ^^^- (^4^c^^<y
Agua. Water. coLi- ^aa^^^^
Cerveza. Beer. ti^a^A^ -X^ ^^
Carta. Letter.
COMPOSITION.
\
I Lee V. un billete ?
No, senor, leo una carta.
^ Que come el Espafiol ?
Come buen pescado, pero come njajla
came.
I Beben Vds. vino bueno ?
Bebemos buen vino y buena cerveza.
4 Que compra el Americano ?
Compra un caballo pequeno.
I Habla V. al gran hombre ?
No, sefior, hablo al hombre grande.
4 Que vende la Francesa ?
Vende hermosa seda.
Do you read a note ?
No, sir, I read a letter.
What does the Spaniard eat ?
He eats good fish, but bad meat.
Do you drink good wine ?
We drink good wine and good beer.
What does the American buy ?
He buys a small horse.
Do you speak to the great man ?
No, sir, I speak to the large man.
What does the French woman sell ?
She sells handsome silk.
20 LESSONVII,
EXPLANATION.
22. Adjectives terminating in o, an, or on, form their
feminine termination in a. Those terminating otherwise are
common to both genders ; as,
El muchacho holgazan.
La muchacha holgazana.
El hombre comilon.
La mujer comilona.
El hombre feliz.
La mujer feliz.
La gallina buena.
The idle boy.
The idle girl.
The gluttonous man.
The gluttonous woman.
The happy man.
The happy woman.
The good hen.
Adjectives signifying nationality, and ending in a conso-
nant, take an a to form their feminine terminations ; as,
Spaniard.
Spanish.
English book.
Espanol.
Espanola.
Libro ingles.
Gramatica inglesa.
English grammar.
Those ending in o change this letter into a ; as,
Americano. I American.
Americana. | American.
Adjectives are generally placed after their nouns ; but in
poetry, or in an elevated style, and even in conversation, we
place many before the noun. Reading and practice will form
the ear of the scholar so as to use them properly.
Adjectives used metaphorically, or in a signification differ-
ent from their proper one, are always placed before ; as,
Un gran caballo. | A great horse.
Some adjectives lose their last letter, or syllable^ when pre-
fixed to the singular masculine noun ; as.
Mai muchacho.
Buen libro.
Gran caballo.
Bad boy.
Good book.
Great horse, &;c.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Lee Y. nn buen libro? Si, scflor, leo un libro bueno.
2. ^Leemos nosotros bien el ingl6s ? No, seflor, leemos mal el ingl^Si
pero leemos bien el espaflol.
3. I Bebe V. vino ? No, scflor, yo btbo agaa.
LESSON^VII. 21
4. I Qu6 beben ellos ? Beben cerveza.
5. I Comeis vosotros queso j pan ? No, sefior, comemos pescado.
6. I Qu6 comen los Ingleses ? Los Icgleses coraen buena carne.
7. I Que bebe el Espafiol ? Bebe buen vino y cerveza mala.
8. I Qu6 lee la Americana ? Lee mi libro de mi hermana.
9. I Que estudia el hijo pequefio de V. ? Estudia gramatica.
10. g Qu6 necesita la muchacha bermosa ? Necesita un pequeilo pafluelo
le seda.
11. g Necesita Y. un caballo grande? No, sefior, yo no necesito un
caballo grande, sino un gran caballo.
12. I Qu6 estudia la Espafiola ? Estudia ingMs.
13. I Estudia V. la gramatica francesa? No, sefior, estudio la gramd-
tica inglesa.
14. I Come pan la Inglesa ? Si, sefior, come pan y carne.
15. I Qu6 beben Vds. ? Bebemos leche.
16. I Lee V. un libro ingles ? No, sefior, leo un libro frances.
17. I Qu6 lee la Americana ? Lee su leccion.
18. ^ Qu6 vende la Inglesa ? Yende un pafiuelo.
19. gCompra Y. algodon al comerciante americano? Si, sefior, corn-
pro algodon al comerciante americano.
20. I Necesita la Francesa un pafiuelo grande ? No, sefior, necesita un
pafiuelo hermoso.
21. I Que busca el muchacbo ? Busca a su hermana.
22. I Qu6 compra Y. ? Oompro un pafiuelo feo, pero bueno.
23. I Necesita Y. seda ? No, sefior, necesito algodon.
24. I Qu6 lee Y. ? Leo el libro de mi padre.
25. I Que comeis vosotros ? Comemos pan y pescado.
26. ^ Qu6 bebe el Aleman ? Bebe vino y cerveza.
EXERCISE.
1. What do you read ? I read a great book.
2. Do you read English well ? Yes, sir, I read English very well.
3. Does the German drink wine? No, sir, he drinks beer.
4. What do they (fern.) drink ? They drink water.
5. Do you eat meat ? No, sir, I eat fish.
6. What does the Englishman eat ? He eats bread and meat.
7. What does your daughter buy? She buys a silk handkerchief
from the American woman.
8. Does the studious boy buy a book ? Yes, sir, he buys a French
grammar.
9. Does the handsome American woman buy a large book ? No, sir,
Bhe buys a littie book.
22
LESSON VIII
10. Does your mamma want a large handkercWef ? No, sir, slie wants
a handsome handkerchief.
11. Do you need your book ? No, sir, I do not need my book.
12. Do they need a Spanish grammar ? Yes, sir, they need a Spanish
grammar.
13. Does the woman sell bread ? Yes, sir, she sells bread and fish.
14. What do you read ? I read my letter.
15. What docs your brother read ? He reads a note.
16. Does the girl sell soap ? No, sir, she sells milk.
17. Does the lazy boy learn well? No, sir, he learns badly.
18. Do you learn much ? No, sir, I learn little.
19. Do you read Ihe book ? No, sir, I read the letter.
20. Do you buy cheese ? Yes, sir, I buy cheese.
21. Do they buy bread ? No, sir, they buy meat and beer.
22. Do you need a handkerchief? No, sir, I need soap.
23. Do you read your father's letter? No, sir, I read my brother's letter.
24. Does your father buy an English grammar? No, sir, he buys a
French book.
25. Does your brother read my note ? No, sir, he reads my sister's letter.
LESSON VIII,
TniHD COls
'JUGATION.
Escrib-iY. .
To write.
Escrib-o.
I write.
Escrib-es.
Thou writest.
Escrib-e.
He writes.
Escrib-imos.
We write.
Escrib-is.
You write.
Escrib-en.
Recibir. ^caa. - tu£ --^iU^x^
They write.
To receive.
En.
In, into, or at.
Ni.
No, neither, nor.
El {masc, smg.).
La {fern. sing.).
Lo {neuter).
Los {masc. plural).
Las {/em. plural).
The.
LESSON VIII.
23
ADJECTIVES.
Mucho.
Muchos.
Periodicos.
Ejercicio.
^-'A^'O Ejercicios.
^''. ,/Zapatero.
'17^ , y Sombrerero.
9 .
Much.
Many.
Poco.
Pocos.
Little.
Few.
SUBSTANTIVES.
Newspaper.
Newspapers.
Exercise.
Exercises.
Shoemaker.
Hatter.
Leccion.
Lecciones.
Ley.
Leyes.
Plata.
Semana.
Semanas.
/^^^-^^
Lesson.
Lessons
Law.
Laws.
Silver.
Week./^^^^- "^
Weeks.
COMPOSITION.
i Escribe Y. las lecciones 6 los ejerci-
cios ?
No escribo ni las lecciones ni los ejerci-
cios.
^ Escriben las senoritas muchos billetes ?
Ellas escriben muchos.
I Recibe el comerciante plata u oro ?
JEl recibe oro y plata.
I Escribe V. la carta en ingles ?
SI, senor, escribo la carta en ingles.
Do you write tlie lessens or the exer-
cises ?
I write neither the lessons nor the ex-
ercises.
Do the young ladies write many notes ?
They write many.
Does the merchant receive silver or
gold?
He receives gold and silver.
Do you write the letter in English ?
Yes, sir, I write the letter in English.
EXPLANATION.
23. The endings of the third conjugation and those of the
second are the same, except in the first and second persons of
the plural ; in which the e of the second conjugation is changed
into i in the third, as the learner must have observed.
24. The conjunction 6 is changed into '(l when the fol-
lowing word begins with 6 or ho ; as,
Plata u oro. | Silver or gold.
25. Ni. — Neither and nor are rendered by ^^^ ; as,
iSl no necesita ni la came ni el pescado. j He wants neither the meat nor the fish.
26. The plural of nouns is formed by adding an s to
those terminating in a vowel not accented ; as,
Ejercicio. Exercise. | Ejercicios. Exercises. -
r
24
LESSON VIII
And adding es —
1st. To those ending: in an accented vowel; as,
o
Gilliflower.
Gilliflowers.
Lessons.
Laws.
Aleli. Gilliflower. | Alelies.
2d. To those ending in a consonant ; as,
Leccion. Lesson. | Lecciones.
3d. To those ending in y ; as,
Ley. Law. | Leyes.
27. An adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number
and case, and forms the jilural according to the rules laid down
for nouns ; as,
Buen hombre.
Buenos hombres.
Buena mujer.
Buenas mujeres.
28. The article rrvust agree also with the noun to which it
refers, in number, gender and case ; as,
Good man.
Good men.
Good woman.
Good women.
El libro.
Los libros.
La pluma.
Las plumas.
Lo bueno.
The book.
The books.
The pen.
The pens.
What is good.
Feminine nouns beginning with d accented, take the mascu-
line article el in the singular number, instead of the feminine
la, in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two a's ; as,
El alma.
El agua.
El alba.
El hambre.
The soul.
The water.
The dawn of day.
The hunger, &c.
29. The neuter article lo has no plural number, and is
placed only before adjectives used as substantives, in an abso^
lute indeterminate case ; as.
Lo bueno.
Lo malo.
What is good.
What is bad.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^ Escribe Y. 4 sn padre? No, sefior, escribo d mi hermano.
2. I Qu6 escribe V. ? Escribo una carta 4 la muchacha.
LESSON VIII. 25
8. ^Escribe V. muchos billetes? No, sefior, escribo muj pocos.
4. ^Escriben ellos bien los ejercicios? Si, seiior, cUos escriben bien
los ejercicios.
5. I Recibe V. libros ingleses ? No, sefior, recibo libros franceses.
6. I Que reciben ellos ? Reciben plata j oro.
7. e Reciben raucho oro ? No, sefior, reciben muy poco.
8. I Lee V. sus cartas 6 sus billetes ? No leo ni mis cartas, ni mis
billetes ; leo mis ejercicios.
9. I Necesita Y. muchos pafluelos ? No, sefior, necesito muy pocos.
10. ^Estudia V. muchas lecciones? No, sefior, estudio pocas.
11. I Busca V. una pluma? No, sefior, busco una gramatica.
12. I Qu6 busca su hermana de V. ? Busca los ejercicios en ingles.
13. ^Estudia Y. frances 6 aleman? No estudio ni frances, ni aleman ;
estudio espafiol.
14. 2 Necesita Y. mi ejercicio? Si, sefior, necesito sn ejercicio ingles.
15. ^Escribe Y. al comerciante 6 al abogado? No escribo al comer-
ciante, ni al abogado ; escribo d su padre de Y.
16. g Escriben ellas los ejercicios de ingles? No, sefior, escriben los
ejercicios de espafiol.
17. J Recibe Y. muchas cartas de su padre? No, sefior, recibo mur
pocas.
18. ^ Recibo el comerciants mucho algodon ? SI, sefior, recibe mucho.
19. ^ Compra Y. muchos pafiuelos? Si, sefior, compro muchos.
20. I Compra su padre de Y. muchos caballos ? No,
pocos.
21. I Compra Y. la gramatica del muchacho ? No,
cuaderno de la muchacha.
22. ^ Habla mucho el Frances ? No, sefior, habla poco.
23. I Escribe Y. bien el ingles ? No, sefior, escribo mal el ingles, pero
«scribo bien el espafiol.
EXERCISE.
1. Does your brother write English well? Yes, sir, he writes Eng-
lish well.
2. Do you write to my brother ? No, sir, I write to my father.
3. Do you write in English or in Spanish ? I write in English,
4. Do they (/em.) write the lessons or the exercises ? They write
neither the lessons nor the exercises ; they write letters.
5. Do you receive many notes ? No, sir, I receive but few.
6. Do they receive gold ? No, sir, they receive silver.
7. Do you receive many letters from your father ? Yes, sir, I receive
many.
2
26
LESSON IX.
8. Do yon eat fish ? No, sir, I cat bread and cheese.
9. Do the Genuans drink water? No, sir, they drink hcer.
10. Do you read your brother's letter? Xo, sir, I read my sister's
letter.
11. Does the merchant sell French paper? No, sir, he sells English
paper.
12. Does your brother learn German and Englisli? No, sir, he learns
neither German nor English ; he learns Spanish.
13. Do you need silver or gold ? I need neither gold nor silver.
14. Do you look for my father ? No, madam, I look for the lawyer.
15. Do you buy a grammar from the merchant? Yes, sir, I buy a
grammar from theNnerchant.
16. Do they study their lessons well? Yes, sir, they study their les-
sons well.
17. Do you speak much to your sister? Yes, madam, I speak much
to my sister.
18. Do you speak Spanish or English ? I speak English.
19. Do you receive French books? No, sir, I receive English books.
20. Does the merchant receive silver or gold ? lie receives gold and
silver.
21. Do you write your exercises? No, sir, I write my letters.
22. Do you write a letter to your father? No, sir, I write to my
sister.
LESSON
IX.
u^dc^v To live.
Viv-o.
I live.
Viv-es.
Thou livest.
Viv-e.
He lives.
Viv-imos.
"We live.
Yiv-is.
You live.
Viv-en.
They live.
Pwesidir. hyO^ -aI^-oJ^
1
To reside.
Mis {plural).
Sus {plural).
Cuando.
Dondo {without motion).
Adondo {with motion).
My.
Your.
When.
Where.
Campo, pais. Country
LESSON IX.
'jojccL.
Dia.
Dias.
Lapiz.
Lapiccs.
AleKes.
.^ Cortaplumas.
C^3k^ Hotel, fonda.
Day.
Days.
Pencil.
Pencils.
Gilliflower.
GHliflowers.
Penknife.
Hotel.
Dim de la semana.^
Liines.
Martes.
Miercoles.
Jueves.
Vierncs.
Sabado.
Sabados.
Domingo.
Domingos.
Flor.
Florcs.
Casa.
Nneva York.
Francia.
Espafla.
Inglaterra.
Alemania.
Tienda.
Ciudad.
27
Flower.
Flowers.
House, or home.
New York,
France. ^Ca^o^^-
Spain. ^
England, lu^y
Germany. ^ ,
Store. "U-^:*^^^ -^/^^ .
City.
'^"tik^
cO
ia^'A
Days of the week.
Monday.
Tuesday. ' f (I f ^
Wednesday. O-viX '^^ "f^ "'^^
Thursday. ^ctA^-^s^^t^-'-'^^"'''^'-'''^ '
Friday. ,^ _ aJ(A^' ,--)^xA^a.A^
Saturday.
Saturdays.
Sunday.
Sundays.
COMPOSITION.
4 Vive Y. en el campo 6 en la ciudad ?
Vivo en la ciudad.
I En donde residen sus papas de V, ?
Pap4 reside en Francia, y mama en
Nueva York.
I Cuando come V. en casa de sus her-
manos de V. ?
Los domingos, martes y jueves como en
casa de mis hermanos.
^ Y en donde come V. los lunes, mier-
coles, vi ernes y subados ?
Como en casa.
Do you live in the country or in the city ?
I live in the city.
Where do your parents reside ?
Father resides in France, and mother in
New York.
When do you dine at your brothers' ?
On Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays
I dine at my brothers'.
And where do you dine on Mondays,
Wednesdays, Fridays and Saturdays ?
I dine at home.
EXPLANATION.
30. Popc^jpapa; mama, Tnamma; pi^, foot; are exceptions
to the general rule, and form the plural by the addition of s ;
as, papas, papas ; mamds, mammas ; pi^s, feet.
* All of tlie mascullQC gendct.
28 LESSON IX.
31. Kouns which are not monosyllables, and end in 5, the
last syllable not being accented, do not change their termina-
tion in the plural number ; as, Liines, Monday or Mondays ;
Mdrtes, Tuesday or Tuesdays, etc. Words ending in z take C5,
and change the z into c in the plural ; as, Idpiz, Idpices, pencil,
pencils ; juez^jueces, judge, judges.
32. Words which are compounds of two nouns differ so va-
riously that it is not possible to give rules for the formation of
their plurals ; but compounds of a verb and a noun in the singu-
lar number form the plural in the same manner as simple nouns ;
and compound words of a verb and a noun in the plural will be
used the same in both numbers ; as, cortaplumas, penknife, or
penknives.
33. The days of the week always take the article when they
are employed to mark, or express time ; as,
Estudio espanol el lunes y el viernes. | I study Spanish on Monday and Friday.
34. Donde, where (without motion) ; adonde, where (with
motion) ; cuando, when. These adverbs are placed always be-
fore the verb; as,
i, Donde reside V. ? I Where do you reside ?
I Cuando escribe V. ? | When do you write ?
35. Donde, adonde, and cwanJo, when used interrogatively
require an accent; X\\\x% ^ Donde vivef Where does he live?
^ Cudndo lee V, f W^hen do you read ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. J En donde vive V. ? Vivo en Nucva York.
2. I Donde viven sus padres de V. ? Mi padre vive en la ciudad y mi
madre en el campo.
8. I Donde viven sus hcrmanos ? Viven en Francia.
4. ^ Donde come V. los sabados y los domingos? Como en el hotel
de los Franceses.
5. ^y donde come V. los Idncs y los martes? Como en cl hotel
Americano.
6. I D6nde reside V. ? Resido en el campo.
7. i Y d6nde reside su mamd de V. ? Reside en los Estados Unidos.
8. I Cuando ostudia V. sus lecciones de frances ? Los mi^rcoles y loe
Ju6vea.
LESSON IX. 29
9. ^ T qu6 estudia V. los vierncs ? Los viernes estudio una Icccion
dc frances.
10. ^Cuando lee V. los periodicos? Yo Ico los periodicos los do-
mingos.
11. ^ Compran alelies sus herraanas? Si, seilor, ellas compran alelles.
12. ^Estudia V. las leyes de Inglaterra? No, scuor, estudio las de
los Estados Unidos ( United States).
13. ^Aprende bien la mucliacha el ingles? Si, seilor, aprende Men
el ingles.
14. ^Qu6 bebcn los Espafloles y los Alcmanes? Los Espafioles bcben
buen vino, y los Alemanes buena cerveza.
15. I Donde compra el comerciante el algodon? Oompra el algodon on
los Estados Unidos.
16. ^ Y donde vende el oro y la plata ? En Inglaterra.
17. ^Cuando necesita su hermano de V. la gramatica? Mi Lermano
necesita su gramatica el 1 tines.
18. ^En qu6 hotel come V.? Como en cl hotel de Inglaterra.
19. ^Qu6 compra cl comerciante, plata u oro? El comerciante no
compra ni oro ni plata, compra seda.
20. I Que estudia V. ? Estudio los dias de la scmana en ingles.
21. ^Escribe V. a Francia? No, senor, escribo a Inglaterra.
22. ^Qu6 escribe Y.? Escribo los ejercicios de la semana en ingl6s.
23. I Donde reside su hermana do V. ? Reside en el campo.
24. I En qu6 pais vive su papa ? Vive en Alemania.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you live in the country ? No, sir, I live in town.
2. "Where does your sister live? She lives in New York.
3. Where do your parents {padres) live?. They live in France.
4. Where does your brother reside ? He resides in England.
5. Do you not reside in the United States ? No, sir, in Spain.
6. In which country does your mother live ? She lives iji the United
States.
Y. Do you write to your father in Spanish or in English ? I write
in English.
8. Where does the merchant buy the cotton ? He buys the cotton in
England.
9. Which do you sell, silver or gold? I sell gold.
10. Where do you dine on Sundays and Mondays? I dine in the
French hotel.
11. And where on Wednesdays, Fridays and Saturdays? In the
German hotel.
so
LESSON X
12. When do thej study their lesson ? On (los) Tuesdays.
13. Does the lawyer study the laws of England? No, sir, he studies
the laws of the United States. Jicu,- ^I^-^cCcl
14. Whera docs your mother reside ? She resides in Germany.
15. When do you need your grammar ? On Friday.
16. When do your sons study the French lessons? They study the
French lessons on Mondays and Saturdays.
17. Where does the merchant buy the good penknives? In England.
18. What day do you {/em.) receive the newspapers? We receive the
newspapers on Sundays.
19. Does your sister buy gilliflowers? Yes, sir, she buys gilliflowers.
20. Where do you buy your pencils ? In the French store.
21. What do you study ? I study the days of the week in Spanish.
22. Where do your parents reside ? My mother resides in Spain, and
my father in Germany.
23. Where does your sister reside ? She resides in the country.
24. Do you need my books ? Yes, sir, I need your books.
LESSON X.
Tener.
Ten go.
Tienes.
Tiene.
Tenemos.
Tcneis.
Tienen.
To have.
I have.
Thou hast
He has.
We have.
You have.
They have.
Le, los (masc. pi.).
La, las (fcm. pi.).
Lo {neuter).
OBJECTIVE CASE.
It, him, them.
It, her, them.
It, (sometimes) so.
h.
ns'TERROGATITE PRONOUNS.
l Qui^n, qui6nes (pi.) ?
^Cual, cuales (pl.)'i
iQu6?
Do qui6n, de quienes (pi.) ?
Con.
Who?
Which one, which ones?
What, or which?
Whose ?
With.
LESSON X,
Zapato. ShociUL- f^o^-^
Chaleco. Vest. ei^~,&t4 '
Baston. Cane.
Sombrero. Hat.
81
Botas.
Boots.
Casaca.
Coat.
Corbata.
Cravat.
Medias.
Stockings. (yncu^"d&'
COMPOSITION,
i Qxiidn t'lenc mi baston ?
Yo lo tcngo.
i Que corbata tiene V. ?
Tengo la bonita.
^ Tienen dlos mi chaleco ?
No, senor, tienen la corbata de Y.
I De quien liabla V. ?
Ilablo de los Franceses.
I Teneis vosotros casacas ?
Si, seiior, las tenemos.
^ Quien tiene sombreros ?
Los tiane el coraerciante.
I Nocesita V. ami padre ?
Si, SGUor, le necesito,
I Tiene V. mi casaca ?
Si, seuor, la tengo.
I Que bolas tiene V. ?
6 Que tiene V. ?
Who has my cane ?
I have it
"Which cravat have you ?
I have the pretty one.
Have they my waistcoat ?
No, sir, they have your cravat.
Of whom do you speak ?
I speak of the Frenchmen.
Have you coats ?
Yes, sir, we have (them).
Who has hats ?
The merchaut has (them).
Do you neoa my father ?
Yes, sir, I ueed him.
Have you my coat ?
Ye3, sir, I have it
Which boots have vou?
What is the matter with you ?
EXPLANATION.
36. Irregular verbs are those which do not retain in-
tact the radical letters and the terminations designated for
each tense and person.
The verb tener^ to have, is the first of the irregular verba
here introduced ; and, like all the auxiliary verbs, is not in-
cluded in the seven groups in which the irregular Spanish
verbs are classified, on account of their multifarious irregulari-
ties. The auxiliaries require, therefore, to be learned separate-
ly, or each one by itself.
A complete list of the irregular conjugations will be found
at the end of the book.
When the objective case of the third person is the object
of the English verb, it is translated by Ze, los^ for the masculine;
la^ las^ for the feminine ; and lo for the neuter ; as,
El le busca. I He looks for him.
Ella los compra. She buys them.
Ellos lo necesitan. J They want tt
32 LESSONX.
37. Lo and Le. — It must be obsen-cd, however, with regard
to the objective forma le and lo, that their use is very doubtful
in Spanisli, since many correct writers employ the neuter lo,
instead of the masculine le. Consequently, while custom or
general use does not give the preference to either, the learner
may use them according to his own discretion or taste, in the
accusative case, masculine gender; as,
jllanuel tiene un buen iibro y lo (le) I Emanuel has a good book and sells iL
venJe. j
Xo is sometimes employed to avoid the repetition of a
whole or part of a sentence, and then it is equivalent to so, or
it. Of this, however, more will be said when treating of the
regimen of verbs.
38. The intekkogative pronouns quien, cudl, que, de
quien, who, which, what, and whose, do not require the arti-
cle ; as,
i Quien habla ?
(, Cual tengo yo ?
l Que escribe V. ?
l De quien son los caballos ?
Who speaks ?
"Which one have I ?
What do you write ?
Whose are the horses ?
39. When, in a question, the interrogative pronoun is
governed by a preposition, that preposition must also be re-
peated in the answer ; as.
g Con quien vive V. ?
Con mi amigo.
/ De quien es el caballo ?
De mi amigo.
With whom do you live ?
With my friend.
Whose is the horse ?
My friend's.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qu6 tiene V. ? Tengo un hcrmoso baston.
2. I Tienes tu un buen sombrero ? Si, seflor, lo (le) tengo.
3. iQu6 pafiuelo tiene ella? Tiene el de seda.
4. I Cual tiene V. ? Tengo mi pafiuelo.
5. ^Teneis vosotros buenos chalecos? Si, sefior, los tenemos.
C. I De quien hablan ellos ? Ilablan de las Americanas.
7. ^ Tiene V. las corbatas? Si, sefior, Ins tengo.
8. ^Tienen ellos los hermosos pafiuelos <le seda? Si, sefior, los ticnea
9. I Qui6n tiene las medias ? Yo las tengo.
10. I Tieno V. mi cbaleco ? Si, sefior, lo (le) tengo.
LESSON X. 33
11. ^ Quien tiene mi baston ? Su hermano lo (le) tiene.
12. ^ Ilabla V. a su liermana ? Si, sefior.
13. gBusca V. a su liermana? Si, sefiorita, la busco.
14. ^Estudia V. su leccion ? Si, scilor, la estudio.
15. ^Nccesita V. a su papa? Si, sefior, Ic (lo) necesito.
IG. I Que sombrero tiene V. ? Tengo el de V.
17. ^Qu6 botas busca V.? Busco las buenas.
18. 2 Con quien aprcnde Y. cl ingles ? Con un Americano.
19. g A quien busca V. ? Busco al abogado.
20. I Que compra V. ? Compro lapices ingleses.
21. ^ Tiene V. una buena gramatica? Si, sefior, tengo una muy buena.
22. I Tiene Y. muchos libros ? No, sefior, tengo pocos.
23. ^TiencR ellas mucha seda? No, sefior, tienen rauypoca.
24.^ Donde reside Y. ? Eesido en el campo.
25. ^ Donde vive su abogado de Y. ? Yive en la ciudad.
26. I Yivc en Francia su hermano de Y. ? No, sefior, vivo en Espafia.
EXERCISE.
1. Who has the stockings? I have them.
2. What has he ? He has my grammar.
3. Have they my vest? Yes, sir, they have it.
4. Which books have they (/em.) ? They have yours.
5. Of whom do you speak ? I speak of the Erenchmaa.
6. Who has my coat ? They have it.
7. Have you my cravat ? No, sir, I have it not.
8. Have we very good coats ? Yes, sir, we have.
9. Who has the handsome stockings ? They (fern.) have them.
10. Do you speak to the Frenchman? Yes, sir, I speak to the French-
man.
11. Do you need my hat? No, sir, I have my hat.
12. Whom do you look for ? I look for your father.
13. What do you buy ? I buy English books.
14. Which shoes do you buy ? I buy the handsome shoes.
15. Which hats have you ? I have the merchant's hats.
16. With whom do you learn jjJiglish? I learn with an American.
17. Have you good coats? Yjni^sk*, I have good coats.
18. Have they many grammars? Nq^ sir, they have very few.
19. Where do you live ? I live in the country.
20. Does your father reside in France ? No, sir, he resides in England.
21. Does your mother live in Germany? No, sir, she lives in the
Enited States.
2*
S4
LESSON XI
22. Do you buy many books ? No, sir, I buy very few.
23. Who has my handsome boots? I have them.
24. TVliich liat have you? I liave yours.
25. What have you ? I have my stockings.
2d Of whom do you speak ? I speak of your fatlier.
LESSON XI.
Ser.
To be.
Soy.
I am.
Eras.
Thou art.
Es.
He is.
Sera 09.
We arc.
Sois.
You are.
Son.
They are.
'-isk'i
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS,
Alguien. oM - a.~<^^i^^
Algimo. OU^''<i^<r6--^iA^^
'^hOA^^-oLou Nada
Ninguno. /^U!,5^tc-^^»^-^
Algo, alguna cosa. Jut ^z^nji
nmguna cosa.
Todo.
Todos.
Librcro.
Panadero.
Carnicero.
Sastre.
Bookseller.
Baker
Butcher.
^ Tailor.
Some one, somebody, anybody;
any one.
Some, somebody, anybody.
No one, nobody.
None, no one, nobody.
Something, anything.
Nothing, not anything.
All, everything.
Every one, everybody.
Libreria.
Panaderia.
Carniceria.
Sastreria.
Bookstore.
Bakery.
Butcher's shop.
Tailor's shop.
COMPOSITION.
I Son Vds. carnlccros ?
No, scfior, somos panaderos.
I Es V. carnicero ?
No, senor, yo soy sastre.
i Tiene V. algun pan ?
Are you butchers ?
No, sir, we are baker*u
Are you a butcher ?
No, sir, I am a tailor.
Have you some bread f
LESSON XI.
35
No, sefior, no tengo ninguno.
i Tiencn Vds. algo ?
No, sefior, no tenemos nada.
^QuiOn lijne el sombrero?
El Americano lo ticnc.
^Dondc compra V. pan? .
En la panaderia.
^ Donde compra V. sus libros ?
En la libreria.
I Eres tii rany estudioso ?
No, sefior, no lo soy.
^Tienen todos Vds. buenas grama-
licas.
Si, sefior.
I Qui^n tiene papel ?
Nadie lo (le) liene.
No, sir, I have none.
Have you anything ?
No, sir, we have nothing.
Who has the hat ?
The American has it.
Where do you buy bread ?
In the bakery.
Where do you buy your books ?
In the bookstore.
Art thou very studious ?
No, sir, I am not (so).
Have you all good grammars ?
Yes, sir.
Who has paper ?
Nobody has (it).
EXPLANATION.
40. Alguien, alguno. — Alguien refers only to persons^
and always in the singular number ; as,
Vivo con Mguien. I I live with some one.
Escribo k alguien. | I write to somebody.
When some one, any one is followed by the preposition q/J
we must use alguno in Spanish, and not dlgulen ; as, alguno de
ellos escribe en el periodico, some one of them writes in the
newspaper.
Any one, or anybody, not used interrogatively, is trans-
lated by cualquiera, as will be seen when we introduce the in-
definite pronoun.
Alguien is used only in the affirmative. Alguno may, on
the contrary, be employed either in affirmative or negative
sentences ; in the affirmative it always precedes the noun to
which it refers, and in the negative it invariably comes after
it ; as.
No estudian leccion alguna. I They study no lesson (or do not study
j any lesson).
41. Nadte, ninguno. — Ninguno relates to persons and
things, and is used in the negative in the same manner as al-
guno in the affirmative ; nadie relates to persons only, and is
06 LESSONXI.
used in the negative in the same way as the pronoun dlguien
in the affirmative. In a word, nadle and ninguno are merely
the negative forms of dlguien and alguno.
42. Alguno and ninguno lose the o when they come im-
mediately before the noun.
43. Algo, and alguna cosa, are used in the affirmative; as,
Como algo, or algmia cosa. I I cat something.
i RecibeV. algo, or alguna cosa ? J Do you receive anything ?
Anything, when not used interrogatively, is translated
cualquiera cosci^ as will bo seen in its proper place.
44. Nada, ninguna cosa are used in the negative form.
45. Nada, nunguno, nadie, the adverb no, as well as any
other words expressing negation, are placed before the verb ;
but when no precedes the verb, another negative may be placed
after it, and the two negatives serve to strengthen each ether,
contrary to the practice of the English language ; as,
No estudio nada.
No habl J k nadic.
No rccibo ninguno
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody, or no one.
I receive none.
But in omitting the negative no, the words which express
the negation must be placed before the verb ; as,
Nada estudio.
A nadie hablo.
Niajruno recibo.
I study nothing.
I speak to nobody.
I receive none.
The two negatives are always preferable.
46. The indefinite article a or an, is not translated into
Spanish wlien accompanied by a noun which expresses nation
ality, profession, &c. ; as,
I Es V. Ingl6s ? I Are you an Englishman ?
No, senor, soy Espauol. | No, sir, I am a Spaniard.
I Es 61 sastrc ? Is he a tnilor ?
No, senor, es zapatero. | No, sir, he is a shoemaker.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. lEi V» Frances? No, seflor, soy Americano.
2. iSon Vols. Alemanes? No, senor, soinos Ingleses.
8. I Ere? tu buen muchacho ? Si seflor, lo soy.
4. iSois vosotros sastres? Nt>, seflor, somos panaderoe.
LESSON XI. 37
6. ^Es bueno el libro de sii hermano de V. ? Si, seflor, lo es.
6. ^Son buenos sus zapatos de V. ? No, seflor, son muy raalos.
7. ^Tiene alguno mi sombrero? Si, sefior, alguien lo (le) tiene.
8. I Tiene alguien papel ? No, seflor, ningnno tiene papel.
9. g Tiene V. alguna cosa? No, sefior, no tcngo nada.
10. ^No tiene V. cosa alguna? Si, sefior, tengo alguna cosa.
11. ^Compran pan todos Yds. ? Si, sefior, todos compramos pan.
12. ^D6nde compran Yds. todo su pan? Lo (le) compramos en la
panaderia.
13. gSon Yds. panaderos? No, sefior, nosotros somos zapateros.
14. ^ Tiene alguien mi sombrero bueno? Si, sefior, alguien le (lo)
tiene.
15. ^No compra Y. algo? Si, sefior, compro alguna cosa.
16. ^Escribe Y. algo? No, sefior, no Cscribo nada.
17. t Necesita Y. todo el papel ? Si, sefior, lo (le) neccsito todo.
18. ^Necesita Y. todas las plumas? Si, sefior, las necesito todas.
19. gEs Y. sastre? Si, sefior, yo soy sastre.
20. ^Dondc tiene Y. su sastreria? La tengo en Nueva York.
21. gEs su padre de Y. librero? Si, sefior, lo es.
22. ^ Yende muclios libros? Si, sefior, vende muchos.
23. I Donde tiene 61 su libreria ? La tiene en Francia.
24. ^ Tiene Y. una panaderia? No, sefior, tengo una carniceria.
25. I Habla Y. a alguien ? No, sefior, no hablo a nadie.
EXERCISE.
1. Are you an Englishman? No, sir, I am an American.
2. Are you good boys ? Yes, sir, we are very good boys.
3. Is Louisa a good girl ? Yes, sir, she is a very good girl.
4. Art thou a Frenchman ? No, sir, I am a German.
5. Is yours a good book ? Yes, sir, mine is a very good one.
6. Are they (/em.) studious ? Yes, sir, they are very studious.
7. Have you anything ? No, sir, I have nothing.
8. Have you nothing ? Yes, sir, I have something.
9. Has anybody a good grammar ? Yes, sir, the Frenchman has one.
10. Who speaks French ? The American speaks French. j
11. Do you write an exercise? Yes, sir, I write an exercise. M
12. Where do you buy all your books ? I buy them in the bookstore.
13. Are you a bookseller? No, sir, I am a baker.
14. Where have you your bakery ? I have it in New York.
15. Where do you buy your coats ? In the tailor's shop.
16. Have you all of your books ? Yes, sir, I have all.
38
LE660X XII.
17. Do yon all reside in the United States ? Yes, sir, we reside in the
United States.
18. Have you any bread ? No, sir, I have none.
19. Do you speak to anybody ? Yes, sir, I speak to the Americans.
20. Do you buy anything ? No, sir, I buy nothing.
21. Are you a baker? No, sir, T am a tailor.
22. Are they French ? No, sir, they are English.
23. Art thou a Spaniard ? No, sir, I am an American,
24. Who is studious ? Emanuel is very studious.
LESSON XII
Jlaber.
To have.
He. t^^
Has. A><W
Ha. oJL'
I hav6.
Thou hast.
He has.
Hemos. "i^^jL^*-^
We have.
Habeis. cvirc^J-JLLJ
Han. oXi^ ^
You have.
They have.
PAST PARTICIPLES.-
-First Conjugation.
Habl-ado.
Spoke.
Estudi-ado.
Studied.
Compr-ado.
Busc-ado.
Bought,
Looked for, sought.
Necesit-ado.
Second ai
Needed.
id Third.
Aprend-ido.
Vend-ido.
Learned.
Sold.
Le-ido.
Read.
Beb-ido.
Drunk.
Com-ido.
Eaten, dined.
Becib-ido.
Received.
Vivido.
Lived.
Kesid-ido.
Resided.
Escrito (irregular
in
this
Written.
participle only).
L£S$ON XI
Hoy.
Paris.
1
Paris.
Londres.
London.
Madrid.
Madrid.
^xC^*L'<fO
Pano.
Cloth.
c
COMPOSITION.
89
To-day.
Ilabana.
Ilavana.
Viena.
Vienn:i.
Filadelfia.
Philadelphia.
Esquela.
Note.
i Cudndo ha escrito Y. 4 su padre ?
He escrito hoy a mi padre.
^ Ha recibido V. sus cartas ?
Si, sefior, las he recibido.
I Ha vivido V. en Pan's ?
Si, seiior, he vivido una semana.
6 Ha residido V. en Londres ?
Si, serior, he residido algunos dias.
l Han comido ellos ?
Si, senor, han comido.
6 Hemos leido bien nosotros ?
Si, seiior, Yds. han leido muy bien.
^Ilabeis vendido vosotros muchos pa-
fiuelos ?
Hemos vendido muy pocos.
6 Cuando habeis aprendido vuestra lec-
cion?
La hemos aprendido hoy.
I Habeis comprado pan ?
Si, seiior, lo hemos comprado.
^ Ha estudiado V. aleman ?
No, seiior, no lo he estudiado.
I Ha liablado V. con el Frances ?
Si, senor, he hablado con 61.
When have you written to your father ?
I have written to my father to-day.
Have you received your letters ?
Yes, sir, I have received them.
Have you lived in Paris ?
Yes, sir, I have lived a week.
Have you resided in London ?
Yes, sir, I resided some days.
Have they eaten (or dined) ?
Yes, sir, they have eaten.
Have we read well ?
Yes, sir, you have read very well.
Have you sold many handkerchiefs ?
We have sold very few.
When have you learned your lesson ?
We have learned it to-day.
Have you bought bread ?
Yes, sir, we have bought it.
Have you studied German ?
No, sir, I have not studied it.
Have you spoken with the Frenchman ?
Yes, sir, I have spoken with him.
EXPLANATION.
47. Tenek and IIaber. To have, used as an active verb,
is translated by tener^ as an auxiliary, by haher ; as,
Tener caballos,
Tengo oro.
Habcr hablado.
Hemos hablado.
To have horses.
I have gold.
To have spoken.
We have spoken.
When the auxiliaries to have and to be, followed by an infi-
40 LESSONXII.
nitive, denote Bome future action, to Jmve is rendered by tener
que, and to he bj haher de ; as,
Tcnemos que escribir. I "We have to write.
Homos de recibir dincro. | We are to receive money.
48. Pketerit Indefinite. — This tense not only refers to
what is past, but also conveys an allusion to the present time ; as,
Alejandro ha estudiado el cspauol. | Alexander has studied Spanish.
It must also be used when we speak indefinitely of any
thing past, as happening or not happening in the day, year,
or age, in which we mention it ; as,
He escrito hoy muchas cartas. | I have written many letters to-day.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Ila escrito V. sus cartas? No, seflor, ho cscrito los ejercicios de
la leccion.
2. I Ila recibido V. sii dinero ? Si, seflor, lo ho recibido.
8. I Ha escrito V. d su hermana? Si, sefior, he escrito hoy d mi her-
mana.
4. I Cuando ha recibido V. los peri6dicos de Paris ? Los he recibido
hoy.
5. ^Ha leido V. mi libro? Si, seflor, lo he Icido.
6. I Han vivido Vds. en L6ndres ? Si, seflor, liemos vivido una semana.
7. I Ila coraido V. ? Si, seflor, he comido.
8. I Ha leido V. la carta de mi hermano ? Si, seflora, la he leido.
9. I Ila vendido V. su baston ? Si, seflor, lo he vendido hoy.
10. ^Ha necesitado V. el libro de mi hermana? No, seflor, no lo he
necesitado.
11. ^Ila buscado V. bicn el pafluelo? Si, seflora, lo he buscado bien.
12. ^Ha comprado V. pan ? No, seflor, he comprado vino.
13. ^Ila aprendido V. su leccion do espaflol? La he estudiado, pero
he aprendido muy poco.
14. ^Ha hablado V. con mi padre? Si, seflor, he hablado con 61.
, 15. ^Ha estudiado V. el aleman? Si, seflor, lo he estudiado con un
Frances.
16. J Ha vivido V. en la Habana? No, seflor, he vivido en Filadclfia.
17. J Ha vendido V. muchos Idpioes? No, seflor, ho vendido muy
pocos.
18. ^Ha recibido V. sus cartas? No, seflor, he recibido los peri6dico9
del ju6ves.
LESSON XII. 41
19. J Ha leido Y. mi esquela? No, seflor, no la he leido.
20. ^ Ha buscado V. bien mi baston ? Si, senor, lo ho buscado bien.
21. ^Ha comprado V. uii sombrero? Si, seiior.
22. I Han liablado ellos a su padre ? No, seflor.
23. I Ha aprendido V. el ingles ? No, seflor, lo be cstudiado un poco ;
pero no lo he aprendido.
24. I Ha leido Y. el periodico de hoy ? Si, senor, lo he leido.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you received your letters? Yes, sir, I have received them
to-day.
2. Have you read the newspapers? Yes, sir, I have read them.
3. Have you written to my sister ? No, sir, 1 have not written to
her (le).
4. Have you received your letters from Yienna? I have received
them.
5. Have you read the English newspapers? Yes, sir, I have (read
them).
G. Have you dined with your sister? I have dined with her.
7. Have you bought your hat ? I have bought it to-day.
8. Have you looked for my father in Paris ? Yes. sir, I have looked
for him.
9. Have you spoken with him ? Yes, sir, 1 have spoken with him.
10. "Wliere have you spoken with him ? I have spoken with him at
his house.
11. Have you studied your Spanish lesson? Yes, sir, I have studied it.
12. Have you learned it well? No, sir, I have learned it httle.
13. Have the bakers sold much bread? No, sir, they have sold very
little.
14. Has the tailor bought much cloth ? Yes, sir, he has (bought).
15. Have they (fern.) dined with your sister? Yes, sir, they have
dined with my sister.
16. Have they dined with your brother? Yes sir.
17. "What have they eaten? They have eaten bread and meat.
18. What have they drunk? They have drunk Avater, wine and ale.
' 19. Have you spoken with the Spaniard? Yes, sir, I have spoken
with him.
20. Have you spoken with him in Spanish or English ? I have spoken
with him in English.
21. Have you received your letters from Pliiladelphia? Yes, sir, I
have received them.
22. Have you received them all ? I have received them all.
42
LESSON XIII
2.^. Have you lived in London ? No, sir, I have lived in Vienna.
24. Have you lived with your father ? No, sir, I have lived with my
brother.
LESSON XIII.
Querer.
Querido.
Quiero. -^'i'Ou^^ .yx.^t^<'^
Qui ores.
Qiiiere.
To wish, to be willing, to love.
AVished, loved, dear.
I wish, or am willing.
Thou wishest.
He wishes.
Queremos.
Quereis.
Quieren.
Desear.
Mio.
Tuyo.
Suyo.
Nuestro.
Vuestro.
We wish.
You wish.
They wish.
To desire.
POSSESSIVE PKONOrXS.
My, or mine.
Thy, or thine.
His, hers or its.
Our, or oui*s.
Your, cr yours.
Amigo.
Primo.
Dinero.
Friend.
Cousin.
Money.
Util. cr-O-XjU^^
Useful.
Caro.
Dear.
Barato.
Cheap.
Vigo. A ^
J6ven.'*C^- ^^<^^ ^
Old.
Young.
Rico.
Eich.
Pobre.
Poor.
Amiga.
Prima.
Moneda.
Friend.
Cousin.
Coin.
COMPOSITION.
\ Quiero V. un sombrero ?
No, scfior, quiero un baston.
I Quiere V. mucho d su primo ?
SI, Bcfior, le quiero mucho.
Do you wish a hat ?
No, sir, I wish a cane.
Do you love your cousin much ?
Yes, sir, I love him much.
LESSON XIII
43
I Quicre Y. escribir ?
No, seiior, quiero leer.
I Quiere V. hablar con mi hermana ?
Si, senor, quiero hablar con ella.
I Qaicre V. comprar el caballo de nues-
tro araigo ?
Si, sciior, quiero comprar el caballo del
amigo de V.
I Quieres escribir a mi herraano ?
Si, soiior, quiero escribirle.
I Tiene V. mi baston ?
No, seiior, tengo el mio.
(, Tiene 1 ellas nuestros libros ?
Si, seiior, tienen los de Vds.
6 Es viyo su padre de V. ?
Si, seiior, es un poco viejo.
6 Es joven su hermana de V. ?
Si, senor, es muy joven.
I Es pobre el comerciante ?
No, seiior, es muy rico.
6 Ha escrito V. a su amigo ?
Si, senor, he escrito hoy a mi amigo.
I Ha hablado V. con su prima ?
No, seiior, he hablado con mi amigo.
I Donde vive su primo de V. ?
Vive en Filadelfia.
Do you wish to write ?
No, sir, I wish to read.
Do you wish to speak to my sister ?
Yes, sir, I wish to speak to her.
Do you wish to buy our friend's horse ?
Yes, sir, I wish to buy your friend's
horse.
Do you wish to write to my brother ?
Yes, sir, I wish to write to him.
Have you my cane ?
No, sir, I have mine.
Have they our books ?
Yes, sir, they have yours.
Is your father old ?
Yes, sir, he is rather old.
Is your sister young ?
Yes, sir, she is very young.
Is the merchant poor ?
No, sir, ho is very rich.
Did yoa write to your friend ?
Yes, sir, I have written to my friend
to-day.
Have you spoken with your cousin ?
No, sir, I have spoken with my friend.
Where does your cousin live ?
He lives in Philadelphia.
EXPLANATION.
49. Mio, tuyo, suto, nuestro, vuestko, change the final
o into a, to form the feminine termination.
50. In Spanish, the possessive pronouns always agree witJi
the name of the thing possessed, in gender, number, and case ; as,
Nuestra gramatica. I Our grammar.
Nuestros Ubros. j Our books.
61. When used as pronominal adjectives, they precede the
noun with which they agree ; and it is to be observed that, in
this case, mio, tuyo and suyo drop their final syllable ; as,
Nuestros caballo3.
Mi pluma.
Tu papel.
Su cuadema
Our horses.
My pen.
Thy paper.
His copy-book.
44 LESSON XIII.
Mis plumas.
Tus papcles.
Sus cuadernoa.
My pens.
Thy papers.
His copy-books.
52. Mio, when used in the vocative case — that is, in ad-
dressing persons — is placed after the noun governing it ; as,
Escribe, hijo mio. | Write, my son.
53. When posscssives are used as pronouns, they agree in
gender, number and case with the noun which they represent,
and are preceded by the definite article ; as.
Tu gramdtica y la mia.
Do mis muchachos y los tuyos.
Su hermano y el nucstro.
Sus zapatos y los nmstros.
Tus caballos y los suyos.
Thy grammar and mine.
Of my boys and thine.
His brother and ours.
His shoes and ours.
Thy horses and theirs^ &c.
54. PossEssivES are preceded by the neuter article, when
they are indefinitely used ; as,
Lo mio, lo tuyo, lo suyo. ( What is mine, what is thine, what is his.
55. "When the possessive pronoun is connected with the
noun by the verb to be, the article is omitted ; as,
Este billetc es mio.
Esa carta es tuya.
El caballo es suyo.
Muchachos, ^ es este vuestro libro ?
Nines, 6 es este el vuestro ?
Tins note is mine.
That letter is thine.
The horse is his.
Boys, is this your book ?
Children, is this yours i
56. VuESTEO, vuESTRA, is chiefly used in addressing per-
sons in very high positions ; as,
Scuor, vucstra patria lo cxijc. | Sir, your country demands it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jQuiero V. vino? No, scfior, quicro agua.
2. ^Quieren Vds. mis libros? No, seflor, queremos los nuestros.
3. ^Tienen ellos nucstros peri6dicos? No, seflor, ellos tienen los
euyos.
4. ^Ticnc V. nucstro libro ? No, seflor, yo tengo cl mio.
D. ^Teneis vuestros cjercioios? Si, seflor, tenemos los nuestros.
C. ^Es vieja su amiga do V. ? No, seflor, cs joven.
7. ^Es rico el comerciante? Si, seflor, cs muy rioo.
8. I Vendo barato ? No, seflor, compra barato ; pero vende cara
LESSON XIII. 45
9. I Es util la gramatica ? Si, seflor, es mny titil.
10. ^Quiere V. rnuclio d su hermana? Si, senor, la qiiiero mucho.
11. ^Quiere V. beber vino? No, sefior, quiero beberagua.
12. I Quiere V. comprar un pafmelo de algodon ? No, sefior, quiero
comprar uno de seda.
13. I Quiero V. vivir en nuestra casa? No, sefior, quiero vivir en la mia.
14. I Qiiiere V. estudiar espafiol ? Si, sefior, quiero estudiarlo.
15. ^ Que quieren ellos ? Quieren hablar con V.
16. I Quiere V. ir {to go) u mi casa el martes? No, sefior, quiero ir hoy.
17. gNeceslta V. un libro? Si, sefior, necesito el mio.
18. I Necesita V. hablar con el abogado ? No, sefior, necesito hablar
con el comerciante.
19. ^Necesita su prima un Idpiz? No, sefior, ella no lo necesita.
20. 2 Ha querido V. mucho a su padre? Si, seflor, le ho querido
mucho.
21. 2 Ha necesitado Y. dinero? No, sefior, he necesitado amigos.
22. ^Ha escrito V. sus cartas? Si, sefior, las he escrito.
23. I Ha leido V. los periodicos ? Si, sefior, los he leido hoy.
24. I Quiere V. aprender espafiol ? Si, sefior, quiero aprcnderlo.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you wish to eat anything? No, sir, I wish to drink.
2. What do you wish to drink ? I wish to drink water.
3. Do you wish to speak to your brother ? Yes, sir, I wish to speak
to him ije).
4. Do you wish to learn Spanish ? No, sir, I wish to learn French.
5. Do they wish to live in New York ? No, sir, they wish to live in
Philadelphia.
6. Have you read your note ? Yes, sir, I have read it.
'^Y. Do you want some wine ? No, sir, I want some water.
8. Do they want my book ? Yes, sir, they want your book.
9. Does your brother want to speak to my father? No, sir, ho
wants to speak to the lawyer.
10. Did you want my father's letter? No, sir, we did not want your
father's letter.
11. Did you want any money? Yes, sir, I wanted some.
12. Do you wish to live in Franco? No, sir, I wish to live in the
United States.
13. Do you wish to speak French ? No, sir, I wish to speak Spanish.
14. Do they wish to buy a grammar ? No, sir, they wish to buy news-
papers.
46
LESSON XIV.
15. Wliat do you wish to buy ? I wish to bny a handkerchief.
16. What do you wish to read? I wish to read the English news-
papers.
17. What do you wish to drink? I wish to drink some wine and
water.
18. What do they want to sell? They want to sell their horses.
19. When did you receive your letters from England? We have re-
ceived them to-day.
20. When did you dine with your friends? I have dined with them
to-day.
21. Have you a useful book? Yes, sir, I have a Spanish grammar.
22. Does the merchant sell his hats dear ? No, sir, he sells them very
cheap.
23. Is your friend young? N"o, sir, he is old.
24. Arc you ricli ? No, sir, I am poor.
25. Do you wish to have money ? Yes, sir, I wish to have it
26. Do your friend and cousin live m New York? No, sir, they live
in Philadelphia.
LESSONT XIV.
".A^ct.C Llevar,
llevado, tTaery^^'
^"^^ To bring, brought, to take
V t' ' /..-tv'-;/ f JEInviar, enviado.
To send, sent.
JCf. „ v » , -1 ,^ ' Tomar^
tornado.
To take, taken.
Pagar^ pagado.
To pay, paid.
Caanto.
IIow much.
Cuantos.
How many.
Bastante.
Enough.
Peso.
Dollar.
Silla. Chair.
Centavo.
Cent.
Mesa. Table.
Caf6.
Coffee.
Cama. Bed.
Chocolate
Chocolate.
NTJMEBAL ADJECTIVE9-
—CARDINAL NUMBEBfl,
Uno, una.
One. ^^ C-
Dos.
Two. O^-^'l-Zc
Tres.
Three. ' ^^^-<-^^
Caatro.
Four. '
Cinco.
Five.
LESSON XIV.
47
Seis. A^Ci^u-^Ji^^ ^
Siete. /^-^o ^T/x-t^'
Ocho. 6^-e^uo
Nueve. '^V'^' - ^ -
Diez. .^k - ir.'i< IrS
Once. ^/^"'U^.'cx^ ^
Doce. . ^-^ ^- "XM^o^-^.
Trece. .(yt^o^iy^^ z£iX>^'^
Catorce. JfeaA.-"t<»-t-''— tA^o
Quince. ■i'^JU2^\A,^'W^p*^
Diez y seis.
Diez y siete.
Diez y ocho.
Diez y nueve. . ^
Veinte. '^-^'- --^^^
"ttX-i
Veinte y imo, etc
Treinta. /(/t/<x<y'jLt44^' t^ot
Cuarenta. . /^ /
Cincnenta.t^A/.^'t/t — -y^t^T^W
Sesenta.
Setenta.
Ochenta.
Noventa.
Ciento.
Doscientos.
Trescientos.
Cuatrocientos.
Quinientos.
Seiscicntos.
Setecicntos.
Ochocientos.
Novecicntos.
Mil.
Dos rail.
Mil ciento.
Cieri mil.
Un millon. - /.-'
M.
Six.
Seven.
Eight.
Nine.
Ten.
Eleven.
Twelve.
Thirteen.
Fourteen.
Fifteen.
Sixteen.
Seventeen.
Eighteen.
Kineteen.
Twenty.
Twenty-one, &o.
Thu-ty.
Forty.
Fifty.
Sixty.
Seventy.
Eighty.
Ninety.
A or one hundred.
Two hundred.
Three hundred.
Four hundred.
Five hundred.
Six hundred.
Seven hundred.
Eight hundred.
Nine hundred.
A or one thousand.
Two thousand.
Eleven hundred.
A or one hundred thousand.
A or one miUion.
iHan llevado mi sombrero al sombre-
rero?
SI, senor, lo han Uevada
COMPOSITION.
Have they taken my hat to the hatter?
Yes, sir, they have taken it.
43
LESSON XIV,
I Ha cnviado V, la carta h 8u primo ?
La he enviado.
i Ha tornado V. cafe ?
No, senor, he tornado chocolate.
I Cuanto dincro tiene V. ?
Tengo bastante.
I Cuunto tiene V. ?
Tengo diez pesos.
i Ha comido V. con su hermano hoy ?
No, sefior, no he comido con 61.
i Cu4nto ha pagado V. al sombrerero ?
Ocho pesos y seis centavos.
5 Cudutas sillas ha comprado V. ?
He comprado seis.
Have you sent the letter to year cousin f
I liave sent it.
Have you taken coffee ?
No, sir, I have taken chocolate.
How much money have you ?
I have enough.
How much have you ?
I have ten dollars.
Have you dined with your brother to-
day?
No, sir, I have not dined with him.
How much have you paid to the hatter ?
Eight (lo'lars and six cents.
How many chairs have you bought ?
I have bought six.
EXPLANATION.
NTHklERAL ADJECTIVES.
57. In tlie formation of compound numbers, the same order
is observed in Spanish as in English, except as to the place of
the conjunction; as,
Mil ochocientos sesenta y seis. | 1866.
58. All these numbers, except uno^ one, and the compounds
of cientOf one hundred, are indeclinable.
69, Uno agrees in gender with the noun to which it refers,
but drops the o when it comes immediately before a masculine
noun; as,
Uno de los hombres. One of the men.
Una mujer. A woman.
Un hombre. A man.
Un gran caballo. A great horse.
60. CiENTO drops the last syllable when it comes immedi-
ately before a noun. Its compounds agree in number and
gender with the nouns to which they refer ; as,
Cien hombres y den miyeres.
(Hento veinte y tres caballos.
Dosdentos Hbros.
Trascioiicu ciyaa.
One hundred men and one hundred
women.
One hundred and twenty-three horses.
Two hundred books.
Three hundred boxes.
LESSONXIV. 49
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Ha escrito Y. sus cartas? Sv^seflor, las he escrito.
2. I Las ha cnviado V. al correo*T Si, seflor, las he enviado hoy.
8. I Ha tornado V. caf6 6 chocolate ? He tornado caf4.
4. I Tiene V. bastante dinero ? Si, sefior, tengo bastante.
5. I Cuanto tiene V. ? Tengo veinte pesos y treinta centavos.
6. I Cuanto ha pagado V. d su sastre ? He pagado a mi sastre veinte
y cinco pesos y cuarenta centavos.
7. I Cudndo ha comido V. con su amigo ? He comido con ^1 hoy.
8. I Cudntos caballos ha comprado V. ? He coraprado ocho.
9. I Ha comprado V. sillas ? Si, sefior, he comprado doce.
10. ^ Tiene V. mucho dinero ? Tengo cien pesos y cincuenta centavos.
11. 2 Cuanto tiene su hermano ? Tiene quinientos (500) pesos.
12. I D6nde vive Y. ? Yivo en Nueva York.
13. ^Qu6 niimero {number) tiene la casa de Y.? Tiene el ntimero
tiescientos treinta y ocho (338).
14. I Ha recibido Y. sus periodicos de Paris ? Si, sefior, los he recibido.
15. I Que ntimeros ha recibido Y. ? He recibido el once, doce, trece,
catorce, y diez y ocho.
16. ^Los ha leido Y.? No, sefior, no los he leido.
17. ^Cudntos afios (year) ha vivido Y. en Paris? He vivido cinco.
18. ^ Cuantas lecciones ha aprendido Y. ? He aprendido trece.
19. ^ Cudntas gramaticas tiene Y. ? No tengo sin o una.
20. I Qui6n ha recibido hoy peri6dicos ? Nadie los ha recibido hoy.
21. ^Es rico el amigo de Y. ? Si, sefior, tiene quinientos mil (500,000)
pesos.
22. ^Ha Uevado Y. mis cartas al correo? No he Uevado sino dos.
23. ^Ha enviado Y. mis zapatos al zapatero ? Si, sefior, los he envia-
do hoy.
24. J Ha tornado Y. muchas lecciones de espafiol? He tomado doce.
25. I Cudnt^ ha pagado Y. a su amigo ? Tres mil ochocientos cuarenta
y cuatro pesos (3,844).
EXERCISE.
1. Do you wish to send anything to your cousin? Yes, sir, I wish to
send money to my cousin.
2. How much money do you wish to send ? I wish to send $317.
3. "Who has taken the money to the tailor? My cousin {Jem.) has
taken \\.
4. Where have you sent the horses ? I have sent them to Paris.
5. How many have you sent ? I have sent two very good ones.
Correo, post-oflace.
60
LESSON XV
C. My son, have yon taken the $31.50 to the baker? Yes, sir, I have
(taken them).
7. Has your brother sent some chairs to your house ? No, sir, but he
has sent some to his.
8. How many has he sent ? He has sent ten chairs and three tables.
9. Has the woman bought no chairs? Yes, sir, she has bought
tventy-six.
10. IIo^ many letters have they written this {eata) week ? They have
written three Imndred and ten letters and one thousand and one notes.
11. Which newspapers have you sent to your father ? I have sent him
numbers three, fifteen and eighteen.
12. Has he read them all ? He has read only number fifteen.
13. Has the butcher much money ? He has $1,000.
14. How much have you sent to your fiiend (/em.)? I have sent
$111.17.
15. Whom do you wish to pay ? I wish to pay my tailor.
16. Where does your tailor reside? He resides in Vienna.
17. When have you written to Alexander? I have written to Alex-
ander to-day.
18. Have you received a letter from him to-day ? Yes, sir, I have re-
ceived six.
19. What day do you receive letters from France ? I receive them on
Tuesdays and Saturdays.
20. How many has your cousin written to you ? None.
LESSOIN" XY
Pronunciar, pronunciado.
Tocar^ tocado.
Cantar, cantado.
Beinar, reinado.
Qomo,
To pronounce, puononnced.
To touch, touched; to play,
played.
To sing, sung.
To reign, reigned.
How, like, as.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Primero (primer he/ore a noun),
Begundo.
Tercero (or tercer he/are a noun).
First
Second.
Third.
LESSON XV.
Cuarto.
Fourth.
Quinto.
Fifth.
Sexto.
Sixth.
Septimo.
Seventh.
Octavo.
Eighth.
Noveno, or nono.
Ninth.
D^cimo.
Tenth.
Piano.
Piano.
Cancion.
Song.
Violin.
Violin.
Palabra.
Word.
Mtisico.
Musician.
Guitarra.
Guitar.
Pianista.
Pianist.
Historia.
History.
Cantor.
Singer.
Arpa.
Harp.
Tomo or voliimen.
Volume.
Obra.
Work.
Carlos.
Charles.
Musica.
Music.
Luis.
Louis.
Cantora, cantatriz
. Singer.
Enrique.
Henry.
Calle.
Street.
Key.
King.
Avenida.
Avenue
Trabajo.
Work, labor.
COMPO
3ITI0N.
51
I Corao pronuncia Manuel el espanol ?
Lo pronuncia bien.
i Toca V. la guitarra ?
No, senor, toco el violin y el piano.
I Canta V. cancion es espanolas ?
No, seaor, canto canciones inglesas.
4, Quien reina en Rusia ?
Alejandro Segundo.
f. En que calle vive V. ?
Vivo en la calle Once.
6 Y v., donde vive ?
Yo vivo en la calle Yeinte y tres.
6 Que toca el musico ?
Toca el arpa, el violin y el piano.
l Tiene Y. el primer tomo de mi libro ?
^o, senor, tengo el segundo.
'l Ha leido Y. el tomo tercero ?
No, senor, he leido el cuarto,
I Cuantos anos tiene Y. ?
How does Emanuel pronounce Spanish ?
He pronounces it well.
Do you play the guitar ?
No, sir, I play the violin and the piano.
Do you sing Spanish songs ?
No, sir, I sing English songs.
Who reigns in Russia ?
Alexander the Second.
In which street do you live ?
I live in Eleventh street.
And where do you live ?
I live in Twenty-third street.
What does the musician play ?
He plays the harp, violin and piano.
Have you the first volume of my book ?
No, sir, I have the second.
Have you read the third volume ?
No, sir, I have read the fourth.
How old are you ?
EXPLANATION.
61. The ordinals always agree in gender and number witL
52 LESSONXV.
the noun, expressed or understood, to which they refer, and may
be placed eitlier before or after that noun ; as,
El primer tomo (or el tomo primero).
El primer buen libro.
Los primeros cnadernos.
Las primcras Iccciones.
El segundo tomo.
Las sescundas intencioncs.
The first volume.
The first good boolc
The first copy-booka.
The first lessons.
The second volume.
The second intentions.
It has been seen, in the list of ordinal numbers at the open-
ing of the present lesson, i\\^t 2:>rimero and tercero lose the tinal
letter when they immediately precede their noun, or arc separ-
ated from it only by an adjective. We may observe here, that
tercero is by some written entire; the contracted form, how-
ever, is much to be preferred ; as,
El tcrccr tomo. | The third volume.
62. The ordinals are not so frequently used in Spanish as
in English ; and, except primero^ first, their place is generally
supplied by the cardinal numbers ; as, for instance, in speaking
of the days of the month, which are expressed by cl dos, tres,
ciiatro^ etc.^ the second, third, fourth, &c. The following are
the principal cases in whir*.h the ordinals are employed: 1st
with the names of sovereigns, popes, &c. ; 2d, in the enum
eration of books, chapters, lessons, &c., and a few others
but, even in tliese cases, after decimo, tenth, they are, by rea-
son of their great length, generally replaced by the numerals
as.
Carlos Quinto.
Pio Nono.
Capftulo d6cimo.
Calle Veinte y trcs.
Luis Catorce.
Charles the Fifth.
Pius the Ninth.
Chapter tenth.
Twenty-third street.
Louis the Fourteenth.
N. B. — The definite article is not required in the above ex-
amples.
COXTERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Pronuncia V. bien el ingl6s? No, sefior, lo pronuncio maL
2. I Es V. cantor ? No, sefior, pero toco.
8. {Qu6 toca v.? Toco el violin.
LESSOKXV. 63
4. gCanta bien su hermana de Y. ? No, seCor, ella canta mal; pero
toca bien el piano.
5. I Que lecoion estudia V. ? Estudio la cuarta.
6. ^En qu6 calle vive su padre de V. ? Vive en la calle Catorce.
7. I Que tomos ha leido V. ? He leido el primero, segundo, tercero y
cuarto.
8. I Cuantos toraos tiene la obra? Tiene seis.
9. I Que libro lee V. ? • Leo la historia de Carlos Quinto.
10. I Ha leido Y. la historia de Enrique Octavo de Inglaterra ? Si,
sefior, la he leido.
11. ^ Que tomo Ice su hermana de Y. ? Leo el noveno.
12. I Cuanto dinero ha recibido Y. hoy ? He recibido cincuenta y un
pesos.
13. ^Cuantos hermanos tiene Y.? Tengo cinco.
14. ^Cuantos afios tiene su hermana de Y.? Tiene quince.
15. I Cuanto ticmpo ha vivido Y. en Pai'is ? He vivido seis afios.
16. ^Que niimero tiene su casa? El doscientos seis (206).
17. gQue dia de la semana es hoy? Hoy cs miercoles.
18. ^ Que hora tiene Y. ? Las diez.
19. ^ Cuantos dias tiene una scmana? Tiene siete.
20. Ocho y docc i cuantos son ? Son veinte.
21. I Cuantos afios tiene su papa de Y. ? Tiene sesenta.
22. I Cuantos dias tiene el afio ? Tiene trescientos sesenta y cinco (365).
23. I Como ha leido Y. ? He leido despacio.
24. I Ha llevado Y. mi piano al pianista ? Si, sefior, lo he Uevado.
25. I Ha cantado Y. muclio hoy ? Hoy ho cantado poco.
26. ^ Cuando ha vcndido Y. su caballo ? Lo he vendido hoy.
EXERCISE.
1. "What book have you? A music-book.
2. How many volumes has it? Three.
3. Which volume have you read ? The first.
4. Has your father not read the second volume ? No, sir ; but my
cousin has read it.
5. What arc you reading, miss? I am reading the History of Charles
the Fifth.
6. Who has sold your sister's History of England? She has sold it.
7. Who has bought the violin? The pianist.
8. Where does he live ? In Seventeenth street.
9. In what street does the butcher live ? In Sixth avenue.
10. Have you bought good meat in the butcher's shop ? The most
(which) I have bought is very bad.
54
LESSON ZVI.
11. What things have you sent to the tailor? I have sent stockings,
vests, and pocket-handkercliiefs.
12. What day of the week is to-day? Monday.
13. Is Monday the first day of the week? No, sir, it Ls the second;
Sunday is the first.
14. How much money does tlic merchant require ? He requires $ 1,500.
15. How much money do you wish to send to your friend? I wiih to,
send my friend $50.
16. Does he need much money? Yes, madam, he is very poor.
17. How many letters have your brothers written to Emanuel? Very
fewj^
-"TS. How do your sisters pronounce Spanish ? They pronounce it well
when tliey read, but not when they speak.
19. When do they write their exercises? When they have studied
their lessons.
20. And you, when do you write yours? When my brothers write
theirs.
21. How do the poor buy? The poor buy dear, and the rich buy
cheap.
^,^^22. Has your father sold his old horse? He has sold it.
23. Have you read the History of Louis X VI. ? I have read volumes
first, second, and third.
LESSON XVI.
Fiit&T CONJUGATION — Preterit Definite.
EalU,
Habl-aste.
Habl-6.
I spoke.
Thou spokest.
He spoke.
Habl-dmos.
Habl-asteis.
Habl-aron.
We spoke.
You spoke.
They spoke.
SECOND CO
NVUOATION.
Aprend-i,
Aprend-iste.
Aprend-io.
I learned.
Thou learn edst
He learned.
Aprend-imos.
Aprend-isteis.
Aprend-ieron.
We learned.
You learned.
They learned.
LESSON" XVI.
55
Escrib-i.
Escrib-iste.
Escrib-io.
Escrib-imos.
Escrib-isteis.
Escrib-ieron.
Pasar.
Aycr. Anocbe.
Antes de ayer, or anteayer.
El alio pasado.
El mes pasado.
La semana pasada.
Ante {prep.).
Ante todas cosas.
Ante todo.
Antes («^.). / ^ n ' 4^
Delantc (a^^.).**^^^'^ •
Despues (ac?.)» C^^c\.<^ -^Uvu.'t/^
Mas {ad^. ^ ^
Menos (ac?.)./>v*^^'
Que {conj.).
THIRD CONJUGATION.
I wrote.
Thou wrote.
He wrote.
TVe wrote.
You wrote.
They wrote.
To pass, to spend {in relation
to time).
Yesterday. Last night.
The day before yesterday.
Last year.
Last month.
Last week.
Eefore, in the presence of.
Before all things.
Above all.
Before {refers to time).
Before {refers to place).
Afterwards, after.
More.
Less, fewer.
That, than.
COMPOSITION.
I Hablo V. con mi padre ?
Si, boaor, hable con el ^ntes dc ayer.
^ Han aprendido Yds. su leccion ?
Si, seiioi-, la hemos aprendido hoy.
<: Cuando ..^cribio V. a su hermana ?
Escribi la semana pasada a mi hermana.
I Ha recibido V. sus periodicos del
mes pasado ?
Sf, scnor, los he recibido hoy.
6 Cuando vendio V. su caballo ?
Lo vendi el ano pasado.
^ Estudia Y. antes despues de comer ?
Estudio &ntes de comer.
i Habl6 V. mucho ante el juez ?
Did you speak with my father ?
Yes, sir, I spoke with him the day be-
fore yesterday.
Have you learned your lesson ?
Yes, sir, we have learned it to-day.
When did you write to your sister ?
I wrote to my sister last week.
Have you received your newspapers of
last month (last month's newspapers)?,
Yes, sir, I have received them to-day.
When did you sell your horse ?
I sold it last year.
Do you study before or after dining (or
dinner) ?
I study before dining.
Did you speak much before the judge f
66
LESSON XVI.
No, senor, habl6 muy poco.
I Que libro tiene V. delantc ?
Tcngo la gramatica espanola.
j Escribio V. sus cartas ?
Si, sefior, las escribi el domingo pasa-
do.
I Come V. m6no8 que yo ?
Ko, senor, como mas que V.
I Ha visto V. a su amigo ?
Si, senor, lo vi ayer.
gDonde lo vio V.?
Lo vi delante dc la iglesia.
i Hablo V. con 6\ ?
Si, senor ; pero muy poco.
I Ha comido V. ?
Si, sciiora, he comido pan y lie bebido
vino.
i Ha Icido V. y estudiado sus ejercicios ?
Si, seiior, los he leido y estudiado.
I Ha escrito V. h su padre ?
Si, sefior, escribi ayer.
i Cuando ha recibido V. las cartas de
el?
Las he recibido hoy.
I Ha enviado V. mis cartas despues de
las suyas ?
Las he enviado Antes.
i Hablo V. ante el rey ?
No, seiior, hable ante el juez.
i CuAnto tiempo ?
No, sir, I spoke very little.
What book have you before you ?
I have the Spanish grammar.
Did you write your letters ?
Yes, sir, I wrote them last Sunday.
Do you eat less than I ?
No, sir, I eat more than you.
Have you seen your friend ?
Yes, sir, I saw him yesterday.
Where did you see him ?
I saw him before (in front of) the
church.
Did you speak with him ?
Yes, sir ; but very little.
Have you dined ?
Yes, sir, I have eaten bread and drunk
wine.
Have you read and studied your exer-
cises ?
Yes, sir, I have read and studied them.
Have you written to your father ?
Yes, sir, I wrote yesterday.
When have you received the letters
from him ?
I have received them to-day.
Have you sent my letters after yours ?
I (have) sent them before.
Bid you speak before the king ?
No, sir, I spoke before the judge.
How Ions ?
EXPLANATION.
63. The Preterite Definite refers to a time past, and
generally specitied in the sentence, and denotes the thing or
Action past in such a manner that nothing remains of that
time in which it was done; as.
Escribi & mi padre en el afio 1804.
Aprendi el francos el afio pasado.
I wrote to my father in the year 1864.
I learned French last year.
In colloquial language, the preterite indefinite (which has
been treated of in Lesson xii.), is sometimes, though incorrect'
LESSON XVI. 57
ly, substituted for the preterite definite. The following example
will show the impropriety of such a substitution :
He eserito k mi padre ayer. | I have written to my father yesterday.
Nothing remains of yesterday ; it is time past, and has no
connection with the present ; and, as it has been already seen
that the preterite indefinite conveys an allusion to the pi'esent
time, the incorrectness of tbe foregoing example is at once
apparent.
We may, however, say with propriety :
Escribi la carta a las tres, a las cua- I I wrote the letter at three o'clock, at
tro, etc. I four o'clock, &c.
for the time specified is completely past.
64. Ante. — This preposition means be/ore, or in the pres-
ence of', as,
Hablo ante el juez. j He spoke before the judge.
And it sometimes denotes priority, antecedence, &c. ; as,
Ante todas cosas. | Before all things.
65. Mas, fnoi*e ; Meitos, less, fewer. — These two adverbs are
used to form the comparative degree of several adjectives,
which last they always precede in the sentence ; as,
El vino es mas caro que la cerveza. I Wine is dearer than beer.
Yo soy mas rico que V. | I am richer than you.
When used to express some quality or circumstance re-
specting verbs, their usual place in the sentence is immediate-
ly after these last ; as,
Yo escribo mas. I I write more.
Tu hablas menos. \ Thou speakest less.
It is needless to observe here, that mas and menos are then>
selves the comparatives of mucho and poco, respectively.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Cndndo habl6 V. con el abogado ? Habl6 con 61 anteayer.
2. jHa hablado V. con mi hermana? No, senor, hable ayer con su
atnigo de V.
3. ^Ha hablado V. con cl pianisfca ? Si, senor, le habl6 ayer.
68 LESSON XVI.
4. J Ha aprendido V. su leccion? No, scflor; pero he escrito el
ejcrcicio.
5. I llan aprendido ellos sus lecciones de frances ? Si, seflor, ban
aprendido las de frances y de espanol.
, G. I Cuando aprendi6 su herinana d tocar el piano ? Aprendi6 el afio
pasado.
7. I Ha leido Y. la historia de los Estados Unidos ? He leido el tomo
priniero y el segundo.
8. ^Ha leido V. la carta de su hermana y la de su amiga? He leido
la de mi hennana; pero no la de mi amiga.
9. I Qu6 ha leido V. hoy ? He leido los ejercicios de la semana pasada.
10. i Cuando compr6 V. su caballo ? Lo corapr6 el mes pasado.
11. jDonde haldo V. con mi padre? Delante de su casa de V.
12. iLcy6 V. la carta de su padre antes que la de su hermano? No,
sellor, la lei despucs.
13. ^Cuando rcsidio V. en Paris? Residi fintes que V.
14. I Cudntos afios tiene su hermana ? Tiene veinte.
15. jCuantos pesos pago V. el mes pasado al comerciante? Quinien-
tos.
16. I Ha llevado V. mis zapatos al zapatero? Si, sefior, los llcv6 ayer.
17. ^Cudndo ha recibido V. su dinero? Lo recibi anteayer.
18. I Ha escrito V. despues quo escribi6 mi padre? No, sefior, cscribi
dntes.
19. ^Escribi6 V. su carta despues que recibio la de su hermano? SI,
sefior, la cscribi mucho despues.
20. ilia hablado V. con la madre dntes que con la hija? No, sclior,
habl6 dntcs con la hija que con la madre.
21. ^Estudio V. su leccion de ayer? No, sefior, estudi^ la de dntes de
ayer ; pero no he estudiado la de ayer ni la de hoy.
22. I ITabl6 V. ante el jucz ? Si, sefior, habl6 ante cl juez y ante cl rey.
23. I Habla V. mas que yo ? No, sefior, hablo m6nos ; pero cscribo
mas.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you speak more yesterday than to-day? I spoke less; but I
read more.
2. IIow many newspapers did your father read yesterday ? Very few.
8. How old is your sister ? She is nineteen.
4. Who took the vest to the tailor last year? The baker took it.
6. How mucb did the tailor pay to the baker afterwards? $59.10.
6. Did he receive the vest after or before the coat ? Ho received ii
after.
LESSON XVII.
59
7. Did yonr sisters sing yesterday ? Yes, sir, they sang and played.
8. What did they sing ? They sang S[)anish songs and played on tho
piano.
9. Have you (j^lural) played to-day ? No, madara, we have not
played ; but we have written our French exercises.
10. How many words have your brotlicrs written in Spanish to-day?
Fewer than last Thursday.
11. Do they speak more English than Spanish? Ko, madam, they
speak more Spanish.
12. What have the singers received from Paris ? They have received
some good songs and French music.
13. Have the singers (fern,) enough Spanish music? Yes, sir, they
have received some to-day.
14. Did they sing well last month? Not very well.
15. Who sang in your house the day before yesterday ? Nobody sang.
16. How long did you reside in Vienna? Five years, six months, and
thirteen dnys.
17. How many churches has Paris? Paris has many churches.
18. How did your cousins pronounce their Spanish yesterday? Very
well.
19. Are you a musician? Yes, madam.
20. Is your sister a pianist or a singerj or does she play on tlK3 guitar?
She sings and plays on the piano.
21. When did you speak before the judge? Tho day before yesterday
and last week.
22. Do you sing much with the musicians? I sing a little; but be-
fore all things I study my Spanish lessons.
r
. LESSON XVII
Trabajar, viyCLXy-^^&e^Ui^' ^(.^^
Mandar '
Quien, quicnes,
A quien, a quicnes.
iQu6?
Cual, cuales.
Cuyo {maac. sing.\ cuya {/em.'
sing.).
Cuyos {masc. plural)^ cuyas
(fern, plural).
Varios. Algunas veces.
To work.
To command, to send.
Who.
Whom, to whom.
What (inter.), who, that, or which.'
Which one, which ones.
Whose, which, or of whom.
Several. Sometimes.
, f, Ketrato.
Criado.
Concicrto.
Teatro.
Mcrcado.
Parque.
f ^^jJuan.
f.i^'Trabajador.
/y jc Ultimo (a).
LESSON XVII
Portrait.
Pantaloons.
Servant.
Concert.
Theatre.
Market.
Park.
John.
Workman.
Last.
Criada. ^ ^ Servant
Iglesia.€--^^- Church.
Calle.A^^J^i; Street.
V\txzai.U^^^^^^ Square, market, y
Company. ^V**<4.y^
Compania. ^
Juana. '^^'^t-^i^^t^t/ Jane
CL^
COMPOSITION.
i Es viejo el caballero d guien V. hablo
en el concierto ?
No, senor, pero lo es la senora que ha
hablado con V. en el teatro.
I A qui en busca V. ?
Busco a la scnorita d quien V. busca.
i Qui6n es el joven que ha hablado con
v.?
Es un criado del hotel.
El rauchacho que lee, y alcual V. man-
do trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramatica qite el tiene, y en la cual
estudia, es mia.
El caballero cuija casa Y. compro es
amigo mio. -VXS^'n^L^
El comerciante cxiyo vino V. compro,
vende muy barato.
El libro en que Iccmos.
La senora d quien habl6 cs mi madrc.
^Manda V. bus niuos al Parque Cen-
tral ?
i A qui6n manda V. tralwyar ?
A mis criados.
I Juan I
I Sciior ! ^ qu6 manda V. ?
Quiero la comida.
iEn donde trabajan hoy los trabaja.
dores ?
Trabjyan en la calle.
Is the gentleman to whom you spoke
at the concert old ?
No, sir ; but the lady who spoke to you
at the theatre is (so).
For whom do you look ?
I am looking for the young lady that
you look for.
Who is the young man that has spoken
with you ?
He is a servant in the hotel.
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work is my brother.,
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
The gentleman whose house you bought
is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you bought
sells very cheap.
The book in which we read (or which
we read in).
The lady I spoke to Is my mother.
Do you send your children to the Cen-
tral Park ?
Whom do you command to work ?
My servants.
John !
Sir ! what do you wish ?
I wish my dinner.
Where do the workmen work t'Vday?
They work in the street
LESSON XVII. 61
EXPLANATION.
66. QtiiEN. — The relative pronoun quien refers to persons
only, and is always preceded by the preposition d, when gov-
erned by a verb ; as,
El hombre d quien V. quiere. I The man whom you love.
67. Who, coining immediately after its antecedent, is
translated by que ; when it stands alone, or is governed by a
preposition, it is rendered by quien ; as,
El muchacho que estudia. I The boy who studies.
La muchacha con quien hablas. | The girl with whom you speak.
68. CuAL and que relate to persons and things ; as,
The boy that reads, and whom you
commanded to work, is my brother.
The grammar which he has, and in
which he studies, is mine.
El muchacho qite lee, y al cual V.
mando trabajar, es mi hermano.
La gramatica que el tiene, y en la
cual estudia, es mia.
69. CuYO also refers to persons and things, but agrees with
the word by which it is immediately followed ; as,
El caballero cuya casa V. compro es
amigo mio.
El comerciante cuyo vino Y. compro
vende muy barato.
The gentleman whose house you bought
is my friend.
The merchant whose wine you bought
sells very cheap.
This pronoun partakes of the nature, both of the relatives
and the possessives.
70. In English the preposition does not always precede the
relative pronoun ; but in Spanish it is indispensable to place
the preposition before the relative ; as.
El lit^ro en que leemos. I The book which we read in (or, in
I which we read).
71. The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Span-
ish ; so that we cannot say, as in English, the lady I spoke to,
but, in full ; as.
La senora d quien hable, es mi I The lady to whom I spoke is my
madre. | mother.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. £ A qui^n mand6 V. ayer al mercado ? Maiid6 d mi criado Juan.
2. ^Cuul do sus criados trabaja mas? Juan trabaja mas que todos.
3. I Qui6n cs el hombre d qui^n V. busca? El hombre 4 quien busco
es trab^ador.
62 LESSON XVII.
4. I Quien es el caballero con quien liablo V. ayer en el concicrtot
Es ua Cibcipulo mio.
6. ^ A quien quiere V. hablar ? Quiero hablar a la seflorita que toca
cl piano.
6. I Como pasaron Vds. el tiempo en el carapo ? Lo pasamos muy
bien en compaflia de nuestros amigos.
7. ^Es frances el comerciante a quien compro V. el caballo ? Si,
sefior, es el Frances cuja casa compr6 V.
8. ^Manda (en via) V. sus niflos al Parqno Central? Si, sefior, Ids
mando al Parque Central.
9. I Con quien los en via V. ? Con sus primos.
10. ^Que libro quiere V. leer? Quiero leer el de Manuel.
11. ^No quiere V. leer el que yo tengo? No, sefior, quisro leer el de
Alejandro.
12. ^ A quien manda V. trabajar ? A mis criados.
13. J Juan! ; Sefior! ^ Que manda V. ? Quiero la comida.
14. ^Canta Y. bien? No, sefior; pero la sefiorita que reside en sa
casa de V. canta muy bien.
15. ^Estudia V. mucho? No, sefior, pero trabajo mucbo.
16. ilia estudiado V. hoy su leccion? No, sefior, la estudie ayer; hoy
ho escrito los cjercicios.
IT. ^Como pronuncia su maestro de V. el espafiol? Lo pronuncia
bien ; pero pronuncia muy mal el ingles.
18. ^ Toco y. ayer el piano en casa de sus amigos ? Si, sefior, tocamos
y can tamos.
19. ^Qu6 cantaron Vds.? Cantamos canciones espafiolas y la can-
cion americana llamada, " The Star Spangled Banner."
20. jCaballeros! ^Quieren Vds. tomar chocolate 6 caf6? Queremos
beber vino.
21. I Cuantos dias pas6 V. en el campo ? Pas6 toda una semana.
22. jPorqu6 no pasa V. un mes en el campo con nosotros? Porquo
necesito residir en la ciudad.
23. I Cual de sus amigos habla bien espafiol ? El que estudia mucho
habla bien.
24. I Cual do sus hermanos estudia mas ? El mas pequefio.
25. I De quien recibe V. cartas ? De mi padre y mis hermanos.
26. I Es de V. el libro en el cual estudia su hermano ? No, sefior, es
suyo.
27. iTrabaj6 V. mucho ayer? No, sefior; pero he trabtyado mucho
hoy.
28. I Cuando estudia V. sus lecciones ? Las estudio los nii6rcoles j los
sdbados.
LESSON XVII. 63
EXERCISE.
1. "Whose is the portrait (which) you sent me yesterday ? It is the
portrait of my brother who lives in Germany.
2. Which portrait have you sent to Charles? I have sent no portrait
to Charles; but I have sent mine to the musician.
8. With whom did you spend last week ? I spent last week with my
cousin John.
4. In which city of France does the pianist's brother live ? He lives
in the city in which your sister Jane resides.
5. To whom did you send the first volume of your work ? I sent it
to Louis.
6. Whom do you order to work ? My servant John.
7. Who is the lady you are looking for ? She is the mother of the
singer (fern.) whose piano Charles bought last year.
8. W^ith whom did you send your children to the concert last night?
I sent them with a servant.
9. With which servant did you send them ? With one of mine (my
own).
10. In which church does Miss Garcia sing ? She sings in Twenty-
eighth street church.
11. How did you {plural) pass the time in Philadelphia? Yery well.
12. Did you study many lessons ? We studied very little, and neither
read nor wrote our exercises.
13. How much did you write the day before yesterday? I studied a
good deal, but wrote little.
14. Which volumes of Robertson's History has your son ? He has re-
ceived the first, second, third and fourth.
15. Did you buy any books at the bookstore in Walker street? Yes,
madam, I bought the History of Charles V. and some music books.
16. Whom have yon paid with the money I sent you? I have paid
the man who worked in my house yesterday.
17. Does your servant work much ? No, sir ; but she reads a great deal.
18. From whom do you receive letters every day ? I receive letters
from Henry on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, and from my father
on Tuesdays.
19. Who has the boots that I bought in Fourth avenue? John has
taken them to his cousin who lives in Philadelphia.
20. Has your servant bought any good meat in the market ? Ho has
not bought any to-day.
21. How many songs have you received from Spain ? I have received
several from Spain and two from England.
64
LESSON XVIII.
22. Have yon sung any of them ? None ; but my sister sang one or
two last night at the concert.
23. Are they very good ? One of them is very good, and my cousin
{fern.) sings it very well.
24:. How many pencils does the hatter wish ? He wants twelve pen-
cils and three penknives.
25. Does Louisa play much on the piano? No, sir, she is very lazy,
and will neither play nor study.
26. The tailor has a handsome vest, very cheap ; will you buy it ? I
do not wish to buy a^vest ; but I want pantaloons.
27. Has he any pantaloons ? He has none, he sold them all last week.
LESSOR XYIII,
Ir,
Togo.
PEESENT.
Voy.
I go (or, am gomg).
Vas.
Thou goest.
Va.
He, or she, goes.
Vamos.
We go.
Vais.
You go.
Van.
They go.
PEETEBIT
DEFINITE.
Fui.
I went.
Fuisto.
Thou wentcst
Fu6.
He, or she, went.
Fuimos.
We Went.
Fuisteis.
You went.
Fueron.
They went
PEES
ENT.
Yenir,
To come.
Vengo.
I come (or, am coming).
Vienes.
Thou com est.
Vicne.
He, or slie, comes.
Vcniraos.
Wo come.
Venis.
You come.
Vienen.
They come.
LESSON XVIII.
65
PEliTEJilT
DEFINITE.
Vine.
I came.
Viniste.
Thou earnest.
Vino
He, or she, came.
Vinimos.
"We came.
Yinisteis.
You came.
Vinieron.
Thc7 came.
DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS.
Singular.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Neuter.
Este.
Esta.
Esto.
This.
Ese.
Esa.
Eso.
That.
Aquel.
Aquella.
Aquell
d.
That (yonder).
Plural.
Estos.
Estas.
No neuter.
These.
Esos.
Esas.
((
Those.
Aqucllos.
Aquellas.
a
Those (yonder).
EUo.
1 It.
Aqui, aca.
Here.
Ahi.
iCUlll
Alii, alld, i
There.
Porqud.
Why.
Porque.
Because.
L4J0S.
Far.
Cerca.
ITcar.
Otro. Ambos.
Another. Both.
Ni uno ni
otro (ind. pro.).
Neither.
Profesor.
Professor.
Juana. Jane.
Discipulo.
Pupi
I.
Discipula. Pupil.
Lado.
Side.
Zapateria. Shoemaker's shop.
Jardin.
Garden.
Manteca. Butter.
COMPO
SITION.
<t De quien es este libro que tengo aqui?
Ese que tiene V. ahi, y esle que yo ten-
go aqui, son del profesor.
iQui6n 63 aquel caballero que reside
alii del otro lado de la calle ?
Aquel cabellero es mi discipulo.
Whose book is this which I have here ?
That one which you have there, and this
one which I have here, are the pro-
fessor's.
Who is that gentleman who resides
there on the other side of the street ?
That gentleman is my pupiL
66
LESSON XVIII,
I Adonde va V. ?
Voy alia, al otro lado del parque.
^ No quiere V. venir aca de este lado ?
No, senor, voy alia del otro lado.
i Quiere V. comprar aquel libro ?
No, seiior, quiero comprar esc otro.
I Quiere V. venir al teatro con nosotros ?
Fso quioro.
6 Llevo V. aqudlo a la sastrcria ?
Lo llevo.
I Manda V. algo mas ?
No, eao cs todo.
i Envio V. el chaleco L la sastreria, y
las botas a la zapateria ?
Envie lo uno y lo otro {or ambos).
I Fueron k su casa de V. el mddico
francca y el profesor aleman ?
Vino aqud^ pero no vino este.
f, Hablo V. de aqudlo k mi madre ?
No, seiior, pero liable de ello a su pa-
dre de V.
En mi casa y en la de su hermano de V.
El jardin de esta casa y el de la que V.
compro.
Este caballo y d de mi amigo.
Where do you go ?
I go there to the other side of the park.
Will you not come here to this side ?
No, sir, I go there to the other side.
Do you w idh to buy that book ?
No, sir, I wish to buy that other one.
Will you come to the theatre with us ?
That (is what) I wish.
Bid you take that (thing) to the tailor's ?
I did (or I took il).
Do you command anything more (or
have you any more commands) ?
No, that is all.
Did you send the vest to the tailor's,
and the boots to the shoemaker's ?
I sent both.
Did the French physician and the Ger-
man professor go to your house ?
The former came, but the latter did not
come.
Did you speak of that to my mother "f
No, sir, but I spoke of it to your father.
In my house and ia your brother's.
The garden of this house and that of
the one you bought.
This horse and my friend's (that of my
friend).
EXPLANATION.
72. The demonstrative pronouns este^ this, e^e, aquel^ that,
are thus declined :
Este, ese, aquel {masc. sing.).
Esta, esa, aquella {fern. sing.).
Estos, esos, aquelloa {masc. plural).
Estas, esas, aquellas {fern, plural).
Esto, eso, a^uello {neuter).
73. Este is used to point out what is near to us, and cor-
responds to the meaning of the adverb Aere; ese points out
that which is at some distance, and corresponds to the adverb
LESSON XVIII. 67
there ; and aquel denotes remoteness, and corresponds to the ad-
verb yonder \ as,
Esle libro que tengo a^"^-
E^iC que tiene V. ahi.
Aquel que llevo V. alld.
This book which I have here.
Thai one which you have there.
That one which you took there.
74. When the pronouns este^ ese precede the adjective otrOy
another, they may sometimes be written together, so as to form
but one word with it, in the following manner :
Estotro. '
Estotros. •
Estotra.
This other.
Estotras.
These others.
Esotro.
That other.
Esotros.
Those others.
Esotra. ,
Esotras.
These forms, however, are now rarely used.
75. The demonstrative pronouns, in their quality of adjec-
tives, are used also as neuter. Eso, that, is the most used of
the three, and almost as much as the personal pronoun lo^ and
in the same manner; as,
Eso se hara. I That will be done.
jEso es ! I That is it !
76. The former and tJie latter is translated in Spanish by
aquel and este ; thus.
La aplicacion y la pereza hacen al
horabre muy diferente ; aquella le
eleva y esta le rebaja.
Industry and slothfulness have a very
different effect upon man ; the former
elevates him, the latter lowers him.
77. When in English the demonstrative pronoun that is
followed by the preposition of, or either of the relatives who,
which^ expressed or understood, referring to a noun already
mentioned, the definite article, in the corresponding number
and gender, is employed in Spanish ; as,
En mi casa y en la de su hermano de
V.
El jardin de esta casa y el de la que
V. oompro.
Este caballo y el do mi amigo.
In my house and in your brother's.
The garden of this house and that of
the one (which) you bought.
This horse and my friend's (t. c, thaf
of my friend).
78. English personal pronouns, followed by a relative not
agreeing in case, are generally rendered in Spanish by the de-
monstrative ; as,
Quiero comprar a ag-Mc^foa que renden I I want to buy from them who sell
barato. | cheap.
68 LESSON XVIII.
79. Aqui, aliJ, aca, alla. — Although the adverbs aqui,
here, alll, yonder, are employed as synonyms of oca, here, and
alldj yonder, respectively, we must observe that aqitl and allt
refer to a place more circumscribed or determinate than oca,
alia ; for the same reason we can say, mas acd, mas alia,
nearer, farther ; and we cannot say, ma3 aqu'i^ more here, m,as
alll, more there.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Yiene Y. del campo? No, seflor, voj alia.
2. I De dondc viene su amigo de V. ? Yiene de Espafla.
3. ^ Adonde va Y. este afio ? Este aflo quiero ir a Paris.
4. I De quien es ese retrato que ticne Y. ahi ? Este que tengo aqui
es el de mi padre, y aqucl que tienc su araigo de Y. alii, es dc mi madre.
5. jEs discipulo do Y. el caballero que reside en aquella hermosa
casa ? No, seflor ; pero su prima, quo reside de este otro lado de la calle,
es mi discipula.
C. I Ya. Y. a su casa todos los dias ? No, seflor, voy alU los lunes,
mi^rcoles y viernes.
7. I Cudntas lecciones toma el caballero que vino ayer a su casa de Y. ?
Toma dos d la semana.
8. ^ Quien trabaja mas, el profesor 6 cl discipulo? El uno y el otro
trabajan mucho.
9. I Es este nifio su liijo de Y. ? Si, sefior, cs mi liijo Manuel.
10. j Manuel! jquieres venir aqui d mi lado? No, seflor, no quiero ir.
11. ^Porqu6? Porque quiero ir con mi padre.
12. I Cudntos nifios tiene Y. ? Tengo cinco, tres nifias y dos nifios.
13. jQuicre Y. venir con nosotros al Parque Central? No, seflor, por-
que tengo quo ir con mis niflos al campo.
14. I Ila de ir Y. (tiene Y. que ir) hoy ? Si, seflor, tengo quo ir hoy.
15. ^No quiere Y. venir acd dc este lado?' No, sefior, voy alld del
otro lado.
10. ^Llev6 Y. aqnello d la sastreria? Si, seflor, lo llev6.
17. jManda Y. algo mas? No, eso cstodo.
' 18. ^Ilablo Y. do aqucUo d mi amigo? No, seflor; pero habl6 de cllo
& su hcrmano.
19. J En donde trab£y6 Y. ayer ? Trabf^j6 en la casa do Y. y en la do
su hermnno.
20. I Trab£y6 Y. en mi jardin 6 en cl de mi amigo ? Trabiy6 en el uno
y en el otro.
LESSON XVIII. eO
21. I Ad6nde va Y. d trabajar hoy ? Yoj a trabajar en cl jardin de
esta casa y en el do la que V. compr6 el ailo pasado.
22. I Llevo V. mis botas a la zapateria, y compi*6 V. el pan que necesita-
raos ? Lleve las botas ; pero no be comprado cl pan.
23. ^Que llevas ahi, Alejandro? Llevo mis libros.
24. gQa6 quiere tu hermano? Quiere pan y manteca.
25. I Pago V. al sastre ? Si, seilor, ayer pague al sastre, y hoy he pa-
gado al zapatero.
26. ^ De quien son csos caballos? Estc es el de mi padre, y aquel es el
de mi hermano.
27. I Cual es el de Y. ? Yo no tengo ninguno.
23. I Quiere Y. tencr uno ? Quiero tener muchos.
20. ^Escribio Y. la carta y la leccion? Escribi aquella, pero no ho
escrito esta.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you go to church every day ? I only (solo) go on Sundays.
2. Where is your servant Jane going? She is going to the bakery to
buy bread.
nJ 3. Do your music teacher (maestro) and your Spanish professor come
to your house every day ? Tlie former comes every day, but the latter
only comes on Tuesdays and Saturdays.
4. "Which of the two works the more ? Both have to work much.
5. Which of tlje two horses is the older, this one here or that one
there ? This one here is the younger.
6. Have you that letter which you received last Monday ? I have not
that one; but I have here the one* I received the day before yesterday.
Y. Who has written these two histories, that of France and that of
America ? Eollin has written the former, and Robertson the latter.
8. Does the piano teacher live far from here ? The piano teacher
does not live far from here ; but the French professor lives very far.
9. Is that all (lo que) your brother has studied? Yes, sir, that is all.
10. Which lesson have you studied? I have studied the one (la que)
we read the other day.
11. Which did we read, the fifteenth or the sixteenth? We read both.
12. Which one do you wish to read first ? I require to read the former.,
13. W^hy do you require to read the former? Because I have not
studied it well.
14. Which exercise have you there ? I have mine and my brother's.
15. Is your brother not coming to take his lesson to- day? No, sir, he
has to take his music lesson to-day.
16. John I Sirl
• La qn«.
70
LESSON XIX.
17. Have you taken my coat to the tailor's? Yes, sir, I took it last
night.
18. Have you paid that man ? Yes, sir, I have paid him to-<lay.
19. How much have you paid him ? I have paid him three dollars and
seventy-five cents.
20. Why did you pay him three dollars and seventy-five cents ? Be-
cause he worked one day in this garden, and two in that of the Twenty-
third street house.
21. How many pupils have you? I have thirty: seventeen learn
Spanish and the thirteen others French.
22. Do they study well? Some of them study very well; but none
write their exercises well.
23. When do you sing and play on the piano ? I study my lessons
before singing and playing.
24. Who is that gentleman that came from Vienna last month ? Tliat
gentleman is the one to whom I spoke last week at the concert.
LESSON XIX.
Bacer.
Haciendo.
Hecho.
To do, or to make.
Doing, making.
Done, made.
PEESENT.
Hago.
Haces.
Hace.
I do, or make.
Thou doest, or makest.
He does, or makes.
Hacemos.
Haceis.
Ilacen.
We do, or make.
You do, or make.
They do, or make.
PEETEBIT DEFINITE.
Hicc.
Hiciste.
Hizo.
I did, or made.
Thou didst, or madest
He did, or made.
Hicimos.
Hicisteis,
Hicieron.
We did, or made.
You did, or made.
They did, or made.
Partir.
Marchar.
Cambiar.
To set out, to depart, to divide^
To go, set out, set ofi", to march.
Change.
LESSON XIX,
71
PEEPOSinONS.
Para.
For, or in
order to.
Asi.
So, thus.
Por.
By, for, through.
Entro.
Between,
among.
Hasta.
Until, even.
Hacia.
Towards.
Sin.
Easta donde.
Without.
How far.
Pedro.
Peter.
Helena.
Helen.
Escritor.
Writer.
Escritora
Writer {female).
Escriban(
). Notary.
Tienda.
Store, shop.
Estado.
State.
Provincia.
Province.
Medico.
J Physician.
1 Doctor.
Manera.
Escritura.
Manner.
Writing, convey-
Cuarto.
Room.
ance.
Aragon.
Aragon.
Comida.
Dinner.
Tio.
Uncle.
COMPO
i
SiTlON.
y i Qu6 hizo V. ayer en su cuarto ?
Estudie mi leccion.
i Que ha hecho Y. hoy ?
He escrito los ejercicios.
i Que hace el zapatero en la zapateria ?
Hace zapatos y betas para Y.
^Tiene Y. papel para escribir una
carta ?
Si, scfiora, lo tcngo.
I Quiere Y. escribir uia carta por mi
herraano ?
• I Para qui^n es la carta ?
"Es para Manuel.
Yo parte para Madrid.
/ Para donde parte Y. ?
Parto para los Estados Unidos.
6 Hablo Y. a su padre por rai hermano ?
HabU jDor 61 h mi padre y 6 roi tio.
What did you do yesterday in your
room ?
I studied my lesson.
What have you done to-day ?
I have written my exercises.
What does the shoemaker do in the
shoe-shop ?
He makes shoes and boots for you.
Have you paper to write a letter ?
Yes, madam, I have.
Will you write a letter for my brother ?
For whom is the letter ?
It is for Emanuel.
I set out for Madrid.
For where do you set out ?
I set out for the United States.
Did you speak to your father for my
brother ?
I spoke for hiaa to my father and to my
undo.
72
LESSON XIX
f, Ilabla y. bien cl franccs ?
Lo hablo muy bien, y liasta paso por
frances.
^ For cuanto vendio V. el caballo ?
Lo vcndi por doscientos cincuenta
I Necesita V. cnviar j9or algo ?
Necesito enviar por el medico.
/ Por qu6 envia V. ?
Envio por vino.
6 Vive V. para comer ?
No, sen jr, como pai'a vivir.
^ Marcho ayer mucho el regimiento
Soptimo.
Marcho hasta el Parque Central
Do you speak French well ?
I speak it very well, and I even pass
for a Frenchman.
For how much did you sell the horse ?
I sold it for two hundred and fifty dol-
lars.
Do you want to send for anything ?
I want to send for the physician.
What do you send for ?
I send for wine.
Do you live to eat ?
No, sir, I eat to Uve.
Did the Seventh regiment march much
(far) yesterday ?
They marched to the Central Park.
EXPLANATION.
80. Paea and Por. — As both these prepositions very fre-
quently answer to the English /or, they are apt to be con-
founded by foreigners. Such confusion may, however, be
avoided by bearing in mind the following rules :
Para expresses aim, object, destination.
Por conveys the idea of want or requirement, substitution,
favor, duration of time, direction, &c. Examples :
-WITH PAEA.
Papel joara escribir.
Paper for writing.
Este libro 63 para V.
This book is for you.
Parto para Nueva York.
I start for New York.
Comer para vivir.
To eat to live.
Trabajo para ganar la vida.
I work in order to earn a living.
Para cl domingo.
For Sunday.
Estc caballo cs para su padre do V.
This horse is for your father.
Lo bare para tu hermano.
I shall do it for thy brother.
"WITH pon.
Escribe por mi hermano.
I write for my brother.
Cambio mi sombrero por el suya
I changed my hat for his.
Pasa por docto.
lie passes for a man of learning.
Vender^ la casa por diez mil pesos.
He will sell the house for ten thousand
dollars.
Trabajo jRor gnnar la vida,
I work to (endeavor to) cam my living;
nabl6 por tu amigo.
I spoke for (in favor of) thy friend.
Envio por pan.
I send for bread.
Lo har6 por tu hermano.
I will do it for thy brother (for thy
brother's sake).
LBSSOiq^xix. 73
81. Entee. — ^The general meaning of this preposition is
between and amongst ; as,
Entre los dos. Between the two.
Entre Y. y yo. Between you and me.
Entre todos. Amongst all.
82. Hasta signifies till^ until, even^ to, as many as, as far
asx as.
Hasta el domingo.
Pasaron hasta mil.
Yoy hasta el Parque Central.
Estudio el espanol hasta que lo
aprendio.
Till (or until) Sunday.
As many as a thousand passed.
I go as far as the Central Park.
He studied Spanish till he learned it.
CONYERSATION AND YERSION.
1. |Escribi6 Y. la carta para su padre, y los ejercicios de la leccion de
espafiol ? Hice aquello ; pero no he hecho esto.
2. ^Tiene Y. papel para escribir una carta? Si, seiior; pero tengo
que escribir dntes mis ejercicios.
3. ^Hizo el sastre mi casaca? La hizo.
4. I Que ha hecho el zapatero ? Ha hecho unas botas para Y. y unos
zapatos para Manuel.
5. I Para donde parte Y. ? Parto para los Estados Unidos.
6. I Quiere Y. escribir una carta por mi hermano ? Si, sefior, i para
qui^n es la carta? Es para Dn. Manuel.
7. I Hablo Y. 6, su padre por mi hermano ? Habl6 por 61 a mi padre
y d mi amigo.
8. ^Habla Y. Men el frances? Lo hablo muy bien, y hasta paso por
frances,.
9. I Por cuanto vendio Y. la casa ? La vendi por ocho mU pesos,
10. I Por que envia Y. ? Envio por mis libros.
11. ^ Yive Y. para comer ? No, sefior, como para vivir.
12. ^March6 Y. ayer con el regimiento Septimo? March^ hasta el
Parque Central.
13. ^Es Dn. Pedro escritor? Ko, sefior, J)n. Pedro es escribano.
14. I De que manera hace Y. eso ? Lo hago asi.
15. iQn^ hizo Y. ayer? Estudi6 la leccion de espafiol, y hoy he
escrito los ejercicios.
16. ^Tiene Y. que trabajar mas que yo ? Tengo que escribir mas que
Y. ; pero no tengo que trabajar mucho.
17. ^Hacia donde van Yds. ? Yamos hacia la iglesia.
18. ^ En d6nde vive Y. ? Yivo en la Cuarta avenida mimero, trescien-
tos treinta y ocho, entre las calles Yeinte y cinco y Yeinte y seis.
4
14 LESSON XIX.
19. ^Para qu6 quiere V. mi libro ? Para leerlo.
\20. I Qui6n pag6 la comida ? La pagumos entre todos.
21. I Marchan bieii estos hombres? Marchan muy bien.
22. I Por d6nde pasaron Vds. cuando fueron d la iglesia ? Pasamos
por la calle Veinte y tres.
23. I Es esa sefiora escritora ? Si, seJior, y escribe muy bien.
24. I De qu6 pais es V. ? Soy de Espafia.
25. I De qu6 provincia ? De Aragon.
26. I Pronuncian bien el espafiol en Aragon ? Lo pronuncian mny bien.
27. ^ Hablan bien el ingl6s en los Estados Unidos ? Lo hablan bien.
28. g Quiere V. venir d mi casa para comer con nosotroa ? No, seflor,
porque tengo que ir a comer a casa de mi amigo.
EXERCISE.
1. How far did the Seventh regiment march yesterday ? They ^t)
marched to the Central Park,
s/ 2. Did your sister set out yesterday for Philadelphia? No, madam,
she did not set out yesterday,
^i 3. When does she start ? She starts to-day.
4. What does your servant look for ? He looks for my cousin's (fern.)
letter.
5. What do you do to learn Spanish ? I study the lessons of my
Spanish grammar and read good writers.
6. To whom did you speak last night at the concert ? I spoke to the
physician for Peter.
7. Who is that man who came to your house last night ? He is my
brother's servant.
8. Do you speak Spanish well ? No, sir ; but I speak Italian very
well, and I even pass for an Italian {italiano).
9. How did your uncle spend the day yesterday ? Studying his les-
sons and writing to Madrid.
10. Will your uncle write a letter for (in favor of) Charles? He will
write it.
11. Do the young ladies want to send for anything? They want to
bend for the physician.
12. For what do they send for the physician? To speak for their
servant {fern.).
13. Wljere does ho live ? In Fifth avenue, between Twenty-fourth
and Twentyrfifth streets.
14. Wliere do you send? I send to the shoemaker's.
15. Wliat do you send there for? For some boots and shoes for
Manuel.
LESSON XX.
75
16. How do you write your exercises without ink? I write them with
a pencil.
^ 17. How did Louis write his exercise the other day ? He and his sis-
ter wrote it between them. 8^ ^ fRAj^y\Ji'\ -^ ''- y Ji' r<-
18. Have you sold your old hat ? I changed it for Peter's new one.
19. Will you pass me that paper to write a letter for my brother?
This paper is not for letters.
20. What is it for ? It is for my exercises.
21. Whose letter is that ? This letter is for your mother.
22. Where did the singer go last year? He went to Aragon, a proT-
ince in Spain.
23. What have you sent for ? I have sent for nothing.
24. Will you go for wine? I do not want wine, but bread and meat.
25. Do you live to eat ? No, sir, I eat to live.
26. Have you read the newspapers to-day? No, sir; but I have
marched with my regiment.
27. Has the tailor made my vest ? Yes, sir, he made it last week.
28. Will you go to the pianist's for my piano ? No ; I have to study
my lessons.
29. Do you write before studying? No; I study first and write after-
wards.
LESSON XX.
Salir,
To go out, to les
Saliendo.
Going out.
Sahdo.
Gone out.
PEESENT.
Salgo.
I go out.
Sales.
Thou goest out.
Sale.
He goes out.
Salimos.
We go out.
Salis.
You go out.
Salen.
They go out.
PEETEEIT DEFINITE.
Sail.
I went out.
Saliste.
Thou wentest out.
Sali6.
He went out.
76
LEQSON XX.
Salimos.
Salisteis-
Salieron.
M<yico.
Mexico.
"We went out.
You went out
They went out.
Tanto.
So, so much, as muclu
Cuanto.
IIow much.
Como.
As, how.
Presto.
Soon, speedily.
pronto.
Promptly, quickly.
Teraprano,
Early.
Tarde.
Late.
Mejor.
Better.
Peor.
Worse.
Mayor.
Greater, larger, older.
Menor.
Smaller, younger.
Mejor.
Better.
Peor.
Worse.
Prudente.
Prudent.
Imprudeute.
Imprudent.
Pronto.
Prompt, quick, ready.
Presto.
Ready, prepared.
Callado.
Silent, taciturn.
Hablador.
Talkative.
Lirapio.
Cleanly, clean.
Vivo.
Lively, alive.
Situado.
Situated.
Oanaado.
Tiresome, tired.
Fecha.
Date.
COMPOSITION.
iEs Alejandro Lju prudente como su
hermano ?
No, sefior, Alejandro es muy irapru-
dentc. Es tan imprudcntc como ha-
blador.
iSon los comerciantea mas ricos que
lo3 medicos ?
Algunos son mcu ricos; pero otros lo
son menos que los medicos.
l Es Nueva York mayor que Madrid ?
Madrid es menor que Nueva York.
Is Alexander as prudent as his brother?
No, sir, Alexander is very imprudent.
He is as imprudent as talkative.
Are merchants richer than physicians ?
Some are richer; but others arc leflS
rich than physicians.
Is New York larger than Madrid ?
Madrid is smaller than New York.
LESSON XX.
77
iQue caballo es mejor, el de Y. 6 el
mio?
El de Y. es mayor ; pero es peor que el
mio.
^ Tiene Y. mas de cincuenta pesos ?
No tengo mas qite veinte y tres.
El tiene tanto dinero como Y.
Yo estudio tanto como Y. ; pero no
aprendo tanto.
til habla espanol tan bien como Y. ;
pero no lo escribe tan bien.
1^1 tiene tanto cuardo quiere.
Tengo tanioi libros y tanto papel como
el.
Yo escribo mas que Y. ; pero Y. lee
maw que yo.
fil habla menos que Y.
Which horse is the better, yours or
mine?
Yours is larger; but it is worse than
mine.
Have you more than fifty dollars ?
I have not more than twenty-threa
He has as much money as you.
I study as much as you ; but I do not
learn so much.
He speaks Spanish as well as you ; but
he does not write it as well.
He has as much as he wishes.
I have as many books and as much
paper as he.
I write more than you ; but you read
more than I.
He speaks less than you.
EXPLANATION.
DEGEEE3 OF COMPARISON.
83. The adverbs tanto and cuanto lose the last syllable, tOy
before an adjective or another adverb.
84. The comparative of equality is formed by placing the
adverb tan^ so or as, before, and como^ as, after the adjec-
tive; as,
Alejandro es tan prudente como su I Alexander is as prudent as his sister,
hermana. |
85. CuAN may be employed, if the comparative is followed
by an adjective instead of a noun ; as,
Es tan hablador cuan imprudente. | He is as talkative as imprudent.
But Gomo is more frequently used.
86. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing
the word mas^ more, before the adjective, and que^ than, after
it; as,
lEl es mas rico que Y. | He is richer than you.
87. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing
the word menos ^ less, before, and que after ; as.
El es menos rico qv>e Y. | He is less rich than you.
88. Mayoe, greater or larger; menok, smaller; mejob, bet-
18 LESSON XX,
ter, and peob, worse, are already in the comparative degree,
and do not require mas or menos before them ; as,
Esta casa es mayor 6 menor que esa. I This house is larger or tmaUcr than
ll that one.
Este caballo es mejor 6 peor que el |Thi8 horse is better or wone than mine,
mio. n
89. Than^ after comparatives coming before numeral ad-
jectives, is also generally tran^ted by de in the affirmative,
and que in the negative ; as,
Tengo mas de cincuenta libros. I I have more than fifty books.
No tengo mas que veinte pesos. | I have not more than twenty dollars.
90, Comparison may also take place with relation to nouns,
verbs, and adverbs ; but its form is so similar to that laid down
for the adjectives that the learner will not require any other
explanation than the examples given in the Composition.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. J Sale V. tanto como su hermano? No, sefior, mi hermano sale
mas que yo.
2. I Cudndo salimos nosotros ? Nosotros, salimos mny pronto.
8. I Salio su hermano temprano de casa ? No, sefior, salio tarde.
4. jSalieron Vds. pronto del teatro? Si, sefior, salimos muy pronto.
6. I Sale V. presto d la calle ? Si, sefior, salgo muy presto.
6. jSalieron Vds. temprano de la iglesia? Salimos tarde.
7. ^Cudl de estas dos gramaticases mejor? La que V. tiene delante
es mejor que la otra.
8. jEs malo este caballo? Es peor que el de V.
9. I Es buena la pluma do su hermano de V. ? Es mejor que la mia y
peor que la de V.
10. I Cudnto dinero tiene V. ? Tengo cuarenta pesos.
11. J Cuantos libros tiene su hermana? Tiene tantos como su prima. .
12. gCuiinto tiempo vivi6 V. en Paris? Vivi cuatro alios.
13. J Es su hermano mayor 6 menor que V. ? Es mayor.
14. jQui6n de su familia de V. habla mejor el ingl6s? Mi hermano
racnor lo habla mejor que todos.
15. jD6nde lo aprendi6? En L6ndres.
16. J Cudnto tiempo vivi6 alld? Seis afios.
17. j Cudndo vino de alld? Vino el afio pasado.
18. ^Cudl do Vds. dos estudia mas? £1 estudia m6nos que yo; pero
aprendo mas.
LESSOK XX. 79
19. ^ Cual de sus liermanos de V. es^as prudente? El mayor es muy
callado j prudente; pero el menor es'vivo 6 imprudente.
20. I Salieron Vds. del concierto antes que nosotros ? No, sefior, sali-
mos despues.
21. I Cuando salio su amigo de Yds. de Nueva York ? Sali6 el mes
pasado para Paris.
22. ^ Cuando sale V. para Filadelfia ? No salgo hasta la semana qua
viene.
23. gllacia d6nde vive su amigo de Y. ? Yive hacia la plaza.
24. I Por donde vino Y. de Paris ? Yine por Inglaterra.
25. ^En d6nde vive Y. ? En la Quinta avenida entre las calles Treinta
J Treinta y una.
26. 2Qu6 caballo es mejor, el de Y. 6 el mio? El de Y. es mayor;
pero no tan bueno como el mio.
27. ^ Tiene Y. mas de cien pesos ? Tengo mas de ciento.
28. ^ No tiene Y. mas que tres pesos ? No, sefior, no tengo mas que
dos.
29. ^Habla Y. espafiol mejor que Luisa? No, sefior, lo hablo peor;
pero lo escribo mejor que ella.
30. I Sali6 Y. ayer temprano ? Sali temprano ; pero hoy he salido
muy tarde.
EXERCISK
1. Have you written your letter? Yes, sir, I have written it,
2. What is the date of it (what date has it)? The first of this month.
3. Do you (plural) go out much ? We go out this year as much as
last year.
\ 4. Which is the better grammar, mine or yours? Yours is better
than mine, but not so large.
5. Wliich of the two goes out earlier, you or your cousin ? I go out
earlier than he.
6. Are merchants as rich as singers ? Some singers are richer than
merchants.
7. Is this horse not as lively as that one? That one is a little more
lively than this one.
8. Is Mexico as large as the United States ? No, miss, the latter ar«
much larger than the former.
9. When do the musicians leave for Havana? They leave next week
(the week that is coming).
10. When did you take your music lesson? I took it the day before
yesterday, early.
80 LESSON XX.
11. Did your brothers take theirs as early as you ? Ko, sir, they took
theirs very late.
12. Which of you two speaks Italian better? lie speaks it better
than I ; but I write it better than he.
13. Do you sing much every day ? I do not sing as much as last
month.
14. Does the notary write as well as the physician? The former
writes better than the latter.
16. Is that man not very tiresome ? He is very talkative and very
tiresome.
16. Is Lewis as prudent as his uncle? He is more prudent than he;
but not so taciturn.
17. Are you less taU {alto) than Louisa? No, she is less tall than J.
18. Is your uncle, the merchant, as rich as your father? No, sir, my
father is richer than he.
)jftA.A 19. When do your cousins leave for Paris? They leave very soon.
I ^ 20. Is your servant as cleanly as ours ? Ours is more cleanly than
yours, but not so talkative.
21. Have you any paper for writing? I have as much paper and as
much ink as I wish for.
22. Is Henry very prudent ? He is as imprudent as talkative.
23. Who goes to the bakery quicker than John? Nobody goes as
quick as he.
24. Have the merchants sent as much silver to France as to Spain?
They have sent more to France.
25. Did the shoemaker make the shoes as quickly as the tailor made
the coat ? The former made the shoes quicker, because he worked more
than the latter.
26. Which works the later, the tailor or the baker ? The latter does
not work so late as the former.
27. Are your father's books larger than ours? Yours are smaller than
his.
28. Are those horses bad? They are worse than the others.
29. Will you go with your friend (fern.) to the concert ? I will not go.
30. Why will you not go ? Because it is very late, and I have to play
on the piano.
31. Where did your mother learn Spanish ? She learned it here.
32. And does she speak it well ? She does not speak it as well as she
writes it. .
83. How much money have you ? I have not more than seven dollars.
84. Has your friend as much as you ? He has more than I ; he has
received more than two hundred dollars from Spain.
LESSON XXI.
81
LESSON XXI
Saber.
To know.
Sabiendo.
Knowing.
Sabido.
Known.
S^.
I know.
Sabes.
Thou knowest.
Sabe.
He knows.
Saberaos.
We know.
Sabeis.
You know.
Saben.
They know.
Supe.
I knew.
Supiste.
Thou knewest.
Supo.
He knew.
Supimos.
We knew.
Supisteis.
You knew.
Supieron.
Tliey knew.
Amar.
To love.
Viaja/r.
To travel.
Trinidad (fern). \
Trinity.
Sabio, sapientisimo.
Wise, learned ; very, most or ex-
tremely wise.
Habil, liabilisirao.
Clever, skilful ; very clever.
Dificil, dificilisimo.
Difficult, very or most difficult.
Facil, facilisimo.
Fa sy ; very or most easy.
Corto, cortisimo.
Short; very or most short.
Alegre, alegrisimo.
Cheerful ; very or most cheerful
Triste, tristisimo.
Sad ; very or most sad.
Feliz, felicisirao.
Happy ; very or most happy.
Largo, larguisimo.
Long ; very or most long.
Fuerte, fortisimo.
Strong ; very or most strong.
Nuevo, novisimo.
New ; very or most new.
Fiel, fidelisimo.
Faithful ; very or most faithful.
Alto, altisimo.
Tall ; very or most tall.
4*
82
LESSON XXI.
IRREGULAR COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.
Baeno, mejor, 6ptimo.
Malo, peor, p6siiiio.
Grande, major, maximo.
Pequeflo, menor, minirao.
Alto, superior, supremo.
Bajo, inferior, infimo,
Good, better, best.
Bad, worse, worst.
Great, greater, greatest.
Small, smaller, smallest,
nigh i Jiigher, highest.
' ( superior, supreme.
^'"'' {Inferior, Jlo'^^'t-
Gombinada.
Combined.
COMPOSITION.
Es el mas sabio de mis discipulos.
fista senorita es la mas amable.
La mayor parte del regimiento.
La mai/or parte, 6 los mas, de los solda-
dos.
La major casa de la calle.
Manuel, ^ cuales son los profesores que
saben mas en tu escuela ?
61 profesor de aritmdtica sabe mucho,
el de francos, sabe mas ; pero el
profesor de historia es el que mas
sabe.
f, Es bueno este caballo ?
Este caballo es rauy bueno ; pero el de
V. es mejor, y el mio es el mejor de
los tres.
i Es esta leccion mwy facil ?
Es facilisima.
i Es su casa de V. tan alia come la mia ?
La mia es mas alta que la de V., y la
de su hermano de V. es la mas alta.
Ese Frances es muy cahallero.
i Es alegre 6 triste su amigo de V. ?
Us alegrisimo ; pero es muy niiio.
^Es muy j6ven?
No, scuor, es viejo.
He is the wisest of my pupils.
This young lady is the most amiable.
The greater parfr of the re^ment.
The greater part, or the most, of the
soldiers.
The best house in the street.
Emanuel, which are the professors in
your school who know the most ?
The professor of arithmetic is learned,
the French professor is more learned ;
but the professor of history is the
most learned.
Is this horse good ?
This horse is very good ; but yours is
better, and mine is the best of the
three.
Is this lesson very easy ?
It is most, or very easy.
Is your house as high as mine ?
Mine is higher than yours, and your
brother's is the highest
That Frenchman is very gentlemanly.
Is your friend cheerful or sad ?
He is most cheerful; but he is very
childish.
Is lie very young ? *
No, sir, he is old.
EXPLANATION
91. English superluiivcs ending in est, or formed by most^
LESSON XXI. 83
are rendered by placing the definite article before the Spanish
comparative; as,
El mas sabio. [ The wisest.
La mas amable. | The most amiable.
92. 3Iost^ or most of, when followed by a noun (singular),
is translated by la mayor parte ; as.
La mayor parte del regimiento. | Most of the regiment.
But if the noun is in the plural, most may also be translated by
m,as, with the corresponding article ; as,
La mayor parte, 6 los mas, de los I Most of the soldiers,
soldados. |
93. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is
translated by de in Spanish ; as.
La mejor casa de la calle. | The best house in the street.
94. Those superlatives which in English are formed with
the aid of very, most, &c., may in Spanish be formed either
with the help of muy before the adjective, or by adding to the
latter the termination tsimo ; as,
Muy hdbil, or habilistmo. I Very clever.
Muy facil, or fa.cilisimo, J Very, or most easy.
The termination isimo is, however, more expressive of the
positive superlative degree than is the adverb muy.
95. Observe that adjectives ending in a vowel drop that
vowel on taking the termination isimo ; as,
Corto, coTtisimo. Sliort, very short.
Alegre, alegrisimo. Cheerful, most cheerful.
Triste, trist^stmo. Sad, very sad.
96. There are other superlatives ending in ^rrimo\ as,
Celebre, celebmtmo. I Celebrated, most celebrated.
Salubre, saluberWmo. | Salubrious, very salubrious.
But these forms are not the most used.
97. Adjectives ending in the following letters change them
before admitting the termination isinio :
Co becomes qu ; as, rico, rig'wlsimo.
Go " gu ; as, largo, laiywisimo.
JUe " hil\ as, amable, ama6v7isimo.
Z " c; as, feliz, felicisirao.
84 LESSONXXI.
98. Superlatives in isimo irregularly formed :
BuenOy good, makes bonisimo, very good.
Fuertey strong, makes fortisimOy very strong.
NuevOy new, makes noviisimOy very new.
BahiOy wise, makes sapieniisimOy very wise.
JSacrOy sacred, makes sacratisimOy very sacred.
Mely faithful, makes JidelUsimo, very faithful.
99. Irregular comparatives and superlatives:
Bueno, mejor, 6ptimo.
Malo, peor, p^simo.
Grande, mayor, maximo.
Pequeno, menor, minimo.
Alto, superior, supremo.
B<ajo, inferior, fnfimo.
Mucho, mas, lo maa.
Poco, menos, lo menos.
All these adjectives form also a superlative in isimo, accord-
ing to the rules already given ; as, mcdUimo^ poquUimo, mu-
chisimo.
They admit also a comparative formed with mas or menos ;
and a superlative with muy ; as,
Menos malo.
Los mas grandes.
Muy pequeiios.
Less bad.
The greatest.
Very smalL
100. Substantives used adjectively admit the degrees of
comparison; as,
Es mas caballero que tli.
Es muy hombre.
Este hombre es muy nino.
He is more gentlemanly than thou.
He is very much of a man, or very
manly.
This man is very childish.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
v/l. gSnpo V. su leccion dntes de ayer? La snpo muy Men, y la 96
todos lOB dias.
2. I Ama V. A su hermano ? Le nmo.
3. I Le ama a V. su hermano ? No lo s6.
4. A qui6n ama V. ? Amo d mis papas.
6. g Ila viajado V. mucho? Ho viujado mucho en Europa; pero he
viiyado muy poco en America.
LESSON XXI. 85
6. ^ Sabe Y. el espafiol ? Muy poco, sefiorita ; pero lo aprendo.
7. Y y ., sefiorita, i lo sabe Y. ? No, sefior, no lo s6, ni lo aprendo.
8. I Porqu6 no estudia Y. el espafiol ? Porque aprendo la musica, y
no tengo tiempo para estudiarlo.
9. ^Es muy hdbil su profesor de musica de Y. ? Es habilisimo.
10. ^Sabe Y. cantar? No, sefiora, pero se tocar nn poco el piano.
11. 1^0 sabe Y. tocar la guitai*ra? No, sefiora, toco el violin.
12. gAprende bien ese caballero el espafiol? Estudia mucbo j lo
I5)rende muy bien.
13. ^ Qui^n aprende mas pronto el espafiol, las sefioras 6 los caballeros?
La3 sefioras aprenden mucbo mas pronto.
14. I Qui6n es el mas sabio de sus discipulos de Y. ? La sefiorita N., es
la mas sabia de todos mis discipulos.
15. I Cudl de estos nifios es el mejor ? El que ama a sus padres, y es-
tudia mas sus lecciones, es el mejor.
16. gMarcb6 todo el regimiento 7°. por Broadway hasta el Parque
Central ? No, sefior, pero la mayor parte de 61.
17. ^Fueronal campo los soldados? Los mas de los soldados fueron
alia.
18. ^Es esta la mejor casa de la calle? No, sefior, esta casa es muy
buena ; pero la de Astor es mejor y la de Stewart es la mejor de la
ciudad.
19. ^Sabe Y. qui^n paso por aqui anocbe? No, sefior, pero se quien
paso por la 5» avenida.
20. }, Es bueno este caballo ? Este caballo es muy bueno ; pero el de
Y. es mejor, y el mio es el mejor de los tres.
21. ^Es caballero ese Frances? Si, sefior, es muy caballero.
. 22. gEs ese hombre alegre 6 triste? Es muy alegre; pero es muy
nifio.
23. ^Fu6 Y. al concierto la semana pasada? Fui antes de ayer.
24. I Quiere Y. tocar el piano ? Quiero, pero no s6.
25. I Ha venido su amigo de Y. ? Ha venido.
26. I Cuando vino ? Yino antes de ayer.
27. ^ Cuando sale Y. ? Quiero salir la semana que viene.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know French ? No, sir, but my brother knows it.
2. Is that physician clever ? He is most clever.
3. Which is the most skilful physician ? Ours is the most skilful io
the city.
4. Is Miss Louisa very amiable ? Yes, she is very amiable.
86 LESSONXXI.
5. Alexander, wliich is the moat learned teacher in your school |
The English teacher is learned, the teacher of arithmetic is more learned ;
but the Italian teacher is the most /earned of all.
6. Is your school-mistress cheerful, Louisa ? Yes, mamma, she is most
cheerful and very happy.
7. Did you knowr your lessons well yesterday? Yes, I knew them
very well, better than to-day's, for I have not had time to study them.
8. Does your brother know his every day ? I do not know ; but he
works very little.
9. Is he taciturn ? No, sir, he is very talkative.
10. Which is the largest church in New York? Trinity Church is tha
largest and the handsomest in the city.
11. Whose is that handsome house there ? It is my uncle's.
12. Is it not the finest in the street ? No ; Mr. Emanuel's is the finest
in the city.
13. Did the 12th Kegiment go out to march yesterday? Not all, but
the greater part went out.
14. Did not all the soldiers march through Fourteenth street last
Thursday ? The most of them marched through Fourteenth street, but
not all.
15. Is your Spanish lesson for to-day difficult ? Yes, it is the most
difficult (that) I have had this month.
16. Is your French lesson very difficult, Charles ? No, sir ; my French
lesson for to-day is the easiest one in the grammar.
17. Which is the best Spanish grammar? The Combined Spanish
Grammar is the best and the easiest.
18. Is not your table very low for writing? Yes, it is very low; I
write better on a higher one.
19. Will you take this small pen to write your exercise? No; I do
not write well with my own, which is very small, but larger than
yours.
20. Have you travelled much in Europe ? I have travelled very much
in America, but very little in Europe.
21. Which is the longest street in New York ? Broadway is the
longest in the United States.
22. Do you love your parents ? Yes, I love them very much.
23. Why does Margaret not love her cousin? She does not love him
because he is very taciturn.
24. Wliich of your pupils is the wisest ? Henry and Louisa are the
wisest of all my pupils.
25. Who reads the most newspapers in your house ? I do not know ;
but papa roads a great many.
LESSON XXII,
87
26. To whom have you paid the most money to-day ? I have paid
most to the tailor, because he has worked most for me.
27. Does not your washerwoman work very much ? Yes, she works
very much, but earns {ganar) very little money,,
28. Whose horse is the most lively, yours, Charles', or mine ? Charles'
is hvely, mine is more lively, but yours is the liveliest of the three.
29. In what street do you live? I hve in Twenty -third street.
30. Is that a fine street? Yes, it is one of the finest streets up-town
of the upper part {parte alto) of the city).
LESSON
XXII.
Ustar
To be (in a certain place,
state or condition).
Estoy.
I am.
Estas.
Thou art.
Esta.
He is.
Estamos.
We are.
Estais.
You are.
Estan.
They are.
Prestar. 1
To lend.
GEEU
NDS.
Hablando.
Speaking.
Estudiando.
Studying.
Comprando.
Buying.
Buscando.
Looking for.
Necesitando.
Needing, wanting, requking.
Aprendiendo.
Learning.
Vendiendo.
Selling.
Leyendo.
Eeading.
Bebiendo.
Drinkmg.
Comiendo.
Eating, dining.
Escribiendo.
Writing.
Recibiendo.
Receiving.
Yiviendo.
Living.
Kesidiendo.
Residing.
Teniendo.
Having, holding.
Siendo.
Being.
Queriendo.
Wishing, desiring, loving.
88
LESSON XXII.
Llevando.
Enviando.
Tomando.
Pagando.
Pronunciando.
Cantando.
Tocando.
Ilaciendo.
Pasando.
Trabajando.
Mandando.
Yendo.
Viniendo.
Estando.
Norte, sur, este, oeste.
Carrying, taking.
Sending.
Taking.
Paying.
Pronouncing.
Singing, chanting.
Touching, playing.
Doing, making.
"Working.
Sending, commanding.
Going,
Coming.
Being (in a certain state, &c.).
North, south, east, west
COMPOSITION.
/ Es su casa de V. grande ?
JEs grande ; pero estd en mal estado.
i En que calle estd la casa de su henna-
no de V. ?
Estd en la Cuarta avenida.
^ Es Luisa bonita ?
Es muy bonita.
/ Estd ella contenta ?
No estd contenta, porque estd enferma.
i Es enfermiza ?
Lo es mucho.
l De qui6n es csta casa ?
Es de mi hermano.
Estd muy bien situada.
Esta carta es para Margarita.
Nucva York estd entre el rio del Norte
y el del Este.
El senor Walker 6S pintor.
La mesa es de madera.
Estuve en casa hasta que V. Ileg6.
Mi amigo estd para partir.
Estoy sin comer.
I Qu6 estd V. haciendo ?
Estoy escribiendo.
Is your house large ?
It is large ; but it is in a bad state.
In what street is your brother's house ?
It is in (the) Fourth Avenue.
Is Louisa pretty ?
She is very pretty.
Is she contented ?
She is not contented, because she is
sick.
Is she sickly ?
She is very much so.
Whose house is this ?
It is my brother's.
It is very well situated.
This letter is for Margaret.
New York is between the North and
East rivers.
Mr. Walker is a painter
The table is of wood.
I was at home until you arrived.
My friend is about to set out
I have not dined (I am without eating).
What are you doing ?
I am writing.
LESSON^ XXII
89
I De quien e$ V. amado ?
Soy amado de mis ninos.
Manuel es bueno.
Manuel esid malo.
g Estd Pedro cansado ?
Estd cansado y es cansado.
^Porque estd tan callado Alejandro ?
Forque es callado.
By whom are you loved ?
I am loved by my children.
Emanuel is good.
Emanuel is ill.
Is Peter tired ?
He is tired, and he is tiresome.
Why is Alexander so silent ?
Because he is taciturn.
EXPLANATION.
101. See and Estae. — ^These two verbs have in English but
one equivalent — to be ; but their respective significations and
uses are so materially different as to constitute one of the chief
difficulties of the Spanish language. By careful observation,
however, of the following simple rule, the learner will, we are
assured, be enabled to overcome that difficulty, and know ex-
actly when to use the one and when the other of these two
verbs.
102. Whenever we wish to express what persons or things
«re, and their mode of being, in an absolute manner, ser is the
verb to be employed ; but if we desire to express the state or
condition of persons or things, and the mode of that state or
condition in a relative manner, then estae must be used.
The following examples will serve to render the application
of this rule more clear :
1st. Esta casa es grande.
2d. Esta casa estd limpia.
3d. Esta casa estd en Broadway.
4th. Luisa es bonita.
5th. Luisa es feliz.
6th. Luisa estd contenta.
'7th. Luisa estd enferma.
8th. Luisa es enfermiza.
This house is large.
This house is clean.
This house is in Broadway.
Louisa is pretty.
Louisa is happy.
Louisa is content.
Louisa is sick.
Louisa is sickly.
In the first example we use see to express what kind of a
house the one referred to is — i. e. large ; in the second, estae,
inasmuch as we desire to express how^ or in what state the
house ^s, i. e. in a clean state y estae is also employed in the
third, sixth and seventh examples, the object being to make
known respectively where the house is, and in what state or
90
LESSON XXII.
condition Louisa is or finds herself ; while in the fourth, fifth
and eighth see again comes into play, seeing we wish to desig-
nate Louisa's mode of being in an absolute manner.
From the above general rule may be deduced the following
observations :
1st. That SEE must be used whenever we wish to express
possession, use, purpose or destination ; to point out the nation-
ality, profession or calling of persons ; the place of production
of things or the materials of which they are composed ; the
simple fact of existence, the occurrence of events ; and, finally,
as an auxiliary in forming the passive voice of verbs.
2d. That estae is to be employed in speaking of situation
or position, place, state or condition, in making the progressive
form in ndo (corresponding to the English ing) of other verbs ;
and, lastly, to govern verbs in the infinitive mood with the aid
of a preposition, or past participles without such aid.
N. B. — The verb estae can never be used with the present
participles of ir and venir.
Examples of the uses of see and estae :
SEB.
La casaca «« de mi hermano.
The coat is my brother's.
La carta es para Margarita.
The letter is for Margaret.
El senor Walker es pintor.
Mr. Walker is a painter.
Este vino es de Espana.
This wine is from Spain.
La mesa es de madera.
The table is of wood.
Has sido prudente en hacerlo asi.
Thou hast been prudent in so doing.
Hoy es la celebracion.
The celebracion is to-day.
Son las diez.
It is ten o'clock.
Fue el caso como yo escribf k V.
The case was as I wrote to you.
Soy amado.
I am loved.
ESTAR.
Esta casa estd bion situada.
This house is well situated.
Nueva York estd entre el no del
Norte y el del Este.
New York is between the North and
East rivers.
Esiuve en casa hasta que lleg6.
I was at home xmtil he arrived.
El estd escribiendo.
He is writing.
Mi amigo estd para partir.
My friend is about to set out.
Estoy por no hacerlo.
I am inclined not to do it.
JSstamos sin comer.
We have not dined (or eaten).
Esta carta estd fecbada en Madrid.
This letter i3 dated from Madrid.
LESSON XXII
91
N. B. — As it frequently occurs that, in perfect accordance
with the rules of grammar, the same sentence may be construed
with either ser or estae, though conveying entirely different
ideas, it is essential to inquire thoroughly into the respective
value of these two verbs, in order to avoid the confusion which
must necessarily arise from their misapplication. The impor-
tant nature of this remark may be seen from the following
examples :
WITH SER.
Manuel es bueno.
Emanuel is good.
Juan es malo.
John is bad (or wicked),
Pedro es cansado.
Peter is tiresome.
Juana es viva,
Jane is lively.
Alejandro es callado.
Alexander is taciturn.
Este nino es limpio.
This child is cleanly.
Esta naranja es agria.
This is a sour orange {i. e. of the sour
species).
WITH ESTAE.
Manuel estd bueno.
Emanuel is well.
Juan estd malo.
John is sick.
Pedro estd cansado.
Peter is tired.
Juana estd viva.
Jane is alive.
Alejandro estd callado.
Alexander is silent.
Este nino estd limpio.
This child is clean.
Esta naranja estd agria.
This orange is sour {i. e. unripe).
What is said in the course of the present lesson relative
to ser and estae, being all that is requisite to enable the
student to determine which of the two is to be used in any
ordinary case, bis attention shall not again be called to them
until we come to treat of their idiomatic uses.
CONYERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jQud esta haciendo el muchacho ? Esta estudiando su leccion.
2. I Ha estudiado V. la suya ? La estudie ayer.
3. gDe quien es V. amado ? Soy amado de mis nifios.
4. ^Esta V. escribiendo sus ejercicios? No, seilor, estoy escribiendo
una carta.
5. I Esta Margarita cansada ? Margarita no esta cansada ; pero es
cansada.
6. I Porque esta Pedro tan callado ? Porque es callado.
7. I Para quien es esta carta ? Es para V.
92 LESSON XXII.
8. I En dondo esta situada Nueva York ? Esta situada entre el no del
Norte J el del Este.
9. ^Es V. Espafiol? No, seflor, soy Americano.
10. gEs ese caballero abogado? No, seflor, es medico.
11. ^06mo esta Alejandro? Esta bueno.
12. ^Es Alejandro buen muchacho? Es bueno.
13. ^Estuvo V. ayer en mi casa? Estuve alii hasta que su padre de
V. vino.
14. I De qu6 es este tintero ? Es de madera.
16. I Es grande su jardin de V. ? Es grandisimo ; pero esta en mal
estado.
16. ^En qu6 calle estd su casa de Y. ? Esta en la Cuarta avenida.
17. I Es herraosa la casa de su amigo de V. ? Es hermosisima.
18. ^Es Luisa feliz? Luisa es muy feliz; pero no esta contenta, por-
que no vino V. k verla (to see her).
19. ^Es y. enfermizo? No, seflor; pero estoy enfermo.
20. ^De quien es aquella casa tan alta? Es de un amigo mio; pero
quiere venderla porque esta mal situada en esta calle tan fea.
21. ^ Cuando parte V. ? No s6, quiero partir hoy, porque tengo mucho
que hacer.
22. I Parti6 su amigo de V. ayer ? No, seflor, ha partido hoy.
23. ^ ru6 V. a la iglesia el domingo pasado ? Si, seflor, voy a la iglesia
todos los domingos, cuando no estoy enfermo.
24. ^Yive su amigo do V. en el campo? No, seflor, reside en la
ciudad.
25. I Que hace en la ciudad ? Trabaja de abogado.
26. I Qu6 hace V. ? Yo vendo y compro : soy comerciante.
27. J Pas6 V. por Paris, cuando fu6 d Madrid ? Si, seflor, y por otra?
muchas ciudades de Francia y Espafia.
28. I Viaja V. mucho ? He viajado mucho ; pero no viry o mas.
29. I Viaj6 V. en( Si, seflor, estuve alU el afio pasado.
30. I Es bonito pais ? El pais es hermosisimo.
EXCERCISE.
1. Where is your house situated? In Eleventh street
2. Is it very large ? No^ sir, it is not as large as my uncle's.
8. Which of the three languages* English, French or Spanish, is th«
richest ? The Spanish is much richer than the other two.
4. Do you speak Spanish ? No, madam ; but I am learning it.
6. Do you and your sister take a lesson to-day ? No, our teacher is
not coming (docs not come) to-day, ho is sick.
* Longuaa.
LESSON XXII. 93
6. What lesson are jou at (in). We are at the twenty-second, one
of the most difficult in the grammar.
7. Is Louis very taciturn ? he speaks very little. No, sir, he is not
taciturn ; but he is silent to-day, because he is unwell.
8. Why is Henry so cheerful to-day ? He is cheerful because he has
received letters from his father and mother.
9. Is he a good boy ? He is a very good boy ; he is studying hial
Italian lesson.
10. How is your friend to-day ? He is much better than yesterday.
11. Where is that wine from that Charles is drinking ? It is from Spain.
12. Has your father been prudent in selling his horse ? He has been
most imprudent in selling it.
13. Whom do you love ? I love my father and mother, and I am loved
by them.
14. Where is that letter from? It is (cowes) from Paris.
15. Have you {plural) dined to-day? No, sir, we have not dined;
our servant is very ill.
16. What do you do every day to pass the time ? Sometimes I sing
and play on the piano, and at others I read the newspapers and go out
to walk {pasear).
17. What does Mr. Emanuel do ? He is a merchant.
18. For whom is that letter that Louisa is writing? It is for her
cousin {fern.).
19. Is Alexander a tiresome boy ? No, madam, but he went to walk
very early, and he is tired.
20. Was Louis at your house yesterday ? Yes, sir, he was there until
my uncle came.
21. How is your uncle to-day? He is very weU; he is about to set
out for Paris.
22. Is Henry tired ? No ; but he is very tiresome.
23. Whose book is that ? It is my friend's ; but he wants to sell it,
because it is very badly written.
24. How much does he want for it ? He wants five dollars and a half.*^
25. Is it in French ? No, sir, it is in Spanish.
26. When do you {plural) leave for Europe ? We leave very soon.
27. Have you a garden at your house ? Yes, sir, I have a very fine
garden.
28. Is it very large ? It is very large.
29. What is your friend doing in Paris ? He is studying law (for a
lawyer).
30. And you, what do you do in Philadelphia? I work as a notary.
31. Whom is this letter from? It is from the pianist, and for you.
* Medio.
94
LESSON XXIII.
LESSON XXIII
PXJTUEE
SIMPLE.
First Conjugation.
Habl-ar^.
I shall speak.
Habl-arAs.
Thou wilt speak.
Habl-ard.
He will speak.
Habl-ar6mos.
We shall speak.
Habl-ar^is.
You will speak.
Habl-aran.
They will speak.
Second Co
njugation.
Aprend-er6.
I shall learn.
Aprend-eras.
Thou wilt learn.
Apr end-era.
lie will learn.
Aprend-er^mos.
We shall learn.
Aprend-er6is.
You will learn.
Aprend-erdn.
They will learn.
Third Co
njugation.
Escrib-ir6.
I shall write.
Escrib-iras.
Thou wilt write.
Escrib-ird.
He will write.
Escrib-ir6mos.
We shall write.
Escrib-ir6i8.
You will write.
Ecrib-irdn.
They will write.
Desear.
To desire.
Practicar.
To practise.
Bailar.
To dance.
Principiar.
To commence, to begin.
Acabar.
To finish.
Medio.
~~ Half.
Pr6ximo.
Next.
Ent6ncea.
Then.
Anoche.
Last night.
Antes de anoche.
Tlie night before last.
Manana.
To-morrow.
LESSON XXIII.
95
Pasado mailana.
The day after to-morrow.
La mafiana.
The morning.
Si.
If.
Gusto.
Taste, pleasure.
Noche.
Night.
Deseo.
Desire, mind.
Gracias.
(to give) Thanks.
Negocios.
Business, occupa-
Familia.
Family.
tion.
Practica.
Practice.
Oficio.
Office.
Teoria.
Theory.
Minuto.
Afinute.
Hora.
Hour.
Segundo.
Second.
Polca.
Polka.
Yals.
Waltz.
Lengua.
Tongue, language.
Idioma.
Language.
COMPOSITION.
I Estudiara V. mafiana su leccion de es-
panol ?
Si, senor, la estudiar^ mafiana por la
mafiana.
I A que hora principiara V. ?
Principiare a las tres de la mafiana.
Sefiorita, ^ qui6re V. bailar un vals ?
Gracias, caballero, no se bailar vals.
6 Bailara Y. una polca ?
Si, sefior, con mucho gusto.
Hablo mal el espafiol, porque no lo
practice.
V. necesita practicar mucho para apren-
der una lengua.
Practicare en Espafia, porque ir6 alii
muy pronto.
jjQue dias toma Y. sus lecciones de
' piano ?
Las tomo los lunes y los viemes, a las
once de la mafiana.
iA qu6 hora tomara Y. las lecciones
de Frances.
Las tomar^ a las diea.
i Que hora es ?
£s la una.
Will you study your Spanish lesson to-
morrow ?
Yes, sir, I will study it to-morrow
morning.
At what hour will you commence ?
I shall commence at three o'clock in
the morning.
WiU you (dance a) waltz, Miss ?
Thank you, sir, I do not know how to
waltz.
Will you dance a polka ?
Yes, sir, with great pleasure.
I speak Spanish badly, because I do
not practise it.
You require to practise a great deal in
order to learn a language.
I will practise in Spain, because I shall
go there very soon.
On what days do you take your piano
lessons ?
I take them on Mondays and Fridays,
at 11 o'clock in the morning.
At what hour will you take your French
lessons ?
I shall take them at 10 (o'clock).
What o'clock is it ?
It is one (o'clock).
96
LESSON XXIII.
Son las once y cuarto.
Son las tres m6no8 diez minutos.
Mafiana ir6 al campo, y pasado maria-
na tendre el gusto de pasar el dia
con V.
Gracias ; entonces ser6 muy feliz.
i Bailar6mos en su casa de V. ?
Sf, senor, bailaremos, cantar^mos, toca-
r^mos y practicar^mos el espanol
toda la noche.
Muy bien, muy bien ; ert6nees ser^mos
mas que felices, seremos felicisimos.
I En donde pas6 V. ayer la noche ?
La pas 6 con mis amigos los senores
Martinez y su familia.
i Cu4nto tiempo estuvo V. en su casa ?
Fui k las siete de la noche y sail a los
once y media.
It is a quarter-past eleven.
It is ten minutes to three.
I shall go to the country to-morrow,
and shall have the pleasure of spend-
ing the day after to-morrow with you.
Thank you ; then I shall be very happy.
Shall we dance at your house ?
Yes, sir, we shall dance, smg, play and
practise Spanish all the evening (the
whole night).
Very well, very well ; then we shall be
more than happy ; we shall be most
happy.
Where did you spend the evening
yesterday ?
I spent it with my friends, Mr. and Mrs.
Martinez and (their) family.
How long were you at their bouse ?
I went at seven in the evening and left
(went out) at half past eleven o'clock.
EXPLANATION.
103. Future simple. — ^This tense affirms what is yet to be
or to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as,
Sere comerciante. I I shall be a merchant.
Juan estudiard mafiana. | John will study to-morrow.
This tense is also used as imperative, as will be seen when
that mood is introduced.
104. The DEFINITE ARTICLE is to be used before numerals
indicating the hour of the day, and the word o'clock is never
translated into Spanish ; as,
A las tres de la tarde. | At three o'clock in (of) the afternoon.
105. NociiE (evening or night), commences at sundown;
so that evening and night both are translated into Spanish by
nocJie.
106. The conjunction si, when conditional, does not gov-
ern the subjunctive in Spanish as it does in English, unless the
latter be followed by should, as will be seen in the proper
place ; in all other cases, si is followed by the present of the
indicative ; as.
Si V. tiene papel, ^ escribir& ? | If you have paper, will you write ?
LESSON XXIII. 97
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gCuanJo principiara Y. a escribir sus ejercicios? Principiar6
mailana.
2. ^ A. qu6 hora acabara Y. ? Acabar6 a las diez j media.
3. Alejandro, ^que quieres ser, abogado 6 escritor? No sere ni abo-
gado ni escritor, sere cotoerciante.
4. Senorita, ^quiere Y. bailar una polca? Gracias, caballero, no
bailare, porque estoy muy cansada.
5. I Bailara Y. la proxima ? Si, sefior, con mucho gusto.
6. I Practicard Y. el piano hoy ? No, sefior, hoy no tengo tiempo ;
pero practicare mafiana por la mafiana.
7. ^Que hara Y. mafiaDa? Mafiana por la mafiana escribir^ mis
ejercicios y practicare el espafiol con mi hermano.
8. I Qu6 dias toma Y. leccion de piano ? Los liines y viemes.
9. I A que hora tomara Y. su leccion mafiana ? A las once y cuarto.
10. ^ Yendrd Y. 4 mi casa en el campo ? Ir6 pasado mafiana y tendr6
el gusto de pasar el dia con Y.
11. ^Bailar^mos en su casa de Y. ? Si, sefior, bailar^mos, cantar^mos
y practicar6mos el espafiol toda la noche.
12. ^En d6nde pasara Y. mafiana la noche ? La pasar6 con mis ami-
gos los sefiores Martinez y su familia.
13. I A qu6 hora iran Yds. alii ? Ir6mos 4 las siete de la noche.
14. I Hasta qu6 hora estaran Yds ? Hasta la una y media.
15. jEstara Y. mafiana por la mafiana en su cuarto ? Estar6 hasta las
nueve y diez minutos.
16. gEs triste su hermano de Y. ? No, sefiora, no es triste ; pero esta
triste.
17. ^Es Y. feliz ? Soy felicisimo ; pero no estoy contento esta tarde.
18. ^Es Y. mayor que su hermano ? No, sefiora, soy el menor de toda
.a familia.
19. jQui^n es el mayor? Juan es el mayor.
20. I Sale Y. de casa temprano ? Salgo tempranisimo.
21. I A qu6 hora? Salgo a las ocho y media.
22. I Salio Y. ayer tan temprano ? No, sefior, ayer sail mas tarde ;
pero hoy he salido temprano.
23. I A que hora saldra Y. mafiana ? Mafiana saldr^ a la una de la tarde.
24. I Para quien escribe Y. una carta ? Escribo al abogado, por el
pobre Juan, que lo necesita para un negocio.
25. I Partira Y. mafiana para la Habana ? No, sefior, no partir4 hasta
la semana proxima.
V 26. ^Es este caballo muyfuerte? Es fortisimo ; pero ese que estd
ahi es mas fuerte y el que esta alii al otro lado es el mas fuerte.
5
98 LESSON XXIII.
EXERCISE.
1. When shall you commence to study music ? I desire to commence
next month.
2. Do you know how * to dance? I do not dance very well ; but I
am going to take lessons soon.
3. Do you study in the morning or in the evening? I study in the
morning.
4. At what o'clock do you take your lessons ? At a quarter to three
in the afternoon (tarde).
5. Does your teacher come so late ? Yes, he has a great many pupils
this year.
6. Will you dance a waltz, Miss ? Thank you, sir, I danced so much
the night before last that I am tired.
7. Then it will be better to talk. I shall talk with much pleasure.
8. When shall your cousin write his exercise ? He shall write it to-
morrow morning.
9. At what time do you receive your newspapers ? I receive them
every day at eight o'clock in the morning.
10. Mr. Louis, will you come and dine at my house? I shall be very
happy to go with you.
11. How did you spend the evening at your friend's? Very well; his
wife (lady) is most amiable.
12. Has she not travelled in Europe? No, sir; but they spoke last
night of travelling very soon.
13. Is their family large ? No, they have no children.
14. Does not your friend speak Spanish very well ? Yes, sir, he some-
times even passes for a Spaniard.
15. Did you practise much with him ? No ; his cousin speaks French
very well, and so we spoke that language all the evening.
16. Where shall you spend this evening? I do not know; but the
day after to-morrow we shall go to your house.
17. Thank you! then I shall be more than happy; I shall be most
happy.
18. How many seconds make a minute? Sixty.
19. How many minutes make an hour? Sixty minutes.
20. And bpw many hours has a day ? A day has twenty-four hours,
A week seven days, a month four weeks, and a year twelve months.
21. Peter, what o'clock is it ? It is half-past two.
22. Then I am going to take my lesson : will you come ? No, thank
you ; I wish to read this morning's paper.
23. Until what o'clock shall you be ? I shall finish at one,
* l/ow is not translated when It does not refer to the manner of doing anytlilng.
LESSON XXIV.
99
24. Peter! Sir?
25. Has the tailor finished my vest? Yes, sir, here he is with the
vest and the coat.
26. When will the shoemaker make my boots ? He will make them
for next Tuesday.
27. Have you any business in Philadelphia ? Yes, sir, I am writing
the history of Louis XVI., for a gentleman of that city.
28. Mr. Henry, are you happy? Yes, sir, thank you, I am very
liappy ; but I am not very contented this evening.
29. Why are you not contented? Because my father has not written
to me this week.
LESSON XXIV.
COMPOUND FUTUEE.
Habr6 escrito.
I shall have
)
Habras escrito.
Thou wilt have
> written.
Habra escrito.
He will have
i
Habr6mos escrito.
We shall have
)
Habreis escrito.
You will have
y written.
Habran escrito.
They will have
)
Coser.
To sew.
Lavar.
To wash.
Barrer.
To sweep.
Pasear.
To walk (take a walk).
Dedal.
Thimble.
Aguja.
Needle.
Hilo.
Thread.
Primavera.
Spring.
Verano.
Summer.
Accion.
Action.
Invierno.
Winter.
Nacion.
Nation.
Otofio.
Autumn (Fall).
Afectacion.
Affectation.
Enero.
January.
Navegacion.
Navigation.
Febrero.
February.
A^tacion.
Agitation.
Marzo.
March.
Aprobacion.
Approbation.
Abril.
April.
Aceptacion.
Acceptation.
Mayo.
May.
Atraccion.
Attraction.
Junio.
June.
Oonversacion.
Conversation.
Julio.
July.
Direccion.
Direction.
Agosto.
August.
Circunspeccion.
Circumspection,
100
LESSON XXIV,
Setiembre.
Octubre.
Noviembre.
Diciembre.
September,
October.
November.
December*
Clasificacion.
Coleccion.
Combinacion.
Comparacion.
Composicion.
Reputacion.
Classification.
Collection.
Combination.
Comparison.
Composition.
Reputation.
COMPOSITION.
Habr6 escrito mi leccion 4ntes de ir a
casa del profesor.
Habr^ acabado a las diez.
El abogado acaba de hablar.
Yo acabo de estudiar mi leccion.
La lavandera habra acabado de lavar
k las cuatro.
i A cu&ntos estamos ?
Estamos & seis.
^ Que dia del mcs es hoy ?
Es el primero.
6 Qu6 fecha tiene esa carta ?
El primero de Enero de mil ochocientos
sesenta y seis.
4 En que ano fu6 V. a Mejico ?
Fui en Setiembre de mil ochocientos
cincuenta y dos.
^ Ir& V. este verano k Europa ?
No, seSor, ir6 en el inviemo.
I Pasear4 V. mucho esta primavera ?
No, sefior, trabajar^ mucho.
1 shall have written my lesson before
going to the professor's.
I shall have finished at ten o'clock.
The lawyer has just spoken.
I have just studied my lesson.
The washerwoman will have finished
washing at four o'clock.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is to-day ?
It is the first.
What is the date of that letter ?
January 1st, 1866.
In what year did you go to Mexico ?
I went in September, 1852.
Will you go to Europe this summer ?
No, sir, I shall go in the winter.
Will you walk much this spring ?
No, sir, I shall work a great deal
EXPLANATION.
107. The COMPOUND future affirms something future that
will have taken place before or at the time of some other future
action or event expressed in the sentence ; and is composed of
the simple future of the verb haber, to have, and the past parti-
ciple of another verb ; as,
Habr6 escrito mi ejercicio Antes de
ir & casa del profesor.
IIabr6 acabado k las diez.
I will have written my exercise before
going to the professor's.
I will have finished at ten o'clock.
108. AcABAB DB is employed before an infinitive in the
LESSON XXIV. 101
sense of to have just, and the infinitive is translated in English
as a past participle ; as,
Acaba de hablar. I He has just spoken.
Acaho de estudiar. | 1 have just studied.
N . B. — In order to facilitate the acquisition of words, we
shall give now and then a few rules, with the help of which the
learner will be enabled to convert several thousand English
words into Spanish. And, although we have proposed not to
introduce many new words or elements at one time, these
observations will enable the pupil to learn a greater number of
words with little or no difficulty at all, from the striking re-
semblance that those words bear to the English ones.
109. The greater part of English nouns ending in tion are
rendered into Spanish by changing the letter t into c ; as, appro-
bation, aprohacion. It is to be observed that the only conso-
nants that can be doubled in Spanish are c, n and r. All nouns
of the above termination are feminine.
HO. The days of the month are all counted in Spanish by
the cardinal numbers, preceded by the article, except the first
day; and there are several forms of asking the day of the
month : e. a.^
J
^ Que dia del mes tenemos ?
4 Que dia es hoy ?
^ A cuantos estamos del mes ?
What day of the month is it ?
There is no preference between these ; but the answer must
be made in the same form as the question ; as.
^ Que dia tenemos ?
Tenemos el seis.
^ A cuantos estamos ?
Estamos a dos.
^ Que dia es hoy ?
Es el primero.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the sixth.
What day of the month is it ?
It is the second.
What day of the month is to-day ?
It is the first.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
V 1. g Ilabra Y. acabado de escribir su leccion a las diez y media ? No,
8^; pero la habr6 acabado antes de ir a casa del profesor.
2. I Ha hablado aquel abogado ? No, sefior, acaba de hablar este.
3. ^Ha hablado bien? Muy bien, pero con afectacion.
102 LESSON XXIV.
4. I Hard V. una buena composicion para la leccion pr6xima ? SI,
Befior, si tengo tiempo, la har6.
5. ^Lava bien su lavandera de V. ? Lava muy bien.
6. ^ A d6nde envia V. sus nifios ? Los envio i pasear con la criada.
7. I A donde ? A la plaza de Madison.
8. I Estd cerca de su casa de V. ? Esta. muy cerca.
9. ^Barri6 el criado ayer mi cuarto? No, sefior, no lo barri6 ayer<
pero lo ha barrido hoy.
10. ^Lo barrera maflana ? Lo habrd barrido dntes de las nueve.
11. Muchacho, gcsta el sastre en la sastreria? No, sefior, acaba do
salir.
12. ^ A qu6 hora principiaron Yds. a bailar? Principiamos i las diez
de la noche.
IB. I Desea Y. practicar el ingles ? Si, sefior, si tengo tiempo princi-
piar6 pasado mafiana.
14. ^ Donde esta su amigo ? Estd viajando por Francia.
15. ^ Ama su hermana de Y. mucho d sus hijos? Si, sefior, los ama
uiuchisimo.
16. jSaldrd Y. muy pronto para Europa? Quiero salir mafiana.
17. jSabe Y. bailar el vals? No, sefior, pero s6 bailar el rigodon y
la polka.
18. ^De donde vienen Yds.? Yenimos de Francia, y vamos para
Filadelfia.
19. ^ Quiere Y. salir d pasear ? Muy bien, ir6mos al Parque Central.
20. I Qui6n lavo estos pafiuelos ? Estan muy mal lavados. Su lavan-
dera de Y. los lav6.
21. ^D6nde paso Y. el verano? Lo pas6 en el campo. ^Yelinviemo?
En la ciudad.
22. I Cudles son los meses mas alegres del afio? Los de la primavera,
23. I Sabe Y. la direccion de la casa de su hermano de Y. ? Si, sefior,
ealle Catorce, ntiraero ciento veinte y cinco.
24. I A qu6 hora comen Yds. ? Coraemos d las tres de la tarde.
25. I Qu6 hora tiene Y. ? Tengo las dos y veinte.
26. j A qu6 hora salieron sus hcrmanas para el parque ? Salieron a las
seis y media de la mafiana.
27. J Y d qu6 hora volvieron ? A las once m6nos cuarto.
28. i Buenos dias! — Buenos dias. — ^Esta Y. bueno ? Muy bueno, grtk
das. i Y su familia de Y. ? Muy buena, gracias.
29. I Baila Y. la polca ? No, sefior, estoy principiando d aprenderla.
LESSON XXIV, 103
EXERCISE.
1. When shall your uncle have finished his letter ? He shall have it
finished at eight o'clock.
2. When shall you have your letter written ? I shall have it written
before going to the professor's.
3. When shall the notary make the conveyance (writing) ? He has jusi
taade it.
4. Shall your servant have swept my room before the lesson hour to-
morrow ? Yes, sir, she shall have it swept at six o'clock.
5. What day of the month is it? It is the thirteenth.
6. Does your washerwoman come to wash in your house ? She does
not, but she washes very well.
7. How many lessons do those gentlemen take every month ? They
take four every week ; that makes sixteen every month.
8. Which are the best months for walking? The three months of
spring, and the three of autumn (or fall).
9. Where are you coming (do you come) irom ? I am coming from
walking.
10. Will you give* me a needle and thread and a thimble to sew?
Here is the needle ; I am going to look for the thread and thimble.
11. In what year did your sister Margaret go to England? She went
in June, 1865.
12. What is the date of that letter? Madrid, Tth July, 1866.
13. Shall you go to Europe this summer ? Ko, madam, I shall not go
befone next spring.
14. Is December a good month for travelling? No, it is one of the
worst in tlie year.
15. How did you {plural) spend the day yesterday? We walked in
t\iQ Central Park.
16. Did you walk the whole day ? No, we walked until twelve o'clock,
and then we read and played on the piano.
17. Did you not pass the evening at Mr. Martinez's? No, we did not
go out all (in all) the evening, Margaret was a little sick.
18. Do you know which are the longest months ? Yes ; they are Jan-
uary, March, May, July, August, October and December.
19. And which are the shortest? April, June, September and No-
vember.
20. But what do you do with February ? February is the shortest of
all ; it has but twenty-eight days.
21. Shall you walk much this spring? No, miss, I shall work a great
deal.
* Dar.
104
LESSON XXV,
v^
22. When shall the tailor sew my vest ? He shall sew it to-morrow
evening.
23. Has the lawyer not spoken ? He has just spoken.
24. Until what hour did he speak ? Until half-past one.
25. Did he speak in Spanish ? No, he spoke in French to-day ; but
to-morrow he shall speak in Spanish.
26. Do you not wish to practise Italian ? Yes, sir, and I shall prac-
tise the day after to-morrow, if I have time.
27. If your teacher comes to-day, will you take a lesson ? I shall
take it if he comes.
28. Does he pronounce weU? He pronounces very well, but with
some aifectation.
29. How many Spanish words do you know that end in cion ? I know
very many.
30. Which are they ? Conversation, approbation, agitation, complica-
tion, classification, intention, desertion, circumspection, nation, naviga-
tion, and very many others.
LESSON XXY
Conocer.
I To know, to be acquainted with.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
Conozco.
I know.
Conoces.
Thou knowest.
Conoce.
He knows.
Conocemos.
We know.
Coneceis.
You know.
Conocen.
They know.
PRETERIT
DEFmriE.
Conoci.
I knew.
Conociste.
Thou knewest.
Conoci6.
He knew.
Conocimos.
We knew.
Conocisteis.
You knew.
Conocieron.
Tliey knew.
LESSON XXV.
105
FUTUEE
SIMPLE.
Conocer^.
I shall know.
Conoceras.
Thou wilt know.
Conocera.
He will know.
Conocer6mos.
We shall know.
Conocer^is.
You will know.
Conoceran.
They will know.
PEETEBIT
CNDEFINITE.
He conociilo.
1 I have known.
COMPOUND FUTUEE.
Habre conocido.
1 I shall have known.
Gozar.
To enjoy.
Prometer.
To promise.
Una vez.
Once.
Dos veces, &c.
Twice.
Alto.
High, loud.
Bajo.
Low.
Siempre.
Always.
Nunca.
Never.
Jamas.
Never.
Ya.
Already, yet {interrogativelyy
Ya {with a negative).
No longer.
Aun.
StiU, yet, even.
Todavia.
Still, yet, even.
A menudo.
Often.
Demasiado.
Too, too much.
Bastante.
Enough, pretty.
Frio. Cold (the).
Verguenza. Shame.
Calor. Heat.
Eazon. Reason.
Miedo. Fear.
Sed. Thirst.
Sueflo. Sleep.
Ldstima. Pity.
Harabre. Hunger.
Salud. Health.
Valor. Courage, worth, value.
Maestro. Master, teacher.
Moda. Fashion.
Maestra. Mistress (school)
V I Conoce V. k ese hombre ?
Ko lo conozco ; pero se quien le co-
noce.
COMPOSITION.
Do you know that man ?
I do not know him ; but I know who
knows him.
:%
106
LESSON XXV,
V i Porqu6 no aprende V. bus lecciones ?
Conozco que he hccho mal en no
aprenderlas ; pero prometo saber-
las para maiiana.
^ Sabe V. francos ?
No, senor, pero voy & aprenderlo;
i conoce V. un buen maestro ?
i Estudia Y. aun (todavia) el espanol ?
Ya no lo estudio.
6 Sabe V. hablarlo ya ?
No, todavia.
V 6 Ha principiado ya su hermano de V.
8U3 lecciones ?
^ Ta ha principiado ; pero no las apren-
dera jara4s (nunca), porque no estu-
dia bastante.
j Cuantas veces ha estado V. este mes
en el teatro ?
He estado una vez ; pero el mes pasa-
do estuve tres veces.
I Tiene V. miedo de su maestro ?
No tengo miedo de 61 ; pero tengo ver-
giienza de 61.
^ De qui6n tiene V. 14stima ?
Tengo 14stima de ese pobre hombre.
i Tiene V. calor 6 frio ?
No tengo ni calor ni frio ; tengo ham-
bre y sed.
I Tiene razon el abogado ?
El abogado no tiene razon.
i Tiene 61 razon alguna vez ?
Tiene razon algunas veces, pero no
siempre.
*i Hard V. eso otra vez ?
No lo har6 jam&s (nunca).
i Amar& V. & su amigo ?
Le amar6 por siempre jam&s.
i Ha leido V. jara.48 ese libro ?
^ Nunca jam&s lo har6.
i Tiene su madre de V. buena salud ?
Si, senor, goza de muy buena salud.
i Tiene V. hambre 6 sed ?
No tengo ni hambre ni sod, tengo
sueno.
Why do you not learn your lessons ?
I know that I have done wrong in not
learning them ; but I promise to
know them for to-morrow.
Do you know French ?
No, sir, but I am going to learn it ; do
you know a good teacher ?
Do you still study Spanish ?
I study it no longer.
Do you know how to speak it already ?
Not yet.
Has your brother commenced hia les-
sons yet ?
He has (already) commenced ; but he
will never learn them, for he does
not study enough.
How many times have you been in the
theatre this month ?
I have been once ; but last month I
was there three times.
Are you afraid of your master?
I am not afraid of him ; but I am
ashamed before him.
On whom do you take pity ?
I take pity on that poor man.
Are you warm or cold ?
I am neither warm nor cold ; I am
hungry and thirsty.
Is the lawyer right ?
The lawyer is not right
Is he right sometimes ?
He is right sometimes, but not alwaya
Will you do that again (another time) t
I will never do it.
Will you love your friend ?
I shall love him always (for ever).
Have you ever read that book ?
I shall never do it.
Is your mother in good health (hat
your mother good health)?
Yes, sir, she enjoys very good health.
Are you hungry or thirsty ?
I am neither hungry nor thirsty, I am
sleepy.
LESSON XXV. 107
EXPLANATION.
111. Saeer, to know, and conocee, to be acquainted with.
'—It must be observed, in order not to confound these two
verbs, that saber is employed to signify the act of knowing,
being informed of, having learned, or having a knowledge of
something ; whereas conocer is used to express the fact of
being acquainted with, perceiving, or being able to distinguish
persons or things ; as,
I Sabe V. quien conoce a este hombre ? | Do you know who knows that man ?
112. AuN, YA, ToDAViA. — The adverb aun indicates that
the subject of the sentence continues in the same state as be-
fore; quite the reverse with the adverb pa, which always
signifies discontinuance of a former state (expressed or under-
stood) ; e. g.,
I Escribe Y. aun ? I Do you write yet ?
No escribo ya. | I do not write any longer,
Todavia, yet, still, is synonimous with aun ; as,
Est4 trabajando todavia (or aun). | He is still working.
Once, twice, &c., are rendered in Spanish by una vez, dos
veces, &G.
Miedo, valor, vergilenza, Idstima, tiempo, take the preposi-
tion de after them ; as,
Tengo miedo de salir. I I am afraid to go out.
Tengo verguenea de ese hombre. | I am ashamed of that man.
113. When in English the verb to he precedes the adjec-
tives hungry, thirsty, afraid, ashamed, right, wrong, warm, cold^
sleepy, it is changed into the Spanish verb tener, and the adjec-
tive into a corresponding substantive ; as,
^ Tiene Y. miedo ? Are you afraid ?
6 Tiene Y. sed ? Are you thirsty ?
^ Tiene Y. calor. Are you warm ?
^ Tiene Y. frio ? Are you cold ?
114. Jamas and nunca may be used indiscriminately, or
one for the other ; as,
Jamds (or nunca) le he conocido. ( I have never been acquainted with him.
108 LBSSON XXV.
Sometimes they are used together, to give more energy to
the expression ; as,
Nunca jamas lo har6. j Never, no never, shall I do so.
But Jamds has the peculiarity of being used after the words
por siempre and para siempre, for ever ; where, instead of being
^ negative, it affirms, meaning eternally ; as,
Le amar6 por siempre jamds. | I will love him forever.
Sometimes it is used alone interrogatively, meaning ever ; as,
I Ha leido V. jamds ese libro ? | Have you ever read that book ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^D6nde conoci6 Y. a su araigo? Le conoci en Paris el inviemo
pasado.
2. I Sabe V. qm6n conoce a ese horabre ? Mi padre le conoce muj
bien.
3. I Cudndo conocer6 a su hermano de V. ? En el otofio le conocera V.
4. I Ha conocido V. en L6ndres a ese caballero ? Si, seftor, le conoci
alii el ano pasado.
5. I C6mo esta su hijo de Y. ? Mai ; no goza de buena salud.
6. I Bail6 Y. mucho en el baile de anoche ? Si, sefior, muchisimo.
7. I Quien es ese caballero ? Es un escritor de gran reputacion.
8. I Tienen mucha aceptacion sus obras ? Tieneu muchisima.
9. I Sabe Y. lo que ban prometido sus amigas de Y. ? No lo s4. — ^Han
prometido estudiar sus lecciones.
10. i Yendra Y. maflana 4 comer con nosotros? No, sefior, he prome-
tido comer con mis amigos los Alemanes.
11. ^ Ilabla ya espaflol su primo de Y. ? No lo habla aun, y no lo
hablarti jamas (nunca), porque no estudia bastante.
>|l2. ^Barrio Y. mi cuarto? No, sefior, pero prometo barrerlo mafiana
temprano.
13. J Cuantas veces prometi6 Y. buscar mi sombrero ? Jamas lo pro-
meti.
14. I No desea Y. ya ir d su pais? Lo deseo muchisimo.
15. I Sale Y. ya d pasear todos losdias ? No salgo sino algunas veces.
16. I L]ev6 Y. ya mi carta al correo ? Todavia no la he Uevado.
17. I No ha estado Y. jamds en Paris ? No, sefior, jamds he estado.
18. J No ha Icido Y. jamds la historia de los Estados Unidos? Si, la
he leido una vez.
19. i Ilabla bien el abogado? Habla. hien, pero mny b^o.
20. I Comprende Y. ya el espafiol ? Si hablan alto, y despacio, si, sefior
LESSON XXV. 109
21. gTiene V. bastante que hacer ? Tengo demasiado.
22. I Cuantos anos tiene Y. ? Tengo veinte j uno.
23. I Cuando vi6 Y. por ^tima vez a su familia ? El dia seis de Se-
tiembre del afio de mil ochocientos cincuenta y cinco.
24. I Cuando conoci6 Y. al pianista ? Le conoci ayer por primera vez.
25. ^ Han salido sus heraianas para el campo ? Todavia no, pero sal-
dran muy pronto.
26. I Que hace su padre de Yds. ? Esta gozando del buen tiempo en
el campo.
27.« g Qu6 tiene su nii5o de Y. ? Tiene frio j sueQo.
28. I Tienen ellos hambre ? No, sefior, tienen sed.
29. 2 Tiene Y. valor para hacerlo ? Si, sefior, pero tengo verguenza.
30. I'^o tiene Y. lastima de esa mujer? Si, sefior, tengo lastima de
ella, porque no tiene buena salud.
31. g Tiene suefio su madre de Y. ? No, sefior, pero esta muy cansada.
EXERCISE.
1. Do you know that man? Yes, sir, that gentleman is my uncle.
2. Are you still writmg ? No, I am no longer writing.
3. Has Charles come from the country yet ? No, he has not come yet.
4. Have you (plural) ever read the History of Civilization by Guizot?
No, but we shall read it next spring.
5. Are you not ashamed of not having read the History of the
United States ? I am not ashamed, because I am too young to read his-
tory.
6. When shall you commence to read it? I shall commence next
year.
7. Yery well ; it is a useful study (estudio),
8. Does your aunt enjoy good health ? Yes, sir, thank you, she en-
joys very good health.
9. Are you cold, madam ? No, thank you, I wish to go out a minute,
because I am very warm in this room.
10. Is it ten o'clock yet ? No, it is but a quarter past eight.
11. Who is that gentleman to whom your cousin spoke last night at
Tthe concert ? I do not know him.
12. And that gentleman who came this morning to your house, who
is he ? He is- a Spanish writer who enjoys a high (great) reputation.
13. Has he written many works? He has already written many
books, and he is going to write a history of Spain.
14. Do you know Sir Walter Scott's works ? Yes, I have read them all.
15. Are they not much esteemed in Europe (have they not much esti'
mation) ? Yes, very much.
110 LESSON XXV.
16. When did your brother become acquainted with his {el) Spanish
friend? Last year, in London.
17. Are you sleepy, young ladies? Yes, we are very tired, thirsty
and sleepy {tener sed y sueno),
18. Will you take a little wine ? No, thank you, we never take wine.
19. Does your mother know Emanuel's address (direction) ? Yes, here
it is in this letter.
20. Will you read it ? With much pleasure. Emanuel Martmez, Esq.
(don), 113 Broadway. A thousand thanks.
21. Did your cousin's {fern.) friends commence their lessons the
other day ? Yes, they commenced, and are much pleased (content) with
them.
22. Why does the lawyer speak so low ? I do not know.
23. Does he not speak as low as his brother loud ? He speaks low
from (by) affectation.
24.- Which of your servants {fern.) sews the best? None of them
sews.
25. How many conjugations has the Spanish language ? Three regu-
lar {regular) coiyugations, and several irregular {irregular) ones.
26. Have you ever been in Philadelphia ? I have never been there
yet ; but I shall go next year.
27. Did your father write the letter for Peter yesterday ? No, but he
promised to write it the day after to-morrow.
28. Has your shoemaker enough to do ? Yes, sir, he has too much
to do.
29. Will you always love your brothers and sisters? Yes, I shall
love them forever.
30. Do you not pity that man ? I do pity him, for he has nothing to
do.
81. Have you money enough to buy a house? Yes, sir, I have
enough.
LESSON XXVI.
La/r. I To give.
PRESENT rNDIOATTVE.
Doy, das, da. 1 1 give, tliou givest, he gives.
Damos, dais, dan. I We give, you give, they give.
LESSON XXVI.
Ill
PEETEEIT DEFINITE,
Bi, diste, di6. I I gave, tliou gavest, he gave.
Dimos, disteis, dieron. I We gave, you gave, they gave.
Dar6, daras, dara.
Dar^mos, dar6is, daran.
FUTUEE SIMPLE.
I shall give, thou wilt give, he will
give.
We shall give, you shall give, they
shall give.
PEETEEIT mDEFINIE.
He dado, has dado, etc. | I have given, thou hast given, &c
COMPOUND FUTIJEE.
Habr6 dado,
etc.
I shall have given, &o.
Ganar
To gain, earn, win.
Sing. Nbm.
Yo.
L
l8t Obj,
2d Obj,
Me.
Ami.
\
Me, or to me.
Plur. Kom.
Nosotros.
We.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Nos.
A nosotros.
f
Us, or to us.
Sing, Nom,
Tii.
Thou.
\8t Obj.
2d Obj,
T6.
Ati.
Thee, or to thee.
Plur, Horn,
Yosotros.
Ye, you.
\8t Obj,
2d Obj,
Os.
A vosotros.
Ye, you, or to you.
Sing. Nom.
£1.
He.
\8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Le.
A a.
Him, or to him.
J*lur. Nom.
Ellos.
They.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
Los, les.
A ellos.
Them, to them.
Sing. Nom,
Ella.
She.
l8t Obj.
2d Obj.
La,le.
A ella.
Her, to her
112
LESSON XXVI
Plur, Nom. Ellas.
\st 01)j. Las, les.
2d Ohj. A ellas.
Sing, arid Plur.
Ut Ohj. Se.
. 2d Obj. A si.
Neuter Form,
Nbm. Ello.
1st Ohj. Lo.
2d Ohj. A ello.
They.
Them, to them.
f Himself, herself^ itself, them-
< selves; or to himself, to her
[ self, to itself, to themselves.
It.
It.
To it.
COMPOSITION.
i Conoce V. aquellas senoras ? Deseo
conocerlas.
Conociendolas las amar4 V.
i Me promete V. llevanne k su casa ?
Doy 4 V. mi palabra.
}, Qu^ le di6 k V. mi prime ?
Quiso darme unas flores ; pero yo no
quise recibirlas.
^ Quieres venir comnigo al teatro ?
No ir4 contigo, porque mi padre quiere
llevarme consigo.
i Son estas flores para ti ?
No son para mi ; son para Y.
Yo te necesito.
Ella nos hablo en el teatro.
t\ me amara eon el tiempo.
Nosotros le hablamos en el concierto.
Yo le escribi una carta.
Ella lea did un libro.
Do you know those ladies ? I desire to
know them.
On knowing them you will love them.
Do you promise me to take me to their
house?
I will give you my word.
What did my cousin give you ?
He wanted to give me some flowers ; but
I would not receive them.
Wilt thou come with me to the theatre ?
I will not go with thee, because my
father wants to take me with him.
Are these flowers for thee ?
They are not for me, they are for you.
I want thee.
She spoke to us in the theatre.
He will love me in time.
We spoke to him at the concert
I wrote him a letter.
She gave them a book.
EXPLANATION.
115. Subject or Nominative. — To what has already been
said, in Lesson X., relative to pronouns as subjects or nominative
'cases to verbs, we shall here simply add, that they may at all
times precede their verbs, unless the latter be in the imperative
mood, or be used interrogatively ; examples :
Yo estudio.
Til escribes.
Vengan ellos.
i Lee ella i
I study.
Thou writest.
Let them come.
Does she read.
LESSON XXVI. 113
116. Personal Peonouns. — ^In Spanish there is a pecu-
liarity to be observed amongst the personal pronouns : that is,
that they have two objective cases ; one of which can never
be used with prepositions, and the other never without one.
117. The Objective Case, when not preceded by aprepo-
Bition, is affixed to infinitives, imperatives and gerunds ; as,
Amar/a.
Amemos/e.
AmandoZos.
Habiendo/a amado.
C6mpra?e.s algo.
Habiendo/os hallado.
To love her.
Let us love him.
Loving them.
Having loved her.
Buy them something.
Having found them.
118. In some tenses the verb drops the final letter in the
first and second persons plural, when they are followed by nos
or 08 ; as,
Amdmonos instead of amdmosnos, I "We loved each other.
Amaxfs instead of amados. \ Love each other.
In the first case, the reason of this is perhaps to soften the
pronunciation of the first word ; and in the second the d is
dropped, in order that the imperative be not confounded with
the past participle. Nevertheless, we say idos^ go, and not
108 ; but this is the only exception to the rule.
119. The objective case may sometimes elegantly follow
the verb, but rarely when the sentence does not begm by the
vei'b ; as,
Llevome al teatro. | He took me to the theatre.
120. When one verb governs another in the infinitive
mood, the objective case referring to the second verb may be
placed either before the govermng verb, or after the governed
.one; as,
Quiero llevarle, or le quiero Uevar. | I wish to take him.
121. Prepositions, when expressed, always govern the
second objective case ; as,
Para mi.
Sin ti.
Hacla ellos.
For me.
Without thee.
Towards them.
114 LESSON XXVI.
122. Mf, Tf, sf, when preceded by con, take go after them,
and are joined to the preposition ; as,
Conmigo.
Contigo.
Con«igo.
With me.
With thee.
With him, her, them, it.
123. Entee is used with the nominative case of the first
person singular, in this expression,
-EWrc tu y yo. | Between thee and me ;
but in every other instance it governs the second objective
case; as,
U7itre si. j Between themselves.
£!nire nosotros. j Between us.
124. The second objective case is always used after com-
paratives ; as,
Te quiero mas que d H. | I love thee better than bun.
125. When in English the objective case of the first or
second person is the object of the verb, or of the preposition
to, expressed or understood, we use the first case ; as,
Yo te necesito.
Ella nos hablo.
El me amara.
I want thee.
She spoke to us.
He will love me.
126. In Lesson X. we explained the objective case of the
third person when it is the object of the English verb ; but
if the third person in English be governed by the preposition
to, expressed or understood, we render it by le, les, for both
genders ; as.
Nosotros le habl&mos.
Yo le escribi.
Ella les did.
We spoke to him.
I wrote to her.
She gave them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. { Qu6 me dard V. ? Le dar6 dV. las gracias.
2. I Qu6 les di6 V. k sus nifios ? Les di veinte centavos.
8. J Me dards algo por mi trabfyo? Algo te dar6 si \o haces bien ^
8in6, nada.
LESSON XXVI. 115
4. I Qu6 OS dieron en casa de tu primo ? Nos dieron chocolate.
6. I Que le has prometido a tu prima ? Bailar hoy con ella.
6. g C6mo ser6mos mas felices ? Amandonos los unos a los otros.
7. I Cuando vendra el con nosotros ? Yendra mafiana temprano.
8. ^Oaando saldra V. conmigo a paseo? Tendre ese gusto pasado
mafiana.
9. I Qui^n ira conmigo al teatro esta noche ? Yo ir6 contigo.
10. ^Donde habiaste a mis amigos ? Les habl6 en el Parque Central.
11. 2 Les Iey6 V. mi carta? No, les lei la de su hermana de Y.
12. ^Me envio Y. los libros? No, sefior, los envi^ a su hermano
deY.
13. ^06mo supo Y. de sus amigos? Escribi^ndoles.
14. 1 06mo conoci6 Y. a su amiga ? Bailando con ella en casa de su
hermano.
15. I Que le prometi6 Y. a su prima ? Le prometi Uevarla a la
opera.
16. I'Nos hablaron ellos alguna vez? Nos hablaron una 6 dos veces
en el paseo.
17. ^Porque no les habl6 Y. ? Porque no los conozco bien.
18. ^Que le han escrito a Y. sus amigos? Que vendran a hablarnos.
19. ^Quieres salir conmigo a paseo ? Si, saldr6 contigo.
20. g Cuando iremos a casa de tus amigos? Ir^mos hoy, porque ellos
tendran mucho gusto en conocerte.
21. ^Quiere Y. pasarme el pan ? Con mucho gusto. — Gracias.
22. I Qu6 le prometiste d tu prima ? Le prometi ir a su casa mafiana
y llevarle un pafiuelo de seda.
23. I Cuando le habl6 Y. ? Le habl6 anoche en casa de su madre.
24. ^Quiere Y. venir a pasear? Mejor sera estarnos aquL
25. I A qu6 vienen Yds. ? Yenimos a hablarle d Y.
26. g Cuando iremos al campo con nuestros amigos ? Iremos mafiana.
27. ^Como les gan6 a Yds. la lavandera tanto dinero? Lavandonos
los vestidos y trabajando mucho.
28. I Cuantas veces d la semana habla Y. con sus amigos ? Nos ha-
blamos todos los dias.
29. ^ Yendra hoy su primo de Y. a comer con nosotras ? Si, porque
quiere conocerlas d Yds.
\^ 30. I Le di6 Y. los buenos dias a su prima? Le di los buenos dias ayei*
en la plaza y le habl6 de Y.
31. Le doy d Y. las gracias. g Tien 3 buena salud ahora? Si, sefiora,
estd muy buena.
32. ^Le di6 d Y. los peri6dicos? No, sefiora, pero prometi6 mandar-
los mafiana.
116 LESSON XXVI.
EXERCISR
1. What was* that you gave to your friend last night at the theatre?
I gave him the second volume of Mr. Romanos' new work.
2. Why do you not give him the first volume ? I have already given
it to my cousin. •
3. Did you not promise last week to give me those two volumes ?
Yes ; and you shall have them the day after to-morrow.
4. Will you come with me to the country in the summer? I will go
if you set out on the first of July.
5. Will you and your uncle come with us to walk this afternoon ?
This evening we have to go to the concert.
6. When will you go out with us? I do not know ; but I think (that)
to-morrow {creo que maflana).
7. Have you heard (sabido) from your father this week ? No ; but
we heard from our brother John last week.
8. How often has he written to you from Boston? We have received
seven or eight letters from him.
9. How much did that singer make (gain) in New York ? Which
one? I do not know any singers.
10. Do you not know the singer who spent last week at your uncle's
ii the country? Yes; but it was in Philadelphia that he sang, not in
New York.
11. Are you cold? No, sir; but I am hungry and thirsty.
12. When will you take Emanuel to see your children ? I shall take him
to-morrow. — ^They will have much pleasure in making his acquaintance.
13. How many languages does that gentleman speak? He only speaks
his own ; but his cousin speaks five.
14. Which are they' Ho speaks French, German, Spanish, English,
and Italian.
15. How did he learn so many languages? By studying the grammar
of each one of them (cada una de ellas), reading the works of the best
writers, and practising with the natives {natural).
16. Does he write all those languages as well as he speaks them ? He
writes them better than he speaks them.
17. Did I not see you {plural) speaking to the notary yesterday in the
park ? No, it was the day before yesterday.
18. What has he done in that affair {negocio) of your brother's? He
has done nothing yet; and as he has to leave town {la ciudad) this after-
noon, he will do nothing all this week.
19. Who is the young lady who danced so well last night at youi
house? Do you not know her? she is my cousin.
* See the conjugation of the verb Seb, at the end of the book.
LESSON XXVII. 117
20. When did you see our friend Mr. Perez ? I saw him the other day
in Twenty-sixth street, and we talked for more than two hours about
{de) theatres and concerts.
21. I saw him the night before last; but we did not talk about thea-
tres and concerts. In whose house did you see him ? At Mr. de la Rosa's.
22. At what o'clock did you go there? I went at a quarter to eight,
and left at half-past ten.
23. Did you see many Mexicans there? I only saw one: that Mexi-
can lawyer who has just written a history of bis country.
24. Does he leave soon for Europe ? He wishes to set out next week.
25. Did John write to his father the day before yesterday ? Yes, and
he has heard {saber) since that he set out last week for France.
26. Has your sister read the books yet which she received from Louisa
last week ? Yes ; and she wishes to read them again (ptra vez).
27. I shall see her this evening; and if you wish (it) I shall take them
to her {se los).
28. Thank you. Have you much to do now ? No, I never have much
to do in summer.
29. Is Peter tired ? No ; but he is the most tiresome boy I know.
LESSON XXVII.
Decir. j To say, to tell.
PEESENT OF INDICATIVE.
Digo, dices, dice, decimos, de- I I say, or tell, &c.
PEETERIT DEFINITE.
Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, di- I I said, or told, &c.
jisteis, dijeron. I
FUTUEE SIMPLE.
Dir6, dirds, dird, dir^mos, di- I I shall or wiU say, or tell, &c.
r^is, diran. I
PEETEEIT INDEFINITE.
He dicho, has dicho, etc. | I have said, or told, &c.
COMPOTTND FUTUEE.
Habr6 dicho, etc. | I shall or will have said, or
told, &c.
118 LESSON
XXVII.
Excusar.
To excuse.
Perdonar.
To pardon.
Creer.
To believe, to think.
Ofender.
To offend.
Llamar.
To call, to knock.
Ensefiar.
To teach, to show.
Ahora.
Now.
Mismo {adverb).
Just, very.
Mismo.
Same, self.
Necesario.
Necessary.
Precise.
Precise, needful.
Kegular.
Kegular, middling.
Parte. Despatch,
Parte. Part.
Estudio. Study.
Falta. Fault, mistake.
Humor. Humor, disposition.
Esperanzft. Hope.
Sugeto. A person, subject, topic.
Puerta. Door.
Asunto. Subject, business, matter.
Noticia. News.
Eamillete. Bouquet.
COMPO
3ITI0N.
Le compro un ramillete, y se lo mando.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent It to
her.
Les escribir^ tres cartas, y se las man-
I shall write them three letters, and
date.
send them to them.
Ella se lo ha prometido.
She has promised it to her.
I Qu6 esta V. hacienJo con ese libro ?
What are you doing with that book f
Estoy enseniindose^o t Manuel.
I am showing it to Emanuel
i Le leiste la carta ?
Did you read the letter to him ?
Ya se la lei.
I did. (I read it to him aheody.)
Ella me lo dijo.
She told it to me.
Yo se lo di.
I gave it to him.
Mi madre me ama d mi.
My mother loves me.
Tu amigo tc busca d ti.
Thy friend looks for thee.
Yo hs d( las noticias d ellos.
I told them the news.
Yo se las dar^ d V. f
I will tell them to you.
A lite arao, or te amo & tl.
I love thee.
i Qu6 le ha dioho d V. su hermano ?
What has your brother told youf
No me ha dicho nada.
He has told me nothing.
/Xedyeyo eso d VJ
Did I tell you that ?
Y, no me lo dijo.
You did not tell it to me.
LESSON XXVII.
119
/ Se lo ha dicho el a V,?
Me Zo ha dicho.
^ Quiere V. decir eso a sus amigos ?
Quiero decirscZo d ellos.
g Qui en llama 4 la puerta ?
Soy yo mismo.
I Tiene buen humor su amigo de V. .^
J^i, seiior, tiene buen humor cuando le
/ van bien los negocios.
I Gana ese sugeto mucho en ese asunto ?
El no gana para si mismo ; pero gana
para otros.
Tengo esperanza de que me perdonar4.
Has he told it to you ?
He has told it to me.
Will you tell your friends that ?
I will tell it to them.
"Who knocks at the door ?
It is I (myself).
Has your friend a good disposition ?
Yes, sir, he is good humored when busi-
ness goes well with him.
Does that man make (or earn) much in
that business ?
He does not make for himself ; but he
makes for others.
I have hopes he will pardon me.
EXPLANATION.
127. Objective pronouns, continued. — The third person
being governed by to in English, either expressed or under-
stood, is in Spanish rendered by se, if the object of the verb
be a pronoun in the third person ; as,
Le compro un raraillete, y se lomando.
Les escribire tres cartas, y se las
mandare.
Mi criado se lo dara.
He bought her a bouquet, and sent it to
her.
I shall write thera three letters, and
send them to them.
My servant will give it to him.
This is done for the sake of euphony, changing the first of
the two pronouns, whatever its full form may be {le, la or les),
into se. This rule applies to all pronouns, after as well as be-
fore the verb ; as,
Ella se lo ha prometido (instead of
eUa le lo).
Prometiendosel^ (instead of prome-
iiindolelo).
She has promised it to her.
Promising it to him.
Did you read the letter to him ?
I read it to him (already).
(, Le leiste la carta ?
Ya se la lei, instead of ya le la lei.
128. When two first objective cases occur in the sentence,
one of which is the object of the verb, and the other is gov-
erned, in English, by the preposition to, either expressed or
anderstood, the object of the verb is to be placed last ; as,
Ella me lo dijo. I She told it to me.
Yo se lo 6i. I I gave it to him.
120 LESSON XXVII.
129. But if the object of the verb be the reflective pro-
noun, it must be placed first ; as,
Luego se me excuso. j He excused himself immediately to me.
130. Both the objective cases belonging to the same per-
son are sometimes used together in Spanish, in order to give
more energy to the expression, and then the second must al-
ways be preceded by <^ ; as,
Mi madre me ama d mi.
Tu amigo ie busca d ti.
El se lo dijo d ellas.
Yo les di las noticias d ellos.
Yo se las dar^ d Vd,. ?
My mother loves me.
Thy friend seeks thee.
He told it to them.
I told them the news.
I will tell them to you.
131. The second objective case of any of the persons
should never be used in the sentence, preceded by d, as the
object of the verb, without being accompanied by the first
(except after comparatives) ; therefore, such expressions as
these: d el quiero, d ti amo^ are incorrect, and should be thus:
d el le quiero^ d ti te amo. The place of the second objective
case in sentences of this kind is restricted to the following rules :
1st. If the first objective case precede the verb, the second
may be placed either before the first, or after the verb ; as,
A ti te amo, or te amo d ti. | I love thee.
2d. If the first objective case follows the verb, the second
must be placed after the first ; as,
Am&ndoZc d el. j Loving him.
132. It may appear that the personal pronouns ^, la, lo,
los and las might be confounded with the articles el, la, lo, los,
las, having the same form ; but they are easily distinguished,
since the articles must always be occompanied by and precede
nouns ; as, el tiempo, la salud, los soldados, las obras, lo hucno ;
while, on the other hand, the personal pronouns are Only em-
ployed with verbs, and placed before or after them ; as,
La llcvaroHj or Uevdronla. I They carried it.
Lo bicscaroH, or buscdronlo. \ They looked for it
133. Whenever emphasis is required to be laid on any
LESSON XXVII. 121
noun or pronoun, the adjective mismo is used in Spanish for
that purpose ; as,
El no ama 4 nadie mas que k si
mismo.
Este mismo hombre lo har4,
Yo mismo lo har6.
He loves no one but himself.
This very man will do it
I will do it myself.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Le dijo V. eso al ingles ? Se lo dije.
2. ^Se lo dijo V. en ingles 6 en espafiol? Se lo dije en ingl6s.
8. I Le comprendio a V. ? Si, senor, muy bien.
4. g Y qu6 le ensefi6 a V. ? Me ensefio el retrato de su hermana.
5. iJjO tiene Y. ? No ; se lo envi6 ya.
6. I Me lo ensenard V. ? Se lo ensefiare a Y. la semana pr6xima.
7. i Ha Uamado Y. a la criada ? La he llamado y no ha venido.
8. ^ No le perdonara Y. esa falta ? No qniero perdonarsela.
9. ^ A qui^n llama mi padre ? Te llama a tt
10. I Quieres ensefiarme tu vestido nuevo ? Te lo ensefiar6 con mucho
gusto.
11. ^ Yendran tiis amigos a darnos los buenos dias ? Creo que vendran
k darnoslos.
12. I Nos han enviado los peri6dicos ? Os los enviardn mafiapa.
13. ^Cuanto le gan6 Y. a ese sugeto? Le gan6 dos mil trcscientos
cincuenta y ouatro pesos.
14. I Qu6 les dieron & sus amigas de Y. ? Prometi^ronles Uevarlas 4
paseo ; pero no les dieron nada.
15. I Qui6n dijo eso ? Yo mismo lo dije.
16. ^Para quien son estos libros ? Para ti mismo.
17. ^Han mandado mis cartas al correo? Si, senor, yo mismo las he
mandado.
18. gQui^n me ha enviado este ramillete? Su amiga misma se lo ha
enviado.
19. ^ Le leiste a tu padre las noticias de Francia ? El mismo las ha leido.
20. I Quieres ensefiarme tu reloj ? Quiero enseflartelo.
21. g Quien llam6 a la puerta ? Yo mismo WamL
22. ^ Tiene Y. esperanza de vcr su pais ? Si, sefior, tengo esperanza de
verlo muy pronto.
23. I Cantaron bien anoche en el concierto ? Cantaron bien la primera
parte ; pero la segunda muy mal.
24. I C6mo esta su tio de Y. ? Esta bueno ; pero de muy mal humor.
25. I Es hombre de mal humor ? No, sefior, es hombre muy amable ;
pero hoy esta de mal humor por asuntos de familia.
6
122 LESSON XXVII.
26. I Creen ellos ganar dinero 4 ese hombre ? Creen gandrselo.
27. ^Necesita V. enviar este periodico a su hennano? Necesito eiy
viarsclo.
28. ^Cudndo quiere Y. mandar su piano al pianista? Se lo quiero
mandar ahora.
29. iCudndo necesita Y. hablar al abogado? Necesito hablarle abora
JDttismo.
30. ^Es esta la carta que Y. recibi6 ayer ? Es la misma.
81. ^ A qui^u ama el Mejicano ? No ama d nadie mas que d d mismo.
32. I Para qui6ii trabaja esa mujer ? Trabaja para si misma.
83. I Qu6 le ha dicbo Y. boy a su padre ? Lo mismo que le dije ayer,
EXERCISK
1. Good morning, sir; how are you? Yery well, thank yotu
2. How is your family ? Yery well, thank you.
8. When did you hear from your cousin Jane ? I received a letter
from her yesterday. But will you excuse mo an instant? some one is
knocking at the door.
4. Have you sent your sister the bouquet I bought for her the other
day ? Not yet ; but I shall send it to her to-morrow morning.
5. "Will you write to her at the same time and (to) tell her what
Charles said ? I am going to write to her just now, and I shall tell it
to her,
6. Do you think my father will pardon us ? I do (I think so), because
Emanuel showed me a letter he received from him, in which he says he
will pardon both jof us.
7. And what does 9enry think of the matter? He thinks the
same.
8. Have the pupils shown itheir new books to their teacher yet?
Yes, they showed them to him yesterday.
v.. 9. Does he think they are good ? He says they are very good.
10. What else (more) did he say? He said that if they study them
with attention they will very soon speak Spanish.
11. Is that all * he said ? That is all.
12. Who is knocking at the door ? is it you, Peter ? Tes, it is L
13. Why did you not come earUer? I was (have been) reading tho
news from Italy.
14. What is the news (what news have we)? The papers say that the
Italians have gained another victory (victoria).
15. What did that man promise you last night ? He promised to bring
me some volumes of the History of the United States.
• Lo que.
LESSON XXVII. 123
16. Has he brought (traido) them to you yet? Not yet.
17. When do you think he will bring* them? He lias to come to our
house this evening, and I think he will bring them with him.
18. What do you wish toe see? I wish to see your new dress, if you
will have the goodness (bondad) to show it to me.
19. Will you tell the Englishman what I have told you? I shall not
tell it to the Englishman ; but I shall tell it to the Frenchman this very
day.
, 20. Will he believe it ? Yes, he will (believe it) ; he believes every-
ithing I tell him.
21. Have they taken my letters to the post-office ? I took them my
self, sir.
22. Who is my father calling? He is calling you to send you to the
bookstore for a book.
23. Do you know why Louis does not send us the papers any more
(ya) ? He promised to send them ; but you know that no steamer (va'
por) has arrived t this week yet.
24. When does the merchant want to see the notary ? He wants to
see him just now.
25. There he is talking to a gentleman ; will you go and (to) tell him
that my father wishes to speak to him a moment (momento) ?
26. Good morning, sir; father wishes to tell you something; will you
come now? Yes, I shall go just now.
27. How is your son, Mr. Alexander ? He is much better, thank you ;
but he would not come out this morning, because he has to study his
lesson.
28. What language is he learning ? He is not learning any now ; he
commenced to learn Spanish in the winter.
29. What is he studying, then ? He takes lessons in (of) writing, his*
tory and music.
30. What part of the grammar are yon in now, Peter ? I have just
got to (arrived at) J the twenty-seventh lesson.
31. Do you require to send this paper to your brother? I require to
send it to him this very day.
• Traerfi. t Llegar. t Acabo de.
124
LESSON XXVIII.
LESSON XXVIII.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
Habl-aba, habl-abas, habl-aba.
Habl-abamos, babl-abais, habl-aban.
IMPEEFECT,
First Conjugation.
I spoke, was speaking, or used to
speak, &c., &c.
We spoke, &c.
Second Conjugation.
Aprend-ia, aprend-ias, aprend-ia.
Aprend-iamos, aprend-iais, aprend-
ian.
I learned, was learning, or used to
learn, &c., &c.
Third Conjugation.
Escrib-ia, escrib-ias, escrib-ia. i I wrote, was writing, or used to
Escrib-iamos, escrib-i^, escrib-ian. | write, &c., &c.
PLUPEEFECT.
Habia
hablado.
I had ^
spoken.
Habiais
aprendido.
Thou hadst
learned.
Habia
escrito.
He had
written.
Habiamos "]
hablado.
We had
spoken.
Habiais |-
aprendido.
You had
learned.
Habian J
escrito.
They had
written.
Acabar.
To finish.
Entrar.
Deber.
To enter, come in, go in.
To owe.
Deber.
Diidar.
Should, ought, must, to be to, to be
one's duty to.
To doubt.
Temer.
Abrir, abierto (irregular in this
past participle only).
To fear, be afraid of.
To open, opened.
Ambos.
1
"i^th.
Cuidado.
Care.
Oabeza.
Head.
Deber.
Duty.
Mano.
Hand.
Pr6jiino.
Neighbor.
Ropa.
Clothes.
LESSON
XXVIII.
Vecino. Neighbor.
Yentana.
Wmdow.
'fieloj. Clock, watch.
Visita.
Visit.
Cuenta.
Bill, accoimt.
Marido, esposo. Husband.
Esposa.
■Wife.
COMPOSITION.
125
Yo escribia cuando Y. vino.
El estudiaba sus lecciones todos los
dias.
Margarita bailaba mucho cuando era
joven.
Yo acababa de salir cuando Y. entro.
^ Abria V. la puerta 6 la ventana en el
invierno ?
En el invierno no abria ni la una ni la
otra ; pero en el verano abria ambas.
^Habia V. eserito los ejercicios antes
de dar su leccion ?
No los habia eserito ; pero habia estu-
diado la leccion,
Tebe Y. tener cuidado no solo de estu-
diar la leccion, sino de escribir los
ejercicios, porque si no V. no apren-
dera nada.
I En donde esta su vecino de V. ?
Acaba de entrar.
i Qu6 hora tiene su reloj de Y. ?
Son las doce y cuarto.
I Tenia su vecino de V. cuidado de su
ropa?
Debia hacerlo, pero no lo hacia.
Debemos amar al projimo tanto como
a nosotros mismos ; pero mi vecino
no me ama k mi ni yo le amo a 41.
No dudo lo que Y. dice.
I was writing when you came.
He used to study his lessons every day.
Margaret used to dance much when she
was young.
I had just gone out when you came in.
Used you to open the door or the win-
dow in winter ?
In winter I used to open neither ; but
in summer I used to open both.
Had you written your exercises before
taking your lesson ?
I had not written them; but I had
studied my lesson.
You must take care, not only to study
your lesson, but (also) to write your
exercises ; for if not, you will learn
nothing.
Where is your neighbor ?
He has just come in (entered).
What o'clock is it by your watch
(what hour has your watch) ?
It is a quarter past twelve.
Used your neighbor to take care of his
clothes ?
He should have done so, but did not.
We should love our neighbor as our-
selves ; but my neighbor does not
love me, nor do I love him.
I do not doubt what you say.
EXPLANATION.
134, The imperfect is used to express what is past, and,
at the same time present, with regard to something else which
is past ; that is, it is a past tense which was still present at the
time spoken of. It may always be employed in Spanish when
in English the word was can be used with the present parti*
126 LESSON XXVIII.
ciple, or icsed to with the infinitive, or when we ppeak of ha-
bitual actions ; as,
Yo escribia cuando V. vino. I was writing when you came.
El estudiaba sua lecciones todoa los He used to study his lessons every
dias. day.
135. The PLUPERFECT is used to express what is past, and
took place before some other past action or event, expressed or
understood ; as,
To habia leido ya los periodicos cuando I I had already read the newspapers when
V. me los dio. | you gave them to me.
136.* AcABAB DE. — ^The English expressions, to have Just,
and to he just, before a past participle, are translated into
Spanish by acabar de, preceding an infinitiA'^e ; as,
Acaho de entrar. I I have just come in.
El acaba de abrir la ventana. | He has just opened the window.
CONYERSATION A^TD VERSION.
1. gHa hablado Y. con la senorita? No, ella acababa de salir cuando
vo toqu6 4 la puerta.
2. jDudaba Y. entrar? Si. porque temia ofender d Y.
3. No seilor; ^qu6 hora es? Mi reloj tiene las once y cuarto.
4. g Y qu6 hora tiene Y. ? Yo ten go las once y media.
5. ^Sabe Y. qii6 hora es en el reloj de la iglesia? Cuando yo pasaba
estaban dando las once.
6. ^Ent6nces ahora deberau ser no mas que las once y vcinte 6 veinte
y cinco minutos ? Creo que serdu un poco m6no8.
1. I Ha hablado Y. con mi vecino ? He ido d hacerle una visita, pero
habia salido.
8. ^No habl6 Y. con la sefiora? Si, estaba en la ventana cuando yo
pas6.
9. I Tiene una mano muy hermosa ? SI, pero los ojos son mas her-
niosos.
10. iQu6 tenia cu la cabeza? Dos flores.
11. iQui6n llama d la puerta? La lavandera, que viene d buscar la
ropa.
12. I Cudnto le dcbo d Y. ? Me debe Y. veinte y cinco centavos de la
ropa de la semana pasada.
18. J No se los ha pagado.4 V. mi Tiaridof No, sellora, no tenia di-
nero.
14. iDuda Y. lo que le digo? No, sefiora, lo creo.
LESSOK XXVIII. 127
15. ^Esta Men lavada la ropa? Muy bien ; yo misraa la lav6.
16. ^Hizo V. la visita a su vecino ? Fui a su casa; pero habia salido.
17. ^Ya V. muchas veces al teatro? Cuando vivia en Paris iba a
jnenudo ; pero aqui voy muy pocas veces.
18. I Como debemos amar al pr6jimo ? Tanto como d nosotros mismos.
19. gQuien es el projimo ? Todos los bombres son nuestros pr6jimos.
20. I Esta mala su hermana de Y. ? Si, sefiora, y de cuidado (seriously)*
21. ^Ouantas visitas le ba becbo el medico? Muchisimas.
22. I Deb en Yds. tener muclio cuidado de ella ? Si, sefiora, ya lo te-
nemos.
23. I Cuantas visitas le debo yo a Y. ? Con esta son tres.
24. I No vendra Y. a comer mafiana con nosotras ? Mafiana ir6 al
campo con mis vecinos.
25. ^ Habia Y. recibido la carta del Frances cuando recibi6 la mia ?
La recibi despues.
26. I Porqu6 trabaja Y. tanto ? Porque es mi deber.
27. I Yendran Y. y su bermana 4 pasar una semana con nosotros ?
Si, sefiora, la semana proxima vendr^mos ambos.
28. I Quien abri6 mi ventana, Juan ? Sefior, yo mismo la abrL
29. I Hablo Y. con el sastre ? Fui alia, pero habia salido.
30. I Cuando vino Y. ? Abora mismo acabo de entrar.
31. gD6nde esta mi padre ? Acaba de salir d la calle.
32. I Sabes a d6nde fu6 ? Fu6 a coraprar ropa.
38. ^Habrd ido a la Cuarta avenida? No, sefior, creo que fu6 d
Broadway.
34. I Que bora es? El reloj de su cuarto de Y. acaba de dar las doce.
EXERCISE.
1. What were you doing when Alexander went into your room? I
was talking to my father.
2. I thought you were writing your exercises. No, I had written
them already. ^
3. Does the servant take care to sweep your room every day ? Yes,
he knows very well it is his duty.
4. Why did you not come before ? you were to come at nine o'clock.
I know I have done wrong in not coming earlier;^ but I have been
writing all the morning.
5. Does your sister Margaret dance now as much as she used?
When (she was) in the city she used to dance very much, but now she
has no time.
6. When you lived in the country did you open both the doors and
the windows ? J opened neither.
128 LESSON XXVIII.
V. Had you finished your work before going to the concert? I had
(finished it).
8. Do you doubt what I tell you ? No, sir, I never doubted anything
you told me.
9. Is your neighbor afraid to open his windows in winter ? He ia
not afraid to open them.
10. Who was it that went out last night after ten o'clock ? Ko one
went out ; my brother came in at that hour.
11. Did Alexander go out when your cousin came in ? He had already
gone out when my cousin came in.
12. Where is he now ? He has just gone out to walk.
13. Will he be very long (much time) ? He will not be long ; he is to
take his Spanish lesson this evening.
14. Did you pay (make) a visit to my neighbor last week ? I went to
his house, but he was not at home.
15. When did you see the pianist? He came to see me the other day,
but I had gone out.
16. Do you think we shall have studied our lessons before going to thw
teacher's ? I think we shall.
17. What o'clock is it by (in) your watch? It is seventeen minutes
past three by mine ; what time have you ?
18. It must be (deben ser) half-past three; has the mosio teacher
come ? Not yet.
19. Will you have the kindness to go to his house and Cell him I shall
not take my lesson this afternoon ? With much pleasure.
20. So soon 1 Well, did you see the teacher ? No, madam, he had
just gone out.
21. How much do you owe the tailor now ? I owb him very little ;
you know I sent him some money last month.
22. I know (it) ; but did he not send (pasar) in anothor bill on Mon-
day ? If ho has sent in another I have not seen (visto) it.
23. I thought you were in the country, Mr. Emanuel i I was there
last week.
24. Why did you not come yesterday ? I saw you were writing and
I feared to offend you.
25. But you know it was your duty to come in ; you knew I wanted
you. Well, if you pardon me this time (vez), I shall couie in again (another
time).
26. How often do you go to the theatre? Not very often now; 1
used to go every night in the week.
27. How are we to love our neighbor? As ourselves.
28. Who is our neighbor ? All mankind (men) are our neighbors.
LESSOliT XXIX,
129
29. How many visits has the physician made to your uncle ? He be-
gan his visits on the 30th of December, and visited him twice a week
until April 4th.
80. How many visits do I owe you for now? You owed me for
twelve, but you paid me for nine, and so you only owe for three now.
31. Whose letter did you receive first, mine or Jane's ? When yours
came to hand (my hands), I had already received Jane's.
32. Will you take your lesson to-day? I am to go to the Central Park
this afternoon with my mother, and so I shall not take my lesson until
to-morrow.
lesso:n^ XXIX.
PEETEETT ANTEEIOE.
Hube
Hubiste
Hubo
Hubimos
Hubisteis
Hubieron
Ver.
Mirar.
Esperar.
1 hablado.
I aprendido.
J escrito.
1 hablado.
I aprendido.
J escrito.
Asi que.
Ap6nas.
No bien.
Tampoco (conj.).
Tambien (adverli).
Tambien (conj.).
Ademas.
Primeramente, or en primer lu-
gar.
Segundamente, or en segundo
lugar.
Frecuente.
Frecuentemente.
C6modo.
Comodamente.
6*
I had
Thou hadst
He had
We had
You had
They had
"1 spoken.
y learned.
J written.
} spoken,
learned,
written.
To see. (See the end of the hook)
To look.
To hope, to wait for.
As soon as.
Scarcely.
No sooner.
Neither, not either.
Also, hkewise.
As well, moreover.
Moreover, besides.
Firstly.
Secondly, &c.
Frequent.
Frequently.
Convenient, comfortable.
Conveniently, comfortably.
130
LESSON XXIX.
Incomodo.
Inconvenient, uncomfortable.
Inc6modamente.
Inconveniently, uncomfortabiy.
Probable.
Probable, likely.
Probablemente.
Probably, likely.
Perfecto.
Perfect.
Perfectamente.
Perfectly.
Correcto,
Correct.
Correctamente.
Correctly.
Ojo. Eye.
1
Vista.
Sight, view.
Correo. Post,
post-office,
Comodidad.
Convenience,
courier.
comfort.
Lugar. Place.
COMPO
MiUa.
SITION.
MUe.
Cuando le hube conocido le ain6.
Ap^nas hubo salido 61 cuando yo entr^.
No bien le hube visto cuando le conocf.
Asi que hube escrito la carta la llev6
al correo.
Cuando le conoci le am6.
^•Iba V. frecuentemente al teatro el afio
pasado ?
Iba frecuentisimamente, or muy frecuen-
temente.
El vive en esa casa comodamente, or*
con comodidad.
El escribe correcta y perfectamente ;
pero V. escribe mas facilmente.
When I had known him I loved him.
Scarcely had he gone out when 1
came in.
No sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
As soon as I had written the letter I
took it to the post-office.
When I knew him I loved him.
Did you go often to the theatre last
year ?
I went very often.
He lives comfortably, or with comfort,
in that house.
He writes correctly and perfectly ; but
you write more easily.
EXPLANATION.
137, The PRETERIT ANTERIOR Is used to cxpress a past
action or event that took place immediately before another
action or event also past. It is never used except after some
of the adverbs of time ; cuando^ when ; asi qtie, as soon as ; no
bie7i, no sooner ; ap^nas, scarcely ; luego que, immediately after ;
despues que, soon after ; as,
Cuando le hube conocido.
Ap6nas hubo salido cuando yo vine.
No bien le hube visto cuando le conoci.
When I had made his acquaintance.
Scarcely had he gone out when I came.
No sooner had I seen him tlian I knew
him.
LESSON XXIX. 131
This tense is very little used, not only for the reason already
mentioned, of its being preceded by an adverb of time, but also
because its place may be elegantly supplied by the pbeteeit
DEFINITE ; as.
Cuando le conoci.
Apenas salio cuando yo vine.
No bien le vi cuando le conoci.
When I had knovra him.
Scarcely had he gone out when I came.
No sooner had I seen him than I knew
him.
138. The adverbs of manner and quality, in Spanish as
well as in English, are generally derived from adjectives.
139. To form an adverb from an adjective, it is sufficient
to add mente to the adjective, if the latter has the same ter-
mination in both genders ; as,
Frecuente, frecuentewen^^.
Gramatical, gramaticalmcn/e.
If the adjective has a different termination for each gender,
then mente is added to the feminine ; as,
Inc6moda, incomodamewjfe.
Perfecta, perfectamewfe.
When two or more of these adverbs follow each other, only
the last one takes mente, the others taking the feminine termi-
nation a ; as,
Ciceron hablo sabia y elocuentemen^. j Cicero spoke learnedly and eloquently.
140. These adverbs terminating in mente, being derived
from adjectives, admit like these the degrees of comparison ; as,
Facilmente.
Mas facilmente.
Menos facilmente.
Tan facilmente.
Muy facilmente, or facilisimamente.
Easily.
More easily.
Less easily.
As, or so easily.
Yery easily, or most easily.
141. Those adverbs may, without any change in the
sense, be substituted by a substantive governed by the prepo-
sition con ; as,
til vive comodamente, or con comodi- | He lives comfortably,
dad.
132 LEB80N XXIX.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Ye V. aquella flor tan hermosa? Miro, poro no la veo.
2. I Ye V. qu6 hora es en el reloj de la iglesia ? No, pero mirar6 en
mi reloj.
3. I Ha visto V. d su herraano ? Si, seflor, le vi ap^nas hubo salido
del teatro.
4. ^Le conoci6 a V. mi vecino? No bien le Lube hablado, me co-
nooi6.
' 5. ^Han venido mis amigos? Yinieron asi que hubo V. salido.
6. ^Le dieron 4 Y. mis libros? Me los dieron, no bien les hube
hablado de ello.
7. ^ Y se marcharon muy pronto ? Se marcharon asi que hubieron
escrito sus cartas.
8. I Qu6 hizo Y. despues ? Primoramente (or primero) fui al correo
y despues al mercado.
9. ^Qu6 quiere Y. hacer? Primeraraente escribir los ejercicios y
despues estudiar la leccion.
10. ^Porqu6 nolo hizo Y. dntes? En primer lugar porque no tenia
humor j en segundo porque ap^nas tuve tiempo.
11. ^Habla Y. frances frecuentemente ? Si, sefior, lo hablo con fre-
cuencia.
12. ^Lo escribe Y. correctamente ? Cuando lo estudiaba lo escribia
con mas correccion que ahora.
13. ^ Aprende Y. ingl6s 6 espaflol ? Aprendo dmbos.
14. ^ Y su hermano de Y. ? Mi hermano los aprende tambien.
15. I Los hablan Yds. con perfeccion ? Si, seflor, el ingles lo hablamos
perfectamente ; pero el espafiol ni yo, ni el tampoco.
16. ^Ha enviado Y. su carta al correo? No, sefior, la enviar6 ma-
Ilana.
17. J La ha escrito Y. ? Tampoco la he escrito, porque quiero hacerlo
con comodidad.
18. ^Ha aprendido Y. la leccion de hoy? He aprendido la de hoy y
la de mafiana tambien.
19. jOudndo piensa Y. sahr para Paris? Probablemente saldr^ la
semana pr6xima.
20. ^No Yive Y. c6modamente aqui ? Si, sefior, pero vivo mah c6mo-
do en Francia.
21. jYivia Y. c6modamente cuando estaba en L6ndres? No, sefior,
vivia inc6modamente porque no hablaba ingles.
22. jTiene Y. otro libro ademds do cse? Si, sefior, tengo otros dos
28. iEst4 Y. male de la vista? Si, sefior, tengo malo un ojo.
LESSON XXIX. 133
24. I Porque no ba venido aun su primo de V. ? Porque quiere venir
con comodidad.
25. ^Tiene Y. buena vista? Si, seilor, pero abora tengo los ojos
maJos.
26. ^ Cuando estudia Y. sus lecciones ? Las estudio de dia porque el
estudio de nocbe es malo para la vista.
27. I Donde estan sus bermanos de Y. ? Salieron a paseo no bien bu-
bieron escrito sus ejercicios.
28. I Ouando escribieron las cartas ? Asi que bubieron aprendido sus
7ecciones.
29. I Llev6 Y. mis cartas al correo ? Si, sefior, asi que Y. bubo salido.
30. I Ya Y. con frecuencia al correo ? Si, seflor, voy frecuentemente :
voy todos los dias.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you go to tbe lawyer's as I told you ? I went as soon as
you told me.
2. Was be at home ? did you see bim ? He was not in when I went ;
but I waited until he came.
8. Bid you show bim tbe letter ? I opened it and showed it to bim ;
but be would * not read it.
4. What did your children do after taking their lesson ? They had
scarcely finished their lesson when they went to bed.
5. Did you look at the horses your brother bought on Monday. I did
(look at them), and I think they are very fine.
6. Have you ever taken your family to Italy ? Yes, several times ;
last year we travelled in Italy.
7. Did you spend some time in the principal cities ? Yes ; but prin-
cipally in Kome (Soma), Florence (Florencia) and Milan (Milan).
8. Where were you on tbe 15th of December, 1865 ? On the 15th
we were in Florence in the morning, and in Kome at night.
9. Did you all enjoy good health in Europe ? Yes, all, except (menos)
Alexander, who had a sore (malo) eye the greater part of thQ time.
10. Did you go often to the theatre? We generally went every
evening.
' 11. Had you any difficulty (dificultad) in understanding f tbe lan-
guage? None; you know Emanuel speaks Itahan very correctly: he
bad learned it before setting out for Europe.
12. Did you see many Americans when you were travelling? Yery
many; some of them we knew very well, and others were friends of
ours.
Quiso. t Comprender.
134 LESSON XXIX.
13. Where is the letter you were writing this morning? Ab soon as 1
had finished it John took it to the post-oflace.
14. Do you ever write to your uncle ? Very little since we left New
York ; but there I used to write to him very frequently.
15. Which of you three writes French the most correctly*? I know it
is not I ; and as to {en cuanto d) Peter and Louis, I think Peter writes
best, but Louis writes with more ease (more easily).
16. Do you see that beautiful flower? I am looking; but I do not
see it.
17. Will you tell me what o'clock it is by the church clock? I am
looking at the church ; but I see no clock.
18. Have you not good sight ? Yes, very good ; but I have a very
sore eye.
19. Did my cousins not come ? They came as soon as you went out.
20. Did you show them my portrait ? I did ; but they scarcely had
time to look at it.
21. Did they say where they were going? They said they were going
to the country.
22. How long are they to be there ? They did not tell me that
23. Ai'e they not coming for me to-morrow ? Yes, sir, they are com-
ing for you to go and pay a visit to Mrs. Pefiaverde.
24. Have you ever seen a more comfortable little room than this one ?
Besides being comfortable it is very handsome.
25. Why do you not speak Spanish with Mr. Eiberas ? In the first
place, because I do not speak it well enough ; and in the second, because
he speaks English very correctly.
26. I thought you were studying Spanish ? I am studying it ; but
studying and speaking are two distinct {distinto) things.
27. Did you tell the music teacher that Louisa wishes to take lessons?
Not yet ; but I shall see him to-morrow and tell him so.
28. Why did you not take your lesson yesterday ? I was sick.
29. Have you studied yesterday's lesson, and to-day's ? I have studied
both.
80. Will you come to-morrow at the same hour ? Probably I shall.
♦M^Jor.
LESSON XXX.
136
LESSOK XXX.
IMPEESONAL VEEBS.
Llover.
To rain.
Lloviendo.
Eainiag.
Llovido.
Eained.
Indicative.
Present.
Llneve.
It rains.
Imperfect.
Llovia.
It was raining.
Preterit definite.
Llovi6.
It rained.
Future simple.
Lloverd.
It wUl rain.
Compoun
d Tenses.
Preterit definite.
Ha llovido.
It has rained.
Pluperfect.
Habia llovido.
It had rained.
Anterior.
Hubo llovido.
It had rained.
Future compound
. Habrd llovido.
It will have rained.
Amanecer.
To grow light.
Anochecer.
To grow dark.
Diluviar.
To rain like a deluge, to rain h
torrents.
Granizar.
To hail.
Helar.
To freeze.
Lloviznar.
To drizzle.
Nevar.
To snow.
Kelampaguear.
To lighten.
Tronar.
To thunder.
PEESONAL V3EBS U6
JED IMPEESONALLT.
Bastar.
To be sufficient.
Haber.
(Signifying) there to be.
Hacer.
(Signifying) to be.
Ser.
To be.
Convenir.
To suit, to be proper.
Pareoer.
To seem, to appear.
Brasil.
Brazil.
Habana. Havana.
Menester.
Necessity.
Nieve. Snow.
Hielo.
Ice.
Lluvia. Rain.
J6
LESSON XXX.
Helado.
Ice cream.
Tarde.
Afternoon
Trueno.
Thunder.
La mafiana.
Morning.
Medio dia.
Noon.
Media noche.
Midnight.
Viento.
Wind.
Especie.
Kind.
COMPOSITION.
^Es necesario estudiar mucho para
aprender el espanol ?
Es menester estudiar mucho, pero no
tanto como para aprender el inglds.
En Nueva York Uueve y llovizna mucho,
pero no dlluvia como en la Habana.
En Madrid amanece muy temprano y
anochece muy tarde en el verano.
En la Habana amanece y anochece siem-
pre a la misma hora, en todos los
dias del ano.
En el Brasil no nieva ; pero truena y
relampaguea mucho siempre que
llueve.
En la Habana no hay hielo, porque no
hace bastante frio para helar ; y por
eso lo Uevan de Nueva York.
En Nueva York ha helado y nevado
mucho este ano ; pero en el pasado
nevo y helo muy poco.
I Hace mucho calor en este pais ?
En los meses de Noviembre, Diciembre
y Enero hace mucho frio ; pero en
Junio, Julio y Agosto hace mucho
calor.
i Qu6 tiempo hace ?
Parece que va & Hover, porque hay
mucho viento y hace calor.
Cuatro anos ha, or hay cuatro afios, que
no veo & mi padre.
Pero V. tiene esperanza de verle pron-
to, porque llegar& hoy h, Nueva York
en el vapor "Etna" que viene de
Europa.
En verano voy d pascar todos los dias
al amancccr.
Is it necessary to study much to learo
Spanish ?
It is necessary to study a great deal,
but not 80 much as to learn English.
In New York it rains and drizzles a
great deal, but it does not rain in
torrents as in Havana.
In Madrid day breaks very early and
night falls very late in summer.
In Havana day breaks and night falls
at the same hours every day in the
year.
In Brazil it does not snow ; but it thun-
ders and lightens much whenever it
rains.
In Havana there is no ice, because it is
not cold enough to freeze; and for
that reason they take it from New
York.
In New York it has frozen and snowed
much this year; but last year it
snowed and froze very little.
Is it very warm in this country ?
In the months of November, December
and January it is very cold ; but in
June, July and August it is very
warm.
What kind of weather is it ?
It appears it is going to rain, because
it is very windy and hot.
I have not seen my father for foul
years.
But you (have) hope to see him soon |
for he will arrive to-day in New York
by the steamer "Etna" (that is)
coming from Europe.
In summer I go to walk every morning
at daybreak.
LESSON^ XXX.
137
lY&Y. k la cama temprano ?
No, senor, tarde ; k la media noche.
I Come V. al medio dia ?
No, senor, como al anochecer.
^ Va V. a la Habana ?
No, senor, voy a Francia.
La Francia es mas alegre que la Ingla-
/ terra.
El muchacho estudia mucho.
El estudio de la gramatica es necesario.
El hombre necesita trabajar.
La conversacion es muy util para apren-
der una lengua.
Do you go to bed early ?
No, sir, late ; at midnight.
Do you dine at noon ?
No, sir, I dine at nightfall.
Are you going to Havana ?
No, sir, I am going to France.
France is more pleasant than England,
The boy studies much.
The study of grammar is necessary.
Man requires to work.
Conversation is very useful for learning
a language.
EXPLANATION.
142. Impeesonal veebs are those which are used only in
the infinitive mood and in the third person singular of all the
tenses, and have no definite subject ; as,
Llueve. It rains.
Tronard. It will thunder.
Nevaba. It was snowing.
143. The verbs amanecer and anochecer are sometimes
used in the three persons, both numbers ; but then they are
not impersonal, but neuter ; as,
Yo amaneci en Nueva York, y ano- | I was in New York at daybreak, and
chec^ en Filadelfia. | in Philadelphia at nightfall.
144. Habeb and hacee are often used impersonally, and
are in such cases to be rendered into English by the corre-
sponding tenses of the verb to be.
The verb haber, when conjugated impersonally, has the
peculiarity of taking a y in the third person of the present iiv
dicative; as.
Hay mucha fruta.
Habra muchos hombres.
Hizo frio.
Hace muchos anos. .
There is much fruit.
There will be many men.
It was cold.
Many years ago.
N. B. — Sd is sometimes elegantly used for 7iai/ ; as,
Doce anos ha, or hay doce anos. I Twelve years ago ;
138
LESSON XXX
but it is to be observed that hd always follows the time, while
hay precedes it.
There are many other verbs which, although not impersonal,
are sometimes used as such ; as,
Es muy tarde. It is very late.
Es precise. It is necessary.
Es menester. There is necessity.
Parece. It seems, it appears.
Conviene. It suits, it is proper.
Basta. It is sufficient, it will do.
145. As it may have been observed, the pronoun ii^ which
accompanies impersonal verbs in English, is not translated into
Spanish.
Nouns taken in a definite sense require the article ; as,
El muchacho estudia. I The boy studies.
El estudio de la gramatica es util. J The study of grammar is useful.
Nouns used in their most general sense are preceded by the
article ; as,
El hombre necesita trabajar. Man requires to work.
La conversacion es muy util para Conversation is very useful for learn-
aprender una lengua. ing a language.
146. Names of nations, countries, provinces, mountains,
rivers and seasons, generally take the article ; as,
La Espana. Spain.
La Inglaterra. England.
El inviemo. Winter.
147. Nations, countries and provinces, when preceded by
a preposition, do not take the article unless they are personi-
fied; as,
Las provincias de Espafia. j The provinces of Spain.
El valor de la Espana. | The courage of Spain.
Nevertheless, the article is employed under all circumstances
with the names of some places ; as.
El Brasil.
La Habana.
El Ferrol.
La China.
El Japon.
El Perii.
Brazil.
Havana,
FerroU
China.
Japan.
Peru.
LESSON XXX. 139
CONYERSATION AND VERSION.
1. iQn^ tiempo hace? Ahora hace calor; antes hacia frio.
2. I Llovera maiiana ? Creo que nevara.
3. g Llueve mucho en Nueva York ? Llueve j llovizna bastante ; pero
raramente diluvia.
4. I Hace mucho frio en la Habana en el mes de Enero ? Hace algu-;
no, pero nunca nieva ni Mela.
5. I Relampaguea ? Relampaguea j llovizna.
6. gPorqu6 escribe Y. tantos ejercicios? Porque para aprender una
lengua no basta hablarla, esnecesario tambien saber escribirla.
7. I Nieva mucho en el Brasil ? En el Brasil no nieva, mas que en las
montanas, donde hay nieve todo el afio.
8. ^Quiere V. tomar un helado? No, sefior, los helados no soq
buenos en este tiempo.
9. I Cuanto tiempo hace que no ve V. d su familia ? El dos de Setiem-
bre proximo hard once alios.
10. 2 Porqu6 no vino Y. anoche ? Porque llovia y hacia mucho viento.
11. ^Tiene Y. miedo de los truenos? Cuando relampaguea mucho, si
sefior.
12. jPorqu6 no fue Y. anoche al concierto? Porque lloviznaba y
estaba nevando.
13. ^Aqu6horas come Y. ? Al amanecer tomo chocolate; al medio
dia como, y al anochecer tomo el t6.
14. I Se levanta Y. al amanecer todos los dias ? Cuando es menester,
si sefior.
15. I A que hora salio Y. del teatro el sdbado? A media noche.
16. ^Cuando saheron sus hermanas para el campo? Ayer al medio
dia.
17. ^ Cuando volveran ? Pasado mafiana por la noche.
18. ^A que hora amanece en el verano? En verano amanece a las
cinco y anochece a las siete y media.
19. ^ Porqu6 se maroha Y. tan pronto ? Porque es menester.
20. I Es menester salir al amanecer ? No, basta salir al medio dia.
21. ^Hay muchos Alcmanes en Nueva York? Si, sefior, hay muchi-/
simos.
22. I Cuahtos dias hace que no le ve Y. ? No hace mas que uno.
23. ^Hay algun Frances en sucasade Y.? Hay cuatro Franceses y una
Francesa.
24. I Cuando vinieron Yds. ? Ayer al medio dia.
25. I Cree Y. qu6 llovera hoy ? Parece que si, porque hace mucho
viento y mucho calor.
140 LESSON XXX.
26. ^Llovi6 mucho aqni el afiopasado? Aqui llovi6 mucho, pero en
la Habana llovi6 mas.
27. ^Nieva raucho en este pais? En el invierno nieva mncho.
28. ^Se hiela el agua? Muchas veces.
29. I Habra mncho hielo el afio pr6ximo ? En el invierno babrd mn-
cho hielo.
80. I Hace mncho frio ? Si, sefior, y al amanecer llovia y granizaba.
81. I Porqu6 hace tanto frio hoy ? Porque nev6 ayer,
EXERCISE.
1. Is it raining ? I do not know.
2. You do not know ? How, are you still in bed ? — Yes, and I shall
be until 7 o'clock.
8. At what o'clock did you go to bed? At midnight.
4. What is it necessary to do in order to learn Spanish ? It is neces-
sary to study a good grammar, talk a great deal with Spaniards, and read
the works of good authors.
5. What were you doiog in the garden this morning at daybreak ?
I was walking.
6. Have you read the Spanish newspaper yet that I lent* yon? Yes,
sir, here it is. Thank you.
7. What language do they speak in Brazil ? Portuguese (portugues).
8. Do yon see that lightning f ? Yes, it is lightening and thundering
very much.
9. Is it proper to have the windows open when it thunders? No, it
is better to have them shut (cerradas).
10. I think (it appears to me) it will soon rain. Yes, I think so too ;
it is already drizzling.
11. John ! Sir. Is there any water in my room ? — No, sir, but if you
wish, I shall take some there now.
12. In what months of the year does it freeze most in New York ?
During (durante) the months of January and February.
13. I believe there is a great deal of ice used (se usa) in New York
during the summer. A great deal, and it is very cheap.
14. It appears that there will be little ice next summer. Very little,
the winter has not been cold enough to have much.
15. What watch is that you have there ? It is the one I always hiid.
16. I thought you had given your watch to Charles, and bought your
(the) neighbor's ? No, Charles has a very pretty little watch.
17. What o'clock is it by your watch ? It is just four o'clock {son la$
ciiatro en punto).
* Prostar. t Relimpaga
LESSON XXXI. 141
18. Who knocked at the door just now? It was Mrs. Martinez ; it is
thundering, and you know she is afraid of the lightning.
19. Why did she not come in ? She did not like to (would not) disturb
you {molestarla a V.) madam.
20. Do you know whether Alexander has sent the papers to his
brother yet? lt\i\nk\iQh2iS> {me parece que si).
21. Did you take him the two volumes I showed him yesterday ? I
took them to him this morning.
22. Was he in the house when you went ? No, madam, he had just
gone out.
23. Will you open that window, if yon please ? With pleasure.
24. And this one also ? No, thank you ; it is better to have that one
shut.
25. What kind of weather is it to-day ? Very bad ; it has been raining
and hailing ever since {desde) daybreak.
26. Madam, here are two beautiful bouquets that Mrs. Garcia has sent
you from her garden. She is very kind (buena).
27. Who brought them ? Her servant {fern.).
28. When did she bring them? You had no sooner gone out than
she came.
29. How windy it was last night! Yes, and it rained in torrents the
whole night, from nightfall until daybreak this morning.
30. What news is there from Europe ? I do not know ; I have not
yet seen the newspapers.
LESSON XXXI.
Gustar. | To like, to please.
(A mi) me gusta or gustan.
(A ti) te gusta "
(A 61) le gusta "
(A nosotros) nos gusta, or gustan.
(A vosotros) OS gusta, "
(A ellos) les gusta. "
I like it or them.
Thou likest it or them.
He likes it "
We like it "
You like it "
They like it "
IMPEKFECT.
(A mi) me gustaba or gustaban. I I liked it or them.
(A ti) te gustaba, etc. I Thou likedst it, &c.
142
LESSON XXXI.
Gustar de.
Gusto de.
Gustas de.
Gusta de.
Gustamos de.
Gustais de.
Gustan de.
Gustaba de.
Gustabas de, etc.
I To be fond of.
PRESENT.
I am fond of.
Thou art fond o£
He is fond of.
"We are fond of.
You are fond of.
They are fond ot
IMPERFECT.
I was or used to be fond ofl
Thou wast or used to be fond
of, &c.
Gustar.
To taste.
Placer.
To please.
Pesar (impersonal).
To regret
Pesar (in all its persons).
To weigh.
Faltar or hacer falta.
To want.
Faltar.
To fail, to be wanting or missing.
Acorn odar.
To suit, to accommodate.
Convenir.
To suit, to be convenient.
Importar.
To be important.
Cerca.
Near.
L6J0S.
Far.
Dentro.
Within.
Fuera.
Without.
Bello.
Beautifiil, fine.
Posible.
Possible.
Imposiblo.
Impossible.
Poeta.
Pintor.
Escultor.
Placer.
Dios.
Pesar.
Melon.
Melocoton.
Arte.
Poet.
Painter.
Sculptor.
Pleasure.
God.
Regret, sorrow.
Melon.
Peach.
Ai-t, skill.
Poesla.
Pintura.
Escultura.
Prosa.
Fruta.
Manzana.
Naranja.
Artes (plu.),
Arroba.
Poetry, poem.
Painting.
Sculpture.
Prose.
Fruit.
Apple.
Orange.
Arts.
Arroba.
LESSON XXXI,
143
COMPOSITION.
g Le gusta a Y. la fruta ?
Si, senor, me gustan las naranjas y los
melones.
A ml me gustan los melocotones y las
manzanas.
|Cual de las bellas artes le gusta a Y.
mas?
Me gustan todas, la musica, la poesia,
' la pintura y la escultura.
I Ya Y. 4 la opera muy k menudo ?
Yoy dos 6 tres veces por semana.
Me parece que Uovera pronto, y me
gusta porque tengo un gran placer en
ver Hover.
j Es posible ! A mf no me gusta ver
llover; pero me gusta muchisimo
ver nevar.
(4 Le acomoda a Y. ese caballo ?
No me conviene, porque es muy viejo
asi que no lo comprare.
I Yive Y. cerca 6 16jos de aqul ?
Yivo muy cerca.
I Yive Y. dentro 6 fuera de la ciudad ?
Ahora en la ciudad ; pero en el verano
vivo en el campo.
i Qu6 le falta k Y. para ser feliz ?
No me falta nada, gracias k Dios.
Deseo conocer al pintor cuya pintura
tiene Y. en su cuarto.
I Le pesa k Y. de no haber estado en el
concierto ?
Me pesa mucho de no haber estado,
porque no tuve el placer de ver k su
amigo de Y.
A ml me pesa de ello tambien.
Do you like fruit ?
Yes, sir, I like oranges and melons.
I like peaches and apples.
Which of the fine arts do you like
best?
I Uke them all, music, poetry, painting
and sculpture.
Do you go to the opera very often ?
I go two or three times a week.
It appears to me that it will soon rain,
and I am glad of it (I like it), because
I find (have a) great pleasure in see-
ing it rain.
Is it possible ! I do not Uke to see it
rain ; but I like to see it snow.
Does that horse suit you ?
It does not suit (or answer) me, because
it is very old, so that I shall not
buy it.
Do you live near here, or far away ?
I Uve very near.
Do you live in or out of town ?
In town now, but in the country in
summer.
What do you want (is wanting to you)
to be happy ?
I want nothing, thank God.
I desire (or wish) to know the painter
whose painting you have in your room.
Do you regret not having been at the
concert ?
I deeply (very much) regret not having
been there, for I had not the pleasun*
of seeing your friend.
I regret it too (also).
EXPLANATION.
148. GusTAR, derived from the noun gusto, pleasure, and
signifying literally to give pleasure to, is the verb by which we
144 LESSON XXXI.
translate to li7ce; but in passing from English to Spanish, the
nominative case or subject becomes the objective, and the
latter is preceded by the preposition d ; as,
6 Le gusta a V. la poesia ? I Do you like poetry ?
Me gusta {or k mi me gusta) mucho. | I like it very much.
149. GxjSTAB, followed by the preposition de, means to he
fond q/*, and sentences in which it is used are constructed as
in English ; as,
Yo gusto de la musica. I I am fond of music.
El gusta de la poesia. | He is fond of poetry.
150. GusTAE, used as an active verb, means to taste^ and
governs the objective, without the aid of any preposition what-
ever; as,
^ Gusta Y. la sopa ? I Do you taste the soup ?
No, senor, gusto la carne. | No, sir, I taste the meat
151. The verbs joesar, to regret; f altar, in the sense of to
want, or hacerfalta, to have need of; a^omodar, to suit ; con-
venir, to suit ; importar, to be important ; placer, to please,
and some others, require the same idiomatic construction of the
sentence as that explained in the case of gustar / as.
Nos falta {or nos hace falta) dinero.
A Y. le importa ese negocio.
Mucho me place.
We want {or are in want of) money.
That business is important to you.
It pleases me much.
This last verb is defective, and is very little used, except in
the present and imperfect of the subjunctive mood, as will be
seen in the proper place.
152. The verb pesar, when meaning to regret, generally
takes the preposition de after it ; as.
Me pesa de ello. | I am sorry for it.
CONYERSATION AND YERSION.
1. jLe gusta 4 V. la 6pera? Cuando era j6vcn me gustaba mas que
ahora.
2. I Vendrd V. mafiana d comer con nosotros ? Si, sellor, no faltar6.
3. I Necesita Y. hoy su reloj ? Iloy no me hace falta, manana me
convendrd tenerlo.
4. jQuiere Y. saber lo que he hecho hoy? No me importa saberlo.
LESSON XXXI. 145
5. I Compra Y. el caballo del ingles ? No, sefior, no me conviene :
es muj caro.
6. Dicen que es muy bueno. No importa.
7. I Porque vive V. tan l^jos de la ciudad ? Porque no me gustan
veoinos.
8. Antes vivia Y. comodamente cerca de la poblacion. Si; pero
ahora no me gusta.
9. I Cuantas arrobas pesa Y. ? Peso ocho arrobas y cinco libras.
10. j Ha visto Y. a su prima? No, sefior, j me pesa mucho de ello.
11. ^Cuanto pesa su nifio de Y.? No s6, porque no lo hemos pesado
aun.
12. ^Quiere Y. ir d paseo con D. Carlos, nuestro vecino? No quiero
ii' con 61 porque habla mucho, 7 no me gustan los habladores.
13. No obstante, el afio pasado estaba Y. en buena amistad con 6l.
Si ; pero abora me pesa j me pesara siempre.
14. ^Nunca seran Yds. amigos otra \ez'( Jamas : es imposible,
15. ^Porque? No puedo decirselo a Y.
16. ^Eso no le gustara a 61 ? Nada me importa.
17. jEstan Yds. comiendo pan? No, sefior, estamos comiendo fruta,
18. ^ Gusta Y. ?* Si, com ere una manzana.
19. ^No le gustan 4 Y. los melones? Si, sefior; pero me gustan mas
los melocotones y las naranjas.
20. I Quien es aquella sefiorita tan bella que paseaba ayer con Y. en
el parque ? Es una amiga mia.
21. I Qu6 son los bombres que vinieron antes de ayer con Y. ? El uno es
poeta, el otro pintor y escultor el otro.
22. ^Oual de las bellas artes le gusta a Y. mas? Todas me gustan;
pero la poesia mas que las otras.
23. I Le gusta 4 Y. leer una bella poesia ? Si, sefior, me gusta
mucho.
24. ^.Hace mucho frio hoy? Fuera hace bastante; pero dentro de
casa hace muy poco.
25. I Porque no fLi6 Y. al baile anoche ? Porque no me gustan Iob
bailea.
20. ^Es posible que siendo tan j5ven no le gustan a Y.? A mi me
importa estudiar ; no bailar.
27. I Porqu6 no quiere Y. bailar ? Porque estoy cansado. .
28. I Qu6 es lo que le hace falta a Y. para ser feliz ? Nada me hace
falta por ahora, gracias a Dios.
29. I Qu6 le falta 4 Y. ? Me falta el sombrero.
80. Aqui estl ^Se marcha Y.?— Si, sefior, si Y. no manda otra
^^^^' +00 you wish?
1
146 LESSON XXX I.
EXERCISE.
1. Are your brothers and sisters fond of study ? They are not so
fond of it as some children I have known.
2. Do they ever read poetry ? Sometimes, hut not very often.
3. Do you linderstand Spanish poetry ? Not yet ; but I understand
prose perfectly well.
4. Do you ever eat fruit ? Yes, I am very fond of apples, oranges,
peaches and melons.
6. Is that gentleman a sculptor ? No, madam, he is a painter, and
enjoys a high reputation.
6. Do you know that it is raining ? Raining ! no, I did not (know it).
7. Do you think it is going to thunder ? I think it is (I think so).
8. Then it is imposible to go out ? By no means {de ningun modo) ;
we are not afraid of hghtning.
9. Does it always lighten when it rains ? Not always.
10. Good morning, Mr. Retortillo, how do you do ? Very well, thank
you ; and how are you (and you) ?
11. What do you wish ? I have come to see if this letter is correctly
written. It is perfectly correct.
12. Who wrote that letter ? A friend of mine, who writes Spanish
very well.
13. Why do you not learn Spanish yourself? I have no time, and I
regret it very much.
14. What profession (profesion) do you like best? Of all professions I
like that of a physician best.
15. When did you see Miss Mel6ndez ? I had the pleasure of seeing
her the other day.
16. How do you like (que tat) your new piano? Very much.
17. Who is your music teacher? I have none just now; but I used
to have a German teacher.
18. How much do you weigh? I weigh a hundred and sixty-five
pounds {lihras).
19. Does Charles weigh as much as Alexander? No, sir, Alexander
weighs twenty pounds more.
20. Is Mr. Martinez at home? No, sir, he is out.
21. When will he be in? I do not know; he did not say (it) when he
was going out (al salir).
22. Does your uncle live in or out of town ? In summer he lives out
of town.
23. When he is in town where does he live ? lu Twenty-second street,
pear Fifth Aycpue,
LESSON XXXII,
147
24. How did you spend your time when you were in the country ? I
walked morning and evening, and during the day I read the beautiful
poems of Zorrilla and Espronceda.
26. Have you ever read any of Martinez de la Eosa's poems ? Yes,
but I do not like them so well as those of MeMndez.
26. Which is the greatest Spanish painter? Spain has had a great
number of excellent painters, but the most celebrated of aU are Murillo
and Velazquez.
2T. Are your cousins pleased with their new house ? I believe so ;
but they say they liked the old one better.
28. Where did they live before taking the house in which they reside
now ? In Fourteenth street, near Seventh avenue.
29. Are they not comfortable in the new one ? It is not for that ;
but they are very fond of flowers, and they have no garden now.
30. Will you come out and take a walk with me ? Yes, if Emanuel
comes with us ; if not, I shall go and practise on the piano.
LESSON XXXII.
Poder. {See this verb at the
end of the booh)
Esperar.
Castigar.
Engaflar.
Quemar.
Tratar.
Tratar de.
Tratar en.
Seguir. (See this verb at the
end of the booJc.)
To be able ; may, &c.
To expect, to wait for, to hope.
To punish.
To deceive, to cheat.
To burn.
To treat ; to have intercourse with.
To endeavor, to try, to treat of.
To deal in.
To follow.
ADVEEBS AND ADVERBIAL PHEASES.
Casi.
I Cudnto tiempo ?
Cuanto dntes.
De Moda.
Debalde. )
Gratis. )
De cuando eu cuando.
Almost, nearly.
How long?
As soon as possible.
Fashionable.
Gratis ; for nothing.
From time to time ; now and then.
148
LESSON XXXII.
De improviso.
De veras.
Verdaderarnente.
En lo sucesivo.
Hasta no mas.
Poco a poco.
Por supuesto.
Tal vez. )
Acaso.
Picaro.
Bribon.
Ejemplo.
Eogue (roguish).
Rascal.
Example ; instance.
Suddenly, unexpectedly, un-
awares.
Indeed, truly.
In future.
To the utmost, to the extreme.
Little by little, by degrees, gently..
Of course.
Perhaps.
Coqueta. Coquette.
Sociedad. Society.
Politica. Politics.
COMPOSITIOX.
y Mi hermano cs castigado algunaa veces
por no saber sus lecciones.
Y su amigo de V. Alejandro, ^ lo es al-
guna vez ?
Lo es de cuando en cuando ; pero mi
hermana no ha sido castigada jam&s,
porque sabe siempre sus lecciones.
" ^ Ha sido V. enganado alguna vez ?
Hasta no mas, porque hay muchos pi-
caros en la sociedad.
Esta casa est4 bien situada.
La carta estaba mal escrita.
Manuel es amado de {or por) Margarita.
El libro ha sido escrito por un Frances.
Se quemd {or fu6 quemada) la casa.
Esta casa so hizo en seis
i En cuanto tiempo so liizo la do V. ?
En cosa de tres meses.
I Cu&nto tiempo neceeita V. para escri-
bir esa carta ?
Esta casi acabada ; estoy con Y. en un
minuto.
"^ Poco k poco ; va V. muy aprisa.
'J Tal vez ; pero tengo prisa y quiero aca-
bar pronto.
My brother is sometimes punished for
not knowing bis lessons.
And your friend Alexander, is he ever
punished (ever so) ?
He is, now and then ; but my sister has
never been pimished, because she
always knows her lessons.
Have you ever been deceived ?
To the utmost, for there are a great
many rogues in society.
This house is well situated.
The letter was badly written.
Emanuel is loved by Margaret.
The book was written by a Frenchman.
The house was burnt
This house was built (made) in six
months.
How long was yours in building (mak-
ing) ?
About three months.
How long shall you be in writing that
letter ?
It is almost finished ; I shall be (am)
with you in a moment (minute).
Gently : you go very quick.
Perhaps so ; but I am in hast«, and 1
want to get done (finish) soon.
LESSON XXXII.
149
I De veras ?
Por supuesto : tengo que ir al correo.
» Dios esta en todas partes, lo sabe y lo
puede todo, y nos perdonara si trata-
mos de hacer nuestro deber.
\/ 6 Es su reloj de V. de moda ?
V Si, senor ; pero no me gusta, porque es
muy pequeno.
Indeed ?
Of course : I have to go to the post-
office.
God is everywhere; He knows all
things, and nothing is impossible
for Him (can do all); and He will
pardon us, if we endeavor to do our
duty.
Is your watch fashionable ?
Yes, sir ; but I do not like it, because
it is too small.
EXPLANATION.
153. Passive Voice. — This voice is formed by the different
tenses of the auxiliary ser added to the past participle of the
verb, care being taken that the participle agree with the sub-
ject, in gender and number, like an adjective ; as,
Soy amado.
Hemos sido amados.
Habeis sido amados.
Seras amada.
I am loved.
We have been loved.
You have been loved.
Thou wilt be loved.
(or). The passive voice is, however, formed in Spanish, by
estar, instead of ser, when the past participle is used adjective-
ly, that is to say, when the state or condition of the subject is
described without any reference to an action ; as,
Esta casa esid bien siiuada. j This house is well located.
La carta esiaha mal escrita. | The letter was badly written.
154. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish in
the present and imperfect of the indicative mood, only when it
is designed to express a mental act ; as,
Manuel es amado de Margarita. | Emanuel is loved by Margaret.
When a mental act is not expressed, the passive verb being
in the present or imperfect of the indicative mood, estar is the
auxiliary to be used, and not ser ; as,
El libro ha sido escrito por un Fran-
ces, or el libro estd escrito por un
Frances (instead of es escrito).
155. When the action of the verb refers to the mind, the
The book was written by a French-
man.
150 LESSON XXXII.
preposition de orpor may be used after the passive verb, before
the agent, and por only, when otherwise ; as,
Manuel es amado de (or por) Marga- I Emanuel is loved by Margaret
rita. I
156. The passive voice in English is very frequently
turned into Spanish by putting the verb which is in the parti-
ciple past in English, in the same person and number as the
auxiliary to be in the English sentence, and placing the pronoun
se before it.
157. The latter form is preferred when the object, or re-
ceiver, of the action is an inanimate thing, or when the sub-
ject, or agent, remains undetermined ; as,
The house was burnt.
This house was built (made) in six
months.
Se quem6 la casa.
Esta casa se hizo en seis meses.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^N"© puede Y. esperar? Esperar6 un poco.
2. I No me engafiara V. ? Por supnesto que no ; yo no soy ningun
picaro.
3. Buenos dias. i De qu6 estan Vds. tratando ? — Estabamos hablando
de modas.
4. I Puede Y. decirme si mi sombrero es de moda ? No es de la tilti-
ma (moda).
6. i, Cuanto tiempo hace que pas6 esta moda ? Habrd ya un mes, poco
mas 6 m6no3.
6. I Quiere Y. quemar las cartas de esa sefiorital Si, sefior, porqtfe
es una coqueta.
7. jDe veras? Yo creia que era una seflorita de mucha circuns-
peccion. Hace aJgun tiempo lo era ; pero poco 4 poco ha ido siguiendo
el ejemplo do otras.
8. I Tal vez el aer coqueta es de moda en la sociedad del dia ? Asi lo
creo.
9. Y. dobe excusar d las niflas ; ellas son inocentes y no creen hacer
mal en eso.
10. jHa sido Y. engaflado alguna vez? Hasta no mas; porque hay
muchos picaros.
11. ^Ilan sido castigados sus niflos de Y.? Si, sefior, ban sido casti-
gados por no saber sus lecciones.
LESSON XXXII. 151
12. ^Y aquel criado tan bueno que V. tenia? Es un bribon; no lo
quiero ni de balde.
13. gDe veras? V. lo trataba muj Men. Acaso por lo mismo que
yo lo trataba bieD, me ha tratado 61 tan mal.
14. I Le gusta a V. la sociedad ? Si, seiior, de cuando en cuando.
15. g Porqu6 no vive V., entonces, en la ciudad? Porque se me querad
la casa.
16. ^Ouanto tiempo hace? Casi un mes.
17. Y ahora, i no va V. nunca alia ? Yoy de cuando en cuando.
18. Eso es verdaderamente un gran mal ; pero en lo sucesivo tendra
V. mas cuidado. — Por supuesto que si.
19. gNo pudo V. saber quien le quem6 la casa? No; pero creo que
fue un bribon, que me queria mal.
20. I Quiere Y. acabar ya? Si, cuanto antes ; no puedo esperar mas.
21. I Qu(§ piensa Y. liacer ahora ? Trato de castigar al que me quem6 la
casa.
22. ^Y despues? Despues ver6 si puedo hacer otra.
23. ^ Y no tiene Y. ahora ninguna alia ? Tengo una hecha de impro-
viso.
24. Poco a poco ira Y. haciendo otra. Asi lo espero.
25. ^Por supuesto que su sefiora vivira en la ciudad? Si; pero va
alia de cuando en cuando ; el otro dia llego de improviso, cuando menos
la esperaba.
26. I No puede Y. volver mafiana por aqui ? Mafiana tal vez no, pero
pasado si.
27. Entonces lo espero a Y. sin falta. Puede Y. esperarme ; no faltar6.
28. ^Ira Y. hoy a la comedia 6 4 la 6pera? Tal vez ire d la 6pera,
porque es mas de moda.
29. I ISTunca va Y. 4 la comedia ? Si ; voy de cuando en cuando.
80. I Sabe Y. que se ha quemado la Academia (academy) de Mdsica ?
Si ; anoche lo lei en los periddicos.
EXERCISE.
1. Papa, may I go out ? Yes, you may go out for half an hour.
2. How long is it since your house was burnt ? Only three weeks.
3. Why does that woman punish her children so much? She al-
ways punishes them when they do wrong (pbrar mal).
4. Does she reward {recompensar) them when they do right ? I be-
lieve she does.
5. Why do you burn all that young lady's letters ? Because she is
only a coquette.
152 LESSON xxxn.
6. I tliink you are not rigLt ; I have known her a long time, and I
believe she is very circumspect {circumspecta).
7. Why do your family alwaysT live in the country ? Because we do
not like society.
^ 8. And is it not possible to live in town without going into society?
It is impossible.
9. We always live in town, and yet {nn erribargo) we never go into
society.
10. Peter, can you write that letter for me now ? I can.
11. When do you want it? As soon as possible. v
12. Have you ever been deceived by that man? Yes, very often ; he
is a rascal.
13. How long have you known him ? Kot long ; but each time I have
V had business with him, he has deceived me.
14. Indeed! What business is he in ? I cannot tell you.
15. Do you often go to the theatre ? Never to the theatre ; I go to
the opera now and then.
16. Can you tell me whether my hat is fashionable? Yes, it is in the
latest fashion.
17. Is Peter's the fashion too? No, those hats went out of fashion
last year.
18. Where is your old servant ? He lives with us no longer.
19. Did you give Charles the fruit you were to buy for him ? No, he
came for it tlie other day, but I had not had time to buy it.
20. Why did you come so late to-day to your lesson ? My exercise
was very difficult, and I could not finish it in time.
21. Well, I hope you will come in time in future ? Yes, in future I
shall come at four o'clock precisely.
22. I hope you will not deceive me ? Of course I shall not ; I never
deceive anybody.
23. Will that yoang gentleman * be at the concert with you to-morrow
night? Perhaps he will come with us.
24. Does he not go every night ? Indeed I do not know.
25. How long is it since you began to take lessons? About {cerca de)
four months.
26. And do your brother and sister take their lessons at the same hour
as you ? No, my brother takes his at ten o'clock, and ray sister at
twelve.
27. Where did you become acquainted with the gentleman who danced
last with your cousin {fern.) yesterday evening ? I made his acquaint-
ance in Madrid the year before last (hace dos aflos).
28. Has this young man deceived you as often as his father? He has;
Caballerito.
LESSON XXXIII.
153
you know cMldren almost always follow the example of their parents
{padres).
29. Do you think Charles is loved by Louisa? I think she loves him
as much as it is possible to love.
30. "What did you tell the tailor ? I told him you wanted your coat
and vest for tlie day after to-morrow.
LESSON XXXIII
Lavars^.
Haber«(3 lavado.
Haber«6 de lavar.
Lavandos<?.
Habiendo«e lavado.
Habiendo«6 de lavar.
REFLECTIYE YERBS.
ESrmiTIVB MOOD.
To wash one's self.
To have washed one's self.
To have to wash one's self.
GERUND.
"Washing one's self.
Having washed one's self.
Having to wash one's sel£
INDICATIVE PEESENT.
(Yo) me lavo.
(Til) te lavas.
(El) se lava.
(ISTosotros) nos lavamos.
(Vosotros) OS lavais.
(Ellos) se lavan.
I wash myself.
Thou washest thyselfl
He washes himself.
We wash ourselves.
You wash yourselves.
They wash themselves.
{Tlie other simple tenses are conjugated in Mice manner.)
PEETEEIT INDEFINITE.
(Yo) me he lavado.
(Til) te has lavado.
(£l) se ha lavado.
(Nosotros) nos hemes lavado.
(Vosotros) OS habeis lavado.
(Ellos) se han lavado.
{The other compound tenses
Cortar.
Cortarsd.
Afeitar.
I have washed myself.
Thou hast washed thyself.
He has washed himself.
We have washed ourselves.
You have washed yourselves.
They have washed themselves.
are conjugated in lihe manner.)
To cut.
To cut one's self; to be ashamed.
To shave.
154
LESSON XXXIII,
Afeitawe.
Levantar.
Levantar*^.
Cansar.
Cansar«e.
Descansar.
Contentar.
Coiitentar»&
Burlar.
BuTlarse.
Preguntar.
Responder.
Engafiar«e.
Temer. Reir.
Barbero.
Cansancio.
Descanso.
Contento.
Respondon.
Cuchillo.
Barber.
"Weariness, fatigue.
Rest.
Contentment.
Ever ready to reply.
Knife.
To shave one's self.
To raise, to lift.
To get up, to rise.
To weary, to fatigue, to tire.
To tire one's sel^ to get tired.
To rest.
To content, to please.
To content one's selfl
To mock, to jest.
To jest, to make jest of, to laugh at
To question, to ask, to enquire.
To answer.
To deceive one's sel£
To fear. To laugh.
Arriba.
Up.
Abajo.
Down.
Detras.
Behind.
Encima.
Upon, above.
Debajo.
Under.
Luego.
Presently.
Qu6 tal ?
How ; how do yon do ?
Descansadamente.
Easily.
De burlas.
In jest.
Descansado.
Rested.
Contento.
Content.
Pelo^cabello. Hair.
Pregunta.
Respuesta.
Burla.
Declinacion.
Derivacion.
Disposicion.
Una.
Question, query.
Answer.
Jest.
Declination.
Derivation.
Disposition.
Nail (finger).
COMPOSITION.
i A qu6 hora se levant6 V. ayer ?
Me levant6 temprano; me levanto al
umanecer todos los dias.
I Qu6 hizo V. ent6nce8 ?
Mc afeit^ y sail
At what o'clock did you get up yester-
day?
I rose early ; I rise at daybreak every
morning.
What did you do next (then) ?
I shaved myself and went out
LESSON xxxm
155
I Se lava V. dntes de afeitarse ?
Me afeito 4ntes de lavarme.
iSon faciles de aprender las palabras
declinacion, derivacion, y disposicion ?
Son facilisimas, porque casi todas las pa-
labras que acaban en cio7i son lo
mismo en ingles, cambiando la c en i.
Tengo un barbero que afeita muy bien^
pero es carisimo ; ^ que tal afeita el
deV.?
El mio no afeita muy bien; pero es
baratisimo, porque me afeito yo
mismo.
Ahora me afeita el barbero, porque me
he cortado la mano y no puedo afei-
tarme yo mismo.
I Porque se burla Y. de su amigo ?
Me burlo de 61 porque se levanta muy
tarde.
^6 Se ha cansado V. de estudiar ?
No, senor, porque cuando me canso de
estudiar, descanso escribiendo.
I Ama Y. 4 su hermano ?
Nos amamos el uno al otro.
^ Le gusta a Y. mas preguntar que res-
ponder ?
No, senor, yo no soy pregunton, y me
gusta hacer ambas cosas.
Yo no trabajo mucho, lo hago descan-
sadamente.
^ Se engana Y. k si mismo alguna vez ?
Y. habla de burlas ; ^ puede uno enga-
narse 4 si mismo jam4s ?
Por supuesto que si.
6 Esta su amigo de Y. abajo 6 arriba ?
i Esta mi libro debajo 6 encima de la
mesa?
i Quo tal le gusta 4 Y. Nueva York ?
Do you wash yourself before shaving
(yourself) ?
I shave before washing myself.
Are the words declination, derivation
and disposition easy to learn ?
They are very easy, because all words
ending in don are the same in Eng-
lish, changing the c into t
I have a barber that shaves very well,
but he is exceedingly high (dear) ;
how does your's shave ?
Mine does not shave very well ; but he
is very cheap, for I shave myself.
The barber shaves me at present (now),
because I (have) cut my hand, and I
cannot shave myself.
Why do you make fun of your friend ?
I make fun of him because he gets up
very late.
Have you got tired of studying ?
No, sir; because when I get tired at
study, I rest myself writing.
Do you love your brother ?
We love each other.
Do you like better to ask questions
than to answer ?
No, sir, I am not inquisitive ; I like to
do both.
I do not work much ; I do it at my ease.
Do you ever deceive yourself?
You speak in jest ; can one ever de-
ceive one's self?
Certainly (so).
Is your friend up-stairs or down-stairs ?
Is my book upon or under the table ?
How do vou like New York ?
EXPLANATION.
158. Reflective Verbs. — Almost all active verbs
become reflective in Spanish, and be used as pronominal.
may
The
156 LESSON XXXIII.
pronoun object must be of the same person as that of the sub-
ject, and each person is conjugated with a double personal
pronoun. However, the pronoun subject is almost always un-
derstood in Spanish, while in English it is expressed ; as,
Infinitive. Amar««. I To love one's self.
Part. Pres. Ainando«e. | Loving one's self.
INDICATIVE PRESENT.
Me amo.
Te amas.
Se ama.
Nos amamos.
Os amais.
Se aman.
I love myself
Thou lovest thyself.
He loves himself.
We love ourselves.
You love yourselves.
They love themselves.
And in the same manner in all the other tenses.
159. When an agent performs an action upon a part of
himself, the verb is made reflective ; and the possessive pro-
nouns, my, his, etc., are translated into Spanish by the article
el, la, los, las ; as.
Me corto el cabello. I I cut my hair.
Se corta las ufias. | He cuts his nails.
160. When the verb denotes a reciprocity of action be-
tween two or more individuals, it is formed, in Spanish, in the
same manner as the plural of reflective verbs ; as,
Nos amamos.
Os enganasteis.
Se temerdn.
We love one another.
You deceived each other.
They will fear each other.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jSe ha afeitado V. ? Ni me he lavado ni afoitado.
2. I Oudntas veces lava la criada & los nines ? Los lava per la mafiana,
al medio dia y 4 la noche.
8. I Cudndo les corta las uflas ? Se las corta los miercoles y los sdbados.
4. I Se lavantan temprano ? A las seis en verano, y 4 las siete en ia-
vierno.
6. ^Porqud no se levant6 V. hoy mas temprano ? Porqne el criado
no me despert6.
6. I'No despierta Y. temprano? Cuando cstoy cansado, no.
7. jEstaba V. muy cansado ayer? Si, scflor, el paseo me can86 macho.
LESSON XXXIII. 157
8. Ent6iice3, ^ querra V. descansar hoy todo el dia ? Ifo, he descan-
sado ya bastante durante la noche.
9. I Con cuanto dinero se contenta Y. ? Yo me contento con poco.
10. gSe contentara V. con diez pesos ? Se burla V. de mi.
11. No, yo solaraente pregunto. — V. me pregunta y yo respondo que no.
12. ^ Habla V. de burlas 6 de veras ? Hablo de veras ; yo no me con-
tento con menos de cien pesos.
13. gSe burla V. de mi? No, sefior, yo nunca hablo de burlas; y V.
tendra que contentarse con lo que se le ha dado ya.
14. Y. es quien se engafia. — El engaflado sera Y., yo no.
15. g Para que llama Y. al barbero ? Para afeitarrae.
16. I Porqu6 no se afeita Y. mismo ? Porque tengo miedo de cortarme.
17. I Donde esta el cuchillo ? Esta sobre la mesa.
18. I Ad6nde va Y. ? Yoy a cortarme el pelo.
19. ^ Donde vive su barbero ? Yive detras de la iglesia.
20. I Pregunt6 Y. al criado por mis botas ? Si, sefior, me dijo que es-
taban bajo de la cama.
21. ^Sale Y. ahora a paseo? No, sefior, saldre despues.
22. I Qu6 tal esta su amigo de Y. ? Ahora estd mas contento.
28. gQu6 tal es el criado que tiene Y. ahora? Es muy respondon.
24. gD6nde esta su padre de Y., arriba 6 abajo ? Antes estaba abajo,
ahora me parece que esta arriba.
25. I Que tal ha pasado Y. la noche ? Muy descansadamente ; he dor-
mido muy bien.
26. I C6mo estan escritos los ejercicios de su gramatica de Y. ? Estan
por preguntas y respuestas.
27. I Hizo Y. la pregunta que le dije ? Si; pero no me dieron respuesta.
28. ^De qu6 trata la leccion de hoy? De la declinacion y derivacion
de los nombres, y de la disposicion de las palabras en la composicion.
29. I Qu6 esta Y. leyendo ? Las disposiciones del rey Carlos III.
30. I Aprende bien el espafiol su amigo de Y. ? No, sefior, tiene muy
poca disposicion para las lenguas.
31. I Qu6 hizo Y. ayer despues que se levant6 ? Me lav6 y me afeita.
32. I Se cans6 Y. mucho ayer ? Si, sefior, me cans6 mucho el paseo al
parque.
^ 33. I Necesita Y. descanso ? Descanso bastante de noche.
EXERCISE.
1. Where do yon sleep ? In the small room on the third floor (piso),
2. At what o'clock do you get up every morning ? I generally rise
at six o'clock.
168 LESSON XXXIII.
8. At what Lour do jour children rise in summer ? They rise at day-
break.
4. At what time do they go to bed? At nightfall.
5. Where do you wash yourself? I wash myself in my own room.
6. Do you wash yourself in hot (caliente) or cold water ? I wash
myself always with cold water.
7. Why do you not wash sometimes with warm water ? Because
cold water is much better for the skin (cutis).
8. Where do you go to get shaved ? I go to the barber's.
9. Where does your barber live ? In Broadway, near Broome
street.
10. Are you tired ? No, sir, I never tire myself writing.
11. Are you speaking in earnest or in jest? In earnest; I am not in
a humor to jest.
12. It seemed to me you were in a humor to jest a while ago ? Not
at all ; on the contrary,* it was my brother that was making fun of me
because I had cut my hand.
13. Well, no matter ; I know you are fond of jesting and laughing at
everybody. Yon deceive yourself, my dear sir {aeflor mio).
14. Charles, can you go to the tailor's to tell him I wish to see him ?
It is impossible for me to go out now, I am expecting Mr. Valero.
15. No matter, I shall send John. John cannot go either; he has to
be here at the same time as I.
16. Will you go to the post-ofl5ce and ask if there are any letters for
me ? I asked this morning when I took father's letters, and they told
me there were none.
17. Did you see the newspaper I was reading when your cousin came
in ? There it is on the table, behind the dictionary.
18. Why did you get your hair cut (hacerse cortar)^ Because it was
too long (largo).
19. Indeed! I thought you liked long hair? On ladies, yes; but it
is not very suitable for a man.
20. Where is Peter ? I think he is up-stairs.
21. Will you do me the pleasure to call him ? Ceri&mlj (ciertamente).
22. Was the musician contented with what you gave him ? He did
not appear to be contented.
28. How do you like the vest that my tailor made for you ? Pretty
(bastante) well ; but I like the work of my own tailor better.
24. How is your uncle to-day ? The physician came to see him this
afternoon, and he said he was much better.
25. What are those gentlemen doing over there ? Do you not see thai
they arc resting?
Dc nlngun modo, al contrarlo.
LESSON XXXIV,
159
26. How do you know they are tired ? They have been walking all
the morning.
2T. Then they are very right {hacer muy Men) to rest. Of course ;
rest is sweet {grato) when one is tired {se eatd cansado).
LESSOK XXXIV
IKREGULAR VERBS.
Acertar.
1 To guess, to make out, to hit
1 the mark.
3
QfDiOATi VE. — Presen t.
Acierto.
I guess.
Aciertaa.
Thou guessest.
Acierta,
He guesses.
Acertamos.
"We guess.
Acertais.
You guess.
Aciertan.
They guess.
IMPEEATIVE.
Acierta td.
Guess thou.
Acierte 61.
Let him guess.
Acertemos nosotros.
Let us guess,
Acertad vosotros.
Guess.
Acierten ellos.
Let them guess.
euBJUNonvE. — Present.
Acierte.
I may or can guess.
Aciertes.
Thou may est or canst guess.
Acierte.
He may or can guess.
Acertemos.
"We may or can guess.
Acerteis.
You may or can guess.
Acierten.
They may or can guess.
Yerls
conjugated Wke aceetae.
Calentar.
To warm, to heat.
Cerrar.
To shut, to close.
Confesar.
To confess.
Despertar.
To awake, to wake.
Gobernar. Acercar.
To govern. To approach.
160
LESSON XXXIV.
Merendar.
Negar.
Pensar.
Quebrar.
Sentarse.
To lunch.
To deny.
To think, to intend.
To break.
To sit down.
Verbs that are regular, althougTi small changes are made to preserve the
pronunciation of the infinitive.
To vanquish, to overcome.
Veneer.
Eesarcir.
Pagar.
Delinquir.
Escoger.
Poseer.
Proveer.
Hulr.
Argiiir.
Fuego.
Jardinero.
Motivo.
Sofl
Fire.
Gardener.
Motive.
Sofa.
To indemnify.
To pay.
To commit a fault, to transgress.
To choose.
To possess.
To provide.
To flee, to fly.
To argue.
A ver.
Let us see.
Quiza.
Perhaps.
Delincuente.
Delinquent, ofi*ender, transgres-
sor.
Inocente.
Innocent.
Franco.
Frank, open.
Cualquiera.
Any, any one, some one, what-
ever, whatsoever.
Cualquiera parte.
Any place.
Consecuencia.
Prudencia.
Verduras.
Deuda.
Consequence,
conclusion.
Prudence.
Vegetables.
Debt.
COMPOSITION.
iLe gusta k V. calentarse al fiiego?
Si, Befior, me gusta calentarme al fuego
en el invierno cuando hace mucho
frio.
I Qu6 calienta el criado ?
Est& calentando el caf6.
i A qu6 bora desperto V. ayer ?
Do you like to warm yourself at the fire ?
Yes, sir, I like to warm myself at tbe
fire in winter when it is very cold.
What is the servant warming ?
He is warming the coffee.
At what hour did you awake yesterday.
LESSON XXXIV
161
V I A ver si acierta V. ?
y^ No 86, quiza desperto V. 4 las cinco.
Despierto todas las maiianas a las cua-
tro y media.
^ Cierra V. la puerta 6 la abre ?
He cerrado la puerta y abierto la ven-
tana.
N 6 Es delincuente aquel hombre ?
Lo creo, porque huye.
Niego la conseeuencia ; V. no arguye
bien, el puede ser inocente y huir
por prudencia.
i Se proveyo V. de flores ?
-Me prove! de fruta y mi hermana de
verduras.
6 Pago V. por ellas al jardinero ?
-Yo le pague la fruta y mi hermana le
pago las verduras.
I Piensa V. ir a Europa Qste verano ?
/^Deseo irme a alguna parte, porque con-
fieso que tengomucho miedo del colera.
v<Haymuchos que niegan tener miedo;
pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo
francamente.
^ A que hora se desayuna V. ?
Me desayuno a las ocho, meriendo & las
dos y como k las seis.
I Me promete Y. venir a comer conmi-
go hoy ?
\ Entre comer 6 merendar con V. escojo
el merendar, porque V. come dema-
siado temprano.
"Worda printed in italics do not
Let us see if you can* guess ?
I do not know ; perhaps you awoke at
five o'clock.
I awake every morning at half-past
four.
Are you shutting the door or opening it ?
I have shut the door and opened the
window.
Is that man a transgressor ?
I think so, for he flees.
I deny the conclusion ; you do not
argue correctly (well) ; he may be
innocent and flee (or fly) from pru-
dence.
Did you provide yourself with flowei-s ?
I provided myself with fruit, and my
sister with vegetables.
Did you pay the gardener for them ?
I paid him for the fruit, and my sister
paid him for the vegetables.
Do you intend to go to Europe this
summer ?
I wish to go somewhere, for I confess
I am very much afraid of the cholera.
There are many who deny being afraid ;
but I have the courage to confess it
freely.
At what hour do you breakfast ?
I breakfast at eight, lunch at two, and
dine at six.
Will you (do you) promise to come and
dine with me to-day ?
Between limching and dining with you,
I choose lunching, for you dine too
early,
require to be translated into Spanish.
EXPLANATION.
161. IRKE^iULAR Verbs. — All verbs that are not conju-
gated throughout according to the model verbs already given
(hablar, aprender, escribir), are called irregular.
162. It is, however, to be observed, that although some
verbs undergo slight changes in their radical letters, they are
162 LESSON XXXIV.
not to be considered as irregular on that account, inasmuch as
those mutations take place in order to preserve throughout the
whole conjugation the pronunciation of the root as sounded in
the infinitive. This observation should be carefully borne in
mind, so as not to take for irregular verbs those which are
really not so.
Many verbs ending in car, cer, ciV, gar, for instance, undergo
respectively such mutations as above alluded to : those in car
*^hange the c into qu before e ; as,
Tocar. I To touch.
To^e (instead of toce). | I touched ;
in those in cer and c^>, the c is changed into z before a and o;
as.
Veneer.
Venzo (instead of venco).
Resarcir.
Resarzo (instead of resarco).
To vanquish.
I vanquish.
To indemnify.
I indemnify ;
and lastly, those in gar take a u after the g and before e ; as,
Pagar. | To pay.
Pagw6 (instead of pag6). | I paid.
For the same reason delinquir changes qu into c, before a
and o ; as, ddinco, delinca, ddincarnos ; and escogery to choose,
changes the g into J before a and o ; as, escojo, escoja,
163. The verbs which terminate in eer, as creer, to believe ;
leer, to read ; pafeer, to possess ; proveer, to provide, in those
terminations which contain an i, change it into y whenever it
is to be joined with another vowel ; as, crei, creyd ; le% leyeron ;
posei, poseyere ; provei, proveyeremos, &c.
164. The same change is made in the verbs ending in uir,
when the w and the i make a part of two diflferent syllables.
Thus huir, to fly, makes, in the third person of the preterit defi-
nite, huyd ; argUir, to argue, makes arguyd, <fec.
165. The irregular verbs, about ^ue hundred and fifty in
number, may be divided into seven classes, presenting each a
certain regularity in their irregularity ; that is to say, whose
irregularities occur in the same persons and tenses, so that
when the pupil has learned seven verbs, or one of each of those
LESSON XXXIV. 163
groups, he will be able to conjugate almost all the Spanish
irregular verbs, save a few that confine their irregularities to
themselves and their compounds, and of which the majority
have been already introduced in previous lessons, such as haber,
tener, &c. ; but the learner can find them all conjugated at the
end of the book.
Acertar may serve as a model for the conjugation of the
first of these seven classes of irregular verbs, just as hahlar does
for the first conjugation of the regular verbs. The irregularity
of acertar^ and of all those conjugated like it, consists in taking
an i before the last e of the root, in the first, second and third
persons singular, and the ^^^>c? person plural of the present of the
indicative mood, in the present of the subjunctive, and in the
imperative. (See list of the irregular verbs at the end of the
book.) In all the other tenses and moods those verbs are regu-
lar, and the learner can easily form them according to their
respective conjugations.
166. Pagar may take for its direct object either the value
paid or the thing paid for, while the person paid is the indi-
rect object. JPor may be used before the thing paid for ; as,
Pago los caballos, or pago por los
caballos.
Pago mil pesos por los caballos.
Pago al comerciante mil pesos jwr
los caballos.
I pay for the horses.
I pay a thousand dollars for the
horses.
I pay the merchant a thousand dol-
lars for the horses.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Accrtara Y. la casa de su prima ? Si, sefior, yo la acertar6.
2. I Podra Y. acertar qui^n estuvo aqui ayer ? No acierto.
3. I No entiende su hermano de Y. lo que le digo ? Si, sefior ; pero
DO acierta d responder.
4. I Se calienta Y. al faego ? Si, sefior, porque hace mucho frio.
5. ^Porqu6 no cierra Y. entonces la pue5*ta? Confieso que no habia
pensado en ello.
6. ^ A que hora despert6 Y. esta niafiana? Despert6 A las diez.
7. J El que gobierna una casa y una familia, no debe levantarse tem-
prano? No lo niego.
8. ^Pietisa Y. merendar hoy? Si, sefior, nosotros merendamos todos
los dias.
164 LESSON XXXIV.
9. ^Porqud no se sienta V. en aquella silla, que es mejor? Porquo
tengo miedo de romperla.
10. I Le pag6 V. d su criado ? Si, sefior, le pagu6 ayer y hoy se ha huido.
11. jNo le perdonara V. ? No, sefior, porque quien delinquid una vez
delinquira dos.
12. ^Y no se resarci6 de su trabjyo? Si, sefior, dntes sq provey6 do
ropa en mi casa.
13. ^ Qu6 lenguas posee 61 ? El ingles, el frances y el italiauo.
14. I Qui^n posee ahora la casa de campo de Y. ? El americano la posee.
15. ^Se la ha pagado a V. ? No, sefior, no me pag6 nada.
16. ^Compro V. flores al jardinero? Le compr6 verdnras y mi her-
mana le compr6 flores.
lY. ^Le pagaron Vds. al jardinero por ellas? Yo le pagu6 las verdn-
ras y mi hermana pag6 por las flores.
18. ^ A quidn le gustan mas las flores, 4 V. 6 d su hermana? Creo que
4 ella le gustan mas las flores; pero d mi me gusta mas la fruta.
19. ^ Qu6 fruta le gusta a V. mas ? Me gustan las naraiyas y las man-
zanas.
20. ^Paga V. siempre sus deudas? Las page cuando tengo dinero.
21. ^Piensa V. ir al campo este verano ? Deseo ir & cualquiera parte,
porque confieso que tengo mucho miedo del colera.
22. ^ No tiene V. vergiienza de confesarlo ? Hay muchos que niegan
tener miedo ; pero yo tengo el valor de confesarlo francamente.
23. ^A qu6 hora despert6 V. ayer? Ayer, creo que despert^ a laa
cinco. Despierto todos los dias d las cuatro y media.
24. ^ Y a qu6 hora se desayuna V. ? Me desayuno a las siete, meriendo
d las dos y como d las seis.
25. I Me promete V. venir hoy d comer conmigo ? No puedo prome-
t6rselo, porque no sd si tendrd tiempo.
EXCERCISE.
1. How cold it is this morning! Yes, it is very cold.
2. Will you not come and warm yourself at the fire ? No, thank
you ; I do not like to warm myself at the fire.
3. In that case it is better to shut the doors and the windows.
Perhaps it is*
4. Do you intend remaining (estarse) here during the winter? If my
uncle remains, I will too.
5. Will you not choose other rooms if you remain ? Yes, I intend
to do so.
* English words prlDtod in italica do not reqaire to be translated Into Spanish.
LESSON XXXIV. 165
6. Good evening, Charles ; will yon not sit down for a few minutes ?
With pleasure.
7. Did you find out (make out) the musician's house yesterday ? I
made out the house without much difficulty, but I did not see him.
8. How was that ? He must have been out, for I knocked at his
door.
9. At what hour do you dine? I generally dine at six o'clock.
10. Then you lunch at noon ? Yes, sir, I generally lunch about tliat
hour.
11. Do you eat fcuit every day at dinner? Not every day.
12. Did your brother pay for the fruit he bought last week ? No ; but
he has to go out to-morrow, and perhaps he will go and pay for it.
13. Let us go and take a walk. Where do you wish to go ?
14. We can go to the Central Park. Yery well, let us go there ; I
think it is the finest promenade in the city.
15. At what time do they open the park in the morning? I beHeve
it is open in summer at five o'clock:
16. And at what time is it shut? At eleven o'clock, I believe, or per-
haps a little later.
17. In that case it will be better not to go there until to-morrow ; it
is now rather too late {algo tarde).
18. How too late? It is only half-past seven, so that we have three
hours and a half for walking.
19. Where are they taking that man to ? They are taking him to
prison {la cdrceV).
20. What are they taking him to prison for ? He must be guilty of
^ome misdemeanor (delinquir),
21. Has the servant taken the letter to the pianist yet ? He took it to
him yesterday afternoon.
22. Have you seen the news this morning ? No ; what news is there ?
23. There was a great fire last night in Fourth street, and twelve
houses were burned.
24. Where is Alexander ? He is up stairs.
25. Have any of you seen my Spanish dictionary? Yes, I had it this
morning in my room.
26. What were you doing with it? I was looking for a new word
which I met with * while reading the history you lent me.
27. How did you manage (aeertar) to wake so early this morning ?
My brother awoke me singing in my room, at five o'clock.
28. At what time do you generally wake ? If no one comes to inter-
rupt {interrumpir) my sleep, I never wake before nine.
* English words in UaUca do not require to be translated.
166
LESSON XXXV.
29. Is it not better for the health to rise early ? Certainly; but then
it is necessary to go to bed early also.
30. "Why do you not go to bed early ? I am fond of reading and study,
and so I rarely go to bed before two o'clock in the morning {de la mO'
drugada).
Acostar.
LESSON XXXV.
IRREGULAR Y^BB^— Continued,
I To put in bed.
INDICATIVE.
Acuesto, acuestas, acuesta.
Acostaraos, acostais, acuestan.
■Present.
1 put in bed, &c.
We put in bed, &o
IMPEEATIVE.
Acuesta tti, acueste ^1, acoste- Put in bed, &c.
mos nosotros, acostad voso-
tros, acxiesten eUos.
SUBJUNCTIVE. — Present.
Acueste^ acuestes^ acueste^ acos- l I may, or can, put in bed, &o»
temos, acosteis, acuesten.
VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE ACOSTAR.
Acostarse.
Aprobar.
Almorzar.
Contar.
Oonsolar.
Encontrar.
Mostrar.
Probar.
Recordar.
Reprobar.
Rogar.
Sonar.
Delicioso.
Espacioso.
Industrioso.
Religioso.
To go to bed, to lie down.
To approve.
To breakfast.
To count ; to relate, or tell.
To console.
To meet
To show.
To prove ; to try ; to taste.
To remind ; to remember.
To reprove.
To entreat
To dream.
Delicious.
Spacious.
Industrious.
Religious.
LESSOiq-
XXXV. 16?
Aristocratico.
Aristocratic.
Clasico.
Classic.
Fanatico.
Fanatic.
Monarquico.
Monarchical.
Tiranico.
Tyrannical.
Tragico.
Tragic.
Portico.
Poetical.
Analitico.
Analytical.
Satii-ico.
Satirical.
rilos6fico.
Philosophical.
C6mico.
Comic, comical.
Econdmico.
Economical.
Lac6iiico.
Laconic.
Metodico.
Methodical.
Cr6iiico.
Chronic.
Yaso. Tumbler,
glass.
Taza. Cup.
Sermon. Sermon.
Moral. Moral.
Mundo. World.
Republica. Republic.
Capital 0. Chapter.
Independencia. Independence.
Perro. Dog.
COMPOS
Religion. Religion.
ITION.
Manuel, acuestate temprano y levantate
temprano tambien.
Alejandro, cuentame lo que te dijo Luisa.
>/Ayudate y Dies te ayudar^.
Ama 4 tu projimo como a ti mismo.
V S6 religiose, pero no seas fanatico.
V S6 industrioso y economico y no seras
pobre.
Sentemonos, que estoy cansado.
Amaos como hermanos y no hableis
mal uno del otro.
Entre Y., Dn. Pedro, y tome V. asiento,
or si6ntese Y.
No puedo, estoy de prisa.
Juan, cierra la puerta, pero no cierres
la ventana.
Caballeros, entren Yds., y les mostrar^
mis libros.
Alejandro, confiesa tu falta y te la per-
cionar^.
Emanuel, go to bed early and rise early
too.
Alexander, tell me what Louisa told thee.
Help thyself, and God will help thee.
Love thy neighbor as thyself.
Be religious, but not a fanatic.
Be industrious and economical and thou
shalt not be poor.
Let us sit down, for I am tired.
Love each other as brothers, and speak
no evil one of another.
Come in, Mr. Peter, take a seat, or be
I cannot, I am in a hurry.
John, shut the door, but do not shut
the window.
Come in, gentlemen, and I shall show
you my books.
Alexander, confess your fault, and I
will pardon you.
168 LESSON XXXV
\
No los ofendamos.
Amigos, cantemos y bailemos y seamos
felices.
No tomaras en vano el Nombre del Se-
nor tu Dios
Let us not offend them.
My friends, let us sing, dance and be
merry.
Thou shalt not take the Name of the
Lord thy God in vain.
EXPLANATION.
167. The verb acostar changes the radical o into ue in the
same tenses and persons as those in which the verb acertar is
irregular; ^. €., in the present indicative, the imperative and the
present subjunctive. {See this verb and those conjugated like
it at the end of the hooJc).
168. The imperative mood is not used in the first person
singular ; nor is it used in Spanish for forbidding ; that is, it is
not employed in the negative form; but the persons of the
present subjunctive are used when a negative command or a
prohibition is expressed ; as,
No lo hagas. ) I ^ ,
,-r , , . >• Do not do so.
No lo hagais. J |
169. As has already been said, the s of the first person
plural, and the d of the second, are suppressed before nos and
OS; as,
Am^monos. I Let us love each other.
Amao«. I Love one another.
170. When the imperative is negative in English, as the
subjunctive is employed in Spanish, the objective pronouns are
placed before it ; as,
No lo digas. I Do not tell it.
No los ofendamos. | Let us not offend them.
171. The future of the indicative is often used for the im
perative; as,
No tomaras en vano el Nombre I Thou shalt not take the Name of
del Sefior tu Dios. | the Lord thy God in vain.
172. Many adjectives ending in o^is are rendered into
Spanish by changing tliis termination into oso ; as,
Delicioso. I Delicious.
Espacioso. | Spacious, &;c.
LESsoir XXXV. 169
173. Many nouns and adjectives ending in English in ic
or ical have in Spanish the termination ico ; as,
Fsjiktico, j Fanatic, fanatical
Foetico. J Poetic, poetical
CONYERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Luisa, estudia bien tu leccion de espafiol y escribe los ejercicios.
2. I Que me dara V., papa, si la estudio bien. y no hago faltas en los
ejercicios? Te Uevare conmigo al Parque Central
3. Papa, I no llevara Y, a Alejandro y a Manuel con nosotros ? Si
son buenos muchachos y estudiosos los Uevare tambien.
4. Alejandro, ven aca y cuentame que hiciste ayer en el campo. — Con
mucho gusto. Por la mafiana me levants temprano, me lave y almorc6 y
despues me fui a pasear. Volvi muy cansado y me acost6 k las nueve.
5. I Juan ! i Seiior ? Mafiana me despertaras a las cinco, me limpia-
rds las botas y me traeras el caballo temprano, porque quiero ir a ^ar un
paseo y toraar un vaso de leche en el hotel del Parque Central,
6. Araigo mio, no seas fanatico, pero s^ religioso. No seas satirico
ni hablador, pero s§ prudente, econ6mico 6 industrioso y seras feliz.
7. Por Dios, Don Pedro, no hable V. mas, le prometod V, estudiar y
ser buen muchacho.
8. No seas respondon, haz tu deber, ayiidate y Dios te ayudani
9. Don Pedro, a mi no me gustan los sermo.nes largos, si^ntese V. y
hablemos de otra cosa.
10. Mire V., Dn. .Juan, d aquella sefiorita que est^ en la ventana del
vecino ; jla conoce V. ? Si, sefior, la conoci en Filadelfia.
11. jQu6 tal le gusta d V.? MucMsimQ; es una sefiorita perfecta, y
habla el espafiol tan bien como el ingles.
12. g Quiere V. llevarme d su casa? Tengo deseo de conocerla. — Con
mucho gusto, pero antes neoesito su aprobacion.
13. gLe araan a V. muoho sus nifios? Me aman y yo los amo; y toda
la familia nos amamos los unos d los otros, asi es que somos felicisimos.
14. ^ Se aman Yds. los unos a los otros tanto como se aman Yds. mis-
mos ? Oreo que si.
15. Hable Y. alto y despacio si Y. gusta y ent6nces entendere todo lo
que Y. dice. — Asi lo har6 ; pero Y. no pensara en otra cosa que en lo
que yo digo, porque si no, no hablar6 mas,
16. ^Le conviene a Y. comprar aquella casa? No me conviene, por-
que es muy cara y estd muy 16jos de la ciudad.
17. ^Qu6 le parece a Y. del tiempo? Hoy es el cuatro de Julio do
8
170 LESSON XXXV.
1866, y por snpnesto hace calor; pero hace nrny bnen tiempo para la
celebracioii de la independencia de esta gran Reptiblica.
18. i Cuantos alios hace hoy que los Estados Unidos celebran sa inde-
pendencia ? Noventa y un afios.
19. I Parece imposible ! En m^nos de cien anos ha llegado esta nacion
6 ser una de las potencias (powers) mas grandes del mundo.
20. Eso debia ser asi, y no dude V. que llegara un dia en que la liber-
tad y la religion reinaran en el mundo haciendo felices & todas las na-
ciones como d otras tantas familias que tienen un mismo padre.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you get up late to-day ? No ; I got up at daybreak to go and
walk in the country.
2. Where did you walk? I went first to the Central Park, and then
to Ilarlcm.
3. What is the first thing we read in Telemachus ? We read that
Calypso could not console herself for the departure (partida) of
Ulysses.
4. Where have you been all this time, sir ? it is more than a week
since you last came to see us ; that is not right {estar lien). I confess I
am rather negligent (negUgente) sometimes.
5. You have doubtless already gone to see your old friend? Yes,
and he wanted to make me spend a month with him at his country house.
6. What part of the country does he live in ? On Long Island, about
ten miles from the city.
7. Was he not glad to see you ? We looked at each other for about
ten minutes without being able to say a word ; at last {en fin) he broke
the silence {rompio el 8ilencio\ and said to me : " What 1 is it you, my
dear friend? After seven years' absence (ausencia) I How glad I am I
8. Did he know you as soon as he saw you ? Yes, and I knew him,
though I met him at some distance from his father's house.
Q. Doubtless he asked you about your travels (voyages) ? Of course.
" Where have you been ? " said he. " What have you done ? what have
you seen? are you rich? arc you happy? Tell me all you have done
eince you went away (me); all your adventures. I wish it; I desire it;
T beg of you ; it will give (you will do) me the greatest pleasure.'*
10. All that proves his joy at seeing you. yes, I know that; but how
many questions I
11. Did he want an answer to each one of them? Of course; and I
answered them as well as I could.
12. What did you tell him? I told him that after having left France,
LESSON XXXVI. 171
I went to Spain, and from there into Portugal {Portugal)^ and tliat after
a few months passed in Lisbon {Lishoa) I went on to Italy, where I re-
mained four years.
13. What are the hours for breakfast and dinner amongst the Italians?
The Italians, like the French, usually (generally) breakfast at eleven
o'clock, and dine from five to seven in the evening.
14. And do they never eat anything before the breakfast hour ? Al-
most everybody takes a cup of coffee or chocolate in the morning soon
after rising.
' 15. What kind of governments are there in Europe? In Europe we
find almost every form {forma) of government, repubhcan and monar-
chical.
16. What is that book you have in your hand? An analytical treatise
{tratado) of Spanish poetry that I was going to show to your cousin.
17. Have you seen Boileau's satirical poems? My uncle has promised
to bring me that work from Paris.
18. Are you fond of reading? Yes, I take (find) great pleasure in
reading books of all kinds, classical, poetical, religious, analytical, satiri-
cal, philosophical, <Skc.
19. Do you remember the peaches our friend sent us from the country
last year? Of course I remember them, and that they were delicious.
20. Charles, go and take your breakfast ; I want to take you to see
the fine horse your uncle has bought for Alexander.
21. Will you not buy one for me, too, papa? If you are a good boy
I probably will.
22. Do you ever dream? Very often; last night I dreamed I was
travelling.
V/ 23. Indeed! Where were you going to? I do not remember now.
24. What was your father saying to Peter when I came in? He was
reproving hira for not having written his exercise yesterday.
25. Can you tell me what day this is? To-day is Wednesday, July
4th, of the year 1866, and the ninety-first of the Independence of the
United States.
LESSON XXXVI.
Respetar.
Parar.
Mover.
To respect.
To stop.
To move.
172
LESSON XXXVI
INDICATIVE — Present.
Muevo, mueves, mueve^ move-
mos, moveis, mueven.
I move, &c.
IMPERATIVE.
Mueve td, mueva 61, movamos
nosotros, moved vosotros,
muevan ellos.
Move, &a
SUBJUNCTIVE— Present.
Mueva^ muevas, mueva, mova- j I may or can move, &c.
mos, movais, muevan. \
Verba conjugated liJce moves.
Llover.
To rain.
Morder.
To bite.
Doler.
To grieve, to ]
)dn, to ache.
Yolver.
To turn, to return.
Antes que
Before.
Aunque.
Although.
Como.
Since, provided.
Para que.
A fin de.
undo.
In order that.
in order to.
Todo el m
Everybody.
Principaln
lente.
Antagonist.
Principally, chiefly.
Antagonista.
Atrocidad.
Atrocity.
Artista.
Artist.
Capacidad.
Capacity.
Materialista.
Materialist.
Claridad.
Clearness,
Naturalista.
Naturalist.
light.
Organista.
Organist.
Crueldad.
Cruelty.
Violinista.
Violinist.
Dificultad.
Difficulty.
Purista.
Purist.
Eternidad.
Eternity.
Escritorio.
Office.
Facilidad.
Facility.
Clima.
Climate.
Noticias.
News.
Dolor.
Grief, pain.
ache.
COMPO
Guerra.
3ITI0N.
War.
Sc dice que Maximiliono ha partido de | It is said that Maximilian has left Mex-
M^jico. I ico.
LESSON XXXVI.
173
J Se cree eso ?
Aqui lo cree todo el mundo ; pero en
Francia no se cree.
I Cree Y. que se podra pagar pronto la
deuda de los Estados Unidos ?
No se hara muy pronto ; pero se hara.
Aqui se habla espanol.
Aqui se vende buen vino.
Se perdona algunas veces a los delin-
cuentes, pero no siempre.
El hombre se engana a si mismo.
6 Envio V. el violin al violinista ?
Se le envi6.
I Tocan bien el piano en Espana ?
En Espana se toca bien la guitarra.
-^!^e habla bien el espanol en la Ameri-
ca del Sur ?
Lo hablan y pronuncian bien.
6 Le duele a V. la cabeza ?
Si, senor, mucho.
^ Como se llama Y. ?
Me llamo Juan.
6 Como se llama eso en espanol ?
i Como se dice eso en espaiiol ?
Lo mismo que en ingles.
Do they believe that ?
Here everybody believes it ; but in
France it is not believed.
\'^s it thought that the United States
debt can soon be paid ?
It will not be accomplished (done) very
soon ; but it will be done.
Spanish is spoken here.
Good wine is sold here,
^transgressors are pardoned sometimes,
but not always.
Men deceive themselves.
Did you send the violin to the violin-
ist?
I sent it to him, or did send it to him.
Do they play well on the piano in
Spain ?
They play the guitar well in Spain.
Is Spanish well spoken (or, do they speak
good Spanish) in South America ?
They speak it and pronounce it well
Does your head ache ?
Yes, sir, very much.
What is your name ?
My name is John.
What is that called in Spanish ?
How do you (or, do they) say that In
Spanish ?
The same as in English.
EXPLANATION.
174. Mover, to move, changes the radical o into ue, in the
same tenses and persons as the verb acostar; i. e., in the
first, second and third persons singular, and the third plural
of the present indicative, and present subjunctive, and in the
imperative. (See this verb, and those conjugated like it, at the
end of the hook),
175. Se is the indefinite personal pronoun of the Spanish,
referring to a personal agency in such a manner as to leave un-
determined both the sex and the number of the persons repre-
sented. It corresponds, in this respect, with the English we,
they, people or one ; in fact, with all expressions which mention
174 LESSON XXXVI.
persons thus vaguely and indefinitely. It is used with the
third person singular of the verb ; as,
It is said, or they say.
It is believed, or tliey believe.
They (people) will not do it, or it
will not be done.
Good wine is sold here.
Spanish is spoken here.
/Se dice.
Se cree.
No S€ hard.
Aqui se vende vino bueno.
Aqui se habla espanol.
176. The pronoun se has now been seen used in the four func-
tions in which it can be found ; it may be well to mention them
all again, in order that these different offices of the pronoun se
may be well distinguished, and to avoid all confusion. They
are the following :
1st. As an indefinite subject, as has been seen in the pres-
ent lesson ; as,
Se dice. | They say.
2d. To form the passive voice of verbs (see Lesson
XXXII.) ; as,
Se perdona algunas veces k los delin- I Transgressors are sometimes par-
cuentes. | doned.
3d. As a reflective pronoun ; as,
Manuel se engafia. 1 Emanuel deceives himselfl
4th, and lastly, the objective pronoun se, for the sake of
euphony, takes the place of the objectives le, la, lOy les (see
Lesson XXVIL) ; as,
Se lo pagard k V. mafiana. | I will pay it to you to-morrow.
177. Many nouns ending in English in ty, are rendered in
Spanish by changing these letters into dad\ as,
Activic?ao?. I Activi/|y.
Capacidad | Capaei/y.
N". B. — All nouns of this termination are feminine. Many
nouns ending in English in ist, are rendered into Spanish by
adding to these letters an a ; as,
Artista. I Artist.
Organista. | Organist, &c.
LESSOIT XXXVI. 175
178. DoLER. — This verb is used in the same manner as the
verb gustar^ to like (see Lesson XXXI.) ; as,
^ Le duele a V. la cabeza ? | Does your head ache ?
The same may be expressed in the following manner :
I Tiene V. dolor de cabeza ? | Have you a headache ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. gSe vende bucn vino en Nueva York? Se vende bueno y malo;
pero muy care.
2. I Que noticias hay ? Se dice que la Alemania y la Italia estan en
guerra.
3. I Se cree eso ? No solamcnte se cree, sine que se sabe que la guer-
ra ha principiado ya.
4. I Se habla espaftol en Nueva York ? En Nueva York se hablan
todas las lenguas, pero prineipalinente el ingles, el aleman, el frances y
el espaiiol.
6. ^Se aman los Franceses y los Ingleses? Creo que no se aman
como hermanos; pero se respetan.
6. I A quien se ama liias en este pais, a los Franceses 6 a los Ingleses ?
Es cosa que no sabre decir.
7. I En los Estados Unidos se respetan las iglesias de todas las religio-
nes? Si, sefior, porque hay libertad de religion; es una cosa muy bue-
na para el pais, y yo la deseo para todas las naciones del mundo.
8. Hablemos de otra cosa, porque todos no son tan liberales como V. ;
y no se hara V. amigos si habla tan francamente.
9. Convengo con V. en eso, aderaas no se debe decir todo lo que se
piensa; pero para aprender una lengua se debe practicar mucho y se
debe hablar de todo un poco.
10. V. tiene razon en eso, y una conversacion en que no se habla, sino
de " si hace calor 6 frio, si ha estado V. en el teatro, en el concierto, 6 en
la iglesia, y de si tiene V. el sombrero y el fusil, y el vino, y el dinero do
V. 6 del vecino " es muy cansada.
11. For supuesto; pero V. debe saber que lo que se llama en ingles
small talk* es muy de moda. — Lo se, es muy de moda, y hasta necesario
algunas veces.
12. ^Le dijo Y. eso a su amigo? No se lo dije, porque mi hermana se
lo habia dicho ya.
13. I Porque no me lo dijo V. a mi ? Porque mi hermano me ha dicho
que se lo dira a V. maiiana.
14. ^Toca Dn. Pedro bien el piano? No, seGor, pero se engaGa a si
mismo y cree tocarlo muy bien.
* C/iarla.
176 LESSON XXXVI.
15. V6ngase V. esta tarde por aqni, 6 ir^mos d dar an paseo. — Bien,
si V. me espera hasta las seis, veiidr6, pero no dntes, porque no puedo
salir del escritorio hasta esa hora.
16. ^Qu6 tal tiempo ha hecho hoy en la ciodad ? Hoy ha hecho buen
tiempo y ayer hizo buen tiempo tarabien ; pero mafiana hara mal
tiempo.
17. ^Oomo sabe V. que hara mal tiempo mafiana? Porque en Nueva
York no hace nunca buen tiempo por tres dias.
18. ^V. cree que no hace buen tiempo mas que (sino) en la Habana?
Perdone V. no me gusta el clima de la Habana ni el de Nueva York.
19. Ent6nces, ^qu6 clima le gusta 4 V.? El de Espafia, porque alii
tenemos verdaderamente las cuatro estaciones.
20. I Qu6 quiere Y. decir ? Quiero decir que en Espafia hace calor en
verano aunque no muchisirao ; en inviemo hace frio, pero no nos hela-
mos ; en otofio hace un excelente tiempo de otofio, y en la primavera
tenemos primavera.
21. ^Bien, y no es lo mi^no en Nueva York? Esciiserae V. ; en
Nueva York no he conocido la primavera ; hay muy pocos dias de otofio,
an inviemo larguisimo y un verano calurosisimo.
22. i Y en la Habana ? Eu la Habana hay todo el afio el verano de
Nueva York.
23. I Yo pensaba que d Y. no le gustaba hablar del tiempo ? Y. no
n>e ha entendido ; creo que debe hablarse de todo, pero no siempre del
tiempo.
EXERCISE.
1. Why do you not come quicker when I call you? I cannot come
any quicker, my head aches.
2. Where do you think Spanish is spoken best? In Madrid, and in
all parts of Old and New Castile {Costilla).
3. And is it not well spoken in South America? There is some
difference in the pronunciation; but, in general, persons of education
speak correctly, whether they bet South Americans or Spaniards.
4. William, will you be good enough to take this letter to the post-
office when you are going to take 'your lesson? I shall take it in the
afternoon, I have not time now.
5. Are there many organists in the United States?' Yes; and in New
York, principally, there are a great many excellent organists and pianists.
6. Do you like that man's manner of speaking? No, I do not; ho is
too much of a* purist.
7. Is your brother studying natural history? I cannot tell you
* Euglibh words io italics not to be traaslaled into SpauLsb. t Ya scan.
LESSON XXXVI. 177
■whether (si) he is studying it or not; but I know he has just bought the
complete works of Buffon.
8. Who is Buffon ? A celebrated French naturalist.
9. What did that man do that was taken to prison this morning?
They say he was arrested (arrestar) for cruelty to animals.
10. Will he be punished for it? Of course; transgressors of that
kind are rarely let off unpunished (pardoned).
11. What is the matter with Alexander ? A dog bit him in the hand.
12. Come here, Alexander; show me your hand. Is this the one?
No, it is the other.
13. Does it pain you much ? It was very sore (pained) when I got
bitten, but now it is less painful.
14. I have always told you how necessary it is to take care with dogs.
I know that ; and I shaU do so in future.
15. Does your new watch go well ? Not very well ; it stops (itself)
three or four times a day.
16. Is your son getting on well in his studies? Pretty well; he has a
great deal of capacity, and is fond of study.
17. Look here, Charles. What do you wish?
18. Count from one to a thousand in Spanish. Oh! I can do that
with the greatest ease.
19. Well, let us see ? One, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,
nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen, seventeen,
eighteen, nineteen, twenty, twenty-one, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy,
eighty, ninety, a hundred, a hundred and one, two hundred, three hun-
dred, four hundred, five hundred, six hundred, seven hundred, eight
hundred, nine hundred, a thousand.
20. How do they write that last word in Spanish ? I do not remember.
21. What is that? you do not remember 1 Did you not learn in the
lesson on pronunciation, at the beginning of the grammar, that in Spanish
every word is written just as it is pronounced? Oh, yes, now I remember.
22. Tell me, if you please, Mr. R., is French as easy to pronounce as
Spanish ? They say it is much more difficult, on the contrary.
23. But it is not impossible to learn French pronunciation ? I did not
say that ; I only said that they say it is more difficult than Spanish pro-
nunciation.
24. How do I pronounce? Very well ; but, when reading or speaking,
take a little more care with the z.
25. Please to pronounce the name of that letter again (to return to
pronounce)? With the greatest pleasure ; it is called z.
26. What other letter (letra) is pronounced like (the) z f C^ when it
comes (finds itself) before an e or an i.
178
LESSON XXXVII.
LESSON XXXVII.
Subir.
Atender.
To go, or come np, to ascend.
To attend.
INDICATIVE — Presen t.
Atiendo, atiendeSy atiendey aten- I I attend, &c.
demos, atendeis, atienden, I
IMPERATIVE.
Atiende td, atienda el, atenda-
mos nosotros, atended voso-
tros, atiendan ellos.
Attend, &c
SUBJUNCTIVE — Present.
Atienda, atiendas, atienda, aten- I I may, or can, attend, &c.
damos, atendais, atiendan. I
Verbs conjugated like atendeb.
A scender.
Descender.
Defender.
Entender.
Encender.
Perder.
Alegrarse.
Charlar.
Hallar.
Llegar.
Enviar.
Preparar.
Con tal que.
Puesto que.
Dado caso que.
Hasta.
Aun cuando.
Por tanto.
Por cuanto.
A m6nos do.
A m6nos qu
To ascend, to mount.
To descend.
To defend.
To understand.
To light, to kindle.
To lose.
;.(
To be glad, to rejoice.
To prattle, to chat.
To find.
To arrive.
To send.
To prepare.
CONJUNCTIONS.
On condition that ; provided
(that).
Since, inasmuch as ; supposing
that.
In case.
Until, till.
Even, although.
Therefore.
Seeing that, for.
Unless.
LESSON
XXXVII.
Tambien.
Also, too.
Ademas.
Moreover, besides.
Ya.
Whether, either.
Tampoco.
Neither.
Ojala.
Steamer.
Would to God, God grant.
Vapor.
Altura. Height.
Globo.
Balloon.
Friolera. Trifle.
Eesfriado.
Cold.
Estada, perma- Stay, perma-
nencia. nence.
COMPOSITION.
179
Deseo que este estudiando su leccion.
Oreo que la estd estudiando,
^ Piensa Y. que tiene razon ?
No pienso que la tenga.
%/No lo creere aunque me lo digan mil.
Lo creo aunque el lo nicga.
Dudo que venga hoy.
^ Dudo que faaya venido.
Dado caso que V. no me encuentre en
casa, esp6reme Y. hasta que venga.
Asi lo hare con tal que V. me prometa
volver pronto.
\/ Volvere tan pronto como pueda.
Temo que no haya recibido mi carta.
i Ojala no la reciba r pero yo temo que
la recibira.
^A menos que Y. venga primero k ver-
me, yo no ire a verlo k V.
Puesto que 61 haya venido, ^ le hablara
v.?
Aunque haya venido no le hablare an-
tes que el me hable.
^,
I wish that he may be studying his
lesson.
I think he is studying it.
Do you think he is right ?
I do not think he is.
I will not believe it though a thousand
tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it.
I doubt whether he will come to-day.
I doubt his having come.
In case you should not find me at home,
wait for me till I come.
I will do so, on condition that you
promise me to come back soon (or
quickly).
I shall return as soon as I can.
I fear he has not received my letter.
God grant that he may not receive it !
but I fear he will (receive it).
Unless you come first to see me, I will
not go to see you.
Supposing that he has come, will you
speak to him ?
Although he may have come I will not
speak to him before he speaks to me.
EXPLANATION.
179, Atendee, to attend, and all the verbs conjugated like
it, take an
before the last e of the radical letters, in the same
tenses and persons as the verb acertar^ and the same tense in
which acostar and mover change the o into ue ; i. e., in the first,
180 LESSON XXXVII.
second and third persons singular, and third plural of the
present indicative, the present subjunctive, and the imperative.
{See, at page 394, this verb and those conjugated like it.)
180. Subjunctive Mood. — Unlike the indicative, this mood
cannot of itself express an action or mode of being in such a
manner as to form complete sense ; but its signification is de-
termined by another verb, to which it is subordinate, as its
name indicates,* and by which it is goveraed, usually with the
help of a conjunction, such as que, aunque, or a conjunctive ex-
pression, such as d Jin de que, con tal que, &c.
As none of the moods of the English verb correspond ex-
actly to the Spanish subjunctive; and as the tenses of the
latter are often employed to express, in the Castilian language,
ideas which, in English, are conveyed by those of the indica-
tive or the potential, and, not unfrequently, by the infinitive,
learners experience much difficulty in determining when the
subjunctive is to be used. Were we to give all the rules neces-
sary for the correct application of this mood, a whole volume
might be filled ; we shall, however, give here those most likely
to guide the student in all ordinary cases.
181. The subordinate verb is put in the subjunctive when
the leading verb means admiration, wish, will, desire, consent,
prohibition, hinderance, necessity, command, doubt, regret, joy,
"Mefulness, contentment, hope, fear, surprise, ignorance, prefer-
ence, negation, permission, sorrow, &c.
The subjunctive mood is here required because we are not
positive that what we wish, command, &c., will be accom-
plished ; but the same verb which governs the subordinate one
in any of the tenses of the subjunctive, when the accomplish-
ment of the action is doubtful, governs it in any of those of
the indicative when the action is regarded as certain to take
place ; as,
D6selo V. & lo8 que ) , ^ ,
hat/an vemuo. ) -^
Ddselo V. h los ciiatro ) _,
X ., y Certain.
que nan venido. )
In the first example, the verb is put in the subjunctive, be-
• Suhjunctlvc, sometliJng joined, in a subordinate manner, to what has already been said
Give it to those who (may) have
come.
Give it to the four who have (or arc)
come.
LESSON XXXVII. 181
cause the speaker is not positive how many have come, or
whether any have as yet come. In the second, the indicative
is employed, because the speaker is certain of the arrival of the
persons alluded to, and also of their number.
182. There are in Spanish certain conjunctions which re-
quire the subjunctive mood after them, on account of the in-
detinite and uncertain meaning which they commonly have.
Some of them, however, it will be seen, occasionally occur with
a positive signification, and may, in that case, be used with the
indicative after them ; as,
No lo creere aunque me ) I will not believe it though a thou-
\OorUingent, sand tell it to me.
I believe it, although he denies it (to
me).
183. Finally, there are other parts of speech, and even
whole phrases, which, on account of their indeterminate and
doubtful, or contingent, meaning, requii-e the subjunctive after
them.
184. The present tense of the subjunctive marks a
contingent action as going on at the present moment, or to take
place at some future time ; as,
Dudo que venga. J I doubt whether he will come.
N. B. — Another use of this tense has been already noticed
when treating of the imperative. (See Lesson XXXY.)
185. The perfect tense expresses a doubtful or contin-
gent action or event, as having been completed some time past,
or that will have taken place before the completion of another
future action or event ; as.
lo digan mil.
Lo creo aunque 61 me )
^^ ^:^„^ c Certain,
lo mega. J
Dudo que haya venido.
Yo le dare su libro cuando 61 me
haya dado el mio.
I doubt whether he has come.
I shall give him his book when h«
will have given me mine.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Espera V. que Uegue hoy el vapor de Europa? Creo que ha lle-
gado esta mafiana.
2. Yo dudo que haya llegado todavia. i Quiere Y. enviar su criado
i preguntar si ha llegado el vapor ? Con mucho gusto, porque yo tam-
bien deseo tener noticias do Europa.
3. I Creo V. que Uegara un dia en que podamos ir a Europa en globos
182 LESSON XXXVII.
aereostaticos ? Mucho mo alegrare que Ueguo ese dia, pero creo que no
lo ver6mos nosotros, porque es muy dificil, y quiza iuiposible, el liallar la
direccion de los globos.
4. I Suben muy alto los globos ? No creo que suban d mas de dos 6
tres mil pi6s, pero si se quiere pueden subir hasta la altura de quince 6
diez y seis mil pi6s.
5. Dado caso que llegue hoy el vapor; ^espera Y. a su amigo? Por
supuesto que si, puesto que me escribe que llegara en este niismo vapor.
6. Ojala llegue, pero temo mucho que haya tornado otro vapor y que
no llegue hasta la semana pr6xima.
7. ^Duda V. que haya estudiado su leccion ? Dudo que la haya estu-
diado, porque es muy holgazan.
8. A m6nos que V. estudie bien las lecciones y haga con mucho cui-
dado los ejercicios de la gramdtica, no aprendera Y. el espafiol.
9. Si, pero yo creia que se podia aprender una lengua con la practica
solamente. — Asi es ; pero ent6nces se necesita practicar todos los dias
con quien la hable muy bien.
10. ^En cuiinto tiempo picnsa Y. que hablar6 yo el espafiol? Y. lo
hablara cuando sepa bien todas las lecciones de la gramatica, y haya
practicado y escrito los ejercicios.
11. Y despues que haya aprendido toda la gramdtica, practicado, y
escrito los ejercicios, ^hablar6 perfectamente el espafiol? No, scfior;
pero hablard Y. bastante correctamente para llevar una conversacion, es-
cribir una correspondencia, y poder hacer negocios en esta lengua.
12. Yo pensaba que el espafiol era una lengua muy facil. — Yerdadera-
mente lo es para aprender lo que acabo de decirlo d Y. ; pero para ha-
blarlo perfectamente como Y. quiere, todas las lenguas son dificilcs.
13. Y si Y. no lo cree, hdgame el favor de decirrae si habla Y. su pro-
pia lengua y la escribe perfectamente.— Yo conlieso que todavia tengo
algo que aprender en el ingl6s.
14. Cr6ame Y., amigo raio, el estudio de una lengua no es una friolera.
— Creo que tiene Y. mucha razon ; pero hay muchos quo quieren aprenderlo
todo y muy pocos que quieran estudiar.
15. ^Mo promote Y. venir d verme cuando venga d la ciudad? Aun-
que venga d la ciudad no podr6 venir d vcr d Y. d ra6nos que acabe tem-
prano mis negocios.
16. ^Sabo Y. hacer frases {sentences) en espafiol con todos los tiempos
del modo indicativo? Si, sefior, y tambien con el imperativo, el presente
y el perfecto do subjuntivo.
17. Muy bien, ent<5noos hdgame Y. ocho frases con los echo tiempos
de indicativo, una con el imperativo y dos con el presente y perfecto de
subjuntivo do cunlquiera verbo.
LESSON XXXVII. 183
18. I Esta y. malo ? i Ha estado Y. hoy en el escritorio ? i Estaba V.
en su casa cuando su amigo fue a verle ? g Habia V. estado en el teatro
^tes de Ir al baile ? i Estuvo V. ayer en la ciudad ? i Qu6 bizo V. asi
que bubo estado algun tiempo en el botel ? i Estara V. en casa mafiana
todo el dia ? g Habra escrito Y. su ejercicio antes de las cuatro ? Estu-
dia tus leociones y escribe los ejercicios. IsTo pierdas el tiempo. ^Duda
Y. que yo sepa mi leccion ? i Duda Y. que yo la baya estudiado ?
EXERCISE. /v^
1. John, there is some one at the door; go and see who it is. Yes, sir.
2. Is Mr. Eetortillo in ? Yes, sir ; who shall I say wishes to see him?
Tell him that Mr. Perez wishes to speak to him a moment.
3. Mr. Perez wishes to see you a moment, sir. Let (que) him come up.
4. Oh! I am so glad to see you! How are you? how have you
been ? wljen did you return ? — I arrived by the steamer Na'poleon III.^
on Wednesday last.
5. Did you receive all the letters I wrote you during {durante) my
absence? I received one in March, dated from Eome.
6. How did you spend the time ? did you pass through Spain, as you
had intended ? No ; while I was still in Paris, and preparing to set out
for Madrid, I learned that my brother was very ill in Florence.
7. Indeed! I am very sorry to hear that. What was the matter
with him Cwhat had he) ? A heavy (strong) cold, that he had caught on
his way from Turin to Florence.
8. He had not, I believe, enjoyed very good health for a long time be-
fore leaving home ? No, he has always been sickly ; but principally for
about a year before his voyage to Europe, he had colds almost every
month, and I may say that he was never without headaches, day or
night.
9. Had he an Italian physician to attend him ? No, Dr. Perez, his
family physician, who was travelling through Italy that same winter, just
arrived at Florence the same day as my brother, and, hearing of his ill-
ness, went at once {inmediatamente) to see him.
10. How long was he ill ? Nearly three weeks.
11. How ? Are you going away so soon ? Sit down and let us chat
for half an hour about your family. Thank you ; I cannot stay any
longer now, but I shall have the pleasure of seeing you again to-morrow.
12. Where are your brothers ? They are gone to see the balloon that
is to go up this afternoon.
13. Indeed ? I thought the balloon was not to go up until Saturday.
It was not to have gone up before Saturday; but, on account of the fine
weather, it is to go up this afternoon.
184 LESSON XXXVIII.
14. Will many persons go up in it ? Very few, I think ; people in
general do not like to go to such a height.
15. Do you understand all that is said in Spanish ? I understand more
and more every day ; but there are still many words and constructions
that I do not know.
16. How long do you think it will be before I can understand all, and
speak like a native ? That is a hard question to answer ; provided you
study with attention, read a great deal, and practice with Spaniards, you
will soon understand and speak with ease ; but it is difficult for a foreigner
to speak any language exactly like a native.
17. But do you believe it to be impossible ? No, I do not say it is im-.
possible, but it is very difficult ; and, besides, I do not think it is neces^
sary. All that is required (wanted) is correctness, and to be able to con-
verse with ease.
18. Has John's servant lighted the fire ? Not yet ; John does not wish
it to be lighted until he returns.
19. Well, Charles, have you found out* the meaning of the word you
Asked me for yesterday ? No, sir ; I have searched for it in all the dic-
tionaries, and it is not to be found in any of them.
20. Why do you not ask your teacher ? he can tell you at once. Yes,
I know that very well ; but I do not hke to ask him so many questions :
every day he comes I have a new one to ask him.
21. Do not stop at trifles of that kind ; your teacher is very glad to be
able to answer all questions, knowing that by that means (medio) you
will learn better and more quickly.
22. I am very glad to see you defend him, for Alexander said he was
not fond of answering questions, and did not like inquisitive persons. — •
Neither he does ; but an inquisitive person is one thing, and a person
who asks questions in order to gam. knowledge is another.
LESSON XXXVIII.
Sentir. (Look for the conjugation I To feel, to be sorry for*
of this verb at p. 896). I
Arrepentirse.
Oonsentir,
Preferir.
Verba conjugated lile sextir.
To repent.
To consent.
To prefer.
* English words itcUiclsed not to be translated.
LESSON
SXXVIII.
185
A^segurar.
To secure, to
insure, to assure.
Animar.
To animate,
duce.
to encourage, to in-
Desanimar.
To dishearten, to discourage.
Ayudar.
To aid, to help.
Enfermar,
To fall (or
sick.
get) sick, to make
Exigir.
To exact, to ]
require.
Quedar.
To remain.
Perfeccioiiar.
To perfect, to finish.
Usar.
To use, to wear.
Generalmentd,
Generally.
De memoria.
By heart.
Ambos.
Both.
De continuo.
Continually.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Examen.
Examination.
Helena.
Ellen.
Oficio.
Trade, office.
Persona.
Person.
Alberto.
Albert.
Lectura.
Reading, lecture.
Norte.
North.
Profesion.
Profession.
Sur, or sud.
South.
Escuela.
School.
Este, oriente.
East.
Muerte.
Death.
Oeste, \
Occidente. )
West.
Vida.
Life.
Promesa.
Promise.
List of tTie present participles or verl
}al nouns and adjectives formed from
the verls alrea
dy introduced.
Viviente.
Living being.
Paseante.
"Walker, passer-
Estiidiante.
Student.
by, promeuader.
Escribiente.
A lawyer's clerk.
Creyente.
Believer.
a writer in a
Conveniente.
Convenient, suita
commercial
ble.
house.
Importante.
Important.
Eesident.
Tratante.
Dealer.
Tocante (en 6r-
Concerning.
Cortante.
Sharp, edged.
dena).
Gobernante.
Governing.
Eeinante.
Reigning.
Contante.
Ready.
Saliente.
Salient.
Dohente.
Sad, afflicted,
Amante.
Lover.
moumfuL
Practicante.
Practitioner.
Principiante.
Beginner.
186
LESSON XXXVIII.
COMPOSITION.
Tocante & lo que Y. me dijo el otro dia,
deseo que no se hable mas de ello.
Entraron cantando.
Le eneontraron leycndb.
f, Qu6 est4 V. haciendo ?
Estoy leyendo.
Vengo de comer.
Trabaja sin descansar.
El trabajar es bueno para mucha^
cosas.
V El descansar despues de trabajar es
necesario.
La vimos bailar.
Emanuel es un estudiante industrioso.
I Es V. residente de los Estados Unidos ?
El es buen crejente. .
Concerning what you told me the other
day, I wish no more to be said
about it
They came in singing.
They foimd him reading.
What are you doing ?
I am reading.
I am coming from dinner.
He labors without resting.
Work is good for many things.
Rest after labor is necessary.
We saw her dancing.
Emanuel is an industrious student
Are you a resident of the United States ?
He is a good believer.
EXPLANATION.
186. Present Participles. — Many Spanish verbs have,
besides the past or passive participle, another called the present
or active participle. Those formed from verbs of the first con-
jugation end in ante; as, amante, loving, lover; and those
formed from the second and third end in ie/ite or ente ; as, asis-
tente, assistant, obediente, obedient.
Participles of this kind cannot be formed from all verbs,
and indeed those already in existence can only be regarded as
mere verbal nouns or adjectives, inasmuch as, with the excep-
tion of a very limited number to be found in use, such as to-
cante, they do not follow the regimen of the verbs from which
they are derived.
187. Gerunds. — Instead of the present participle, ao a i>aiu
of the verb, the gerund is now employed, and it corresponds,
therefore, exactly to the English progressive form in ing; as,
Entraron cantando. I They came in singing.
Le eneontraron leyendo. | They found him reading.
188. The verb estar, as has already been mentioned, can
LESSON XXXVIII. 187
be used with the gerund in Spanish, as in English the verb to
be, with the present participle ; as,
Yo estoy leyendo. I I am reading.
EUos estan escribiendo. \ They are writing.
189. The iNTiNiTiVE is used in Spanish when in English
the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; as^
Se fue sin verle. I He went away without seeing him.
Trabaja sin descansar. \ He labors without resting.
190. The INFINITIVE is also used as a verbal noun or pres-
ent participle, in which case it takes the masculine definite
article before it ; as,
Work is good for the health.
Rest is necessary after much work.
El trdbajar es bueno para la salud.
El descansar despues de trabajar
mucho es necesario.
191. The INFINITIVE is often rendered in English by the
present participle, when in Spanish it is governed by another
^ verb; as.
La vimos hailar. \ We saw her dancing.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Le gusta a Y. mas leer que escribir? Me gustan dmbas cosas,
pero creo que leyendo se aprende mas que escribiendo.
2. I Es estudioso ese muchacho ? No, sefior, pero hoy estudia mucho
porque mafiana tienen examenes en su escuela.
3. I Piensa V. que sea conveniente ese negocio ? Yo pienso que lo es,
pero quizd no lo sea.
4. I Que esta V. haciendo ? Estoy ostudiando mi leccion de espaflol.
6. I Sinti6 Helena mucho la muerte de su amiga ? La sintio tanto que
enferm6.
6. I Como se siente ahora? Esta un poco mejor. — Me alegro que est6
mejor, porque es muy buena muchacha.
7. I Puede Y. prestarme trescientos pesos ? Puedo prestarselos d Y.,
pero no me gusta el prestar dinero (to lend).
8. I Como se aprende a hablar el espanol ? Hablando se aprende a
hablar ; del misrao modo que bailando se aprende a bailar j haciendo
zapatos se aprende a zapatero.
9. I Se arrepinti6 aquel hombre de su mala accion ? No lo creo por-
que es un picaro que vive de engafiar.
10. iQue profesion li oficio tieue? No tiene ni oficio, ni profesion
ninguna, es un paseante.
188 LESSON XXXVIII.
11. jDe donde viene V. ? Vengo de corner.
12. ^De d6iide viene el viento ? Viene del Sar, pero esta malian^
venia del Este.
13. ^Llueve en Nueva York cuando estd el viento al Este ? No, sefior,
generalmente llueve cuando el viento esta al Oeste.
14. Alberto, animate, se estudioso y aprende de memoria la leccion
para maflana. Papd, hace mucho calor y estoy cansado.
15. Bien, no te desanimes, descansa un poco y vuelve a trabajar des-
pues. — y. quiere que yo est6 trabajando continuamente.
16. No, querido, no quiero que trabajes demasiado ; pero acu^rdate que
en este mundo no se logra nada sin trab^ar. — Bien, papa, yo 86 que V.
tiene siempre razon, descansar6 un poco ahora y despues acabar6 de esta-
diar mi leccion.
17. ^ Se qued6 mucho tiempo su amigo de V. en el concierto ? Ambos
nos quedamos haata que se acab6.
18. jTuvieron Vds. ayer examenes en la escuela? Ayer tuvimos ex^
men de gramatica, antes de ayer de liistoria, hoy de espafiol y mafiana
lo tendr6mos de aritm6tica.
19. Manuel, levantate y vete d la escuela. ^No sabes qu6 hora es?
No, seller, yo pensaba que era temprano.
20. I C6mo, temprano ? Ya son las siete y media y todavia tienes que
lavarte y almorzar ; i vamos, vamos, perezoso, arriba ! — Alia voy papd^
alia voy ; y exctiseme V., no sabia que era tan tarde.
EXERCISE.
1. Have you heard any more concerning the matter we were speak-
ing of the other day? Nothing further; but I expect by to-morrow to
be able to tell you something more.
2. When does your friend intend setting out* on his travel to the
South ? Probably by the latter end (uUimos) ot November, or beginning
of December.
3. Is he to be long absent ? He knows nothing as yet of how long
he may be absent (ausente).
4. Concerning books to bo read in order to perfect one's self in a
language, what kind do you think the best ? There is little dilTerence
between books to be used for that purpose (proposito).
5. Are there not some better than all the others? Not that I know
of: each student will prefer those that treat of the subject he is
fondest of.
6. But beginners cannot do so, for there are many books too difScuU
for them; is it not so? Certainly; I thought it needless to say that
beginners must search for books easy to bo read.
• Emprender,
LESSON XXXVIII. 189
7. It seems to me that newspaper reading is very useful ; what do
you think ? Yes, and especially for those who take pleasure in studying
the politics of the day.
8. Do you. think I shall be able to understand Cervantes' great work
after I have gone through {recorrer) the whole of the grammar ? No
sir, you will not ; you will have to read and study a great deal before
you will be able to understand thoroughly the writings of any of the;
Spanish classic authors.
9. Who is that young man we met when walking, and to whom you
spoke ? He is a lawyer's clerk.
10. Does he make much money at that occupation? I cannot tell you;
but he is undoubtedly a man of talent {talento).
11. Are the children gone to school yet, Louisa? All but Henry,
who wishes not to go to-day, if you will consent to it.
12. I am afraid he is a very lazy boy ; he is continually asking not to
be sent to school.
13. How can he expect to learn if he neither goes to school nor studies
at home ? He wants to study at home ; he says that if you consent to
his staying at home, he will study anything you please.
14. WeU, I shall give him something to learn by heart, and we shall
see what he does. — Very well ; but do not give him too much to do at
the beginning, for he is easily disheartened.
15. I never require of any one more than he is able to do. — That is
perfectly right.
16. Tell Charles and Albert that I want to see them, and that I have
two books for them. — I need not go to tell them ; here they are coming.
17. Come here, boys. — Well, papa, what do you want us for ?
18. To give you these two books: one for each.— How beautiful!
— Yes, that is true; but they are something more than beautiful: they
are good.
19. What do they treat of? This one treats of man in hfe and of all
living beings ; and that one of man's state after death.
20. Now, I wish you to read a chapter each one in his book every
day, after your lessons ; and then you may go out and walk for an hour.
— Thank you, sir ; and we can assure you that we shall do so with tha
greatest pleasure.
21. Tell me, Albert, where did you buy that hat ? That is one of those
hats that were worn three summers ago. I know that very well, for I
bought it at the time they were being worn, and I have worn it ever
since.
22. This author seems to have travelled a great deal ; have you read
any of his travels? Yes, and I like them exceedingly (micchisimo).
190
LESSON XXXIX,
23. I am going to read them, too, as soon as I have time. In what
countries did he travel principally ? lie has been in nearly every coun-
try in the world, East, West, North and South.
24. What is the trade or profession of that person, just gone out ? He
is a physician ; he has been in this city for noto nearly five years. He is
an excellent practitioner.
LESSON XXXIX.
Pedir. (Looh for the conjugation I To petition, to ask for.
of this verb at p. Z9Q.) I
VerJ}8 conjugated like pedib.
Competir.
To contend, to compete.
Elejir.
To elect, to choose.
Medir.
To measure.
Renir.
To quarrel, to scold.
Seguir.
To foUow.
Rendir.
To render ; to exhaust, to do out.
to wear out.
Repetir.
To repeat.
Servir.
To serve.
Tefiir.
To dye.
Vestir.
To dress.
Divertirse.
To amuse one's self.
Casarse.
To marry ; to get (or be) married.
Besar.
To kiss.
Enamorarse.
To fall in love.
Celebrar.
To celebrate, to praise, to be glad.
Cenar.
To sup.
Presentar.
To present, to introduce one per-
son to the acquaintance of
another.
Reconocer.
To recognize, to examine closely.
Estimar.
To estimate, to value, to esteem.
Agradecer,
To thank, to be thankful, to be
obliged.
En hora buena.
It is well well and good.
Asi asi.
So so.
LESSON
XXXIX.
191
Tal cual.
Middling, so so.
Hasta la vista.
Till I see you again.
Hasta luego.
Good-bye for a while.
Sin novedad.
Well, in a good state of health.
Medianamente
Middling.
I Ah! {int.)
Ah!
\0h\ {int.)
Oh!
- Respetable.
Respectable.
Delicado.
Delicate, weak.
Infiuito.
Infinite.
Junto.
Near, close to,
together.
Discreto. Encantador.
Discreet. Charming.
Favor.
Favor.
Tertuha.
Party, soiree.
Beso.
Kiss.
Novedad.
Novelty.
Servidor.
Servant.
Celebracion.
Celebration.
Pi6.
Foot.
Servidora.
Servant.
Honor.
Honor.
Ocasion.
Occasion.
Vestido.
Dress.
Coraplacencia.
Complaisance.
Esposo.
Husband.
Bondad.
Goodness, kind-
Asiento.
Seat.
ness.
Capitulo.
Chapter.
Esposa.
Wife.
Sobrino.
Nephew.
Orden.
Order, command.
Memorias.
Regards.
Enhorabuena.
Congratulation.
COMPO
SITION.
I Qu6 le pide k V. ese hombre ?
No me pide nada; me pregunta que
hora es.
Beso a V. la mano, caballer©.
Beso k Y. la suya.
6 Como esta su familia de V. ?
Todos estan bien, gracias ; ^ y la de V. ?
Asi asi; los nines estan muy buenos,
pero mi esposa no se siente bien.
A los pi6s de V., senora.
Beso k Y. la mano, caballero.
A la orden de V., Don Pedro.
What is that man asking for ?
He is asking me for nothing ; he is ask-
ing me what o'clock it is.
{A Spanish expression of courtesy, used
at meeting or parting. No equivalent
in English.)
{Reply to tlie above.)
How is your family ?
All are well, thank you ; and yours ?
So so ; the children are very well, but
my wife does not feel well.
{Spanish expression of courtesy, tised to
ladies. No English equivalent.)
{77ie lady\ reply to the above.)
At your service, Mr. Pet«r.
192
LESSON XXXIX,
Vaya V. con Dios, Don Juan.
Buenos dias, Doua Luisa, ^ como lo pasa
V. hoy ?
Bien, para servir & V. ; ij Y.^
Sin novedad a la disposicion de V.
Sen or D. M., tengo el honor de pre-
sentarle al Sr. D. P.
Caballero, celebro la ocasion de conocer
& V.
Tenga V. la bondad de darme el cu-
chillo.
Con mucho gusto.
Mil gracias.
Hagame V. el favor de decirme, como
se llama esto en espanol.
Sirvase V. tomar asiento.
Lo siento mucho, pero no puedo, tengo
que marcharme.
Tenga V. la complacencia de ponerme
& los pi6s de su esposa de V.
God be with you, Mr. John.
Good morning, Miss Louisa, how do
you do to-day?
Well, thank you ; and you ?
I am very well too, thank you.
Mr. M., I have the honor to introduce
(or present) you to Mr. P.
I am happy to make your acquaintance,
sir.
Have the goodness to give me the knife.
"With much pleasure.
Thank you.
Be kind enough to tell me what you call
this in Spanish.
Please to take a seat.
I am very sorry, but I cannot, I must
be off.
Eave the goodness to present my re-
gards to your lady (or wife).
EXPLANATION.
192. Pedir. — A paradigm will be found at the end of the
grammar, showing the tenses and persons in which this verb
and all those conjugated like it change the e of their root into i.
193. The usual foems of salutations, among gentlemen
in greeting each other, are the following :
Beso k V. la mano. I kiss your hand.
Servidor de V., caballero. Your servant, sir.
A la 6rden de V. Your most obedient.
Vaya V. con Dios. Adieu, or God be with you.
Tenga V. muy buenos dias. Good day to yoiL
This last expression is used from the earliest part of the
morning till two or three hours after meridian ; from which
time till dark is used,
Buenas tardes. | Good afternoon ;
and from dark until the following morning, both on meeting
and taking leave,
Buenas noches. | Good night.
All these expressions arc always used in Spanish in the
plural number.
LESSON XXXIX.
193
In saluting a lady, the first expression most frequently made
use of is :
A los pies de V., senora. | MaJam, at your feet.
The lady's reply is :
Beso a V. la mano, caballero. j I kias your hand, sir.
To inquire after another's health :
C6mo lo pasa Y. ? or como est4 V, ? j How do you do ?
To answer :
Medianamente bien.
Perfectamente bien.
Para servir 4 V.
Muy bien, gracias.
Asl asf, or tal cual ; y V., ^ como lo
Middling well.
Perfectly well.
At your service.
Very well, thank you.
So so ; and how do you do ?
Sin novedad,
A la disposicion de V,
For introducing one person to
Senor Don M., tengo el honor de pre- J
gentarle al Senor Don P. |
And the reply is :
Caballero, celebro la ocasion de cono-
cer a V., or
Reconozcame V. por un servidor
suyo.
For asking or requesting :
Tenga Y. la bondad de darme.
Hagame Y. el favor de decirme.
Sirvase Y., or tenga Y, la coinpla-
cencia de.
And for returning thanks :
Mil gracias, or
Muchisimas gracias.
Se lo agradezco a Y. infinito.
Always well.
At your service.
another :
Mr. M., I have the honor of intro-
ducing Mr. P. to you.
Sir, I am happy to make your ac-
quaintance.
I am entirely at your service.
Have the goodness to ^ve me.
Do me the favor to tell me.
Have the kindness to.
A thousand thanks.
Many thanks.
I am very much obliged to you.
CONYERSATION AND YERSION.
1. Senor D. Juan, i qu6 le pide d Y. mi muchacho ? No me pide
nada ; me pregunta qu6 hora es.
2. Yo creia que le pedia k Y. dinero, porque ^1 estd siempre pidiendo
9
194 LESSON XXXIX.
centavos d todo el mundo, — Vaya! no le rifia V. ; d todos los nifios les
gusta que les den centavos. — Verdad es, pero d mi no me gusta que los
mios los pidan.
3. Digame V., D. Pedro, i quien es aquella sefiorita que estd sentada
en el sofa junto d su esposa de V. ? Esa es una sefiorita muy araable,
hija del Sefior D. Luis Martinez, familia muj respetable d quien conoci
hace muchos afios.
4. I Quiere V. hacerme el favor de presentarme d ella ? Con mucho
gusto; pero le advierto que no se enamore de la Sefiorita Martinez, por-
que esta para casarse.
5. Pierda V. cuidado ; yo solo deseo conocerla para gozar de sa dis-
creta conversacion. — En hora buena venga V. y lo presentar6.
6. Sefiorita Martinez, tengo el honor de presentar d V. el Sefior Don
Juan McLeren. — Caballero, celebro la ocasion de conocer d V. — Sefiorita,
recon6zcame V. por su servidor.
7. i All I aqui viene Don Alberto y su esposa. — Slrvanse Vds. pasar
adelante.
8. J Oh ! Sefior Don Pedro, me alegro mucho de encontrar d V. poi
aca. Mil gracias, sefiora, soy muy feliz en volver d ver d Vds.
9. A los pi6s de Y., Sefiorita Martinez. — Beso d V. la mano, caballero.
10. Dofla Margarita, ^ c6mo estd su familia de V. ? Todos estan bien,
gracias, ^ y la de V. ? Asi asi ; los nifios estan muy buenos, pero mi esposa
estd delicada.
11. Sirvase Y. tomar asiento, D. Alberto. — Lo siento mucho, pero d<?
puedo ; he prometido d mi madre volver pronto para cenar con ella.
12. Sefioras, d los pi6s de Yds. Beso d Yds. la mano caballeros.
13. A la 6rden de Y., D. Pedro. Yaya Y. con Dios, D. Juan.
14. Tenga Y. muy buenas noches. Dona Luisa, ^c6rao lo pasa Y. hoy ?
Bien, para servir d Y., J y Y. ? Sin novedad, d la disposicion de Y.
15. Buenas noches, D. Pedro; hasta mafiana. Hasta mafiana, p6n-
game Y. d los pi6s de su sefiora.
16. D6 Y. memorias de mi parte d toda la familia. — ^De su parte de Y.
lo estiraardn mucho.
17. Adios, Manuel, ^d d6nde vas tan de prisa? Yoy d acompafiar d
mi herraana aJ teatro, y desde alll ir6mo9 d la tertulia del, Sefior MarracL
18. Celcbrar6 que te divlertae mucho. Yo tambien pienso ir d la ter-
tulia del Sefior Marraci ; con que, asi no t« digo adios, ya nos ver^mos.^
Hasta la vista.— Hasta luego.
EXERCISE.
1. Good morning, Charles I Are you never going to get np ?— Why,
how late is it?
LESSOlf XXXIX. 195
2. It is near nine o'clock ; but it is nothing new to see you in bed at
that hour. Ah ! you are always making fun of me for lying so long in
the morning, and I think I rise very early.
3. Up, then, and dress yourself as quickly as possible, I want you to
come and breakfast with me.
4. Indeed ! What good things are you going to give me ? You win
have a first-rate breakfast, with excellent wine, followed by dehcious
chocolate.
5. Tell me, my dear fellow : I can never remember the name of that
young lady that I met at your sister's party ; what is her name ? Oh,
no matter ; my sister has invited * her to dine this evening, and if you
wait for dinner with us I will introduce you to her.
6. Papa, here is my friend Mr. N., whom I have the pleasure to pre-
sent to you. I am very happy to know you, sir.
7. Be kind enough to take a seat, and excuse me an instant ; I shall be
back immediately. Certainly, sir.
8. How are your old friends the Eetortillos ? They are very well,
thank you ; they are to be here this evening, so you can have a chat
with them.
9. Why did you not introduce me long ago to your father ? I am
very sorry for not having done so, and my father has often scolded me
for my neglect {negligencid).
10. Do you expect your uncle to-day ? I do not ; but if he comes,
well and good, we shall be glad to see him.
11. Will you be good enough to give me that newspaper that is on the
chair next the window ? With the greatest pleasure.
12. What news is there this morning? I see that a new president
(presidente) has been elected in one of the provinces of South America.
13. Tliey might have chosen another occasion for electing him, I think.
Ah, of course ; they are at war with Spain.
14. How much do they ask for the house that is for sale in Fifteenth
street ? Father was saying yesterday that they are asking a very high
piice.
15. What do you understand by a high price ? More than the house
is worth (valer).
16. You seem very much dissatisfied at the price; have you any in-
tention of buying the house ? Yes, unless it has already been sold.
17. What news have you from Boston? is Miss Guevara married yet?
I have not heard from the family for a month ; but I suppose she must
be married by this time ; she was to be married in July.
18. Will you come and take a walk before dinner ? Ah, you must ex-
cuse me ; believe me, I am worn out with fatigue.
* Tnmtar.
196
LESSON XL,
19. What is that you said, Emanuel? I have told you once, and I
shall not repeat it.
20. Do you know that young lady who is sitting on the sofa beside
your niece ? Yes ; I will introduce you to her, if you wish.
21. When will you introduce me ? Just now, on condition that you
will not fall in love with her.
22. Well, will you promise ? I will ; you know I am going to get
married, and I only wish to enjoy her charming * conversation.
23. Miss Yeleta, allow me to have the honor of introducing to you
Mr. Romelio. How do you do, sir ? I am very happy to know you, miss.
24. Well, John, what do you think of her? That she is charming;
and I am exceedingly obliged to you for introducing me.
25. Oh, Louisa! come and look at this beautiful dress. — Oh, how
beautiful! How much did it cost?— Only a trifle of $120.
26. How much did you pay for that last coat of yours, Alexander?
—Only eighty dollars. — Not very much at all {no 86 me hace caro).
LESSON XL.
Conducir. {See conjugation of this | To conduct, to lead, to drive,
'Deri in at p. 898.)
Producir.
Traducu-.
Introducir.
Verla conj
COL
ugate
1 nice OONDUCIB.
To produce.
To translate.
To introduce.
Obrar.
Envidiar.
Olvidar.
Existir.
To act.
To envy.
To forget.
To exist.
Segun {prep).
Siquiera {oonj.]
Colectivo.
Particular.
LEOXn
According to.
At least, even.
Collective.
Private, particular.
'E NOUNS.
Ej^rcito.
Gentlo.
RebaQo.
Army.
Crowd
Flock,
herd.
*
Encnr
Tropa. Troop.
Gente. People.
Multitud. Multitude
taclora.
LESSON XL.
Par.
Pair, couple.
Docena.
Dozen.
Centenares.
Himdreds.
Centena.
A hundred.
Mi 11 ares.
Thousands.
Mitad.
Half.
El tercio.
The third.
La tercera.
The third.
EI cuarto.
The fourth.
La cuarta parte.
The fourth, &
El dozavo.
The twelfth.
iinfinidad.
An infinity.
El floble.
The doable.
Higo.
Fig.
Conciencia.
Conscience.
Caracter.
Character.
Circunstancia.
Circumstance.
Habitante.
Inhabitant.
IJva.
Grape.
Gobierno.
Government.
Especie.
Species, kind.
Eecurso.
Recourse, resour-
Naranja.
Orange.
ses.
Castafia.
Chestnut.
MoDte.
Mountain.
Nuez.
Nut.
Bosque,
Wood (forest).
Cuestion.
Question.
Rio.
River.
Produccion.
Production.
Lago.
Lake.
Libertad.
Liberty.
Nombre.
iiToun, name.
Causa.
Cause.
Carnero merino.
Meiino sheep.
Irlanda.
Ireland.
Rincon, esquina
Corner.
COMPOS
Naturaleza.
5ITI0N.
Nature.
197
Obro Begun su conciencia.
Habla segun las circunstancias.
Lo cuento segun me lo han contado.
Entro {or entraron) ea la ciudad una
tropa de soldados.
En el ejercito de los Estados Unidos
habla soldados de todas las naciones_
El tercio {or la tercera parte) de esos
hombres no saben escribir.
El gentio era tan grande que no pudi-
mos pasar.
tin par de caballos americanos vale por
dos pares de caballos mejicanos.
He acted according to his conscience.
He speaks according to circumstances.
I tell it as it was told to me.
A troop of soldiers came into the city.
In the United States army there were
soldiers of all nations.
The third of those men do not know
how to write.
The crowd was so great that we could
not pass.
A pair of American horses are worth
two pairs of Mexican horses.
EXPLANATION.
194. CoNDuciR, to conduct, and the verbs conjugated like
it, take a z before the radical c in the terminations beginning
with o or a. They also take the terminations Je,^Vs^e, Jo, Jemos,
198 LESSON XL.
jisieis^ Jeron, &c., as may be seen in the conjugation oi condu'
cir, at the end of the grammar.
195. Segun. — We class this word among the prepositions,
in conformity to the general practice among Spanish gram-
marians, and because it sometimes has the character of such ; as,
Obro segun su conciencia. I He acted according to his conscience.
Habla seffun las circunstancias. ) He speaks according to circumstances.
Nevertheless, in other cases it is employed as an adverb ; as,
Lo cuento aeffun mc lo han contado. | I tell it as it was told to me.
196. Collective nouns, in the singular, generally agree with
verbs in the singular number ; but when the collective noun
is taken in its most extended sense, custom allows the verb to
be in the plural, for in such case the numbers concurring to
form the whole, rather than the whole itself, are considered ; as,
Entr6 {or entraron) en la ciudad una I A troop of soldiers came into the city.
tropa de soldados. j
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Produce Espafia buena fruta? Espafia produce excelente fruta
de todas espccies.
2. ^Cuul es la raejor fruta de Espafia? No sabr6 dccir d V., porque
toda es buena y hay centenares de especies, por ejemplo : las uvas son de
las mejores del mundo ; los melocotones y los melones son tambien muy
buenos, sin contar con las naranjas, los higos, las castafias, las nueces y
otra infinidad de frutas.
3. ^Es Espafia un pais care 6 barato? Es demasiado barato. Con
un peso se puede vivir mcjor en Espafia que en Nueva York con cuatro.
4. I Bien, ent6nces porqu6 se vino Y. d vivir en los Estados Unidos ?
Esa es ya otra cuestion. Espafia no tiene que envidiar d ningun pais del
raundo en cuanto d su clima ni d sus producciones, ni mdnos en cuanto al
caracter de sus habitantes ; pero bajo su gobierno no se goza de la misma
libertad que se goza bajo el de la Kepublica do los Estados Unidos.
6. jEs esta la causa por la cual V. se vino d residir en esto pais?
Hay rauchas otras. Por ejemplo, es verdad que en Espafia no se conocen
las hambres que hay en Irlanda, Alemania y otros paises, y que, como
he dicho, se vive mejor alii con un peso que aqui con cuatro ; i)cro tam-
bien es verdad, que en cualquiera profesion ii oficio es mas facil ganur
cuatro pesos en los Estados Unidos, que uno en Espafia.
6. ^Por tanto V. crco quo los recursos do los Estados Unidos son
LESSON XL. 199
mas grandes que los de otros paises ? Por supuesto qne si. Aqui la
nacion es grande ; la libertad es grande ; los montes, los rios, los lagos,
los bosques son grandes ; la naturaleza es grande ; todo es grande ; Nue-
va York es grande y los liombres mismos son tambien grandes ; pero no
mas grandes que los Espanoles.
7. Hablando de e«to, V. se olvida que en este ejercicio tiene Y. que
practicar con los nombrcs colectivos. — V, tiene razon, se me habian olvi-
dado los norabres colectivos hablando de las dos naciones que mas amo
en el mundo.
8. En cuanto 4 los nombres colectivos, su practica es muy facil j todo
se reduce a decir : que en Nueva York hay multitud de gentes de dife-
rentes naciones, millares de mujeres y cosas buenas y centenares de
hombres y cosas malas.
9. I Pero y qu6 dice Y. con respecto i los rebafios, ejercitos, etc. ?
Que en Espafia hay rebafios de carneros merinos que, asi como sii ej6r-
cito, no tienen superiores en el mundo.
10. ^ Segun eso Y. cree que todo lo mejor existe en Espafia ? Todo
no, puesto que mis nifios son Americanos.
11. Yamos, Y. se burla. — No, sefior, yo hablo de veras para practicar
el espafiol.
12. Y. habla segun las circunstancias. — No, sefior, yo hablo segun mi
conciencia.
13. Acu6rdese Y. que segun Y. obre con los demas asi obraran ellos
con Y. — Muy bien y asi como yo hable de ellos, asi hablardn eUos de mi ;
pero yo no debo hablar de ellos mejor que de mi mismo.
14. I Quiere Y. pagarme la mitad, el tercio 6 el cuarto de lo que Y.
me debe ? Ni lo uno ni lo otro, porque no tengo dinero ahora.
15. Deme Y. a lo m^nos un par de pesos. — Mafiana le dare 4 Y. una
docena de pesos, pero hoy ni tan siquiera un centavo.
16. A Dios, Carlos, me canso de charlar y me yoy 4 acostar. Buenas
noches, Luis, no olvide Y. de pagar sus deudas.
EXCERCISE.
1. What is the name given to a large number of sheep together?
It is called a flock.
2. What were you doing so long in the street ? I went to see tha
reason of the great crowd at the corner of the next street.
3. Well, what was it ? I could not see any thing ; but it seems there
was a fire in some of the streets near here.
4. You seem to be very much of a Spaniard ; why did you ever come
to the United States? I will not deny that I like the government; yet
that is not the only reason I had for coming here.
200 LESSON XL.
5. Can yon tell me some of the others? Undoubtedly; although
living is higlier here than there, business of all kinds is better, and it is
easier to make money here, not only than in Spain, but than any other
country in Europe.
6. I am very glad you think so ; how long have you been here ? It
will be four years next September.
7. Will you be good enough to tell me something of your country ?
That will give me much pleasure.
8. You talk so much about Europe in general, and about Spain in
particular, that I cannot help {no puedo menos de) thinking you intend to
go there. You are very right ; it is very possible that my brother and
I shall take a trip (viaje) to Spain next fall.
9. Well, in order to be able to enjoy yourselves as much as possible,
it will be necessary for you to know how to speak the language perfectly
before starting. That we intend to do.
10. Do you think all the soldiers in the army are Americans ? Ko,
nor even the half, and perhaps not even the third.
11. How many inhabitants are there in this city? I am not able to
tell you exactly ; but there cannot be much less than a million.
12. Which city in the world has the most inhabitants ? London ; it
has about three millions of inhabitants.
13. Ah ! you are jesting ; or else you are an Englishman. I am not
jesting, neither am I an Englishman, but a Frenchman ; after London
comes Paris.
14. Who is that book by ? This is the celebrated Don Quixote (QuU
jote\ by Cervantes.
15. In how many pai-ts is it ? Two, the first containing {contener)
some fifty-two chapters, and the second about eighty-four.
16. What etfect {efecto) does the reading of Don Quixote produce upon
you ? It makes me admire, and even leads me to envy the genius (genio)
of its author.
17. Ah 1 I see ; you say that to please me, because you know that I
too admire the grand work of Cervantes. Pardon me, sir ; I never speak
according to circumstances, but always according to my conscience.
18. But, have you forgotten your promise already? What promise is
that ? I do not remember any.
19. No matter; I see you have completely forgotten it. lam very
Borry.
20. What are the best fruits that Spain produces? Spain produces
so many kinds of fruit, and so delicious, that it is almost impossible for
me to tell tbeui all : You have excellent grapes, melons, peaches, apples,
oranges, and an infinity of others.
LESSON XLI.
201
21. Have the soldiers that came into the city last night gone away
yet ? They marched this morning at daybreak.
22. How was our old friend Harnero when you last heard from him ?
He was in Boston, entirely without means, having been deceived by a
bad man who took the whole of his money from him, and from whom
he was unable to recover (recobrar) even the fourth part.
LESSOIS^ XLI.
Soler.
Bendecir.
Oaer.
Dormir.
Morir.
Errar.
Jugar.
Oir.
Oler.
Contradecir.
Poner.
Podrir.
Reir.
Yaler.
Yacer.
To be accustomed to, to do, or
be, usually.
To bless.
To fall, to see (understand).
To sleep.
To die.
To err.
To play.
To hear.
To smell.
To contradict.
To put.
To rot.
To laugh.
To be worth.
To lie.
{Sec the conjugation of these verbs at the end of the book.)
Reposar.
Premiar.
Examinar.
Desde.
Contra.
Sobre.
Tras.
Pues.
Helo aqui.
Desde ahora.
9*
To rest, to repose.
To reward.
To examine.
Since, from.
Against, towards.
Above, over, about.
After, behind, besides.
I Well, then ; therefore, &c.
Here he (or it) is.
Henceforward, from now, just
now.
202
LESSON XLI.
Desde
aqui.
From here.
En efecto.
Indeed, in effect, in fact, really.
Eterno.
Eternal
Afortonado.
Fortunate.
Convicto.
Convicted.
Desgraciado.
Uufortunate.
Infortunio.
Misfortune.
Carlota.
Charlotte.
Reo.
Criminal.
Creacion.
Creation.
Grito.
Cry, scream.
Caridad.
Charity.
Coche.
Carriage.
Prenda.
Pledge, quality.
Vicio.
Vice.
accomplishm^^nt.
Fraile.
Fraj, friar.
Virtud.
Virtue.
Diego.
James.
Tristeza.
Grief, sorrow.
Verbo.
Verb.
Experiencia.
Experience.
Principio.
Beginning, prin-
ciple.
Pagina.
Page.
COMPOJ
BITION.
i Suele V. levantarse temprano ?
Suelo levantarme tarde.
i Solia Y. ir a pasear k caballo el ano
pasado ?
No, senor, solia pasear en coche.
Plegue a Dios que tengamos pronto lo
que deseamos.
Desde ahora prometo servirle & Y. en lo
que pueda.
El hombre ha obrado mal para con Dios
y consigo mismo desde la creacion del
mundo.
Desde Nueva York k Filadelfia hay
ochenta y ocho millas.
Yo juego contra ti.
Esta casa est^ contra el Este.
La ciudad e8t& sobre un monte.
La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes.
Yoy tras tl
Sufre la pena pues lo quieres.
Tras la primavera vicne el vcrano.
Tras sei" culpado, ^1 cs el que levanta el
grito.
Leer^ este libro pues Y. mc dice que es
bueno.
Do you usually rise early ?
I usually rise late.
Used you to ride on horseback last
year?
No, sir, I used to ride in a carriage.
God grant we may soon have what we
desire.
From this moment I promise to servo
you as far as I can.
Man has acted wrong before God and
to hunself since the creation of the
world.
It is eighty-eight miles from New York
to Philadelphia.
I play against you (thee).
This house faces the East.
The city is built upon a mountain (or hill).
Charity is before all virtues.
I go after you (thee).
Suffer the consequences (pain), since
such is your (thy) will
After spring comes summer.
Notwithstanding he is guilty, it is he
that raises the cry.
I will read this book since you tell me
it is good.
LESSON XLI.
203
EXPLANATION.
197. Defective verbs are those which are not employed in
all their tenses and persons. JPodrir, to rot, placer^ to please,
and yacer^ to lie, belong to this class, and are found used in the
following tenses and persons :
Imper . 2d person plural.
Suhjunc. imp. Sdj)€rson sing.
Injinit. Present.
Farticip.
PODRIR.
Podrid.
Podriria.
Podrir.
Podrido.
PLACER.
Indicat. Pres. Zd person sing. Place.
Imperfect.
Perfect ind.
Subjunc. Present.
Imperfect.
Future imp.
Placia.
Plugo.
Plegue.
J Pluguiera. j
I Pluguiese. j
Pluffuiere.
Rot.
He would rot.
To rot.
Rotten.
It pleases.
It did please.
It pleased.
It may please.
It might please.
It may please.
These persons of the subjunctive mood in this verb are only-
used in the following expressions : plegue^ or pluguiera., or plu-
guiese d Dios^ would to God ; and si me pluguiere^ if it should
please me.
198. Yacer. — No part of this verb is used except the
third persons of the present indicative, yace and yacen, chiefly
at the beginning of epitaphs.
199. Soler is used only in the present and imperfect of
the indicative mood. This verb has the peculiarity of never
being employed except as a determining verb, governing the
detennined verb without the aid of any preposition, and al-
ways in the present infinitive ; as,
Suelo pascar temprano. | I usually go early to walk.
200. Desde, from, points out the beginning of time or
place ; as,
Desde la creacion del mundo. I From the creation of the world.
Besd^ Nueva York a Filadelfia. | From New York to Philadelphia.
For this reason it forms a part of several adverbial expres-
sions which signify time or place ; as,
Desde ahora, | From this time.
Dd^de aquf. j From hence.
204 LESSON XLI.
201. CoNTEA is used in all cases as the English against,
202. SoBRE, upon, above, &c., serves to denote the superi.
ority of things with respect to others, either by their material
situation or by their excellence or power ; as,
La ciudad esta sobre un monte. I The city is on a mountain.
La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes. | Charity is above all virtues.
It has also the signification of ademds, moreover, or ademds
<?e, besides ; as,
JSobre ser reo convicto quiere que le I Besides being a convicted criminal,
premien. | he wishes to be rewarded.
It also signifies time ; as,
Eablar sobre mesa. ) To talk during dinner.
Security; as,
Prestar sobre prendas. | To lend upon pledge.
203. Teas, behind, after, &c., signifies the order in which
some things follow others ; as,
Yoy iras tf. I I follow you.
Tras la primavera viene el verano. | After spring comes smnmer.
It also signifies besides ; as,
Tras ser culpado, 61 es el que levan- I Besides being guilty, he remonstrates,
ta el grito. |
204. The conjunction pues, since, is used to account for a
proposition brought forward ; as,
Leer6 este libro ptics V. me dice que I I will read this book since you tell
es bueno. | me it is good.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Sobro qu6 quiere Y. que hablemos hoy ? No s6 ; de cualquiera
cosa, con tal quo practiqueraos con los verbos defectivos y las prcposi-
cioncs contra, desde, sobre y tras.
2. Que me place ; pero digamo Y., i cree V. que tenemos mucho que
practicar con el verbo yacer f No, seflor, puesto que es hu verbo que
solo sirve para ponerse en los epitafios.
3. Pues si Y. gusta le liar6mos un epitafio y pasar^mos A practicar
con otro verbo que no sea tan triste. — Soy do su opinion de V., porque
no mo gustan las cosas tristcs.
LESSON XLI. 205
4. Helo aqui :
" Aqui yace el verbo yacer,
Otra cosa no sabiendo hacer."
6. Ese epitafio me liace recordar a mi otro, oigalo V. :
"Aqui Fray Diego reposa,
Y jamas hizo otra cosa.",
6. Hombre, tenga Y. caridad de mi y no me haga Y. reir hablando de
epitafios, que es cosa mas bien para hacer llorar que para hacer reir.
^Suele Y. tener siempre tan buen humor? No sierapre; pero no se gana
nada con estar triste.
7. En efecto, mas vale estar alegre que triste, pero no siempre se
puede estar alegre, i y ent6nces que bace Y. ? Entonces mando a pasear
al mal bumor.
8. Eso es mas facil de decir que de bacer ; i quiere Y. decirme como
lo hace Y. ? Convengo con Y. ; pero cuando el hombre quiere verda-
deramente una cosa la logra casi siempre.
9. Plegue a Dios que yo logre estar siempre contento puesto que estar
contento es ser feliz. g Que es lo que Y. hace para estar siempre con-
tento ? Yo no le be dicho a Y. que estoy siempre contento, pero pro-
cure estarlo y asi logro no estar triste.
10. I C6mo lo hace Y. ? Obro segun las circunstancias. Examino la
causa de mi tristeza 6 mal humor; si es mi falta me consuelo porque creo
que Dios me castiga para que yo me corrija, y me haga mejor con la ex-
periencia.
11. Bien, i y cuando Y. es inocente y le sucede un infortunio? Ent6n-
ces me consuelo tambien, porque creo que todo lo que Dios nos envia es
para nuestro bien.
12. Ent6nces es Y. filosofo. No, seiior, mejor que eso; soy religioso.
13. I Tiene Y. miedo de la muerte ? No, sefior, porque s6 que todos
hemos de morir, y que tras la muerte viene la vida eterna.
14. I Cuantos ninos tiene Y. ? Cinco ; dos niflos y tres nifias.
15. I Como se llaman ? El mayor de los nifios se Uama Alejandro y e*
menor Manuel.
16. ^ Y las niilas ? Las ninas son Luisa, Carlota y Margarita.
17. ^ Cuanto tiempo hace que no ha estado Y. en Espaila ? Hace veinte
afios que sali de Espafia,
18. ^ Y no ha vuelto Y. ? No, sefiora, y creo que nunca volvere.
19. jPorqu6? No porque no lo haya deseado, sino porque las circun-
stancias no me lo han permitido.
20. Porqu6 habla Y. tanto de si misrao en sus conversaciones, gno
piensa Y. que eso puede cansar a sus oyentes ? Asi es la verdad, sefiora ;
pero para mi es la materia de conversacion mas interesante que puedo
encjutrar.
206 LESSON XL I,
EXERCISE.
1. James, do you know where Charlotte has gone to? I saw her
going out, but I do not know where she has gone.
2. Can you not help your brother in his misfortune ? you know he re-
lies (contar) upon your aid. I shall do all in my power to serve him ;
but you know that is not much.
3. Margaret, go and call Charles ; tell him he has played enough, and
that I want him to attend to his music lessons. "Why, he has been at his
lessons for the last half hour !
4. Ah ! that is another thing. Where is he then ? Here he is, here.
5. Well, Charles, how are you getting on with your music ? Very
well, papa ; but I think Jane will have to help me with my Spanish ex-
ercise.
6. My dear boy, always do your own exercises, then you will be sure
they are well done. Oh, yes, I know ; as they say : " Help yourself and
Heaven will help you."
7. How beautiful that lady is 1 Yes ; but, my dear sir, her accom-
plishments are much superior to her beauty.
8. I do not doubt it at all ; but how do you know that ? have you
known her long? Long enough to find out her good qualities, which, in
my opinion, are of more value than all the beauty in the world.
9. Have you found time yet to examine the books I put on your table
the other day? I have, and the examination caused (produced) me a
great deal of sadness.
10. How so? From the commencement, page after page, I found that
the author has not the least experience of the world ; and, besides, he
contradicts toward the end what he has given as a general rule at the
beginning of his work.
11. I am very much grieved (sorry) that such is your opinion. So am
I ; but you know it is better (worth more) to tell the truth, even though
it should offend the author himself.
12. Can you read that epitaph? I believe it is in English. Yes; it
says : " Here lies Pedro Gutierrez."
13. Is that all it says ? No, there is a great deal more ; but I cannot
read it.
14. Ah, indeed ! I see ; you do not read English as well as you thought
I do not ; and I promise you that from this moment I will study it at*
tentively until I know it thoroughly.
15. What is that you are smelling? The book that Charles has jus(
bought.
16. What smell has it? It smells like new paper.
LESSON^ XLII,
207
17. "What was that man rewarded for ? For having returned (devolver)
five hundred dollars, which he found in the park, to the person that had
lost them.
18. I am very glad that he has been rewarded ; but vii'tue is always
rewarded, sooner or later (tarde que temprano).
LESSON XLII.
Adquirir.
Asir.
Caber.
Cocer.
Erguir.
Satisfacer.
Traer.
To acquire.
To seize.
To contain, to hold.
To cook.
To erect.
To satisfy.
To bring, to carry.
{See conjugation of these verbs at the aid. of the book.)
Conseguir.
Callar.
Keprender.
jOdspita! {int.).
jVaya! {int.).
To succeed, to get.
To be silent, to hold one's tongue.
To reprehend, to chide.
Divisarr
To perceive, to descry, to espy.
Fumar.
To smoke.
Establecer.
To establish.
Saber {imp. verb).
{In the signification of) to taste,
or to savor.
Sorprender.
To surprise.
Entrambos.
Both.
Solo.
Alone.
Ir a caballo.
To ride on horseback.
Ir en coche.
To ride in a carriage.
De todos modos.
At all events, by all means.
De ningun modo.
By no means, not at all.
Manos a la obra.
To work I
For mi parte.
For my part.
Asi sea.
So be it, let it be so.
"Wonderful ! too bad !
Come, now ! indeed ! go away 1
208
LESSON XLII
CONJUNCTIONS.
They are classified as follows :
Copulative.
Que.
Tarabien.
O, ti,ya.
Sea que.
Tarapoco.
That.
Also.
Or, either,
whether.
Whether.
Neither.
Ademas.
Y orL
Ni.
Disjunctive,
Por cuanto.
Para que.
Afinde.
Moreover.
And.
Neither, nor.
Whereas.
So that, in ordur
that.
In order that.
Adversati'ce,
Mas, pero. But.
Aun cuando. Even.
Aunque. Although,
though.
Caudal.
Porque, que. Because.
^Porqu6? Why?
Pues, pues que. Since.
Por. For.
Por tanto. Therefore.
Conditional,
Si. If.
Sino. But.
Con tal que. Provided.
Am6nosde. ) ^^^^^
A m6nos que. S
Continuative,
Pues, puesto que. Since, inasmuch
as.
Comparative.
Como, asi como. As.
Asi. So.
Antes de.
Before.
L4J03 de.
Far from.
En lugar de.
Instead of, in place ofl
Por falta de.
For want of.
De miedo de, )
Por temor de. )
For fear of.
Como qniera que.
However.
Fuera de que.
Besides.
Al instante que, or
lucgo que, or
As soon as.
tan pronto como.
De manera quo.
So that.
Desde que.
Since.
A-cuerdo.
Advice, or opin-
ion.
Marca.
Fortuna.
Brand, mark.
Fortune.
LESSOK XLII
209
Dafio.
Harm, damage.
Partida.
Party, game, de-
Ajedrez.
Chess.
parture.
Cigari'O.
Cigar.
Opinion.
Opinion.
Cigarrillo.
Cigarette.
Pipa.
Tobacco-pipe,
Tabaco.
Tobacco.
pipe.
Jaque.
Check.
Compania.
Company.
Caso.
Case.
COMPOSITION.
Conjunctions governing the subjunctive.
Dado que me escriba no le respondere.
Con tal que el trabaje.
A menos que me pague.
Sea que se vaya 6 que se quede.
Calle Y. no sea que nos oiga.
Granted that he should write me, I will
not answer hira.
Provided he works.
Unless he pays me.
Whether he sets out or remains.
Be silent lest he should hear us.
Conjunctions governing the indicative.
Al instante que recibi la carta le res-
pond!.
De fiuerte que {or de modo que) no
pudo conseguirlo.
De manera que no esta nada satisfecho.
I Qu6 ha hecho V. desde que le he vis-
to a V. ?
Llegue tan pronto como pude.
Mientras que V. juega el estudia su lec-
eion.
Yo reprendo a V. sus faltas porque le
quiero.
As soon as I received the letter I an-
swered him.
So that he could not bring it about.
So that he is not pleased at all.
What have you been doing since I saw
you?
I got here (or there) as soon as I could.
While you play, he studies his lesson.
I reprove you for your faults because I
love you.
Conjunctions governing the infinitive.
Yo trabajo a fin de ganar dinero.
No le visitare antes de conocerle.
Lejos de amarle le aborrece.
I work in order to earn money.
I shall not visit him before makin;^
acquaintance.
Far from loving him, he abhors himu
his
EXPLANATION.
205, Conjunctions. — The learner is already acquainted
with the greater part of the conjunctions ; but in this lesson
they are again given, so that he may see how they are classified.
Besides the conjunctions introduced in this lesson, there may
210 LESSON XLII.
be formed a variety of expressions which answer the same end
as conjunctions ; as.
Como quiera que, I However ;
Fuera de que, | Besides ;
and a large number of others.
206. It would require too much space to specify all the
conjunctions that govern verbs in a given mood ; more is to be
learned from the teacher, and by constant practice in reading
and conversation, than from all the rules that could be given.
207. The subjunctive should be used after the following
conjunctive expressions : Dado que^ granted that ; con tal que^
provided that ; d meaos que, unless ; no sea que, lest, for fear ;
dntes que, sin que, sea que, &c. ; as,
Granted that he should write to me,
I shall not answer him.
Provided that he works.
Unless he pays me.
Dado gtie me escriba no le respon-
der6.
Con ted que 61 trabaje.
A menos que me pague.
208. Other expressions having de, instead of que, require
the verb in the infinitive mood ; such as, djin de, in order to ;
d menos de, unless, &c.
209. Finally, other compound conjunctions govern the
indicative ; as, al instante que, as soon as ; de manera que^ so
that, &c.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Buenos dias, Don Carlos. — T6ngalos Y. muy felices, Don Enriqne;
ol instante que lo divis6 desdo la ventana lo reconoci.
2. gC6ino estd toda la familia? Todos buenos; acaban de salir.
3. I De manera que estd V. solo ? Si, seflor, en lugar de salir quiae
qucdarme d espcrar d V. pues sabia que babia V. de venir.
4. I Qui6n se lo dijo d V. ? A que no acierta V. — Verdaderamente
no s6 qui6n puede hab6rselo dicho d V.
6. Fu6 Helena, su liija de Y., que acaba do salir d pasear con mi csposa
y Margarita, mi hija.
6. Y nosotros, jqu6 har^mos? Lo quo Y. guste.
7. Mi opinion es que juguomos una partida de jyedroz, que fumeraoa
an cigarro, bebamos un vaso de vino de Carifiena, y vayamos despues d
Borprendcr d las sefloras al parque. ^Estd Y. de acuordo? Perfcctlsi-
mamente.
LESSON X HI. 211
8. Pues bien, manos a la obra ; e juega V. mucho ? Medianamente ;
pero como no lo practico temo que me gane V.
9. iQu6 hombre! si hace lo menos dos afios que no be jugado, fuera
de que jamas he sido muy fuerte.
10. I Cuales quiere V., las negras 6 las blancas ? Cualesquiera, de todos
modos he de perder.
11. Jaque a la reina Don Enrique. — Pues creo que esta perdida. — Si,
sefior, no puede huir — vaya pues le doy a Y. la partida, puesto que sin
reina es casi imposible ganar.
12. ^Quiere V. que en lugar de jugar mas vayamos a ver las sefioras?
Si, senor, luego que bebamos del vino de Carinena.
13. ; Hombre, si, lo habia olvidado! aqui esta, y aqui tiene Y. tambien
pipas, cigaiTos de la Habana, cigarrillos de la marca de la Honradez y
tabaco de Yirginia para la pipa; ^que prefiere Y. ? Yo prefiero los
cigarrillos.
14. A su salud de Y., Don Carlos. — A la de Y., Don Enrique. — jCas-
plta! jqu6 bien sabe el de Carifienal
15. ^Le gusta aY.? iQue si me gusta! desde que vivo en Nueva
York no he probado vino mejor.
16. Puesto que le gusta gporqu^ no repite Y. ? Por temor de que me
haga dafio, no suelo beber mucho, y temo que me ponga un poco alegre.
17. Aqui tiene Y. fuego; gque tal le gustan a Y. esos cigarrillos?
Excelentes.
18. Seflor; ^Qu6 quieres Juan? Los caballos estan listos.
19. I Qu6 ! ^ Yamos a caballo ? Si, senor, las senoras han ido en coche.
20. I Qu6 camino tomaremos ? Ir^mos por la Quinta avenida, que es
la calle mas hermosa de Nueva York.
21. Tenemos buen tiempo, D. Enrique. — Hermosisimo, y con esto, buena
salud, amigos fieles, una larga familia y una buena fortuna, i qu6 mas
podemos desear ?
22. Tiene Y. razon, Don Carlos, por mi parte soy feliz y solo deseo que
Dios me de una larga vida para ver 4 todos mis hijos bien establecidos. —
Asi sea, Don Enrique, lo deseo para entrambos.
EXERCISE.
1. Does your brother never go out on horseback? Sometimes; but
not very often.
2. What can be the reason of that ? I thought he was very fond of
horses and riding on horseback. So he is ; but he does not often take
exercise of that kind for fear of falling.
3. How does he go to the Central Park, in that case ? Why, in a
carriage of course.
212
LESSON XLIII.
4. Go away ! What carriage does he go in ? In his cousin's, of course,
for want of one of his own.
5. Who will give rae a cigarette? No one here; there is nobody
here that smokes any thing but cigars or pipes.
6. Too bad ! May I ask why none of you use the cigarette ? Cer-
tainly; and we shall tell you with the greatest pleasure: atone time
we all smoked what you call "cigarette," but wliat we call a "poor
man's cigar," until one day Henry came (you know Henry is something
of a doctor), and, with his head erect, said with a voice of thunder :
" What's this ? smoking cigarettes ? "
7. Well ! what more did he say ? " Don't you know that what you
are smoking there is nothing more than paper ? You will all be sick ! "
8. What did you do then ? We were at first surprised ; but very
soon we promised never to smoke such a thing again, for it was good for
nothing, and only tasted of paper.
9. Be that as you please ; for my part I shall always prefer the ciga-
rette to the cigar {tabaco). Perhaps you are right ; each one has his
taste, and so we shall say no more about it.
10. What news do you bring from Boston? Some good, and some
bad : my cousin has been very fortunate in that affair I spoke of to you;
but he met last week with an unfortunate accident.
11. Ah! how was that? He was out riding in company with some
friends, and in returning home he fell off his horse.
12. I am very sorry indeed ; and I hope he may soon be able to attend
to his business.
13. What do you think of playing a game of chess ? I am ready to
play one, if you wish ; but you will not find my game very good.
14. Why do you not practise more than you do ? I have practised
very much, with a desire to become perfect in the game, but have act
been able to succeed.
LESSON XLIII
Advertir.
Conjugar.
Desconfiar.
Cometer.
Distinguir.
To take notice, to observe, to
warn.
To conjugate.
To distrust, to mistrust.
To commit.
To distinguish.
LESSON
XLIIT. 213
Formal'.
To form, to shape.
Devolver.
To return, to give back. [mind.
Descuidar.
To neglect, to be at ease in one's
Pertenecer.
To belong.
Molestar.
To molest, to trouble.
Eesultar.
To result, to turn out.
{The learner ought by this time to know almost all the conjugations, both of
the regular and the irregular verbs ; should he at any time be at a loss for some
part of a verb, he may refer to tlie conjugations at the end of the grammar.)
Cada.
I Every, each.
Sin duda.
Certainly, without doub
J Adelante I
Go on ! go ahead ! come
En adelante.
Henceforth.
Compuesto.
Compound.
Irregular.
Irregular.
Oompleto.
Complete.
Varios.
Various, divers, several.
Simple.
Simple.
Seguro.
Secure, sure.
Obvio.
Obvious.
Lo demas.
The rest.
■■)
Conocimiento.
Jos6.
Articulo.
Pronombre.
Participio.
Gerundio.
Adverbio.
Presente.
Imperfecto.
Perfecto.
Futuro.
Pluscuamperfecto.
Infinitivo.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Subjuntivo.
Bill of lading.
Knowledge.
Joseph.
Article, section.
Pronoun.
Participle.
Gerund.
Adverb.
Present.
Imperfect.
Perfect.
Future.
Pluperfect.
Infinitive.
Indicative.
Imperative.
Subjunctive.
Condicion.
Navidad, or )
Natividad. )
Relacion.
Duda.
Yentaja.
Frase.
Prontitud.
Sentencia.
Conjugacion.
Verdad.
Imprudencia.
Preposicion.
Conjuncion.
Interjeccion.
Paz.
Molestia.
Condition.
Nativity, Christ-
mas.
Relation.
Doubt.
Advantage.
Phrase.
Promptitude.
Sentence.
Conjugation.
Truth.
Imprudence.
Preposition.
Conjunction.
Interjection.
Peace.
Trouble.
214
LESSON XLIII.
COMPOSITION.
Descuide V.
^ Cuantos tiempos tiene el modo indica-
tive?
Ocho : cuatro simples y cuatro com-
puestos.
Bueno fuera {or seria) no descuidarse.
Conviniera {or couvendria) que se hicie-
sc la paz.
Aunque dijeras {or dijeses) la verdad,
no te creeria.
i Ojala cesara {<yr cesase) la guerra ! asi
seriamos mas felices.
Pens6 que estudiarag.
No crei que estudiase V.
Juzgu6 que estudiaria V.
Dije que leyeraa.
Dijo que leerias.
Dijimos que leyese.
Deseaba que ganaras {or ganascs).
Quiso que te casaras {or casases).
No 86 si iria 6 no.
Si tuvicra {or si tuviese) buenoa libros
leeria.
Seria imprudencia ir con este tiempo.
No quiso ir.
Debemos perdonar k nuestros enemigos.
V puede hablar, pero yo no lo puedo.
I Si hubicra {or hubieso) V. recibido los
libros me \oi habria V. prestado?
Si los hubiera {or hubiose) recibido se
los habria prestado ; pero no los he
recibido aun.
En lugar de veu; a vcrme me escribio.
t\ no jugar& por temor de perder su
dinero.
I Quiera Dios que se oorrija !
Make yourself easy (or be at ease in
your mind).
How many tenses has the indicative
mood ?
Eight : four simple and four compound.
It would be well not to be off one's
guard.
It would be well if peace were made.
Though thou wert to tell the truth, he
would not believe thee.
Would to God the war would come to
an end ! we should then be happier.
I thought thou wouldst study.
I did not think you would study (or
were studying).
I judged you would study.
I said thou wert to read (or woiddst
read).
He said thou wouldst read.
We said he was to read.
He wished thee to win.
He wished thee to get married.
I do not know whether he would go or
not
Had I (or if I had) good books I would
read.
It were imprudent to go m this weather.
He would not go.
We should forgive our enemies.
You can speak, but I cannot.
Had you received (or if you had re-
ceived) the books would you have
lent them to me ?
If I had received them I woiild have
lent them to you ; but I have not re-
ceived them yet.
Instead of coming to see me, he wrote
to me.
He will not play, for fear of losing his
money.
God grant that he may change I
LESSON XLIII,
215
I Asi sea ! Lo dcseo para entrambos.
Bebo a la salud de V., Don Enrique.
A la de V., Don Carlos.
Senores, manos a la obra, no sea que
no podamos acabar a tiempo.
De todos modos creo que no lo conse-
< guiremos.
So be it ! That is my desire for both.
I drink to your health, Mr. Henry.
Your health, Mr. Charles.
To work, gentlemen, for fear we should
not be able to finish in time.
At all events, I do not think we shall
succeed.
EXPLANATION.
210. Imperfect ais^d Pluperfect of the Subjunctive. —
Although it has been deemed expedient, in the example of the
conjugation of verbs in the subjunctive mood, to give but one
English equivalent for each of the three terminations ria, ra,
86, it is not to be inferred therefrom that they may be used in-
discriminately. Indeed, the correct application of each of
these terminations presents as much difficulty to the student of
Spanish as does that of the English signs might, could, should,
would to the foreigner learning English. The following rules
will, however, serve as a guide in all ordinary cases, and enable
the pupil to surmount not a few of the most serious obstacles
to the right use of the terminations in question.
1st. When the sentence begins without a conditional con-
junction, the verb may take either the first or the second ter-
mination (ria or ra) ; as,
Bueno sena {or fuera) no descuidarse.
It would be well not to be off one's
guard.
It would be well if peace were made.
Convendn'a (or conviniera) que se hi
ciese la paz.
2d. In sentences beginning with si, sino, aunque. Men que,
dado que, &c., or with an interjection expressive of desire,
either the second or third termination may be employed {ra or
se) ; and were it necessary to repeat the same tense in the
eecond clause of the sentence (in order to show what would
take place as the result of the condition expressed in the first
clause), the first termination {ria) may then be used ; as,
Aunque dijeras {or dijeses) la verdad, I Though thou toldest (or wert to tell)
no te creena. j the truth, he would not believe thee.
3d. When the imperfect of the subjunctive is preceded by
(\ verb in the preterit definite of the indicative, signifying pen'
I did not think you were studying, or
I did not think you would study,
I judged you would study.
I said you would read.
He said you were to read.
We said he was to read.
216 LESSON XLIII.
sar, to think, decir, to say, or such like, any of the terminations
may be used ; but it must be observed that the idea conveyed
will be different, according to the termination employed ; as,
Pens6 que estudiara V., or que estu- I thought you would study.
diarea Y.
No crei que estudiase Y.{or estudiara)
V.
Juzgu6 que estudiar/a {or estudiara)
V.
Dije que leyera {or leerra) V.
Dijo que leyese {or leyera) V.
Dijimos que ley ero {or leyese).
4th. But if this tense be preceded or governed by a verb in
any of the past tenses of the indicative, signifying desear, to
desire, querer^ to wish, or by any verb of such nature, then the
second termination {ra) or the third (se) must be used, and
never the first {rid) ; as,
Deseaba que ganara {or ganase) V. I He was desirous that you might win.
Quiso que V. se easara {or casa««). | He wished you to get married,
A glance at the foregoing rules and examples will suffice in
order to observe that the first and second terminations {ria and
rd) may be used one for the other, without any change in the
sense of the phrase ; that the second may also be used for the
third (that is to say, ra for se), but that the first and third are
of an entirely dififerent meaning, and, in consequence, can never
be substituted one for the other. Another peculiarity of the
first {rid) is, that it can never be preceded by a conditional con-
junction, while the second and third may.
6th. When, in translating into Spanish, whether is to be
translated by si, would or should must be rendered by the ter-
mination ria ; as,
No b6 «i irea. | I do not know whether he would go.
6th. The invei-ted forms had Z, had he^ &c., meaning if I
had, if he had, &c., are always to be turned into Spanish by
either of the terminations ra or «e, preceded by the conjunc-
tion si ; as.
Si tuviera {or tuvie«c) buenos libros, I Had I (or if I had) good books, I
leeWo. I would read.
LESSON XLIII. 217
7th. Were, used in the place of would be, may be translated
by either ria or ra, never by se ; as,
Seria {or fnera) imprudencia ir con I It were imprudent to go in thia
este tiempo. I weather.
211. The English auxiliaries, may, might, can, could, will,
would and should are sometimes to be translated into Spanish
by principal verbs of the same meaning, and not merely ren-
dered by corresponding terminations ; as,
No quiso ir. I He would not go.
y. puede hablar, pero yo no lo puedo. \ You may (or can) speak, but I cannot.
In the first example we see, that by would not is conveyed
the idea of the want of will or desire on the part of the person
alluded to, and not the idea of that person's going or not going,
as dependent on a condition. Had the latter been the sense
intended, we should then have rendered would by the termi-
nation ria of the verb ir, to go ; thus,
]E1 no iria, \ He would not go ;
for, in that case, the object would have been simply to predict
that he would not go, as dependent on some such condition as,
if I did not go too, si yo no fuese tamhien. Hence, the closest
attention is required, in order to find the real meaning of the
auxiliaries above mentioned, before attempting to translate them.
212. The imperfect of the subjunctive denotes a contingent
action that took place some time ago, or that is taking place at
the present time, or that will take place after the completion
of the action expressed by the determining verb.
213. The pluperfect represents a contingent action as com-
pleted before some period of time already past, or before some
other action which is now also completed, or which would be
now completed had it taken place.
The closest attention to the foregoing remarks is essential,
in order to avoid the improper substitution of the tenses of the
indicative for those of the subjunctive, which all foreigners, and
especially the English, are most liable to commit.
10
218 LESSON XLIII.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jDuda V. que so haga la paz este verano ? Convendria (or convi-
niera) que se liiciese la paz ; pero temo que no se haga.
2. I Iria Y. d Europa si tuviera {or tuviese) tiempo ? No iria aunque
tuviera tierapo, si no tuviese dinero.
3. jOjalal tuviera V. (or tuviese; mucho dinero, porque ent6nces
me prestaria V. alguno ; ^ no es asi ? Si tuviera mucho le prestaria a V.
alguno ; pero con la condicion de que me lo devolviese pronto.
4. I Teme V. acaso que no se lo devolviera ? Todo pudiera suceder,
amigo niio.
5. Si V. me hubiera (or hubiese) prestado algo, 7 yo no se lo hubiese
(or hubiera) devuelto, Y. tendria razon en desconfiar. — Todo eso esta muj
bien ; pero si, en lugar de ser Y., fuera yo el que necesitara dinero, y Y.
el que lo tuviera, i me lo prestaria ? Por supuesto que si.
6. Pues con todo eso yo no s6 si Y. lo haria.— ^Porqu6 piensa V. tan
mal de mi ?
7. I Ila olvidado Y. ya que el afio pasado, por Navidad, fui d pedirle d
Y. cien pesos y me los neg6 Y. ? Mal pudiera yo prestarselos 4 Y.
cuando yo no los tenia ; pero est6 Y. seguro, Don Jos6, que yo hubiera
tenido un gran placer en haberselos prestado a Y. si los hubiera (or hu-
biese) tenido.
8. I Si Y. supiera nsar correctamente los tiempos y modos del verbo,
sabria Y. hablar espaftol ? Si, sefior, con los conocimientos que ya tengo
de las demas partes de la oracion, creo que liablaria bien el espailol si su-
piera usar bien los tiempos y modos del verbo.
9. I Qu6 es lo mas importantc al aprender una Icngua ? El conoci-
miento de todo lo que hace relacion al verbo.
10. jPorqu6 crce Y. que el verbo es lo mas importantc? Porque sin
los verbos no se puede formar una sola scntencia.
11. ^Luego, sogun eso, bastard aprender la conjugacion de los verbos
regulares 6 irrcgularcs para hablar una lengua? No, sefior, si uno aabe
conjugar ios verbos como regularmente se conjugan en las gramaticas;
pero si sabi^ndolos conjugar como se debe.
12. J Pues qu6, hay algun otro mode de conjugar los verbos? Los
verbos debcn conjugarse forraando senteuciaa completas en todos sus
modos y tiempos.
13. jQu6 vonttyas resultan do esto? Las vent^jiis son obvias, pues
formando sentencias completas con cada tiempo y raodo se apronde a dis-
tinguir estos tiempos y modos, acabando por usarlos correctamente.
14. ^ Y crec Y. que hablaria bien el espafiol si pudiese hacer sentencias
en todos los tiempos y modos del vei'bo? Sia duda alguna, una vez quo
LESS02^r XLIII. 219
V. forme estas sentencias con prontitud j sin cometer faltas, hablara Y.
espafiol.
15. Pues manos a la obra, i quiere Y. que haga algunas en el raodo in-
dicativo ? No, sefior, en las lecciones pasadas ha practicado Y. bastante
con ese modo, haga Y. algunas ahora con el modo subjuntivo.
16. Presenter ^DeseaY. que yo aprenda el espafiol? gEscorrecta?
Perfectamente ; adelante.
17. Perfecto de subjuntivo : Temo que la guerra no haya acabado en
Europa. i Esta bien ? Si, sefior, esta muy bien ; pero no necesita Y.
preguntarme a cada sentencia que haga, si esta correcta, porque yo ten-
dre buen cuidado de advertirselo a Y. cuando no sea asi.
18. Pluscuamperfecto : Si yo hubiera creido que esto le molestaba 4 Y.
no se lo habria preguntado. — Esto no me molesta de ningun modo y espero
que Y. no se moleste tampoco por lo que yo acabo de decir.
19. Imperfecto: gSeria suficiente hacer una frase en cada tiempo?
Seria suficiente si -cada tiempo se usase en un solo caso ; pero como hay
muchos y muy varios, convendi'ia practicar en todos tanto como fuese
posible.
EXERCISE.
1. Before going out, Henry, I wish to give you a piece of advice.
Well, go on I
2. What is that advice* you have to give me? Hold your tongue,
and hear what I have to tell you.
3. Did you warn your cousin not to lend his carriage to that young
man who asked him for it ? Yes, but he said he would do so, and that
he did not distrust that young man at all.
4. Do you know how to conjugate all the verbs in the Spanish lan-
guage now ? I am not sure ; my memory is not very good ; and so I al-
ways like to look at my grammar, for fear of making (committing) mistakes.
6. Can you tell me how many conjugations of regular verbs there
are in Spanish ? Yes, sir, there are three.
6. When you see a new verb, how do you know to what conjugation
it belongs ? By the termination of the infinitive mood.
7. Can you tell me to what conjugation the verb comprar belongs ?
Certainly ; it belongs to the first.
8. How do you know that ? I see the characteristic termination of
the first conjugation, which is ar.
9. And of which conjugation is entender ? The second ; its termina-
tion being er.
10. Yery well. Now, if I say existio, can you tell me all about that
verb ? Yes, sir, it is a regular verb, third person singular, of the preterit
220
LESSON XLIV.
definite tense of the indicative mood ; it belongs to the third conjugation,
its infinitive being existir.
11. Are there in Spanish no other conjugations than those which you
have just told me ? Yes, very many. Those I have mentioned {mencio-
nar) already are the three regular ones.
12. What do you understand by " regular verbs " ? Regular verbs are
those which are conjugated in all their moods and tenses exactly like the
models (modelos) given in different parts of the grammar.
13. And " irregular verbs," what are they ? Those whose conjugation
is different from the models.
14. If you could speak Spanish as well as English, do you think you
would prefer it to your own language ? I would like to be able to speak
it as well ; but there is no language in the world that I would prefer to
my own.
15. If I were to lend you this phrase book would you return it to me
next week ? I would if you wanted it, and that I promised to return it
to you at that time.
LESSON XLIV.
Aproximar.
Apurar.
Aullar.
Ladrar.
Cuidar.
Dejar.
Emplear.
Matar,
Permitir.
Robar.
Imponer.
Tantico.
Vaya de cuento.
Como iba diciendo do mi
cuento.
A mi costa.
Ya le veo 4 V. vcnir.
Venir 4 pelo.
To approach, to draw near.
To perplex, to press.
To howl.
To bark.
To take care of.
To leave, to let.
To employ.
To km.
To permit.
To rob, to steaL
To impose.
Somewhat ; a little.
To begin my story.
As I was saying (in my story).
At my expense, to my cost.
I see what you are at.
To suit exactly, to be apropos.
LESSON XLIV
221
De sopeton.
Cuanto mas.
J Por Dios !
Unexpectedly.
The more.
For Heaven's sake !
iHe!
Ho! hoa! What?
i Oiga I
Indeed 1 Just listen !
Chico.
Little, small.
Kevoltoso.
Noisy.
CalieDte.
Hot, warm.
Apurado.
Embarrassed.
Burlon.
Jester, scoffer.
Natural.
Natural.
Aumentativo.
Augmentative.
Diminutivo.
Diminutive.
Picaro.
Rogue, rascal.
Satisfecho.
Satisfied, contented.
Cuento.
Corro.
Cojo.
Brazo.
Ademan.
Francisco, Paco
{dim.).
Jose, Pepe (dim.).
Caldo.
Calducho.
Pistoletazo.
Poetastro.
Lugar.
Garrote.
Garrotazo.
Cafion.
Oanonazo.
Ladron.
Tale, story.
Group of persons.
Lame.
Arm.
Attitude.
Francis, Frank.
Joseph, Joe.
Broth.
Poor broth.
Pistol shot.
Poetaster.
Place.
Bludgeon.
Blow of a blud-
geon.
Cannon.
Cannon-shot.
Thief, robber.
An^cdota.
Casuca.
Mosca.
Necesidad.
Pierna.
Boca.
Maria, Mariqui-
ta {dim.).
Concepcion,
Concha {dim.)
Pistola.
Estratagema.
Josefa, P6pa
{dim.).
Francisca, Paca
{dim.).
Costumbre.
Clase.
Anecdote.
Miserable house.
Fly ; tiresome
person.
Necessity, need.
Leg.
Mouth.
Mary.
{N'o Englislh equiv-
. alent.)
Pistol.
Stratagem.
Josephine.
Frances, Fanny.
Custom.
Class.
COMPOSITION.
Lo aprendi 4 mi costa.
Antes no le habia comprendido
ahora ya le veo venir.
El me dio la noticia de sopeton.
v.,
I learned it to my cost.
I did not understand you before, but
now I see what you are at.
He gave me the news unexpectedly.
222
LESSON XLIV
j Por Dios ! D. Francisco, no hable V.
de eso.
I Conoce V. a aquel hombron ?
Si, senor, es el marido de mi vecinita
Mariquita.
V. me sorprende. j Es posible que sea
aquel horabronazo el marido de esa
mujercita !
i Es ese hombre cojo ?
Si, senor ; en la ultima guerra recibio
un pistoletazo en una piema.
f. Ha matado V. alguna vez a alguno ?
Si, senor, el ano pasado mate de un
garrotazo al perro de mi vecino, por-
que no me dejaba dormir, aullando
todita la noche.
Ese hombre es un picaronazo, que no
hace sino beber y no atiende 4 las
necesidades de su familia.
Este perro es chiquito, pero yo tengo
uno chiquirritito.
Carlotita, ve 4 cuidar de tu hermanita.
Ese nino es un picarillo.
Esta nina es una coquetilla.
Mi pobrecico hijo esta muy malo.
P6pe, (, has visto mi caballito ?
Si ; pero yo en tu lugar, Paco, le llama-
ria caballejo, porque creo que no
merece el nombre de caballito.
P6pe vino callandito.
Mi amigo esta apuradillo.
Esa nina estd muertecita de frio.
Tu casa esta lejitos.
El no es poeta, sino poetastro.
For Heaven's sake ! Mr. Francis, do
not speak of that.
Do you know that big man ?
Yes, sir, he is the husband of my little
neighbor Mary.
You surprise me. Is it possible that
that enormous man is that little
woman's husband !
Is that man lame ?
Yes, sir ; in the last war he received a
pistol shot in one of his legs.
Did you ever kill any one ?
Yes, sir ; last year I killed my neigh-
bor's dog with a bludgeon, for he
would not let me sleep, howling the
whole night over.
That man is a great rascal who does
nothing but drink, and does not at-
tend to the wants of his family.
This dog is pretty small, but I have a
very little one.
Charlotte, go and take care 'of your lit-
tle sister.
This child is a little rogue.
This little girl is a little coquette.
My poor Uttle son is very sick.
Joe, have you seen my little horse ?
I did ; but if I were you, Frank, I
would call it a nag, for I think it is
not worthy the name of (little) horse.
Joe came in softly.
My friend is a little embarrassed.
That little girl is almost dead with cold.
Your house is pjetty far away.
He is no poet, but a poetaster.
EXPLANATION.
214. Augmentative and diminutive nouns are those
derivatives which serve to augment or diminish the significa-
tion of their primitives ; not only in regard to size, but also to
esteem, character, dignity, importance, &c.
They are formed by adding various terminations to the
primitive nouns, dropping generally the vowel, if it end in one.
LESSON- XLIV. 223
The terminations which are used are very numerous ; but those
most frequently adopted are azo, on, ote for the augmentive
masculine, and aza, ona^ ota for the augtnentive feminine nouns.
These terminations are equivalent in their meaning to the Eng-
lish words big^ large^ stout, tall, and such like ; as,
PRIMITIVES. DERIVATIVES.
Hombre. A man.
Mujer. A woman.
Hombron, hom- A tall, or large,
hvazoy hombrofe. man.
Mujerona, mu- A tall, or large,
jera^a, mujerona. woman.
But the nouns which have those terminations are not al-
ways augmentatives, since the nouns pistoletazo, pistol shot;
canonazo, cannon shot; garrotazo, blow of a bludgeon, do not
augment the signification of their primitives, pistola, canon
and garrote, and consequently are not augmentatives.
Familiar use has introduced many other augmentative and
diminutive terminations; as,
Horabrona-zo. I A very large man.
Picarona2o. | A very great rascal.
The terminations most used as diminutives are in, illo, ito,
ico, eteyiielo or ejo, for the masculine ; the feminine are formed
by adding a to the termination in, and by changing the final
vowel of the others into a.
Many of the diminutive terminations may acquire a still
further diminutive signification, by adding other terminations
to them ; thus.
CYiico.
Chiqu/to.
ChiquirritzVo.
Small.
Very small.
Very, very small.
The manner of applying these terminations, as much for
their different meanings as for their various orthographical ac-
cidents, admits of so much variety that practice seems the only
means of acquiring the proper use of them ; as.
Mi hermamto.
Un hombreci'o.
Un viejecjVo.
El es un ^icaxillo.
Qdixloiita.
My dear little brother.
A dear little man.
A dear little old man.
He is a dear little rogue.
Dear little Charlotte.
224
LESSON XLIV,
Una pobre v'lejecifa.
Ella es una coqueti^a.
Mi probrecico hijo {or mi pobre
hijtto).
Un cahallejo.
Un pohrete.
Un ladronzM^^o.
Un reyezuelo.
A poor dear little old woman.
She is a dear little coquette.
My poor little son.
A miserable little horse, a nag.
A poor useless creature.
A petty young thieC
A petty king.
215. Besides the terminations mentioned, there are many
others which may be called irregular, inasmuch as they can be
affixed to certain nouns only, among them the most irregular
are those of persons ; as,
Francisco, Paco, etc.
Concepcion, Concha, etc.
Jose, Pepe, etc.
Maria, Mariquita, etc.
Francis, Frank.
(iVb equivalent in English^
Joseph, Joe.
Mary.
216. Although the diminutives proceed in general from
substantive nouns, as we see by the preceding examples, they
are also formed, in familiar style, from adjectives, participles,
gerunds, and even from adverbs ; thus we not unfrequently
say:
RevoltosiYZo es el muchacho.
Muerteci^o de frio.
Todi/o el dia.
Pan calenti/o.
ApuradiZ/o estuvo.
Vino callandi/o.
Lcjitos esta tu casa.
The boy is rather turbulent.
Half dead with cold.
The whole day over.
Warm bread (slightly warm).
He was somewhat embarrassed.
He came softly.
Your house is pretty far away.
217. Primitive words, ending of themselves in any diminu-
tive termination (such as cep^7/o, brush ; aban/co, fan ; espe/o,
looking-glass, &c.), cannot take an additional termination simi-
lar to their own, without producing a disagreeable sound, which
ought always to be avoided. Words ending in ito or ita are
excepted.
The same termination may often serve to express affection^
pity, contempt, <fec., being in this respect like the interjec-
tions, and it is consequently very difficult to classify them.
Very often their real meaning can be distinguished only
by the nature of the conversation and the intonation of the
LESSON XLIV. 225
voice. They are, nevertheless, not to be used too profusely,
because when they come too close together they render the
discourse monotonous, in consequence of the similarity existing
between them.
218. There are in Spanish other derivatives, formed more
or less at fancy, and which are not augmentatives or diminu-
tives, although they may appear to be such; these might be
called depreciatives (despreciativos), because there is always in
them something of censure, maliciousness, or mockery ; as,
Casa, casuca.
Poeta, poetastro.
Caldo, calducho.
House, miserable-looking house.
Poet, poetaster.
Broth, poor broth.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Tiene Y. lastima de aquel pobrete ? No tengo lastima de 61, por-
que es un ladronzuelo.
2. ^Le ha robado a Y. algo? No, sefior, 61 sabe muy bien que si se
atreviese a robarme yo lo mataria de un pistoletazo.
3. Y ^porqu6 no de un garrotazo, 6 un cafionazo ? ^Porqu6? No s6
porqu6, probablemente he empleado la palabra pistoletazo porque tengo
una pistola y no tengo ni garrote, ni cafion.
4. No, seiior, esa no es la razon ; j quiere Y. que yo se la diga ? Bien,
veamo3.
5. Y. no tiene valor para matar una mosca cuanto mas d un hombre ;
pero Y. queria practicar con las palabras matar j pistoletazo y esta es la
sola razon por la cual Y. iba a coraeter un homicidio.
6. Yaya, Don Francisco, Y. es poeta, hombre de ingenio y de buen
humor y quiere divertirse a costa mia, i no es verdad ? Ya lo veo i Y.
venir, Y. quiere hacerme decir que no soy poeta sino poetastro introdu-
ciendo esta palabrita mas de la leccion.
7. Solo le faltaba a Y. 11am arse Quevedo para serle parecido en todo,
hasta en el nombre. — Mil gracias por el honor de la comparacion, pero
volviendo a lo del pistoletazo.
8. i Por Dios ! D. Francisco, no sea Y. tan burlon y dejeme Y. estar
en paz. — Lo dejar6 a Y., Don Pepe, si me permite contarle un cuentecito;
y para que le parezca a Y. mas interesante, se lo contar6 a Y. introducien-
do tantos aumentativos y diminutivos como me sea posible.
9. Con esa condicion le escucho a Y. — Pues bien ; vaya de cuento :
Habla un hombrecillo en cierto lugarcillo. — Y observe Y., D. Pepito,
que para el cuentecito lo mismo hubiera dado que el hombre hubiera sido
10*
226 LESSON XLIV.
hombron y el lugar lugaron. — Adelante con el cuentecillo que me va gn»-
tando un tantico. Pues es el caso que este hombron, hombrecito, hom-
brecillo, horabrotc, hombrecico, bombrazo, hombronazo, hombracho, 6
como V. quiera llamarle. . . .
10. Yo no quiero llamarle nada, V. le ha llamado ya snficiente ; pero
al cuento, al cuento 6 se acabara el ejercicio sin que lleguemos al fin. —
Pues este hombrezuelo no sabia mas que un cuentecillo ; pero lo contaba
d todo el mundo que encontraba.
11. Pero yo no comprendo como podia hacer que sn cuento viniese &
pclo J Y. sabe que no se cuenta un cuento asi de sopeton, como se dan
los buenos dias. — Al principio, el viejote se encontraba apuradillo para
conseguirlo ; pero el picaruelo invent6 despues una estratagema por me-
dio de la cual hizo que su anecdotilla viniera d pelo siempre.
12. jOiga! ij que estratagema fu6 esa? Oigala Y. ; pero ^tes debo
advertir a V. que en su anecdota habia algo que hacia relacion d cafiona-
zos J pistol etazos.
13. I H6 ! I Ya vuelve V. i los pistoletazos ! Pues bien, como iba di-
ciendo de mi cuento, se aproximaba el buen viejecito callandito 4 cual-
quier corrillo que encontrase y poni^ndose el dedo indice sobre la boca
en ademan de imponer silencio, les preguntaba. " i Han oido Vds. un
caflonazo ? " No, sefior, era naturalmente la respuesta ; pues bien, res-
pondia mi hombre muy satisfecho. — Ahora que hablamos de canonazos
les contar6 a Vds. una anecdota . . . . y aqui contaba su cuento,
14. Yo no veo la aplicacion de su cuento de V. todavia, Sr. D. Fran-
cisco. — I C6mo I D. Pepe, ^ no ha oido V. un pistoletazo ?
EXERCISE.
1. IIow did you hke that story by Fernan Caballero which I lent
you ? Very much indeed ; it gives a very good idea of tlie manners,
customs and language of the low classes in Andalusia (Andalttcia).
2. What did that man want ? He is a poor lame man asking for a
piece of bread, or a few cents to buy some.
8. He is lame, you say ; how did that happen to him ? He says he
was at the war and received a pistol shot in the leg.
4. What does the physician give to your cousin since he has been
sick ? He has given him some medicine (medicina)^ and says he must
take broth three times a day.
5. Do you like broth ? Yes, very well ; but not such poor broth as
they make for my cousin.
6. How does that poor man make his living since he lost both his
arms? He can clo nothing in the world, and lives on what little money
he gets from his brother, who is rather embarrassed himself just now.
LESSON XLV.
227
7. Come nearer to the fire, Louisa ; it is a little cold this morning.
Thank you, I do not feel tlie cold much ; but I would be obliged to you
if you would call Fanny in to warm herself; she is half dead with cold.
8. Is Henry going to be employed by that merchant to whom you
spoke for him some time ago ? Yes, I think it is probable, and I shall be
very glad, for the poor fellow^ is a little embarrassed, and has been so
for a long time.
9. If I were in your place I would not allow that dog to howl so the
whole night over. My father will not let me speak about it to our neigh-
bor, who lives in that miserable old house next to ours ; it is his dog, and
he ought not to let it howl in such a manner.
10. Just listen to him I as if I could not go and kill it with a blud-
geon. — KiU it ! There would be no necessity for killing it ; just give
him one good blow with the bludgeon you talk of and he would let you
sleep in future.
11. Have you ever read Don Quixote? No; why? If you take the
trouble to read it you wiU find a very good anecdote of a madman (loco)
and a dog, in the first chapter of the second pai't of that justly celebra-
ted work.
12. Have you paid attention to what is said in to-day's lesson on aug-
mentatives and diminutives ? Yes, madam ; and it seems to me that the
proper use of them must make a language expressive and elegant in a
high degree {grado).
13. Is Concepcion a very common name for ladies in Spain ? There
are a great many called by that name ; the diminutive is Concha.
14. Is your mother satisfied with her new servant? Very much so.
15. Why did she let the other one go away ? She was very glad to
see her go away, because she used to steal everything that came to her
hand.
16. Is that coffee warm
minutes, if you wished.
No, sir; but I could warm it in a few
LESSON XLV.
[know
Avisar. To advise, to notify, to let one
Admirar. To admire.
Aconsejar. To counsel, to advise.
Apremiar. To urge, to compel one to do any
thing by order of court.
* Eemember that English -words italicised are not to be translated.
228
LESSON XLV.
Afectar.
Compadecer.
Convertir.
Desertar.
Empeftar.
Explicar.
Fusilar.
Guardar.
Librar,
Mentir.
Mencionar.
Permanecer.
Eelatar.
Santificar.
Suceder.
Sonar.
Volar.
{Ah bah!
iTomal
Ancbo.
Falso.
Calvo.
Faraoso.
Notorio.
Cr6dulo.
Oritico.
Formal.
Supersticioso.
Esc6ptico.
To feign, to affect.
To pity.
To convert.
To desert.
To pledge, to engage.
To explain.
To shoot.
To guard, to observe, to keep.
To free, to liberate, to deliver.
To lie.
To mention.
To remain.
To relate.
To sanctify.
To happen, to succeed.
To sound.
To fly.
Oh, pshaw 1
Indeed I
Wide, broad.
False.
Bald.
Famous.
Notorious, well known.
Credulous.
Critical.
Formal, straightforward.
Superstitious.
Skeptic, skeptical.
De todo corazon.
"With all my heart.
En su interior.
In his mind.
Ya caigo.
I see (or understand).
Bien venido.
"Welcome.
A cual mas.
"Vieing with each other.
De buena f6.
In good faith.
Esto es.
That is.
Ya lo ve V.
So .you see.
Sol.
Amor.
Sun.
Love,
Oracion.
Tierra.
Prayer.
Earth, land.
Cielo. Skj, heaven.
"Reino. Kingdom.
Fin. End, purpose.
Deudor. Debtor.
General. General.
Cuervo. Eaven, crow.
Agiiero. Omen.
Interior. Interior.
Espiritu. Spirit.
Lodo. Mud.
El padre nuestro. The Lord's Prayer.
Tren. Train.
Parroquiano. Parishioner, customer
Lector. Reader.
LESSON XLV.
Calva.
Ana.
Voluntad.
Prpfecia.
Fisonomia.
Tentacion.
Sinceridad.
Injusticia.
Ridiculez.
Compasion.
Materia.
Bolsa.
Excepcion.
Frente.
Formalidad.
229
Baldness, the bald
part.
Ann.
Will, choice.
Prophecy.
Physiognomy,
countenance.
Temptation.
Sincerity.
Injustice.
Ridicule.
Compassion.
Matter.
Faith.
Purse.
Exception.
Forehead.
Formality.
COMPOSITION.
Dios te lo premie.
Si para fines de ano no hubiere pagado,
Ic apremias {or apremiale, or le apre-
miar4s).
Si viene {or como venga) sera bien re-
cibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si asi lo haces, Dios te lo premie.
Si al salir de tu casa vieres volar Cuer-
vos, dejalos volar y mira tu donde
pones Ids pies.
Todo hombre calvo no tendra pelo ; y
si tuviere alguno no sera en la calva.
Le perdonaran todo lo que hiciere.
Le escribire a V. lo que me dijere.
Si permaneciere aquf algun tiempo se lo
avisar^.
Le escribir6 a V. lo que diga.
May God reward you for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do scr.
If he comes, he shall be well received.
Whoever says such a thing lies.
If you do so, may God reward you.
If on going out of your house you should
see crows fly, let them fly, and look
where you put your own feet.
Every bald man will be without hair ;
or if he should have any, it will not
be on the bald part.
They will forgive him every thing he
may do.
I will write to you what he may (hap-
pen to) say to me.
If I should (or should I) remain here
any time, I will let you know.
I will write to you what he may say to
me.
230
LESSON XLV.
Le perdonar^n lo que haga.
Si hubiere salido cuando V. Uegue.
Aunque hubiere llegado kntcs que re-
ciba la carta.
Aunque haya llegado ^ntes que reciba
la carta.
El general mando que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.
El general mando que todoa los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que desertaren sean fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que hubieren desertado sean fusila-
dos.
Quien lo dijere miente.
Si viniere, sera bien recibido.
Si asi lo hicieres.
They will forgive him every thing he
may do.
If he should have left when you arrive.
Although he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
Although he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
The general ordered that all those who
might (happen to) desert should be
shot.
The general ordered that all those who
might have deserted should be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who may desert {i. e. may happen to
desert) should be shot. .
The general has ordered that all those
who may have deserted be shot.
Whoever should say so will lie.
If he should come, he will be well re-
ceived.
If you should do so.
EXPLANATION.
219. The future simple of the subjunctive mood repre-
sents a contingent action as to take place some time hence ; as,
I will write to you what he may
(happen to) say to me.
They will forgive him everything he
may do in future.
If I should (or should I) remain here
any time I shall let you know.
Le escribir6 a V. lo que me dijere.
Le perdonaran todo lo que hiciere.
Si permaneciere aqui algun tiempo se
lo avisar^.
220. The present of the subjunctive may be substituted
for the foregoing tense, except when the verb is preceded by
the conditional si ; as, Ze escribire d V.lo que diga ; Leperdo-
nardn lo que haga.
221. The future compound, which is not so much used
as the simple, denotes a contingent action subordinate to a
future event ; as,
Si hubiere salido cuando V. Uegue. | If he should have left when yon
arrive.
LESSON XLV.
231
Aunque hubiere lie j ado antes que
reclba la carta.
Although he may have arrived before
he receives the letter.
222. The coaipound peesei^t of the subjunctive may be
substituted for the above tense, except when the verb is pre-
ceded by the conditional si ; as, aunque haya llegado dntes que
reciha la carta,
223. In order that the imperfect and phiperfect of the sub-
junctive, which also express a future contingent action or
event, be not misapplied, as too frequently they are, and con-
founded with the future simple and compound future of the
same mood, the following distinction must be attentively
observed :
1st. That the imperfect and pluperfect may be employed
when the actions or events expressed in the sentence are future
only in reference to some other time expressed, or merely im-
plied, in the sentence.
2d. That the future simple and compound future must be
used when the contingent action or event implied in the sen-
tence is future with regard to the action expressed by the
determining verbs ; as,
The general ordered that all those
who should (might happen to) de-
sert should be shot.
The general ordered that all those
who had (might have) deserted
should be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who desert {i. e. may happen to
desert) shall be shot.
The general has ordered that all those
who have deserted shall be shot.
El general mando que todos los que
desertaran fuesen fusilados.
El general mand6 que todos los que
hubieran desertado fuesen fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que desertaren scan fusilados.
El general ha mandado que todos los
que hubiereii desertado sean fusi-
lados.
224. The future simple and the compound future of the
subjunctive also act as determining verbs ; but they govern the
subordinate verb only in the present or the future simple of the
indicative, and in the imperative ; as.
Quien lo dijere, mienie.
Si viniere serd bien recibido.
Whoever should say so will lie.
If he should come, he shall be well
received.
232 LESSON XLV
Si asf lo hicicres. Dios tc lo premie.
Si para fines de ano no hubiere paga-
do, le apremias, or apremialcy or
le apremiards.
If you do 80, may God reward you
for it.
If at the end of the year he has not
paid you, compel him to do so.
These determining sentences of the future simple of the
subjunctive may be turned to the present indicative in certain
cases, and to the present subjunctive in others ; as,
Si viene^ or como venga, ser4 bien re-
cibido.
Quien tal diga miente.
Si asi lo hacesy Dios te lo premie, etc.
If he comes, he shall be well re-
ceived.
Whoever says so lies?.
If you do so, may God reward you
for it.
CONYERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jos6, me han dicho que es mal aguero al salir uno de su casa
ver volar cuervos ; i qu6 piensa Y. sobre ello ? Yo pienso como Don
Francisco de Quevedo.
2. ^ Y qu6 es lo que pensaba ese famoso escritor sobre esta materia ?
Oiga V. lo que 61 decia.
3. Si al salir de tu casa vieres volar cuervos, ddjalos volar, y mira tti
donde pones los pi6s.
4. I Ah ! I bah ; Quevedo era un criticon que no perdonaba nada,
pero alld en su interior quiz^ creia un poquito como todo el mundo en
los agueros ; i no cree V. asi ? i Qu6 si creia ? Por supuesto que si. Yea
Y. aqui otro de los agueros en que creia.
6. Si vas a coraprar algo, y al ir A pagar no hallares la bolsa adonde
llevabas el dinero, es aguero malisimo, y no te sucederd bien la compra.
6. I Toma I Esa es una verdad de PerogruUo, y ya veo que Y. no
cree en los agtleros pero al m6nos Y. creerd en las profecias ; j no es ver-
dad, Don Jos6 ? I O I si, sefiora, mucho, sobre todo en las de Pero-
gruUo.
7. iQu6 profecias son esas, que nunca las he oido? Sefiora no podr6
relatdrselas d Y. todas, pero le dir6 d Y. algunas si Y. lo desea.
8. Con mucho gusto, hdgame Y. el favor. Pues bien, oiga Y. ; " Si
Uoviere habrd lodos." "El que tuviere tendrd."
9. 1 Ah 1 ya caigo ; es por esto que se llama cnalquiera verdad que es
muy notoria, verdad de PerogruUo. i Yamos ! aqui viene Don Enrique,
puede ser que 61 crea en algo, porque Y. no cree en nada.
10. A los pies de Y., Dofla Anita. — Beso d Y. la mano Don Enrique.
LESSON XLV. 233
11. A las 6r(ienes de V., Don Jose. — Bien venido, Don Enrique. — Aqui
tiene V. a Dofia Anita empenada en hacerme supersticioso.
12. Y V. es tambien esc^ptico, no cree V. en snenos, en espiritus, en
fisonomias, i en qne cree Y., Don Enrique ? Yo, senorita, soy un hombre
muy credulo, creo en todo, creo hasta las mujeres.
13. Mil gracias, Don Enrique ; yo creia que la sinceridad estaba siempre
de parte de la mujer y no del hombre, pues son Yds. todos a cual raaa
falso. — Sefiorita, 6 V. nos hace una injusticia, 6 yo soy una excepcion ;
pero volviendo a lo de las creencias, confieso de buena fe que soy un poco
supersticioso. — Me alegro mucho, de ese modo me ayudara Y. a convertir
& Don Jos6 que no cree en nada.
14. Perdone Y., sefiorita, yo creo en una de las cosas que Y. ha men-
cionado, esto es, en las fisonomias. — ; Bien, bien I expliquenos Y., entonces,
su significado.
15. El que tuviere la frente ancha tendra los ojos debajo de la frente,
y vivira todos los dias de su vida. — \ For Dios ! Don Jose, hable Y. for-
malmente.
16. Pues bien, con toda formalidad. Todo hombre calvo no tendra
pelo, y si tuviere alguno no sera en la calva.
17. j Ya lo ve, Y. ! se burla de todo, y no cree en nada, es un esceptico
completo. Defiendase Y., amigo Don Jos6, 6 quiza es verdad que no
cree Y. en nada. Ent6nces le compadezco 4 Y. de todo corazon.
18. I Hombre I dejeme Y. en paz, y guarde Y. su compasion para
todas esas pobres gentes que creen, 6 afectan creer, todas esas ridiculeces ;
yo creo lo que veo ; creo lo que siento, y creo lo que mi razon me acon-
seja creer; por eso creo en el sol, en el amor, en Dios.— jYamos! ahora
va d hacernos creer que es hombre muy religioso.
19. Senor Don Jose, esta sefiorita y yo tenemos grandes deseos de
aprender el Padre nuestro en espafiol ; i lo sabe Y. ? No solamente lo se,
siuo que es una oracion que me gusta mucho.
20. ^Quiere Y. hacernos el favor de decimosla? Con mucho gusto,
helo aqui.
21. " Padre nuestro, que estas en los cielos, santificado sea tu nombre,
^enga a nos el tu reino. Hagase tu voluntad, asi en la tierra como en el
cielo. El pan nuestro de cada dia danosle hoy. Perdonanos nuestras
deudas, como nosotros perdonaraos a nuestros deudores. Y no nos dejes
caer en tentacion. Y libranos de mal^" Amen.
22. Mil gracias, Don Jos6 ; voy a aprenderlo de memoria porque me
Buena muy bien en espanol.
234 LESSON XLV.
EXERCISE.
1. At what o'clock does the sun rise at New York in the month of
September ? The sun rose here this morning at twenty-seven minutea
past five o'clock.
2. What did your teacher say to you to-day when your lessons were
finished? Nothing to me in particular; he spoke to all of us about
reading good books, as very necessary in order to acquire the love of
truth and sincerity in all our actions.
3. Here are the works of Francis de Quevedo ; have you ever read
them ? Yes, very often ; and I admire very much his profound knowl-
edge of the human heart.
4. He is also somewhat of a jester; is he not? Yes, but for a very
wise end ; he shows all the ridicule of the belief in auguries, omens — ^for
instance, the flight (puelo) of crows, &c.
5. What do you think of his prophecies? The only end of his
prophecies seem to be to divert his readers, telling them that all bald
persons will have no hair, or if they should have any, it will not be on
the bald place.
6. Do you know what the general has ordered ? He has given orders
that all the soldiers that desert shall be shot.
7. Do you pity that poor soldier who is to be shot ? I did not know
there was one to be shot ; what crime did he commit ? He deserted.
8. What will they do to that robber if they find him ? He will be shot.
9. Do you not think he deserves to be shot? There can be no doubt
of it : he who kills a man must die by the hand of man.
10. Are there still superstitious people in the world ? Yes, a very
great many ; and I must say, that, even amongst the learned, we find a
great number whose education should lead* us to have a higher opinion
of them.
11. Has that gentleman paid you yet the money he owed you such a
long time ? Not yet ; indeed I begin to fear he will never pay me.
12. If he should not pay you before he leaves the country, compel him
to do so. So I intend to do.
13. How long does your father intend to remain in Germany ? Perhaps
two or three mouths ; but should he remain longer, he will write for me
to go to him. ^
14. Welcome, Mr. Martinez 1 how long have you been in town ? Only
a few days ; and I shall return homo as soon as I hear from my brother.
15. What a fine forehead that young lady has ! I Iiave never seen
such a beautiful countenance, with the exception of that of a lady whom
I met in Spain a few years ago.
Debcria hacernoa.
LESSON XLVI<
235
LESSON XLVI.
Adivinar.
To guess.
Acordar.
To agree, to tune.
Acordarse
.
To recollect, to remember.
Colocar.
To lay, to place.
Meter.
To put, to make (noise).
Peinar.
To comb.
Picar.
To prick, to chop, to hash.
Persistir.
To persist.
Eomper.
To break.
Coger.
To take, to catch.
Esconder.
To hide, to conceal.
INTEKJI
-CTIONS.
lAyl
Ay!
jZape! Heaven preserve
jEal
Cheer up ! come,
us!
come !
j Victoria ! Victory !
I Eh I
Oh! ah!
iC6mo! How!
iHuy!
Whew!
I Anda ! Go ! go away !
I Ox!
Get you gone !
iCalle! Strange!
jSus!
Come! come!
j Chito {or chi- Hush !
I Uf {or huf ) I
Ugh!
ton)!
jHola!
Halloa!
iDiantre! The deuce!
J Tate 1
Take care !
^ . -. -. . \ Look out !
iCmdado! j Take care! [us!
iCa!
Pshaw !
1 Viva !
Hurrah !
I Dios nos libre ! Heaven preserve
jDale!
Go!
I Vamos ! Come !
I Qu6 horror !
horror !
iVuelta! Turn about {or
round) I
Finalmente.
Finally.
Llevar a cabo.
To accomplish.
Llevarse chasco.
To be disappointed.
Cabal.
Just, exact.
Fresco.
Cool, fresh.
Listo.
Ready, quick.
Restante.
Remaining, remainder.
Telegraficc
Telegraphic.
Extraordin
ario.
Extraordinary.
Dichoso.
Happy.
236
LESSON XLVI,
Aire.
Air.
Camisa.
Shirt, chemise.
Cambio.
Change.
Cuenta.
Account.
Alfiler.
Pin.
Empresa.
Enterprise.
Atlantico.
Atlantic.
Cualidad.
Quality.
Exito.
Issue.
Austria.
Austria.
Buen 6xito.
Success.
Palangana.
Wash-basin, wash-
Cable.
Cable.
bowl
Peine.
Comb.
Pnisia.
Prussia.
Presidente.
President.
Procesion.
Procession.
Euido.
Noise.
Constancia.
Constancy.
Chasco.
Disappointment.
Prueba.
Proof, trial.
Patio.
Yard, pit (theatre).
Tranquilidad.
Tranquillity.
Tratado.
Treaty, treatise.
Victoria.
Victory.
Dolor.
Pain, grief.
Gaceta.
Gazette, news-
Asombro.
Amazement
paper.
Maullido.
Mewing.
Gato.
Cat.
COMPOS
[TIOX.
I Ah ! que desgracia 1
i Ay de mi !
i Oh ! dolor !
jAh! briboni
J Ah ! que alegrla I
j Oh ! asombro I
i Ay, si le cojo !
i Oh ! ya nos ver6mos !
J Bah ! no babies de esa manera !
I Iluy ! me quem6 con el cigarrillo I
j Uf ! que calorazo !
1 Ea, h trabajar !
i Tate ! tate ! no pase V. per ahf, que
veo un hombre escondido !
vl I Zape ! ese gatazo no me deja dormir
con sua mauUidoa 1
j Toma ! toma ! cso ya lo sabia yo.
J Viva la libertad !
i Diantre de muchachos ! y qu6 ruido
mctcn I
; Ilola ! D. Francisco I dichosoa los
ojoa que lo ven a V I
Ah ! how unfortunate I
Woe is me !
Ah ! how sad !
Ha ! rascal !
Ah ! what joy !
Oh ! wonder !
Let me get hold of him 1
Oh ! I shall see you again !
Phsaw ! don't talk that way !
Whew ! I have burned myself with the
cigarette !
Oh ! how warm it is !
Come to work !
Take care ! don't go that way ; I see a
man hiding !
Heaven preserve us ! that confounded cat
will not let me sleep with its mewing !
That's all, eh ! I knew that much myselfl
Hurrah for liberty !
Did you ever hear such children ? what
a noise they make !
Halloa ! Mr. Francis ! it is good for
sore eyes to see you I
LESSON XLVI,
237
I ^M^ me sg yo ?
La cuenta esta cabal.
, /Espero no Uevarme chasco, y que Ue-
vare a cabo mi empresa.
How can I tell ?
The account is exact (correct).
I hope not to be disappointed, and that
I shall carry out my undertaking.
EXPLANATION.
225. Inter jECTioxs are words which serve to express the
different emotions and affections of the soul. There should be a
separate interjection to express each passion or emotion ; but this
not being the case, we often use the same ones to express joy,
grief, affright, astonishment, mockery, anger, &c., the significa-
tion of each interjection changing according to the voice, ges-
ture and manner of the speaker.
The exclamations that are properly called interjections in
Spanish, inasmuch as they have no other use, and because they
consist of only one word, are the following : Ah, ay, bah, ca,
ehj huy, oh, ox, sus, uf, ea, hola, ojald, tate, zape, and a few others.
Ah, ay and 6 are used indifferently to express pain, joy,
mockery, surprise, scorn, anger, or admiration ; as,
/ Ah 1 que desgracia ! Ah ! what misfortune I
/ Ay de ml !
I Oh I dolor!
/ Ah 1 bribon !
/ Ah I que alegria 1
/ Oh ! asombro !
/ Ah ! que necio !
/ Ay si le cojo !
I Oh ! ya nos veremos ! etc., etc.
Woe is me !
Ah ! how sad 1
Ha ! rascal !
Oh! what joy!
Oh! wonder!
Ah ! what a fool !
Let me get hold of him !
Oh ! I shall see you agam !
226. / Bah ! expresses displeasure, and sometimes wonder
and admiration. / H'e ! besides being used to attract the atten-
tion, is often employed in the sense of alas ! / 8us I serves
only to encourage, j Huy ! is an exclamation expressive of
pain. / Ea ! serves to encourage, and sometimes to call the at-
tention. We use J hola! to call our inferiors, and intimate
friends, and to manifest joy and surprise. / Tate ! expresses
surprise, and serves to warn any one of some danger. / Ojald I
serves to manifest ardent desire for something.
238 LESSON XLVI.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jEa! ea! muchachos, arriba! que ya es hora de levantarse.—
I Pues qu6 hora es, papa ? Ya son las seis y quiero que os vistais, laveis
y tomeis el cafe prontito, para ir a tomar el aire fresco de la manana en
la plaza de Madison.
2. i Sus ! arriba ! y el que se me presente primero listo ird k comprar-
me el Heraldo y tendra el centavo del cambio. — Helena, ponme agua
para lavarme. — No, Helena, no ayudes a Alejandro que ese ya puede ves-
tirse solo, ayuda d Carlotita y 4 Manolito.
3. Luisa, dame mis zapatos y mis medias. — Buscalos tti mismo, yo no
voy a ayudarte para que te vistas antes que yo.
4. j Cuidado ! i no veis que vais d romper esa palangana ? Es est«
Manuel que todavia no se ha puesto mas que una media y un zapato y se
quiere lavar antes que yo, que me he puesto ya la camisa, los zapatos y
el pantalon.
5. J Ay ! ay !— ^Qu6 es eso, Luisa? Me he picado con el alfiler que
estaba poniendo en mi vestido.
6. I En d6nde esta el jabon ? Qu6 me s6 yo.
7. I Carlota, me quieres dar el peine, 6 te vas d estar peinando todo el
dia ? D6jame en paz, ahora acabo de principiar.
8. Mama, mire V. que Alejandro no me deja ayudar k vestir d Manuel.
I Mama, en donde esta mi sombrero ?
9. Papa, ya estoy listo, d6me V. el dinero para comprar el Eeraldo.—^
No, no, papa ; mire V. que se ha puesto el sombrero sin peinarse.
10. i Como ! eso no, Alejandro, no se sale d la calle sin peinarse.— Papd,
ya estoy listo. — Y yo. — Y yo.
11. i Chiton I I Diantre de muchachos y que ruido meten I AquI te-
nds diez centavos, cuatro para el Heraldo y de los seis restantes uno para
cada uno, cuenta cabal, metraeis q\ Heraldo y despues os vais a la plaza y
no volvais, d lo menos en un par de horas.
12. Margarita, ahora que tenemos tranquilidad traeme lapipa, antes de
ponerme a escribir, fumare un poco y leer6 las noticias en el patio al fresco.
13. Hola ! gramles noticias I ^ Qu6 hay de nuevo ? YX Great Eastern
ha llegado, y se dice que el gran cable telegrdfico ha sido finiUmente colo-
cado, uniendo ast la Europa y la Am6rica.
' 14. I Es posible I ent6nces pronto tendr^mos noticias todos los dias de
Europa. — Asi lo espero, pero no debemos estar muy seguros de ello, por-
que ya to acordaras del chasco que llevdmos afios pasados.
15. J Ah! si, ya mo acucrdo ; en 1858, cuaudo se cclebr6 el 6xito del
cable telegrdfico con aquella grande procesion, y se vendia por la calle la
gaceta extraordinaria con el parte telegrdfico de la Reiua Victoria al
LESSON XLVI. 239
presidente de los Estados Unidos. — Espero que no nos llevemos ahora el
mismo cliasco.
16. j J La extraordinaria ! ! ; ; La gaceta extraordinaria ! I j Eh ! mucha-
cho, aqui, aqui.
17. I Cuanto vale ? Diez centavos.
18. i Victoria! Viva! Viva! ^Qu6 dice de nuevo? El cable del
Atlantico ha tenido buen exito, el primer parte recibido por el es el trata-
do de paz entre el Austria j la Prusia.
19. Esta es una prueba mas de lo que puede llevar a cabo el hombre,
si tiene constancia y persiste en una empresa. — i Cree V. que yo tambien
tendr^ buen exito en mi empresa ?
20. I Que empresa es esa ? ; Oomo ! ^no la adivina V. ? La empresa
de aprender el espafiol.
21. jAh! N"o dudo que V. hablara espafiol si persiste y tiene cons-
tancia ; puesto que con estas cualidades se ha logrado que hable el cable
del Atlantico.
EXERCISE.
1. Can you tell me what kind of weather we will have to-morrow ?
Oh, what a question ! Do you suppose that I can guess the weather we
will have before it comes ?
2r Did the pianist say he would come to tune the piano ? lie said he
would come to-morrow, but that he could not come to-day.
/ 3. Have you seen that the Atlantic telegraph cable is laid at last?
Yes-^I am glad to see that the undertaking has been so successful.
>/4. Do you know who sent the first dispatch by the cable ? I am not
sure ; but I remember that the first, at the time of the former cable, in
1858, was that sent by the President of the United States to the Queen
of England.
5. What was the reason of laying a second cable ? Ah, come now !
do you not know that the first one, having broken shortly after it had
been laid, became entu-ely useless (inutil) ?
6. Have you seen the news to-day by Atlantic telegraph ? l^o ; what
is the news ? That a treaty of peace has been signed {celebrar) between
Prussia and Austria.
7. Charles, go and find the comb, wherever you put it when you had
done with it. I have not seen it since Henry was using it ; and even if
I had, I would not tell you where it was.
8. Ah, you little rogue ! there, you have broken the wash-basin. It
is not ray fault, Henry wanted it first, and I had already commenced to
. wash myself; but he persisted and would take it from me.*
>/ 9. horror ! just look at the state his hair {pelo) is in ! Go this
Persistio en quitiirmela.
240 LESSON XLVI.
instant and get the comb and comb your hair before you dare to appear
before me.
10. Have you a pin to give me? Yes, here is a paper of pins; take
all you want and give me back the rest.
11. Did you know your lessons well this morning? Yes, very well,
and the proof is that papa allowed me to go to see the procession.
12. Wliat did you kill that poor little fly for ? Have I not told you
many times that I don't wish you to catch or kill flies ?
13. Is that bread fresh ? Yes, sir, the baker has just brought it a few
minutes ago.
14. We were to have gone to the yard to play at twelve o'clock. You
may go now ; but do not make much noise.
15. Where were you going when I met you? We were coming home
to dine.
16. Has the shoemaker- sent you his bill ? Yes, but it is not correct.
17. Has not your uncle written to you since he went away? He has
sent several telegraphic dispatches to my father on business; but he has
not written to us once {una sola vez).
18. Is there not to be a new opera to-night ? No ; but I understand
there is to be a new play (comedia) at the theatre.
19. That is nothing extraordinary ; there are new pieces very often now.
20. If Louisa were a little taller would she not be handsomer than
Jane ? She would at least be quite as handsome.
21. Would you vrish to have the window opened ? I think it would
be much cooler if it were open.
22. Would you not like me to repeat to you that story I told you the
other day ? If you had time I should be much obliged to you to tell it
to me once more.
23. Would not quietness be much better for that gentleman than so
much noise ? He could not live without noise.
24. Might you not have broken your arm or your leg when you fell
out of your carriage ? Yes, if 1 had not taken care.
25. If I had wanted money when I was in the country would you not
have brought me some ? If I could have got (conseguir) it I would.
26. Would your aunt not have been disappointed if she had not been
in time to take the three o'clock train ? She would have been terribly
disappointed, for she was going to spend the day at a friend's, about ten
miles out of town.
LESSON XLVII.
241
LESSON XLVII.
Acorapafiar
.
To accompany.
Cargar.
To load, to charge.
Ourar.
To cure, to attend (as a physician).
Dafiar.
To injure, to damage.
Deleitar.
To delight.
Incomodar.
To incommode.
Incomodarse.
To get out of temper.
Equivocar.
To mistake.
Evitar.
To avoid, to shun.
Instruir.
To instruct.
Ocupar.
To occupy.
Padecer.
To suffer.
Solicitar.
To solicit, to apply for, to urgeu
Dimes j dir6tes.
Ifs and ands.
El no se qu^
i.
An inexplicable something.
Dolor de cabeza.
Headache.
Masculino,
Masculine.
Amable.
Amiable.
Agradable.
Agreeable.
Extrangero.
Foreign, foreigner.
Interesante.
Interesting.
Moribundo.
Dying.
Valiente.
Valiant, arrant.
Femenino.
Feminine.
Acento.
Accent.
Alma. Soul.
Bolsillo.
Purse.
Comedia. Comedy.
Alitor.
Author.
Vara. Rod, yard (weo*-
Esfuerzo.
Effort, bravery.
ure).
Efecto.
Effect. [ness.
Libra. Pound.
Fastidio.
Unease, uneasi-
Manteca, or Butter.
Ciudadano.
Citizen.
Mantequilla.
Hospital.
Hospital.
Calidad. Quality.
M6todo.
Method.
Cantidad. Quantity.
Trabajo.
Labor, work.
Napoles.
Naples.
Real.
Real.
Sonido.
Sound.
Chelin.
Shilling.
11
242
LESSON XLVII.
COMPOSITION.
El porqu6 de todaa las cosas.
Los ayes del moribundo.
Los dimes y dir6tes.
El cuando.
El no se qu6.
El tener amigos no dana. V
Hay horabres de un saber extraordi-y
nario.
Un nada le incomoda.
sj La constancia y el trabajo son necesa-
rios al hombre en todas sus empresas.
«4 La America es mayor que la Europa.
La Francia es una nacion muy poblada.
El clima de Espana.
Los esfuerzos de la EspaHa.
Cuatro pesos la vara.
Dos reales la libra.
Treinta centavos la docena.
Dos veces al dia.
Cuatro pesos por vara.
La f6, la esperanza y la caridad.
El Senor De Vargas tiene tres niiios.
La Seiiora Martinez es muy prudente.
Ella me dio la mano.
Puso la mano en el bolsillo.
Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi mano.
El caballero a quien vio Y. ayer en mi
casa.
The why and the wherefore of all
things.
The groans of the dying.
The ifs and ands.
The time.
I know not what
It is hurtful to no one to have friends.
There are men of extraordinary knowl-
edge.
A mere nothing incommodes him.
Constancy and labor are necessary tc
mankind in all their enterprises (or
undertakings).
America is larger than Europe.
France is a very populous nation.
The climate of Spain,
The bravery of Spain.
Four dollars a yard.
Two reals a pound.
Thirty cents a dozen.
Twice a day.
Four dollars a yard.
Faith, hope and charity.
Mr. Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
She shook hands with me.
He put his hand in his pocket.
Many gentlemen have solicited my
hand.
The gentleman whom you saw yesterday
in my house.
EXPLANATION.
227. Use of the Article. — AU or any of the parts of
speech, and sometimes even whole sentences, may be used as
nouns, and as such admit the article, as has just been observed
in the Composition of the present lesson, in which we see exam-
ples of verbs, adverbs and interjections preceded by the article,
and treated in every respect as nouns substantive.
228. The definite aeticle is to be used before all com'
LESSON XLVII. 243
mon nouns, taken in a general sense and in the full extent of
their signification ; as,
La constancia y el trabajo son necesa- I Constancy and labor are necessary to
rios al hombre en todas sus empresas. | mankind in all undertakings.
229. The article is expressed before the names of the four
parts of the globe : before the names of empires, kingdoms,
provinces and countries ; and before the four seasons of the
year; as,
La America es mayor que la Europa. America is larger than Europe.
La Francia es una nacion muy po- France is a very populous nation.
blada.
El inviemo en el Sur es mas agradable The winter in the South is more agree-
que el verano. able than the summer.
But it is omitted before the names of kingdoms, provinces,
&c., when they are preceded by a preposition ; unless they be
personified, as has been observed in Lesson XXX. ; as.
El clima cfe Espana. I The climate of Spain.
Los esfuerzos de la Espana. \ The bravery of Spain.
Kingdoms bearing the same name as their capitals do not
admit the article ; as, NdpoUs^ Naples.
230. Nouns of measure, weight, &c., when preceded by
the indefinite article in English, as an equivalent to each, re-
quire the article ; as,
Cuatro pesos la vara. Four dollars a yard.
Dos reales la libra. Two reals a pound.
Treinta centavos la docena. Thirty cents a dozen.
Dos veces al dia. Twice a day.
If the preposition por be used, we omit the article ; as,
cuatro pesos por vara, &c.
231. The article is generally repeated before every noun
enumerated, especially if they difier in gender ; as,
La fe, la esperanza y la caridad. I Faith, hope and charity.
Los dias y las noches. | The days and nights.
232. The definite article is used before nouns indicating
rank, office, profession or titles of persons, when these are spoken
of, but not when spoken to ; as.
El General Sheridan es valiente.
El Senor De Vargas tiene tres ninos.
La Senora Martinez, es muy prudente.
General Sheridan is brave.
Mr. De Vargas has three children.
Mrs. Martinez is very prudent.
244 LESSON XLVII.
233. The definite article is used instead of the possessive ad*
jective when the possessives refer to parts of our own body ; as,
Me he cortado la mano. I I have cut my hand.
Me duele la cahcza. \ My head aches.
This applies even to parts of the body of other persons ; as,
Ella me dio la mano. She gave me her hand (or shook hands
with me).
Fuse la mano en el bolsillo. He put his hand in his pocket.
But the pronoun must be used when the personal article would
occasion ambiguity ; as,
Muchos caballeros solicitaron mi mano. j Many gentlemen solicited my hand.
234. The definite article is also employed, as in English,
before nouns taken in 2i particular or definite sense ; as,
El caballero k quien vio Y. ayer en mi I The gentleman whom you saw yester-
casa. j day in my house.
We forbear from adding many more rules which we might
give, if they were not subject to numerous exceptions, and,
especially, if we were not of opinion that practice and reading
will teach better than any rules when to employ and when
to omit the article.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Cuul de las partes del mundo es la mayor ? El Asia es la major.
2. jEs Asia nombre masculine? No, seflor, es feraenino.
8. Ent6nces, jporqu6 le pone V. el articulo masculiuo? Por evitar
el mal sonido que resultaria de poner dos des juntas.
4. I Luego, V. pone siempre el articulo masculino delante de todo
nombre feraenino que empieza por a? No, sellor; esto solo sucede en
singular, y cuando sobre dicha vocal carga el acento de la palabra.
5. ^Ila leido V. el "Si de las niflas" de Moratin? Si, sefior, lo lei
h ace muchos aflos; pero d ml me gusta mas la "Comedia nueva"del
mismo autor.
6. iQu6 tal le gusta d V. su nueva vecinita? Dicen que es may
honita. — En efocto lo es ; pero d mi no me gusta, porque anda siempre en
dimes y dir6tos, y un nada la incomoda.
7. iCudles son las virtudes del alma? La f6, la esperanza y la ca-
ridad.
8. jTiene V. alguna cosa interesante que decirme hoy? Mucbisimas
LESSO]S^XLVJI. , 245
interesantisimas 6 importantisimas para practicar y aprender el
espanol.
9. i Uf ! JO. va V. a principiar con gus adverbios, preposiciones j arti-
culos ; va Y. a decirrae, por supuesto, que estas partes de la oracion unas
veces se ponen antes las unas que las otras, j vice versa ; que las unas
gobiernan a las otras j las gobernadas gobiernan a su vez a otras, que
se acuerden 6 no eutre si. i Cre6 Y. que todo eso sera interesante para
mi con el fastidio que tengo, j el dolor de cabeza que padezco ? j Calle I
ent6nces, caballerito, Y. ha equivocado la casa.
10. I Qu6 quiere Y. decir con eso de equivocar la casa ? Quiero decir
que, en lugar de venir a la clase, debio Y. ir hoy al hospital y de alii al
teatro.
11. ^Para que ? Para que le curasen en una parte de sus dolores y en
la otra del fastidio.
12. Si ; pero, Senor Profesor, yo siempre creia que el mejor metodo de
ensefianza es aquel que "instruye deleitando." Y. tiene mil razones,
pero ha olvidado una pequena circunstancia que requiere su metodo.
13. ^Y cual es esa circunstancia? Que no puede aplicarse sino con
aquellos discipulos que se deleitan aprendiendo.
14. Y ahora volviendo al articulo. — Seiior Profesor, Y. me escusara,
pero no volvamos al articulo porque no puedo quedarme mas aqui hoy.
15. ^06mo es eso? el tierapo de la leccion no ha acabado todavia. — -
Y. tiene razon ; pero hoy es necesario que me vaya teraprano, porque he
prometido acompanar a unas sefioritas a la opera.
16. jOh! entonces es necesario no faltar a su palabra. — Sefior Pro-
fesor, buenas noches (este buen sefior me fastidia con sus explicaciones).
— Diviertase Y. mucho, Sefior Don Pepito (este amable j6ven aprender^
espafiol, para el tiempo que yo compre una casa en la Quinta Avenida,
ensefiandolo).
EXERCISE.
1. If I should come for you this evening, would you come with m©
to see the Martinez ? I would, with great pleasure, if Charlotte would
accompany us.
2. How does that lady speak French ? They say she speaks very
correctly, though with a slightly foreign accent.
3. Might he not be cured if he called in a good physician ? He is of
opinion that physicians do more injury than good to mankind.
4. Do you know any thing of the author of that play ? Yes, I have
read (or heard) all his plays ; they are very interestiug, and delighted
me exceedingly.
6. "What is death ? The separation of soul and body.
246 LESSON XLVII.
6. Can one be a citizen of the United States without having been
born (nacer) in the country ? Yes, after having resided in the United
States a certain number of years any one may become a citizen.
T. Where is that poor man going ? To the hospital ; he has broken
his leg.
8. Pardon me, I think you are mistaken ; it is rather his arm that Is
broken, for if his leg were broken he could not walk.
9. Do you remember the name of the principal city of Naples ? Yea,
the name of the principal city is that of the kingdom also.
10. Did you shake hands with that young lady ? Yes, as soon as she
saw me she came towards me and gave me her hand.
11. Is that cloth (jpaUo) sold very high? 2^ot very; it costs only
three dollars a yard.
12. How often do you take your Spanish lessons ? Twice a week.
13. Would you not learn faster if you took a lesson every other day
{un dia si y otro no) ? My teacher says I would ; but I have not time to
take lessons so often.
14. Would you like summer to return again ? No, thank you, I am
glad it is past, for I assure you I have suffered enough with the heat.
15. How sad it is on the field of battle {campo de latalla) to hear the
groans of the dying I Yes ; and, notwithstanding, men will persist ia
killing each other for a foot* of ground (terreno).
16. How is butter sold a pound? Thirty cents for one kind, and forty
cents a pound for the best.
17. Do you think it can injure any one to have friends ? No, it can
injure nobody to have friends.
18. Is not that person very amiable and agreeable? Very rarely, for
a mere nothing incommodes him.
19. Are there many learned men in that country? There have been
and there are at present men of extraordinary learning.
20. Which are the three principal virtues ? Faith, hope and charity.
21. Is Miss Cabargas married yet? Not yet, although a large number
of gentleman have solicited her hand.
22. I suppose you have all read some Spanish comedies? Several
Spanish and some French comedies, by the best dramatists.
23. Which of all the French comedies that you have read do you like
best ? Those of Moli^re.
Falmo Giterally a span).
LESSON XLVIII.
247
LESSON XLVIII,
Afirmar.
Afligir.
Adraitir.
Atreverse.
Criticar.
Condescender,
Convencer.
Declarar.
Depender.
Disponer.
Diferenciar.
Edificar.
Entretenerse.
Fabricar.
Suponer.
Nombrar.
Influir.
Ocultar.
Observar.
Obedecer.
Proporcionar.
Pretender.
Publicar.
Que) arse.
Kegularizar.
Reflexionar.
Ridiculizar.
Reformar.
Lo que s6 decir.
Sin que V. me lo diga,
Volver d las andadas.
Para mi tengo.
A trueque.
Sin embargo.
Odndidamente.
De modo.
To affirm.
To afflict.
To admit, to accept.
To dare.
To criticise.
To condescend, to consent
To convince.
To declare.
To depend.
To dispose, to arrange.
To differ.
To edifj, to build.
To amuse.
To construct, to make, to build.
To suppose.
To name, to appoint
To influence, to affect.
To conceal, to hide.
To observe.
To obey.
To proportion, to procure, to
offer, to afford.
To pretend, to lay claim to, to
aspire to, to sue for.
To publish.
To complain, to moan.
To regulate.
To reflect.
To ridicule.
To reform.
What I knoTT.
Without you telling me.
To do so again, to return to
(one's) old habits.
It is my opinion.
On condition.
Nevertheless, notwithstanding.
Candidly.
In such a manner, that, so that
248
LESSON XLVIII.
I Bravo!
I Very good ! Bravo 1
Bruto.
Brutish.
Cierto.
Certain.
A6reo.
Airy, aeriaL
Angelical.
Angelical.
Meal.
Ideal.
Interior.
Interior.
Incomplete,
Incomplete.
Imperfecto.
Imperfect.
Exterior.
Exterior.
Extrafio.
Strange.
Ignal.
Equal, the same.
Human o-
Humane.
Positivo.
Positive.
Real.
Real, royal.
Arquitecto.
Anciano.
Oiego.
Cal y canto.
Bruto.
Idiota.
Espacio.
Oomplemento.
Goce.
Mai.
Material.
Objeto.
Palacio.
Pujaro.
Enfermo,
Prisionero.
Pensamiento.
Castillos en el
aire.
Architect.
Old man.
Blind.
Stone.
Brute.
Idiot.
Space.
Complement.
Enjoyment.
Evil.
Material.
Object.
Palace.
Bird.
Sick.
Prisoner.
Thought.
Castles in the air.
Oarrera.
Desgracia.
Diferencia.
Curiosidad.
Exageracion.
Franqueza.
Juventud.
Ilusion.
Felicidad.
Risa.
Realidad.
Ruindad.
Riquezas.
Career.
vMisfortuue.
Difference.
Curiosity.
'^Exaggeration.
>iFrankness.
Youth.
Illusion.
Happiness.
Laugh, laughter.
'^Reality.
Meanness.
Riches.
AfHvino el raotivo por cl cual nos ha-
bian adulado los mismos que des-
pues nos critican, criticaban, critica-
ron, ban criticado, criticaran.
\/Leiamo8 una noticia que acababa {or
acaba) de publicarse.
COMPOSITION.
I guess the motive for which those samw
persons who bad flattered us before,
criticise, did criticise, criticised, have
criticised, will criticise us afterward.
We were reading some news just pub.
Ushed (that had just been published,
or has just been published).
LESSON XLYIIT.
249
x/Contaba la desgracia que los afligio.
No sere yo el primero que se atreva.
Aprended vosotros, los que os quejais,
quejabais, quejasteis, habeia quejado,
quejareis.
El quiere jugar.
Nosotros queremos estudiar. y
v/El hubo de condescender.
Tengo que eallar. >
EUos deben estar muy ocupados.
Quiero {or pienso) salir.
Afirmo {or declare) que saldre.
Digo que saldre.
y/ Es util estudiar las lenguas.
Conviene a los hombres instruirse.
El estudio de las lenguas es util.
La instruccion conviene a los hombre^
Conviene que yo estudie.
I/- Es util que los hombres se instruyan.
He was telling the misfortune that aflOict-
ed them.
^I shall not be the first to dare./^
Know, you who complain, vvere com-
plaining, complained, had complained,
will complain.
^ He will (is determined to) play.
We will study.
He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very busy.
I wish (or intend to) go out.
I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out.
I say that I shall go out.
It is useful to study languages.
At is man's interest to acquire knowl-
objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me comprendas.
No lograras que le castiguen.
Les mando eallar. )
vliCS mando que callasen. )
Impedir que se cometan injusticias es el L'To prevent the commission of injustice,/^'
The study of languages is useful.
Knowledge is useful to man.
It is my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.
He ordered them to be silent.
Se le ayudara si fuere necesario.
He sentido que no se convenza (con-
venciera or convenciese).
Habr4 Uamado para que le abran (abrie-
ran or abriesen) la puerta.
Creo que le convencer^ facilmente. ^
Reflexionare lo que he de hacer. v
Pense que iba a matarla. V
Pense que enviara {or enviaria) la carta. \
such is the object of laws. ^
"^I wish you to understand me.
>r You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He shall have help if it be necessary.
I was sorry he would not be convinced
(or was not convinced.)
He knocked, of course, in order that
the door may (or might) be opened.
I think I shall convince him easily.
I shall reflect on what I shall do.
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send the letter.
EXPLANATION.
235. Correspondence of the Tenses with each other.
— When one verb is connected with another by a relative, there
are many combinations in which the determining and the de-
ll*
250
LESSON XLVIII,
termined verbs may be found ; both may be in the indicative
or in the subjunctive mood, or one in the indicative and the
other in the subjunctive; but both cannot be in the infinitive
or in the imperative ; as,
I guess the motive for which those same
persons who have flattered us before^
criticise, did criticise, criticised, have
criticised, will criticise us afterward.
We were reading some news that had
(or has) just been published.
He was telling the misfortune that
afiflicted them.
I shall not be the first to dare.
Learn, you who complain, were com-
plaining, complained,had complained,
will complain.
Adivino el motivo por el cual nos ha-
bian adulado los mismos que nos
critican^ criticaban^ criticaron, han
criticado, criticardn.
Leiamos una noticia que acdbaha (or
acaha) de publicarse.
Contaha la desgracia que los afligid.
No sere yo el primero que se atreva.
Apr ended vosotros los que os quejai%
quejabais, quejasieis^ habeis quejado,
quejareis.
236. The determined verb is put in the infinitive whenever
tt has the same subject as the determining verb j as,
!l^l quiere jugar,
Nosotros queremos estudiar.
He wishes to play.
We wish to study.
This is the reason why the auxiliaries hdber de, tener que,
deber, always require the governed verb in the infinitive, be-
cause the subject, or nominative, is the same for both verbs ; as,
tel hubo de condescender.
Tengo que callar.
Ellos deben estar muy ocupados.
He had to consent.
I have to be silent.
They must be very busy.
An exception to this rule occurs when the determining verb
expresses a firm and decided affirmation ; and so we say :
Quiero {or pienso) salir. I I wish (or intend) to go out.
Afirmo (dcclaro) que saldre. \ I affirm (or declare) that I shall go out
"We must also except the verb decir, which cannot govern
another verb in the infinitive, because whenever we employ it
to announce our own actions it is not with the purpose of re*
lating them, but to manifest our resolution to execute them ; as,
Digo que saldrL | I say I shall go out.
237. When the determining verb is «6r, or any impcrson-
LESSON XLVIII.
261
Es titil estudiar las lenguas.
Conviene a los hombres instruirse.
al verb, and the governed verb has no subject, the latter is
placed in the infinitive ; as,
It is useful to study languages.
It is the interest of mankind to acquire
knowledge.
And such is the natural construction, because the true sub-
ject of this proposition is the very infinitive itself, which stands
there as a noun, an office that cannot be performed by the
other moods. The above sentences are equivalent to these :
El estudio de las lenguas es util. The study of languages is useful.
La instruccion conviene a los hombres. It is the interest of mankind to acquire
knowledge.
238. But if the determined verb also has a nominative, then
it must be placed in the subjunctive; as,
Conviene que yo estudie.
Ea util que los hombres se instniyan.
It is my interest to study.
It is useful to mankind to possess
knowledge.
Those verbs that express command, govern either of the
two forms, since we say equally well :
Les mando collar. \ I
Les mando que callasen. \ | ^^ «^^^^^^ *^^"^ *« ^^ ^^^^^*-
239. When the determining verb is in the infinitive, in
the present or future of the indicative, or in the imperative,
connected with the governed verb by a conjunction, this latter
verb is put in the subjunctive mood, ordinarily in the present
or in the future ; as.
Impedir que se comeian injusticias es el
objeto de las leyes.
Deseo que me coniprendas.
No hgrards que le castigiten.
Se le ayudard si fuere necesario.
To prevent the commission of injustice,
such is the object of the laws.
I wish you to understand me.
You will not succeed in having him
punished.
He will have help if it be necessary.
240. The preterit indefinite and compound future of the
indicative govern the determined verb in the present or imper-
fect of the subjunctive ; as.
He sentido que no se convenza {conven-
ciera or convenciese).
Habr& Ham ado para que le abran
{abrieran or abriesen) la puerta.
I was sorry he should not be (or was
not) convinced.
He knocked, of course, in order that
the door may (or might) be opened.
252 LESSON XLVIII.
241. When the determining verb is in the indicative, it gen-
erally governs the determined one in the same mood, if the
nominative is the same for both verbs ; as,
Oreo que le convencere facilmente. I I think I shall convince him easily.
Rejlexionare lo que he de hacer. | I shall reflect on what I have to do.
But if each verb has a different nominative, the second
verb may be placed in the indicative or in the subjunctive ; as,
I thought he was going to kill her.
I thought he would send me the letter.
Pense que iba k matarla.
Perwe que me enviara (or enviaria) la
carta.
Much more might be said upon this subject, did we not fear
to exceed the limits prescribed by the nature of the present
work.
CONYERSATION AND VEPwSION.
1. Dofla Luisita, ^Le gusta d Y. formar castillos en el aire ? Mncho ;
pero creo que fonno demasiados.
2. Me alegro mucho que, como d mi, le guste d Y. el mundo de las ilu-
siones, y tambien apruebo su frajiqueza de Y. en confeearlo. — Y iporqa6
lo habia de ocultar? ^Qu6 mal hay en eso?
3. No s6 si hay mal 6 no, lo que s6 decir es, que todo el mundo afecta
no formarlos y con cierta risita burlona pretenden ridiculizar a los que,
como Y. y yo, confesamos candidamente que los hacemos.
4. g Y cree Y., D. Jos6, que esas gentes vivan sin ilusiones de ninguna
especie? No, senorita, no lo creo. Dios ha dado d todo hombre, d
diferencia del bruto, un mundo ideal interior ademds del mundo positive
exterior, d excepcion de los idiotas.
5. I Cudnto me alegro de oirlo ! ; porque yo tenia tanta vergtlenza de
mis pobres castillos en el aire 1 i De modo es que Y. cree que yo no soy
sola ? De ningun raodo, todo el mnndo los forma, la diferencia solo existe
en la manera.
6. j Ah ! Don Jos6, Y. me va pareciendo un buen arquitecto de casti-
llos en el aire y uno de estos dias voy d pedirle que me muestre uno de los
muchos que habrd edificado.— Con mucho gusto, seflorita, d trueque, sin
embargo, de que Y. me admita en uno de sus palacios a6reos.
7. No, eso no, jamds podria yo poner en evidencia mis castillos ; pero
Y. dice que la diferencia solo existe en la manera de formarlos ; explique-
me Y. esto, quiza asl lograr6 reformar los mios, porque he observado que
ton incompletes ; siempre Ics fulta algo. — Pues es extraflo, scftorit/i, por«
LESSON XLVIII. 253
que yo creia que solo las cosas humanas eran imperfectas y sus ilusiones
de V. siendo
8. For supuesto, jangelicalesi j Vamos! dejeseV. de cumplimientos,
ya sabe V. que no me gustan, y respondame V. a mi pregunta si V.
gusta, porque tengo curiosidad de saber c6mo forman otros sus castillos.
—Obedezco, seilorita, y para principiar debo decir que yo me equivoqu6
cuando dije que solo se diferenciaban en la manera, porque tambien in-
fluye mucho el material.
9. I Como el material ? ; si se fabncan en el aire I j Espero que no loa
fabrique Y. de cal y canto ! — No, sefiorita, no de cal y canto ; pero se fa-
brican ; y si se fabrican, de algo se fabrican.
10. I Pero de qu6, senor, de que ? Yo formo castillos, pero no necesito
nada para hacerlos ; vuelo mas que los pajaros, mando hasta en las vo-
luntades de los otros, hago volver al tiempo en su carrera, dispongo del
espacio, de la fortuna, y hago que me obedezca basta el amor. — Eso lo
creo sin que V. me lo diga, sefiorita.
IJ.. I Dale ! no vuelva V. a las andadas, y cu^nteme V. qu6 materiales
son esos de que V. me hablaba. — V. raisma acaba de nombrar algunos.
12. I Ouales ? j C6mo ! i qu6 mas materiales quiere V. para formar un
Castillo en el aire, que poder disponer, como V. dice que puede, de las
voluntades de los otros, del tiempo, del espacio, la fortuna y basta del
amor?
13. jToma! Pero yo no poseo ninguna de esas cosas en realidad, y
sin embargo mis castillos me entretienen y divierten mucho.— Perd one
Y., sefiorita, Y. las posee y con ellas forma Y. ese bonito mundo interior,
que le proporciona d Y. los goces que no le da el exterior.
14. Y en eso tiene Y. razon, que mis ilusiones, 6 sea como Y. las llama,
mi mundo interior, me consuelan much as veces de la ruin dad del mundo
exterior. — Eso sucede d todo el mundo, de ese modo, el ciego ve, el en-
fermo goza de salud, el prisionero de libertad, el pobre de las riquezas y
el anciano de la juventud, las ilusiones hacen los males menores. En este
mundo ideal es en donde los hombres son verdaderamente iguales, y para
mi tengo que no es ilusorio, sino real, puesto que de 61 depende nuestra
feUcidad
15. I'^o crce Y. que hay alguna exageracion en lo que Y. dice? Ko,
sefiora, pero si, creo, que debemos tener buen cuidado de regularizar
nuestros pensamientos y de basar siempre nuestros castillos en el aire en
la virtud y la religion.
16. I Bravo ! bravo ! muy bien, asi me gustan a mi los castillos en el aire.
254 LESSON XLVIII.
EXERCISE.
^1. Who built the house you are hving in at present? An excellent
architect, a friend of my father.
V 2. Are you certain it was an old man that was suing for her hand ?
I cannot affirm that it was an old man.
3. What a misfortune that he will not study I It would be a real
misfortune if it were true ; I think it is not true.
x^A. Do you ever build castles in the air ? Seldom ; for, in my opinion,
real castles built of stone are to be preferred to the atrial ones you speak of.
5. What a pretty bird you have there 1 does it sing ? It sings the
whole day long.
6. Do you think our young friend is really as happy as he appears to
be ? No, there must be some exaggeration in what he says.
7. In what respect do these two authors differ from each other ? Read
the works of both, and you will observe for yourself.
8. Do th'ey both write equally well ? No, one of them arranges his
thoughts in a very strange manner, so that it is sometimes impossible to
understand his meaning* and at all times disagreeable to read him.
9. Is Peter punished now' in school as often as formerly ? As often
as ever ; but it is useless to punish him, for tliough he is good for a few
days, yet he always gets back to his old habits.
10. Does that man always say what he thinks? lam surelfiannot
say ; but it seems to me that there is in his manner of speaking a some-
thing I cannot explain that hides his real thoughts.
11. Is he liked in general by those who know him ? On the contrary,
everybody hates him and ridicules him for his meanness.
12. Have you any curiosity to see the interior of a royal palace ? If
the occasion offered (presented itself), I would like to see it ; otherwise I
am perfectly content with the interior of my own house.
13. You are wise for that; happiness is not at all times to be found in
palaces. Ah 1 I see you aret something of a philosopher.
14. How is this, sir ? your exercise is incomplete. I confess that had
I wished I might have finished it ; but you will find that, as far as it goes,
it is not imperfect.
15. That is to say that the quality does not depend on the quantity.
Precisely so ; you may complain of my not having done the whole of the
exercise, but I do not think you can criticise the part I have brought to you.
16. What sizej is the book your friend has just published ? The same
eize as the one he published before.
* Logiue quiere dedr. t Tiene V, X TamaHa.
LESSON XLIX
255
LESSON XLIX.
Acudir.
Agregar.
Afiadir.
Componer.
Contener.
Incluir.
racilitar.
Ofrecer.
To hasten (to a place), to refer.
To add.
To add.
To compose, to mend, to fix.
To contain.
To include.
To facilitate.
To offer.
Por instruldo que sea.
However learned he m
Anteriormente.
Formerly, previously.
Comparativamente.
Comparatively.
Corrientemente.
Currently, fluently.
riuidamente.
Fluently.
Suficiente.
SuflBxjient.
En general.
In general.
Generalmente.
Generally.
Considerablemente.
Considerably.
Particularmente.
Particularly, privately.
En cuanto i.
Artificial.
Anterior.
Aborrecible.
Celeste, azul celeste.
Celestial.
Calico.
Chinesco.
Creible.
Despreciable.
Familiar.
Gigantesco.
Terrestre.
Territorial.
Terroso.
Terrado, terrero.
Terrenal.
Terron.
I As to, as for.
Artificial.
Anterior, previous.
Hateful.
Celestial, sky-blue.
Celestial, heavenly.
Celestial, heavenly.
Chinese.
Credible.
Despicable.
Familiar.
Gigantic.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Territorial.
Terreous, earthy.
Terrace.
Terrestrial, earthly.
Lump (or clod) of earth.
256
LBSSON XLIX.
Ricacho.
Very rich.
Picaresco.
Roguish.
Patronimico.
Patronymic.
Propio.
Proper, own
Mudable.
Changeable.
Verbal.
Verbal.
Arenal.
Sandy (ground).
Arboleda.
Grove.
Ascenso.
Promotion.
Ascension.
Ascension.
Alvarez.
Alvarez.
Carnuza.
Bad meat.
Calvinista.
Calvinist.
Creencia.
Belief, credences
Catolicismo.
Catholicism.
Ciencia.
Science.
Diccionario.
Dictionary.
Gentualla.
Rabble.
Escobajo.
A bad broom.
Madrastra.
Step-mother.
Boticario.
Druggist, apothe-
Terminacion.
Termination.
cary.
Dicha.
Happiness.
Dominguez.
Dominguez.
Isla.
Island.
Fernandez.
Fernandez.
Educacion.
Education.
Idiotismo.
Idionu
Escoba.
Broom.
Filosofastro.
Philosophaster.
Excusa.
Excuse.
Hijastro.
Step-son.
Explicacion.
Explanation.
Herman astro.
Step-brother.
Espada.
Sword.
Hombracho.
Corpulent.
Exclamacion.
Exclamation.
Libraco.
A contemptible
Firma.
Signature.
book.
Gota.
Drop.
Pajarraco.
An ugly bird.
Figura.
Figure, appear-
Latinajo.
Dog Latin.
ance.
Manzanar.
Apple orchard.
Faccion.
Feature.
Pinar.
Pine grove.
Factura.
Invoice.
Protestante.
Protestant.
Facultad.
Faculty, power.
Padrastro.
Step-father.
Adquisicion.
Acquirement
Significado.
Signification,
Astronomia.
Astronomy.
meaning.
Afluencia, fluido2
:. Fluency.
Vinacho.
Bad wine.
Protestantismo.
Protestantism.
Ilabanero.
Ilavanese.
Madrilcflo.
Madrilenian,
Rodrfguez.
Rodriguez.
Sanchez.
Sanchez, [heart.
Amante.
Lover, sweet-
Arbol.
Tree.
Amador.
Lover.
LESSON XLIX.
257
COMPOSITION.
/l Porqu^ lee V. ese libraco ?
Porque no tengo otro ; pero V. se equi-
voca, es uu libro clasico excelente.
^Conoce V. a aquel ricacho ?
Le conozco ; pero no le trato, porque es^
iin hombracho que solo le gusta tra-
tarse con gentualla.
J'lan, no barras con ese escobajo, que
ensucia mas que limpia.
vLa came buena se vende h treinta cen-
tavos la libra ; la carnuza a veinte.
Ese estudiante suele decir latinajos,
pero no sabe Latin.
En la America del Norte hay mas pro-
testantes que catolicos.
Los boticarios en los Estados Unidos,
no solo venden medicinas, sino per-
fumeria, cigarros y otras muchas
cosas.
iVive el Senor Fernandez con su pa-
dre?
No, sefior, porque no quiere vivir con
su madrastra y hermanastros.
I Es V. madrileiio ?
No, senor, soy Habanero.
\<2Lquel filosofastro es despreciable.
Esa senorita es muy amable ; pero muy
mudable.
Why do you read that contemi)tible old
book?
Because I have no other ; but you are
mistaken, it is an excellent classic
(book).
Do you know that rich man ?
I know him ; but I have no intercourse
with him, because he is a low man,
whose taste is to associate only with
the rabble.
/John, do not sweep with that old stump
of a broom ; it dirties more than it
cleans.
Good meat sells at thirty cents a pound,
poor (bad) meat at twenty.
That student is in the habit of reciting
dog Latin, but he does not know
Latin.
There are more Protestants than Catho-
lics in North America.
In the United States the druggists sell
not only medicines, but perfumery,
cigars, and many other things.
Does Mr. Fernandez live with his
father ?
No, sir ; because he does not wish to
live with his step-mother and step-
brothers.
Are you a Madrilenian ?
No, sir, I am a Havanese.
That philosophaster is a despicable
(man).
^That young lady is very amiable, but
very changeable.
EXPLANATION.
242. Derivative Nouns. — These nouns constitute one of
the chief sources of the richness of the Spanish language ; we
have already introduced some of them in previous lessops,
when treating of augmentative and diminutive terminations.
268 LESSON XLIX.
These terminations are very numerous, both for the sub-
stantives and adjectives, and each one of them determines the
general signification of the derivative noun. As it would be
impossible to give in this place a complete list of all these
terminations, we shall endeavor to lay before the student such
of them as are to be found in most common use.
243. The terminations aco, acho^ alia and wza, denote in-
feriority; as
Libraco.
Pajarraco.
Vinac/io.
GentuaZ/a.
Carnwsa.
A contemptible old book.
An ugly bird.
Bad wine.
Rabble.
Bad meat.
The termination acho is sometimes augmentative ; (is,
Ricac^. I Very rich.
HombracAo. | A big (or corpulent) man.
244. Ajo implies meanness, and the consequent contempt
inspired by it ; as,
Escobo/o. j An old stump of a broom.
Latino/o. | Dog Latin.
245. The terminations a?, ar, ego^ ico, il, iscOy in adjectives,
commonly denote the quality of the thing ; as,
ArtificiaL
Familiar.
Gigantic
Ros:uish.
Artificial.
Familiar.
Gigantesco.
Picaresco.
Cliisico.
Chinesco.
Classic
Chinese.
246. In substantives the same terminations, aZ, ar^ and
also eda and edo, serve to form collective nouns ; as,
Arholcda. Grove.
Arena/. Sandy ground.
Manzanar. Apple orchard.
Pinar. Pine grove.
247. The terminations ante, ario, ente, ero, ista and or are
LESSON XLIX. 259
for the most part expressive of use, sect, profession, trade, or
occupation; as,
Estndiante.
Boticario.
Zapatero.
Organtsto.
Trotestante.
CaXvinista.
Pintor.
Student.
Druggist.
Shoemaker.
Organist.
Protestant
Calvinist.
Painter.
248. The termination astro signifies inferiority in a super-
lative degree ; as, Jilosof astro, a despicable philosopher ; poetas-
tro, poetaster ; and it is curious to observe that it also serves
to express the degrees of relationship existing between those
persons who more generally hate than love each other ; as,
Hermanos^ro.
Hijos^ro.
Fsidrasiro.
Ms^drastra.
Step-brother.
Step-son.
Step- father.
Step-mother.
249. £le corresponds to the same termination in English ;
as,
AborreciJ^e.
Creible.
'J
Hateful.
MudaftZe.
Credible.
Changeable.
Amiable.
250. Ismo corresponds to the English termination isni; as,
Catolicismo. I Catholicism.
Protestantismo. | Protestantism.
251. The names of nationalities are also derivatives, and
have their terminations in ero, es, eno ; as,
Habanero. I Havanese.
Frances. French, Frenchman.
Madrile;io. I Madrilenian.
252. Many patronymic, or family, names are also deriva-
tives ; for instance, Alvarez, Dorainguez, Fernandez, Rodriguez,
Sanchez, &c., were the names that were given to the sons of
the Alvaros, Domingos, Fernandos, Rodrigos, Sanchos, &c.,
changing the final o into ez.
260 LESSON XLIX.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Es neccsario para hablar una lengua aprender todas las palabras
que contieue dicha lengua ? De ningun modo, ademas, 70 no creo que
exista un horabre, por instruido que sea, que las sepa todas.
2. ^ Cuantas palabras piensa V. que sean suficientes para poder hablar
el espafiol corrienteraente ? De tres k cuatro mil palabras primitivas con
sus derivados es todo lo que se requierc, para hablar una lengua fliiida-
mente.
3. Si, pero probablemente los derivados seran en tanto 6 mayor
mimero que los primitivos. — Asi es, pero una vez que se conocen las
terminaciones, es muy facil el formarlos, aunque nunca se hayan visto an-
teriormente.
4. I Es posible ! ent6nces esto debe facilitar mucho el estudio de la
lengua. — Mucbisimo, porque, como ya hemos diebo, sabiendo los primi-
tivos no tiene mas que ailadirseles las terminaciones, segun el significado
que qui era darseles.
5. ^Quiere Y. hacerme el favor de formar algunos derivados? Si,
seflor, con mucbo gusto ; d6me V. los primitivos.
6. I Cuales son los derivados de cielo ? Celeste y celestial.
7. }, De tierra ? Terrestre, terreual, y otros.
8. g Porqu6 no me los da V. todos ? Porque me parece mejor que
aprenda V. primeraraente los de mas uso, pues sobre haber muchos, los
hay de poco uso comparativamente.
9. Cuales otros se pudieran formar de cielo y tierra ? C61ico ; terroso,
terron, y otros muchos.
10. gSe pueden formar derivados de los verbos? Si, sefior, y d estos
se les da el nombre de verbales.
11. ^Cuales se derivan del verbo amar? Amador, amante, amado,
amable.
12. ^De ascender? Ascenso, ascension.
13. ^Decreer? Creyente, creencia, creible, crMulo, crMito.
14. I De estudiar ? Estudiante, estudio ; pudiendo agregar ademds los
anraentativos y diminutivos que tambien son derivados, como estudian-
tillo, estudianton, etc.
15. I De qu6 se derivan los norabres de familia Gonzalez, Dominguez,
etc.? Se derivan de los nombres propios Gonzalo, Domingo, etc.
16. ^Cuantas palabras cree V. que contendni esta gramdtica? Mas de
tres rail palabras primitivas y un gran niimcro de derivadas.
17. ^En acabando la gramatica podre traducir y hablar sobre cual-
quiera materia que se ofrezca? Podra V. liablar de todo y seguir una
conversacion en general como V. ve que ya lo hacemos ; pero para tra-
LESSOR?- XLIX. 261
ducir J hablar de cualquiera ciencia, arte li oficio en particular, tendra V.
que acudir al dicciouario, porque es imposible introducir en una gramatica
todas las palabras necesarias para poder hacer esto.
18. Y en cuanto a los idiotismos de la lengua, ^se hallaran todos en
esta gramatica? Tampoco, puesto que se podrian componer tres 6 cuatro
volumenes como este j quiza no incluirian todos los de la lengua.
19. gComo los aprendere ent6nces? En la conversacion de personas
instruidas y en la lectura de buenos libros.
EXERCISE.
4l. Did Charles go to another regiment at the time of his promotion?
Yes, he left the 71st and went to the Tth.
2. What do you know about the names Sanchez, Dominguez, and all
those ending in ez ? That they mean son of Sancho, son of Domingo,
and are formed from those names by adding the termination you have
just mentioned.
y 8. To whom does that magnilScent pine grove belong ? To the step-
son of the gentleman who owns that pretty little house you see over
there in the distance (d lo lejos).
\^ 4. What contemptible old book is that you are reading so attentively ?
It is no contemptible old book at all {ninguno\ it is the dictionary ; I
always go to the dictionary for a word of which I do not know the
meaning.
4 5. Do you know the names of all the heavenly bodies ? No, nor you
either ; the science of astronomy is stiU. imperfect, and there are besides
many of the heavenly bodies hidden from human sight.
6. Is not that young gentleman a great lover of the sciences ? Yes,
but most particularly of the exact sciences.
7. Why do you sweep with that old stump of a broom? It is the
best I have.
4 8. Did you say he was a philosopher ? No, on the contrary, I said,
he was but a miserable philosophaster.
9. How does that rich fellow amuse himself? Beading history in
general, and that of his own country in particular.
10. I observe that you speak German very fluently now; have you
changed your book? No, I have still the same one, but I myself study
more than I did formerly.
11. Do you know whether your cousin speaks as fluently as your
sister? Mrs. Alvarez says that in familiar conversation they speak
equally fluently.
/12. Do you do any compositions ? Yes, our father requires us to do
two compositions a week on the idioms of the language.
262
LESSON L.
13. Is it not a despicable habit to offer to do things we never intend
to perform (llevar a cabo) ? 1 should say it is more than despicable, it is
even hateful.
>/ 14. Does not the study of grammar considerably facilitate the acquisi-
tion of a language ? Yes, but that alone is not sufficient : something
more is required.
15. Have you much fruit at your house in the country ? We have a
very fine orchard of apples.
16. What language was that your young friend spoke in a moment
\ago ? What he takes for Latin ; but what is not in reality any thing but
dog Latin.
^17. Would not that letter have been better if you had not added that
last word ? It appeared to me to be necessary to add that to what I had
ah'eady said, so that the meaning might be more easily understood.
LESSON L.
Amenazar.
Apoyar.
Disgustar.
Recurrir.
Sacar.
A pesar de.
Y diciendo y haciendo.
J Todo sea por Dios !
Tomar las de villadiego.
Sobre todo.
Desproporcionadisimamente.
Adverbial.
Antisocial.
Antepentiltima.
Iniitil.
Componente.
Izquierdo.
Derecho.
Pentiltima.
Superlativo.
To threaten, to menace.
To lean upon, to support.
To displease, to disgust, to grieve.
To recur, to have recourse.
To take out.
I In spite of.
And suituag the action to the
word.
I hope all will be for the best I
To take to one's heels, to make offi
Above all.
Without any proportion.
Adverbial.
Antisocial.
Antepenultimate.
Useless.
Component.
Left.
Right.
Penultimate.
Superlative.
J
LESSOK L,
263
Anteojos.
Aguardiente.
Barbilampiiio.
Correveidile.
Bienhechor.
Director.
Dolor de muelas.
Dentista.
Disgiisto.
Hazmereir.
Condiscipulo.
Pisaverde.
Pormenor.
Pnntapi^.
Parasol.
Paraguas.
Quitasol.
Socialism o.
Sacamuelas.
Pueblo.
Vicerector.
Spectacles.
Brandy.
Beardless.
Tell-tale.
Benefactor.
Director.
Toothache.
Dentist.
Disgust, grief.
Laughing-stock.
Schoolmate.
Pop, coxcomb.
Detail.
Kick.
Parasol.
Umbrella.
Parasol.
Socialism.
Tooth-drawer.
People, town.
Vice-rector.
Equivocacion.
Ganapierde.
Barberia.
La derecha.
La izquierda.
Sinrazon.
Particula.
Quijada.
Las damas.
Mistake.
A game in check-
ers.
Barber-shop.
The right hand.
The left hand.
Injustice.
Particle.
Jaw.
Draughts, check-
COMPOSITIOIT.
V No le esta bien k un anciano el ser pisa-
verde, eso es propio de barbilampinos.
^iQuien ha dado un puntapie a aquel
muchacho ?
VYo se lo he dado, porque es un corre-
veidile.
Este hombre juega muy bien a las da-
mas, sobre todo a la ganapierde.
, I Tiene V. un quitasol 6 un paraguas ?
vTengo 4mbos.
V^se joven bebe mucho aguardiente y no
. hace case de los consejos de su bien-
' heehor.
y Esa es la razon porque es el hazmereir
de todo el mundo.
V i Tiene V. buena vista ?
V^o, senor, y esta es la razon porque
USD anteojos.
Mi condiscipulo Manuel me ha ayuda-
do a hacer la coraposicion.
It is not becoming to an old man to be
a fop ; that belongs to beardless boys.
Who gave that boy a kick ?
I did, for he is a tell-tale.
This man plays very well at draughts, and
especially at ganapierde (give away).
Have you a parasol or an umbrella ?
I have both.
That young man drinks a great deal of
brandy, and pays no heed to the ad'
vice of his benefactor.
That is the reason why he is the laugh-
ing-stock of every one.
Have you good sight ?
No, sir, and that is the reason why I
/ use spectacles.
my school-fellow Emanuel has helped
, me to do my composition.
264
LESSON L,
s/ Es inutil que me cuente V. los parrae-
nores.
JSl director y el vicerector de la escuela
son hombres excelentes.
^Me disgustan las sinrazones.
El socialismo, 4 pesar de la opinion de
los que lo apoyan, es antisocial 6 im-
posible.
It is useless for you to tell me the de-
tails.
The director and sub-director of the
school are excellent men.
Unreasonableness disgusts me.
Socialism, in spite of the opinion of
those who support it, is antisocial
and impossible.
EXPLANATION.
253. Compound !N"ouns. — These are very numerous in the
Spanish language ; some are formed of two nouns, as harhilam-
pino^ beardless ; puntapU, a kick ; aguardiente, brandy ; others
are formed of a noun and a verb, as quitasol, parasol ; saoor
muelas, tooth-drawer; others of an adjective and a verb, as
pisaverde, coxcomb ; others of a noun and an adverb', as bien-
hechor, benefactor ; others of a noun and a preposition, as an-
teojos, spectacles ; others of two verbs, as ganapierde, a mode
of playing draughts ; others of two verbs and a pronoun, as
hazrnereir, laughing-stock ; three verbs, a pronoun and a con-
junction enter into the formation of correveidile, tale-bearer ;
and, finally, others are composed of a noun and some one of
the following component particles : «, ah, abs, ad, ante, anti,
circum or circun, cis, citra, co, com, con, contra, de, des, di, dis,
e, em, en, entre, equi, es or ex, extra, im, in, infra, inter, intro, o,
oh, per, por, pos, pre, preter, pro, re, retro, sa or za, se, semi,
sesqui, sin, so, sohre, son, sos, sii, sub, s^per, sus, tra, trans or
tros, ultra, and vice or vi; as.
^n^isocial.
Composicion.
Co^idiscipulo.
DiveQ.iOT.
Disgusto.
/A/iposible.
/nutil.
Pormenor.
Pospuesto.
iSiwrazon.
T'ecfirector.
Antisocial.
Composition.
School-fellow.
Director.
Displeasure.
Impossible.
Useless.
Detail.
Post-fixed.
Unreasonableness.
Sub-director.
LESSON L. 265
We call tliem component particles, because the majority of
them — although they are true Latin and Greek prepositions —
have no signification in Spanish, except as prefixes, in which
case they serve to augment, diminish, or modify the significa-
tion of the simple word in proportion to the strength or value
they have in the languages from which we have taken them.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Jose, i sabe V. el significado de las palabras penultima y ante-
peniiltima? Si, seiior, porque correspondeu alas palabras m^QnaiS) penul-
timate y antepenultimate.
2. Pues bien, ahora, que hablamos de "cafionazos," quiero decir, ahora
que hablamos de estas palabras, le contar6 a V. un cuentecito. — Muy bien,
a mi me gustan muclio los cuentos, sobre todo cuando no son largos y
vienen a pelo.
3. Pues este viene a pelo y no es largo. — ^Ent6nce3 cuenteraelo V.,
Don Pedro, escucho con la mayor atencion.
4. Pues vaya de cuento : Un cabaUero tenia un fuerte dolor de muelas,
y fu6 d un sacamuelas para que le sacase una.
5. I Hombre ! ^ y porque no fue a casa de un deutista ? Porque en
aquel pueblecito no habia dentistas y tuvo que ir a una barberia, cuyo
barbero unia a su oficio el de sacamuelas.
6. J Pobre hombre ! adelante. — Este barbero, 6 sea sacamuelas, pero
que de ningun modo era dentista, le pregunto :
7. " I Que muela le duele a Y. ? " " La penultima del lado izquierdo de
la quijada inferior."
8. " Muy bien," y diciendo y hacieudo le sac6, no la peniiltima, sino la
ultima.
9. " J Huy ! 2 que ha hecho V., hombre? yo le dije a Y. que me sacase
la penultima, y Y. me ha sacado la i^tima." — " j Calle! pues yo creia que
pemiltiraa y ultima era todo una misma cosa."
10. " No, hombre, no ; la penultima es la que esta antes de la Ultima."
— " J Diantre ! Mil perdones, y si6ntese Y. que esta vez no me equivocare."
IL " ; Yamos, y todo sea por Dios! " "jAy! ay! hombre dado a
Barrabas ! "
12. "iToma! ^y ahora porqu6 se queja? ^ no vengo de sacarle la que
estaba antes de la tiltiraa?" "Si ; pero Y. olvid6 contar la que me sac6
anteribrmente, de modo que ahora me ha sacado la antepenultimay — La
ante .... ^que? Pero no importa, dejemos estos malditos nom-
bres, que han sido causa de mi equivocacion, y sientese Y. que yo le aser
guro a Y. que." ....
12
266 LESSON L.
13. Pero el parroquiano, dandolo d todos los diablos, tom6 las de villa-
diego, y se cree que nunca mas recurrio a un sacamuelas para que le sa-
case la peniiltima inuela.
14. ^Cual es la palabra coinpuesta mas larga en espafiol? Despro-
porcionadisimamente.
15. ^De qu6 palabras se compone? De la particula componente des^
el nombre proporcion^ la terminacion superlativa sima j la termininacion
adverbial mente,
EXERCISE.
1. Do you nse spectacles because it is fashionable with some people to
wear {gastar) them, or because you cannot see without them ? Because
I cannot see without thejn.
2. My toothache is not any better yet. Then you had better go to
the dentist's and get him to extract (sacar) the tooth.
3. Do you often see the beardless youth who came to walk with us
without being asked * last evening ? Not often, nor do I care to see him
very often, he is too mucti of a fop for ray taste.
4. Which way do I turn here to go to the new hotel ? Turn to the
right ; it is not more than two streets to the hotel.
5. What did he do when you said that ? He took to his heels, and I
have neither heard of nor seen him since.
6. What were your two school-fellows doing at the door a few
minutes ago ? One of them had told the director of a mistake in the
other's exercise, and this one threatened to punish him for his trouble
(molestia) ; so, suiting the action to the word, he gave him a kick, and
called him a despicable tell-tale.
7. Has your brother bought the house yet that he intended to buy ?
No ; when he came to examine the details he found the price of th^ house
entirely out of proportion to the value.
8. Do you always take an umbrella when it rains ? I seldom use an
umbrella ; when it rains I never go out, if I can avoid it.
9. What a strange man that is ! Yes, he is the laughing-stock of
every one who knows him.
JO, What kind of wine do they give you in your hotel ? They give us
very poor wine, and so I drink very little of it ; I prefer water.
11. Do you often play at draughts (or checkers)? Very often; but I
prefer the losing game.
12. What is that man^^ business? He keeps a barber's shop in Sixth
or Seventh Avenue.
13. I want you to be good enough to translate this letter for me. Oh 1
LESSON LI.
267
it is useless to talk to me of translating any thing just now {'por ahora\
for I have a headache.
14. Where is that family living now ? In a small town in the westerq
part of the State.
LESSON LI.
Atravesar.
To traverse, to croes.
Atropellar.
To run over, to hurry one's self
too much.
Causar.
To cause.
Correr.
To riin.
Calcular.
To calculate.
Dividir.
To divide.
Exponer.
To expose.
Extrafiar.
To wonder at.
Hospedar.
To lodge and entertain.
Incendiar.
To set fire to.
Llorar.
To cry, to weep.
Manifestar.
To manifest, to show, to inform.
Ordenar.
To order, to arrange.
Oponer.
To oppose.
Proponer.
To propose.
Parar.
To stop.
Procurar.
To procure, to try.
Eesistir.
To resist.
Hivalizar.
To rival.
Simpatizar.
To sympathize.
ISTi con mucho.
Far from, far from it.
A decir verdad.
To say the truth.
En lo que respecta.
With respect to.
En march a.
Let us go, let us start.
A lo largo.
Lengthwise.
A esta parte.
Within the last.
Api^.
On foot.
En frente.
In front, opposite.
Continuamente.
Continually.
Perpendicularmen te.
Perpendicularly.
Alrededor.
Around.
268
LESSON LI.
Admirable.
Admirable.
Apto.
Apt.
Curioso.
Curious.
Desocupado.
Disengaged, unoccupied.
Directo.
Direct.
Indirecto
.
Indirect.
Figurado
.
Figurative.
Inepto.
Unsuit?able.
Gramatical.
Gramatical
Oomplemento.
Complement.
Academia.
Academy.
Cosmopolita.
Cosmopolite.
Admiracion.
Admiration, won-
Carruaje.
Carriage.
der.
Delito.
Crime./
Arquitectura.
Architecture.
Dibujo. y^
Drawing.
Construccion.
Construction.
Individuo.
Individual, mem-
Belleza.
Beauty.
ber.
Frase.
Phrase.
Literate.
Man of letters.
Distancia.
Distance.
Gozo.
Enjoyment.
Esquina.
Corner, v
Museo.
Museum.
Ldgrima.
Tear.
Paseo.
Promenade.
Laboriosidad.
Industry. ^
Panto.
Point, place.
Marcha.
March.
Edificio.
Edifice.
Metr6poli.
Metropolis.
Peligro.
Danger.
Madurez.
Ripeness, maturi-
Omnibus.
Omnibus.
ty, prudence.
Soltero. N/
Bachelor.
Permanencia.
Permanence, stay.
Publico.
Public.
Sorpresa.
Surprise.
Trascurso.
Course (of time).
Vista.
Sight, view.
Rincon.
Corner.
Orilla.
Bank, border. 1/
Tablero de da-
Checker-board.
Batalla.
Battle.
mas.
COMPOS
Remuneracion.
3ITI0N.
Remuneration.
Oriente y Occidente.
Cielo y tierra.
ViEl hombre discrete ordena siempre las
cosas con madurez.
La casa de Juan se ha incendiado.
^^n individuo inepto para escribir pucde
ser apto para otraa cosas.
v/EI reo, k quien se castiga, ha cometido
grandes dclitos.
East and West.
Heaven and earth.
The sensible man always arranges his
affairs with prudence.
They have set fire to John's house.
An individual that is unsuited for wri-
ting may be apt at other things.
The culprit that is being punished has
committed great crimes.
LESSON LI.
269
Un hombre pobre es muy diferente de
un pobre hombre.
Hemos dado un gran paseo.
Hemos dado un paseo grande.
Lo que V. dice es una cosa cierta.
Yo he observado cierta cosa.
Madrid, a 23 de Agosto de 1866 {or
Madrid, Agosto 23 de 1866, or Ma-
drid y Agosto 23 de 1866).
Yo soy quien probare que tu te equi-
vocas.
/ Dios es admirable en todas sus obras,
pues todas ellas manifiestan su poder
y su bondad {or admirable se muestra
Dios en todas sus obras ; su poder y
su bondad manifiestan todas ellas).
Solo Dios es grande, hermanos mios.
Adios, Juan ; ^ que tal ?
Hasta manana. Buenos dias.
Nueva York, ciudad de los Estados
TJnidos.
Yo mismo le vl Uorar Idgrimas de
gozo.
v' Pronto se calmaran las borrascas que
agitan la nave del Estado.
^ Ha estado V. alguna vez en el Museo
de Nueva York ?
A poor man (a man in poverty) is very
different from a poor fellow.
We have had an excellent walk.
We have taken a long walk.
What you say is certain.
I have observed a certain thing.
Madrid, August 23d, 1866.
It is I who shall prove that you are ^
mistaken.
God is wonderful in all His works, for
they all set forth his power and His
goodness.
^od only is great, my brethren.
Good morning, John ; how do you do ?
I shall see you to-morrow.
New York, a city of the United States.
^ I myself saw him shed tears of joy.
The tempests by which the ship of
State is tossed shall soon be calmed.
Have you ever been in the New York
Museum ?
EXPLANATION.
Notwithstanding we have already made some general ob-
servations relative to the place each part of speech occupies in
sentences, we deem it expedient to add here a few rules which
the learner will find of considerable utility in composition.
254. The natitkal coitstruction demands that the sub-
stantive be placed before the adjective, because the thing is
before its quality ; that the governing word precede the one
governed, for it is natural that the former should present itself
to the mind before the latter; that the subject precede the
verb ; that the verb precede the adverb by which it is modi-
fied ; that the complement come after the verb and the adverb,
if there be one ; and that when two or more things are to be
270 LESSON LI.
expressed, of which one, from its nature, comes before the
other, this order be preserved ; as,
Oriente y Occidente.
Cielo y tierra.
Norte y Sur.
Este y Oeste.
East and "West.
Heaven and earth.
North and South.
East and West.
255. FiGUEATTVE CONSTRUCTION. — The gcnius of the Span-
ish language, and, above all, use, allow us to depart in some
cases from the above rules ; thus avoiding the monotonous uni-
formity which would otherwise take place, and leaving the
writer more latitude for the construction and arrangement of
his periods. So long as sense and perspicuity do not suffer,
there is ordinarily no fixed position for any of the parts of
speech. Therefore :
1st. Personal pronouns subjects of verbs may, with a few
exceptions, be expressed or suppressed at will.
2d. When the pronoun subject is expressed, it may be
placed either before or after the verb.
3d. The same liberty exists with respect to the verb, adverb
and complement.
4th. Nevertheless, for the sake of clearness in our sentences,
it is essential that certain words which together form a whole
(such as adjectives with the substantives they qualify, or parts of
sentences, acting the part of subject or complement) should be
arranged in the same order as that in which the ideas they ex-
press are naturally presented to the mind.
6th. There are also certain words which, when placed bc^
fore certain others, have a signification very different from that
which they have when placed after them.
Of all the modem languages the Spanish is certainly the
most flexible ; indeed, in no other can the same idea be ex-
pressed with the same words in so endless a variety of con-
structions.
Let the following sentence serve as a proof of the truth of
this assertion :
Esta sefiorita era hijc. de Don Manuel I This young lady was the daughter of
S4nchez. I Mr. Emanuel Sanchez.
LESSOI?^ LI. 271
256. Words which, from their nature, cannot be separa-
ted : Esta senorita. Ue Don Manual Sanchez,
Natural Construction. Esta senorita era hija de Don Manuel Sanchez.
Isi inversion. Era esta senorita hija de Don Manuel Sanchez,
2d " Era hija esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.
Bd " Era de Don Manuel Sanchez hija esta senorita.
4:th " De Don Manuel Sanchez era hija esta senorita.
6th " Hija era esta senorita de Don Manuel Sanchez.
6tk " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez era esta senorita.
^fh " Hija de Don Manuel Sanchez esta senorita era.
8th " De Don Manuel Sanchez hija era esta senorita.
257. The natural construction is, of course, the most gram-
matical, but the best writers generally give preference to the
figurative, as being more easy and elegant, and as giving at
the same time more freedom to imagination and genius, and
finally, as being better suited to express the grand emotions of
the souL
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. jOh! amigo mio, Y. por Nueva York! jCuanto lo celebro! Si,
seiior, aqui me tiene V., Don Fernando, no he podido resistir la tentacion
de venir a ver la America.
2. j Me alegro infinito ! i Pero porqu^ no se vino Y. a hospedar a mi
casa ? En primer lugar, porque llegu6 anoche muy tarde ; y en segundo,
porque a los solteros nos gusta la libertad y la vida del hotel.
3. Bien, no me opongo, a condicion de que vendra Y. a pasar con
nosotros algunos dias. — Lo har6 asi con mucho gusto, ademas, Don
Fernando, que, como no se hablar ingles y esta ciudad es tan grande,
tengo miedo de perderme si salgo solo, y quisiera que, durante mi per-
manencia en ella, tuviese Y. la bondad de ser mi cicerone, de modo es que
me propongo, pasar la mayor parte del tiempo en su compafiia.
4. En eso me hara Y. mucho placer, ademas de que yo gozard tanto
como Y. con la sorpresa y adrairacion que le causaran a Y. las vistas de
esta metr6poli. gHa estado Y. jamas en L6udres 6 en Paris? No, se-
fior, jamas he sal; do de EspafSa hasta ahora.
5. I Cuando qiiiere Y. que principiemos nuestros paseos ? Cuando Y.
guste ; ahora mismo si esta Y. desocupado, porque, a decLr verdad, tengo
una gran curiosidad.
6. I Quiere Y. que vayamos a pi6 6 en coche ? A pie, si Y. gusta ;
me parece que podr^mos ver mas c6modamente ; pero toraar^mos un
coche cuando hay a que salir de la ciudad.
272 LESSON LI.
7. Pues en marcha, vcnga el brazo. — Yo temo que voy a molestar a V^
Don Fernando, porque soy muy curioso, como dicen los franceses, soy un
Jidneur^ y me llaraan la atencion hasta las cosas mas peqiiefias.
8. Entonces siuipatizaremos, porque a mi me gusta observarlo y criti-
oarlo todo. — i Qu6 calle es esta en que estamos ahora ? Esta es la Cuarta
Avenida, y esa que la atraviesa es la calle Veinte y tres.
9. ^Como es eso? Las calles en Nueva York estan divididas en
avenidas, que son las que atraviesan la ciudad a lo largo, y en calles, que
la atraviesan de occidente a oriente, cortando las avenidas en 4ngulos
rectos y formando toda la ciudad como un tablero de damas, de modo
que sabiendo el numero de la calle 6 avenida y el de la casa a donde se
va, puede calcularse facilmente la distancia.
10. Y este edificio de arquitectura tan curiosa de la esquina, iqu6 es?
Esta es la nucva acaderiiia de dibujo, donde se exponen al ptiblico moy
buenas pinturas.
11. ^Hay aqui tan buenas pinturas como en el musbo de Madrid? No,
ni con mucho ; este pais es aun nuevo, y aunque puedan hacerlo en otras
cosas, todavia no pueden rivaJizar en lo que respecta a las bellas artes
con Europa.
12. ; Ilombre, qu6 herraosa plaza ! Esta es la plaza de Madison y todos
estos bellos edificios que V. ve d su alrededor, y la plaza misma, han side
hechos de veinte aflos a esta parte.
13. g Qu6 edificio es aquel de enfrente que es tan grande como nn pala-
cio ? Ese es el hotel de la Quinta Avenida, y en efecto V. tiene razon en
compararlo a un palacio, porque los hoteles son en realidad los palacios de
los Estados Unidos, y se dice que son los mejores del mundo.
14. I Cuidado ! hombre, por poco se deja V. atropellar por el 6mnibus.
— j Caspita ! j qu6 mujer tan hermosa !
15. Si ; pero no debe V. pararse a adrairar las bellezas, en medio de
Broadway en su punto de reunion con la Quinta Avenida, porque corre Y.
peligro de ser atropellado por los carruiges de todas especies que conti-
nuamcnte lo atraviesan.
16. Don Fernando, i son todas las sefloras en Nueva York tan hermo-
sas como esa que acaba de pasar ? No s6, porque yo solo mir6 d6nde
ponia los pi6s, procurando escapar al mismo tiempo de los carrutyes;
pero si podr6 decirle a Y. que mujercs mas hermosas que las que he visto
yo en Nueva York no creo que se encuentren en ninguna parte del
mundo.
17. jOiga Y. ! ^no hablan espafiol csos que van delante de nosotrosi
Eso no debe Y. extrafiarlo ; esta es una ciudad cosmopolita ; en ella hay
gentes do todas las naciones y Y. oird en el trascurso de poco tiempo
hablar aleman, espafiol, frances y otras muchas lenguas.
LESSON LI. 273
EXERCISE.
1. What do you understand by the complement of a verb? It is a
phrase or a part of a phrase that serves to complete the idea expressed
by the verb.
2. Can you tell me what a cosmopolitan jg ? A cosmopolitan is one
who is not a stranger in any country, a citizen of the world.
3. Where does that gentleman live ? In Fifth Avenue, on the corner
of Twenty-second Street.
4. How long has your uncle been a member of the Royal Academy
of Madrid ? He is not a member of the Royal Academy of Madrid ; but
he has been a member of the Academy of Sciences for the last ten years.
5. Take that book from Charles and give it to Peter. I will give him
some other book, because if I took that one from Charles he would cry.
6. Is your friend a married man ? No, sir, he is a bachelor.
7. Have you ever seen Da Vinci's celebrated painting of " The Last
Supper" ?* No; but I have seen the engraving of that painting, made by
Morghen, and it is a truth admitted by every one, that, notwithstanding
the absence of coloring, that engraving is a happy expression of the
original.
8. How long does it take to go from here to the Central Park ? But
a short time ; the distance is not very great.
9. Could you run there in as short a time as one could go in a car-
riage ? I do not doubt that I could, if I started from the same place and
ut the same time as the carriage.
10. How are the several States of the Union divided ? Into Northern,
Southern, Eastern, and Western.
11. Is that not the tallest man you have ever seen? Far from it; I
have seen several much taller.
12. Have they been able to fill that oflBce (or position) yet ? I beheve
not; I understand that one of our friends was about to apply for it {pre-
tenderlo\ but his father was opposed to his doing so, and so he would not
persist.
13. How far did you go before you found him? I walked about half
an hour by the river side, inquiring of every one I met whether he had
seen a young man on horseback ; and at last an old man told me he had
seen him cross the river, nearly opposite the new building they are put-
ting up (erecting), at a short distance from the entrance to the public
promenade.
14. Are there any fine public walks in the metropolis ? About seven
or eight beautiful ones, the most of which have been made within the
last five years. . _
•' , * La cena.
274
LESSON LII.
LESSON LII.
Aconsejar.
To counsel, to advise.
Aprovechar.
To profit, to embrace (profit by).
Consistir.
To consist.
Oolorir.
To color (paintings).
Citar.
To quote, to cite.
Costar.
To cost.
Comimicar.
To communicate.
Deraostrar.
To demonstrate, to point out.
Deteriorar.
To deteriorate.
Expresar.
To express.
Freir.
To fry.
(ory
Grabar.
To engrave,
to fix (in the mem-
Tomarse (el trabajo).
To take the trouble.
Prender.
To take up,
to arrest.
Perfeccionar.
To perfect.
Merecer.
To merit, to deserve.
Eeunir.
To gather,
unite.
to assemble, to re-
Eemunerar.
To remunerate.
Visitar.
To visit, to seai-ch.
Por ejemplo.
For instance
Que yo sepa.
For all I know.
List of the Irregular Past Participles of all the Verhs already introduced.
Abierto. Opened.
Frito.
Fried.
Bendito. Blessed.
Hecho.
Done.
Contradicho. Contradicted.
Impuesto.
Imposed.
Oonvicto. Convicted.
Muerto.
Died.
Compuesto. Composed.
Manifiesto.
Manifested.
Dicho. Said, told.
Oculto.
Ilidden, con-
Devuelto. Given back, re-
cealed.
turned.
Opuesto.
Opposed.
Dispuesto. Disposed.
Preso.
Taken, arrested.
Escrito. Written.
Puesto.
Placed, put
Electo. Elected.
Provisto.
Provided.
Expreso. Expressed.
Roto.
Broken.
Expuesto. Exposed.
Satisfecho.
Satisfied.
Visto. Seen.
Vuelto.
Returned.
LESSON LII.
275
Amplio.
Ample.
Actual.
Present.
Antiguo.
Ancient, old.
Contemporaneo.
Contemporary.
Enemistado
.
At variance, on bad terms.
Dramatico.
Dramatic.
Moderno.
Modern.
Honroso.
Honorable.
Politico.
Political.
Coofnero.
Cook.
Amenidad.
Agreeableness,
Capitan.
Captain.
amenity.
Acierto.
Success.
Biblioteca.
Library.
Oolorido.
Coloring.
Cena.
Supper.
Grabado.
Engraving.
Comedia.
Comedy, play.
Fresco.
Cool, refreshing
Costumbre.
Custom, habit.
air.
Erudicion.
Erudition.
Empleo.
Employment.
Fuente.
Fountain, source.
Drama.
Drama.
Existencia.
Existence.
Estilo.
Style.
Elegancia.
Elegance.
J6ven.
Youth.
Instruccion.
Instruction, learn-
Mercader.
Dealer.
ing.
Paisano.
Countryman.
Ignorancia.
Ignorance.
Hecho.
Action, fact.
Mencion.
Mention.
Siglo.
Century.
Literatura.
Literature.
Verso.
Verse.
Mediania.
Moderation, me-
Soldado.
Soldier.
diocrity.
Prosa.
Prose.
Novela.
Novel.
Pohtica.
Politics.
Tragedia.
Tragedy.
Vasija.
Vase, vessel.
COMPOJ
3ITI0N.
\iEst4 enemistado con su priino.
Colocado en vasijas.
Ha cantado una cancion espaiiola.
Los caballos que ban comprado los
mercaderes no son buenos.
V Los caballos que fueron coraprados per
los mercaderes son buenos.
^^Estan {or quodan) demostradas estas
verdades.
He is on bad terms with his cousin.
Placed in vases (or vessels).
He has sung a Spanish song.
The horses the dealers have bought are
not good.
The horses that were bought by the
dealers are good.
These truths are (or remain) demon-
strated.
276
LESSON HI.
\J La cocinera habia frito (or freido) el
pescado.
Han prendido (or preso) al culpable.
No s6 si babran ya proveido (or pro-
visto) el empleo.
Has roto el va30.
V ;Ha visto V. un caballo muerto ?
No, pero he visto un caballo matado.
i Qui6n ha muerto 4 ese caballo ?
Un paisano le ha muerto.
^ El capitan fue muerto por sus soldados.
El se ha matado.
El se ha muerto.
\^8e es un joven muy leido, muy apro-
vechado y muy callado.
J Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci est&
felizmente expresada en el grabado
de Morghen, no obstante que le falta
el colorido de la pintura.
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hecho por
da Vinci, est4 mal colorido y deterio-
rado, ha sido grabado con acierto por
Morghen.
The cook had fried the fish.
They have arrested the ofifender.
I do not know whether they have al-
ready provided (a person to fill) the
oflBce.
You have broken the glass.
Have you seen a dead horse ?
No, but I have seen a h^rse with a sore
back.
Who killed that horse ?
A countryman killed it.
The captain was killed by his soldiers.
He killed himself.
He died.
That young man is well read, makes
the most of his opportunities, and
talks little.
It is a fact that Da Vinci's " Last Sup-
per " is happily expressed in Morg-
hen's engraving, notwithstanding the
latter lacks the coloring of the paint-
ing.
Although the fresco of the " Last Sup*
per," made by Da Vinci, is badly
colored, and deteriorated, it has been
engraved with success by Morghen.
EXPLANATION.
258. Past Participles. — Some past participles retain tbe
regimen of their verbs ; as,
Enemistado con su primo. | On bad terms with his cousin.
259. The past participle must agree in gender and number
with the subject or determining verb, except when that de-
termining verb is haber ; in which case the past participle is
indeclinable, whatever be the gender and number of the sub-
ject; as,
Ha cantado una cancion.
Los caballos que ban comprado ]os
mercadercs.
He has sung a song.
Tlie horses that the dealers
bought.
have
But the past participle, if it comes after the auxiliaries ser,
LESSON LII.
277
BStar^ quedar^ or any other, except haber^ agrees with the subject
in gender and number ; as,
Los caballos que fueron comprados
por los mcrcaderes.
Estaii {or quedan) demostrados estas
verdades.
The horses that were bought by the
dealers.
These truths are (or remain) deraon-
strated.
260. Some verbs have two past participles, one regular and
the other irregular. These are used very differently, since the
irregular one, being a true noun, is employed in an absolute
sense only, and never signifies motion, whether in the active
or in the passive form. For this reason the latter may be
accompanied by the verbs ser^ estar^ quedar, and others, but
never by the auxiliary haher ; inasmuch as it would be im-
proper to say : huho convictOj he coniracto, instead of, hubo
converirndo, he contraido.
261. The irregular participles frito, fried; preso, taken
prisoner; provisto, provided, and roto, broken, are the only
ones that can be used with the verb haber, to form the com-
pound tenses ; as.
La cocinera habia friio (or freido)
el pescado.
Han prendido (or preso) al culpable.
No se si habran ya proveido {or pro-
visto) el empleo.
The cook had fried the fish.
They have taken (or arrested) the
offender.
I do not know whether they have
already provided (a person to fill)
the office.
You have broken the glass.
Has roto el vaso {sounds better than
has rompido el vaso).
262. The verb matar, in the sense of to take away life, has
the extraordinary irregularity of appropriating for its past par-
ticiple that of the verb morir ; the participle matado being
used to express wounds or sores in animals, resulting from the
rubbing of the harness, or from cruel treatment; as,
Un caballo matado.
Un caballo muerto.
Un ptLisano le ha muerto.
El capitan fue muerto por sus soldados.
A horse with a sore back.
A dead horse.
A countryman killed him.
The captain was killed by his soldiers.
But in speaking of a person that has committed suicide, we
must say :
Se ha matado (and not Se \x^muerLo). \ He has killed himself.
278 LESSON LII.
263. Some past or passive participles take an active signifi-
cation, but only referring to persons ; as,
Un joven leido, aprovechado, ccUloflo. \ A well read, thrifty and silent youth.
264. Past participles may sometimes take the place of
substantives, and the difference can be known only by the ante-
cedents and subsequents, as in this sentence :
Es un hecho que la Cena de da Vinci
esta felizmente expresada en el
grahado de Morghen, no obstante
que le falta el cohrido de la pin-
tura.
It is a fact, that " The Last Supper"
by Da Vinci is happily expressed
in the engraving of Morghen, not-
withstanding the latter lacks the
coloring of the painting.
Where the words hecho, grahado and colorido, are substan-
tives. The same words appear as participles in the following
phrases :
Aunque el fresco de la Cena, hccho
por da Vinci, esta mal cohrido y
deteriorado, ha sido grahado con
acierto por Morghen.
Although the fresco of "The Last
Supper," made by Da Vinci, is
badly colored and deteriorated, it
has been engraved with success by
Morghen.
265. Other grammarians add one more tense in the infini-
tive mood ; as,
Haber de amar. I To have to love.
Habiendo de amar. | Having to love.
But such a classification is no longer essential, nor even correct.
In early Spanish literature that form frequently occurs, per-
forming the office now almost exclusively filled by the regular
terminations of the tenses, and chiefly those of the future indic-
ative and the imperfect of the subjunctive.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Qu6 le gusta k Y. mas, la conversacion 6 la lectnra ? Ambas cosas
me gustan mucho.
2. I Qu6 g6nero de lectura le giista u V. mas ? La historia, la come-
dia, y la novela.
3. I Prefiere V. la prosn al verso ? No, sefior, la poesia me gasta
mas ; pero ha do ser muy buena, porque en poesia no me gusta la rae-
diania.
4. Que autvires, cu la literatura modema, me riConseja V. que lea
LESSON LII. 279
para perfeccionarme en el espafioL— En historia j politica lea V. a La-
ftiente, j a Minano.
5. I Y para la comedia ? A Moratin, Breton de los Herreros y Don
Ventura De la Vega.
6. I No tienen Yds. otros ? Si, sefior ; pero yo le cito a V. solamente
los mejores y solamente a los contemporaneos.
7. gY poetas? Zorrilla, Espronceda, Hai'tzenbuscli, y otros mu-
chos.
8. I Tienen Yds. algun buen critico contemporaneo por el estilo del
antiguo Quevedo ? Yo creo que no pueden encontrarse dos Quevedos ;
pero, sin embargo, tenemos criticos de costumbres muy buenos, tales como
Larra (Figaro), Don Ramon de Mesonero Romanos, Pelegrin, y otros.
9. I Tienen Yds. buenos autores para la tragedia y el drama ? Si,
sefior, muy buenos, por ejemplo, Martinez de la Rosa, Garcia Gutierrez,
Gil y Zarate, etc., etc.
10. Yo no sabia que tuviesen Yds. tantos autores buenos en la litera-
tura actual. — Yo pudiera citarle a Y. otros muchos ; pero si Y. reune
las obras de los catorce mencionados lograra Y. tener una pequefiita
libreria de literatura moderna, que le ensefiara 4 Y. mas espafiol que
todas las gramaticas y m6todos que se ban compuesto para ensefiar esta
lengua hasta el dia, y que le remuneraran a Y. ampliamente por el tra-
bajo que le ha costado el aprenderla, con el placer y la instruccion que
le comunicaran.
11. jEs posible ! Yo habia oido decir, y asi lo habia Uegado a creer
yo mismo, que Espafia no poseia nada que mereciese mencion en su litera-
tura moderna, y a decir verdad, los linicos libros buenos que creia que
Yds. poseian eran el Don Quijote de Cervantes y las obras dramaticas de
Calderon de la Barca. — Asi lo he oido yo decir tambien, y en verdad
que es una cosa que no puedo coraprender, esa general ignorancia de la
existencia de una literatura espafiola contemporanea, que ha producido
mas y mejores obras que las que se han producido en algun os siglos no
solamente en Espafia sino en otras naciones.
12. gSe conocen en Espafia nuestros autores ingleses contemporaneos?
Se conocen mucho mas de lo que aqui son conocidos los espanoles ; la
prueba es que la mayor parte estan traducidos al castellano, y Yds. no
tienen ningima traduccion, que yo sepa, de todos esos autores que acabo
de citarle a Y.
13. Probablemente consiste en que los Americanos e Ingleses no apren-
den mucho el espafiol. — Entre los Americanos debo hacer tres honrosas
excepciones, que son : Washington Irving, Prestcott, y Ticknor. Estos
distinguidos escritores no solo aprendieron el espafiol, sino que viajaron
en Espafia, visitaron nuestras mejores biblioteoas y quiza adquirieron en
280 LESSON Lll.
aquellas fuentes mucho del saber, la erudicion, el gusto y la elegancia en
el decir que comunican a sus obras tanto interns y amenidad.
EXERCISE.
1. Oiiglit we not to make the most of (profit by) every occasion that
offers for acquiring knowledge ? That is the only way to arrive at the
possession of knowledge.
2. Tell the cook I do not wish that fish to be fried. It is too late to
tell her so ; she has already fried it.
3. Has that work been translated into Spanish ? Not that I know ;
but it was translated with success into French, by M. de I'Orme, a few
years ago.
4. Is not that gentleman to whom you introduced me a short time
since a dramatist? He is, and his plays might serve as a model of ele-
gance for many dramatists of higher pretensions (pretensiones) than he.
5. Have they found out yet who set fire to your uncle's house ? Yes;
and the offender has been arrested and convicted of the crime.
6. Would you be good enough to lend me that novel of which you
read a chapter to me the day before yesterday ? I would with great
pleasure if it were mine; but it belongs to Alexander; and, as we are on
bad terms at present, I should not like to ask him for any favors.
7. Would that painting be deteriorated* by being exposed to the heat
of the sun (sol) ? Certainly; and the heat of a strong fire would produce
the same effect upon it.
8. Did your friend, the captain, return with his regiment from the
war ? No ; he was killed in the first battle that took place after his
arrival at the seat {teatro) of war.
9. I saw no mention made of his death in the newspapers. No ; I
believe his name did not appear in the list {liata) of the killed ; but the
sad news was communicated to his brother by an officer of the same
regiment.
10. Do you like to walk in the garden in the morning before breakfast?
I generally go to the garden every morning and evening to read and
emoke in the cool air.
11. I wish you had bought that work on English literature. So do I;
it would have been very useful to Louisa, who is so desirous of becoming
I)erfect in that language.
12. Did your father think Peter merited the remuneration he received?
I do not know whether he did or not ; but, at all events, Peter must hav«
merited some remuneration, or else ho would have got none.
Deteriorar.
LESSON LIII.
281
13. Are you going to have voiir name engraved on your watch? I
shall only have my initials (inicial) engraved on it.
14. What kind of literature does your aunt hke best ? Ha ! you ask
me more than I can tell you ; I really cannot say whether she has any
taste in the matter ; for the fact is, never having taken her for a woman
of much erudition, I have not taken the trouble to ask her.
LESSON LIII
Agradar.
To please.
Aguantar.
To bear with, to put up with, to
suffer.
Alcanzar.
To reach, to overtake, to catch.
Ahmentar.
To feed.
Armar.
To arm.
Bajar.
To go (or come) down.
Corretear.
To run about.
Conceder.
To concede, to grant.
Distar.
To be distant.
Descomponer.
To decompose, to put out of
order.
Determinar.
To determine, to induce.
Echar.
To throw, to put (in).
Exceder.
To exceed.
Hinchar.
To swell.
Nadar.
To swim.
Prohibir.
To prohibit.
Quitar.
To take off, to take away.
Contrario.
Contrary.
Descompuesto.
Decomposed, out of order.
Dotado.
Endowed, gifted.
Excelente.
Excellent.
Indigno.
Unworthy.
Improviso.
Improvised, unexpected.
Terrible.
Terrible.
Antojo. Desire, longing,
Alabanza. Praise.
whim.
Apariencia. Appearance.
Alcance. Eeach.
Estocada. Thrust.
282
LESSON LIII.
Consejo.
Counsel.
Busca.
Search.
Discurso.
Speech, discourse.
Comida.
Dinner.
GatiUo.
Pincers (dentist's).
Custodia.
Keeping,
Juicio.
Judgment, trial.
Edad.
Age.
Juramento.
Oath, affidavit.
Ilermosura.
Beauty.
Mar.
Sea.
Obligacion.
Duty.
Navio.
Ship.
Vela.
Sail, candle.
Piso.
Floor, story.
Travesura.
Trick, pertness.
Tiro.
Shot.
Corrida de toros. Bull-fight.
Precopto.
Precept.
Oposicion.
Opposition.
Torero.
Bull-fighter.
Toro.
Bull.
Tribunal.
Tribunal, court.
COMPOS
5ITI0xV.
Corrcr por las calles.
Hablo de {or sobre) ese negocio.
^ Qu6 esta V. haciendo ?
Estaba para decirselo a V.
No alcanzo a comprenderlo.
«/Hace las cosas a su antojo.
Xba en busca de un amigo.
Me opuse a ello.
^-A lo largo del rio.
^Venga V. conmfgo.
»^^o s6 qu6 determinar.
De ningun mode.
Esta comiendo.
Entrd por la ventana.
Delante de mi ventana.
Ante el juez.
Antes de ahora.
v/ Tales acciones son indignas de un
ballero.
•■ Pareeia fuera de sf.
/--Excede k toda alabanza.
C Sin duda alguna.
De dia.
Uno & uno.
y i Per d6nde Ic vino a V. ?
Luego.
Per mar.
A la mano.
To run about the streets.
He spoke about that affair.
What are you about ?
I was about to tell it to you.
It is above my comprehension.
/\~B.e does things after his own fancy.
f I was in search of a friend,
^-*' I set my face against it.
By the river side.
Come along with me.
I am at a loss how to act.
Not at all.
He is at dinner.
a He came in by the window.
Before my window.
Before the judge.
Before now.
Such actions are beneath a gentleman
He appeared to be beside himsel£
/ "It is beyond all praise.
(_, Beyond all doubt.
By day.
One by one.
How did you come by It f ^^
By and by. — —
By sea.
At hand.
LESSON LIII,
283
-Eclielo V. en tierra.
En cuanto a mi.
Digaselo V. de mi parte.
A eonsequencia de eso.
De acuerdo con.
^Tenia esperanza de que serviria.
Bajar al jardin.
Todos nosotros.
Le pido a V.
I Cuanto dista ?
De improviso.
Quitese V. el sombreo.
Se la llevo.
Le deje ir.
Por ese motivo.
Adelante.
Sobre mi palabra.
Al contrario.
No se tratan.
Les impuso esa obligacion.
Alimentarse de esperanzas.
Venga V. el doce de Mayo.
Al {or del) otro lado.
Se acabo.
Vuelva V. 4 leerlo.
De miedo.
Fuera de peligro.
Fuera de casa.
Est4 sin dinero.
Descompuesto.
Perdio el juicio.
Por curiosidad.
Estar de mal humor.
Pasare a su casa de V.
Pasamos por Francia.
Le atraveso de parte 4 parte.
Por el.
Por medio de el.
De dia en dia.
Segun las apariencias.
Eso esta aun por venir.
Diez contra uno.
Hasta boy.
El navio esta a la velx
Throw it down.
As for me.
Tell him that from me.
In consequence of that.
In accordance with.
I was in hopes that it would do.
To go down to the garden.
([All of us.
I beg of you.
How far is it ?
Off-hand.
Take off your hat.
He carried her off.
I let him off.
On that account.
Go on.
On my word.
On the contrary.
They are not on good terms.
He imposed that duty upon them.
To live on hope.
Come on the 12th of May.
Over the way, on the other side.
It is all over.
Read it over again.
From fear, for fear.
Out of danger.
Out of doors.
He is out of money.
Out of order.
She is out of her mind.
Out of curiosity.
To be in bad humor.
I wiU go round to your house.
"We passed through France.
He ran him through.
Through {i. e., on account of) him.
Through {i. e., by means of) him.
From day to day.
By all appearances.
That is yet to come.
Ten to one.
To this day.
The ship is under sail.
284
LESSON LIII.
Es men or de edad.
Bajo de juramento.
Placia all4.
i Estan levantados ?
Al segundo piso.
Que suban la comida.
Le pusieron en custodia.
Eincharse de soberbia.
No la puedo aguantar.
Armese V. de paciencia.
Su hermosura me sorprendio.
No la conozco.
Dotado de virtudes.
Me agrado su discurso.
A tiro de pistola.
A mi alcance.
No hay nadie en casa.
Asomado & una ventana.
He is under age.
Under oath.
Up that way.
Are they up ?
Up two flights of stairs.
Let them bring up the dinner.
He was taken into custody.
To be pufifed up with pride,
I cannot put up with her.
Arm yourself with patience.
I was struck with her beauty.
I am not acquainted with her.
Endowed with virtues.
I was pleased with his discourae.
Within pistol-shot.
With my reach.
There is nobody within.
I At a window.
EXPLANATION.
266. Idioms are certain peculiar modes of expression which
cannot be translated literally into another language. We have
already introduced some Spanish as well as English idioms ;
but they are very numerous in all languages, and it would be
as unnecessary to give within the compass of a grammar all
those peculiar to the Spanish language, as it would be to intro-
duce all its words. The learner will find them in the several
dictionaries, and principally in the works of good writers.
However, we have introduced in the "Composition" of this
lesson as many as the limits of this book would allow ; giving
examples of phrases in which the English preposition differs in
meaning from that which most generally constitutes its proper
signification, and consequently must be translated by words
corresponding to those in whose place it stands ; as,
No s6 qu6 determinar. j I am at a loss how to act.
De ningun modo. | Not at all.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. J En d6n(le estd Alejandro? Estti corriendo per las calles.
2. iPorqu6 no me lo dijisto antes? Estaba para docirselo d V.
LESSON LIII. 285
3. Yo no quiero que ande correteando calles. — Creo que iba en busca
de SQ amigo.
4. Se lo tengo probibido ; pero el no me obedece, j hace las cosas d
su antojo. — Yo me opuse a ello, y le dije que V. queria ir a paseo con
todos nosotros.
5. Don Carlos, si Y. quiere, ire a buscarlo. — ^De ningun modo, Y. no
lo encontraria ; lo que teuio es que haga alguaa travesura que le cueste
cara.
6. Yo creo que subiendo a lo largo del rio lo encontrar6, porque si no
me engano le oi decir que queria ir a nadar. — No s6 qu6 determinar, pero
no, mejor sera dejarlo, vamonos nosotros a paseo (or vamos).
7. Su hermano Manuel es muy diferente, excede a toda alabanza 'J
siempre obedece los preceptos de su papa. — Sin duda alguna Manuel es
un excelente mucbacho.
8. jHolal aqui viene Juanito. ^YieneY. al campo con nosotros?
Con mucho gusto ; pero antes tengo que pedir a Y. un favor.
9. Delo Y. por concedido. — i Palabra de honor ? — Sobre mi palabra.
I Que es ?
10. Que perdone Y. d Alejandro. — j Yaja ! sea asi, puesto que di mi
palabra; ^pero donde esta? Se escondio y no se atreve a presentarse de
miedo, pero abora lo veo asomado a una ventana en el segundo piso de
su casa de Y.
11. Yo creo que ha perdido el juicio ese mucbacho ; venga Y. aca,
sefior mio, j cu6ntenos que ha hecho en todo este tiempo que ha estado
fuera de casa. — Papa, perdoneme Y., que no lo volver6 4 hacer otra
vez.
12. Bien, bien, dejeraoslo asi por esta vez.
13. I Don Jos6, corao esta su hermana de Y. ? Esta mejor y esperamos
que ya esta fuera de peligro.
14. I Mat6 el torero al toro a la primera estocada ? Si, sefior, a la
primera estocada lo atraves6 de parte a parte.
15. gNo se trata Y. con su vecino? No, sefior, es un hombre lleno
de soberbia, d quien no puedo aguantar.
16. ^Se di6 el navio a la vela para la Habana? Si, sefior, el navio
esta a la vela.
17. jPusieron al culpable en custodia? No, sefior, le dejaron bajo
juramento de que se presentaria en el tribunal.
18. ^ Conoce Y. d la Sefiorita Sanchez ? Hace poco tiempo que bice
su conocimiento, su hermosura me sorprendi6 y es una sefiorita dotada
de grandes virtudes.
19. ^, Yiaj6 Y. el verano pasado por mar 6 por tierra? Por supuesto
por mar, puesto que fui a Europa.
286 LESSON LIII.
20. ^Pasaron Yds. por Francia? Si, Beflor, pasaraos por Francia, y el
docc de Mayo entramos en Paris.
21. ^Esta V. de mal humor? Si, senor, malisimo, porque tengo un
terrible dolor de muelas.
22. Le aconsejo d V. que se arme de paciencia.— Mil gracias, per su
buen consejo, pero creo que sera mejor armarse de un buen gatillo.
EXERCISE.
1. How does that man spend his time ? He seems to do nothing but
run about the streets.
2. Is your uncle's sight not good ? No, sir ; and that is the reason
why he wears spectacles.
3. Is that the way you spell (escribir) that word ? Oh, no, of course
not ; I must take out one of the ^'s.
4. Does your watch keep good time {amda/r bien)l Yes, when it
goes, which occurs very rarely*; it gets out of order about twice a month.
5. Did you see the Spanish man-of-war (ship of war) that came into
port (puerto) last month ? Yes, I saw it the day it set sail {darse d lu
xiela) to return to Spain.
6. Did you go to see a bull-fight during your stay at Madrid ? I did ;
and although I do not like it myself, yet I could not help {no poder menos
de) admiring the amazing dexterity of the men (bull-fighters) who dared
to expose their lives attacking the furious animal.
7. How many stories are there in the house you live in ? Tliree ; I
generally sleep on the third floor.
8. Can you not induce him to stay at home ? No, he wants to go ;
it is a whim of his, and he wiU not bear with any opposition.
9. Were you in court at the time of the trial ? No, I could not go
down town that day.
10. How far had he gone before you overtook him ? I caught up with
him at the corner of the street.
11. How is your cousin getting on ? Pretty well ; but his arm is stiU
swollen, and to all appearance it pains him very much.
12. I wonder how he can bear up under so much sulSering. Ho lives
in the hope of getting better one day or other.
13. Did that man swear he had not been there ? He made (prestar)
affidavit that ho had never set (put) his foot in the house.
14. What a beautiful young lady that is 1 That is true ; but her learn-
ing by far exceeds her beauty.
Rara tm.
LESSON LIV,
287
LESSON^ LIY
Apegarse.
Criar.
Concebir.
Continuar.
Encerrar.
Guardar.
Pintar.
Presidir.
Ponderar.
Combatir,
Eedncir.
Eodar.
Sacudir.
Tirar.
Llenar.
Entiisiastoar.
Al cabo.
De repente.
No obstante.
Si acaso.
Si bien.
Atnarillo.
Azul.
Anaranjado.
Atento.
Oonfuso.
Feroz.
Bondadoso.
Pavorito.
Griego.
Afiil.
Ligero.
Lleno.
Montaraz.
Vistoso.
Colorado, rojo.
To adhere to, to be attached.
To raise (breed), to bring up.
To conceive.
To continue.
To shut up.
To guard, to tftke care, to keep.
To paint.
To preside.
To make much of, to praise.
To combat.
To reduce.
To roll.
To shake, to shake off.
To pull, to draw, to throw, to
throw out (or away).
TofiU.
To render enthusiastic.
After all, finally, at the end.
Suddenly, on a sudden.
!N"otwith standing.
If at all, in case.
Although.
Yellow.
Blue.
Orange.
Attentive.
Confused.
Pierce.
Kind.
Favorite.
Greek.
Indigo.
Liglit, slight, speedy.
Full.
Mountaineer, wild.
Conspicuous, showy.
Eed.
I
288
LESSON LIV.
Romano.
Roman.
Particular.
Particular, private, rare.
Picante.
Pungent.
Temerario.
Daring, rash
,
Violado.
Violet (color).
Verde.
Green.
Prismatico.
Prismatic.
Oabo.
End.
Algazara.
Shouts (of joy).
Oirco.
Siege, circus.
Autoridad.
Authority.
Color.
Color.
Confusion.
Confusion.
Bullicio.
Rumpus, noise,
Carcajada.
Burst of laughter.
bustle.
Corrida.
Fight (bull), race.
Ceremonial.
Ceremony.
Violeta.
\/ Violet (flower).
Espeotro solar.
Solar spectrum.
Diversion.
Diversion.
Goce. w
Delight, joy.
Clase.
Class.
Dicho.
Saying.
Infancia.
Infancy.
Desierto. ^Desert.
Idea.
Idea.
Interns.
Interest.
Fiesta.
Feast, festival
Guante.
Glove.
Guifiada.
Wjnk,
Leon.
Lion.
Ocupacion.
Occupation,
Local.
Situation.
Corrida de toros. Bull-fight.
Entusiasrao.
Enthusiasm.
Pelota.
Ball.
Enemigo.
Enemy.
Plaza de toros.
»/Arena.
Lloros.
Tears, cry.
Proeza.
Prowess, exploits.
Paso.
Step, pace.
Sonrisa.
Smile.
Prisma.
Prism.
Valentia.
Bravery.
Rumor.
Rumor.
Jaula.
\/ Cage.
S6r.
Being.
Traje.
Dress, costume.
Recibimiento.
Reception.
Suelo,
Ground.
Grito.
Shout, cry.
COMPO
SITION.
V^Los vlmoB cuando entrabamos.
We saw them as we were gobg in.
^ Si no hubiera sido por mi, le habrian
But for me, they
would have killed him.
matado.
v^Yo iria si no creyera que fuese inutil.
I would go, but that I think it useless.
Diga V. si vendri 6 no.
Say whether you
will come or not
Que venga 6 que
no vcnga.
Whether he come or not.
Dudo que lo sepa.
I doubt whether she knows it
LESSON LIV.
289
t*or atentos y bondadosos que sean {or
no obstante lo atentos que son) y por
bondadosos que sean.
*^Es menester que se cuide V., porque si
no se enfermara.
Es menester que obedezca V. las orde-
nes ; de lo contrario sufrira las con-
secueneias.
yo tengo razon 6 el la tiene.
v^'i prometas ni obres sin pensar.
^ No lo haria si me importara la vida (e. <?.,
aunque, or por mas que me importa-
ra la vida).
Valiente si los hay.
Tuvo el valor, si tal nombre merece una
aecion temeraria de combatir solo
contra tantos enemigos.
vQuiero saber si emplea bien el tiempo.
6 Si habr4 llegado el correo ?
Mira si viene.
• No s6 si lo haga.
Si (es que) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) el al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga.
^ Apenas si se oia el confuso rumor de
los pasos.
However attentive they are, and how-
ever kind thej may be.
You must take care of yourself, for if
you do not you will be ill
You must obey the orders ; for if you
transgress them, you will suffer the
consequences.
Either I am right or he is.
Neither promise nor act without think-
ing.
I would not do it, though my life were
at stake.
A valiant man, if there are any in the
world.
He had the courage, if the rash action
of fighting alone against so many
enemies is worthy of such a name.
I wish to know whether he employs his
time profitably.
If the mail should have arrived ?
See if he is coming.
I do not know whether to do it or not
I have but just come in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that is not it.
But I said so.
For I do nothing at all.
The confused tramping of feet could
scarcely be heard.
EXPLANATION.
267. There are several conjunctions in English that are
frequently used as substitutes for other words ; these conjunc-
tions are generally rendered in Spanish by the words which
they stand in the place of; as,
Los vlmos cuando entrabamos. I We saw them as we were going in.
Diga V. si quiere venir 6 no. | Say whether you will come or not.
268. The Spanish conjunctions are also often used as sub-
stitutes for other words of very different meanings. Let si and
qite serve as examples :
13
290
LESSON LIV
Si, as an adverb, is, as we have already observ^ed, affirmative,
except when employed ironically.
jSi, as a conjunction, may be employed in a variety of signi-
fications. The following are some of its principal uses :
Ist. To denote the condition on which depends the accom-
plishment of an action ; as,
JSi quicres acompauarme, voy a salir. j If you will accompany me, I am go-
j ing out.
2d. To express indispensable conditions ; as,
Tendras el caballo si lo pagas.
You will have the horse if you pay
for it.
I would not do it, even though my
life were at stake.
3d. In the sense of although, or even though ; as,
No lo haria si me importara la vida
(i. e., aunque or por mas qti€y me
importara la vida).
4th. In familiar conversation this conjunction is often em-
ployed in meanings very different from those we have just ex-
plained. For instance, it is often used instead of es que, it is
because ; cuando, when ; porque, because ; and not unfrequent-
ly instead of ya, already, as we read in one of Moratin's come-
dies :
Si (es que) acabo de entrar.
Si (cuando) ^1 al cabo ha de venir.
Si (es que) no es eso.
Si (ya) lo dije.
Si (porque) no hay cosa que yo haga.
I have but just come in.
For, after all, he must come.
But that is not it.
But I said so (or did say so).
For I do nothing at all.
6th. It is often used redundantly ; as,
Ap^nas si se oia el confuso rumor de I The confused tramping of feet could
los pasos. I scarcely be heard.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Iria V. d ver d su hermano si tuviera tiempo ? Yo iria si no cre-
yera que fuese iniitil.
2. Diga V. si vendrd 6 no. — Amigo mio tcmo salir, porquo haco mal
tiempo, y es menester que me cuide porque si no enferraar^.
8. I Estuvo V. ayer d ver el recibimiento del Presidente ? No, sefior,
mis oGupaciones no me lo permitieron.
LESSON LTV. 291
4. I Cuales son los colores en que se descompone el espectro solar ?
Yiolado, afiil, azul, verde, amarillo, anaranjado y rojo.
5. I Be que color tine V. sus guantes ? Los tino de amarillo.
6. I Qu6 tal le gusta a V. este ejercicio ? No me gusta de ningun
modo, J si contintia tan interesante como hasta aqui, creo que me hara
dormir.
7. I Que costumbres le gustan 4 V. mas, las de Espafia 6 las de los
Estados Unidos? Naturalmente, como espanol, me gustan mas las de
Espafia.
I 8. Pero I cuales son las mejores ? No sabr6 decirselo d Y., cada nacion
tiene las suyas y cada individuo se apega desde su infancia a las de su
propio pais.
9. I Cual es la diversion favorita del pueblo espafiol ? Las corridas de
toros ; esto se entiende bablando del pueblo en general j aun de muchos
caballeros de la pnmera clase de la sociedad; pero no de todos, porque
hay muclios, principalmente, sefloras, que jamas ban visto una corrida de
Toros.
10. Debe ser una diversion muy cruel y muy peligrosa. — No deja de
ser peligrosa, pues los toros de Espafia son mas feroces y ligeros que los
de ninguna parte del mundo, criados con este objeto montaraces, de modo
que cuando de improviso se encuentran en la plaza muestran una feroci-
dad y una valentia en nada inferior a la de un leon de los desiertos del Afri-
ca, que se encontrase de repente en estos circos llenos de s4res humanos.
11. ^ Quiere V. hacerme el favor de relatarme una corrida de toros ?
Lo haria con mucbo gusto ; pero s6 que no podria bacerlo como merece
esta antigua diversion, en algo semejante a los circos de los Griegos y
Eomanos.
12. J Yam OS I prucbe Y. — Pero si es imposible, y aunque llegara a pin-
tarle a Y. el local, los vistosos trajes, tanto del pueblo como de los tore-
ros, los curiosos ceremoniales de la fiesta, las autoridades que la presiden,
las tropas que la guardan ; la mtisica, el bullicio, los diclios picantes, las
sonrisas, las gnifiadas, los Uoros y carcajadas, todo esto no serviria de
nada para hacerle a Y. concebir una pequefia idea del gozo y entusiasmo
que anima al pueblo espafiol en una corrida de toros.
13. jEs posible! jOon que todo eso bay! pues yo creia que se redu-
cia a una carniceria de vacas y caballos. — Pues si Y. estuviera en Madrid
le sucederia como a todos los extrangeros, que a pesar de criticarnos esta
diversion, jamas pierden una corrida de toros.
14. Pero ^en qu6 puede consistir ese goce que Y. me pondera? j Goce!
hombre, he visto yo tirar a la plaza el baston, el bolsillo y hasta el reloj,
entusiasraado de la proeza de algun toreador. Eso era lo que yo le decia
d Y. que no era facil de pintar, porque no consiste en la cosa misma por
292 LESSON LIV.
mas interns que tenga sino en la disposicion particular y el entusiasmo de
cada uno. Y si no digame V. en el juego del fragata* americano en
que no se ve otra cosa que una pelota que rueda por el suelo, 6 se eleva
por el aire, despedida por un garrote j j jQu6 es lo que mueve
toda aqucUa algazara j ruido y confusion y gritos de, Hola ! ! ! Willie ! 1 1
Charley ! ! ! Here ! ! ! Here ! ! ! Run ! ! ! James ! ! ! Hurra ! ! I Hurra ! ! I
15. Ha, ha, ha ; V. me hace reir con su corrida de toros. j Vaya! me
alegro, algo se ha ganado, porque al principio yo creia que V. se iba 4
dormir.
EXERCISE.
1. Had you not better leave a line for him in case he should come?
I think it would be better ; notwithstanding that it seems impossible for
him to get here to-night.
2. Do the boys still continue to take lessons ? One of them still con-
tinues, although the least studious of the three ; the other two gave up
all of a sudden last month.
3. What shouts are those I hear up-stalrs ? Charles has some friends
with him, and they are getting enthusiastic on the occasion of the Presi-
dent's visit to the city.
4. Do you know how to keep a secret? I want to know that before I
tell you this one. — I do. — Well, so do I.
5. I supposet they gave the General a grand reception when he re-
turned from the war ? A magnificent J one, fit for a king ; it was Peter's
xmcle that presided at it.
6. Can you tell me how many prismatic colors there are, and their
names ? I shall try ; let us see : Green, blue, violet, red, orange, yellow,
indigo.
7. What is the best time for learning a language with the least
trouble ? During infancy; in that age the study of languages is reduced
to its simplest expression.
8. What would the earth be without the light and heat which we re-
ceive from the sun ? A perfect desert ; man nor no living being could
exist, and there would be no vegetation, for all animated nature is sus-
tained by the vivifying (vivrficador) eflfects of the sun.
9. What is the use of the prism ? It possesses the power of decom-
posing the sunbeam {rayo del sol), thus enabhng (poder) us to see separate-
ly tlie rays of difi'erent colors which unite to form what is called light.
10. Where are you going now ? it is not yet time for the theatre. Why,
it is half-past seven, and the play begins at eight precisely.
11. If my friend should have come while I was out? Oh, I imagine
that if he had come he would have left some word (dejar dicho) for you.
* Base ball. t Snponer. % Magniflco.
LESSON LV.
293
12. "What is tliat confused tramping of feet* that I hear in the street ?
A crowd of people running to see a fire in the next street.
13. Do you hear how that lady praisesf the courage of the raan who has
just got into the hon's cage {jaula) ? I do, and I was just thinking she
might find an occupation of more interest ; besides, I do not see any
proof of courage in such a rash action as to shut one's self up with a fe-
rocious animal like the lion.
14. "What sort of a dress did Miss H. wear at the ball ? A blue silk
{seda) dress, with violet and orange trimmings {guarniciones). Can you
conceive of any thing more detestable ?
LESSON LY,
Afianzar.
To secure, to fasten, to prop.
Conquistar.
To conquer.
Construir.
To construct.
to build.
Fundai*.
To found, to go upon (a principle).
Medir.
To measure.
Portarse.
To conduct one's self, to behave.
Tirar.
To throw.
Desigual.
Unequal.
Extremado.
Extreme.
Horrendo.
Horrific.
Distinto.
Distinct.
Eidiculo.
Ridiculous.
InmemoriaL
Immemorial.
Recto.
Right, straight.
Auxilio.
Help.
Andalucia.
Andalusia.
Castellano.
Castilian.
Castilla.
Castile.
Arabe.
Arab.
Catalufia.
Catalonia.
Crimen.
Crime.
Corona.
Crown.
Catalan.
Catalonian.
Avila.
Avila.
Ciraiento.
Foundation.
Galicia.
Galicia.
Dialecto.
Dialect.
Isabel.
Elizabeth, Isa-
Pulano.
Such a one, so
bella.
and so.
Imperfeccion.
Imperfection.
Gallego.
Galician.
Irregularidad.
Irregularity.
Modelo.
Model.
Guipuzcoa.
Guipuzcoa.
Rumor de pasoa.
+ Aolaudir.
294
LESSON LV.
Defecto.
M6rito.
Keino
Terreno.
Titulo.
Vascuence.
Zatano.
Esoritorio.
Defect.
Merit.
Kingdom.
Ground.
Title.
Basque.
Such a one.
Office.
Igualdad.
Medida.
Pesa.
Nobleza.
Persona.
Moneda.
Regularidad.
Valencia.
Vizcaya.
Universidad.
Equality.
Measure.
Weight (for
weighing).
Nobility.
Person.
Coin.
Regularity.
Valencia.
Biscay.
Universitj.
COMPOSITION.
Tratemos ahora de descansar que 8er4
lo mejor.
Si no hay virtudes, que son el cimiento
de la libertad, no so afianzara esta en
los pueblos,
i Que hermosa que estas !
Ese si que es un modo de portarse con
honor.
Que Uaman.
Que me deje en paz.
i Qu6 me matan !
En muchas obras no se encuentra otro
(or mas) m6rito que el estilo.
Es que estoy ocupado.
Es que se encuentra sin ningun auxilio.
Con la p^rdida de su madre est& todo
el dia Uora que llora.
I Qu6 no lo hubiera yo sabido !
i Qu6 siempre has de ser un holgazan ?
I Qu6 hermoso cielo I
i Qu6 horrenda noche !
J Qu6 cielo tan hermoso !
A que sf.
A que no.
A que lo digo.
A que lo hago.
i Qu6 de crfmenes se vieron I
I Qu6 de injusticias no se cometen t
I Qu6 ! i no yienes ?
Let us try to rest now ; that will be
best.
If there are no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, the latter will
have no firm foothold among nations.
How beautiful you are I
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting.
Some one is calling (knocking).
Let him let me alone.
Murder !
Many works are void of all merit save
the style.
Well, but I am busy.
Well, but he is entirely forsaken.
She does nothing the whole day over
but lament the loss of her mother.
All ! could I but have known it !
Are you always to be a sluggard I
What a beautiful sky !
What a horrific night !
What a beautiful sky !
I will bet you it is.
I will bet you it is not
I will bet you I can say it.
I will bet you I can do it.
IIow much crime there was !
How much injustice is there not com-
mitted !
What I are you not coming ?
LESSON LV.
295
J Fulano !— ^ Qu6 ?
Ir6 k paseo, que no estar^ siempre me-
tido en casa.
Qu6 quiera que no quiera.
No es hijo mio, que si lo fuera ....
Such a one ! What ?
I shall go and take a walk, for I will
not be always stuck in the house.
Whether he will or not.
He is no son of mine, for if he were . . ,
EXPLANATION.
269. Que, as a conjunction, is employed in so many differ-
ent ways and meanings, tending to perplex the learner, that
we deem it essential to mention here some of its principal uses :
It is employed as a copulative ; as,
Tratemos ahora de descansar, que sera I Let us go to rest now ; that will be
lo mejor. J best-
It somethnes serves to introduce an incidental proposition
dependent on the principal one ; as,
Si no hay virtudes, que son el cimiento
de la libertad, no se afianzara esta
en los pueblos.
If there are no virtues, which are the
foundation of liberty, the latter will
have no firm foothold among nations.
It is employed instead of sino, but after either of the ad-
jectives otro or mas ; as.
En muchas obras no se encuentra otro I Many works are void of all merit ex-
(pr mas) merito que el estilo. | cept the style.
It is employed instead of pero, but in the phrase es que^
with which we convey the reason why something is or is
not done ; as,
& que estoy ocupado. I But I am busy.
Es que se encuentra sin ningun auxilio. | But he is entirely forsaken.
The conjunction que, placed between two words of the
same meaning, besides uniting them as a conjunction, gives
more energy to the expression ; as,
Con la p6rdida de su madre esta todo I She is the whole day over lamenting
el dia llora que llora. | the loss of her mother.
At other times it serves to confirm more and more the ex-
pression ; as,
/ Que hermosa que estas ! {instead of^
I Que hermosa estas !)
I Ese si que es un modo de portarse con
honor ! {instead of \ Ese si es un mo-
do de portarse con honor !)
How beautiful you are !
That, now, is an honorable mode of
acting !
296 LESSON LV.
The conjunction que, at the beginning of a sentence, implies
proposition going before it ; as,
Que Uaman.
Que me deje en paz.
/ Qioe me matan !
Some one is calling.
Let him let me alone.
Murder !
In all these examples a proposition is understood before the
que ; as, mirad, in the first ; deseo or quiero, in the second ; and
reparad or sahed, in the third.
When the sentence is interrogative or exclamatory, que
denotes desire and expostulation ; as,
/ Que no lo hubiera yo sabido ! I Ah ! could I but have known it !
/ Que siempre has de set un holgazan ! | Are you always to be a sluggard !
In an exclamatory sentence, and when it precedes a noun
adjective, it is equivalent to cudn ; as,
/ Que hermoso cielo ! I What a beautiful sky !
/ Que horrenda noche ! | What an horrific night !
But if in these sentences the substantive comes first, the particle
tan must be put between, because we cannot say: / Qu^ cido
hermoso 1 but, j Qu'e cielo tan hermoso !
In some sentences a determining verb is understood ; as,
A que sf.
A que no.
A que lo digo.
A que lo hago.
I will bet you it is.
I will bet you it is not.
I will bet you I can say it.
I will bet you I can do it,
in which is understood the present indicative apttesto, I bet.
In other sentences it is equivalent to a collective noun or a
plural adjective, and requires to be followed by the preposition
de; as,
; Que de crimenes se vieron 1 How much crime there was !
/ Qu^ de injusticias no so cometen ! How much injustice is there not com-
mitted !
instead of saying : j Cud^itos crtmenes ! i Cudntas injusticias!
or, / Que multitud de crimenes k, injusticias !
It also denotes surprise, and is used as an interrogative, and
for answering ; as,
/ Que / i no viencs ? | What ! are you not coming ?
LESSON LV, 297
and is equivalent to an entire proposition answering ; as,
i Fulano ! / Que ? (i. e. i Que quieres ?) I Such a one ! What ? {i. e. What do you
I want ?)
At other times it is employed instead of the adversative
sino, and the copulative y, in periods where the second member
denotes opposition to what is expressed in the first ; as,
He will not get it, but will remain with
the desire.
I shall go out to walk, for I will not be
always stuck in the house.
No lo conseguira ; qtce se quedara con
el deseo {instead of slno qv^ se que-
dara, etc.).
Ir6 k paseo, que no estar6 siempre me-
tido en casa {histead of y no estate,
etc.).
It is not unfrequently used in the place of a disjunctive con-
junction; as.
Que quiera que no quiera (i. e., quiera I Whether he will or not.
6 no quiera). |
It is sometimes substituted for one or other of the causals,
pues, porque, pues que ; as.
No es hijo mio, que si lo fuera . . . (i. e., I He is no son of mine, for if he were . . .
porque or pues, si lo fuera). |
In this meaning it is more used in poetry than in prose ; as,
" Qite quien se opone al cielo,
Cuanto mas alto sube, viene al suelo."
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. I Se habla el castellano en todas las provincias de Espafia ? En los
tribimalea, universidades, j oficinas publicas, si selior ; pero el pueblo ha-
bla diferentes dialectos.
2. ^Qu6 dialectos son estos? El Catalan, que se habla en Catalufia;
el valenciano, en Valencia ; el gallego, en Gahcia ; y el vascuence que se
habla en las provincias vascongadas, que son Alava, Guipuzcoa y Vizca-
ya ; se cree que este tiltimo es lengua madre y una de las mas antiguaa
de Europa.
3. ^En d6nde se habla el castellano? En las demas provincias, Cas-
tilla, Aragon y Andalucia.
4. gPorqu6 no se habla el espafiol en toda Espafia? Porque Espafia
estuvo anteriormente dividida en varios reinos ; de estos algunos fueron
conquistados por los Arabes, otros pertenecieron a Francia, y otros final-
mente permanecieron iudependientes por muclios siglos, hasta que Fernan-
13*
298 LESSON LV.
do k Isabel, echando d los Arabes de Espafia, reunieron las coronaa de
Aragon y Castilla.
5. I Son diferentes las costurabres de las provincias de Espafia ? Ma-
cho; no solamente no se habla la misma lengua en todas, sino que hasta
poco tiempo hace cada provincia tenia leyes diferentes, y aun hoy dia
tienen pesas, medidas, traje y hasta caracteres mny distintos.
6. Pues eso debe ser rauy inc6modo ; en los Estados Unidos tenemos
la ventaja de hablar una misma lengua y tenemos las mismas pesas, me-
didas y monedas. — Verdad es, pero tambien es cierto que Yds. han hecho
todo esto con la experiencia adquirida en el antiguo mundo.
7. I Y porqu6 no lo hacen Vds. asi en Espafia ? Porque nosotros
tenemos ya establecidas estas cosas de tiempo inmemorial, y no es facil
cambiar costumbres arraigadas por tantos siglos.
8. Cuando Vds. fundan una ciudad en este nuevo mundo, eligen el
terreno necesario, tiran Vds. lineas rectas y trazan calles y plazas ; para
esto no siguen el raodclo de una antigua ciudad de Europa, pero las an-
tiguas ciudades de Europa con sus imperfecciones 6 irregularidades les han
mostrado k Vds. el modo de construir ciudades, cuyo solo defecto con-
siste en su extremada regularidad.
9. g Y no cree V. que de esta igualdad resultan grandes ventajas ?
Sin duda alguna, y seria de desear que en todo el mundo se hablase la
misma lengua, hubiese la misma moneda, pesas y medidas, y, tanto como
el clima, las costumbres y otras circunstancias lo permitiesen, las mismas
leyes.
10. Tambien me han dicho que hay en Espafia varias clases de socie-
dad ; ^ no es asf ? Si, sefior ; pero eso sucede en todas las naciones del
mundo.
11. No en los Estados Unidos. V. v6 que aqui no se dan tltulos de
nobleza, no hay diferencia en el tr^'e, y decimos Mr. Johnson, hablando del
presidente, and Mr. Johnson, hablando de un carnicero, y el mismo Presi-
dente Johnson era dntes sastre, de modo que la igualdad existe en las
personas como en las cosas.
12. No olvide V., sin embargo, que Dios no ha hecho dos cosas ignales
en el mundo, y que los hombres son quizd mas desiguales entre si que
las mismas cosas. — Concedido, y no hay cosa que mas ridicula me parezca
que las lavanderas vestidas de sefioras, y los rowdies del Bowery afectan-
do ser caballeros.
EXERCISE.
1. Did you meet them as you were going in, or as you were coming
out ? As we were going in.
LESSON LVI
299
2. What is the name of that province in Spain in which they speak
the Catalonian language or dialect ? Catalonia.
3. In which province do they speak the Basque ? In the three Bas-
que provinces.
4. And do these dialects differ very materially* from the Castilian
language? Yes, very materially; in general they are more like the
French than the Spanish.
5. Have you ever heard the Spanish name for the natives of Galicia ?
Yes, sir, for I am well acquainted with several Galicians hving in New
York.
6. Can you tell me the weights and measures principally used in the
Peninsula (Peninsula) ? The principal weight, entirely different from all
those of the United States, is the arroha.
7. How many Isabellas have there been on the throne of Spain?
Two ; the first was Isabella the Catholic, and the present queen is Isa-
bella II.
8. By what event is the reign of Tsjibella the Catholic distinguished
from all other reigns ? By the discovery of America by Christopher
Columbus {Cristobal Colon)^ in the year 1492.
9. Was there not some other very important event that occurred about
the same time ? Ah ! yes ; at the commencement of that queen's reign ;
you mean, I suppose, the conquest of the Arabs, and union of the crown
of Castile and Aragon.
10. Are railroads very common in the Peninsula ? Not so common as
in other European countries ; but of late years the spirit of enterprise
seems to be revived in Spain, and to the few which now exist we shall
soon see a large number of others added.
11. Let us sit down and rest for half an hour, for I am very tired, and
you must be so too.
12. How beautiful the sky looks (is) to night I That is true ; but how
it rained all day I
13. How long has that newspaper been published? Ten years, for it
was established (founded) in 1856.
LESSON LVI
Apreciar.
Apresurar.
Favorecer.
Invitar.
To appreciate.
To haste.
To favor.
To invite.
Mucho.
300 LESSON LVI.
Apreciable.
Appreciable.
Comente.
Current, fluent.
Estimado.
Esteemed.
Excelentisimo.
Very (or most) excellent
Favorecida.
Favored.
Invariable,
Invariable.
Intimo.
Intimate.
Fino.
Fine.
Servidor.
Servant.
Mercantil.
Oomercio. Commerce, tra(
Mercantile.
le.
Atencion. Attention.
Corazon. Heart.
Correspondencia. Correspondence
Convite. Invitation, feast,
Esquela. Note.
banquet, party.
Formula. Form, formula.
Formulario. List of formulas.
Expresion. Expression.
Kespeto. Kespect.
Estructura. Structure.
Sobrescrito. Address.
Intimidad. Intimacy.
Corresponsal. Correspondent.
Inicial. Initial.
Giros. Manner (of style).
Kesidencia. Kesidence.
COMPO
3ITI0N.
Sefior D. Jos6 Romero.
Mr. Joseph Romero.
Muy Sr. mio.
Dear Sir, My Dear Sir.
Muy Sr. nuestro.
Dear Sir.
Muy Sres. mios.
Gentlemen.
Muy Sres. nuestros.
Gentlemen.
Sefiora Da. Isabel Jimenez.
Mrs. Isabella Jimenez.
Muy Sra. mia.
Madam.
Muy Sra. nuestra.
Madam.
Hemos recibido su ap*'«, apreciable
We have received your favor {or your
(or 8u est<i«, estimada, or su favor^,
esteemed favor).
favorecida).
Las de V. del 2 del comente {or cor**').
Your favors of the 2d instant
4 del pp*** (pr6ximo pasado).
4th ult
Se repite k las 6rdene8 de V.
s. s. s.
(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.
.
Yours very truly.
(Que su mano besa).
M. De. T.
Q. S. P. B.
( To ladies, que sus pi68 besa). ^
LESSON LVI.
301
Muy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande Y. con toda franqueza a su in-
variable amigo y S. S.
El Sr. A. De L. presenta {or ofrece) sus
respetos al Sr. D. I. De H., y le hace
saber que.
.Sr. D. Jose Martinez,
Del Comercio de Madrid.
"Sres. D. Francisco Sanchez,
Hermanos y Ca., Cadiz.
Senora Da. Teodora Jim6nez y
Arteta, Calle Mayor N". 10,
Zaragoza.
Al Ex°»o. (Excelentlsimo),
Sr. D. Juan Valero y Arteta.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. De V.
S. s. s.,
A. De T.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant.
Mr. A. De L. presents his compliments
to Mr. I. De H., and begs to inform
him that.
Mr. Joseph Martinez,
Merchant, Madrid.
Messrs. Francis Sanchez Bros. & Co.,
Cadiz.
Mrs. Theodora Jim6nez y Arteta,
10 Mayor Street,
Saragossa.
To His Excellency, John Valero y
Arteta.
(Form of addressing letters, notes, &c.,
to persons living in the same place as
the writer.)
EXPLANATION.
270. Epistolary Correspondence. — ^We could not, with-
out overstepping the limits of a grammar, give here all the
terms peculiar to mercantile correspondence ; those desirous to
become perfect in that branch may consult the several works
written on the subject, among which we particularly recommend
Mr. De Yeitelle's "Mercantile Dictionary," published by D.
Appleton & Co. We merely give here the general forms for
beginning and ending letters.
In addressing persons of different classes of society, except
those having titles, letters begin as follows :
Muy Senor mio. My Dear Sir.
• Muy Senor nuestro. Sir ; Dear Sir.
Muy Senores mios. )
Muy Senores nuestros. )
And to ladies :
Muy Senora mia. j Madam.
These expressions are most generally abbreviated thus : —
Muy Sr. mio ; Muy Sr. n^o ; Muy Sres. mios ; Muy Sres. n^^ ;
Muy Sra. mia ; Muy Sra. n*'^ ; Muy Sras. n^<^^
Gentlemen.
302
LESSON LVI
In the body of the letter, 8u ap^^ (su apreciable), or su
est^*^ (su estimada), or sufavor^"' (su favorecida) — carta, letter,
being understood — are equivalent to your favor or your es-
teemed letter.
Such expressions as these are translated thus :
Yours of the 2d inst ; 4th ult ; 8th
of May, &c.
Las de V. del 2 del cor** (corriente) ;
4 del pp^o (proximo pasado) ; 8 de
Mayo, etc.
The following forms are employed at the end of letters
Se repite k las 6rdenes de V.,
s. s. s.
(Su seguro servidor).
Q. S. M. B.
(Que su mano besa).
Manden Vms. cuanto gusten 4
s. s. s..
Q. S. M. B.
I am. Dear Sir,
Yours respectfully.
Command at pleasure your faithful
servant.
To a lady, the form is the same, only changing the letter
M. into P., thus :
s. s. s.,
Q. S. P. B.
(Que BUS pi6s besa).
In a more familiar style :
Muy Sr. mio y amigo.
Mi querido amigo.
Mande V. con toda franqueza & su
invariable amigo y S. S.
My Dear Sir and Friend.
My Dear Friend.
Command with freedom your true
friend and faithful servant.
Eaquelas, notes, are also written in Spanish, as in English,
in the third person ; as,
Mr. A. De L. presents his respects to
El Sr.A. De L. presenta {or ofrece) sus
respetoa al Sr. Dn. I. De H., y le
hace saber que, etc.
Mr. I. De II., and begs to acquaint
him that, &c.
The most usual manner of addressing letters is :
Sr. Dn. Jos6 Martinez, del Comercio de Madrid.
Sres. Dn. Franco S^chez, Hermanos y Ca., C&diz.
Sra. Dfia. Teodora Jimenez y Arteta, Calle Mayor N«. 10.
Al Ex™o Sr. D. Juan Valero y Arteta, Madrid,
LESSON LVI. 303
In the city ;
TO A GENTLEMAN. TO A LADY.
B. L. M.,
Al Sr. D. P.,
s. s. a,
A.T.
B. L. P.,
s. s. s.,
A. T.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Le gusta d Y. escribir cartas? Me gusta escribir a mis amigos
fntimos ; pero me gusta mas recibir cartas que escribirlas.
2. Yo no s6 bien el ceremonial 6 formulario de cartas, ^quiere Y.
hacerme el favor de decirme como se principia una carta 'i Con mucho
gusto, pregTinteme Y. aquello que no sepa.
3. 2 Como se principia una carta dirigida a nna persona cualquiera
con quien no tenemos intimidad? Si es un caballero, principiamos con
la formula de Muy Sr. mio, y si es una sefiora con la de Muy Seflora mia.
4. ^ Y para acabar ? Escribiendo a un caballero solemos decir entre
otras muchas expresiones, " Queda de Y.,
s. s. s.,
Q. S. M. B.,
Fulano de tal."
5. g Y si es una sefiora k quien escribimos ? Lo mismo, solo cambia-
mos la inicial de mano^ M., en la inicial de pies^ P., asi,
'^Quedade Y.,
S. S. S.,
Q. S. P. B.,
Fulano de tal."
6. ^ Y cudndo es d un intimo amigo ? Entonces es mas parecido al ingles
y principiamos diciendo : " Querido amigo," y para acabar, cualquiera de
las muchas expresiones que se usan, como :
" Tu amigo que te ama de corazon,
Fulano de tal."
7. I C6mo se escriben las esquelas de invitacion, etc., d las personas
que viven en la ciudad ? Se escriben, como en ingMs, en la tercera persona.
8. I Quiere Y. escribirme una esquela invitandome d comer ? Si, se-
tior, vea Y. asi : " Los Sres. De Y. presentan sus respetos a los Sres. De
T., y les suplican que les hagan el honor de venir a comer con ellos el
martes a las cinco. Lines, Abril 8 de 1866."
9. Yeamos si Y. puede responderme en espafiol. — Yea Y., " Los Sres.
De T. se apresuraran a acudir al amable convite de los Sres. De Y., y les
presentan sus mas finas atenciones."
304 LESSON LVI.
10. Muy bien, muy bien, ahora solo falta poner la direccion (el sobre).
— Estando las personas 4 quien me dirijo en la ciudad, creo que el sobres-
orito debe ponerse asl :
B. L. M.
Al Sr. De V.
S. S. S.,
A. De T.
' 11. ^Oree Y. que podr6 ahora traducir una carta mercantil en ingl6s?
Si, senor, y escribirla tambien, puesto que V. sabe ya la estructura de Iq
lengua, ademas de poseer un gran niimero de sus giros, idiotismos y pala»
bras mas necesarias ; pero todavia tendrd Y. necesidad de acudir al die-
cionario, porque no es posible introducir en una gramatica todas las pala-
bras y frases que requiere una correspondencia mercantil
EXERCISE.
1. Do you ever do any of the correspondence in your ofl5ce (escri
torio) ? Not often, for I do not know how to write letters in Spanish,
and the greater part of our correspondence is carried on (Jlevar) in that
language.
2. You ought, in that case, to make that branch the object of par-,
ticular study for a time. That is what I desire to do ; and I would ba
obliged to you to give me some instructions (instruir) in the forms most
observed in Spanish houses.
3. I shall have much pleasure in showing you all I know myself; but
as I have never been in business, there are many points of which I am
ignorant (ignorar).
4. What is the first thing to write in a letter? In Spanish, as in
English, the date is generally the first thing ; it is written thus :
Cadiz, October 1st, 1866.
6. What comes next ? The name and residence of the person we are
writing to, thus :
Messrs. Laftjente, Sons & Co., Malaga :
6. So far there is little difference between the two languages. Yery
little ; we next go on to say (luego sepone) :
Gentlemen (or Sir, or My Dear Sir, or Dear Sirs, or, if we write to a
lady. Madam) :
7. Ah ! there I observe a decided difference : is that the form always
followed for commencing letters? For business letters, yes; but for fa-
miliar correspondence, wo have many others ; indeed,* they are mostly
always suited to the taste of the writer.
8. Be good enough to show me one or two. With the greatest
El hecho M.
LESSON LVII,
305
pleasure : My Dear Friend : My Very Dear Alexander : Esteemed Friend;
My Ever Dear Mother, «fec., &c., &c.
9. How do you acknowledge {acusar) the receipt of a favor ? In this
manner : I have duly received your esteemed favor (or letter) of the 17th
instant.
10. As for the body of the letter, the form depends entirely on the
nature of the business ; and, in general, all that is required is to say just
what is necessary and nothing more, and to avoid obscurity ioscuridad),
in order that our ideas may be completely understood by our corre-
Bpondent {corresponsaT).
11. The usual manners of closing a letter are :
I am, dear sir,
Your most obd't ser't ; or,
I am, sir.
Yours very truly.
12. And for familiar letters:
I am, dear Charles,
Your true friend and loving cousin ; or.
With kindest expressions to your brother,
Beheve me to remain your ever faithful and loving friend.
LESSON LVII
Abalanzarse.
Concordar.
Cumphr.
Conversar.
Entregar.
Escapar.
Honrar.
Participar.
Regir.
Auxiliar.
Honrado.
Plural.
Singular.
To rush, to spring.
To agree.
To fulfil, to keep, to do (duty;.
To converse.
To give, to hand, to deliver.
To escape.
To honor.
To participate, to partake.
To govern.
To help.
Honest, honored.
Plural.
Singula!'.
sod
LESSON LVII,
Baron.
BdTon.
Alhnja.
Jewel.
Cr6dito.
Credit.
Agudeza.
Wit, witty say-
Encargo.
Commission,
ing.
charge, order.
Cocina.
Kitchen.
G6nero.
Kind, cloth.
Confianza.
Confidence.
Erapleo.
Employment,
Espada.
Sword,
office.
Fuga.
Flight.
Plato.
Plate, dish.
Gracia.
Favor, good
graces.
Kumero.
Number.
Mania.
Mania.
Eegimen.
Eegimen.
Promesa.
Promise.
Tema.
Theme, exercise.
Pretension.
Pretension, claim-
Diptongo.
Diphthong.
Concordancia.
Concord, agree-
Triptongo.
Triphthong.
ment.
Varon.
Man.
Version.
Version.
Error.
Error, mistake.
COMPO
Tema.
3ITI0X.
Whim.
Acordarse con alguno.
Acordarse de alguno.
Caer k la plaza.
Caer en la plaza.
Caer de la gracia de alguno.
Caer en gracia k alguno.
Contar una cosa.
Contar con una cosa.
Convcnir k uno.
Convenir con uno.
Cumplir con uno.
Cumplir por uno.
Dar algo.
Dar con algo.
Dar en una cosa.
Dar per algo.
Dar credito.
Dar k cr6dito.
Dar la mano.
Dar de mano.
Dar en manos de.
Dar con el pi^.
Dar por el pi6.
To agree with any one.
To remember any one.
To front on the square (said of a house).
To fall in the square.
To fall from any one's favor (or good
graces).
To get into any one's favor (or good
graces).
To relate, to tell a thing.
To count upon a thing.
To suit (to be convenient for) any one.
To agree with any one.
To do one's duty toward any one.
To act in the place of any one.
To give any thing.
To find any thing.
To be obstinate.
To give for any thing.
To give credit, to beUeve.
To give on credit.
To give the band (or to shake hands).
To lay aside, to abandon.
To fidl into the hands of.
To despise, to scorn, to make light of.
To overthrow.
LESSON LVII,
307
Dar fin {or cabo) a una C08a.
Dar fin de una cosa.
Declararse a alguno.
Declararse por alguno.
Dejar hacer algo.
Dejar de hacer algo.
Deshacerse alguna cosa.
Deshacerse de alguna cosa.
Disponer sus alhajas.
Disponer de sus alhajas.
Echar tierra a una cosa.
Echar un genero en tierra.
Entender una cosa.
Entender en una cosa.
Entregarse al dinero.
Entregarse del dinero.
Escapar a buenas.
Escapar de buenas.
Estar en alguna cosa.
Estar sobre alguna cosa.
Estar a todo.
Estar en todo.
Estar con cuidado.
Estar de cuidado.
Estar en si.
Estar sobre si.
Estar con alguno.
Estar por alguno.
Estar en hacer alguna cosa.
Estar para hacer alguna cosa.
Estar por hacer alguna cosa.
Estar alguna cosa por hacer.
Gustar un plato.
Gustar de un plato.
Hacer confianza a una persona.
Hacer confianza de una persona.
Hacer una cosa con tiempo.
To bring to an end, to finish.
To destroy.
To confide one's secrets to any one.
To side with any one, to declare one's
self in favor of any one.
To let any thing be done.
To leave any thirg undone.
(Speaking of things) to be destroyed.
To dispose of (or part with) any thing.
To arrange one's jewelry.
To dispose of one's jewelry.
To forget any thing, to cast it into ob-
livion.
To throw any thing on the ground (or
down).
To understand a thing.
To be a judge of a thing.
To make a god of one's money.
To receive, to take charge of money.
To make the best of one's escape.
To make a happy escape.
To be aware of any thing.
To push an affair.
To be ready for whatever may come.
To pay attention to every matter.
To be anxious, solicitous.
To be dangerously ill.
To have complete consciousness.
To be proud.
To be with any one, to be of any one's
opinion.
To favor any one.
To be resolved (or disposed) to do any
thing.
To be about to do any thing.
To be inclined to do something.
To remain to be done.
To taste a dish (of any kind of food).
To be fond of a dish.
To tell a secret to any one.
To make a confident of any one, to
trust to any one.
To do a thing at one's leisure (so as not
to be pressed for time).
808
LESSON LVII.
Hacer una cosa en tiempo.
Hacerse a una cosa.
Bacerse con una cosa.
Hacerse de una cosa.
Hallarae algo.
Hallarse con algo.
Ir con alguno.
Ir sobre alguno.
Mayor de edad.
Mayor en edad.
Participar una cosa.
Participar de una cosa.
Poner una cosa en tierra.
Poner una cosa por tierra.
Poner con cuidado.
Poner en cuidado.
Preguntar k uno.
Preguntar por uno.
Quedar en hacer una cosa.
Quedar una cosa por hacer.
Responder una cosa.
Responder de una cosa.
Saber 4 cocina.
Saber de cocina.
Salir con una empresa.
Salir de una empresa.
Salir k su padre.
Salir con su padre.
Salir de su padre.
Salir por su padre.
Ser con alguno.
Ser de alguno.
Ser para alguno.
Teuer consigo.
Tener para ui.
Tener de hacer algo.
Tener que hacer alga
Tirar la espada.
To do a thing in time, at a suitable time.
To get used to a thing.
To get (or procure) a thing.
To provide one's self with a thing.
To find any thing.
To be in possession of (or have) any
thing.
To go with anybody, to be of any one's
opinion, to be on any one's side, to
listen to any one.
To fall upon (or attack) any one.
To be of age.
To be older.
To communicate any thing (to another).
To participate in any thing.
To lay any thing on the ground.
To make little of a thing.
To put (or place, or lay) with care.
To alarm, to give anxiety.
To ask any one (interrogate).
To ask (or inquire) for any thing.
To agree to do any thing.
To remain to be done (speaking of
things).
To answer something (giving an answer).
To answer for any thing.
To smell (or taste) of the kitchen.
To be skilful in (or to imderstand)
cooking.
To carry out an enterprise.
To give up an enterprise.
To resemble one's father.
To go out with one's father.
To be released from the wardship of
one's father.
To go bail for one's father.
To be of any one's opinion.
To belong to any one's party.
To be for any one (of things).
To have with (or about) one.
To be persuaded.
To be going to do any thing.
To have to do any thing.
To throw down (or away) one's sword.
LESSON LYII.
309
Tirar de la espada.
Tratar de vinos.
Tratar eu vinos.
Vender al contado.
Vender de contado.
Volver a la razon.
Volver por la razon.
Volver en razon de tal cosa.
To draw one's sword.
To talk about wines.
To deal in wines.
To sell for cash.
To sell on the instant.
To recover one's reason.
To stand up for reason (or what is
right).
To return for such a reason (or motive).
EXPLANATION.
271. It is a general custom, amongst authors of Spanish
grammars and Spanish methods, to copy entire the forty pages
devoted by the Spanish Academy in its Grammar to a list of
verbs requiring certain prepositions after them. But we, not-
withstanding our most profound respect for the body just
mentioned, I'efrain from following in the footsteps of our pre-
decessors, and that not merely on account of the useless-
ness of the list, but for the more potent reason that we believe
it to be calculated to misguide the student at every step. An
example : — Any one not thoroughly acquainted with Spanish
syntax would, on reading the very first article in the list above
referred to, Ahalanzarse a los peligros, naturally conclude there-
from that the verb ahalanzar governs at all times and under
all circumstances the preposition d. jN'ow that would be
absurd, for nothing is more usual than to see, and hear the ex-
pressions : — Ahalanzarse contra {or sobre) su enernigo^ ahalan-
zarse con (or sin) juicio^ ahalanzarse para sacudir^ de repente,
<fec. And so of all the other verbs, each of which may, accord-
ing to the idea to be conveyed, govern almost any preposition
in the lano^uasre.
It would be vain to attempt to give, in a work of the
nature of the present one, a complete set of rules for determin-
ing the various significations of every verb as decided or
modified by the attendant preposition ; but, as much can be
done, even here, toward helping the student through the most
difficult parts, we could not resist giving in this day's Composi-
tion a list composed of those verbs which are at the same time
of most frequent occurrence in general every-day conversation.
810 LESSON LVII.
and susceptible of the greatest diversity of meaning, according
to the preposition by which they are followed.
Before dismissing this subject we deem it convenient to re-
mark that a large number of English verbs, to determine the
meaning of which a preposition is indispensable, are rendered
in Spanish by a verb alone. For example :
Bajar.
Entrar.
SaUr.
Subir.
Sacar.
Partir.
Caer.
To go down.
To come in.
To go out.
To go up.
To draw out.
To set out.
To fall down.
This may be the reason why many Spanish grammarians
have thought that in Spanish the same thing does not exist.
We regret that the dimensions of our book do not allow of our
giving a more complete list in corroboration of the fact that
Spanish verbs too enjoy that transition of signification which
is so frequent in English verbs.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^ A qu6 lado caen las ventanas de su ciiarto de V. ? Tres caen i
la plaza de Madison y las otras trcs caen d la calle Veinte y cinco.
2. ^Le cae a V. en gracia ese muchachito? Si, seflor, porque res-
ponde con mucha agudeza.
3. I Puedo contar con su promesa de Y . ? V. pnede contar con ella,
porque yo cumplo siempre lo que proraeto.
4. ^Da V. orddito d todo lo que oye? No, sefior, A radnos quo
conozca las personas.
5. ^Da y. la raano d aquel pobre? Si, sefior, porque aunque pobre
es honrado.
6. I Ila dado V. fin d su tarea ? Todavia no ; pero pronto dar6 de mano.
7. Si v. doja esos libros en raanos de ese muchacho, pronto dard fin
de ellos. — Asi lo oreo ; pero es necesario que los nifios tengan algo para
entretenerse.
8. jC6mo ha dispnesto V. de sus alhajas? Las he guardado, porque
pude encontrar dinero sin venderlas.
9. jQu6 so hizo do aqnol mal negocio en qne se mcti6 su primo de
V. ? Se le ha echado tierra, y nadie se acuerda mas do 61.
10. jEn qu6 se ocupa su amigo de V. ? Entiende en vinos; pero et
oosa que no entiende.
LESSON LVII. 311
11. ^ Como Gsta su csposa de V. ? Ella estd de cuidado, y yo con cnidado.
12. I Esta V. en hacer aquel negocio ? Estoy para hacerlo.
13. gQueda V. en hacer ese encargo por mi? Qucdo en hacerlo y
pierda V. cuidado, que no se quedara por hacer.
14. ^ Es y. mayor de edad ? No, seiior, todavia no ; pero soy mayor
en edad con respecto a mis hermanos.
15. No ponga V. eso por tierra. — No lo pongo por tierra, sino en tierra.
1 6. 2 Piensa V. salir con su empresa ? No, sefior, pero pienso salir
pronto de ella.
17. ^ Tii-6 ese hombre de la espada ? Tir6 de la espada, porque la sac6 ;
pero el miedo le hizo emprender la fuga y la tir6.
18. Don Juan, ^le gusta d Y. vender al fiado? No, sefior, me gusta
vender al contado y de contado.
19. gVolvi6 D. Francisco por la razon? No, sefior, D. Francisco no
ha vuelto a la razon, y por consiguiente no volvio por la razon.
20. I Se acuerda ese hombre con su esposa ? No, sefior, no se acuerdan.
21. ^Se acuerda Y. de lo que le dije a Y. ayer? No, sefior, lo he
ohidado.
22. I Conviene Y. ahora conmigo en que el espafiol es mas facil que el
ingles ? Convengo con Y. en ello.
23. I Le conviene d Y. hacer eso ? No, sefior, no me conviene.
24. I Dio Y. por fin con lo que buscaba ? No, sefior, todavia no lo he
encontrado.
25. Este hombre ha dado en la tema de querer aprender sin estudiar ;
^no le parece a Y. que es una pretension muy ridicula ? Eidiculisima.
EXERCISE.
1. Has the Baron given up his project ? He told me he would like to
give it up, if he could do so honorably.
2. I understand he is an honorable man ? Yes, and he is therefore
respected by aU who know him.
3. Has your brother come to an agreement with that dealer for the
purchase of the horse he was speaking of? It appears not, and that, on
the contrary, he desires to get rid of the one he has.
4. Did you inform the merchant of the order you received from the
"West ? Not yet ; but I intend to let him know of it this very day.
5. Does that woman understand cooking ? She says she does ; and
she handed me a letter from a lady with whom she lived two years.
6. Did the captain draw his sword as soon as he heard his antagonist's
reply? He had already drawn it; but when he heard the reply he
threw down his sword, and ran and gave his hand to the man whom, a "
few moments before, he was resolved to kill.
312
LESSON LVIII.
7. Has your brother sent you the books he promised you ? Ko, and
that need not surprise you, for I can never rely (count) on him for any
thing.
8. That is to say, he never keeps his promise ? That is precisely
what I mean to say. ^
9. Do past participles always agree in gender and number with the
subject of the verb ? Yes, always, except when governed by the auxili-
ary to have.
10. Are there not some participles, past and present, that do not re-
tain the regimen of the verbs to which they belong ? — ITiere are very
many; and, if you like, I will mention some of them. — Be good enough
to do so.
11. I hope you have provided yourself with every thing necessary for
your journey? Everything, except one or two articles which I have
been unable to find.
12. How do you advise me to arrange (dispose) all these books ? I
have only one advice to give you in the matter, and that is, to disj>ose
of them as quickly as you can.
13. Would you like to taste this dish ? No, thank you, I am not fond
of it.
14. Is he not of your opinion ? Not at all ; he always goes (sides)
with his father.
LESSON LYIII
Notar.
To note, to observe, to perceive.
Cazar.
To hunt, to chase.
Chancear.
To jest.
Combinar.
To combine.
Concertar.
To concert, to agree.
Concluir.
To conclude, to finish.
Enfriarse.
To cool, to get (or grow) cold. >
Eucargar.
To charge, to commission, to
order.
Flotar.
To float.
Iraprovisar.
To improvise.
Inspirar.
To inspire.
Repartir.
To divide.
Saltar.
To leap, to jump.
Trinchar.
To carve, to cut.
Cobrar. Brindar.
To collect To toast.
LESSON LVIII
313
A lo 16J03.
A cuestas.
A la espafiola.
Atras.
Abanico.
Apetito.
Aficionado.
Baul.
Buey.
Brindis.
Carro.
Canasto.
Conductor.
Pretexto.
Pefiasco.
Embarcadero.
Piropos (pi.).
Sitio.
Salon.
Vooabulario.
Fan.
Appetite.
Amateur, one
fond of.
Trunk.
Ox.
Toast.
Car, cart.
Basket.
Conductor.
Pretext.
Eock.
Ferry.
Sweet things.
Fare.
Place, spot.
Saloon.
Vocabulary.
At a distance, in the distance.
On one's back, on one's shoulder.
In the Spanish fashion.
Backward, ago, behind.
Blanco.
White.
Bonito.
Pretty.
Durable, duradero.
Durable.
Elocuente.
Eloquent.
Galante.
Gallant
Bello sexo.
Fair sex.
Magnifico.
Magnificent.
Negro.
Black.
Rodeado.
Surrounded,
Vacio.
Empty.
Ala.
Botella.
Gaza.
Chanza,
Oima.
Colina.
Dama.
Imaginacion.
Llave, clave.
Milla.
Pechuga.
Fuerza.
Suerte.
Tarea.
Vocal.
Voz.
Sombra.
Elocuencia.
Wing.
Bottle.
Hunt.
Jest.
Top, summit.
HiU.
Lady.
Imagination.
Key.
Mile.
Breast (of fowl).
Force, strength.
Luck, sort.
Task.
Vowel.
Voice, word.
Shade, shadow.
Eloquence.
COMPOSITION.
Quedamoa en qae saldriamos a las
cinco.
Este canasto es superior k mis fuerzas.
A la salud de las senoras.
14
We agreed (or appointed) to set out (or
start) at five o'clock.
This basket is more than I am able to
manage.
To the health of the ladies.
314
LESSON LVIII.
Decir piropos & las sefioritas.
Sirvase V. pagar al conductor,
i Mire V. qu6 gracia !
(, Que tal le gusta a V. ?
Pongamos los canastos k la sombra.
La subida de la colina con un gran
canasto 4 cuestas, me ha abierto el
apetito.
Me alegro de ver 4 V.
Se alegro de la noticia.
Lo siento mucho.
Me pesa mucho saberlo.
I Cu^ntas personas caben en esta igle-
sia?
No cabiamos todos en el salon.
^Puede caber en tu imagmacion tal
cosa?
Cabe mucho en este haul.
No caber de pi 69.
A mi me cupo en suerte venir 4 la
America.
No caber de gozo.
To say sweet things to the young ladiea
Please pay the conductor.
Only think !
How do you like ?
Let us set the baskets in the shade.
Coming up the hill with a large basket
on my back has sharpened my appe-
tite.
I am glad to see you.
He was rejoiced at the news.
I am very sorry for it (i. «., I feel it
much).
I am very sorry to know it [i. c, it
grieves me much to know it).
How many persons does this church
hold?
The saloon could not hold us all.
Can such a thing enter your imagina-
tion ?
This trunk holds a great deal
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to America.
To be overjoyed.
EXPLANATION.
IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN VERBS.
272. Alegrarse. — The verbs to be glad and to be rejoiced
at are translated by the reflective verb alegrarse ; as.
Me aleffro de ver & V. I I am glad to see you.
Se aleffrd de la noticia. j He was rejoiced at the news.
273. Sentir and pesar. — To be sorry and to grieve^ are
translated by these verbs ; as,
Lo siento mucho.
Me pesa mucho saberlo.
I am very sorry for it (t. «., I feel it
much).
I am very sorry to know it (t. e., it
grieves me much to know it).
274. Caber, to be capable of containing, <fcc. — ^Thls verb
fs employed in different manners in Spanish ; as,
^Cu&ntas personas cabai en esta
iglesia J
How many persons do«s this church
bold (or is it capable of contain-
ing)?
LESSON- LVIII.
315
No cabiamos todos en el salon.
iPuede caber en tu imaginacion tal
cosa?
Cabe mucho en este baul.
No caber de pies.
A mi me cupo en suerte venir d la
America.
No caber en si.
No caber de gozo.
The saloon could not hold us all.
Can such a thing enter your imagina-
tion?
This trunk holds a great deal.
To have no room to stand.
It was my lot to come to America.
To be well satisfied with one'i
To be overjoyed.
self.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Buenos dias, sefiores, ^conque ya todos estan listos? Pues no
habiamos de estar, si son ya las seis y quedamos en que saldriamos a las
cinco.
2. Habriamos estado aqui de los primeros, si no hubiera sido que, des-
pues de baber andado dos 6 tres manzanas, eclio de ver mi esposa que
habia olvidado la Have del cuarto, el paraguas, el abanico, y yo no s6
cudntas otras cosas mas ; pero en fin ya estamos aqui, i cuando partimos ?
Estamos esperando el carro que va al embarcadero de la calle Treinta
y tres.
3c Sefioras, esten Vds. prontas, porque veo venir el carro. — ^Don Mar-
tin, ayudeme V. k Uevar este canasto, porque es superior a mis fuerzas. —
Llame V. a Don Pepito, que no hace mas que decir piropos d las selio-
ritas, porque yo tengo ya dos paraguas y tres nifios de que cuidar.
4. Don Pepe, V. que no tiene nifios, ni canastos, etc., sirvase Y. pagar
al conductor. — (; El diantre del hombre ! ahora me pesa no haber tornado
un canasto.)
5. jEl pasaje caballeros! jCuantos somos? uno, dos, tres, cuatro,
caballeros ; una, dos, tres, cuatro, siete sefioras, esto es : once personas
mayores y catorce nifios.
6. Papa, I esta muy lejos el sitio d donde vamos a pasar el dia? No,
Luisita, solamente unas diez millas.
7. I De este lado 6 del otro del rio ? Del otro, desde aqui lo puedes ver.
8. I No ves alia d lo 16jos, en la cima de aquella colina, una casa blanca
en donde flota la bandera americana ? Si, sefior, es muy bonito sitio y
debe tener muy buenas vistas.
9. Cuidado con los nifios al saltar en tierra, no se caiga alguno al agua.
—J Estan todos fuera ? gNo se ha olvidado nada?— No, sefior.— Pues en
marcha.
10. Don Pepito, tome V. ese canasto, y cuidado no lo deje caer y
rompa las botellas que contiene. — j Hombre, por Dios ! con el pretexto de
que venia con las manos vacias, me ha hecbo V. pagar los carros y el va-
316 LESSON LVIII.
porcito por veinte y tres personas, y ahora me quiere V. hacer cargar
con el canasto del vino.
11. Vamos, Don Pepito, lldvelo V. ahora hasta la cima de aquella co-
lina, que d la vuelta a casa yo me encargo de llevarlo. — jMire V. que
gracia ! d la vuelta 1 qu6 es lo que quedara de una docena de botellas,
despues de beber veinte y tres personas.
12. Nada; el que no ayude a llevar los canastos no pai-ticipard de su
contenido. — Sres., repartamos la tarea ; que los hombres lleven los ca-
nastos, las mamas a los ninos, los ninos los paraguas, y las sefioritas a
Don Pepito.
13. Da. Delfina i qu6 tal le gusta a Y. este sitio ? j Oh ! es delicioso;
J qu6 vistas tan bonitas !
14. Pongamos los canastos d la sombra de ese hermoso drbol. — Si, y
pongamonos nosotros tambien d la sombra, que al sol hace calorcito.
15. gNo le parece d V., Don Enrique, que es tiempo de poner la mesa?
Asi me parece, porque la subida de la colina con un gran canasto a
cuestas me ha abierto el apetito.
16. Sres., la coraida esta en la mesa. — Sefloras, ^qu6 es lo que Vds. di-
cen ? I en la mesa ! | Ah ! si, ya vemos, sobre un gran pefiasco a la sombra
de aquel drbol j magnifica idea !
17. Don Pepito, traiga V. un par de sillas mas, que faltan para dos
sefloras. Alld voy, j cdspita con las sillitas ! cada una pesa cien libras ;
pero, eso si, son durables, no haya niiedo de que se rompan. — Tomen
Vds. asiento, sefloras.
18. Pase v., Don Martin, primero. No, sefior, despues de Y. — Sefio-
res sin cumplimientos que se enfria la comida.
19. ^Qui6n quiere sopa? jHombre, sopa! yo, yo, sirvame Y. un
plato, Don Enrique.
20. Poco d poco, Don Pepito, en el campo, no tenemos sopa. — Pues yo
crci que Y. me la ofrecia. — Yo pregunt6 por saber qui6n era aficionado
d la sopa.
21. Scflor Don Pedro ^quiere Y. hacerme el favor de trinchar ese
polio ? Con mucho gusto.
22. Da. Margarita i voy d mandarle d Y. un pedazo de pechuga ? l^o,
sefior, gracias, radndeme Y. el ala 6 la pierna, que me gusta mas.
23. Don Pepito, un brindis, vamos un brindis. — Exciiseume Yds.,
seflores, yo no 86 hacer, y m6nos improvisar brindis.
24. Pero hombre, \ eso dice Y. que es tan galante y elocuente con las
damas ! j No le inspira d Y. algo el bello sexo de que se halla Y. ro-
deado ? Pues bien, d la salud de las sefloras. — Y iporqu6 no ?
LESSON LVIII. 317
EXERCISE.
1. Has the baker not come yet ? You are in a jesting mood (humor)
this morning ; he came long before you were up.
2. Never mind ; 1 have got change enough to pay for all. — You are
too late, I have already paid ; the conductor has no time to wait half an
hour collecting the fare of each passenger.
3. Your appetite seems to be a little better to-day than usual ; how
do you account for that ? Really you flatter my appetite beyond what it
deserves ; I am happy to say that it is at all times in excellent order.
4. Do you not find it good exercise to climb to the top of the hill
with that heavy basket on your arm ? The fact is I shall have to give it
to some one else for a while, for my strength is not equal to the task.
5. I wonder whom you can give it to; you see that we have each of
us something to carry. Well, in that case, I must change with some one
that has a lighter burden (cargo) than my own.
6. Does not John intend to become a soldier ? He does, though en-
tirely contrary to the will of his father, who set his face against it in the
most determined manner.
7. How many trunks is each passenger (pasajero) allowed to keep
with him in his berth (camarote) ? Only one, supposed to contain the
articles he will require to have at hand during the passage.
8. Did you ever go to a lion-hunt while you were in South Africa ?
Several times, and I can assure you it is a most interesting and exciting
scene.
9. Did you go there entirely for pleasure ? !N^o, I managed to com-
bine business and pleasure, otherwise I should probably never have seen
that country, for you know that such a voyage as that costs a great deal
of money.
10. Did they drink many toasts during the dinner? A good many,
and the first one I proposed was to the fair sex.
11. Nothing surprising in that ; I know it would scarcely be possible to
surpass you in gallantry. You are flattering me now, for the ladies agree
on all hands in calling you the most gallant young gentleman in the
country.
12. Just try if your eloquence will not succeed in persuading your
young friend to come with us to-morrow. With all my heart ; but un-
fortunately he does not speak French, and you know how much my elo-
quence loses in English.
13. Does the art of pleasing depend on what we do and what we say ?
It does not, in my opinion, depend so much on what we do and say as on
how we do things and how we say them.
318
LESSON LIX,
14. Is it not surprising that your sister has not yet come? I believe
she has gone round to see her young Spanish friend {fem.\ although she
left me but half an hour ago, under pretext of having to write a letter.
15. Do you generally dine in the Spanish fashion at home ? We gen-
erally eat in the French fashion, notwithstanding we are all very fond
of the Spanish manner of cooking.
LESSON LIX
Amenazar.
Cojear.
Colgar.
Corregir.
Cubrir.
Cubrirse.
Descubrir.
Descubrirse.
Despedir.
Definir.
Durar.
Rodar.
Prestar.
Veneer.
Cosa de.
Capaz.
Condicional.
Cariredondo.
Casero.
Compafiero.
Claro.
Copulative.
Generoso.
Defectivo.
Libre.
Vulgar.
Vistoso.
To menace.
To be lame, to limp.
To hang.
To correct.
To cover.
To put on one's hat.
To discover, to uncover.
To take oflf one's hat
To send away, to put away, to
give up.
To define.
To last.
To roll, to run on wheels.
To lend.
To conquer.
About.
Capable, able.
Conditional.
Roundfaced.
Household, family, domestic
Companion.
Clear.
Copulative.
Generous.
Defective.
Free, unembarrassed.
Vulgar, common, usuaL
Showy.
LESSON LIX.
319
Asesino.
Assassin.
Barba.
Beard, chin.
Aumento.
Increase, augmen-
Carcajada.
Burst of laughter.
tation.
Decena.
About ten.
Cerrojo.
Bolt.
Delinicion.
Definition.
Campo.
Field, country.
Evidencia.
Evidence.
Corredor.
Broker.
Espalda.
Back.
Dedo.
Finger.
Gana.
Desire, mind.
Dialogo.
Dialogue.
Hoja.
Leaf.
Dolor de costado. Pain in the side.
Loteria.
Lottery.
Deseo.
Desire, wish.
Llave.
Key.
Descuido.
Carelessness.
Pena.
Difficulty, pain.'
Grito.
Shout.
Pera.
Pear.
Gemido.
Groan, moan.
Pobreza.
Poverty.
Pagare.
Promissory note.
Pascua.
Easter.
Presidio.
State-prison.
Rodilla.
Knee.
Peral.
Pear-tree.
Yuelta.
Turn, change.
P6same.
Condolence.
Posicion.
Position.
Premio.
Prize, premium,
reward.
Excuaa.
Excuse, apology.
Salto.
Jump, spring.
Semblante.
Look.
Trago.
Draught, drink.
COMPO
SITION.
Su pagare de V. cae el mes que viene.
Le ha caido la loteria.
Este edificio cae al {or hdcia el) Norte.
Mis ventanas caen a la mano derecha.
Este vestido te cae bien.
No cay 6 en la cuenta.
Ya caigo en ello.
Estar al caer.
Caer de pies, de rodilla3.
JjO doy por hecho.
Lo dieron por libre.
Me doy por vencido.
Le dio un dolor de costado.
La lectura de ese libro te dar 'i gaiias
de dormir.
Al fin dio en la dificultad.
Dar los buenos dias.
Dar las pascuas.
Your note falls due next month.
He has won a prize in the lottery.
This building looks toward the North.
My windows are on the right hand.
This dress fite her well.
He did not see the drift (of what was
said).
Ah, now I see !
To be about to take place.
To fall on one's feet, on one's knees.
I take for granted it is done.
They let him free.
I give it up.
He took a pain in his side.
Reading this book wiU put you asleep
(or make you sleep).
Finally he fell upon the diflficulty.
To wish one good day.
To wish a happy Easter.
S20
LESSON LIK,
Dar el p6same.
Dar la enhorabuena.
Dar gritos.
Dar gemidos.
Dio una carcajada.
Dar a comprender.
Darse u conocer.
Dar una vuelta.
Dar pena.
Dar gusto.
Dar gana.
Dar saltos,
Dio que deeir.
Esto no dice bien con aquello.
El bianco dice bien con el azul.
Su vestido dice su pobreza.
El semblante de Juan dice bien ga mal
genio.
Este peral echa mnehas peras.
Esta planta no ha echado hojas.
He ecbado un trago.
Eche V. la llave k la puerta.
Echar pid k tierra.
Echar el cerrojo.
Echarlo 4 juego {or chanza).
Hoy echan la comedia nueva.
Ha echado coche.
Echar a presidio.
Echar por los campos.
Echaron & correr.
Lo echo todo & perder.
Echar h rodar.
No echo de ver este defecto.
i Echa V. de m6nos algo ?
No, seSor ; echo de m6no8 & ^Iguicn.
Me ech6 h dormir.
Se ech6 d rcir.
Se eeh6 & corredor.
Lo puso de patitas en la c&Qe.
To express condolence.
To congratulate.
To give shouts.
To utter groans.
He burst out laughing.
To give to understand.
To make one's self known.
To take a turn, to go round.
To cause displeasure.
To ^ve pleasure.
To have a mind ; to take the notion.
To jump about.
He left room for talk.
This is not in strict accordance with
that.
White goes very well with blue.
Her dress tells of her poverty.
John's bad temper is pictured on his
countenance.
This pear-tree bears a great many pears.
This plant has not had any leaves.
I have taken a drink.
Lock the door.
To dismount.
To draw the bolt.
To take it in play (or in jest).
The new play comes out to-night.
He has bought a carriage.
To send to State-prison.
To set out across the fields.
They set out running.
He spoiled all.
To send rolling.
1 do not perceive the defect.
Do you miss any thing ?
No, sir ; I miss some one.
I wait asleep.
He began to laugh.
He became a broker.
He threw him mto the street.
EXPLANATION.
275. Tlie verbs caer, to fall ; dar, to give ; decir, to tell,
or to say ; echar, to throw ; differ from the English in meaning
LESSON LIX. ,321
as conveyed by the sentences which are given in the Composi-
tion, and to which we refer without putting them here, in order
to avoid repetition.
There they are to be found, with their English translations,
which is the only explanation they admit of.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Don Gonzalo, i le ha caido a Y. la loteria ? No, sefior ; pero mi
pagare ha caido.
2. Luisita, i quien ha hecho ese vestido que te cae tan hien ? Mi mama
lo corto V yo lo cosi.
3. gNo sabe Y. porqu6 me hace ahora tantos cumplimientos Don En-
rique ? No, sefior, no s6 qu6 motivo tenga para ser ahora mas politico
con Y. que lo ha sido hasta aqui.
4. I No sabe Y. que me ha caido el preraio de los cien mil pesos en la
loteria de la Habana ? Si, sefior ; ya me lo ha dicho Y. antes.
6. Pues bien, g no cae Y. ahora en la cuenta ? j Ha ! ya caigo en ello,
Don Enrique quiere pedu^le a Y. dinero prestado.
6. ^ Han dado las doce ? Estan al caer.
7. I Dieron garrote 4 los asesinos ? No, sefior, al fin los dieron por
libres, porque no habia evidencia suficiente para sentenciarlos.
8. ^ Que ha tenido su hermano de Y. que no lo he visto por tanto
tiempo ? Le di6 un dolor de costado y ha tenido que guardar cama por
una semana.
9. ^A que no adivina Y. lo que acabo de hacer? Seguramente que
no lo adivinar6, porque Y. es capaz de hacer muchas cosas buenas y malas.
10. ^ Se da Y. por vencido ? Me doy. — Pues vengo de echar un trago.
11. ^Que comedia echan hoy? Hoy dan la tragedia de "Medea," en
donde representa la Sefiora Eistori ; i ira Y. ?
12. Siendo en italiano no ire, porque no comprendo el italiano y me
daria ganas de dormir.
13. Sr. D. Alejandro, vengo a darle a Y. los buenos dias. — T6ngalos Y.
muy buenos.
14. ^No me quiere Y. dar alguna otra cosa? Si, sefior, le doy a Y. la
enhorabuena por el aumento que ha tenido Y. en su familia. — Yiva Y.
mil afios.
15. Todo eso es muy bueno, D. Pepito ; pero sea Y. generoso y deme
Y. alguna cosita mas. — Hombre, si Y. no se da a comprender yo no s6
qu6 mas darle a Y. | Ha 1 si, ya caigo ! que estamos en tiempo de. . . .
Doy a Y. felices pascuas.
16. Dale, Dale, si no es eso, yo hablo del dinero que prest6 a Y. hace
14*
322 LESSON LIX.
mas de un afio.— jHa! Sefior D. Alejandro, no crca Y. que yo lo haya
echado en saco roto.
17. Pues bien; ^porqud no me lo da V. ? ;Porqu6! hombre, ahora
ha dado V. en la dificultad, y esta es que yo no ten go dinero, y por consi-
guieute no puedo darlo.
18. Entonces, i que es lo que V. puede dar ? ; ! en cuanto k eso yo
puedo dar muchas cosas.
19. I Ha I me alegro mucho, veamos lo que V. puede dar. — En primer
lugar puedo dar gemidos.
20. |Puf! (pshaw). — Tarabien puedo dar gritos.
21. I Dale! — Puedo dar, .... que decir.
22. InTo lo dudo. — Puedo dar nn pdsame.
23. iDios me libre ! — Puedo dar saltos.
24. Vaya acabe V., hombre, acab6 V. — Puedo dar d comprender.
25. Si, eso si, demasiado comprendo. — Puedo darme d conocer.
26. Ya, ya, conozco de qu6 pi6 cojea V. — Puedo dar una vuelta.
27. Pues vu61vase Y., por donde ha venido y nunca de Y. mas vueltas
por esta casa.— Y todavia mas, puedo dar una carcajada.
28. I Juan ! Juan ! echa a ese hombre de casa, y despues echa la Have
y el cerrojo a la puerta. j Haya picaro ! lo he de echar d un presidio I
29. I Has echado a ese hombre d la calle ? Si, selior, ya lo puse de pa-
titas en la calle.
30. Y I qu6 dijo ? Primero se echo d reir, yo le amenac6 que lo echaria
a rodar y ent6nces echo d correr.
31. El diantre del hombre siempre esta pidiendo dinero prestado y
sobre no pagarlo se viene a reir de uno en sus barbas.— Sefior, jmanda -
Y. alguna otra cosa ? No, te puedes ir, yo voy a echarme d dormir, ese
bribon me ha dado un gran dolor de cabeza.
EXERCISE.
1. Is there any thing in the papers this morning relative to the trial
of the murderer of Smith ? I understand his trial is not to take place
before a month from this time.
2. Why did you not bring your friend with you ? He is not able to
walk very far to-day, owing to a pain in his side, which has troubled him
for the last three days.
3. Did you tell the servant to draw the bolt of the door ? No, but I
told him to lock the door.
4. Who is that I hear groaning ? You hear no one groaning ; it is
some one shouting in the distance.
5. How did your cousin lose his situation ? He owes that misfortune
entirely to his own carelessness.
LESSON LX.
323
6. Charles, are you not going to say good morning to that gentleman?
I need not say good morning to him now, for I have already wished him
a happy Easter.
7. Did that merchant pay his correspondent at Malaga after all? lie
did not pay him ; but he gave him a note at three months.
8. What do you understand by parlor plays (household comedies) in
Spain ? They are plays represented by private individuals* sometimes in
private houses, from which circumstance they take their name.
9. Do you know that round-faced little man who is sitting next to
your uncle ? That is one of the principal actors {actor) in the parlor
plays given at Mr. Gutierrez'.
10. What became of the offender ? The evidence not being sufficient
to prove the crime of which he was accusedf he was let off; otherwise
he would have been sent to State-prison.
11. Did they refuse to give him the things he wanted on credit ? Of
course they did, because no one can rely on him nor give credit to any
thing he says.
12. Will that young man probably obtain the employment he has ap-
plied for ? Most probably he will, because he has had the good fortune
to get into the president's favor.
13. How I do you not attend your classes this week ? No, I am not
very well ; and so a friend of mine was good enough to offer to act in
my place.
14. Was the error corrected before the letter was dispatched ? No, it
was not discovered in time to be corrected.
LESSON LX.
Decidir.
To decide.
Ejecutar.
To execute.
Ejercer.
To exercise.
Ensuciar.
To dirty, to soil.
Enemistar.
To put at enmity.
Escuchar.
To listen to, to hearken to.
Exagerar.
To exaggerate.
Exhibir.
To exhibit.
Extraliar.
To wonder at, to find strange.
Enfriarse.
To grow cold, to get (become)
cold.
* AJieionndos.
+ Acusar.
324
LESSON LX,
Eacargar.
Exclamar.
Exceptuar.
Esforzar.
Estrechar.
Sospechar,
Tardar.
Atolladero.
Camino.
Astr6nomo.
Colera,
Cometa.
Cofre.
Cajon.
Oapricho.
Cuello.
Cargo.
Exterior.
Extranjero.
Embarcadero.
Espejo.
Estrecho.
Elemento.
Gobernador.
Grado,
To commission, to order, to give
charge.
To exclaim.
To except.
To endeavor, to make effort.
To press.
To suspect.
To delay.
Extra.
Extra.
Empero.
But.
Eliptico.
Elliptical.
Agrio.
Sour.
Estrecho.
Close, narrow.
Preciso.
Essential, indispensable, precise.
Elocuente.
Eloquent.
Tonto.
Foolish, stupid.
Travieso.
Mischievous.
Entrdmbosw
Both.
Entretanto.
In the mean time.
Excepto.
Except.
Difficulty.
Road, way.
Astronomer.
Cholera.
Comet.
Chest.
Drawer, box.
Caprice.
Neck.
Cargo, charge.
Exterior, outside.
Foreigner.
Landing.
Mirror, looking-
glass.
Strait.
Element.
Governor.
Grade, degree.
Casaca,
Colocacion.
Civilizacion.
C61era.
Corte.
Cometa.
Cita.
Charla.
Claridad.
Compatlia.
Caja.
Cartilla.
Calentura.
Casualidad.
Cantidad.
Capa.
Cara.
Coat, dress-coat
Situation.
Civilization.
Anger.
Court.
Kite.
Appointment.
Chat
Clearness.
Company.
Box, case, cash
(commercial).
Primer.
Fever.
Chance.
Quantity.
Cloak.
Faoe.
LESSON LX.
325
Horno.
Oven.
Carga.
Charge (of a gun,
Luto.
Mourning.
&c.).
Litro.
Litre.*
Cuchara.
Spoon.
Matematico.
Mathematician.
Culpa.
Fault, blame.
Tonel.
Cask.
Criatura.
Creature, infant.
Term6metro.
Thermometer.
Costa.
Cost, coast.
Ferro-carril.
Railroad.
Disculpa.
Apology.
Fruto.
Fruit (result).
Estacion.
Season.
Fondo.
Bottom.
Existencia.
Existence.
Fliiido.
Fluid.
C0MP05
Fragata.
Mascara.
Tontera.
Pretension.
Yerba.
3ITI0N.
Frigate.
Mask.
Foolish action.
Pretension,
claim.
Grass.
Hoy entra la primavera.
Manana entra el mes de Octubre.
Entra en el numero de los sabios.
Entro a reinar k los quince anos.
Este tonel hace cien litres.
No le hago tan tonto.
Yo le hacia mas rice.
Haz por venir.
Hace de gobemador.
vEsa pobre muchacha est4 haciendo de
madre a sus hermanos.
A eso voy.
Voy de paseo.
Yan de mascara.
Ya de luto.
Le va en ello la vida.
Yengo en ello.
\^ I Cuanto me lleva Y. per esto ?
Estos dos amigos se llevan muy bien.
No nos llevamos bien.
Este camino lleva d Madrid.
Le llevo dos anos y medio.
Me Ueve chasco.
Spring commences to-day.
The month of October commences to-
morrow.
He is of the number of the learned.
He began to reign at fifteen years of age.
This cask holds 100 litres.
I do not take him for such a fool.
I took him to be richer.
Try to come.
He is acting as governor.
That poor girl is acting the part of a
mother to her brothers and sisters.
That is the point I am coming to.
I am going for pleasure.
They are going in masks.
He is in mourning.
His life is at stake.
I agree to that.
How much will you charge me for this ?
These two friends agree very well to-
gether.
We do not agree well together.
This road leads to Madrid.
I am two years and a half older than he.
I was disappointed.
* Equal to 2.113 American pints.
326
LESSON LX.
Lleva una casaca k la francesa.
Se hizo a la vela.
Manda que nos traigan el almuerzo.
Har6 que nos lo traigan.
(, Hace V. tenir su vestido de azul ?
No, senor, lo he mandado tenir de verde.
Saldra buen matemdtico.
Sail 6 muy travieso.
Ya he salido de todos mis granos.
Me salio una buena coloeacion.
Este negoeio me ha salido bien.
Le salio mal su empresa.
Este niiio ha salido 4 su padre.
Salio de la regla.
Pronto saldr6 de hijo de familia.
Esta capa me sale en cincucnta pesos.
Se salio con su pretension.
Sirve al rey.
No sirve para nada.
Sirvase V. admitir mis disculpas.
El tarda mucho en decidir.
1 Cuanto tarda en responder !
; Adios ! Volver6 k ver k V., y le vol-
ver6 a hablar de eso.
Este vino se vuelve agrio.
Se volver4 bueno con el tiempo.
/Este melon sabe k melocoton.
Este vino huele k vinagre.
D. Juan hace un gran papel en la corte.
Napoleon III hace un gran papel en la
politica del mundo.
He wears a coat made in the French
fashion.
He set sail.
Order the breakfast to be served up.
I shall have it brought to us.
Are you getting your dress dyed blue ?
No, sir, I have ordered it to be dyed
green.
He shall turn out (to be) a good mathe*
matician.
He (or she — ^the child) turned out very
naughty.
I have got rid of all my grain.
A good situation turned up for me.
This business has turned out well for me.
His imdertaking turned out badly.
This child resembles his father.
He departed from the rule.
I shall soon be of age.
This cloak cost me fifty dollars.
He obtained what he desired.
He serves the king.
It is good for nothing.
Be good enough to accept my apology.
He is slow in deciding.
How long he is in answering !
Good-by ! I shall see you again, and
talk more to you on the subject
This wine is turning sour.
It will become good again in time.
This melon has the taste of a peach.
This wme smells of vinegar.
John makes a great noise at court.
Napoleon III. plays a great part in the
politics of the world.
EXPLANATION.
276. In the Composition of this lesson we give the princi-
pal idioms with the verbs entrar, to go (or come) in ; haccTy to
do, to make ; iV, to go ; Uevar, to take, to charge ; mandar,
hacer, in the sense of to order, to cause to be done ; oler d, to
to' smell of; and saber d, to taste of; scdiry servir, tardar and
volver.
LESSON LX. 327
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Cuando entra la primavera? Debo confesar francamente que no
s6 el dia precise en que entra y sale cada estacion.
2. Entonces V. no entra en el mimero de los sabios, puesto que no
Babe cuando estamos en invierno j cuando en verano. — Poco a poco,
senor Don Pedro, eso seria hacerme entrar en el mimero de los idiotas.
3. I Pues no acaba V. de decirlo ? Yo acabo de decir que no s6 el
dia preciso en que entra cada estacion ; pero cuando veo crecer la yerba
J las bqjas de los arboles, y abrirse las flores, sospecho que estamos en la
primavera.
4. j Ha ! V. sospecba ! Yamos, ya es algo. — Si, sefior, y del mismo
modo, cuando veo el terraometro en la sombra, que marca 98°, creo
adivinar que estoy, una de dos, 6 en un borno 6 en Nueva York en la
estacion del verano.
5. Vamos, yo le hacia a Y. mas ignorante de lo que en efecto es;
^y c6mo adivina Y., 6 sospecba, que se encuentra Y. en el otoflo?
Cuando los melocotones se acaban y las hojas caen.
6. I Bien ! bien ! ^ y el invierno ? Cuando por la mafiana no puedo
lavarme por hallar que se ha helado el agua en la palangana.
7. Ya veo que es Y. un sabio perfecto. Yeamos en bistoria i k qu6
edad entro a reinar el Key Pepino? — jCaspita! Sefior Don Pedro! es
mas facil criticar que ejecutar, y mas facil hacer preguntas que respon-
derlas, y sino respondame Y. que la ecba de sabio.
8. I Cuantos litros bace ese tonel ? | Hombre ! yo i que be de entender
de medir toneles ?
9. Pues cambiar6 de materia, ^qui^n bace de gobernador en Manila?
; Y a mi qu6 me importa !
10. I Yaya ! ese es un buen modo de salir del atolladero.— No, sefior, sir-
vase Y. recibir mis disculpas, tengo que irme abora, pero volver6 a ver A
v., y volver^mos a tratar de esa materia. Adios, sefiores.
11. gQu6 le parece a Y., Don Enrique, de ese caballero? Me parece
que este joven saldra buen matematico, porque ha salido en todo a su
padre.
12. I Sabe Y. si sali6 bien 6 mal de su emprcsa ? Es un negocio que
le ha salido muy bien.
13. ^ Se lleva bien Luisa con sus hermanos ? Si, sefior, y aunque no les
lleva mas de tres 6 cuatro afios, les sirve de madre.
14. ^Cuanto le cuesta i Y. esa capa? Me sale en unos cincuenta
pesos.
15. I Cudnto tardara la fragata en hacerse a la vela ? No s6, creo que
el capitan es hombre que tarda en decidirse.
I
828 LESSON LX.
16. ^Do qu6 color hace V. teflir su vestido? Lo mand6 tetiir de
amarillo.
17. Don Manuel, mande V. que nos suban el almuerzo. — Har^ que nos
lo traigan.
EXERCISE.
1. "When does Spring commence? It commences in March and ends
in May.
2. Has your young friend passed his examination yet ? The exami-
nations have not taken place ; but when they do, he will prove to be the
best Spanish scholar in the country.
3. In what month does the cold weather generally commence in the
North of Spain ? Winter usually sets in about the middle of November.
4. How much does this cask hold ? It holds from 100 to 120 litres.
6. How soon do you set out for Europe ? As soon as the fine weather
sets in.
6. Are you going on business, or for pleasure ? For pleasure only.
7. How are they going to the ball ? They are going in masks.
8. How much did your tailor charge you for that coat? It cost me
forty-five dollars.
9. "What age do you take my cousin to be ? I would take him to be
about the same age as his friend.
10. You had better guess again. I give it up.
11. How old is he, then ? He is two years and four months older than
his friend.
12. Do you know whether the pianist's brother succeeded in obtaining
the position he applied for? He did not; but an excellent situation
turned up for him a short time after.
13. How long will you take to dye this dress for me? About a week.
14. "What color do you wish it to be dyed ? I wish to have it dyed
blue.
15. Do you think this boy will turn out to be as good a musician as
his father ? I have not the least doubt about it, for he resembles him in
every respect (en todo).
16. Be good enough to accept my apology for not having come yester-
day as I had promised. Certainly, sir; I know very well that you have
a great deal of business to attend to.
17. "Who is Mr. Terrero in mourning for? For his uncle, who died
about a year ago in Manila.
LESSON LXI.
32a
LESSON LXI
Felicitar.
To felicitate, to congratulate.
Fiar.
To trust.
Ignorar.
To be ignorant of, unaware of.
Tiastimar.
To burt, to wound.
Improvisar.
To improvise, to do (any thing)
off-hand.
Inquietar.
To make uneasy, to cause anxiety.
Intentar.
To attempt, to intend.
Interrogar.
To interrogate, to question.
Invertir.
To invert, to invest.
Interesar.
To interest, to be of interest.
Invitar.
To invite.
Imprimir.
To print.
Obligar.
To force, to oblige.
Eehusar.
To refuse.
Lisonjear.
To flatter.
Llevar.
To carry, to take, to charge.
Descuidado.
Careless.
Final.
Final
Ignorante.
Ignorant.
Impersonal.
Impersonal.
Increible.
Incredible.
Indefinido.
Indefinite.
Inexplicable.
Inexplicable.
Ingenioso.
Ingenious.
Inmediato.
Immediate, close by, next
Inquieto.
Uneasy, restless.
Justo.
Just, right.
Ultimo.
Lnst.
Lisonjero.
Flattering.
Especiero.
Grocer.
Loco.
Mad.
Lento.
Slow.
Solemne.
Solemn, cruel.
De Zeca en Meca.
To and fro.
A ciegas.
With one's eyes shut
A galas.
On all fours.
En el interin.
In the mean time.
830
LESSON LXI.
Ampo de la nie- Whiteness of
Anchuras (f.j)!.). Ease.
ve.
snow.
Cuba.
Cask, toper,
Asno.
Ass.
drunkard.
Descuido.
Carelessness.
Cara.
Face.
Hueso.
Bone.
Cartilla.
Primer.
Golpe,
Blow, stroke.
Calabaza.
Pumpkin, refusal.
Dares y tomares. Dispute.
Imaginacion.
Imagination.
Indicc.
Index.
Intencion.
Intention.
Ingenio.
Genius.
luterrogacion.
Interrogation.
Insecto.
Insect.
Inversion.
Inversion.
Instinto.
Instinct.
Justicia.
Justice.
Instrumento.
Instrument.
Llave.
Key.
Interrogante.
Question, note of
Lluvia.
Eain.
interrogation.
Lista.
List.
Italian©.
Italian.
Lisonja.
Flattery.
Arco iris.
Rainbow.
Luna.
Moon.
Galicismo.
Gallicism.
Luz.
Light
Hierro.
Iron.
Latitud.
Latitude.
Juego-
Play.
Longitud.
Longitude.
Loco.
Madman.
Legua.
League.
Lugar.
Place.
Letra.
Letter.
Latin.
Latin.
Limosna.
Alms.
Sonido, I
Son. 1
Sound.
Limpieza.
Cleanness.
Liuea.
Line.
Pico.
Beak.
Levita.
Frock-coat.
Levita.
Levite.
Kama.
Branch.
Uso.
Use, custom.
Teja.
Tile.
Objeto.
Object.
Ocasion.
Occasion.
Oido.
Ear, hearing.
Vergtlenza.
Shame,
Olfato.
SmeU.
COMrOS
3ITI0N.
A maa tardar.
At latest.
A media palabra.
At the slightest hint
A medida do sus
ieseoa.
According to one's
wishes.
A sus anchuras.
At one's ease.
Al descuido y con
cuidado.
Studiously careless
Abrir el ojo.
To be upon the alert.
Alia se las haya.
Let him look to that
Andar k ciegaa.
To grope in the dark.
Andar & gatas.
To creep on all fours.
A todo corrcr.
With all speed.
LESSON LXI.
331
Vaya V, con Dios.
El va de capa caida.
El va de Zeca en Meca.
Ir de puntillas.
Andar en dares y tomares.
Andarse por las ramas.
De tejas abajo.
Asir la ocasion por los cabellos.
Bailar al son que se toca.
Beber los aires or los vientos.
Beber como una cuba.
BLmco como el ampo de la nieve.
Bocado sin hueso.
Burld burlando.
Buscar cinco pies al gato.
No caber de gozo.
No caber en si.
No cabe en el.
Caor de su asno.
Caersele a uno la cara de vergUenza.
Callar el pico.
Chanzas aparte.
Con mil amores.
Con su pan se lo coma.
Conque, hasta la vista.
Cosa que no esta en la cartilla.
Dar a alguno con las puertas en la cara.
Dar a luz.
Dar por supuesto, or por scntado.
Dar chasco.
Dar el si.
Dar golpe una cosa.
Dar calabazas.
No se le da nada.
Go in peace.
He is crest-fallen.
He goes roving about, to and fro.
To go on tiptoe.
To quarrel.
Not to come to the point.
Humanly speaking.
To take time by the forelock.
To go with the stream.
To desire anxiously.
To drink like a fish.
White as the driven snow.
An employment without labor ; a sine-
cure.
Between joke and earnest.
To pick a quarrel.
To be overjoyed.
To be bursting with pride.
He is not capable of such a thing.
To acknowledge one's fault.
To blush with shame.
To hold one's tongue.
Jesting aside.
Most willingly.
That is his own business.
I hope we may soon meet again.
Something out of the common way.
To shut the door in one's face.
To pubUsh ; to give birth to.
To take for granted.
To disappoint.
To consent.
To strike one with admiration, or as-
tonishment (said of things).
To give the mitten.
He cares nothing about it.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. ^Le salen a Y. las cosas k medida de sus deseos? Chanzas aparte,
Don Juan, V. sabe bien que de tejas abajo eso nunca sucede.
2. Si, pero como V. baila al son que se toca y sabe asir la ocasion por
/os cabellos, siempre esta a sus anchuras y tiene siempre algun bocado
sin hueso. — Amigo, caiga V. de su asno y confiese de buena f6 que si
832 LESSON LXl.
anda de capa caida, es porque va siempre de Zeca en Meca, y porque
bebe mas que una cuba.
3. Adios, Don Pedro, me voy, porque no quiero buscar cinco pies al
gato. — Vaya Y. con Dios, Don Juan.
4. Don Pedro, me parece que V. ha dado con la puerta en la cara d
Don Juan. — No, seflor, Don Enrique, 4 otro se le caeria la cara de ver-
guenza, pero a 61 no se le da nada, y pronto lo volvera V. k ver por aed.
6. Eut6nces 61 no entiende a media palabra. — A mas tardar lo vera
V. aqui otra vez dentro de media hora.
6. El pobre hombre anda k ciegas, y si no abrc el ojo, ira a parar a
un hospital. — Con su pan se lo coma, y alia se las haya ; yo lo siento so-
lamente por su nifia, que es una sefiorita perfecta.
7. Me ban dicho que Y. queria casarse con ella, i es verdad, Don En-
rique ? — Si, sefior, y lo hubiera hecho con mil amores, porque ademds de
ser muy araable 6 instruida, es muy bonita, tiene ojos negros muy her-
mosos y es tan blanca como el ampo de la niev©.
8. Pues gporqu6 no se cas6 Y. con ella? Por una pequefia difi-
cultad.
9. Quizd Y. 86 andaria por las ramas y no sabria asir la ocasion por
los cabellos. — No, sefior, nada de eso, dntes al contrario yo lo daba todo
por supuesto, porque Y. sabe que soy rico, y crei que la nifia me daria
el si sin hacerse de rogar.
10. ^Pues qu6, no se lo di6 ? No, sefior, no me di6 el si, pero me di6
calabazas.
11. jMiren la rapazuela! ^y Y. que hizo? Yo que bebia los vientos
por ella, y creia que sus calabazas eran cosa que no estaban en la cartilla,
recurri a su padre, creyendo que 61 no me negaria la mano de su hija.
12. ^Y bien y qu6? Que me llev6 un solemne chasco, el padre me
rehu86 la mano de su hija ni mas ni m6nos que ella lo habia hecho.
13. J Pero qu6 razon le di6 a Y. para ello? Me dijo que su hija, aun-
que pobre, era hija de un caballero y que ni ella querria ni 61 la obligaria
jamas a casarse con un especiero comun 6 ignorante ; que el dinero era
una gran cosa, pero que no lo compraba todo.
14. ^Y Y. qu6 dijo? Yo, por no andar en dares y tomares y dimes
y dir6tes, me call6 el pico y sali do su casa d todo correr.
EXERCISE.
1. "Would you not bo more likely to obtain what you wish, if you
came to the point at once ? Perhaps I would ; but the matter is an im-
portant one, and I considered it necessary to enter into some explanation
relative to it.
LESSON LXI. 333
2. Do yon tWnk he would understand me ? Of course he would, at
the slightest hint.
3. How did your cousin Charles succeed in that affair ? Every thing
turned out according to his wishes.
4. How soon do you suppose this book will he published ? I hope it
will be published in a very short time ; I know they are working at it
with all possible speed.
5. Have you ever seen a more active man than that merchant?
ITever ; and I have never seen a less active man than his brother, he
always goes with the stream, and troubles himself about nothing.
6. Ought you not to have shown that letter to your brother ? I
would have done so, of course, but I took for granted that he had already
heard the news.
7. You had better tell your friend to be upon the alert, and not get
into a quarrel with that man. That is his own business, let him look to
it himself.
8. Is it possible that he could be capable of such an action? Yes,
but the worst of all is, that he is not ashamed to acknowledge it to every
one he meets.
9. When is Peter to be married ? I cannot say certainly ; but I
suppose in about a month at latest.
10. I don't know any one who has a better position than your uncle :
plenty of money and scarcely any thing to do. That is a fact, his situ-
ation is a real sinecure.
11. What has occurred to that gentleman ? he looks quite crest-fallen.
Bo not be astonished at that ; he has been unfortunate in business, and
has lost almost all he possessed in the world.
12. Are you trying to pick a quarrel with me? Ko, I assure you,
jesting aside, that the matter stands exactly as I say.
13. How was he received by the lady's father? He was not received
at all, they shut the door in his face.
14. If you desire so anxiously to see him, why do you not go to his
house ? I cannot make up my mind (decidirme) to do that ; you know
he is bursting with pride, and he would very probably refuse to receive me.
15. Well, I hope we may soon meet again; present my respects to
your family. With the greatest pleasure. — Please not to forget the letter.
16. That I care nothing about ; all I desire to know is whether he will
be here in time or not. I think you may rely on his being punctual.
17. I have been told that your brother was about to be married to
Miss Ramirez ; is it true ? I really cannot say how the matter wiU turn
out ; so far every thing seems to go on according to the desire of both
parties.
334
LESSON LXII,
LESSON LXII,
Aplicar.
To apply.
Cebarse.
To feed, to gloat
Echar a perder.
To spoil.
Errar.
To err, to miss.
Ocurrir.
To occur.
Murmurar.
To murmur, to grumble.
Madrugar.
To rise early.
Medir.
To measure.
Montar.
To mount, to amount.
Mudar.
To change, to move.
Nacer.
To be born, to spring up, to pro-
ceed.
Sazonar.
To season, to ripen.
Reunirse.
To unite, to collect together, to
assemble.
Modificar.
To modify.
Desprevenido.
Unawares, unprepared.
Intachable.
Unimpeachable, unquestionable-
Maldito.
Perverse, confounded.
Mayiiscula.
Capital (letter).
Miniiscula.
Small (letter).
Numeral.
Numeral.
Noble.
Noble.
Nominativo.
Nominative.
Neutro.
Neuter.
Masculino.
Masculino.
Objetivo.
Objective.
Quieto.
Quiet, at rest.
Cumpleafios.
Birthday.
Apariencia. Appearance.
Menoscabo.
Detriment, less-
Bravata. Bravado.
ening.
Botica. Drug store.
Pique.
Point, verge.
Fiesta. Feast, holiday.
Rayo.
Thunderbolt.
Centella. Spark, flash.
Socio.
Associate, partner.
Siesta. Siesta (afternoon
Sabor.
Taste, savor.
nap).
Menudo,
Change, small
Suerte. Luck, fortune,
change.
chance.
LESSON LXII.
335
Meridiano.
Meridian.
Murmuracion.
Murmurings.
Metal.
Metal.
Malicia.
Malice.
Miembro.
Member.
Mente.
Mind.
Mineral.
Mineral.
Muestra.
Sample, sign.
Momento.
Moment.
Manera.
Manner.
Mozo.
Youth, waiter.
Manteca, orman
- Butter.
Macho.
Male.
tequilla.
Maestro.
Master, teacher.
Medida.
Measure.
Manuscrito.
Manuscript.
011a podrida.
Sort of mixed
Mar.
Sea.
dish.
Olor.
Smell, odor.
Ostra.
Oyster.
Olivar.
Olive ground.
Negacion.
Negation.
Ostion. (See
Oyster.
Mar.
Sea.
Ostra.)
Negativa.
-N'egative.
Palo.
Wood, stick.
Nota.
Note.
Polvo.
Dust, powder.
Zaga.
Rear-guard.
Pane.
Cloth.
Parabien.
Felicitation, con-
gratulation.
COMPO
SITION.
Debuenas a primeras.
Without ceremony.
De buena fe.
With sincerity.
De mala fe.
Deceitfully.
De intento.
On purpose.
De oidas.
By hearsay.
Decir por decir.
To talk for the sake of talkmg.
Dejar k uno colgado.
To frustrate one's
hopes.
Dejar 4 uno en la calle.
To strip one of his all.
Dejar atras los vieutos.
To go quicker than the wind.
Dejar correr.
To go with the world.
Dejar el campo libre.
To yield to one's
competitors.
Dejar en bianco.
To leave blank.
Dejarse alguna cosa en el tintero.
To forget to say something.
Dia de eumpleano
3.
Birthday.
Saber algo de buena tinta.
To know any thing on good authority.
De dia en dia.
From day to day.
De un dia para otro.
From one day to another.
De hoy en ocho dias.
This day week.
Un dia si y otro no.
Every other day.
Hoy dia.
Now-a-days.
Dicho y hecho.
No sooner said than done. ,
336
LESSON LXII
Dormir 4 pierna suelta.
Dormir la siesta.
Echar a perder algo.
Echar bravatas.
Echar rayos y centellas.
Echar la culpa a alguno.
Echar suertes.
Empeuarse en hacer algo.
Empenarse por alguno.
En un abrir y cerrar de ojos.
Encenderse en colera.
Errar el tiro.
Erre que eire.
Escarmentar en cabeza agena.
Estar a pique de perderse.
Estar de casa.
Estar de fiesta.
Estar en ascuas.
Estar en lo que se dice.
Estar k sus anchuras.
Estar sobre si.
Estar desprevenido.
Estar mano sobre mano.
i Estus en tua cinco sentidos ?
To sleep at one's ease.
To take an afternoon nap.
To spoil any thing.
To brag, to boast.
To be furious, enraged.
To throw the blame on any one.
To cast lots.
To insist upon doing any thing.
To interest one's self for any one.
In the twinkling of an eye, in a trice.
To fly into a passion.
To miss one's aim.
Obstinately.
To take warning by others' misfortunes.
To be within an ace of being lost.
To be in dishabille.
To be merry.
To be upon thorns.
To comprehend what is said.
To be at one's easa
To be on one's guard.
To be oflf one's guard.
To be idle.
Are you in your senses ?
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. Sefiores, dcjen Vds. el campo libra, que aqiii viene Don Pepito
echando bravatas j rayos y centellas. — Bien venido, Don Pepito, iqu6
trae V. de nuevo, qne parece estar fuera de si ?
2. No, sefior, yo estoy en mis cinco sentidos, pero hay gentes de mala
f6 que hablan por hablar y se ocnpan <Je criticar al pr6jinio. — ^ Y eso 4
qu6 viene?
8. Yo no lo digo por V., Don Enrique, pero V. sabe qne hay muchos
desocupados que se vienen d sii botica de V. y critican d todo el mnndo. —
I Vamos, vamos 1 Don Pepito, que d V. tambien le gusta un poquito la
murmuracion.
4. Ciertamente, porque sino i qu6 seria de la conversacion sin un po-
quito de critica que la sazono y le d6 interns ? Muy bien, pero ent6nces
no eche V. la culpa d nadie de hacer lo mismo que V. hace.
5. Si, pero yo hablo sin nialicia, de buena f6 y digo lo que me ocurre
por decirlo, nada mas. — Asi pueden decir los demda.
6. Si, pero yo no soy como Don Cdrlos, que viene aqui de dia en dia,
LESSON LXII. 337
y de la inaflana i la tarde hablando mas que un sacamuelas y sin dejar a
nadie hueso sano. — Si, pues apliquese V. el cuento.
7. No, sefior, yo no soy ni tan hablador ni tan murmurador como
ninguno de los que se reunen aqui, y si no, observe V. un poquito a cada
uno de ellos, D. Gonzalo, por ejemplo, ^ha venido hoy? No, senor, no
ha venido, ni vendra, porque es el dia de su cumpleafios y lo celebra con su
familia en el campo, por consiguiente puede V. cebarse en 61 a su sabor.
8. D. Gonzalo es hombre de buenos sentimientos y hombre honrado,
no haya miedo que yo diga nada en menoscabo suyo, pero tiene un
maldito genio que le hace echar a perder toda conversacion.
9. Pues yo no habia observado eso. — ; 06mo hombre ! pues si viene
aqui un dia si y otro no, A criticar a los que se reunen en la botica de la
esquina, y los dias que no viene aqui va a la botica de la esquina a criti-
carnos a nosotros.
10. ^ Y que es lo que le hace echar a perder las conversaciones como
decia V. pocos minutos ha ? Que en un abrir y cerrar de ojos se en-
ciende en c61era.
11. Bien, por D. Gonzalo, ^y nuestro vecino, D. Alberto, ese si que es
intachable, no le parece a V. ? ; Ho ! en efecto es un excelente hombre,
lastima que errase el tiro.
12. ^Que quiere V. decir con eso de errar el tiro? Hablo con respecto
d sus negocios.
13. Y bien, i qu6 le sucedio ? Que escogi6 malos socios, y le han de-
jado en la calle.
14. Pero eso no puede ser, Don Alberto goza de muy buena reputa-
cion, Y. habla de oidas. — No, senor, que lo s6 de buena tinta, y hoy dia
esta a pique de perderse.
15. Pues 61 parece dormir i pierna suelta. — Esta obligado d hacerlo asi
por guardar las apariencias.
16. ^ No se ha dejado Y. algo en el tintero ? Sin duda que me he de-
jado, pero es tarde y voy a dormir la siesta.
EXERCISE.
1. Is the custom of taking an afternoon nap as common in Spain
now-a-days as in former times ? It is quite as common now-a-days as it
ever was, not only in Spain, but in almost every country of Europe.
2. Are you perfectly certain that he acted with sincerity in that mat-
ter ? I am quite sure, as I know it on good authority.
8. Who told you that young man had acted deceitfully toward your
cousin? I do not care to say much in the matter, especially as all I
know respecting it I only know by hearsay.
15
338
LESSON LXIII,
4. Can yon tell me how that merchant's enterprise turned out ? Very
badly ; for shortly after he had engaged in it, he heard of his brother's
misfortune, which frustrated all his hopes.
5. Did Alexander manage to pay his debts after all ? No, he did not ;
and although his intentions were strictly honorable, his creditors {acree-
dores) would wait no longer, and they stripped him of all he possessed in
the world.
6. What date do you wish me to put here ? Just leave a blank, and
Charles will put in the- date before he sends the letter off.
Y. When do you think they will be able to give me some of the
papers ? Probably by this day week.
8. What did he say when he saw how the tailor had spoiled his coat ?
Fortunately for the latter he was in a merry mood, and did not fly into a
passion as he usually does when any tiling occurs to displease him. .
9. Are you in your senses, my dear friend ? are you not aware that
such a thing is impossible ?
10. Did he shut the door on purpose ? Yes, but he sent his servant to
take us into another room, for he was in dishabille, and did not wish to
be seen until he had dressed.
11. How often do you go to dine at your nncle's? I generally go
every other day.
12. Have your friends returned yet from the country ? No, they have
been putting it off* from day to day for some time, and I shall not be in
the least astonished if they do not return before November.
13. Why did you not bring your sister with you ? I did all I possibly
could to persuade her to come, but she insisted upon staying at home.
14. How did they decide on who should go first ? They cast lots for it
LESSON LXIII.
Retirar.
To retire, to withdraw.
Pegar.
To stick, to adhere, to beat.
Pescar.
To fish.
Posponer.
To place after.
Preceder.
To precede.
Prometer.
To promise.
Razonar.
To reason.
Eesfriarse,
To take cold.
Eegalar,
To regale, to present.
»Posi
yoner.
LESSON LXIII
339
-[
En frente.
Frente por frente
De hito en hito.
De grado.
Por fas 6 por nefas,
In front, opposite.
Fixedly, with open eyes.
By fair means.
Justly or unjustly.
1 Oascaras I
Dear me! Oh!
Afortunado.
Fortunate.
Ageno.
Foreign, belonging to others.
Formal.
Formal, steady, respectable.
Pasivo.
Passive.
Perezoso.
Lazy.
Personal
Personal.
Posesivo.
Possessive.
Potencial.
Potential.
Precise.
Precise, necessary, obligatory.
Preliminar.
Preliminary.
Pret6rito.
Preterit.
Puntual.
Punctual.
Partitivo.
Partitive.
Eadical,
Radical.
Raro.
Rare, curious.
Reciproco.
Reciprocal.
Reflexivo.
Reflective.
Rubio.
Fair (of the hair and complexion).
Ruin.
Mean.
Alarde.
Bulto.
Ganso.
Bledo.
Diente.
Desafio.
Espadachin.
Estribo.
Mequetrefe.
Pasaje.
Pedazo.
Perro.
Plazo.
Plomo
Boast.
Bulk, bundle.
Goose.
Straw.
Tooth.
Challenge,, duel.
Bully.
Stirrup.
Trifling fellow,
meddler.
Piece.
Bog.
Term.
Lead.
Bulla.
Baza.
Hu^speda.
Puntuacion.
Puntualidad.
Paciencia.
Paja.
Polvora.
Perseverancia.
Porcion.
Prenda.
Pronunciacion.
Koise, uproar.
Trick (card-play-
ing).
Hostess.
Punctuation.
Punctuality.
Patience.
Straw.
GunpoM^der.
Perseverance.
Portion, number.
Good quality,
jewel.
Pronunciation.
340
LESSON LXIII.
Porqu6.
Reason why.
Propiedad.
Propriety, prop-
Ptiblico.
Public.
erty.
Principio.
Principle, begin-
Pulgada.
Inch.
ning.
Raiz.
Root.
Kasgo.
Trait.
Rebanada.
Slice.
Recado.
Message, errand.
Reforma.
Reform, reforma-
Recibo.
Receipt.
tion.
Rector.
Rector, director.
Regla.
Rule.
ftefran.
Proverb.
Reina.
Queen.
Reldmpago.
Flash of light-
Repeticion.
Repetition, re-
ning.
hearsal.
Relojero.
Watchmaker.
Resolucion.
Resolution.
Regalo.
Present.
Rosa.
Rose.
Reposo.
Rest, repose.
Rutina.
Routine.
Resfriado.
Cold.
Suma.
Sum.
ReumAtismo.
Rheumatism.
Sutileza.
Subtilty, fineness.
Rev^s.
Wrong side, back.
Salida.
Departure.
Rincon.
Corner.
Silaba.
SyUable.
Ruisefior.
Nightingale.
Soledad.
Solitude.
Sustancia.
Substance.
Subida.
Rising ground,
going up.
Suegra.
Mother-in-law.
COMPO
SITION.
Faltar 4 su palabra.
Guardarse de alguna cosa.
Hablar k bulto.
Hablar k tontas y k locaa.
Hablar al aire.
Hablar al oido.
Hablar al alma.
Hablar entre dientes.
Hablar por boca de ganso.
Hacer k uno perder los estribos.
Hacer de las suyas.
Hacer alarde de.
Hacer la cuenta sin la hu6speda.
Hacer caso de.
Haberla {or hab^rselas) con alguno.
Irse de la memoria.
Irselc k uno la cabeza.
To break one's word.
To take care not to do a thing (not to
attempt to do a thing).
To speak at random.
To speak without rhyme or reason
To talk vaguely.
To whisper into one's ear.
To speak one's mind.
To mutter.
To echo what another has said.
To make one lose his temper.
To show off one's tricks.
To boast of.
To reckon without the host
To pay attention (or respect) to.
To dispute (or contend) with any ona
To escape one's memory.
To lose one's reason.
LESSON LXIII,
341
Van cien duros 4 que es cierto.
Llevar a mal.
Mai de su grado.
Mal que le pese.
Manos a la obra.
Meter bulla.
Meterse a caballero.
Meterse a sabio.
Meterse con alguno.
Meterse en camisa de once varas.
Meterse en todo.
Meterse en vidas agenas.
Mirar de hito en hito.
Mostrar las suelas de los zapatos.
Nacer de pies.
Nada se me da de ello.
No dejar meter baza.
No cabe mas.
No estar para fiestas.
No le pesa de haber nacido.
No se me da un bledo.
No tener arte ni parte en alguna cosa.
Perder cuidado.
For ce 6 por be.
Por fas 6 nefas.
No Uegard la sangre al rio.
I wager a hundred dollars that it is true.
To take any thing amiss.
Unwillingly.
In spite of him.
To set about a work.
To make a noise, a bustle.
To assume the gentleman.
To affect learning and knowledge.
To pick a quarrel with any one.
To interfere in other people's business.
To meddle in every thing.
To dive into other people's affairs.
To look steadfastly at.
To take to one's heels.
To be bom to good luck.
I care nothing about it.
Not to allow one to slip in a word.
Nothing more can be desired.
To be out of temper.
He has no mean opinion of himself
I do not care a straw.
To have no hand in any thing.
Not to fear, to make one's self easy.
Some way or other.
Right or wrong.
There is nothine; to be feared.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. D. Pepito ha faltado a su palabra, 6 i cree Y. qu6 vendra todavia?
I Que ha de venir ! Si 61 habla siempre a tontas j a locas.
2. Pues yo crei que prometid formalmente venir hoy. — Don Pepito
no habla nunca formalmente.
3. iDe qu6 manera habla ent6nces? De muchas, 61 habla al aire,
4 bulto, al oido, entre dientes, por boca de ganso; pero nunca habla
al alma.
4. Eeto hara perder d cualquiera los estribos. — A esto le Uama 61, ha-
clendo alarde, hacer de las suyas.
5. Si ; pero 61 se las habra conmigo, porque ha hecho la cuenta sin
la liu6speda. — D. Luis, no haga V. caso, es un mequetrefe, si Vds. quieren
yo ir6 a su casa y le har6 venir mal de su grado, 6 mejor dicho, mal que
le pese.
6. No, sefior, no vaya Y., es un horabre que se mete en todo. — Y en
eso tiene Y. razon, porque 61 se mete con todo el mundo.
842 LESSON LXIII.
7. T hasta se mete d sabio y a caballero. — Lo pcor es que mete
mucha bulla.
8. jVaraos, sefiores, en qu6 mas se mete el pobre D. Pepito? Se
mete en camisa de once varas, en vidas agenas, etc., etc.
9. Pero, sefiores, no olviden Vds. que si por ce 6 por be, lo llegase &
saber, D. Pepito, y por fas 6 por nefas hubiese un desaf io, no lo olviden
Vds., vuelvo a repetir que Don Pepito es un gran espadachin. j Yaja!
pierda V. cuidado, que no llegara la sangre al rio.
10. I Don Pepito espadachin I Cascaras! — Van cien pesos i que si le
miro de hito en liito, muestra las suelas de los zapatos.
11. V. no debe llevarlo d mal, aunque Don Pepito sea tan su amigo;
pero es muy hablador y no deja d nadie meter baza. — Yo no teogo arte
ni parte en ello y no se me da un bledo.
12. ^Se acordd V. de decir aquello i su vecino el Sr. Foster? Ko, se-
Cor, se me fue de la memoria.
13. ^ Es un j6ven muy afortunado ? Si, sefior, ha nacido de pi6s ; pero
s6 que no le pesa de haber nacido.
14. V. no debe criticarlo, porque ahora no esta para fiestas. — A mi no
se me da un bledo de que est6 6 no de mal humor.
15. Hable V. bajo 6 hdbleme V. al oido, porque veo al Sefior Foster
alii en frente y V. debe guardarse de que le oiga hablar de ese modo,
porque lo llevaria d mal. — Pierda Y. cuidado que no llegara la sangre al
rio.
EXERCISE.
1. Does that man always keep his word ? I have never known him
to break his word on a single occasion.
2. Peter is very sorry that Alexander went away without him, and
I do not know what he would have done if John had left him.
3. John took good care not to start at the same time as his elder
brother, for he well knew that he would have been obliged to show him
every thing worth seeing in the city.
4. He very often talks for hours together without rhyme or reason,
to the very great annoyance of those who have to listen to him.
5. BeUeve me, it is no proof of talent to talk away at random for an
hour at a time, without saying any thing that could be called either new
or agreeable.
6. I cannot support a man who is so ignorant as to come and whisper
something in my ear while I am engaged in conversation with another.
7. iSTot one of those ideas is his own, he only echoes what he has
heard said by others.
8. I would advise you to pay no attention to any thing ho tells yon.
LESSON LXIV.
343
9. Judging by his manner of speaking, one would say he had lost his
reason.
10. I will wager fifty dollars that not one word of all you have read
and heard on that score {solve esa materia) is true.
11. I suppose you have already heard of my good fortune? I V'ave;
and I need not tell you how glad I was to know you had succeed( ^.
12. Did you hear all the president said ? Every thing ; he spoke very
loud, so that all those that were present might not lose a word.
13. Although he affects great learning and knowledge, I have had oc-
casion to find out (discover) that he is a very ignorant man.
14. I know very well that he has no mean opinion of himself; but,
after all, his greatest fault is to dive a little too much into other people's
affairs.
LESSON LXIV
Alumbrar.
Soltar.
iSuponer.
Situar.
Significar.
Saludar.
Sobrar.
Sonreirse.
Soplar.
Sonrojarse.
Sufrir.
Suplicar.
Suspirar.
Rasgar.
JRebajar.
Rebanar.
Recitar.
Recomendar.
Referir.
Regular.
Remendar,
Remediar.
To light.
To loose, to let go.
To suppose.
To situate.
To signify.
To salute, to bow to.
To remain over, to be too much,
too many.
To smile.
To blow, to prompt.
To blush.
To suffer, to bear.
To supplicate, to beseech.
To sigh, to long after.
To tear.
To lower.
To cut in slices.
To recite.
To recommend.
To refer, to tell, to relate.
To regulate.
To mend.
To remedy, to help.
S44
LESSON LXIV
Kepasar.
Representor,
Kesolver.
Zafar.
To look over (a lesson, &c.).
To represent, to lay before.
To resolve.
To disembarrass.
fi'gorra.
Sponging, at the expense of others.
Deperilla.
To the purpose, at the proper
time.
Oascos i la gineta.
On one's high horse.
A raya.
Within bounds, at bay.
A solas.
All alone.
Siquiera.
Even, only.
En suina.
In a word, in
fine.
Santo.
Holy, saintly.
Sutil.
Subtil, fine.
Silencioso.
Silent.
Sordo.
Deaf.
Sustantivo.
Substantive.
Sucio.
Dirty, filthy.
Atrevimiento.
Assurance, dar-
Blanca.
Mite.
ing.
Bula.
BuU (of the Pope).
Caerpo.
Body.
Flaqueza.
Weakness.
Inconveniente.
Objection.
Gorra.
Cap, lady's bon-
Esfuerzo.
Effort, endeavor.
net.
Descaro.
Barefacedness.
Calzas(/cwi.^Z.)
. Breeches.
Fondos (pL).
Funds.
Pieza.
Piece.
Matrimonio.
Matrimony.
Trastienda.
Back shop.
Modismo.
Idiom.
Tienda.
Store, shop.
Prove cho.
Profit, benefit.
Tigeras.
Scissors.
Yugo.
Yoke.
Tai-jeta.
Card (visiting or
Trapo.
Rag.
business).
Saber.
Learning, knowl-
Traza.
Mien, appearance.
edge.
Trampa.
Trap, cheat.
Sacacorchos.
Corkscrew.
Traduccion.
Translation.
Saldo.
Balance.
•
Salto.
Leap, jump.
COMPO
SITION.
Quedarse en bianco.
Quedarse heebo una pieza [or helado).
To be left in the lurch.
To be thunderstruck, to remain aa-
tonished.
LESSON LXIV.
345
Querer decir.
Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza. *
Sacar provecho.
Sacudir el yugo.
Salir a luz.
Salir con algo.
Salir los colores k la cara.
Saiga lo que saliere.
Salirse con la suya.
Santo y bueno.
Sin mas aca ni mas all4.
Sin qu6 ni para qu6.
En nombrando al ruin de Roma luego
asoma.
Sobre la marcha.
Tan claro como el sol [cr como el agua).
Tener k m^nos hablar a uno.
Tener k uno a raya.
Tener algo en la punta de la lengua.
Tener buen diente.
Tener bula para todo.
Tener el pie en dos zapatos.
Tener los cascos a la gineta.
Tener su alma en su cuerpo.
Tomar el cielo con las manos.
Tomar la ocasion por los cabellos.
Tomar las (calzas) de Villadiego.
Vamos claros.
Venir a m6nos.
Venir al caso.
Venir con las manos lavadas.
Venir de perilla.
Venir una cosa pintada.
Verse negro.
Vestirse con veinte y cinco alfileres.
Dicho y hecho.
To mean.
To make a virtue of a necessity.
To turn to account.
To shake oflf the yoke.
To be produced, to be published.
To gain one's end.
To blush.
Come what may.
To have one's own way, to accomplish
an object.
Well and good.
Without ifs and ands.
Without rhyme or reason.
Speak of the devil, and his imps ap-
pear.
Off-hand (instantly).
As clear as daylight.
Not to deign to speak to one.
To keep one at bay.
To have any thing on the tip of one's
tongue.
To have a good appetite.
To have permission to do what one
likes.
To have two strings to one's bow.
To be hare-brained, to have little judg-
ment.
To do what one thinks proper.
To be transported with rapture, to be
enraged.
To profit by the occasion.
To take to one's heels.
Let us understand one another.
To decline in any way.
To come to the point.
To wish to enjoy the fruit of another's
labor.
To come at the nick of time, or to fit
exactly.
A thing to suit (or fit) exactly.
To be afflicted, embarrassed.
To be dressed in style, to be decked
out.
No sooner said than doce.
Hacer de la necesidad virtud.
346 LESSON LXIV.
Vivir de gorra.
Vivir k 8U8 anchas (anchuras).
Zifarse de alguna cosa.
To live at another's expense.
To live at one's ease.
To get clear (or rid of) any thing.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. iQu6 qm'ere decir quedarse en bianco? Quiere decir lo mismo
que quedarse A la luna de Valencia, esto es, quedarse sin nada.
2. ^ Y quedarse hecbo una pieza 6 belado, qu6 quiere decir ? Son
modismos que indican admiracion 6 sorpresa.
3. I Quiere V. explicarme algunos modismos espafioles ? No tengo
inconveniente, pregtinteme V. el significado de los que no comprenda V.
— Muy bien.
4. Sacar fuerzas de flaqueza, i qu6 quiere decir ? Yo creo que es hacer
esfuerzos ; pero tambien significa, hacer de la necesidad virtud.
5. Sacar provecbo, creo que no necesita explicacion j si la ocasion sc
presenta, creo que sabr6 sacarlo. — i Y qu6 me dice V. acerca de sacudir el
yugo ? Que aquellos que tengan algun raal yugo que sacudir deben na-
cerlo sobre la marcba.
6. Santo y bueno, pero V., i no tiene ningun yugo que sacudir ? No,
^eflor, es verdad que estoy bajo el yugo del raatrimonio ; pero no deseo
zafarme de 61, porque para mi aunque es yugo, es un yngo santo que me
ha hecbo muy feliz y bajo el cual deseo vivir todavia muchos alios.
7. J No le parece & V. que aquel horabre vive de gorra ? Si, sefior,
aqui se venia todos los dias con sus manos lavadas y se nos comia un codo.
8. ^ Y porqu6 no lo ecb6 V. de su casa ? j Asi lo bice ayer, y si V. lo
bubiera visto! parecia querer tomar el cielo con las manos !
9. I Vaya un atrevimiento I Al fin me vi obligado d amenazarle con
una silla, y ent6nces tom6 las de Villadiego.
10. Creo que dntes era rico, pero ahora ha venido d m^nos. — No, lo que
ea tener, todavia tiene.
11. No hombre, si no tiene sobre qu6 caerse muerto. — Perdone V., si
V. quiere que, para practicar en los modismos del verbo tener, le diga a
V. lo que ese buen sefior tiene, se lo dir6 d V.
12. Santo y bueno. — Pues ent6nces alld va sin qu6 ni para qu6.
13. Pero hombre, gpara qu6 sacar d la colada los trapos de ese buen
hombre ? Si eso es tan claro como el sol que nos alumbra.
14. Vamos claros, i quiere V. 6 no que le diga lo que ese sefior, que
se viste con veinto y cinco alfilerea, tiene ? Pero si no viene nl cnso.
15. Entonces se acabard el ejercicio sin poder introducir en la prdctica
la mitad de los modismos que tenemos en la leccion. — j Ah ! si, si, tiene
V. mil razones, escucho, i qu6 cs lo quo esc buen sefior tiene ?
LESSON LXIY. 347
16. En primer liigar tiene buen apetito y buen diente. — jCaspital qu6
si lo tiene I IJ ^ quien se lo cuenta V. ?
17. Tiene siempre algo en la punta de la lengua y nunca tiene nada en
el bolsillo.
18. Y segun el descaro con que obra, parece tener bula para todo;
tambien tiene los cascos a la gineta y con tanto tener creo que es mas lo
que le falta que lo que tiene.
1 9. Yo no s6 c6mo tenerlo a raya, i no me hara V. el favor de aconse-
jarle que no venga mas por aqui ? Amigo mio, digaselo V. mismo, por-
que yo tengo a m6nos hablar a una persona de su especie.
20. Y sin embargo, vea V., 61 tiene el pi6 en dos zapatos, i y que mas
tiene ?
21. D6jeme Y. pensar, j ab ! si, el pobre sefior tiene todavia otra cosa
mas. — Bien, pues, digala V., que se acaba el ejercicio.
22. Tiene su alma en su cuerpo. Hombre, calle Y., que aqui viene
^1 en persona. — Si, en nombrando al ruin de Eoma, luego asoma.
23. Buenos dias, D. Juan. — T^ngalos Y. muy buenos, D. Periquito,
I qu6 se ofrece ? Yengo a pedirle a Y. diez pesos prestados, que me ven-
drian de perilla, j porque me veo negro !
24. Hombre pidaselos Y. al Sr. De Y. que estd en fondos, en cuanto a
mi me encuentro sin blanca.
EXERCISE.
1. I understand your brother was left entirely in the lurch ? Not at
•All ; on the contrary, he came off (turned out) much better than I did.
2. How did he feel when he learned that I had heard of the whole
matter ? He was thunderstruck, and could not give me any reply.
3. How are you going to manage in such a case as that ? I have only
to make a virtue of necessity.
4. I think there is little danger of his not succeeding ; what do you
think (what appears to you) ? Not the least ; he is very prudent, and
knows how to turn every thing to account.
5. Do you remember when that article was published ? I do not re-
member exactly ; but it appears to me it must have been some time in
last November.
6. You see that is what I told you the other day would take place.
Yes, that is true ; but you seem to have forgotten the condition I men-
tioned to your friend as he was going out.
7. Is Mr. Martinez not going to be here, as he promised ? I am ex-
pecting him. — We shall wait until seven o'clock ; if he comes before that
time, well and good ; if not, we shall go on with the business of the
evening without him.
348
LESSON LXV,
8. Well, let ns tmderstand each otlier before going any farther. It
seems to me we understand each other perfectly ; the thing is as clear as
daylight.
9. Oh, Charles I I am so glad to see you ! you have just come at the
nick of time ; we shall have the pleasure of your company at dinner.
You are very kind ; but really you must excuse me ; I have a friend
waiting for me.
10. You lost your coat ? how did you come home in the cold without
it ? Alexander lent me one of his that fitted me exactly.
11. No sooner said than done ; he took his hat and went out in search
\>f him, notwithstanding it rained in torrents.
12. You may be at ease in your mind on that score ; I shall manage to
get rid of him very soon.
13. I wish you would come to the point, for up to the present I have
been unable to find out what you mean.
14. One would have said, from the manner in which he was (viendolo)
decked out, that he was going to the theatre or to a ball instead of to
the office.
LESSON LXV.
Aventurarse.
Apretar,
Cobrar.
Desafiar.
Escaldar.
Enhebrar.
Enzarzar.
Enfadarse.
Hilar.
Juntar.
Madrugar.
Prevenir.
Relucir.
Sustentar.
Trasquilar.
Tapar.
Trampear.
Tragar.
To venture.
To tighten, to urge.
To collect.
To challenge.
To scald.
To thread (a needle), to link.
To sow discord.
To get angry.
To spin.
To join.
To rise early.
To warn, to infonu.
To shine.
To sustain.
To shear.
To cover up, to close up.
To impose upon, to deceive.
To swallow.
LESSON LXV.
349
Trasnochar.
To sit up all night.
Terminar.
To terminate.
Tolerar.
To tolerate.
Tornar.
To return, to do over again.
Tranquilizar
•
To tranquillize, to make any one's
mind easy.
Tutear.
To address any one in the second
person singular, to speak fa-
miliarly to.
Expresivo.
Expressive.
Justo.
Just.
Duro.
Hard.
Necio.
Silly, foolish.
Practico.
Practised, experienced.
Ciego.
Blind.
Tuerto.
Blind of one eye.
Trigueflo.
Dark (of the complexion).
Tin to.
Colored, red.
Tonto.
Foolish.
Tramposo.
Deceitful, swindling.
Terminante.
Decided.
Tranquilo.
Tranquil, quiet.
A borbotones.
Bubbling, hurriedly, confusedly.
Palabras mayores.
Offensive words or expressions.
No ser rana
To be able and expert.
J Caramba !
Dear me ; Hah !
Asador.
Spit (for roasting).
Cola. Tail.
Copo.
Flake (of snow).
Danza. Dance.
Entendedor.
One who under-
Divisa. Motto.
stands.
Familiaridad. Familiarity.
Herrero.
Blacksmith.
Miel. Honey.
Menosprecio.
Scorn, contempt.
Mona. Monkey.
Hortelano.
Gardener.
Fama. Fame, notoriety.
Dado.
Dye.
Moderacion. Moderation.
Proverbio.
Proverb.
Oveja. Sheep.
Sayo.
Sort of loose coat
Kecesidad. Necessity.
or jacket.
Pareja. Pair.
Pecbo.
Breast.
Rana. Frog.
350
LESSON LXV.
Raton.
Mouse.
Yiga.
Beam.
Tio.
Uncle.
Tenacidad.
Tenacity.
Bebedor.
Toper, tippler.
Tos.
Cough.
(All these are masculine.)
Soliloquio.
Soliloquy.
Tirabuzon.
Corkscrew.
Suegro.
Father-in-law.
Trineo.
Sleigli.
Sugeto.
Person, indi-
Tacto.
Touch.
vidual.
Talento.
Talent.
Sobrino.
Nephew.
Tel6grafo.
Telegraph.
Sin6nimo.
Synonjme.
Tenedor.
Fork.
Silencio.
Silence.
T6rraino.
Term.
Sentido.
Sense.
Trigo.
Wheat.
Semblante.
Countenance,
Term6metro.
Thermometer.
looks.
Torno.
Lathe.
Secreto.
Secret.
Toque.
Touch, ringing
Trato.
Intercourse,
(of bells).
treatment.
Titulo.
Title.
Trav6s.
Breadth (of a
thing).
COMPOJ
Trago.
3ITI0N.
Draught, drink.
A buena gana no hay pan dure.
A Id hecho pecho.
A quien se hace do miel las moscas se
lo comen.
A quien madruga Dies le ayuda.
Al buen entendedor con media palabra
basta.
Al fin se eanta la gloria.
Antes que te cases mira lo que haces.
Antes cabeza de raton que cola de leon.
Aunque la mona se vista de seda mona
se queda.
Bien vengas mal si vicncs solo.
Cada oveja con su pareja {or Dies los
cria y ellos se juntan).
Cada uno juzga por su corazon el
agcno.
Cada uno hacc de su capa un sajo.
Hunger is the best sauce.
What is done cannot be helped.
Smear yourself with honey, and you
■will be devoured by flies.
The early bird catches the worm.
A word to the wise is sufficient.
Boast not till the victory is won.
Look before you leap.
Better be the head of a mouse than
the tail of a lion.
A hog in armor b still but a hog.
Misfortune never comes alone.
Birds of a feather flock together.
Every man measures other people's
com in his own bushel.
Every one may do as he likes with his
own.
LESSON LXV.
351
Cada uno sabe donde le aprieta el za-
pato.
Cobra buena fama y Achate k dormir.
Como el perro del hortelano, que ni
come ni deja comer.
Cuenta y razon sustentan amistad.
Del mal el menos.
Debajo de una mala capa se encuentra
un buen bebedor.
Dime con quien andas, y te dire quien
eres.
Donde fueres haz como vieres.
Lo mejor de los dados es no jugarlos.
En boca cerrada no entran moscas.
En casa del herrero asador de palo.
En tierra de ciegos el tuerto es rey.
Gato escaldado del agua fria huye.
Ir por lana y volver trasquilado.
Hombre prevenido nunca fue vencido.
La caridad bien ordenada empieza por
uno mismo.
La mucha familiaridad es causa de me-
nosprecio.
La necesidad carece de ley.
La tenacidad es divlsa del necio.
Lo que no se puede remediar se ha de
aguantar.
Mas vale tarde que nunca.
Mar vale pajaro en mano que ciento
volando.
Mientras en mi casa estoy rey soy.
Nadie puede decir de esta agua no be-
hevL
No es oro todo lo que reluce.
No hay mal que por bien no venga.
No la hagas no la temas.
Poquito a poco hilaba la vieja el copo.
Quien bien te quiere te hara Uorar.
Quien mucho habla mucho yerra.
Every one knows where the shoe pinch-
es him.
Get the name of early rising, and you
may he a-bed all day.
Like the dog in the manger.
Short reckoning and long friends.
Of two evils, the lesser.
We should not judge the book by the
cover.
Tell me your company and I will teU
you what you are.
When at Rome, do as Rome does.
The best throw at dice is to throw them
away.
A close mouth catches no flies.
No one goes worse shod than the shoe-
maker's wife.
In the land of the blind, the one-eyed
man is king.
A burnt child dreads the fire.
The biter bit.
Forewarned, forearmed.
Charity begins at home.
Too much familiarity breeds contempt.
Necessity has no law.
A wise man will change his mind ; a
fool never.
What can't be cured must be endured.
Better late than never.
A bird in the hand is worth two in the
bush.
A man's house is his castle.
No one can tell what is to happen to
him.
All is not gold that glitters.
It's an ill wind that blows nobody good.
Do no evil, and fear no harm.
Rome was not built in a day.
Spare the rod, and you will spoil the
child.
Who speaks much often blunders.
352
LESSON LXV,
Quien no sc aventura no pasa la mar.
Ya que la casa se quema caleatemonos.
Vemos la paja en el ojo ageno y no la
viga en el nuestro.
Tu enemij]ro es de tu oficio.
Never ventjjre, never win.
Let us make the best of a bad job.
We see the mote in our neighbor's eye,
and not the beam in our own.
Two of a trade never agree.
CONVERSATION AND VERSION.
1. J Hay muchos proverbios en espafiol ? Hay muchisimos ; en todas
las lenguas los hay, pero en la espafiola creo que hay tantos que si se reu-
niesen todos formarian varies voldmenes.
2. iLe gustan 4 Y. los proverbios? Si, sefior, son muy expresivos,
pero debemos usarlos, como decia D. Quijote, con moderacion y no a
borbotones como Sancho Panza.
3. En eso tiene Y. razon, porque quien mucho habla mucho yerra.—
Y. acaba de aplicar ese muy bien ; pero es imposible que practiquemos con
todos los que trae esta leccion, en este ejercicio.
4. Sin embargo, al que madruga Dios le ayuda. — Y. dice bien, y quien
no se aventura no pasa la mar.
5. Espero que quien nos oiga conversar introduciendo tanto refran,
no diga de ellos lo que se dice de los males. — i Qu6 dicen de los males ?
Bien vengas mal si vienes solo.
6. I Oh ! no, selior, en primer lugar los proverbios no son males, y en
segundo lugar a nosotros nos gustan, y queremos practicar con ellos, para
aprenderlos. — Y. esta en lo justo, y ademds, cada imo hace de su capa un
sayo.
7. i Ola, amiguito 1 Y. me parece practice en la materia, pero no piense
Y. quo yo soy rana, porque deb^yo de una mala capa se encuentra un
buen bebedor. — Caramba jque no me deja Y. meter bazal no se dir4 de
Y. aquello de, en boca cerrada no entran moscas.
8. Yamos amigo, ese refran vino por los cabellos. — Pues si vino per
los cabellos, d pelo vino, ademds, que Y. me parece ser de aquellos-que
ven la paja en el ojo ageno y no la viga en el suyo.
9. No se enfade Y., amigo, que quien bien lo quiere le hard llorar.—
No, sefior, no me enfado, pero ya veo que no es oro todo lo que reluce.
10. j Bravo I bravo! ya va Y. aprendiendo d enzarzar refranes, lo
hace Y. cual otro Sancho Panza, y yo, con toda mi prdctica, he ido pot
lana y he vuelto trasquilado. — Su ejemplo de Y. me ird enseCando; pa*
quito d poco hilaba la vieja el copo, y dime con qui6n andas y te dir6
qui6n eres.
11. iQu6 hombrel si Y. va d ganar d su maestro 1 pero no hay mal
que por bien no venga; Y. me hace reir con sus refranes.— Bien, del mal
cl m6nos, pero D. Manuel, i cs posible que lo haya de ganar su discipulo ?
LESSON LXV. 353
12. No se, no puedo decir de esta agua no bebere, y lo que no se puede
remediar se lia de aguantar, y al fin se canta la gloria.— jZape, como los
enhebra ! pero yo no me doy por vencido, seiior maestro, porque yo ya
s6 aquello de cobra buena fama y echate a dormir.
13. La tenacidad es divisa del necio, y al buen entendedor con media
palabra basta. — Si, pero esas ya son palabras mayores, y a quien se hace
de miel las moscas se lo comen, y mientras en mi casa estoy, rey soy.
14. Espero, D. Carlos, que no me quiera Y. poner fuera de su casa.— ^
No hombre, pero estos refranes son tan expresivos que le hacen decir a
uno mas de lo que quiere ; pero a lo hecho pecbo y ya que V. me desa-
ii6, siga la danza.
15. Bueno, si Y. lo quiere, ya que la casa se quema calent^monos ; pe-
ro bien haria Y. antes que se case en mirar lo que hace, porque cada uno
sabe donde le aprieta el zapato. — Amigo mio, Y. no sabe de la misa la
media ; yo nunca doy mi brazo a torcer, y antes quiero ser cabeza de
raton que cola de leon.
16. Si, sellor, pero aunque la mona se vista de seda, mona se queda, no
sea Y. como el perro del hortelano, que ni come ni deja comer, y acu6r-
dese Y. que cuenta y razon sustentan amistad y lo mejor de los dados es
no jugarlos. — Basta, basta, bombre me doy por vencido.
17. No la hagas no la temas ; tu enemigo es de tu oficio. — Pero, D.
Carlos, le repito. . . .
18. La caridad bien ordenada entra por si misraa. — Pero si repito
que. . . .
19. Donde quiera que fucres baz como vieres. — Sefior, me rindo. — ^Mas
vale tarde que nunca.
EXERCISE.
1. Well, Charles, so you have come at last. Yes, better late than
never, you know ; but if it had continued raining I would not have
come at all.
2. Are you going out ? I thought we were going together to the
theatre this evening. — I must go out now ; but should I get back as soon
as I expect, we shall still have time to go to the theatre.
3. If you undertake that journey, I should like to be your companion.
It is rather doubtful at present whether I shall ; but if I do, I would be
delighted to have your company.
4. If the directors establish that as a general rule, very many persons
will sufi'er great loss.
5. The conditions were, that if he did not discover the error, or if,
after having discovered it, he could not rectify it, he should lose his place.
354 LESSON LXV.
6. lie said he would have no rest until he should hear some news of
that poor young man.
7. He promised that I should have the place, if it were in his power
to procure it for me.
8. In case his efforts should not he attended with success, you may
rely upon me to do all in my power to advance {proinover) your interests.
9. Their embarrassments will not cease so long as they do not intro-
duce some system of reasonable economy.
10. Peter tells his stories so well, and with such an appearance of
truth, that one is actually tempted to believe them.
11. They made so many conditions, that it was clear they had no wish
to help us.
12. Why did you not take that book? I would not take it because
some leaves were wanting.
13. If there is any thing within (in) my reach with which I can serve
you, ju8t* let me know.
14. Whatever he may have been in his youth, he is now a respectable
man, and beloved (loved) by everybody that knows him.
* English words In italics, not to be translated.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS
GRAMMATICAL AND IDIOMATICAL PECULIARITIES OP THE SPANISH LAN-
GUAGE, NOT HITHERTO TREATED OF LN THE GRAMMAR.
In order to acquire a thorough knowledge of a language, it
is necessary to compare carefully the different uses of the
several parts of speech in the native language and in the one
proposed to be learned.
The sense of a whole passage is very often changed by the
undue suppression or omission of an article, a preposition, or a
conjunction; by using one tense of a verb for another; placing
an adjective before its noun when, in order to convey the idea
intended, it should go after it ; and not unfrequently by trans-
lating a certain part of speech by a word which, although its
appearance would lead us to take it for the equivalent of the
word to be interpreted, bears in reality no relation to the sense
designed to be expressed.
We have deemed it convenient, therefore, to devote a
few pages of our Combined Method to such general remarks
as are necessary to guide the learner, and which, if attentively
observed, will, after the study of the Spanish exercises con-
tained in the preceding lessons, enable him to compose purely
and idiomatically in the Castilian language.
The Definite Article.
1. It has already been observed in previous lessons, which
are the most usual cases where the definite article is ex-
pressed in the Spanish language ; but there are many others
in which it would be altogether incorrect to express or omit it
366
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES,
in Spanish, as in English, as may be seen from the following
examples, which may serve as a general rule for all those of
the same kind :
6 Est4 el rey en palacio ?
Es costumbre en Espana.
Su tio firmo por 61, en ausencia de
su padre.
Decia verdad.
A tres de junio.
Tuvo valor para responder.
A mediado3 de agosto.
Is the king in the palace ?
It is the custom in Spain.
His uncle signed for him, in the absence
of his father.
He told the truth.
On the 3d of June.
He had the courage to answer.
In the middle of August.
2. In Spanish the article is at times accompanied by a
preposition not required in English ; as,
Hace del caballero. ( He plays Oie gentleman.
Indefinite Article.
3. The so-called indefinite article (more properly adjective)
is, as has been observed in one of the early lessons, frequently
employed in English; and when translating from the latter
language into Spanish, we either suppress it entirely or render
it by some other part of speech ; as,
Tiene derecho sobre este caudal
A distancia de . . .
C&diz es puerto de mar.
Es otro Alejandro.
En medio siglo {or dentro de medio
siglo).
Volver6mos dentro de media hora.
Las obras de otro {or obras agenas).
Hubo tiempo en que . . .
He has a right to (or a claim upon)
this capital.
At a distance of , . ,
Cadiz is a seaport (town).
He is another Alexander.
In half a century.
We shall return in half an hour.
The works of another (or another's
works).
There was a time in which , . .
Personal and Possessive Pronouns.
4. The use and repetition of the personal and possessive
pronouns are more frequent in English than in Spanish ; and
that seeming redundance is essential to the clearness and pre-
cision of the English language ; but Spanish syntax does not
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 357
submit to such encumbrances, and they are, therefore, generally
suppressed, as will be seen from the following examples :
Es verdad.
Llueve.
Hace frio.
i Porque es menester ?
El mismo principe.
Su misma madre.
]S1 mismo lo vio.
It is true.
It is raining (or it rains).
It is cold.
Why is it necessary ?
The prince him&elt
His mother herself.
He saw it Aimself.
5. Before leaving the pronouns, it is proper to remark that
one and ones, so often used in English composition, to avoid
the unpleasant repetition of nouns, have no equivalent what-
ever in Spanish, and are hence to be left out in translating from
the former language to the latter ; as,
f, Tiene V. caballos ? I Have you horses (or any horses) ?
Tengo dos buenos. | I have two good ones.
6. Personal pronouns, when used redundantly in Englisli,
as in the following example, are never expressed in Spanish :
Ambos perecieron. | Both of them perished (or were lost).
7. Even whole members of sentences are, not unfrequently,
suppressed in translating from English into Spanish ; as,
Todo no podia entrar en un elogio, I All could not find place in a eulogy,
mas 81 en una satira. j but all could ^nd place in a satire.
Observe that the repetition of the words italicized in the
English sentence is avoided by means of the adverb si in Span-
ish, which serves to correct the negation expressed in the first
member of the phrase, thus rendering the latter at once shorter
and more elegant.
Ellipsis.
8. There are certain short modes of expression, certain
grammatical laconicisms, peculiar to the English language,
w^hich are not admissible in Spanish ; the ellipses must in such
cases often be filled up ; as,
Jamas hubo orador qiie hablase
mejor.
De ahi dimanan estos errores.
Never did orator speak better.
Hence these errors.
358
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES,
No puede pensar en hactr mal.
La ciudad reducida k cenizas.
No va mal para »er nino.
Su madre banada en lagrimas.
Aungne todos estuviesen juntos.
Esto €s por lo que toca d su persona.
En pro y en contra.
Con la espada en la mano.
He cannot think of evil.
The city in ashes.
Not bad for a child.
Her mother in tears.
They were all together.
So much for his person (or personal
appearance).
For and against.
Sword in hand.
N. B. — ^It is also correct to say, Espada en mano.
Inversion.
Although we have spoken at some length, in Lesson LI., on
the subject of inversion, we imagine the learner will not be
displeased to meet here a few well-chosen examples which will
give him a still clearer idea of the order observed in Spanish
for the expression of ideas, and the consequent difference of
construction between that language and the English.
9. The substantive often precedes its adjective ; as,
Es el hombre mas perfect© del
mundo.
Llave falsa.
)
Testigo falso.
Su hijo mas joven.
He is tho most perfect man in the
world.
False key.
False witness.
Her youngest son.
10. Instances occur, however, of the inversion talcing place
in English, while the natural construction is followed in Span-
ish ; especially in the case of past participles acting as verbal
adjectives ; as,
Una vez destruido este fundamento,
todo se viene abajo.
Admitida esta libortad,
puede . . .
el hombre
This foundation being once destroyed,
the whole (edifice) comes to the
groimd.
This liberty (being) once admitted, roan
may . , .
11. In all cases similar to that of the following example,
the possessives mio, tuyo^ suyo are placed after the substantive,
and then, of course, they retain their final syllable ; as.
El otro hijo suyo. ( His other son.
12. The same ideas are in not a few instances presented in
GBAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
359
Spanish in an order very different from that followed in Eng-
lish :
It is not to destroy that he has come,
but to build up.
I see (very) well that . . .
If you had an agreement to make.
{If you had to make an agreement would, of course, also be an allowable construction
in English.)
No ha veuido para destruir, sino para
edificar.
Bien veo que , . .
Si tuviese V. que hacer una contrata.
No tenia razon aquel filosofo que
decia que . . .
Toea remunerar los servicios al que
los recibio.
Entre los Griegos, los que . . .
£l que mas hablaba.
Cien veces mas quisiera yo que . . .
Solo Dios es inmutable.
That philosopher who said that . , ,
was wrong.
It is for him who received the services
to reward them.
Those amongst the Greeks, who . . .
He who spoke the most.
I would prefer a thousand times that . .
God alone is unchanging.
Nouns.
13. There is a striking difference to be observed in the use
of nouns in the two languages; we sometimes meet nouns in
the singular in English, while in Spanish they are used in tlie
plural only, and vice-versd :
FluraL
Mirar con malos ojcs.
Puso los ojos en mi.
Dar oidos k , » ,
Prestar oidos.
Depies a cabeza.
Por todas partes.
Juego de manos.
Se present© con los ojos en el suelo.
Singular.
A pie descalzo.
Estar en pie.
A rerru) y vela.
En toda stierte de negocios.
No son dueiios de si.
Singular.
To look with evil eye.
He set his eye on me.
To give ear to , . .
To lend an ear.
From head to foot.
In every direction.
Sleight of hand.
He came forward with downcast eye.
Plural.
With bare/<?rf (or in (his) hoxefeet)
To stand on (one'c)/ee<.
With oars and sails.
In all sorts (or kinds) of business.
They are not masters of themselves.
One Part of Speech for Another.
14. It is not uncommon, in comparing English and Spanish
composition, to see adjectives translated by substantives, ad-
860 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
verbs by substantives, substantives by verbs, and vice-versd.
Sometimes, in translating, difficulties, appearing at first sight
almost insurmountable, are overcome by the simple substitu-
tion of one part of speech for another.
Adjectives for Substantives.
Pica de guapo (or presumido de
guapo).
Es acusado de impio.
Se pone furioso.
He piques himself on his bravery.
He is accused of impiety.
He gets into a fury.
Substantives for Adverbs, and vice-vers&.
Aunque idolatras de origen. I Although originally idolaters.
Come excesivamente. I He eats to excess.
^uvo la dicha de salvarse. | Happily for him he escaped.
Por desgracia nada oyeron. I Unfortunately they heard nothing.
Substantives for Verbs, and vice-versA.
Habl6 lo mejor que jourfb.
Debe probar su dicJio.
Como acostumbra.
Despues de almorzar.
Antes de comer.
He spoke to the best of his ability.
He must prove what he says.
According to his custom.
After breakfast.
Before dinner.
Verbs for Pronouns.
ffay historiadores que aseguran I Some historians assure us that . .
que . . . I
Of Verbs in General.
15. We very often find verbs active with the indefinite «€,
and sometimes the passive verb with the particle se, used in
Spanish to express the same idea conveyed in English by
passive, and sometimes also by active verbs ; one tense trans-
lated by another different tense, one number substituted in the
place of another, one person for other persons, and at times
even the same person translated by any or all the others, ac-
cording to the sense desired to be conveyed.
Passive in Engrlish.
El concilio se celchraba en Pisa.
El libro que se le atribuyc.
Esto se encierra en la proposicion.
Esto debe contarse por nada.
Cuando se les ruega que respondan.
The council toas held at Pisa.
The book which is attributed to him.
That is contained in the proposition.
This is to be counted for nothing.
When they are requested to answer.
GEAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES,
361
Active in English..
Viene k juntarse con su familia.
Se caso con la duquesa.
Se hicieron a la vela.
He comes io join his family.
He married the duchess.
They set sail.
The Indicative or Subjunctive for the Infinitive.
Le mando que callase.
Es reputado por hombre que nada
posee.
Espero me responda Y.
He ordered him to hold his tongue (or
to be silent).
He is supposed to possess nothing.
I expect you to answer me.
One Tense for Another.
^Te habre yo dado un derecho que
no tengo ?
^ Porque solo los hombres Jiabrdn de
degenerar ?
Cuanto mas hagan^ m^uos ganaran.
Que un muerto resuscite, no es cosa
comun.
Have I then given thee a right which I*
do not possess myself?
Why must mankind alone degenerate ?
The more they do, the less they will
gain.
It is no common thing for a dead (man)
to resuscitate.
One Number for Another in Verbs.
Son las seis. I It is six o'clock.
No le quedan mas que tres bijos. | He has only three children left.
One Person for Another.
Nosotros somos los b4rbP''?<)s. I It is we that are barbarians.
Si hubiesen sido ellos los vituperados. | IfitAac? been they that they had blamed.
Iffode of Asking- Questions and forming Negations with Verbs.
16. The auxiliary do, used in English in asking questions,
whether negatively or positively, is to be lost sight of in trans-
lating into Spanish, inasmuch as the simple form of the verb
contains all that is required for that purpose, as may be seen in
the following examples :
yVan Yds. aJgunas veces 4 la opera ?
/ Sabia V. que debiamos venir tan
temprano ?
No creia que debiesen Yds. venir
hasta las tres.
Do you sometimes go to the opera ?
Did you know that we were to come so
early ?
I did not think you were to come until
three o'clock.
17. Nor is it to be translated into Spanish when it stands
16
362 GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES.
in the English sentence merely for the purpose of giving more
emphasis to the expression ; as,
y o creia que no iban nunca al teatro. I I thought they never went to the theatre.
SI, senor, van a meaudo. | Yes, sir, they do go often.
18. It sometimes takes the place of a verb, to avoid the
repetition of the latter ; in all such cases it is to be rendered
into Spanish by a simple particle (positive or negative, as re-
quired by the sense), or else the verb expressing the action
must itself be repeated ; as,
I Escribe V. todos los meses a su tio ? Do you write to your uncle every month ?
Si, senor {or le escribo todos los Yes, sir, I do.
moses).
19. To what has already been remarked relative to conju-
gations, we have but a few words to add, respecting a limited
number of verbs of the third conjugation. Those which have
either of the letters cA, U, or n, immediately preceding the ter-
mination, make their past participle in endo, instead of iendo ;
as, cinendo, muUendo, rinendo, hinchendo, bnmendo, gnmendOj
tane?ido, instead of citiiendo, muUiendo, rituendo, hinchiendOy
bruniendo, gruniendo, tamendo.
For the same reason the i is also suppressed in the third
persons singular and plural of the preterit definite of the indica-
tive, and in all the persons of the second and third terminations
of the imperfect subjunctive, and of the future of the same
mood ; as, cind, mulld, rineron, hinchera, brufiese, gru?iere, in-
stead of cinid, mullid, rinieron, hinchiera, brufiiese^ grumere.
There is but one exception allowable to this rule, and that
occurs in the verb henchlr, which generally retains the i in the
third person singular preterit definite of the indicative, making
it hinchid^ in order to avoid confounding it with hinchd, same
person and tense of hinchar, a regular verb of the first conju-
gation.
The reason of the suppression of the i in the cases pointed
out above is obvious, inasmuch as the lettei-s cA, //, or /?, When
forming a syllable with e, cannot be sounded without the con-
currence of the i element to a certain extent. If, therefore, the i
were retained in those combinations, a fj?rcgd and disagreeable
sound would be the result.
GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. 363
20. There are in English certain verbs of very frequent
occurrence, and whose signification, if not detennined by some
other part of speech, it would often be dilKcult to explain.
Amongst this class, the verb to get plays a very important, if
not the most important part, and English persons are some-
times at as great a loss to know how exactly to translate it into
a foreign language, as foreigners are to know how and when
to use it idiomatically in Englishc This verb {to get) has no
exact equivalent in Spanish, but there are in that language
many verbs of something of a like nature, and by w^hich it may
at times be correctly rendered, according to the signification in
which it is used. We venture to say that, in the most knotty
cases, a little thought, a moment's reflection would go far in
removing all difficulty.
Before making some uncouth makeshift of a translation,
pause a moment, and look what is the real meaning of to get in
the case before you ; then see what other verb would serve in
its place, or what other form of expression you can substitute
for the one proposed to be translated. This you will soon dis-
cover, for perhaps in no language can an instance be found of
the impossibility to express the same idea in more than one
way. For instance, let it be required to translate into Spanish,
To GET IN by the window ; here is a difficulty just as great as
any other case where the verb to get can be used.
Let us now see how else we can express that idea : To go
IN, or to come in by the window ; that is to say, we have to
convey the idea of motion into. This same idea is to be ex-
pressed thus : To ENTER by the window =entrar por la ven-
tana ; entrar then is the standard and usual verb expressive
of motion into. Let us now change the preposition and reverse
the sense, for the preposition in determines the signification of
get in the case under consideration.
Required to translate i To get out by the window ; the
same process as above gives us motion out ; hence, salir por
la ventana, salir being the standard and usual Spanish vei'b
expressive of motion out.
This mode of reasoning will in all cases lead to the desired
end. Let your object be to find some verb in English which
364
GRAMMATICAL P E C XT LI A E I T I E S .
alone will mean the same thing as get and its determining prepo-
sition together.
Get, used in connection with adjectives, is no more difficult
to be disposed of than when accompanied by prepositions, and
it may in general be turned into Spanish by one of the three
verbs ponerse^ hacerae, or volverse (according to the nature of
the case), and an adjective corresponding to the English one
determining get ; as,
Hacerse rico.
Volverse or ponerse rojo.
I*o}iersc furioso.
To ffet rich.
To ffet red.
To ffet furious.
These ideas in Spanish may be expressed by single verbs
derived from each of the adjectives respectively ; as,
To ffet rich.
To ffet red {i. e., to redden).
To ffet furious.
21. To GET, as an active verb, is usually translated into
Spanish by any of these : conseguir, ohtener, procurar^ hacerse
<Ze, hacerse C07i, according to the sense ; as.
Enriquecerse.
Enrojecerse.
Enfurecerse.
Comiffuid lo que deseaba.
Obtendrdn el privilegio.
i Puede V. cojiseffuirme or procurar.
me un ejemplar de ese libro ?
Se hizo de un caballo para el viaje.
He ffot what he wanted.
They will ffet the patent.
Can you ffet me a copy of that book ?
He ffot (L €., bought) a horse for his
journey.
22. As for to get, used redundantly (and incorrectly) with
the verb to have, it disappears in the Spanish translation ; as,
Tenemosuno. | We have ^o^ one.
23. The above remarks are equally applicable to all verbs
of the class alluded to, as for instance to become; which latter,
as well as to get, is often elegantly translated by Uegar d ser; as,
Se hizo ciudadano de los Estados
Unidos.
L'effd d aer hombre muy distinguido.
He became a citizen of the United
States.
He became a very distinguished man
REG APITUL AGIO N
DE LAS REGLAS DE LA GRAmItIOA.
LEOOIOl^ I.
1. I En qu6 letras acaban los infinitivos de todos los verbos en espafiol ?
— ^Ouantas conjugacioneshay?
2. I C6mo se llaman las letras que anteceden (precede) a las termina-
ciones ar^ er, ir ?
8. I Como se forman las conjugaciones de todos los verbos regulares
de la lengua ?
— I Se puede suprimir el pronombre nominativo ?
— ^Porqu^?
— I Puede suprimirse el pronombre Usted ?
4. J En qu6 persona se pone el verbo cuando se emplea el pronombre
Usted?
— I En qu6 casos se emplea la segunda persona del verbo ? esto es,
I cuando se tutea en espafiol ?
'■■
LECOIOIT II.
5. I Qu6 significa la palabra aeftor cuando se usa en vocativo ?
— I Qu6 palabra se debe emplear en lugar de seflor en el caso vocativo ?
— I Cuando se emplea la palabra seflor ?
— I Cuando se emplean las palabras seflora^ seflorita j seflorito f
6. jDe qu6 modo se usan los vocablos {words) Don y Doflaf
7. i En donde se coloca la negacion tw, con respecto al verbo ?
LECCION- III.
8. J Cuando se cambia la conjuncion y por la vocal et
9. ^Cuando se escribe el acento sobre el que?
366 BECAPITULACION.
10. ^En qu6 casos se traduce lut por sinof
11. ^En qu6 caso se traduce lut por perof
12. ^Pueden las palabras espaflol, frances^ tien^ j otras muchas,
pertenecer d diferentes partes de la oracion (speech) ?
LEOCION IV.
13. ^ Cuundo rigen los verbos activos d su objeto con aynda de la pre-
posicion d ?
14. Qu6 preposicion sirve para denotar la posesion 6 la materia de
que una cosa esta hecha ?
15. iQu6 noinbres determina el articulo elf
— I Qu6 variacion sufre el articulo el cuando viene despues de la pre-
posicion a 6 de?
16. ^Delante de qu6 parte de la oracion se coloca el articulo indefini-
do un f
— I Cual es el uso de la palabra uno f
LECCION V.
17. jCuantos g^neros Lay en espafiol ?
— I Cudndo se emplea el articulo femenino una t
18. ^C6mo se traduce your?
LECCION VI.
19. J En qu6 letra acaban todos los verbos en la primera persona de
indicative ?
— J En qu6 se diferencia la segunda conjugacion de la primera, en
el presente de indicative ?
20 I C6mo se traduce muy ?
21. I C6mo se forma la terminacion femenina de los nombres acaba-
dos en /
LEOOION VII.
22. I C6mo forman su terminacion femenina los adjetivos que acaban
en 0, an li on?
EECAPITTJLACION. 367
— g Y los gentilicios ?
— ^ En d6nde se colocan generalmente los adjetivos con respecto d
Jos sustantivos ?
— ^ En donde se colocan los adjetivos nsados metaforicamente {metor'
phorically) ?
— ^Pierden algnnos adjetivos su tiltima letra6 silaba cuando se colo-
can delante de los snstantivos ?
LEOOION VIII.
23. ^En qu6 se diferencian las terminaciones de la segnnda y tcrcera
conjugacion en el presente de indicativo 2
24. I Cudndo se cambia la conjuncion 6 por la letra u f
25. I Como se traduce neither j nor f
26. I Como se forma el plural de los nombres ?
27. ^Concuerda el adjetivo con el sustantivo?
28. I Concuerda el articulo con el nombre a que se refiere ?
— I Qu6 nombres femeninos toman el articulo masculine ?
29. 2 Cuando se nsa el articulo neutro lo ?
LECCION IX.
80. I C6mo forman el plural los nombres papd^ mama y pie ?
31. I C6mo forman el plural los nombres de mas de una silaba que
acaban en », tales como lunes^ mdrtes ?
— I Cual es el plural dejuez, Idpiz^ y demas nombres que acaban en z ?
82. I C6mo se forma el plural de los nombres compuestos ?
83. I Cuando toman articulo los dias de la semana ?
84. I Qu6 lugar ocupan en la oracion los adverbios donde^ adonde y
cudndo f
35. g Cudndo requieren el acento los adverbios donde^ adonde y
cuando f
LECCION X.
36. I Que son verbos irregulares?
— I Qu6 se advierte acerca de tener y los demas verbos auxiliares ?
368 EECAPITULACION.
— I C6mo se traduce los pron ombres, regimen directo de nn verbo
ingles ?
37. I C6rao se usard del Ze y el fo en el caso acusativo, esto es, como
r6gimen directo ?
— 1 06mo se traducen en algunos casos it j sof
38. ^Reqnieren el articulo los pronombres interrogativos quien^ eudly
que^ de quien f
39. Caando en una pregunta estd re^do un pronombre interrogativo
por una preposicion i qu6 debe hacerse en la respuesta ?
LECCION XI.
40. I Cuando se eraplea dlguien^ j cudndo alguno f
— J En qu6 caso se traducira any one^ 6 anybody por eualquieraf
41. ^C6mo se usa de nadie j ninguno?
42. I Cuando pierden alguno j ninguno la o final ?
43. ^En qu6 caso se usara de algo y alguna cosa ?
44. I Cuando se usard de nada y ninguna cosa f
45. ^ Qu6 negaciones se colocan delante del verbo ?
— I Qu6 efecto producen en espafiol, dos negativas en la misma sen-
tencia ?
46. jEn qu6 casos no se traduce el articulo indefinido a 6 ant
LEOOION XII.
47. I Cuando so usa del verbo Tiaher y cudndo del verbo tener f
— I C6mo se traducen los auxiliares to have y tole seguidos de un
intinitivo ?
48. iEn qu6 casos se emplea eipreterito ind^nidof
LECCION XIII.
49. I De qu6 modo forman su terrainacion femenina los pronombres
mw, tuyo^ 8uyo^ nueatro, vuestro f
60. I Qu6 concordancia tienen los pronombres posesivos ?
51. J En d6nde se colocan y qu6 letras pierden cuando so usan corao
adjctivos pronominales ?
BECAPITULACION. 369
62. I En ddnde se coloca el pronombre mio^ cuando se usa en el caso
Yocativo ?
53. I Que concordancia tieneu los adjetivos posesivos cuando se usan
como pronombres ?
— I Requieren el articulo en esta caso ?
64. I Qu6 articulo requieren cuando se usan de un modo indefinido ?
65. I Cuando se omite el articulo con los pronombres posesivos ?
66. ^ Cuando se emplean los pronombres vuestro j vuestra f
LECCION XIV.
57. I Qu6 6rden se sigue en la formacion de los niimeros compuestos ?
68. I Cudles son los ntimeros declinables ?
69. ^ Cudndo pierde uno la letra o ?
60. I Qu6 concordancia tiene ciento j cuando pierde la ultima silaba 2
LECCION XV.
61. ^ Qu6 concordancia tienen los numeros ordinales y d6nde se colo-
can?
— I Qu6 ntimeros ordinales pierden su tiltima letra ?
62. I Qu6 niimeros ordinales se usan y cuando ?
LECCION XVI.
63. I Cuando se usa el preterito definido^ j en que se diferencia del
preterito indefinido ?
64. I Que significa la preposicion ante f
65. I C6mo se usan los adverbios mas j menos^ j en d6nde se colocan
en la oracion ?
LEOCION XVII.
66. ^De que modo se eraplea el pronombre relativo quient
67. i Cuando se traduce who por que j cuando por quien f
68. i Cual J que pueden referirse a personas y cosas ?
16*
370 EECAPITULACION.
69. ^Con qn6 palabra concuerda cuyof
— I Qa6 especie de pronombre es ?
70. I Se usa del pronombre relativo en espafiol del mismo mode que
en ingl6s ; esto es, precedido 6 no de una preposicion ?
71. jPuede suprimirse el pronombre relativo?
LECCION XYIII.
72. I C6mo se declinan los pronombres deraostrativos este^ ese^ aquel t
73. I En qu6 caso se emplea este ?
74. I Qu6 sucedia en lo antiguo cuando eate y ese precedian al adjetivo
otro f
75. I C6mo se emplean los pronombres demostrativos en su calidad de
adjetivos ?
76. iQ6mo se traducen las palabras the former y the latter f
77. I C6mo se traduce el pronombre demostrativo ingles that^ seguido
de la preposicion ^ 6 de cualquiera de los relativos wTio 6 lohich t
78. I C6rao se traducen generalmente los pronombres personales in-
gleses, cuando van seguidos de un relativo ?
79. I Qu6 diferencia hay entre el significado de los adverbios dqui j
alliy J acd J alUt
LECCION XIX.
80. I Cuando debe usarse de la preposicion para^ j cuando de par t
81. I CxxQl es el significado de la preposicion entre f
82. I Cu61 es el significado de la preposicion hasta t
LECOION XX.
83. I Cudndo piorden los adverbios tanto j ctianto sii ultima silaba ?
84. I C6mo se forma el comparativo de igiLaldad t
85. iEn qu6 caso puede emplearse euan t
86. I C6mo se forma el comparativo de superioridad t
RECAPITULACION. 371
87. I C6mo se forma el comparativo de inferioridad f
88. I Porqu^ los adjetivos may or ^ menor^ mejor j peor, no necesitan
de las palabras mas 6 menos, para formar sas grados de comparacion ?
89. ^En que caso se traduce than por de j en cual otro por que?
90. I Pueden tambien formar grados de comparacion los nombres, ver-
boa J adverbios ?
LECCION XXI.
91. I C6mo se traducen los superlativos ingleses que acaban por est^
6 se forman con la palabra most f
92. ^En qu6 caso se traduce most^ 6 most of^ por la mayor parte?
93. I Qu6 preposicion corresponde en espafiol al in ingles despues de
un superlativo ?
94. Los superlativos que se forman en ingles por medio de most^ very^
&c., I c6mo se forman en espafiol ?
95. I Cuando pierden los adjetivos la ultima vocal ?
96. gDigame Y. lo que se advierte acerca de los superlativos en
errimo ?
97. I Qu6 adjetivos cambian sus letras finales antes de recibir la ter-
minacion isimo ?
98. I Ouales son los superlativos en isimo formados irregularmente ?
99. ^CuaJes son los comparativos j superlativos irregulares?
100. I Ouando admiten grados de comparacion los sustantivos ?
LECCIOIT XXII.
101. I Qu6 se advierte acerca de los verbos ser y estar ?
102. I Cuando se traduce el verbo to he, por ser, j cuando por estar ?
— I Cuales son los verbos cuyos gerundios no admiten el verbo estar
como auxiliar ?
LECCION XXIII.
103. I Cuando se emplea oifuturo simple ?
104. I C6mo se usan los numerales que indican las horas del dia ?
872 EECAPITUL ACIOIT.
105. I Porqa6 palabra se traduce evening 6 night f
106. I En qu6 caso no rige al subjuntivo la conjuncion si f
LECCION XXIY.
107. i Cudndo se emplea el/uturo compuesto ?
108. I C6mo se traduce en ingl6s acdbar de f
109. gEn qu6 letra acaban en espanol la mayor parte de las palabras
que en ingl6s terminan en Hon ?
110. I Con qu6 ntimeros se cuentan los dias del mes?
LECCION XXV.
111. jQn6 diferencia se encuentra en el significado de los verbos
frXber j conocer ?
112. g Qu6 diferencia existe entre los adverbios aun, ya y todavia f
— I C6mo se traduce (mce^ twice, etc. ?
— ^ Qu6 se observa en el uso de la palabras miedo, tdlor, vergHen-
za, Idstima, j tiempo f
113. Cuando el verbo to he precede k los adjetivos hungry, thirsty^
afraid, ashamed, right, wrong, cold, sleepy, i qu6 verbo se emplea en
espaflol ?
114. I Como se emplean jam<f« y nunca ?
LECCION XXYI.
115. ^En d6nde se colocan los pronombres nominativos con respecto
al verbo ?
116. J Qu6 peculiaridad se nota en los pronombres persouales?
117. jEn d6nde se coloca el complemento directo (objective ease)
cuando no le precede una preposicion, y el verbo estd en infinitive 6
imperativo ?
118. ^ En qu6 tiempos pierde el verbo la letra final cuando se le afiade
uno de los pronombres nos A est
— I Con que objeto se hace esto ?
119. ^Cuando podr4 colocarse el pronombre complemento directo
despues del verbo en el modo indicativo 6 subjuntivo ?
EECAPITULACION. 373
120. Cuando un verbo rija a otro en infinitivo, i en d6nde se colocara
el pronombre objeto ?
121. I Que caso rigen las preposiciones expresas ?
122. I Qu6 se nota cuando la preposicion con antecede d los pronom-
bres mij ti, %% ?
123. I Cuando se usa de la preposicion entre con el caso nominativo ?
] 124. I Qu6 pronombre complemento {i. e.^ 1st objective or 2d objec-
'tive case) se usa despues de los comparativos ?
125. Cuando en ingles el caso objetivo de la primera 6 segunda per-
sona es el regimen del verbo 6 de la preposicion to^ tacita (understood)
6 expresa, i como se traduce ?
126. I C6mo se traduce el complemento indirecto ingles de la tercera
persona ?
LECCIOIT XXYII.
127. Cuando la tercera persona va regida de la preposicion to en
ingles, tacita 6 expresa, siendo el regimen del verbo un pronombre de la
tercera persona, g por que palabra se traduce ?
— I Cual es la razon de esto ?
128. En caso de encontrarse en una sentencia dos pronombres, uno
complemento directo j el otro indirecto, i cual se coloca primero ?
129. I Y cudndo el regimen del verbo es un pronombre reflexivo ?
130. I Qu6 se observa cuando, para dar mas energia d la frase, se ponen
dos pronombres de la misma persona ?
131. g Qu6 debe observarse con respecto a las frases, a el quiero^ a t%
amof
132. I Qu6 se debe tener presente para no confundir los pronombres
personales e?, la. lo^ los j las^ con los articulos eZ, Za, lo^ los y las f
133. I Para qu6 sirve el adjetivo mismo ?
LECCIOK XXVIII.
134. I Cuando se usa el imperfecto f
135. ^Cuando se usa el pltLscuamperfecto?
374 EECAPITULACION.
136. I C6mo se traducen las expresiones to have just j tohe jttst de-
lante de un participio pasado ?
LECCION XXIX.
137. I Caando se usa el pret^rito anterior ?
138. ^De donde se derivan los adverbios de modo y calidad ?
139. iC6mo se forman los adverbios que se derivan de adjelivos?
140. I Qu6 adverbios admiten grados de comparacion ?
141. ^Qu6 adverbios pueden sustituirse sin cambiar de significado?
LEOCION XXX.
142. I Qu6 son verbos impersonales ?
143. I En qu6 caso se usan los verbos amaneeer j anochecer en las tres
personas ?
144. I C6mo se traducen en ingl6s los verbos hdber y Jiacer cuando se
usan corao impersonales ?
— I Qu6 se observa con respecto 4 la primera persona del presente de
indicativo del verbo haher^ usado impersonalmente ?
— I Hay otros verbos que pueden usarse como impersonales ?
145. ^En qu6 caso no se traduce el pronombre ingl6s itf
— i Kequieren articulo los nombres tomados en sentido indefinido ?
— I Toman el articulo los nombres nsados en toda la extension de su
significado?
146. jLlevan articulo los nombres de naciones, paises, provincias,-
montes, rios y estaciones ?
147. I Cudndo no admiten articulo los nombrej de naciones, paises y
provincias, etc.
— I Cudles requieren siempre el articulo ?
LECOION XXXI.
148. I C6mo se conjuga el verbo gustar cuando significa to please t
149. I Qu6 significa el verbo gustar seguido de la preposicion de t
150. I Qu6 significa y c6mo se coiyuga el verbo gustar como verbo
aotivo?
RECAPITULACION. 375
151. ^ Qu6 otros verbos requieren la misma construccion idiomdtica
del verbo gtcstar ?
152. I Qu6 se observa en la conjugacion del verbo ^e«ar cnando signl-
fica to regret ?
LECCIOX XXXII.
153. I C6mo se forma la voz pasiva ?
— I Cuando se forma con el verbo estar ?
154. j En qu6 caso no podra usarse la voz pasiva con el verbo ser en
el presente y el imperfecto de indicativo ?
155. I Cuando se usara de la preposicion de y cuando de por en la voz
pasiva ?
156-157. ^En qu6 casos se forma la voz pasiva con el pronombre sef
LEOCIOl^ XXXIII.
158. I C6mo se conjugan los verbos reflexivos ?
159. I Cudndo se usa la forma reflexiva ?
160. }, C6mo se conjugan los verbos reciprocos ?
LEOCIOK XXXIY.
161. g Que constituye la irregulandad de los verbos ?
162. I Qu6 debe tenerse presente para no confundir con los verbos
irregulares algunos que aunque sufren un cambio ortografico no dejan por
eso de ser regulares ?
163. I Qu6 cambio sufren los verbos que acaban en eer ?
164. I Qu6 cambio se nota en los que acaban en uir ?
165. ^En cuantas clases 6 grupos se dividen los verbos irregulares?
166. I Qu6 se observa en la construccion del verbo pagar ?
LECCION XXXY.
167. jCual es la irregularidad del verbo acostar ?
168. I Cudndo se usa el modo imperative ?
376 EECAPITULACION.
169. I Qu^ letras pierde, y en qu6 personas, el modo imperativo cuando
se le afiade el pronombres tws j os ?
170. I En d6nde se colocan los pronombres en espafiol cnando el im-
perativo se usa en la forma negativa ?
171. J Puede usarse el future de indicative per el imperativo ?
172. gC6mo se traducen en espafiol los adjetives ingleses acabades
en 0U8 ?
173. ^ Y los nombres y adjetives ingleses que acaban en ic 6 ical t
LEOOION XXXVI.
174. I QxxQ. es la irregularidad del verbo mover f
1 75. Cuando se usa del se come pronombre indefinido, i a qud palabraa
corresponde en ingl6s ?
176. I Cudles son las cuatro funciones que desempefia el pronombre se t
177. jC6mo se traducen en espafiol los nombres ingleses que acaban
en tyf
— ^ A qu6 genero pertenecen estos nombres ?
178. I Qu6 peculiaridad se nota en el verbo doler f
LECCION XXXVII.
179. I Cudl es la irregularidad del verbo atendert
180-181-182-183. I Oudnde se emplea el modo subjuntivo ?
184. I Cuando se usa el presente de subjuntivo ?
185. I Cu4nde se usa el perfecte de subjuntivo ?
LECCIOIT XXXVIII.
186. I Tienen los verbes espafioles etro participio ademds del pasade ?
— iQu6 terminacion tienen los participles presentes, y c6me se usant
187. i Cudndo se usan los gerundios ?
188. jCudl es el auxiliar de los gerundios?
189. I C6mo se traduce en espafiol el participio presente ingUs, pre*
cedide de una preposicion ?
190. J Puede usarse el infinitive come nembre verbal?
EECAPITULACION. 377
191. ^ C6mo se traduce en ingles el infinitivo espaiiol, regido por otro
verbo?
LEOOIOIsr XXXIX.
192. I Cual es la irregularidad del verbo pedir f
193. ^Cuales son las formas mas usuales para saludart
LEOOION XL.
194. I Cual es la irregularidad del verbo conducirf
195. I Qu6 se nota sobre la palabra segun f
196. i C6mo conouerdan los nombres colectivos ?
en
LEOOION XLI.
197. ^Qu6 son verbos defectives?
198. ^En qu6 personas y cuando se usa el verbo yaceri
199. jEn qu6 tiempos se usa el verbo soler j qu6 peculittridad se nota
61?
200. I Qu6 significaoion tiene la preposicion desde f
201. I C6mo se usa la preposicion contra ?
202. I Cual es la significacion de la preposicion sdbref
203. I Cual es la significacion de la preposicion tras f
204. I Cuando se usa de la conjuncion pues ?
*
LEOOIOIT XLII
205. J En que se dividen las conjunciones?
206. I Qu6 debe observarse acerca del regimen de las conjunciones ?
207. I Qu6 conjunciones rigen el verbo al modo subjuntivo ?
208. I Cuales le rigen al modo infinitivo ?
209. J Oudles le rigen al modo indicativo ?
378 EECAPITXJLACION.
LECCION XLIII.
210. ^Cuando se eniplea el imperfecto de subjantivo, y cuAndo el
pluscuamperfecto ?
211. ^C6mo se traducen en espaliol los auxiliares wiay, mighty can,
couldy loill^ would v should ?
212. ^De qu6 manera expresa la accion del verbo el imperfecto de
subjuntivo?
213. J De qu6 macera la representa el pluscuamperfecto ?
LECCION XLIV.
214. iQu6 son nombres aumentativos y diminutivos, y c6mo se
forman ?
215. ^Hay algunos nombres que forman sus diminutivos con otras
terminaciones distintas de las designadas por este objeto ?
216. I Pueden formarse diminutivos con otras partes de la oracion ?
21 V. ^ Qu6 nombres primitivos no admiten algunas de las terminaciones
designadas ?
218. J A qu6 nombres se designa con el de despreciativosf
LEOCION XLV.
219. I C6mo representa la accion del verbo el futuro simple de sub-
juntivo ?
220. I Cuando puede sustituirse el presente de subjuntivo al futuro
simple ?
221. gComo representa la accion del verbo el futuro compuesto de
subjuntivo?
222. I Cudndo puede sustituirsele el perfecto de subjuntivo ?
223. I Qu6 debe tenerse presente para no confundir el imperfecto y
pluscuamperfecto del modo subjuntivo, con el futuro simple y compuesto
del mismo modo ?
224. Cuando el verbo que estd en futuro simple 6 compuesto funciona
como verbo determinante l d qu6 modo y tiempos puede regir al verbo
dcterminado ?
EECAPITULACION. 379
LECCION XLVI.
225-226, I Qu6 son conjunciones, j cual es el significado de las prin-
cipales ?
LECCIOiT XLYII.
227. I Qu6 partes de la oracion pueden Uevar articulo ?
228. ^Llevan articulo los nombres comunes que se usan en toda la
extension de su significacion ?
229. ^Se pone articulo delante de los nombres de imperios, reinos,
provincias y paises ?
— I Ouando se omite ?
230. I Cuando reqnieren articulo los nombres de medidas, pesos, &c.
231. I Cuando se repite el articulo ?
232. I En que case se pone el articulo delante de los nombres que
expresan rango, oficio, profesion 6 titulo de personas ?
233. I En qu6 caso se usa el articulo en lugar del adjetivo posesivo ?
234. I En qu6 caso se usa el articulo, como en ingles ?
LEOCION XLYIII.
235. I Como se corresponden los verbos cuando estan unidos por un
relativo ?
236. I Cudndo se pone en infinitivo el verbo determinado ?
237. Si el verbo determinante fuere ser, 6 cualquiera de los imperso-
nales, i en qu6 modo se pondra el verbo determinado, en el caso de care-
cer este de sugeto ?
— I Porqu^ sucede esto asi ?
238. Y cuando dicbo verbo tuviere sugeto, i en qu6 modo se pondra ?
— Los verbos que expresan mandato, i a qu6 modo rigen el verbo
determinado ?
239. Cnando el verbo determinante esta en infiuitivo, en presente 6
futuro de indicativo, 6 en imperativo unido al verbo determinado por
una conjuncion i en que modo se pone este liltimo ?
240. I A qu6 modo y en qu4 tiempos rlge aJ verbo determinado cI
380 EECAPITULACION.
determinante, cuando este liltimo se encuentra en el pret^iito indefinido
6 en el future compuesto de indicative ?
241. Cuando el nominativo es el mismo para dmbos verbos y el de-
terminante se encuentra en indicative, ^ 4 que modo rige este al deter-
minado ?
LECCION XLIX.
242. I Qu6 son n ombres derivados ?
243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252. j Qu6 denotan, y
cuales son las principales terminaciones ?
LEOOION L.
253. 1 06mo se forman los nombres compuestos?
LECOION LI.
254. I Oual es la construccion natural ?
256. I Cu41 es la figurada ?
256. I De cudntos modos puede construirse una frase ?
257. I Qu6 construccion es la preferible ?
LEOOION LII.
258. I Conservan algunos participios el regimen de sus verbos ?
259. I Oudl es la concordancia del participio pasado ?
260. Ouando un verbo tiene dos participios pasados, uno regular y
otro irregular, j c6mo se emplcan ?
261. I Ou^es son los participios pasados irregulares que se pueden
nsar con el verbo haber ?
262. i Qu6 irregularidad peculiar tiene el verbo morirt
263. I Ilay algunos participios pasados 6 pasivos que toman una signi-
ficacion activa?
BECAPITULACION. 381
264. I Pneden algunos participios pasados hacer las veces de sustan-
tivo?
265. I Qu6 se debe observar acerca de otros tiempos que algunos gra-
maticos agregan al modo infiiiitivo ?
LEOCION LIII.
266. ^ Qu6 son modismos 6 idiotismos ?
— I C6mo se traducen en espaflol las frases en que la preposicion
inglesa toma un significado diferente de aquel que generalmente se le
atribuje ?
LEOOION LIV.
267. I C6mo se traducen en espafiol las conjunciones inglesas que se
tisan frecuentemente en lugar de otras palabras ?
268. I Hay tambien en espafiol conjunciones que se usan en lugar de
otras palabras?
— I Cuales son los principales usos de la conjunoion si f
LEOOION LV.
269. J Cuales son los principales usos de la conjuncion que f
LEOCIO:^' LYI.
270. J Cuales son las formas mas usuales para principiar j acabar
cartas ?
LECCION LYII.
271. jQu6 se advierte acerca de las preposiciones que cambian su
significado de los verbos a que se juntan ?
LECCION LVIII.
272. I C6mo se traducen los verbos to le glad y to he rejoiced at f
382 EECAPITULACION.
273. 1 06mo se traducen los verbos to he sorry y to grieve t
274. I C6mo se emplea el verbo caber f
LECOION LIX.
275. I A qu6 modimos se prestan los verbos caer, dar, decir j echar t
LEOOION LX.
276. I Cudles son los principales idiotismos k qne se prestan los verbos
entrar^ hacer^ ir, llevar, mandar^ oler d, saber d, salir^ servir^ tardar y
COMPLETE LIST
OF THE
CONJUGATIONS OF ALL THE SPANISH VEEBS, AUXILIARY, EEGULAE, XR-
REGULAR, REFLECTIVE, IMPERSONAL AND DEFECTIVE, WITH
AN EXAMPLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE.
ATTXILIARY VEEBS.
INFINITIVE.
PEESENT.
To Jiate.
Haber.
Tener.
I Ser.
Tole.
Estar.
GEEUND.
Having
.
Being.
Habiendo.
Teniendo.
1 Siendo.
PAST PAETICIPLE.
Estando.
Had.
Been.
Habido.
Tenido.
1 Sido.
INDICATIVE.
PEESENT.
Estado.
I Time.
I am.
1. He.
Tengo.
Soy.
Estoy.
2. Has.
Tienes.
Eres.
Estas.
8. Ha.
Tiene.
Es.
Esta
1. Hemos.
Tenemos.
Somos.
Estamos.
2. Habeis.
Teneis.
Sois.
Estais.
8. Han.
Tienen.
Son.
Estan.
IMPEEFECT.
lUd.
I was.
1. Habia.
Tenia.
Era.
Estaba.
2. Habias.
Tenias.
Eras.
Estabas,
8. Habia.
Tenia.
Era.
Estaba.
384
CONJUGATIONS.
1. Habiamos.
2. Habiais.
8. Habian.
Teniamos.
Teniais.
Tenian.
Eramos.
Erais.
Eran.
Estabamos.
Estabais.
Estabao.
/ had.
1. Hube. Tu^e.
2. Hubiste. Tuviste.
3. Hubo. Tuvo.
PEETERIT DEFINITE.
I was.
Fui. Estuve.
Fuiste. Estuviste.
Fu6. Estuvo.
1. Habimos. Tuvimos.
Fuiraos.
Estnvimos.
2. Hubisteis. Tuvisteis.
Fuisteis.
Estuvisteis.
3. Hubieron. Tuvieron.
Fueron.
Estuvieron.
FTITTJBB
SIMPLE.
/ shall have.
I shall le.
1. Habr6. Tendr6.
Ser6.
Estar6.
2. Habrds. Tendrds.
Serds.
Estards.
3. Habrl Teiidrd.
Serd.
Estard.
1. Habr^mos. Tendr^mos.
Ser6mos.
Estar^mos.
2. Habr^is. Tendr^is.
Sereis.
Estar6is.
8. Habrdn. Tendran.
IMPER
Serdn.
ATIYE.
Estardn.
Let me have.
Let mi
)le.
2. Have thou. Ten tti.
S6.
Estd.
3. Let him have. Tenga 61.
Sea.
Est6.
1. Let ns have. Tengamos.
Seamos.
Estemos.
2. Have ye. Tened.
Sed.
Estad.
8. Let them have. Tengan.
Sean.
Esten.
SUBJUJ
ACTIVE.
PEES
ENT.
I may have.
I may
le.
1. Haya. Tenga.
Sea.
Est4.
2. Hayaa. Tengas.
Seas.
Estes.
3. Haya. Tenga.
Sea.
E8t6.
1. Hayamos. Tengamos.
Seamos.
Estemot,
2. Hayais. Tengms.
Seais.
Esteis.
3. Hayan. Tengan.
Sean.
Esten.
CONJUGATIONS.
385
IMPEEFECT. — First Termination.*
*
I would have.
I would he.
1.
Habria.
Tendria.
Seria.
Estaria.
2.
Habrias.
Tendrias.
Serias.
Estarias.
8.
Habria.
Tendria.
Seria.
Estaria.
1.
Habriamos.
Tendriamos.
Seriaraos.
Estariamos.
2.
Habriais.
Tendi'iais.
Seriais.
Estariais.
3.
Habrian.
Tendrian.
Serian.
Estarian.
Second Termination.
I would have. I would he,
1. Hubiera. Tuviera. Euera. Estuviera.
2.
Hubierais.
Tuvieras.
Fueras.
Estuvieras.
3.
Hubiera.
Tuviera.
Fuera.
Estuviera.
1.
Hubieraraos.
Tuvieramos.
Fueramos.
Estuvieramos.
2.
Hubierais.
Tuvierais.
Fuerais.
Estuvierais.
3.
Hubieran.
Tuvieran.
Third Tei
Fueraii.
^mination.
Estuvieran.
I should have.
I should le.
1.
Hubiese.
Tuviese.
Fuese.
Estuviese.
2.
Hubieses.
Tuvieses.
Fueses.
Estuvieses.
3,
Hubiese.
Tuviese.
Fuese.
Estuviese.
1. Hubieseraos. Tuvieseraos.
2. Hubieseis. Tuvieseis.
3. Hubiesen. Tuviesen.
Fuesemos. Estuviesemos.
Fueseis. Estuvieseis.
Fuesen. Estuviesen.
FUTUEE.
I might or should have.
1. Hubiere. Tuviere.
2. Hubieres. Tuvieres.
3. Hubiere. Tuviere.
I might or should le.
Fuere. Estuviere.
Fueres. Estuvieres.
Fuere. Estuviere.
1. Hubieremos. Tuvieremos.
2. Hubiereis. Tuviereis.
3. Hubieren. Tuvieren.
Fueremos. Estuvieremos.
Fuereis. Estuviereis.
Fueren. Estuvieren.
* It will be observed that, dlfTering from almost all other grammars, we give ria as the
first termination, this order appearing to us more logical and, above all, more grammatical,
and more in accordance with the signiQcation and uses of the three terminations.
17
386
CONJUGATIONS.
MODELS OF THE THEEE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Hablar.
Hablando.
Hablado.
Ilablo.
Hablas.
Habla.
1. Hablaba.
Hablabas.
Hablaba.
r.
I speak.
INFINITIVE.
I To speak.
GEBUND.
Speaking.
PAST PAETICIPLE.
I Spoken.
INDICATIYE.
PEE8ENT.
Plural
1. Hablamos.
2. Hablais.
3. Hablan.
lAlPEEFECT.
I spoke, was
speaking, &c.
1. Hablabamoa»
2. Hablabais.
3. Hablaban.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
EahU.
Hablaste.
Habl6.
1. Hablar^.
2.
Ilablards.
Hablari.
Habla.
liable.
I spoke.
1. Hablamos.
2. Hablasteis,
3. Hablaron.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
I shall or will l. Hablar^raos.
speak.
Speak (thou).
2. Hablar^is.
3. IlablarAn.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Ilablemos.
2. Hablad.
3. Hablen.
1. Hable.
2. Hables.
3. Hable.
1. Hablaria.
2. Hablarias.
3. Hablaria.
1. Hablara.
2. Hablaras.
3. Hablara.
CONJUGATIONS,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
387
PRESENT.
I may speak.
1. Hablemos.
2. Hableis.
3. Hablen.
iMPEEFECT. — First Termination.
I should or would
speak.
1. Hablariamos.
2. Hablariais.
3. Hablarian.
Second Termination.
I might, could,
would, or should
1. Hablaramos.
2. Hablarais.
3. Hablaran.
Third Termination.
1. Hablase. I might, &c.,
2. Hablases.
3. Hablase.
1. Hablasemos.
2. Hablaseis.
3. Hablasen.
rUTUEK.
1. Hablare.
2. Hablares.
3. Hablare.
I might, &c.,
speak.
Aprender.
Aprendiendo.
Aprendido.
1. Hablaremos.
2. Hablareis.
3. Hablaren.
SECOND COXJCGATIOBf.
INFINITIVE.
I To learn.
GEEUOT).
I Learning.
PAST PAETICIPLE.
I Learned.
388
CONJUGATIONS.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Aprendo.
2. Aprendes.
3. Aprende.
I learn.
1. Aprenderaoa,
2. Aprendeis.
3. Aprenden.
IMPEEFECT.
1. Aprendia.
2. Aprendias.
3. Aprendia.
I learned, was
learning, &c.
1. AprendiamosL
2. Aprendiais.
3. Aprendian.
PRETEEIT DEFINITE.
1. Aprendi.
2. Aprendiste.
3. Aprendi6.
I learned.
1. Aprendimos.
2. Aprendisteis.
3. Aprendieron.
FUTURE BIMPLE.
1. Aprender6.
2. Aprenderas.
8. Aprenderd.
I shall or will
learn.
1. Aprenderemoa.
2. Aprender^is.
3. Aprenderdn.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Aprende.
8. Aprenda.
Learn (thou).
1. Aprendaraos.
2. Aprended.
3. Aprendnn.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Aprenda.
2. Aprendas.
8. Aprenda.
I may learn.
1. Aprendamos.
2. Aprendais.
8. Aprendan.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
1. Aprenderia.
2. Aprenderias.
8. Aprenderia.
I would or should
learn.
1. Aprenderiamos.
2. Aprenderiais.
3. Aprenderian.
CONJUGATIONS.
889
Second Termination.
1. Aprendiera.
I might, could,
would, or should
learn.
1. Aprendieramos.
2. Aprendieras.
2. Aprendierais.
3. Aprendiera.
3. Aprendieran.
Third Termination.
1. Aprendiese.
I might, &c.,
learn.
1. Aprendiesemos.
2. Aprendieses.
2. Aprendieseis.
3. Aprendiese.
3. Aprendiesen.
FUTIJEE.
1. Aprendiere.
I might, &c.,
learn.
1. Aprendieremos.
2. Aprendieres.
2. Aprendiereis.
3. Aprendiere.
3. Aprendieren.
THIBD CONJUGATION.
INFINITIVE.
Escribir.
1 To write.
GEBUND.
Escribiendo
1 Writing.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Escrito*
1 Written.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Escribo.
I write.
1. Escribimos.
2. Escribes.
2. Escribis.
3. Escribe.
3. Escriben.
IMPERFECT.
1. Escribia.
I wrote, was
writing.
1. Escribiamos.
2. Escribias.
2. Escribiais.
3. Escribia.
3. Escribian.
This is the only instance of irregularity in the verb Escribir.
390
CONJUGATIONS
PEETEEIT DEFINITE.
1. Escribi. I wrote. 1. Escribimos.
2. Escribisto. 2. Escribisteis.
3. Escribi6. 3. Escribieron.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
1. Escribir^.
2. Escribiras.
3. Escribii'd.
I shall (or will)
write.
1. Escribir^moa.
2. Escribir^is.
3. Escribirdn.
2. Escribe.
8. Escriba.
1. Escriba.
2. Escribas.
3. Escriba.
1. Escribiria.
2. Escribirias.
3. Escribiria.
1. Escribiera.
2. Escribieras.
3. Escribiera.
1. Escribiese.
2. Escribieses.
3. Escribiese.
Write (thou).
Let him, &c.
write.
IMPERATIVE.
1. EscribamoB.
2. Escribid.
3. Escriban.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PKESiNT.
I may write.
1. Escribamos.
2. Escribais.
3. Escriban.
IMPEEFEOT. — First Termination.
I would (or
should) write.
1. Escribiriamoa.
2. Escribiriais.
3. Escribirian.
Second Termination.
I might, could,
would, or should
write.
1. Escribieramos.
2. Escribierais.
3. Escribieran.
Third Termination.
I might, could,
would, or should
write.
1. Escribiesemos,
2. Escribieseis.
3. Escribiesen.
CONJUG ATI ONS.
391
FUTCEE.
1. Escribiere.
2. Escribieres,
3. Escribiere.
I might, &c.,
write.
1. Escribieremos.
2. Escribiereis.
3. Escribieren.
COMPOUND TEXSES.
These are formed bj joining the several tenses of the auxiliary haher
to the past participle of the verb expressing the action.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PEETERIT INDEFINITE.
I have spoTcen.
To he hahlado.
I have learned.
To he aprendido.
I have written.
To he escrito.
1.
He
hablado.
Hemos ^ hablado.
2.
Has
aprendido.
Habeis I aprendido.
3.
Ha
.
escrito.
Han J escrito.
PLUPE
RFECT.
I had spoken.
To hahia hatlado.
I had learned.
To habia aprendido.
I had written.
To habia escrito.
1.
Habia
hablado.
Habiamos ^ hablado.
2.
Habias
aprendido.
Habiais I- aprendido.
3.
Habia
escrito.
Habian J escrito.
PEETEEIT ANTERIOR.
/ had spoTcen.
I had learned.
I had written.
Ilube 1 hablado.
Hubiste \ aprendido,
Hnbo j escrito.
To hube hablado.
To hube aprendido.
To hube escrito.
Hubimos -\ hablado.
Hubisteis I aprendido.
Hubieron J escrito.
COMPOUND FUTURE.
I shall have spoTcen.
I shall have learned.
I shall have written.
1. Habre
^ hablado.
2. Habras
aprendido.
3. Habra
escrito. *
To habre hablado.
To habre aprendido.
To habre escrito.
Habr^mos ^ hablado.
Habreis I aprendido.
Habran escrito.
The other compound tenses are cooiii^ated in like manner.
392
CONJUGATIONS
THE SEVEN PRINCIPAL CLASSES OF lEREGXTLAR
VERBS.
FIRST
CLASS.
AUEKTAB.
1
To hit the marh.
INDICATIVE.
PRF.fiENT.
1. Acierto.
I hit the mark.
1. Acertaraos.
2. Aciertas.
2. Acertais.
3 Acierta.
IMPER
3. Aciertan.
iTIVE.
1. Acertemos.
2. Acierta.
2."Acertad.
3. Acierte.
SUBJUJ
PKES
3. Acierten.
fCTIVE.
ENT.
1. Acierte.
1. Acertemos.
2. Aciertes.
2. Acerteis.
3. Acierte.
3. Acierten
The following
verbs^ and their comp
ounds^ are conjugated like Acertar:
Acrecentar.
To increase.
Derrengar.
To break the back.
Adestrar.
To render skilful.
Despernar.
To cut off the lees.
Alentar.
To breathe.
Despertar.
To awake.
Apacentar.
To feed.
Desterrar.
To banish.
Apretar.
To squeeze.
Empedrar.
To pave.
Arrendar.
To hire.
Empezar.
To begin.
Asentar.
To place.
Encerrar.
To lock up.
Aserrar.
To saw.
Encomendar.
To recommend.
Aterrar.
To throw down.
Entcrrar.
To bury.
Atestar.
To stuff.
Escarmentar.
To take warning.
Atravesar.
To cross.
Fregar.
To rub.
Aventar.
To winnow.
Gobernar.
To govern.
Calentar.
To warm.
Helar.
To freeze.
Cegar.
To blind.
Ilerrar.
To shoe.
Cerrar.
To shut.
Invemar.
To winter.
Comcnzar.
To commence
Mentar.
To mention.
Concertar.
To agree.
Merendar.
To take a coUatioa
Confesar.
To confess.
Negar.
To deny.
Dccentar.
To taste for the
Nevar.
To snow.
first time.
Pcnsar.
To think.
CONJUGATIONS
393
Quebiar.
To break.
Sosegar.
To quiet
Hecomendar.
To recommend.
Soterrar.
To bury.
Regar.
To water.
Temblar.
To tremble.
Reventar.
To burst.
Tentar.
To tempt.
Segar.
To cut down.
Trasegar.
To rake.
Sembrar.
To sow.
Tropezar.
To stumble.
Sentar.
To set.
SECOND CLASS.
ACOSTAB,
To put in led.
INDICATIVE.
PEESENT.
1. Acuesto.
I put in bed.
1. Acostamos.
2. Acuestas.
2. Acostais.
3. Acuesta.
IMPER
3. Acuestan
ATIVE.
•
1. Acostemos.
2. Acuesta.
2. Acostad.
3. Acueste.
SUBJUI
3. Acuesten
rcTIVE.
•
PEES
EXT.
1. Acueste.
1. Acostemos.
2. Acuestes.
2. Acosteis.
3. Acueste.
3. Acuesten
•
TJie following
verbs^ and their compi
')unds^ are conjugated lilce Acost^
Acordar.
To agree.
Consolar.
To console.
Agorar.
To divine.
Contar.
To count.
Almorzar.
To breakfast.
Costar.
To cost.
Amolar.
To grind.
Degollar.
To behead.
Aporcar.
To hoe.
Demostrar.
To demonstrate.
Apostar.
To bet.
DescoUar.
To surpass.
Aprobar.
To approve.
Desconsolar.
To discourage.
Asolar.
To waste.
Desolar.
To desolate.
Atronar.
To thunder.
Desollar.
To skin.
Avergonzar.
To shame.
Desvergonzarse.
To be impudent.
Colar.
To strain.
Emporcar.
To dirty.
Colgar.
To hang.
Eneordar.
To string.
Comprobar.
To verify.
Encontrar.
To meet.
17^
394
CONJUGATIONS
Engrosar.
To engross.
Resollar. To breathe.
Forzar.
To force.
Rodar. To rolL
Holgar.
To rest.
Rogar. To entreat.
Hollar.
To tread.
Soldar. To solder.
Mostrar.
To show.
Soltar. To lessen.
Poblar.
To people.
Sonar. To sound.
Probar.
To prove.
Sonar. To dream.
llecordar.
To remind.
Tostar. To toast.
Recostar.
To lie down
.
Trocar. To barter.
Regoldar.
To belch.
Tronar. To thunder.
Renovar.
To renew.
Volar. To fly.
Reprobar.
To reprove.
Volcar. To overturn.
Rescontar.
To compens
ate.
THIRD a.ASS.
Moves.
1 To move,
INDICATIVE.
PEESEXT.
1. Muevo.
1. Movemos.
2. Mueves.
2. Moveis.
3. Mueve.
3. Mueven.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Movamos.
2. Mueve.
2. Moved.
3. Mueva.
3. Muevan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PEESENT.
1. Mueva.
1. Movamos.
2. Muevas.
2. Movais.
3. Mueva.
3. Muevan.
The following
verU^ and their compounds^ are conjugated like Movf
Absolver.
To absolve.
Morder. To bite.
Disolver.
To dissolve.
Retorcer. To twist again.
Doler.
To grieve.
Solver. To solve.
LI over.
To rain.
Torcer. To twist
Molcr.
To grind.
Volver. To turn.
FOURTH
CLASS.
Atendee.
To attend.
CONJUGATIONS.
395
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Atiendo.
1.
Atendemos.
2. Atiendes
2.
Atendeis.
3. Atiende.
3.
Atienden.
IMPERATIVE.
1.
Atendaraos.
2. Atiende.
2.
Atended.
3. Atienda.
3.
Atiendan.
SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT.
1. Atienda.
1.
Atendamos.
2. Atiendas
2.
Atendais.
3. Atienda.
3.
Atiendan.
The following verhs^ and their compounds,
have the same irregularii
as Atender :
Ascender.
To ascend.
Entender. To understand.
Cerner.
To sift.
Extender. To extend.
Condescender.
To condescend.
Heder.
To stink.
Contender.
To contend
Hender
To split.
Defender.
To defend.
Perder.
To lose.
Desatender.
To neglect.
Tender.
To stretch out
Descender.
To descend.
Trascender. To transcend.
Encender.
To kindle.
Verier.
To pour out.
nFTH CLASS.
Sentir.
1
INDICATIVE.
present.
To/eel
1. Siento.
1.
Sentimos.
2. Sientes.
2.
Sentis.
3. Siente.
3.
Sienten.
IMPERATIVE.
1.
Sintaraos.
2. Siente.
2.
Sentid.
3. Sienta.
3.
Sientan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
present.
1. Sienta.
1.
Sintaraos.
2. Sientas.
2.
Sintais.
3. Sienta.
3.
Sientan.
396
CONJUGATIONS
IMPERFECT.
First Termination.
1. Sentiria, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Sintiera.
1. Sintieramos.
2. Sintieras.
2. Sintierais.
3. Sintiera.
3. Sintieran.
Third Termination.
1. Sintiese.
1. Sintiesemos.
2. Sintieses.
2. Sintieseis.
3. Sintiese.
3. feintiesen.
FITTTTRE.
1. Sintiere.
1 1. Sintieremos.
2. Sintieres
2. Sintiereis.
3. Sintiere.
3. Sintieren.
The following verhSy and their compounds, have the same irregul
as Sentir:
Adherir.
To adhere.
Digerir. To digest
Advertir.
To advert.
Herir. To wound.
Arrepentirsc.
To repent.
Hervir. To boil.
Asentir.
To assent.
Ingerir. To ingraft
Conferir.
To confer.
Invertir. To invert.
Consentir.
To consent.
Pervertir. To pervert
Controvertir.
To controvert
Preferir. To prefer.
Convertir.
To convert.
Referir. To refer.
Diferir.
To defer.
Requerir. To require.
Diferir.
To diflfer.
SIXTH CLASS.
Pedib.
1 To ash
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Pido.
1. Pedimos,
2. Pides.
2. Pedis.
3. Pide.
8. Piden.
PBETEKIT.
1. Pedi.
1. Pedimos.
2. Pediste.
2. Pedisteis.
8. Pidi6.
8. Pidieron.
CONJUGATIONS.
397
IMPERATIVE.
1. Pidamos.
2. Pide.
2. Pedid.
3. Pida.
3. Pidan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PEESENT.
1. Pida.
1. Pidamos.
2. Pidas.
2. Pidais.
3. Pida.
3. Pidan.
IMPEEFECT.— i^iVsi Termination,
1. Pediria, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Pidiera. 1. Pidieramos.
2. Pidieras. . 2. Pidierais.
3. Pidiera. 8. Pidieran.
1. Pidiese.
2. Pidieses.
3. Pidiese.
Third Termination.
1. Pidiesemos.
2. Pidieseis.
3. Pidiesen.
1. Pidiere.
2. Pidieres.
3. Pidiere.
FUTUEE.
1. Pidieremos.
2. Pidiereis.
3. Pidieren.
The following verbs^ and their compounds^ have the same irregularities
as Pedie :
Arrecir.
Cenir.
Colejir.
Competir.
Concebir.
Constrenir.
Derretir.
Desleir.
Elejir.
Embestic.
To benumb.
To belt.
To collect.
To contend.
To conceive.
To constrain.
To melt.
To dissolve.
To elect.
To attack.
Gemir.
Medir.
Regir.
Rendir.
Reiiir.
Repetir.
Seguir.
Servir.
Tenir.
Vestir.
To groan.
To measure.
To rule.
To render.
To quarrel
To repeat.
To follow.
To serve.
To dye.
To dress.
398
CONJUG ATI ONS.
SEVEiXTU CUSS.
CONDTTCTB.
1 To conduct.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Conduzco.
2. Conduces, &c.
1. Conducimos.
2. Conducis, &c.
PRETERIT.
1. Conduje.
2. Condujiste.
3. Condujo.
1. Condujimos.
2. Condujisteis.
3. Condnjeron.
IMPERATIVE.
2. Conduce.
3. Conduzca.
1. Conduzcaraos.
2. Conducid.
3. Conduzcan.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
.
PRESENT.
1. Conduzca, &c.
1 1. Conduzcaraos, &c.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination,
1. Conduciria, &c.
1 1. Conduciriamos, &c.
Second Termination.
1. Condujera, &c.
1 1. Condujcramos, &c.
Third Termination.
1. Condujese, &c.
1 1. Condujesemos, &c.
FUTURE.
1. Condujere, &c.
1 1. Condujeremos, &c.
The following terbs are conjugated like Conducir .
Adncir. To adduce.
Deducir. To deduce.
Introducir. To introduce.
Producir. To produce.
Reducir. To reduce.
Traducir. To translate.
N. "R.— Conocer, and all verbs ending in cer, of more than two pyllablce. follow the
irregularity of Condricir in the present indicative and Bubjunctive, and in the imperative.
Elsewhere regular.
CONJUGATIONS
399
w.
^
p^
r g
^.
I
vo3
^
d
i
i
%
d
U
;2
*s
^ s
'C
;g
'C
s
.S
•a
*G
*c
•rj
M .g
'3
*3
'3
'3
'3
•3
"3
'3
*3
&
cy
o^
^
o*
a'
cr
cr
cr
cri
■TS
TJ
■TJ
13
'^
'5
13
'O
'O
'C
OS
03
03
rt
c3
03
03
03
03
«
crT
xn
wT
aT
oT
.2"
S
.2
tT
oT
•3
*§
'i
■§
>«o
oT
CQ
1
'C
a>
:s
■£^
!S
'S
;g
•c
*S
'C
!S
^ '3
*3
'3
'3
*E
'3
•3
'3
•3
'3
=? 1
'^ CT'
cr
cr
cr
sy
cr"
o^
cr
a*
CT-
S
'O
'O
'^
13
'^
t3
-13
13
•rj
■73
C3
03
:3
03
03
03
03
03
c3
^
1
o
g
1
^2
1
1
§
oT
o
o
a
.2
ri "C
•a
;c
*c
•c
•§
*C
•3
•3
"3
'3
*3
f3
•3
'3
•3
*3
a<
o^
a*
cr'
^
&
c
o^
a*
a*
n3
TJ
'a
'O
•^
•73
T3
13
'^
-a
L <i
-^
<1
<1
<^
<1
<1
<
-^
^
P^
P^
l-H
o
H
02
\\
S3 3 3
a* o^ CT-
■^3 -^3 13
^ -^ <1
l1
CO '3
%
TS
'3 U
^3
•3 '3
T3 13
i
•e
;a :s :g
•s
hi
oi
Q>
•a
•a
•a
'3
•=5
*3
9
rf*
a*
o^
rf
T3
'O
■73
Tl
03
a
03
e3
.s" 2"
►5 o pui
3
<1
n3
I
■73
I
ii
•J
•a
iS
:s
'3
3
'3
'3
'p.
cr"
a-
o*
a*
o-
-o
13
13
13
'^
^
-<
<1
-<
<1
si
l!
tJ
^
^
^
1
2
^
sf
1
V
/
s
•P9/U,9dwj
p?
e4
H
t^
B
»
t3
fri
n
400
CONJUGATIONS.
1'
g
'1
e
T
z/l
W
03
P^
k
^
1-3
U)
O .ii
w ^
IRR
to W(
1*
3
1
1
a 1
1
1
A
^
^
i
H
g
Pm
5
i
1
1
i ^
.2 .o
.2 43
1
oT
o
1
1
f^
^
^
^
09 -13
3
'2 73 Ts -a
S fl c c
« es 08 eS
O
4
ef
rQ
ea
•E
>► ► k
Sis
S S <=>
03 08 eS
i s, -s- 5
< ^ ti; (?
I I
^ 'P9/J9dwj Sf
I
CONJUGATIONS
401
i.2"
¥
1
*3
•73"
&
g
s
i
ei
1
U
^
s
es
m
es
1
«
n
oT
rr-
m
- a
s
§
)js
S
i
1
s
a
^
•3
-<
<
^
1
<
^
4
<i
<i
00 oa 'oa
ei ei
O
I I. ^ I
.S3 .2
f!; 'p9/MdlUJ Ct,
402
CONJUGATIONS
'B*
K-H (^ rO lO
^ a o
Js .2 12 o
J3
m pQ
^ o
s
,
,
fl
fl
•
a
1
1
5?
1
1
1
3?
g
^
z?
CO '3
ts
'2
-o
'O
TS
t3
1
is
1
1
1
1
1
2"
OB
.2~
•N
2
'3
.'S
m
g
•N
f
1
!§
^
^2
1
13^
8
13
es
1
5*
'^'l
1
<v
a
g
g
1
s
'fl
fl
J
^
^
^
JO
^
^
^
^
pS
t\
«
•>
»
•>
2
i
. a
f
C
g
J
C
1
be
•IN
1
a
.2
1
a
g
g
9
4^
Si
fl
fl
CJ
r]
«2
-S
D
Q
a>
«
«
«
«
•
•
ea
•
9
^2
ei
?*'
,2
fe
I
»•!
1
?
1
4f
tf
5
1
?
i*
4>
c
fj
fl
fl
ca
fl
fl
fl
O)
s
<D
S
c3
3
x>
•^
J2
^
Z
^
^
•O
•^
-^
^ •"
1
1
«3
i
1
i
aT
n
4)
73
"a
'O
'3
s
t3
*mr
-3
'O
a
a
rt
d
fl
fl
fl
^
^
ja
1
^
^
Z
^
•<
4 5
•>
vcT
.^
g
i
2
.2^
o
n3
4^
T3
1
1
E
1
4>
5»
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
fl
1
^ <^ ^
'pifj^mj
CONJUGATIONS.
403
? I
5< g
'2 ft
9
I
I
S v' 2
tS •'^ 'N
58 .2
•1^ '^
4)
•N
I
•pdfxddwj fc^
404
CONJUGATIONS.
I I i"
6 6 6
•s -c
%< en
§
S
1
o
i
i
1
• :
1
o
g
u
§
•3
o
1
O
o
o
O
6
8 i
5 ^
I I I
^ fti ^
■p^/u^wj C^
^ CO
CONJUGATIONS.
405
cc eg
(M ^ as
i
o
§ a
§ § g
a C ^ ^
r^ rS "S .N
"O 'O rO 'O
.2 -I
c3 XI
^ OS
1
o
o
2
ti
9
V
if
s
s
s
•g
53 ^ ^
iS
•c
-i5 o
^
U2
»
^
e8
•a
i
2
4^
9
Is
VN
gj
«r
eS
M
•N
•N
o
P
Q
ft
ft
ft
ft
§3
ft
^
^
Eh
H
H
1
I
ci
1
1
2
'C3
CO
1
•pifMdmi
^
1
t
s
>-
E
P
5
t-H
^
406
CiONJUGATIOXS,
^3 rs
-a
I 11 I I t
eS J2 ^ as u
I s 5* =? =?
■X3 'O no 173 ry
Q
1
i
O)
CJ
5»
»
s»
Q
«
«
g g
4J o
1 1 1
• V
.2
d
?
CO
•!5
h
^
^
M ■§
J
OOP
I
C3 5 2 S £
bi t ^ .Si j:
2 5 5* 5* :?
if s
5» 5» »
cf < 2 S 2^
.N .3 S» S* I?
O P O ft Q
'p^/u^uij
CONJUGATIONS,
407
I 1
I 1
•I ^ §
I (5
■73 'O no
-^ I
•SI ^
i i i t
p o S <:
I 1 1 1
i a BS
5^
GQ
f s
i g
•ii^ <X> o <V f
1 1 1 1 ^
'73 TS ^3 'O plj
t- •■-<
6 I
p
s e
'p^/jsdwj
408
CONJUGATIONS.
T
CO
«
t
&
H
8"
o
Hi
CO h
H
.2 ^ :5?
B J
I §5
pq »
o
S
so
t-t
•l
5 sS
fell ^" . -2
r-t « So So &
F w w w
I .^' I
|) go §3 |) ^
© ©
s a
^ ^ If If
H M H
I
I |) I ^
? s 2
ill ;n s
g)
|) go g) S,
« iN «N <3
fii k;
cti 'P^/u3diUJ fe,
CONJUGATIONS
409
1j
B ^
f
o
a
§
o*^
g
*2
Q
t
§
g
g
m
pE)
W
ps]
i i
•E
H
S i
o
S
i
1
2
1
1
^
^
»
^. I
5
-§
o"
u
g
§
(^
;^
W
H
S
k
.
■<
H
g
pu
S
o
Ph
e fc fc
^- S
Pi b
cT
-o
of
"S
^
u
fc
P4
©
(^
M
><
1
'^
*&
Cl
t
g
-^
^
•0
4
i
d;
pq H
I I
'p9fjusdmi
18
410
CONJUGATIONS.
1
T
•p4 e« OS
0)
o4 g -3 « fa
o
. a
a
fa
Gi 'C V V g
c9 a m* m m
^ A M ^ M
o
i
ti
a
a H K
R
•S 1 o»
w
►5 O
•3 *S
"•»
'o V fa
^ K! ^
ana
III
►^ fti ^
^ ^ .a
S 8
ef J- i J ' ^
^12 2 2
a a a a a
t^ E-l Eh
r-1 (N TO K
V r ' "jj
1
CONJUGATIONS
411
81
a
CS
es
^
^
es
63
^
<►
a 2
« « «
•5 «rt 'N
IB .
I'
I
2
4)
£
K
oT
c>
4>
4)
:s
•§
S
s
^
*E
C
C
c
^
«
T?
m
e
e
9
n
1
S
1
ss
;^
»
{u
K
1
2
4^
&)
4>
s
d
n
^
2
fa
fa
fa
^ s
I I
C3
« « !»
es « §^
h % ti^
« « $
^ ^ i
CS 4)
fa fa
E « ^
.25 C5 (l4
I
^
f^
R, fe,
-^ -g 13 -rS 5>
^ " . ' I
412
CONJUGATIONS.
• fciD
CO g
2 I
gill
<^» tc
I 1
bo bO
3 S
s
1
S
a
s
1
o
a
^•l
t
1
to
s
•s
3
s
3
3
3
•-5
•rs
•-8
•-»
•-s
»-5
•-»
*g '§ I
S) go §3
to
3
•-8
«
pjj
M
>
M
-tl
^
P
1
>
t— I
>i
i*
1
o
i
i
1
H
■s
o"
i
1
1
3
3
3
S
*-z
•-5
g4
i
g
g
Plh
&5
OS
C5
1
. S) -S o
eo I S) ^
to So §D
3 3 3
bo Id d ^
9 bo bo bO
3 3 3 3
1-5 *-5 l-S 1-8
I. «• "
4
! I
V & 3) U) U3
3 3 3 3 3
CONJUGATIONS
413
2 i
O O
i
.2
s
^2
o
O
o
o
k K k
o o o
§
§
8
o
o
o
1
^
S^
1
>>
o
o
o
o
O
O
i 4 1
^ '^ •<
5 el -
^ o o
o o o
» ^
5 5 &!
S I 23
^ O t^
o
-o
.2 K
o o
i>% .2
o o
. o
o
^ t^ ??
o o o
o o
(^ -pB/uddtuf (^
414
CONJUG ATIONS.
C3
a
c
v
c
e3
-i
a
»5j
S3
"5
n
o
«
S
.2
Ji
.1
.2i
s
S
A
'o
"o
"o
.4
.a
o
o o o
.2 -n
o
o
J
s
§
1
a
o
o
o
"o "o "o
o
i
CO fli
u a
^ ej e)
s i I
pfl "o "o
►2 o
B o o o
IV, 'J99/U9duiJ
I
CONJUGATIONS,
416
2 ^
3 o
1=5
V5S
o
3 s
&4 CLi
'CJ 'O t3
EJ IS
P< S=U p4
■2 J
O
'3 .2 ^
'-S ^ '3
o 3 o
p. p* P«
§ 2 o
• I § a
o o S
CL, f^ Ph
•1
03
•s
'73
O
1
1
1
p.
eu
&
p.
p.
m
m
«r
./*
O
o
o
~
s
a
2
g
OQ
g
a
03
.2
V
o
^
'Eh
'S
''3
'S
P^
^3
5
£
s
•§
^ '^ -^
Ph Ph CM
O)
d
3
p.
O
P,
o
» 4
3 o
<^ p-t p-(
3
p-
3
p<
O
P.
U
o
P4
T3
3
p.
p. p.
o 3
p. p^
^ '3
p. p>
»5 O
f^ 4 f^
{^ 'psfjLddwj ^
416
CONJUGATIONS
I
T
g
«
O
. 2 .23
^3
O
P4
03
1
•E
O
o
o
a
12
•c
no
o
>
I- ?
I ^
S I H
g s I
»3 O Cu
73
O
P.
Pep
i" I I
a 73 73
POO
Oi O. P.
5 £
I, ^ I
g
p
a.
•T3
I I -S -S
fill
P4 P. a, p.
5 I
2J -S
I ^
i I
Rj ')^/u9dtui
3
I
«
li
CONJUGATIONS,
417
a
o
(N fl a
o o
u
o
P4
I I
P o
Ai a.
at
I
i
I
a
o
II4
I
1 !
. S .2
2
S
£
4}
a>
V
'S
1
%
PI
El
A
A
p.
oT
rfT
oa"
Q
a
g
s
£
2
4>
0}
'in
1
1
1
1
1.
^
1
S
(S
^
1
H
^
^
g
g
Ph
s
&
H
s
g
5
t5
&4
r
CO fl
o
p*
o
&1)
r «>
I
•E
o
p.
1
Pi
I 1 ■§ I S
PL( PL| pL, p^ Ph
O 0) O)
H H H
'ps/u&dwi ^
18*
418
CONJUGATIONS,
<N §3
I
I t
i
1
«
1
"S
"5
3
•s
•g
•g
cr
C
cr
cr
cr
_r
2
.2
^-
oT
•1
1
i
"i
1
1
*s
•
§
•S "S. -5
g e i i
C IS •s •<
c « « •
§ "S "5 •?
C C O? o*
O ^ o S
ffi
J?
5 t) H
I s ^
A O Pi
CO "S
•g s
2
•§
i
1
•p*
3
^
^
&
"§
^
'ii
t*
q
1
i
1
K
^ b m b
'r (iM (Pi W4
<u C • • a
•3 s -s •? -g
cr cr c cr o"
2
•g
cr
•g
g £ «p4 w4 •N
o C • J5
«< a> «p4 (M tpt
3 3 3 3 3
D* O" O' O? O'
ftj jog/Mdwf
CONJUGATIONS.
419
•2
I .
d d d
g QJ g
OJ <D O)
s T! •a
.2" S
(S
o
o
O
o
§
a
B
a
B
cS
CJ
<x>
'C
(^
02
fr.
eS
<u
QJ
Ml
*53
•N
•N
•N
s
«
S
w
PH
'^ s
OS aj .2 o .fa
5" 4§
-s § «^ s
. .g g s £
•a 2 "a •s T!
.fa CD
I I
•a "a
•E s g 2
r^ 0? C? <D
s a 2
•pa/xadwf
420
CONJUGATIONS.
1J
1
»• 8 I
'a S 6
s § a
a .3 ^
(^ w w
o 4
^ S S
J
1
i I
04 h
1 •£
5? ^
08 V
ft ft fr
•S .s .s
ft ft ft
ft ft ft
9
C/2 cS ^
ft 'ft ft
ft ft
ft I ft
ft ft
M CC M
^ O
I I, ^- I
I 2
Eh H
(M CO
'pi/Mdutf ^
CONJUGATIONS,
421
. S § I
CO S '^ i=i
d ^ g
61 5 ;2
73 'S c?
r
1 1
^ S ;S
-•Ills
o
a
i i
to
a ^
a; a.
'=3 'rt 'rt
I-
3
2 P f<
I I I
»5 O Ph
»©
a ;:3 ^
.^" »«
^
•1
1
f
3
3
3
1
1
r-l (M CC
f^
'P9/U9duij
H
»
>
1
1
g
5
3
^
s
422
CONJUGATIONS
•I
a
T
a
>
I
i i
r
I o
. 5
p-t
^- ri « ^« ^ & .2 2 ^ e «
"• i I ? I I f I ^ ^ 9 1
.2 *d M
I
? ? ■?
o
CO c3
a J
6
i
^
S
2
1
1
H
H
H
t^
E-t
2 $'
.2 5
7 I
^
f f
•E
? ? ?
4f .3 ^ s
I- ? I
4 «i; ^
i
f i i
rl
1
Trae
TraJ
TraJ
?f
H
01
Ter.
Ter.
Ter.
1
1*
t2 (N CO
5>
.S o
fi;
'P9/j9dtUJ
^ 1
H
1
1
C9
c3
CONJUGATIONS.
423
> > >
tl) '^ .2^
s^ ^ ui a
C3 e3 83
> t*- t>
"3 'rt
I a S
-III
"d '3 'S
fc> > k
:d
O
o
51)
.2 ^2 'w
'eS "eS "^
> > t*
^2 ,2 ~
''^ ^ 's
t» > >
'3 [3 ^
> ^ ^
^
1. •^'
6i 5 ^
CO >3 f-
*■ •^
424
CONJUGATIONS.
CO a
'a
O CO
I I
I i
^ i
i> >
I a
>
2 g ft
►5 O Ph
5»
CO o) £3
•2 ©
fl 2 to
JJ 'a '3
t 2? T!
&
«r
«^
-i ^
'3
a
(S
(S
1
!
1
<
-w t1
I « I
3 -3
I § i I
I i I 3
> > ^ t>
'p9fM)dxuj
CONJUGATIONS,
425
o d
i i
.S
<1> .?5 'r>
V
cj o) a>
«8
T •?
a B H
S I ^
5 o (5
05 «4
« *S ^r w?
>- k P> >•
^
^ ^
(^ 'P9/U9diuj ftj
I
426
CON JUG ATI ONS.
CONJUGATION OF A VEEB IN THE EEFLECTIVE FORM.
Lavarse.
INFINITIVE.
I To wash one's self.
Lavaadose.
GEEIJND.
Washing one's self.
Lavadose.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Washed one's self.
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Me lavo. I wash myself.
2. Te lavas.
3. Se lava.
1. Nos lavamos.
2. Os lavais.
3. Se la van.
IiMPKRFECT.
1. Me lavaba. I was washing,
washed, or used
to wash myself.
2. Te lavabas.
3. Se lavaba.
1. Nos lavabamos.
2. Os lavabais.
8. Se lavaban.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
1. Me lave. I washed myself. I 1. Nos lavdmos.
2. Te lavaste. 2. Os lavasteis.
3. Se lav6. I 3. Se lavaron.
FUTURE SIMPLE.
1. Me lavar6. I shall wash my-
self.
2. TelavarAs.
3. Se lavard.
1. Nos lavar^mos.
2. Os lavar^is.
3. Se la varan.
2. LAvate.
3. Lavese.
Wash thyself.
IMPERATIVE.
1. Lav^raonos.
2. Lavaos.
3. Ldvense.
CONJUGATIONS.
427
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Me lave.
2. Te laves.
3. Selave.
I may wash my-
self.
1. Noslavemos.
2. Oslaveis.
3. Se laven.
IMPERFECT. — First Termination.
1. Me lavaria. I would wash my-
self.
2. Te lavarias.
3. Se lavaria.
1. Nos lavariamos.
2. Os lavariais.
3. Se lavarian.
Second TermiTiation.
1. Me lavara. I might, could,
would, or should
wash myself.
2. Te lavaras.
3. Se lavara.
1. Nos lavaramos.
2. Os lavarais.
3. Se lavaran.
Third Termination.
1. Me lavase.
2. Te lavases.
3. Se lavase.
I might, could,
would, or should
wash myself.
FUTURE.
1. Me lavare. I might or should
wash myself.
2. Te lavares.
3. Se lavare.
1. Nos lavasemos.
2. Os lavaseis.
3. Se lavasen.
1. JSTos lavaremos.
2. Oslavareis.
3. Se lavaren.
Ayudarse.
Ayuddndose.
Ayudddose.
INFINITIVE.
I To help each other.
GKETJND.
j Helping each other.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
I Helped each other.
428
CONJUGATIONS,
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Nos ayuda- We help eacli
mos. other.
2. Oa ajudais.
3. Se ayudan.
IMPERFECT.
1. Nos aynda- We used to help
bamos. each other.
2. Os ajudabais.
3. Se ayudaban.
PRETERIT DEFINITE.
1. Nos ayuda- We helped each
mos. other.
2. Os ayudasteis.
3. Se ayudaron.
FUTURE 8IMPLB.
1. Nos ayuda- We shall help
r^raos. each other.
2. Os ayudar^is.
3. Se ayudaran.
1. Ayud^monos.
2. Ayudaos.
3. Aytidense.
IMPERATIVE.
Let us help each other.
Help each other.
Let them help each other.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Nos ayude- We may help each
mos. other.
2. Os ayudeis.
8. Se ayuden.
Second Termination.
1. Nos ayuda- We might, could,
ramos. would, or should
help each other.
2. Os ayndarais.
8. Se ayudaran.
IMPERFECT. — First Terminxition.
1. Nos ayudaria- We would help
mos. each other.
2. Os ayudariais.
3. Se ayudarlan.
Third Termination.
1. Nos ayudase- We might, cou!d,
mos. would, or should
help each other.
2. Os ayudaseis.
3. Se ayudasen.
FUTURE.
1. Nos ayudaremos,
2. Os ayudareis.
3. Se ayudaren.
We might or should help each
other.
CONJUGATIONS.
429
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
Amankoes. I To grow light.
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
Present. Amanece. It grows light.
Imperfect. Amanecia. It was growing light.
Pret. Def. Amaneci6. It grew light.
Fut. Simple. Amanecera. \ It will grow light.
Compound Tenses.
Ha amanecido. [ It has grown light.
It had grown light.
It had grown light.
It will have grown light.
Habia amanecido.
Pret. Indef.
Pluperfect.
Anterior. Hubo amanecido.
Gomp. Future. Habra amanecido
IMPERATIVE.
Amanezca.
1 Let it grow light.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple
Tenses.
ient. Amanezca.
' Amaneceria.
erfeet. \ Amaneciera.
Amaneciese.
J
It may grow light.
r might, "^
It \ should, or I grow liglit.
1 [ would
ure. Amaneciere.
1 It should grow light.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect, Haya amanecido. i It may have grown light.
r might have, 1
It ^should have, or U^^^^'^
[ would have J ^'^^^^•
It should have grown light.
fHabria 1
jHubiera l^^"^"^"
[Hubiese J ^^^«-
Gomp. Future. Hubiere amanecido.
Pluperf.
N. B. — Anochecer, to grow dark, is conjugated in the same maimer,
and has the same irregularity.
430
Nktar,
CONJUGATIONS.
I To 871010.
Present.
Imperfect.
Fret. Def.
Future.
Nieva.
Nevaba.
Nev6.
Nevara.
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It snows.
It was snowing.
It snowed.
It will snow.
Pret. Indef. Ha nevado.
Pluperfect. Habia nevado.
Anterior. Hubo nevado.
Comp. Future. Habra nevado.
Compound Tenses.
It lias snowed.
It had snowed.
It had snowed.
It will have snowed.
Nieve.
IMPERATIVE.
I Let it snow
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
Nieve.
Nevada.
Nevara.
Nevase,
Nevare.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It may snow.
r might,
It \ should, or \ snow.
I would
It should snow.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
Compound Tenses.
Ilaya nevado. i It may Iiave snowed.
Ilabria 1 | f might have, ^
Ilubiera I nevado. It -{• should have, or Isnowed.
IlubieseJ [ would have J
Comp. Future, llubiere nevado.
It should have snowed.
N. B. — Helar.^ to freeze, is conjugated in the same manner, and haa
the same tenses irregular.
Tronae.
CONJUGATIONS.
I To thunder.
431
Present.
Imperfect.
Pret. Def.
Future.
Truena.
Tronaba.
Troii6.
Tronara.
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It thunders.
It was tlnmdering.
It thundered.
It will thunder.
Compound Tenses.
Pret. Indef. Ha tronado.
Pluperfect. Habia tronado.
Anterior. Hubo tronado.
Comp. Future. Habra tronado.
It has thundered.
It had thundered.
It had thundered.
It will have thundered.
Truene.
IMPERATIVE.
I Let it thunder.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
Truene.
f Tronaria.
■I Tronara.
[Tronase.
Tronare.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses.
It may thunder.
r might, 1
It J should, or I thunder.
[ would J
It should thunder.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect. Haya tronado.
f Habria 1
Pluperfect. J Hubiera I tronado.
[Hubiese J
Comp. Future. Hubiere tronado.
It may have thundered.
( might have, 1
It J should have, or I thundered.
[ would have J
It should have thundered.
N". B. — Lloter^ to rain, is conjugated like this verb, and changes also
the into ue in the same tenses. Escarchar., to freeze ; granizar, to
hail ; lloviznar, to drizzle ; and relampaguear, to lighten, are all regular.
432
CONJUGATIONS.
Haceb, to he (when employed in reference to time and weather),
INDICATIVE.
Simple Tenses.
Present. Hace. It is.
Imperfect. Hacia. It was.
Pret. Def. Hizo. It was.
Future. Hara. It will be.
Compound Tenses.
Pret. Indef. Ha hecho. It has been.
Pluperfect. Habia hecho. It had been.
Anterior. Hubo hecho. It had been.
Comp. Future. Habra hecho. It will have been.
Haga.
IMPERATIVE.
) Let it be.
Present.
Imperfect.
Future.
IIa2:n.
r Ilaria. 1
J Hiciera. I
[lliciese. J
Hiciere.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Simple Tenses,
It may be.
r might,
It -j should, or
[ would
It should be.
Compound Tenses.
be.
Perfect. Haya hecho.
fHabria 1
Pluperfect. \ Hubiera I hecho.
[llubiese J
Comp. Future. Hubiere heclio.
It may have been.
r might have, 1
It J should have, or j-been.
(^ would have J
It should have been.
Haber, when signifying there to he.
Hay.
Ilabia.
Huba
HabrA.
( There is,
( There are.
( There was.
I There were.
There will be.
Ha habido.
Habia habido.
Hubo habido.
Habrd habido.
J There has been.
J There have been.
There had been.
There had been.
There shall have
been.
CONJUGATIONS.
433
Haya.
Let there be.
Haya habido
There may have
Haja.
There may be.
been.
Habria.
'There might,
Habria habido.
'There might,
Hubiera.
could, would, or
Hubiera habido.
could, would, or
Hubiese.
. should be.
Hubiese habido.
should have
been.
Hubiere.
There might or
should be.
Hubiere habido.
There might or
should have
been.
DEFECTIVES,
The following verbs are found used only in the tenses and persons giv^n
in the annexed examples :
Placer.
To please.
INDICATIYK
Present, dd pera. sing., Place.
Imperf. " *' Placia.
Fret Def " " Plugo.
It pleases.
It was pleasing.
It pleased.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present. 2>d pers., sing., Plegue.
Imperf. " " J PJ°g"i«™-
{ Plugmese.
Comp. Future. " Pluguiere.
SOLEE.
It may please.
It would please.
It might please.
It should please.
To he wont.
Suelo.
Sueles.
Suele.
Solemos,
Soleis.
Suelen.
INDICATIYE.
PEESENT.
I am wont.
Thou art wont.
He is wont.
We are wont.
You are wont.
They are wont.
19
434
CONJUGATIONS.
IMPEEFECT.
Solia.
Soli as.
Solia.
Soliaraos.
Soliais,
Soliaa.
Tacer.
I was wont
Thou wast wont.
He was wont.
We were wont.
You were wont.
They were wont.
To lie dead.
No part of this verb is made use of except the third persons of the
present indicative, yace and yacen^ which are generally inscribed on
tombstones.
CONJUGATION OF A VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE.
Ser perdonado.
INTINITIVE.
I To be pardoned.
GEEUND.
Siendo perdonado. | Being pardoned.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Habiendo sido perdonado. j Having been pardoned.
1. Soy perdona- I am pardoned.
do.
2. Eres perdo-
nado.
8. Es perdonado,
INDICATIVE.
PRESENT.
1. Somos perdonados.
2. Sois perdonados.
8, Son perdonados.
IMPERFECT.
1. Era perdona- I was or used to
do. be pardoned.
2. Eras perdonado.
8. Era perdonado.
1. Eramos perdonados.
2. Erais perdonados.
8. Eran perdonados.
CONJUGATIONS.
435
PEETERIT DEFINITE.
1. Fui perdona- I was pardoned.
do.
2. Fuiste perdonado.
3. Fue perdonado.
1. Fuimos perdonados.
2. Fuisteis perdonados.
3. Fueron perdonados.
FUTUEE SIMPLE.
1. Sere perdo- I shall be par-
nado. doned.
2. Seras perdonado.
3. Sera perdonado.
1. Seremos perdonados.
2. Sereis perdonados.
3. Seran perdonados.
IMPERATIVE.
2. S6 perdonado. Be pardoned.
3. Sea perdonado.
1. Seamos perdonados.
2. Sed perdonados.
3. Sean perdonados.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PEESENT.
1. Sea perdonado. I may be par-
doned.
2. Seas perdonado.
3. Sea perdonado.
1. Seamos perdonados.
2. Seals perdonados.
3. Sean perdonados.
iMPEEFEOT. — First Termination.
1. Seria perdona- I would be par-
do. doned.
2. Serias perdonado.
3. Seria perdonado.
1. Seriamos perdonados^
2. Serials perdonados.
3. Serian perdonados.
Second Termination.
1. Fuera perdona- I might, could,
do. would, or
should be par-
doned.
2. Fueras perdonado.
3. Fuera perdonado.
1. Fueramos perdonados.
2. Fuerais perdonados.
3. Fueran perdonados.
436
CONJUGATIONS
Third Termination.
1. Fuese perdona- I might, could,
do. would, or
should be par-
doned.
2. Fueses perdonado.
8. Fuese perdonado.
1. Fuesemos perdonados.
2. Fueseis perdonados.
3. Fuesen perdonados.
FUTUEE.
1. Fuere perdona- I might or
do. should be par-
doned.
2. Fueres perdonado.
3. Fuere perdouado.
1. Fueremos perdonados.
2. Fuereis perdonados.
3. Fueren perdonados.
Compound Tenses.
INDICATIVE.
PEETERIT INDEFINITE.
1. He sido perdo-
nado.
2. Has sido per-
donado.
8. Ha sido perdo-
uado.
I have been par-
doned.
1. Hemos sido perdonados.
2. Habeis sido perdonados,
3. Han sido perdonados.
PLUPERFECT.
1. Habia sido
perdonado.
2. Habias sido
perdonado.
8. Habia sido
perdonado.
1. Ilube sido
perdonado.
2. Hubiste sido
perdonado.
8. Hubo sido
perdonada
I had been par-
doned.
1. Habiamos sido perdonados.
2. Habiais sido perdoandos.
8. Habian sido perdonados.
ANTERIOR.
I had been par-
doned.
1. Hubiraos sido perdonados.
2. Hubisteis sido perdonados.
8. Hubieron sido perdonados.
CONJUGATIONS.
437
1. Habre sido
perdoDado.
2. Habras sido
perdonado.
3. Habra sido
perdonado.
1. Haja sido
perdonado.
2. Hayas sido
perdonado.
3. Haya sido
perdonado.
1. Habria sido
perdonado.
2. Habrias sido
perdonado.
3. Habria sido
perdonado.
1. Hubiera sido
perdonado.
2. Ilubieras sido
perdonado.
3. Hubiera sido
perdonado.
1. Hubiesesido
perdonado.
2. Hubieses sido
perdonado.
3. Hubiesesido
perdonado.
COMPOUND FUTIJEE,
I sball have been
pardoned.
1. Habr^mos sido perdonados.
2. Habr^is sido perdonados.
3. Habran sido perdonados.
- SUBJUNCTIYE.
PERFECT.
I may have been
pardoned.
1. Hayamos sido perdonados.
2. Hayais sido perdonados.
3. Hayan sido perdonados.
PLUPERFECT. — First Termination.
I would have been
pardoned.
1. Habriamos sido perdonados.
2. Habriais sido perdonados.
3. Habrian sido perdonados.
Second Termination.
I might, could,
would, or
should have
been pardoned.
1. Hubieramos sido perdonados.
2. Hubierais sido perdonados.
3. Hubieran sido perdonados.
Third Termination.
I might, could,
would, or
should have
been pardoned.
1. Hubiesemos sido perdonados.
2. Hubieseis sido perdonados.
3. Hubiesen sido perdonados.
438
CONJUGATIONS.
FUTURE COMPOUND.
1. Habiere sido I might or should
perdonado. have been par-
doned.
2. Hubieres sido
perdonado.
8. Hubiere sido
perdonadoi
1. Hubieremos sido perdonadi
08.
2. Ilubiereis sido perdonados.
8. Hubieren sido perdonados.
LIST
OF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS IN THE SPA:JfISH
LANGUAGE.
TS ^.— The figures jUaced after each verb refer to the page at which the model conjugatUm
for that verb is to be found. For instance., the number 398 shows that Aducib
is conjugated like Cothx>vcvel, found at page 398.
Absolver, 394.
Abstraer, 422.
Acertar, 392.
Acordar, 893.
Acostar, 393.
Acrecentar, 392.
Adestrar, 392.
Adherir, 395.
Adquirir, 399.
Advertir, 395.
Aducir, 398.
Aj?orar, 393.
Alentar, 392.
Almorzar, 393.
Amolar, 393.
Andar, 400.
Apacentar, 392.
Apostar, 393.
Aprobar, 393.
Aprctar, 392.
Arrecirse, 396.
Arrendar, 392.
Arrepentirse, 395.
Ascender, 394.
Asentar, 392.
Asentir, 395.
Aserrar, 392.
Asestar, 392.
Asir, 401.
A solar, 393.
Asoldar, 393.
Atender, 394.
Atentar, 392.
Aterrar (echar por tier-
ra), 392.
Atestar (rellenar), 392.
Atraer, 422.
Atravesar. 392.
Aventar. 392.
Aventarse, 392.
Avergonzar, 393.
Bendecir, 402.
Caber, 403.
Caer, 422.
Calentar, 392.
Cegar, 392.
Ceilir, 390.
Cemer, 394.
Cerrar, 392.
Cimentar, 392.
Cocer, 404.
Colar, 393.
Colegir, 396.
Colgar, 393.
Comedirse, .396.
Comenzar, 392.
Competir, .396.
Concebir, 390.
Concernir, 395.
Concertar, .392.
Concordar. 393.
Condescender, 394.
Condolerse, 394.
Conducir, 398.
Conferir, 395.
Confesar, .392.
Conocer, .398.
Consesfuir, .396.
Consentir, .395.
Consolar, 393.
Constrefiir, 396.
Contar, 393.
Contener, like Teneb.
(See auxiliary verbB.)
Contender, 394.
Contradecir, 406.
Controvertir. 395.
Contraer, 422.
Convertir, .395.
Corregir, 396.
Dar, 405.
Decaer, 422.
Decentar. 392.
Decir, 406.
Deducir, 398.
Defender, 394.
Deferir, 395.
Degollar, 393.
Demoler, 394.
Demostrar, 393.
Denegar, 392.
Denostar, 393.
Derrengar, .392.
Derretir, 390.
Desavenir, 424.
Descender, 394.
Descollar, 393.
Descordar, 393.
Descomedirse, 31
Desfiocar, 393.
Deshacer, 410.
Deshelar, C02.
Desteir, 396.
Desembrar, 392.
Desolar, 393.
Desollar, .393.
Desovar, ,393.
Despedir, 396.
Despernar, 392.
Despertar, 392.
Desterrar, 392.
Desplegar. 392.
Desvergonzarse,
Dezmar, ,392.
Discemir. 395.
Diferir, 395.
Digerir. 395.
Discordar. 39,3.
Disolver, ,394.
Divertir. ,395.
Doler. .394.
Dormir, 407.
Elegir. 396.
Embestir, 396.
Empedrar, 392.
440
LIST OF IKREGULAB VERBS.
Empezar, 392.
Einporcar, S93.
Encendcr, 3t>4.
Enceuaar, 392.
Encerrar, 392.
Encomcndar, 392.
Eua)ntrar, 393.
Encordar, 393.
Engreirse, 396.
Eiigrosar, 39;i
Eniueiidar, 3J^
Enrodar, 393.
Ensangreutar, 392L
Enteiulur, 394.
Euterrar, 392.
Envestir, 39(V.
Erguir, 408.
Errar, 409.
Escarmentar, 3^
Escocer, 404.
Esforzar, 393.
EsTAB. {iicQ auxiliary
verbs.)
Estrenir, 39C.
Expedir, 39G.
Exteader, 394.
Forzar, 39!I.
Fregar, 3^
Gemir, .396.
Gobernar, 3SS.
Hakek. ^See auxiliaries
and impereonals.)
Ilacer, 410.
Heder, 394.
Helar, 392.
H^nchir, 396,
Header, 394.
Henir, 396.
Herir, 395.
IJerrar, 392.
Hervir, 395.
Holirar, ;i93.
HoHar, 393.
hnpedir, 806.
Incensar, 392.
Tndudr. 398.
Infcrir, 395.
Ingcrir, 396.
Tnqnirir, 399.
Introdncir. 398.
Invemar, 392.
Invertir, 395.
Invest ir, 396.
Ir, 411.
Llover, 394.
Maldeclr, 402.
Manifestar, 392.
Maulencr, like Tenkb.
(See auxiliary verbti.)
Medir, 396.
Mentar, 392.
Mentir, 395.
Merendar, 392.
Moier, 394.
Morder, 394.
Morir, 407.
Mostrar, 392,
Mover, 396.
Jngar,412.
Negar, 392.
Nevar, 392.
Oir, 413.
Oter, 414-
Pedir. 396.
Pensar, 392.
Perder, 394.
Pervertir, 39&.
Placer, 433.
Pleirar, 392.
Poblar, 393.
Poder 415.
Podrir, 416.
Poner, 417.
Preferir, 395.
Probar, 393.
Producir, 398.
Proferir, 395.
Quebrar, 392.
Querer, 418.
Raer, 422.
Eecomendar, 893L
Recordar, 393.
Rccostar, 393.
Reducir, 398.
Rcfcrir. 395.
Repar, 392.
Regir, .396.
Regoldar, 392.
Reir, 419.
Rcmendar, 392.
Rendir, 396.
Renovar, 893.
Refiir. 396.
Repctlr, 396.
Requobrar, 392.
Reqiierir, .SJ)5.
Reacoutrar, 393.
Resollar, 393.
Retentar, :i92.
Reventar, 392.
Revolcar. 393.
Rodar, 393.
Rocr.
Rogar, 393.
Saber, 420.
Saiir, 421.
SatiBfacer, 410.
Segar, 392.
Seguir, 396.
Sembrar, 392.
Sentar, 392.
Betir, 395.
Seb. (See auxiliarj
verbs.)
Servir, 396.
Berrar, 392.
Boldar, 393.
Soler, 4.33.
Soltar, 39.3.
Solver, 394.
Sonar, .393.
Soflar, S<M.
Sosegar, 392.
Soterrar, .392.
Sugerir, 395.
Temblar, 392.
Tender, 394.
Teneb. (See auxiliarj
verbs.)
Teiiir, 396.
Tentar, 392.
Torcer, 404.
Tostar, 393.
Traducir, 398.
Traer, 422.
Trasccnder, 394.
Trascordarse. 393.
Traseerar, 392.
Trocar, 39a
Tronar, 393.
Tropezar, 392.
Valcr, 423.
Vcnir, 424.
Ver, 425.
Vertcr, 394,
VePtir, 396.
Volar, 393.
Volcar, 393.
Volver, 384.
Tacer, 434.
Zaherir, S9E
700ABULAET,
CONTAINING ALL THE SPANISH WORDS USED IN THE GRAMMAR.
N. B.-The figures after each definition refer to the lessons in which the words
have been explained in the Grammar.
A, ah, prep., to, at, in.— Voy d Francia, I
am going to France; a lo mcnos, at
least ; a la verdad, indeed ; d la espaflola,
in the Spanish fashion. L. 4.
Abajo, ah-bah'-ho, adv., below, down,
down-stairs. L. 33.
Abalanzar, ah-bah-lan-tJiar\ to spring, to
rush. L. 57. , ^ i.
Abandonar, ah-ban-do-nar\ to abandon, to
five up, to leave. L. 58,
anico, ah-bah-ne'-co, s. m., fan. L. 52.
Abierto, ah-be-air'-to, p. p. irr. of Abbir,
(which see). L. 52.
Abogado, ah-bo-gah'-do, s. m,, lawyer, ad-
vocate. L. 49.
Aborrecible, ah-bor-rai-thd'-blai, adj., hate-
ful. L. 24.
Abril, ah-breel', s. m., April. L. 28.
Abrir, ah-breer\ to open. Abrirse, to be
opened, to blow (of flowers). L. 28.
Aca, a\-ca\ adv., here.— J.ca y alia, here
and there. L. 18.
Acabar, ah-cah-bar\ to finish, to end.— J.ca-
bar de, to be just, to have just.— ^m^ar
con, to kUl, to put an end to, to destroy.
L. 28.
Academia, ah-cah-dai'-me-a, s. f., academy.
L. 51.
Acaso, ah-cah'-so, adv., perchance, by
chance.— Si acaso, if at all.— For si acaso,
in case that. L. 32.
Accidente, ac-thl-dain' -tai, s. m., accident.
L. 40.
Accion, ac-thd-dne', s. f., action, share. L.
24.
Acento, ah-thain'-to, s. m., accent. L. 47.
Aceptar, ah-thaip-tar' , to accept. L. 45.
Acerca, ah-thair'-ca, prep. Acerca de, about.
L. 49.
Acertar, ah-lhair-tar' , to make out, to hit
the mark, to succeed, to be right {i. €., to
conjecture right). L. 34.
Acierto, ah-tM-air'-to, s. m., success. L. 52.
Acomodar, ah-cb-ma-dar' , to accommodate,
to suit. L. 31,
Acompaiiar, ah-cQm-pan-yar\ to accom
pany. L. 47.
Aconsejar, ah-cbn-sai-har' , to counsel, to
advise. L. 45.
Acordar, ah-cor-dar' , to accord, to atrree, to
iMHii.—Acordarse, to remember. iL. 46.
Acostar, ah-cos-tar\ to lay down.— J.co<-
tarse, to lie down, to go to bed. L. 35.
Actual, ac-twal', adj., present. L. 52.
Acudir, ah-coo-deer' , to haste, to run, to
turn (to), to refer (to). L. 49.
Acuerdo, ah-cwair'-do, s. m., agreement,
accord, decision (of a court). L. 42. ^
Aculla, ah-cool-ya\ adv., there.— Aqui y
(WuUd, to and fro ; here and there. L. 18.
Adelantar, ah-dai-lan-tar' , to advance, to
make progress. L. 36.
Adelante, ah-dai-lan'-tai, adv., forward.—
En adelante, henceforward.— /J.rfe/a/ife.'
fo on ! go ahead ! L. 43.
eman, ah-dai-man', s. m., posture, air.
L. 44.
Ademas, ah-dai-mas', prep., besides ; adv.,
moreover, besides. L. 37.
Adentro, ah-daia'-tro, adv., in, within, in-
side. L. 47.
Adivinar, ah-dee-vee-nar' , to guess, to di-
vine. L. 46.
Adjetivo, ad-hai-tee'-vo, b. m., adjective.
L. 43.
Admirable, ad-mee-rah'-blai, adj., admira-
ble, wonderful. L. 51.
Admiracion, ad-mee-rah-the-bne' , s. f., ad-
miration, wonder. L. 51.
Admirar, ad-mee-rar', to admire, to won-
der at. L. 61.
Adonde. (See Donde.) L. 9.
Adquirir, ad-M-reer', to acquire. L. 42.
Adverbial, ad-vair-bl-al' , adj., adverbial.
L. 50.
Adverbio, s. m., adverb. L. 43.
Advertir, ad-rair-teer' , to advise, to men-
tion, to point out, to warn, to observe.
L. 43.
Aereo, ah-ai'-rai-o. adj.. aerial. L. 48.
Afectacion, ah-faik-tdh-the-one', s. f., affec-
tation. L. 24.
Afectar, ah-faik-tar' , to affect. L. 45.
Afeitar, ah-fai-e-tar' , to shave, to paint (the
face). L. as.
Afirmacion, ah-feer-mah-the-bne', s. f., af-
firmation. L. 24.
Afirmar, ah-feer-mar' , to affirm, to make
firm, to strengthen. L. 48.
Aflijir, ah-flee-heer' , to afflict. L. 48.
Afortunado, ah-fore-too-nah'-do, adj., fortu-
nate. L. 63.
Ageno. ah-hai'-no, adj., foreign, belonging
to others. L. 63.
442
VOCABULARY
Agitacion, ah-hee-tafi-tM-One\ b. f., agita-
liou. L. 24.
Agradar, ah-grah-dar\ to please. L. 53.
Agradecer, afi-grah-d<u-thair\ to thank, to
be obliged to. L. 39.
Agregar, aJi-grai-gar\ to add, to unite. L.
4y.
Agrio, ah'-grl-o^ adj., sour. L. 22.
Agua, ak'-gwa, s. 1., water, L. 7.
Aguantar, ali-gwan-tar\ to support, to put
up with, to bear, to bear wiili. L. &3.
Aguardiente, ah-gwar-de-ain'-taiy 8. m.,
brandy. L. 50.
Agudeza, ah-goo-dai'-tha^ s. f., wit, witty
(jaying. L. 57.
Agjiero, ah-gwai'-rOy 8. m., augury, omen.
JL. 45.
Ahora, ah-b-ra^ adv., now. L. 27.
Aire, i'-rai^ s. in., air. L. 4(5.
Ajedrez, aU-hai-draith\ s. m., chess. L. 42.
Ala. ali'-la^ s. f., win^. L. 6«.
Alabanza, ah4ali-baw -tha^ 8. f., praise. L.
53.
Alarde, s. m.— Ilacer cUarde, to boast. L.
G3.
Alberto, al-bair'-to, s. m., Albert. L. 38.
Alcance, al-kan'-thai, s. m., reach. L. 53.
Alcanzar, al-can-tliar\ to reach, to over-
take, to take up with, to catch. L. 53.
Alegrar, ah-lai-grar\ to give joy, to make
glad. L. 37.
Alegrc, aJi-lai'-graiy adj., joyful, glad, merry.
L. 21.
Alejandro, ah4(U-han'-dr0y s. m., Alexan-
der. L, 3.
Aleli, ah-laz-lee', s. m., gilliflower, L. 9.
Aleman, ah-lai-man', b. m., German (lan-
guage). L. 2.
Aleman, s. m., German ; adj., German. L. 3.
Alemania, ah-lai-rnah-ne-a, 8. f., Germany.
L. 9.
Alfiler, al-fee-lair\ s. m. and f., pin. L. 46.
Algazara, al-gahthah'-ray s. f., shouts of
joy. L. 54.
Algodon, al-gd-ddne', b. m., cotton. L. 5.
Als):uien, al'-gdin, pron., somebody, any-
body, some one, any one. L. 17.
Algnno, &,' cU-goo'-tw, adj., some. L. 17.
Alguno, a, prbn. ind., and ad,]., somebody,
some one, anybody, any one, some. L.
17.
Alhaja, aJ-aJi'-hn, s. f.. jewel. L. 57.
Alimentar. ah-lee-main-tar\ to feed. — Ali-
mentarse de csperanzas, to live on hope.
L. 53.
jMimcnto, 8. m., food. L. 49.
Alia, al-va\ adv.. there, yonder. L. 18.
Alma, ai'-mn, s. f.. sonl. L. 47.
Almacen, a/-mah-f?inm\ s.m.. store. L. fR.
Almorzar, al-mdr-fhar\ to breakfast, to take
breakfast. L. 35.
Almtierzo, al-mu-cUr'-tho, s. m., breakfast.
L. 55. ^ ,
Alrededor, al-ral-dai-ddr\ adv., around. L.
Alteraclon, al-tah-rnh-tM-dne\ s. f , altera-
tion, change. L. 50.
Alto, al'-t!i, ad.1., hisrh. tall. L. 21.
Altnra. al-too'-rn. s. f., hcicht. L. 37.
Alumbrar. nh-loom-hrnr\ to light. L. 61.
..mable, ah-mah'-blai, adj., amiable. L.
47.
Amador, ah-maJi-ddr\ s, m., lover. L. 49.
Amanecer, ah-mah-nai-t?ialr\ to get morn-
ing, to be in a place at dayurealc, or
morning, L. 30.
Amante, ah'man'-iai, p. p. and b., loving,
lover, sweetheart. L. 38,
Auiar, ah-mar\ to love. L. 21.
Amanllo, ah-mah-red' -yd, adj., yellow, L, 54.
Ambicion, a7n-bl-t/u-orie\ b. f., ambition.
L. GO.
Ambos, am'-bds, pron., both. L. 28.
Amenazar, ah-mai-/iuh-tkar\ to menace, to
threaten. L. 59.
Ameuidad, ah-mcU-nii-dath' ^ b. f., amenity.
L. 32.
Amigo, ah-mZ'-go, s. m., friend. L. 13.
Amibtad, ak-mees-tatti\ s. f., fiiendship.
L. 61.
Amor, ah-more'y b. m., love. L. 45.
Amplio, a7n'-pll-Oy adj., ample. L. 52.
Ampo, 8. m., whiteness (ot snow). L. 61.
Aualltico, ah-nak-ll'-ll-cOy adj., analytical.
L. 35.
Anaranjado, ah-nah-ranfiah'-do, adj., or-
ange (color). L. 54.
Ancho, an'-chOs adj., wide, broad. L. 47.
Anchura, an-ciux)' -ra, b. f., widtti, breadth.
L. 61.
Anciano, an-thl-ah'-nOy a^j. and b., old, old
man. L. 48.
Andar, an-dar\ to walk, to go. L. 44.
Anecdota, ah-ncUk'-do-iay s. f., anecdote,
L. 44.
Angel, an'-haU, s. m., angel. L. 60. ^
Angulo, an'goo-io, s. ra., angle.— En anffuto*
rectos, at right angles. L. 60.
Animal, ah-n^-7nal\ s. m., animal. L. 62.
AaimaT.ah-ni-mar\ to animate, to encour-
age. L. 38.
Anoche, ah-nd'-chai, adv., last night. L. 28.
Anochecer, ah-m-chai-thair'y to get night,
to be (in such a place) at nightfall. L. 30,
Antagonista, an-(ah-gd-nees'-ta, s. m., an-
tagonist. L. 36.
Ante, an'-tai, prep., before, in presence of.
L. 16.
Anteayer, an-fai-ah-yair', adv., the day be-
fore yesterday. L. 16.
Antcccdente, an-tai-thai-dain'-taU s. m,
antecedent. L. 61.
Antcnochc, an-tai-nd'-chai, the night be-
fore last. L. 23.
Anteojo, an-tai-d'-ho, s. m., eye-glasB.—
AnteQJa<, spectacles. L. 63.
Antcpenultimo, an-tai-pai-nod'-thmo, a^.
ana s. m., antepenultimate. L. 50.
Anterior, an-(ai-ri-or\ adj., preceding, fore-
going, previous, former. L. 49.
Antes, an'-taiss, prep.— Antes de, before.
L. 42.
Antes, adv., rather, first, sooner than. L. 16.
Antepuesto, an-faJ-pwais'-io, p.p., prefixed :
8., prefix. L. 52.
Antiguo, an-t?'-giro, adj., ancient, old. L.
52.
Antisocial, an-tZ-ed-tM-al\ acU,, antisocial,
L. 50,
Antoio, an-W-ho, b. m., whim, longing.
L. 63.
Aflndir, an-vah-deer\ to add. L. 49.
Ann, an-ved\ s. m., indigo ("olor). L. 54.
Afio, crn-?>), s. m., year. L. 1*^.
Apariencla, ah-pm-ri-oin'-thl-a, s. f., ap.
pearancc, L, 53.
VOCABULARY
443
Apegar, ah-pai-gar^ to adhere, to attach.
L. 54.
Apenas, ah-pai'-nas, adv., scarcely, hardly.
L. 29.
Aplicar, ah-pl^-car\ to apply. L. 62.
Apostar, ati-pbs-tar\ to bet, to wager. L. 63.
Apoyar, ah-po-yar\ to lean, to support, to
protect. L. 50.
Apreciable, ah-prah-the-ah'-Uai, apprecia-
ble, respectable. L. 56.
Apremiar, ak-prai-me-ar' , to press, to urge.
L. 43.
Aprender, ah-prain-dair' . L. 6.
Apretar, alc-prai-tar\ to tighten, to press,
to urge. L. 65.
Aprisa, ah-pre'-sa^ adv., quickly. L. 6.
Aprobacion, ali-prd-bak-Uie-one\ 6. f., ap-
probation. L. '2A.
Aprobar, ah-pro-bar\ to approve. L. 35.
Aprovechar, ah-pro-v(d-cltar\ to progress,
to make the most of. L. 52.
Aproximar, ak-prd-kse-mar\ to approxi-
mate, to approach. L. 44.
Apto, ap'-to, adj., apt, fit. L. 51.
Apurado, ak-poo-ratt'-do, adj., embarrassed.
L. 44.
Aquel, ah-TcaU\ pron., that one, he; the
tormer. L. 18.
Aqui, ah-ke\ adv., here. L. 18.
Arbol, ar'-bol^ s. m., tree. L. 49.
Arboleda, ar-bo-lai'-da, s. f., grove, L. 49.
Arenal, ah-rai-nai\ s. m., sandy ground.
L. 49.
Arguir, ar-goo-eer' ^ to araue. L. 34.
Anstocracia, ah-rees-tb^rah' -thl-a^ 6. f.,
aristocracy. L. 60.
Aristocratico, adj., aristocrat. L. 35.
Aritmetica, ah-reet-mai'-te-ka^ s. f., arith-
metic. L. 21.
Armar, ar-mar\ to arm. L. 59.
Arpa, ar'-pa^ s. f., harp. L. 15.
Arquitecto, ar-kl-taik' -to^ s. m., architect.
L. 48.
Arquitectura, ar-ke-taik-too'-ra^ s. f., archi-
tecture. L. 51.
Arreglar, ar-rai-glar\ to regulate, to ar-
range, to settle. L. 60.
Arrepentirse, ar-rai-pain-teer'-sai, to re-
pent. L. 38.
Arrcstar, ar-rais-tar' , to arrest. L. 37.
Arriba, ar-re'-ba^ adv., above, up-stairs. L.
33.
Arte, s. ar'-tai, m. and f., art. L. 31.
Articulo, ar-te'-coo-lo^ s. m., article. L. 43.
Artificial, ar-te-fe-the-al' . adj., artificial. L.
49.
Artista, ar-tees'-ta, s. m., artist. L. 36.
Asador, s. m., spit (for roasting). L. 65,
Ascender, af!-thain-dair\ to ascend, to
amount. L. 37.
Ascension, as-tham-s?-one\ 8. f., ascension.
L. 49.
Asegurar, ah-sai-goo-rar', to secure, to as-
sure. L. 38.
Asesino, ah-sai-s^'-no^ s. m., assassin. L.
59.
Asi, ah-sl\ adv., so, thus. L. 20.— ^^.<f» ctue,
BO that, as soon as. L. 29, — Asi asi, so
so. L. 39.
Asiento, ah-s^-ain'-to, s. m., seat. L. 39.
Asir, ah-seer', to seize, to make the most of.
L.42.
Aino, as'-no, s. m., ass. L. 61.
[L. 46.
Asombro, ah-sdni'-bro, s. m., amazement.
Astronomia, ass-tro-nd-me'-a, s. f., astrono-
my. L. 49.
Atencion, ahtain-tM-one', s. f„ attention.
L. 56.
Atender, ah-tain-dair\ to attend. L. 37.
Atlantico, at-lan' le-ko, s. m, and adj., At-
lantic. L. 46.
Atolladero, ah-tbl-lya-dai' -ro, s.m., diflicul-
ty. L. 60.
Atraccion, ah-trak-the-one\ s. f., attraction.
L. 24.
Atras, ah-tras\ adv., behind, ago. L. 58.
Atreverse, ah-trai-vair'-sai, to dare. L. 48.
Atrevimiento, ah-trai-ve-me-ain'-to, s. m.,
assurance, daring. L. 64.
Atrocidad, ah-tro-the-dath' , s. f., atrocity.
L. 36.
Atropellar, a-trb-paU-yar' , to trample upon,
to run over. L. 51.
Aullar, ah-ool-yar\ to howl. L. 44.
Aumento, ah-oo-main' -to, s. m., augmenta-
tion, increase. L. 59.
Aun, ah-oon', adv., still, yet. L. 25.
Aunque, ah-oon-ke', adv., although, though.
L. 36.
Aut^encia, ah-oo-sain'-ihe-a, s. f., absence.
L. 35.
Ausente, ah-oo-sain'-tai, adj., absent. L.
59.
Autor, ah-oo-tbr' , s. m., author. L. 47.
Autoridad, ah-oo-to-re-dath' , s. f., authority.
L.59.
Auxiliar, ah-oo-kse-le-ar', s.m. and adj., aux-
iliarv. L. 57.
Auxiliar, to help, to aid. L. 62.
Auxilio, ah-oo-kse'-le-o, s. m., help, assist-
ance. L. 55.
Avenida, ah-vai-ne'-da, s. f., avenue. L.
15.
Aventurarse, ah-vain-too-rar'-sai, to ven-
ture. L. 65.
Avisar, ah-ve-sar\ to inform, to let know.
L. 45.
Ay I ah-e\ int., alas ! L. 46.
Ayer, ah-yair', adv., yesterday. L. 16.
Ayudar, ah-yoo-dar', to aid, to help. L.
38.
Azul, ah-thod', adj., blue. L. 54.
B.
Bailar, bah-l-lar' , to dance. L. 28.
Baile, bah-e-lai, s. m., dance, ball. L. 30.
Bajar, bah-har\ to go or come down, to
lower. L. 53.
Bajo, bah'-ho, adj., low, base, mean. L. 21,
Banco, ban' ko, s. m., bench, bank. L. 31.
Bandera, ban-dai'-ra, s. f., flag, standard.
L. 58.
Banar, ban-yar\ to bathe. L. 49.
Barato, bah-rah'-to, adj., cheap. L. 13.
Barba, bar'-ba, s. f., chin, beard. L. 59.
Barberia, bar-bai-re' -a, s. f., barber's shop.
Barbero, bar-bai'-ro, s. m., barber. L. 33.
Barbilampiiio, bar-be-lam-peen'-yo, adj.,
having a thin beard. L. 50.
Barco, s. m., vessel, boat. L. 60.
Baron, bah-rbne', s. m., baron. L. 51.
Barrer, bar-rair\ to sweep. L. 24.
Basta ! bas'-ta, int., enough ! L. 30.
Bastante, bas-tan'-tai, adv., enough. L. 25.
444
VOCABULAEY.
Bastar, bas-tar', to be enough, sufficient.
L. 30.
Baston. bas-mne, b. m., cane, stick. L. 10.
Baza, hah'tha, s. f., trick (at cards).— No
dejar meter baza^ not to let any one put
in a &ini,'le word. L. 63.
Bebedor, bai-beU-dOre' , 8. m., tippler, toper,
drinker. L. (55.
Beber, bai-bair\ to drink.— J5e6er los vien-
to3 por algo, to solicit with much eager-
ness, to desire ardently. —jSefter como uua
Cuba, to drink like a fish. L. 7.
Belleza, balt-yai' -tha, s. f., beauty. L. 51.
Bello, baU'-yo. adj., beautiful, handsome.
L. 31.
Bendecir, baia-dal-theer' , to bless. L. 41.
Bendito. bain-dl' -to^ adj., blessed. L. 52.
Besar, oai-sar\ to kiss. L. 39.
Beso, bai'-so, s. ra., kiss. L. 39.
Biblioteca, bi-ble-o-tai'-ka, s. f., library. L.
52.
Bleu, b^-ain' (pronounce in one syllable),
adv., well. L. 3.— Esta bien, very well,
all right.— No bien, scarcely, no sooner.
L. 29.
Bienhechor, bS-ain-ai-chdr\ s. m., benefac-
tor. L. .50.
Bien venido ! bd-ain' vai-nS'-do, int., wel-
come ! L. 45.
Billete, beel-yai'-tai, s. m., note, ticket. L.
7.
Blanca, blan'-ka, s. f.— Encontrarse sin blan-
ca, not to have a cent. L. 64.
Blanco, blan'-ko, adj., white. L. 58.
Blanco, s. m., mark (to aim at). — Quedarse
en bianco, to be left in the lurch. L. 57.
Bledo, blai'-do, s. m., straw.— No se me da
un bledo, I do not care a straw for it. L.
03.
Boca, b5'-ka, s. f , mouth. L. 44.— Ilablar
{)or boca de ganso, to repeat what another
las said. L. 63.
Bocado, bo-kak'-do, s. m., mouthful, bite.—
Bocado sin hueso, sinecure. L. 61.
Bolsa, bbl'-sa, s. f., purse. L. 45.
Bolsillo, bdl-seel'-yo, s. m., pocket, purse.
L. 47.
Bondad, bdne-dath', b. f., goodness, kind-
ness. L. 39.
Bondadoso, bone-dah-do'-so, a4J.,good, kind.
L. 5-1.
Bonito, bd-nV-to, adj., pretty. L. 58.
Borboton, br/re-'/H-ton-e' .—X borbotoneit, bub-
bling, hurriedly, confusedly. L. 63.
Bo.sque, bda'-kal, b. m., wood, woody place.
L. 40.
Bota, bd'4a, s. f , boot. L. 10.
Botica, bb-ll'-ka, s. f., drug-store. L. C2.
Boticario, bo-tl-kah' -rl-o, s. m., druggist.
L. 49. °^
Bravata, brah^ah'-ta, s.f., bravado.— Echar
braratas, to bra;j, to boast. L. 62.
Bravo, brah'-vo, adj., brave. L. 41.
Bravo I int., bravo I L. 48.
Brazo, brah'-t/io, s. m., arm. L. 44.
Bribon, brl-bonl', b. m., scoundrel, rascal.
L. 32.
Bruto, broo'-to, b. m., brute, ignorant per-
son. L. 48.
Bruto, adj., brutish, ignorant. L. 48.
Bucno, bwai'-no, adj., good. L. 1.— Buenos
dias, good morning, good day.— De buenas
4 priineras, all at once. L. 62.
Buey, bwai'-^, fl. m., ox. L. B8.
Bula, boo'4a, s. f.— Tener bula para todo, to
act according to one's fancy. L. 64.
Bulla, bool'-ya, b. f., noise.- Meter btiUa,
to make a noise. L. 63.
Bullicio, bool-yS'-thi-o, 8. m., bustle, noise,
uproar. L. 54,
Bulto, bool'-to, 8. m.. bundle. — Hablar a
bul^, to talk at random. L. 63.
Buria. boor'-la, s. f., jest, joke.— Hablar de
bunas, to speak in jest. L. 33.
Burlar, boor-iar', to jest. — Burlarse de al-
guno, to make fun of, to laugh at any one.
— Burla burlando, half jest, half earnest.
L. 3;}.
Burlon, boor-l^ne', 8. m., wag, jester. L. 44.
Busca, boos'-ka, s. f., search.- En busca de,
in search of. L. 55.
Buscar, boos-kar', to search, to look for.
L. A.—Buscar cinco pies al gato, to pick
a quarrel. L. 4-
C.
Caballcjo, kaJi-bal-yai'-Jw, s.m. (dhn. of Ca-
BALLo), nag, contemptible old horse. L.
49.
Caballero, kah^al-yai'-ro, b. m., gentleman,
knight.— Buenos tardes, cabaUero, good
afternoon, sir. L. 2.
Caballo, kah-bal'-yo, s. m., horse. L. 4.
Cabcllo, kah-baU'-yo, s. m., hair. .L. 33. —
Tomarla ocasion por los cabeUos, to profit
by the occasion. L. 61.
Caber, kah-bair', to hold, to contain.— No
caber de gozo, to be overjoyed.— i Puedfe
caber en tu imaginacion ? can such a
thing enter into your imagination *— No
cdbe mas, nothing more can be desired.
L. 42.
Cabeza, kah-bai'-tha, s. f . head. L. 28.
Cable, kah'-blai, s. m., cable. L. 46.
Cabo, kah'-bo, s. m., end. — Al ca^, at last.
L. &1.
Cada, kah'-da, pron., each, every.— Cada
vez, every time. — Cada uno, each, every
one. L. 4S.
Caer, kah-air\ to fall, to see, to understand,
to be, fall due. L. 4\.— Caer de pies, to
fall on one's feet.— Ya caigo en cllo, now
I see, understand.— Las ventanas caen k
la plaza, the windows look on the square.
— Cairrsele a uno la cara de vergQenza, to
blush with shame. L. 59.
Cafe, kah-fai', 8. m., coffee, coffee-house.
L. 14.
Caja, kah'-ha, s. f, case, box, cash (com-
mercial). L. (50.
Cal, s. f., lime.— De cal y canto, of stone.
L. 48.
Calabaza, kah-iah-bah'-t/ta, s. f., pumpkin.
— Dar calabaza^, to give the mitten. L. 61.
Calcular, kal-koo4ar', to calculate. L. 51.
Caldo, kal'-do, s. m., broth. L. 44.
Calducho, kal-doo'-c/io, b. m., poor broth.
L. 44.
Calentar, kah-lcUn-tar' , to heat, to wami.
L. 84.
Calcntura, kah-lain-too'-ra, s. f, fever. L.
(50.
Caliente, kah-U-ain'-taL, ac^., hot, warm.
L, 44,
VOCABULARY.
445
Callado, kaZ-yah'-do^ adj., silent, taciturn.
L. 20.
Callar, kal-yar'^ to be silent, to keep si-
lence.— CW/ar su pico, to hold one's
tongue, to say nothing. L. 42.
Calle, kal'-yai^ s. f., street. — Dejar a uno en
la caUe^ to strip one of his all. L. 15.
Calor, kah-lor\ s. m., heat, warmth. L. 25.
Calva, kal'-va^ s. f., bald place, bald part of
the head. L. 45.
Calvo, kcU'-vo, adj., bald. L. 45.
Calza, kal'-tha, s. f., stockings. — Tomar las
calzas de V^illadiego, to make off, to make
a hurried escape. L. 50.
Cama, kah'-ma, s. f., bed.— Guardar cama,
to be confined to one's bed. L. 14.
Cambiar, kam-be-ar\ to change. L. 59.
Cambio, kam'-be-o, s. m., change. L. 46.
Camino, kah-me'-no^ s. m., way, road. L. 60.
Camisa, kah-me'-sa, s. f., shirt. — Meterse en
camisa de once varas, to interfere in other
people's affairs. L. 46.
Campo, kam'-po, s. m., field, camp. — Dejar
el campo libre, to leave the field to one's
competitors. L. 59.
Canasto, kah-nas'-to, s. m., basket. L. 58.
Candidamente, kan'-de-dah-main-tai, adv.,
candidly. L. 48.
Cansado, kan-sah'-do, adj., tired, tiresome.
— Estar cansado, to be tired.— Ser cansa-
do, to be tiresome. L. 20.
Cansar, kan-sar\ to tire, to fatigue. L. 33.
Cantar, kan-tar\ to sing. L. 15.
Cautatriz, kan-tah-treeth' , s. f., singer. L.
15.
Cantidad, kan-te-dath\ quantity, sum. L.
60.
Canto, kan'-to, s. m., singing, stone. — De
cal y canto, of stone. L. 48.
Cantor, kan-tor\ ,s. m., singer. L. 15.
Canon, kan-yone' , s. m., cannon. L. 44.
Canonazo, kan-yo-nah'-tho, s. m., cannon-
shot, gun-shot. L. 44.
Capa, kah'-pa, s. f., cloak.— Andar de ca2>a
caida, to be crestfallen. L. 60.
Capacidad, kah-pah-the-dath' , s.f., capacity,
capability. L. 36.
Capaz, kah-path', adj., capable. L. 59.
Capitan, kah-pe-tan', s. m., captain. L. 62.
Capricho, kah-prl'-clw, s.m., caprice, fancy,
whim. L. 60.
Cara, kah'-ra, s. f, face.— Dar a alguno con
la puerta en la cara, to shut the door in
any one's face. L. 60.
Caracter, kah-rak'-fair (pi. caracteres), s.
m., character, disposition. L. 40.
Caramba ! kah-ram'-ba, inter., strange 1
zounds ! L. 65.
Carcajada, kar-kah-hah'-da, s. f., loud
laugh, burst of laughter. L. 54.
Ciircel, kar'-thail, s. f , prison. L. .34.
Carga, kar'-ga, s. f., load, burden, charge.
L. 60.
Cargar, kar-gar\ to charge, to load, to
heap. L. 47.
Cargo, kar'-go, s. m., load, employment,
charge, office. L. 60.
Caridad, kah-re-dath' , s. f., charity. L. 41.
Cariredondo, kah-rl-rai-done' -dx>^ adj.,
roundfaced. L. 59.
Carne, kar'-nai, s. f., flesh, meat. L. 7.
Carnero, kar-nai'-ro, s. m., mutton, sheep.
L. 40.
Carniceria, kar-nMhai-r^'-a, s. f., butcher's
shop, meat market. L. 11.
Carnicero, kar-ne-thai'-ro. s. m., butcher.
L. 11.
Carnuza, kar-noo'-tha, b. f., bad, disgust-
ing, spoiled meat. L. 49.
Caro, kah'-ro, adj., dear, at a high price.
L, 13.
Carpintero, kar-peen-tai'-ro, s. m., carpen-
ter. L. 33.
Carrera, kar-rai'-ra, s. f., career, course,
race, profession. L. 48.
Carro, kar'-ro, s. m., car, wagon. L. 58.
Carruage, kar-roo-ah'-hai, s. m., carriage.
L. 51.
Carta, kar'-ta, s. f., letter. L. 7.
Cartilla, kar-teel' -ya, s. f., primer.— Cosa
que no esta en la cartilla, something
strange or uncommon. L. 61.
Casa, kah'-sa, s. f., house. L. 9.
Cascaras ! kas'-kah-ras, int., oh ! dear me I
L. 63.
Casero, kah-sai'-ro, adj., domestic, house-
hold. — Comedia casera, parlor play. L. 59.
Casi, kah'-se, adv., almost. L. 32.
Caso, kah'-so, s. m., case, event.- No haga
V. caso de eso, take no notice of that.
L. 60.
Castaiia, kas-tan'-ya, s. f., chestnut. L. 40.
Castellano, kas-tail-yah'-no, s, m., Castiliau
languagij. L. 55.
Castellano, adj., Castilian. L. 55.
Castillo, kas-teel' -yo, s. m., castle. — Hacer
castillos en el aire, to build castles in the
air. L. 48.
Casualidad, kah-soo-ah-U-dath' , s. f., casual-
ty, chance, hazard. L. 60.
Casucha, kah-soo'-cha, s. f., contemptible
old house. L. 44.
Catolicismo, ka-to-le-thcess'-mo, s. m., Ca-
tholicism. L. 49.
Catorce, kah-tor' -thai, num. adj., fourteen,
—Luis Catorce. Louis the Fourteenth.
L. 14.
Causa, kah'-oo-sa, s.f., cause. — A causa de,
on account of. L. 40.
Causar, kah-oo-sar', to cause. L. 51.
Caza, kah'-tha, s, f., chase, hunt, hunting.
— Ir a la caza, to go hunting. L. 58.
Cazar, kah-thar', to chase, to hunt. L. 58.
Celebracion, thai-lai-brah-the-one' , s. f.,
celebration. L. 39.
Celebrar, thai-lai-brar' , to celebrate. — Cele-
bro que V. haya venido, I am glad you
have come. L. 39.
Celeste, thai-lais' -tai, adj., heavenly, celes-
tial.— Los cuerpos celestes, the heavenly
bodies. L. 49.
Celestial, thai-lais-te-al' , adj., celestial,
heavenly. (See Celeste.) L. 49.
Celico, thai'-ll-ko, adj., heavenly (used in
poetry only). L. 49.
Celo, ^^a«'-to, s.m., zeal. L. 55.
Cena, thai'-na, s.f., supper, Last Supper.
L. 52.
Cenar, thai-nar', to sup, to take supper.
L. 39.
Centavo, thain-tah'-vo, s.m., cent. L. 14.
Centella, thain-taU'-ya, s. f., flash, spark.—
Echar rayos y centellas, to foam with rage.
L. 62.
Centena, thain-tai'-na, s.f., about a hun-
dred. L. 40.
446
VOCABULARY
Ccntenar, thainrtai-nar\ s. m., a hundred,
L. 40.
Cerca, thair'-ka^ adv., near, close by. Cer-
ca dc 8u casa, near his house. L. 31.
Ceremonial, thai-rai-md-ni-al\ adj., ceremo-
nial, ceremonious. L. 54.
Cerrar, ttiair-rar\ to shut, to close. L. &4.
Cerrojo, thair-ro'-ho^ s. m., bolt. L. 59.
Cerveza, thair-vai'-tka^ s. f., ale, beer. L. 7.
Chaleco, chak-lai'-ko, s. m., vest. L. 10.
Chaucear, chan-thai-ar' , to jest, to joke.
L. 58.
Chanza, chan'-tha, b. f., jest, joke. L. 58.
Charla, char'-la, s. f., chit-chat, prattle.
L. 60.
Charlar, char-lar\ to chat, to prattle. L. 37.
Chasco, chas'-ko, s. m., disappointment. —
Llevarse un chasco eolemne, to be greatly
disappointed. L. 46.
Chelin, chai-leen\ s. ra., shilling. L. 61.
Chico, che'-ko, adj., little, small. L. 44.
Chiquirritico, che-keer-rMl'-ko, adj., very
small, very little. L. 44.
Chito ! che'-to, int., hush ! silence 1 L. 46.
Chocolate, clio-ko-lak'-tai, s. m., chocolate.
L. 14.
Cic^o, thl-ai'-QO, e. m. and adj., blind.— A
ctegas^ blindly, in the dark. L. 48.
Ciclo, thl-ai'-lo^ s. m., heaven, sky.— Tomar
cl cielo con las manos, to be transported
with joy, grief, or passion. L. 45.
Clen, the-ain' num. adj., a hundred. — (See
ClENTO.) L. 14.
Cioncia, thl-ain' -thl-a^ s. f., science. L. 49.
Ciento, thl-ain'-to^ num. adj., a hundred. —
(Sec CiEN.) L. 14,
Cierto, thl-air'-to^ adj., certain. L. 48.
Cimiento, the-me-ain'-to, s. m., foundation.
L. 51).
Cinco, theen'-h)y num. adj., five, fifth. L. 14.
Cincucnta, )!/i6(?n-^wa2'/i'-to, num. adj., fifty,
fiftieth. L. 14.
Circunspeccion, tlieer-koonss-paik-tfil-dne' ,
8. f., circumspection. L. 34.
Circunstancia, Uteor-koonsn-ian'-th^-a, s. f.,
circumstance. 1^ 40.
Cita, ihe'-ta, 8. f., appointment, quotation.
L. 00.
Citar, tM-tar', to make an appointment
(with any one), to quote. L. 52.
Ciudadano, i/ii-oo-dah-ciah'-no, citizen. L.
47.
Civilizacion, thZ-vl-lMhah-thl-one\ b. f.,
civilization. L. 60.
Claridad, klaJi-rc-dath\ s. f., clearness, per-
spicuity. L. 36.
Claro, klah'-ro, adj., cle^r, bright. L. 59.
Clase, klah'-sai, s. f., class. L. 54.
Cliisico, klah'-nl-ko, adj., classic, classical.
L. ;«.
Clasificacion, klah-sl-fl-ka-thl-one\ b. f.,
classification. L. 24.
Clima, kW-via^ s. m., climate. L. 40.
Cocer, ko-thair', to boil, to cook. L. 42.
Coche, kd'-c/iai, b. m., coach, carriage in
general.— Ir en coc/ie, to go in a carriage.
L. 42.
Cocincro, ko-tM-nai'-ro^ b. m., cook. L. 11.
Coft-e, ko'-frai, 8. ni., chest, trnnk. L. 60.
Coger, kd-hair\ to catch, to take, to pick
up. L. 46.
Cojcar, kO-hat-ar\ to limp, to walk lamo.
L. 39.
Cojo, W-ho, a4). and s. m., lame. L. 44.
Colada, k54ah'-da, s.f., etifiening of clothes
— Todo saldra en la colada, all will be
brought to light. L. 65.
Colectivo, ko-laik-tl' -vOy adj., collective, L.
40.
Colgar, kdl€-gar\ to hang, L. 59.
Colina, ko-le'-na, s. f. hill. L. 58.
Colocacion, kd40-kah-thi-l^e\ b. f., em-
ployment, place, eituation, L. 00.
Colocar, ko-W-kar', to put, to arrange, to
place, to employ. L. 46.
Colorado, ko-lo-rah' -do, adj., red. L. 54.
Colorido, ko-lb-rl' -do, s, m,, coloring (paint-
ing). L. 52.
Color, ko-Wr', 8. m., color, L. 52.
Combatir. kdnie-bah-teer' , to combat, to
fight. L. 54,
Combinacion, kome-bl-nah-thZ-dne' , s. f.,
combination. L. 24.
Combinado, kome-bl-nah'-do, p.p. and adj.,
combined. L. 58.
Combinar, kovie-bl-nar' , to combine. L.
58.
Comedia, ko-mai'-d?-a, b. f., comedy, L. 52,
Comer, ko-mair', to eat, to dine. L. 7.
Comerciante, ko-mair-thl-an'-tai, 8. m.,
merchant. L. 5.
Cometa, ko-mai'-ta, s. m., comet; s. f.,
kite (toy). L. 60.
Cometer, ko-mai-lair' , to commit. L. 43.
Comico, ko'-me-ko, s. m., actor, comedian.
L. 63.
C6mico, atlj., comic, comical. L. 35.
Como, ko'-tno, adv., how, as,—/ Corno eeta
V. ? how are you ?— Yo sere tan rico coi/io
61, I shall be as rich as he, L. 15,
Comodidad, ko-md-de-dath', s, f., commodi-
ty, convenience, comfort. L. 29.
C6modo, ko' -mo-do, adj., commodious, com-
fortable. L. 29.
Compaflero, kome-pan-yai'-ro, s. m., com-
panion, comrade. L. 60.
Compailia, konie-pan-yl'-a, s. f., company.
L. 60.
Comparativo, kdme-pah-rah-ii'-ro, adj.,
comparative. L. 61.
Compasion, kome-pa/i-sl-Dne' , s. f., compas-
sion. L. 45.
Complacencia, kdme-plah-thain'-Uiz-a, 8. f.,
complacency, pleasure. L. 39,
Complemento, kOnie-plai-main'-to, B. m,,
complement. L. 51.
Componente, kd7iie-pd-nain'-tai, part., com-
ponent. L. 49.
Componer, kome-pd-nair' , to compose, to
mend, to arrange, to compound. L. 49.
Compotticion, kdffie-j)d-ftl-(hi4}tie', e. f., com-
position, mending, arranging, compound-
ing. L. 2t.
Comprar, kdme-prar\ to buy, to purchase.
L. 4.
Comprender, kdme-pratn-dair', to compre-
hend, to understand, to comprise. L. 60.
Con, kdtie, nrep., with, by. L. 10.
Coucebir, Kone-ihai-beer' , to conceive of.
L. 54.
Conceder, kdm-thal-dair' , to grant, to con-
cede. L. 5.3.
Concertar, kdne-thair-tar' , to concert, to
agree. L. 58.
Conciencia, kdne-t/il-ain'-t/iha, b. f., con-
Bcieuce. L. 40.
VOCABULARY.
44^
Coacierto, kdne-the-air'-to., s. m., concert,
agreemeut. L. 17. , , ^
Couciair, kone-doo-eer , to conclude, to fin-
ish, to be over. L.58. ^ , ^^_
Coiicordaacia, kone-lcore-dan' -the-a, s. f.,
concordance, agreement. L. 50.
Condescender, kone-daia-tham-dair' , to con-
descend, to agree. L. 48.
Condicion, kone-de-the-oae', s. f., condition.
Condicional, Tcone-de-the-one-al' , adj., con-
ditional. L. 59.
Conducir, kdm-doo-theer\ to conduct, to
convey, to lead, L. 40.
Confeiar, kdne-fai-sar\ to confess, to ac-
knowledge, to avow. L. 34.
Confaso, koiie-foo' -so^ adj., confused, con-
founded. L. 54.
Conjugacion, kdae-hoo-ga?i-the-dne\ 8. f.,
coajugatioa. L. 43.
Coajugar, k5iie-lioo-gar\ to conjugate. L.
43.
Coajuncion, kdm-hoon-the-one\ s. f., con-
juactioa. L. 43.
Connaigj, kone-mV -go^ pron., with me, witlx
myself. L. 26.
Coaocer, kono4hair\ to know, to be ac-
qaainted with. L. 25.
Cjnociiniento, ko-no-tM-m^-aiii'-to, s, m.,
kaowledge, bill of lading (commerce).
L. 43.
Consecuencia, kone-sai-kwain'-t/iS-a, s. f.,
coa^e:iiience. L. 31.
Consegair, kdiii-sal-gheer\ to obtain, to
get, to succeed. L. 42.
Coasejo, kjiie-sai' -Iw, s. m., counsel, ad-
vice. L. 53.
Conseatir, kjns-sairi-teer', to consent, to
agree (to). L. 3S.
Coaiistir, koris-seess-teer\ to consist. L. 52.
Consular, kons-sd4ar\ to console. L. 35.
Constaacia, kans-tan' -t/iS-a, s. f., constancy,
steadiness. L. 40.
Coastruocioa, kdns-trook-thd-dne\ construc-
tioa. L. 51.
Coataate, kjm-tan'-tai, s. m. and adj.,
reaiy moaey. L. 38.
Coutar, kd.is-iar'y to count, to relate, to tell.
L. 35.
Coateaer, Wm-t!ii-nair\ to contain, to re-
strain, to stop, to cliecv. L. 49.
ConteaiJo, kone-tai-nee'-do, s. m., contents.
L. 4).
Conteatar, kdm-tain-tar' , to content, to
make glal. L. 33.
Conteato, kom-tam'-to. adj., content, con-
tented, glal, satisfied. L. 3-3.
Conti^o, k)iie-f^'-go^^Toa., with thee. L. 26.
Coatiaaar, kom-t^-aoo-ar' , to continue. L.
54.
Contra, klm'-tra, prep., against. L. 41.
Coatradecir, koiX2-trah-d(d-tlieer\ to contra-
dict. L. 41.
■Coatrario, kom-trah' -rl-o, adj., contrary.—
AI Oiitrario, on the contrary. L. 53.
Cou veneer, kom-vain-thair' , to convince.
L. 43.
Coavenir, kone-vai-mer', to suit, to be con-
venient, to agree. L. 30.
Conversacion, kone-vair-sah-thl-dne'^ s. f.,
coaversation. L. 24.
Conversar, kdne-vair-sar\ to converse. L.
53.
Convertir, kone-vair-teer', to convert. L. 45.
Couvicto, kOne-veek'-to, irr. past part, (of
CoNVENCEB), convicted. L. 52.
Convite, kone-vee'-tai, s. m., invitation, feast
or banquet to which any one is invited.
L. 5b.
Copulativo, ko-poo-la/i-te'-vo, adj., copula-
tive. L. 59.
Coqueta, ko-kai'-ta, s. f., coquette. L. 32.
Corazou, kd-ra/i-t/iom', s. m., heart. L. 56.
Corbata, kOre-baJi'-ta, cravat. L. 10.
Corona, ko-rO'-na, s. 1'., crown. L. 56.
Correcto, kor-raik'-to, adj., correct. L. 29.
Corredor, kor-rai-dore', s. m,, corridor,
broker. L. 49.
Corregir, kor-rai-heer\ to correct. — Corre-
girse^ to mend. L. 59.
Correo, kor-rai'-o^ s. m., courier, post.— Ca-
sa de correos, post-office. L. 29.
Correr, kor-rair\ to run.— Co/rer^g, to be
ashamed or confused, to blush. L. 51.
Corretear, kdr-rai-tai-ar\ to run about. L.
53.
Correveidile, kor-rai-vai-e-d^'-lai^ s.m., tale-
bearer, tattler. L. 50.
Corriente, kor-re-ain' -tai^ adj., current;
6. m., al coiTiente de, aware of; s. f., cur-
rent, stream. L. 56.
Corrientemente, kor-rl-ain-tai-mcdn'-tai^
adv., currently, fluently. L. 49.
Corro, kor'-ro^ s. m., circle of people col-
lected together for talking. L. 44.
Cortante, kore-tan' -tai, adj., cutting, sharp,
edged. L. 38.
Cortaplumas, kdre-tah-ploo'-mass^ penknife.
L. 9.
Cortar, kore-tar\ to cut. L. 33.
Corto, kore'-to, adj , short. L. 21.
Cosa, ko'-sa, s. f., thing.— A cosa de las seis,
about six o'clock. L. 11.
Coser, ko-scur', to sew. L. 24.
Cosmopolita, kos-rno-po-lee'-ta, s. m., cos-
mopolite. L. 51.
Costa, kdce'-ta^ s. f,, cost, coast.— A costa
mia, at my expense.— A casta de, at the
expense of. L. 60.
Costado, kos-tah'-do, s. m., side. L. 61.
Costar, kds-tar\ to cost. L. 61.
Costumbre, kos-ioom'-brai, s. f., custom,
habit. L. 54,
Creacion, krai-ah-tM-one', s. f., creation.
L. 41.
Crear, krcu-ar\ to create. L. 41,
Credito, krai'-de-to, s. m., credit, credence.
L. 57.
Creencia, krai-ain'-thl-a, s. f., credence, be-
lief. L, 49,
Creer, krai-<ur\ to believe, to think. L. 27.
Creyente, krai-yain'-tai., present part, (of
Cbeeb), s. m. and f., believing, believer.
L. 38.
Criado, krl-ah'-do^ s. m,, servant. L. 17.
Criado, past part, of Criar. L. 54.
Criar, kre-ar', to breed, to bring up. L. M,
Criatura, kre-afi-too'-ra, s. f., creature, in-
fant. L. 60.
Crimen, krl'-main, s. m., crime, L. 59.
Criticar, krl-tl-kar\ to criticise, L, 48.
Critico, krl'-te-ko^ s. m., critic. L. 45.
Cronologista, kro-no-lo-heess'-ta, chronolo.
gist. X. 36.
Crueldad, kroo-ail-daih', s. f., cruelty. I*
36.
448
VOCABULAEY
Caademo, cwah-dair'-no, s. m., copy-book.
L. 4.
Cuul, c«i;a/, pron., which. L. 10.
(Juuudiul, cwali-ll-dalti\ s, f., quality. L. 36.
Cuaiquiem, cwal-lce-cU'-ra^ prun. aud adj.,
any ouc, whosoever, Bome one. L. 34.
Cuau, cwa/i, adv., how, as (used only be-
fore adjectives or other adverbs;. L. 14.
Cuundo, cwa/i'-do, adv., when. L. 9.
(Juunto ? cwan'-to, adj., how much? how
many 'i— Ouanto antes, at once, immedi-
ately.— Por cuanto^ inasmuch as, L, 14.
Cuarto, cwar'-to, orU. adj. and s. m., fourth,
room, chamber. L. 40.
Cuatro. cwati'-tro, num. adj., four. L. 15.
Cuba, koo'-bu, s. !., cask, tub.— Cuba (island
of). L. 61.
Cubrir, hoo-breer\ to cover. L. 59.
Cuchara, koo-cluili'-ra^ s. f., spoon. L. 60.
Cuchillo, hoo-ched' -yOy 8. m., knife. L. 33.
Cuello, cwaU'-yOy s. m., neck, collar. L. 60.
Cuenta, cwain'-ta, s. f., account, bill, L. 46.
Cuento, cwcUn'-to, s. m., story, tale. L. 44.
Cuerpo, cwair'-po, s. m., body. L. 64.
Cuervo, cwair'-vo, s. m., crow. L. 45,
Cuesta, cwai^s'-ta. s. f., hill,— A cueatas^ on
one's back or shoulders, L. 63.
Cuestion, cwcUn-lS-one', s. f., question. L.
40.
Cuidado, cwl-dah'-do^ s. m., care.— Estar
de cuidadOy to be dangerously ill.— Estar
con cuidado, to be very anxious, L. Ha.
Cuidar, cwe-dar'. to care, to take care. L.
44.
Culpa, kool'-pa, s. f., fault, blame. L. 60.
Culpar, kool-pur', to blame. L. 60.
Cultivar, kool-tl-var' , to cultivate. L. 60.
Cumpleaflos, koom-plai-an'-yos, s,m., birth-
day. L, 62,
Cumplimiento, koom-plZ-ml-ain'-tOy s. m.,
compliment. L. 48.
Cumplir. komn-jdeer', to accomplish, to fvX-
ill.— C'u?nplir por otro, to act for or in
the name of another. L. 57.
Cufiado, a, k/x>/i-7/ah'-do, da, s. ra. and f.,
brother-in-law, sister-in-law. L. 64,
Curioso, koo-1'l-o' -80, adj., curious, worthy
of note, L, 51,
Curso, koor'-so, s, m., course, L. 64.
Custodia, koos-tO'-dl-a, s, f., custody. L, 53,
Ctitis, koo'-tees8, s, m, and f., skin, L, 64.
Cuyo, koo'-yo, pron., of whom, of which,
whose, which. L. 17.
Dale I dah'-lai, int., have at It ! L. 64.
Dania, da/i'-tna, s. f., lady, dame. — Uanias,
draughts, or checkers. L. 58.
Danza, dan'-tha, s. f., dance. L. 64,
Dailar, dan-yai-', to damage, to hurt, to
harm, L, 47.
Dailo, dan'-yo, s. m., damage, hart, harm.
L. 42.
Dar, to give.— Z)arcv ytomarcB, disputes, ifs
and ands.— X'a/ve a la vela, to set sail.
L. 26,
Pc, rfrti, prep., of, ttom.—De dla, by day.—
J)e intcnto, on purpose. L. 4,
Bcbcr, dcU-bair\ s. m. , duty. L, 28.
Dcbcr, to owe, muf^t.—Deben eer las ocho,
it must be eight o'clock. L. 26.
Decena, dai-iJiai'-na, s. f., about ten. L. 59.
, UeciUif, dai-thl'detr' , to decide, L, 60,
; Decimo, dai'-Uii-mo^ ord. adj., and s. m.,
I tenth. L. 15.
Dccir, dai-tlieer' , to say, to tell. L. 27.
Declarar, dai-claJc-rar' , to declare, L. 48.
Dedal, dai-dai', s. m,, thimble, L, 24.
Dedo, dai'-do, s. m., finger, L. 59,
Defectivo, dtU-fuik-tZ'-vo, adj,, defective.
L, 63,
Defecto, dai-faik'-to, b. m,, defect, failing.
L, 55,
Defender, dai-fain-dair' , to defend, L, 37.
Delinicion, dai-jS-ud-i/ii'dne', b, f,, defini-
tion, L. 59,
Definir, dui-fi-neer' , to define, L, 59.
Dejar, dai-har', to leave, to let, to allow.
L. 44.
Delante, dai-lan'-tai, prep. — Ddante de, be-
fore, in the presence of, L, 16,
Dcleitar, dai-lcd-e-tar' , to delight, L, 47,
Delicado, dai-U-kali'-do, adj,, delicate, L,
39.
Delicioso, dai-li-ihS-d'-so, adj., delicious.
L. 35.
Delincuente, dai-leen-cwain'-fai, b. m., de-
linquent, transgressor, L, &4,
Delinquir, dai-leen-keei'' , to transgress. L.
34.
Delito, dai-W-to, s. m., crime, transgres-
sion. L. 51,
Demas, dai-mass', adv., over and above, too
much; adj. (generally used with lo, los,
las), the rest, the others, others, L, 43,
Demasiado, (lai-mah-sl-ah'-do, adj. and
adv., too much, too. L. 25.
Dentro, dain'-t?v, prep., in, within, inside
(always followed by de). L. 31.
Derecho, dai-rcd'-c/io, acy., right, even,
straight. L. 50.
Desafiar, dai-sah-fl-ar', to challenge. L.
65.
Desafio, dai-saJi-fl'-o, s.m., challenge, duel.
L. 63,
Desanimar, dai-sah-n^-mar', to dishearten,
to discourage, L, 38,
Descansadamente, dais-kan-sah-dah-main''
tai, adv., easily, at one's ease. L, 33,
Descansado, dais-kan-sah'-do, adj,, easy,
quiet, refreshed, L, 33,
Descansar, dcUs-kan-sar' , to rest. L, 33.
liescanso, dais-kan'-so, s. m., rest, repose,
ease. L. 33.
Descaro, dcUs-kah'-ro, b. m., bare&cedness.
L, (U,
Descender, dais-thain-dair', to descend. L.
87.
Descomponcr, dais-kiHne-pd-nair', to disar-
range, to discompose, to put out of order.
L.53.
Descompuesto, dais-kHme-pwaifs'-to, adj.,
disarranged, discomposed, out of order,
disorderly, L. 5.3,
Desconfiar, dau-kOne-fi-ar'^ to distrust, to
mistrust. L. 43.
Dcsgracia, dais-grah'-thl-a^ B. f., misfor-
tune, ill-luck. L, 48,
Deshacer, dais-ah-thair', to undo, to de-
stroy, to take or put asunder, L. 57.
Desierto, dai-^-aii-'-to, s, m,, desert, wil-
derness, L. 64,
Desigual, dai-^l-gwal\ adj,, unequal, uii
even. L. 65.
■VOCABULARY.
449
Desocupar, dai-sd-Jcoo-par' , to quit, to
evacuate, to empty, h, 56.
Despacio, dais-jjati' -tlie-o, adv., slowly. L. 6.
Despedir, dapi-jjui-deer' , to dismiss, to send
or put away, to discharge. L. 59.
Despertar, aaiii-pair-tar' , to awake, to
awaken, to arouse, to rouse. L. 'M.
Despierto, daiii-2)e-air' -to, adj., awake,
brisk, sprightly, lively. L. 5:;i.
Desproporcionadisimamente, d«w-^r5-j95r€-
tiil-dne-ah-Ue'-se-mah-main-tai, adv., out
of all proportion. L. 50.
Despues, dais-pwaiss', prep, and adv., after,
atterward. L. 16.
Determinante, dai-tair-rvl-nan'-tai, adj., de-
termining.— Verbo detenninante, deter-
mining verb. L. 53.
Determinar, dai-tair-ml-nar' , to determine.
L. 53.
Detras, dcu-tras8\ prep, and adv., behind.
L. 33.
Deudor, dai-oo-dore\ s. m., debtor. L. 45.
Devolver, dai-vole-vaii'\ to return, to give
back. L. 43.
Dia, de'-a, s. m,, day.— De dia, by day. In
the daytime.— Dar los dias, to say good
morning (to any one). L. 9.
Diablo, dl-ah'-blo, s. m., devil. L. 65.
Dialecto, de-ah-laik'-to, s. m., dialect. L.
55.
Dialogo, dl-ah' -Id-go, s.m., dialogue. L. 59.
Diautre, de-an'-trai, s. m,, deuce. L. 46.
Dibujo, de-boo'-ko, s. m., drawing, design.
L. 51.
Diccionario, deek-the-o-nali' -rl-o, s. m., dic-
tionary. L. 49.
Dicha, de'-cha, s. f., happiness, good luck,
good fortune. L. 64.
Dicho, de'-dio, s. m., saying. L. 54.
Diciembre, de-the-aim' -brai, s. m., Decem-
ber. L. 34.
Diente, de-am'-iai,B.m., tooth.— Hablaren-
tre dientes, to mumble, to mutter. L. 63.
Diez, dd-aith', num. adj., ten. L. 14.
Diferencia, de-fai-rain'-the-a, b. f., differ-
ence. L. 48.
Diferenciar, de-fai-rain-the-ar', to differ.
L. 48.
Dificil, de-fl'-theeJ., adj., difficult. L. 21.
Dificultad, de-fe-kool-tath' , s. f., diiliculty.
L. 36.
Dimio, deeg'-no, adj., worthy, deserving.
L. 53.
Diluviar, dl-lco-vl-ar' , to rain like a deluge,
to pour. L. 30.
Dimes, rfe'-m«m.— Andar en dimes y dire-
tcs, to use ifa and auds, to quibble. L. 47.
Dimiuutivo, dl-ml-noo-te' -vo, s.m., diminu-
tive. L. 44.
Dinero, de-nai'-ro, B. m., money. L. 13.
Dios, de-oce', s. m., God. L. 31.
Diptongo, deep-tone' -go, s. m., diphthong.
L. 57.
Direccion, d?-raik-the-dne\ b. f., direction,
address. L. 24.
Dirccto, dl-raik'-to, adj., direct. L. 51.
Director, dl-raik-tar' , director. L. 50.
Dirigir, dl-rl-heer\ to direct.— Dirigirse, to
apply. L. 63.
Discipulo, dees-tM'-poo-lo, s. m., pupil, dis-
ciple. L. 18.
Discrete, deess-krai'-to, adj., discreet, cir-
cumspect. L. 39.
Disculpa, deess-kool'-pa, s. f., apology, ex-
cuse. L. 60.
Discurso, deess-koor'-so, s. m., diecotirse,
speech, course. L. 53.
Disgustar, deess-goos-tar' , to disgust, to
displease. L. 50.
Disgusto, deess-goos'-to, s. m., disgust, dis-
pleasure, unpleasantness. L. 5U.
Disponer, deess-po-nair' , to dispose, to lay
out, to arrange, to prepare. L. 48.
Disposicion, deess-po-se-the-one' , b. f., dis-
position, arrangement, distribution. L.
33.
Distancia, deess-tan'-the-a, B. f., distance.
L. 51.
Distante, deess-tan'-tai, adj., distant. L. 88.
Distar, deess-iar', to be distant, far from.
L. 53.
Distinguir, deess-teen-gheer' , to distinguish.
L. 43.
Divertir, de-vair-teer' , to divert, to amuse.
L. 89.
Dividir, dd-ve-deer', to divide. L. 51.
Divisar, de-ve-sar', to descry, to perceive,
to catch a glimpse of. L. 42.
Doble, do'-blai, adj., double. L. 40.
Doble, 8. m., double. L. 40.
Doce, do' -thai, num. adj. and s. m., twelve,
twelfth. L. 14.
Docena, do-thai' -na, s. f., dozen. L. 40.
Doler, do-lair' . — Dolerle. a uno la cabeza,
los dientes, to have a headache, tooth-
ache. L. 36.
Dolor, do-lore', B. m., pain. L. 50.
Domingo, do-meen'-go, s. m., Sunday.
Donde, done'-dai, adv., where. L.
9.
madam.
Mrs.
Dona, done'-ya, s. f., lady,
±j. 2.
Dormir, dore-meer', to sleep. L. 41.
Dos, doce, num. adj. and s. m., two, second.
L. 14.
Drama, drah'-ma, b. m., drama. L. 52.
Dramatico, drah-mah' -te-ko, adj., dramatic.
L. 52.
Duda, doo'-da, s. f., doubt. L. 43.
Dudar, doo-dar', to doubt. L. 28.
Durable, doo-rak' -blai, adj., durable. L. 58.
Durante, doo-ran' -tai, pres. part., during.
L. 59.
Durar, doo-rar', to last, to continue. L. 59.
Duro, doo'-ro, adj. and s. m., hard; dollar.
L. 60.
E.
Ea ! ai'-a, int., eay ! hollo ! L. 46.
Echar, ai-char\ to throw, to put, to cast.—
Echar de ver, to notice, to observe.—
Echar a correr, to run ei\i&y.— Echar a
perder, to spoil. L. 53.
Econ6mico, ai-ko-no' -me-ko, a^., economi-
cal. L. 35.
Edad, s. f., affe. L. 53.
Edicion, ai-de-thl-one' , b. f.. edition. L. 60.
Edificar, ai-d'e-fe-kar' , to edify. L. 48.
Efecto, ai-faik'-to, s. m., effect. L. 47.
Ejecutar, ai-hai-koo-tar' , to execute^ to put
into execution, to put into practice. L.
60.
Ejemplo, ai-haim'-pU), s. m., example. L.
32.
Ejercer, ai-hair-thair' , to exercise, to prac-
tise. L. 60.
450
VOC ABULAEY,
Eyercicio, ai-kair-thi'-thi-o, s. m., exercise.
L. 8.
El, la, lo, los, las, def. art., the. L. 1.
EI, ella, ail^ aU'-j/a, pers. pron., he, bhe, it.
L. 1.
Eleccion, ai-laitikd-o/ie', s. f.. election,
choice. L. 21.
Elegancia, ai4ai-gan' -Ihl-a, s. f., elegance.
L. 5;i.
ElcLrante, ai-lai-gan'-tal, adj., elegant. L. 65.
Ele;,'ir, ai-lai-heer\ to elect, to cnoose. L.
Eleraento, ai-lai-main'-to, s. m., element,
constituent part. L. fW.
Elena, ai-lai'-na, s. f., Helena, Ellen. L. 19.
Elipticq, ai-kep'te-kOy adj., eliiptic, ellipti-
cal. L. GO.
Embarcadero, aim-bar-kah-dai'-w, B. m.,
landing, ferry. L. 58.
Embargo, aiin-bar'-go, s. m., embargo.— Sin
embargo^ notwithstanding, however. L.
Erapeflar, aim-pain-yar\ to engage, to
pledge, to hind.—Empenarfie, to bind
one's self, to persist, to desire eagerly.
L. 45.
Eiupero, aim-jjai'-ro, conj., yet, however,
but. L. 60. -^ w ,
Emplear, ai/n-p!al-ar\ to employ. L. 44.
Empleo, airn-plai'-o, s. m., employ, em-
ployment, omce. L. 57.
En, aia^ prep., in, at, on. L. 8.
Enamorar, ai-nah-mo-rar\ to court, to
make love {.o.—Enamararse de, to be
enamoured of, to fall in love with. L. 30.
Encargo, ain-kar'-go, s. m., charge, com-
mis:?ion, command. L. 57.
Encarga •, a a-kar-gar', to charge, to com-
mi-sion, to order. L. 58.
Encender, aiii-thaia-dair\ to light, to kin-
dle. L. 37.
Encerrar, am-thair-rar\ to shut up, to con-
tain, to comprehend. L. 05.
Encima, ain-thl' -ma^ prep, and adv., above
over. L. ;i3. '
Encontrar, ala-kdne-trar\ to meet, to find.
L.. 35.
Enemigo, a2-na/-m2'-«7o, 8. m., enemy. L 51
Lnemistar, ai-/iai-mees.s-tar\ to set at ca-
m\ty. —Erie/zmfar a alguno con olro to
put any one at enmity with, or aga net
another. L. GO. ' »
Energia, ai-nair-hd'-a, s. f., energy. L 61
Enfermar, ain-f air-mar' , to become or tret
Enfermo, ain-fair'-tm, adj.. sick, ill. L 48
Enfrente, uin-frain'-tai, adv., opposite, iii
ftont. L. 51. '
Engailar, aingan-yar\ to deceive, to take
in. L. 32.
Enhebrar, ain-aibrar\ to thread, to link
L. 65.
Enhorabuena ai-nd-rah-bwai'-na b f
congratulation, felicitation. L. 39 ' ''
EnrKjuc, uin-re'-kai, s. m., Henry L 15
EMscilar, a*n-sain-ijar\ to show, to teach
Li. 27.
^'to"d!Uib ^^£-**2f '^^-«^'' to dirty, to soil,
Entondedor, (Un-tain-dai-ddre', s. m ho
who undcrstand8.-A buen entmdedcyr
Entender, ain-tain-dair', to understand.
L. 37.
Eutonces, ain-tOne'-thaiss., adv., tlien. L. 23.
J:.uirambos, aiu-lra7n'-0bai, pron. pi., bock.
L. GO.
Eulrar, ain-trar\ to enter, to begin, to
commence, to come or go lu, to got in,
L. 28.
Entre, ain'-trcd, prep., between, in the
course of. Li. lu.
Eutreiauto, ain-trai-tan'-to^ adv., in th»
mean lime. JL. GO.
Eutreteuer, aiii-iraitai-nair', to entertain,
to amuse, to iii\(irL—Jii/itrete/t£rtte, to
spend one's time, to be engaged m. L. 46.
Euiusiasmo, ain-too-s't-asa -uu>, 8. m., en-
thusiasm. L. 54.
Enviar, aiii-vl-ar\ to send. L. 14.
Envidiar, airirOi-al-ar\ to envy. L. 40.
Equivocacion, ai-ke-vd-kaJi.-tki-one\ 8. £,,
mistake, misconception. L. 50.
Equivocar, ui-kl-vo-kar' ., to mistake.— .£^J/*-
vocarse, to be mistaken. L. 47.
Erguir, air-gheer\ to hold erect (as the
head, &c.). L. 42.
Errar, air-rar\ to err, to miss. L. 41.
Erudicion, ai-ivo-de thl-dfUi\ 8. f., erudi-
tion. L. 52.
Escaldar, aiss-kal-dar\ to scald. L. 65.
Escena, aiss-thai'-na, s. f., scene. L. tJS.
Esceptico, aiss-thaip'-ti-ko, adj., skeptical.
L. 45.
Escoba. als8-kd'-ba, s. f., broom. L. 49.
Escobajo, aiss-ko-bah'-ho, s. m. (augmenta-
tive of EscoBA), stump of a broom. L.
49.
Esco^er, aiss-kd-hair\ to choose. L. 65.
Escribano, aiss-krS-bah'-no, s. m., notary.
L. 19. '
Escribiente, aijfs-kr?-b?-ain'-tai, s. m.,
amanuensis, clerk, writer (in an office).
L. 38.
Escribir, aiss-krl-beer\ to write. L. 8.
Escritor, al<)s-krS-tOre\ s. m., writer, au-
thor. L. 19.
Escritura, aiss-krStoo'-ra, 8. f., writing,
document, conveyance. L. 19.
Escuchar, aiss-koo-ckar' , to hearken, to lis-
ten. L. 60.
Escuela, aiss-kioai'-la, s. f., school. L. 21.
Escultor, aiss-kool-Wre', s. m., sculptor. L.
Escultura, aiss-kod-too'-ra, s. f., sculpture.
i-i. 31.
Esforzar, ai^s-fdre-thar\ to etronirthpn, to
exert.— ^orsa;*^, to make effort, to en-
doavor. L. 60.
Esfiierzo, aisf>-firair'thn^ p. m., effort, en-
doavor (pi.), conra-c. bravery. L. 47.
Espacio, aiss-pak'-m-o, s. m.,Vpace. L. 48.
^spada, atAs-pa/i'-da, p. f., sword. L. 57.
Espadachin, avff^pah-dah-cheen\ s. m..
bully, L. 63. '
bS""' ^'"'^^'-^^^ 8- '•' shoulder, (pi.)
Kspafla aii'i.p^n'-i/a. b. f., Spain. L. 9.
J-spanol, am-pan-ydlf\ g. and a^i.. Spanish
anonia-o : Spanish.-.\ la wpo^oto, m
the Spanish fishion. L. 2
sort'^^'L^'To'"^^'''''^""'' P. f., species, kind,
^ J?.'g5*"^' ^i^t./Mti-Wa-o/'-ro, s. m., grocer.
VOCABULAKY
451
flspejo, aiss-pai'-JWy s. m,, looking-glass.
L. «JU.
Esperanza, aiss-pai-ran'-tha, s. f., hope. L.
Esperar, azss-pai-rar\ to hope, to await, to
wait lor. L. ii2.
Espiritu, aiss-pe' -rl-too, s. m,, spirit. L. 45.
Esposa, am-po-m, a. f., spouse, wile. L. ay.
Esposo, aiS6-po'-so, s. m., spouse, husband.
Esqueia, aiss-kai'-la, s. f., note. L. 56.
Esquma, aias-lce'-na^ s. f., corner. L. 51.
EsLuDiecer, (ma-ta/i-Olai-t/iuir' , to establish.
L.42.
Estacion, aiss-tah-the-oiie' , s. f,, station,
season. L. tiU.
Estado, aiss-ia/i'-do, s. m., state, State. —
Los j£titados Unidos, the United btates.
L. 19.
Estar, aiss-tar\ to be, to understand.—
Estar para saiir, to be about to set out.—
Esiar por alguno, to be lor, or in favor of,
any one.— ^' J^sta V. ? do you understand '/
L. 22.
Este, aiss'-tai, s. m., east. L. 22.
Este, esta, esto, deni. pron., this, this one.
L. 18.
Estilo, aiss-te'-lo, s. m., style. L. 52.
Estimable, aiss-te-7nah'-0lai, a^., estimable.
L. 39.
Estimar, aiss-te-mar', to esteem, to esti-
mate. L. 39.
Esto, aiss'-lo. (See Este.) L. 18.
Estocada, aiss-W-kah' -da^ s. f., stab, thrust.
L. 53.
Estrafio, aiss-tran'-yo, adj., strange, foreign.
L. 48.
Estratagema, aiss-trah-tah-hai'-ma^ s. f.,
stratagem, ruse. L. 44.
Estrechar, aiss-irai-char' , to tighten, to
make narrow, to squeeze, to press. L. 60.
Estrecho, aiss-trai' -cho, adj., narrow, tight,
close, miimdXQ.— Estrecho, s. m., strait.
L. 60. ^ ^
Estribo, aiss-trW-bo, s. m., stirmp. L. 38.
Estudiante, aiss-too-de-an'-tai, s. m., stu-
dent. L. 38.
Estudiar, aiss-foo-d^-ar', to study. L. 3.
Estudio, iuss-too'-dl-o, s. m., study. L.
25.
Etemidad, ai-tair-ne-dath' , s. f., eternity.
L. 36.
Etenio, al-tair'-no, ad]., eternal. L. 41.
Evidencia, ai-ve-dain'-the-a, s. f., evidence.
L. 59.
Evitar, ai-r?-tar', to avoid, to help (do
otherwise than has been dene). L. 47.
Exageracion, aik-sah-hai-rah-the-dne\ s. f.,
exaggeration. L. 48.
Exa^erar, aik-sah-hai-rar' , to exaggerate.
L.'60. . ,.
Examen, aik-sah'-main, b. m., examination.
L, 38. . _
Examinar, aik-sah-ml-nar' , to examine. L..
41.
Exceder, alk»-thai-dair\ to exceed, to over-
step, to surpass. L. 53.
Excelente, aiks-thai'lain'-tat, adj., excel-
lent. L. 53.
Excepcion, aiks-thaip-thl-dne' , s. f., excep-
tion. L. 45. ^ ^ _
Exceptuar, aiks-thaip-ioo-ar\ to except. L.
Exclamacion, aiks-Mah-mah-thl-dm\ s. f.,
exclamation. L. 24.
Exciamar, ailcs-ktak-7nar\ to exclaim. L.
UU.
Excusa, aiks-koo'-sa, s. f., excuse, apology.
L. bO.
Excufcar, aiks-koo-sa?'', to excuse, to apolo-
gize. L. xl.
Exuibiciou, aik-sl-be-the-dne\ s. f,, exhibi-
tion. L. 46.
Exhibir, aik-ae-beer' , to exhibit. L. 60.
Exigir, aik-sl-heer' y to exact, to require, to
demand. L. 38.
Existeucia, aik-seess-tain' -thl-a, s. f., exist-
ence, (pl.) stock. L. 52.
Existir, aik-seess-teer' , to exist. L. 40.
Exito, aik'-se-to, s. m., result, issue.— Con
buen exito, successfully. L. 46.
Experieucia, aiks-pai-?e-azn'-the-a, s. f., ex-
perience. L. 41.
Expiicacion, aiks-ple-kah-thl-dne\ s. f., ex-
planation. L. 48.
Explicar, aiks-ple-kar\ to explain. L. 45.
Exponer, aiks-pd-nair\ to expose, to ex-
pound, to explain. L. 51.
Expresar, aiks-irrai-sar', to express. L. 52.
Expresion, aiks-prai-se-dne\ s. f., expres-
sion. L. 56.
Expresivo, aiks-pj-at-s^'-vo, adj., expressive.
L. 65.
Exterior, aiks-tai-re-ore\ exterior. L. 48.
Extra, aiks'-tra, adv., extra. L. 60.
Extrangero, aiks-tran-hai'-ro, s. m., foreign-
er. L. 60.
Extrafiar, aiks-tran-yar' , to wonder at, to
find (a thing) strange, L. 60.
Extrano, aiks-tran'-yo, adj., strange. L. 48.
Extraordinario, aiks-trah-dre-de-nah'-re-o,
adj., extraordinary. L. 46.
Extremado, aiks-trai-mah'-do, adj., ex-
treme. L. 55.
F.
Fabricar,/a^-5re-Aar', to make, to manu-
facture, to build. L. 48.
YaccioM, fak-the-one\ s.f., feature; faction.
L. 35.
Facilfah'-iheel, adj., easy. L. 21.
Facilidad, fah-the-le-daih' , s. f., facihty,
ease. L. 36. „ .,. . x
Facilitar, fah-the-le-tar' , to facilitate, to
make easy, to procure. L. 49.
Facilmente, fah'-theel-main-tai, adv., easi-
ly. L. 49.
¥acti\ral fa'k-too'-ra, s. f., invoice. L. 63.
FacuUad, fah-kool-iath', s. f., faculty, power
of doing any thing, liberty to do anv
thing. L. 63.
Falso, /a^'-so, adj., false. L. 45.
Falta,/ar-^a, s. f., fault, want L. 27.
FaUar, fai-tar\ to want, to lack, to be lack-
iner. L. 31. ^ ,.
Fama, fah'-ma, s. f., fame, reputation, re-
FamUia, fah-rk^ '-l?-a, s. f family. L. 23.
FamiMar, fah-m€-le-ar\ adj., familiar L. 40.
Fammaridad, fah-me-lhah-re-dat/i , s. I., ia-
miliarity. L. 65.
Famoso^fah-md'-ro. adj., famous. L. 45.
Fanatico,/a/t-na/i'-^e-Ao, adj., fanatical. L
35.
452
VOCABULARY.
Fas, fai^s.— Par fas 6 por nCfas, right or
wrong ; juhtly or unjuatly. L. 63.
Faslidio, J(u>s-lS'-iiS-o, a. m., trouble, annoy-
ance. L.. 47.
Fsi\or, fak-VM'e'^ a. m., favor, mercy, help.
—Ajavor de, m bcliall' ol'. L. yj.
Favorecer, Ja/i-vO-rai-thair' , to favor. L.
50.
Fa\orito,fah-vd-7-^'-fo, adj., favorite. L. 54.
¥6.fai, 8. f., faith. L. 45.
YchrGTO, fai-brai'-ro^ 8. m., February. L. 2i.
Fccha., fai'-cha, b. f., date. L. 20.
Felicidad, fai-lS-tM-daih\ s. f., happiness,
felicity. L. 48.
Feiicitar,/a^/2-^AS-tor', to felicitate, to con-
gratulate. L. (U.
Feliz, j'ai-lee(h\ adj., happy, fortunate,
lucky. L. 21.
Felizmente, fai-leetk-main'-tai, adv., happi-
ly, fortunately, luckily. L. 49.
Femenino, fai-rnai-nS'-nOy a^j., feminine.
L. 47.
rco,/ae'-o, adj., ugly, unbecoming. L. 7.
Feroz, /ai-ro(h\ adj., ferocious, herce, rav-
enous. L, 54.
FGrrocaiTil, fair-r5-car-red\ s. m., railroad.
L. 60.
Fia(io,fS-ah'-do, adj., confident, trusting. —
Al Jlado, on credit, on trust. L. 61.
Fiar,/g-ar', to trust, to bail. L. 61.
Ficl,/t'-ai;', adj., faithful. L. 21.
Fi(iiita,/i-aiss'-fa, s. f., feast, festival.— Dia
de Jlesla, holiday. L. 62.
Figura, /?-.^oo'-ra, s. f., figure, form, shape.
— Ilacer Jigura, to make, to cut a figure.
L. 63.
Fi-'urado, fi-goo-rah'-do^ adj., figurative.
L. 51.
FWoaoiasiro J'^-ld-sd-fass'-tro, s. m., philoso-
phastcr. L. 49.
Filosofo, fl-lO'-sO-fo, 8. m., philosopher. L.
49.
Fin, feen, s. m., end, object, point.— A fin
de, in order to. L. 45.
Final, /?-/ta^', s. m. and adj., end, termina-
tion ; final. L. 61.
F'miiimQniCy fi-nal-main'-taiy adv., finally.
L. 49.
Fino,/?'-no, adj., fine. L. 56.
Firnia, /^6r'-;/ia, s. f., signature. L. 56.
Fisonomia,/S-«5-w5-we'-a, b. f., physiogno-
my. L. 45.
Flaqueza, flah-kai'-tha, b. f., leanness,
wiakncss, foible, frailty. L. (54.
Fondo, tone' -do, b. ni., bottom, ground
(of colored articles); pi., funds, cash,
money. L. 60.
Formal, fore.-mal\ adj., fonnal, reliable,
respectable. L. 45.
FonnaIidad,/3re-ma/i-^-rfa)!7i', s. f, formali-
ty, reliabiluy, respectability. L. 45.
Formar,yc>?'c-7/jar', to form, to yhapc. L. 43.
Fort una, fdre-too'-na, B. f., fortune, luck.
L. 42.
Fra.!j:ata,/m^-7a^'-<a', s. f., frigate. L. 60.
YraWiij'rah'-e-lai, s. f., friar. L. 41.
Frances,. /mw-//<or/.sy, s. m. and adj., French
(langua^re), French. L. 3.
Francia,./ra/i'-^/ir'-rt, s. f., France. L. 9.
Francisco, J'ran-ihcess'-ko, b. m., Francis.
L. 14.
Franco, fran'-Jco, adj., f^ank, flrco, open-
hearted, intimate. L. 34.
Franqucza, fran-kai'-tha, b. f., frankneftJ,
open-hearledness, intimacy. L. 4tt.
Fr&tie,jra/i,'-mi, s, f., phrase, sentence. L,
51.
Fray,/raA'-2, s. m., friar. L. 41.
Frecuenie, J'rai-kwain' -tai, adj., frequent.
L. 29.
Fr eit,frai-€er\ to trj. L. 52.
Frente, frain'-tai, s. f. forehead, front,—
Enfrente, opposite. L. 45.
Fresco, frcwm'-ko, adj., fresh, cool.— Pintu-
ra al jresco, fresco painting. L. 46.
Fresco, s. m., cool breeze, cool, refreehiiig
air, fresco (painting). L, 46.
Frio, fre'-o, adj. and s. m., cold. L. 25.
Fno\{iTii,fre-u4ai'-i'a, s. f., trifle. L. 37.
Fruta, /roo'-^a, s. f., fruit. L. 31.
Fruto, froo'-tOy s. m., fruit (produce). L.
40.
Fuego,/M'a^'-<70, 8. m., fire. L. .34.
Fuente, fwain'-tai, B. f., fountain, spring,
source. L. 52.
Fviiiva,fwai'-ray adv., out.— Fuera de que,
besides. L. 31.
Fuera 1 inter., out I be gone 1 away ! L. 31.
Fuerza, fwair'-tha, s. f., force, strength.—
A fuerza de, by dint of. L. 58.
F\i"&,foo'-ga, s. f., flight, escape. L. 57.
Fmano,foo-lah'-no, b. m., such a one. L. &>
Fumar,y<x)-war', to smoke. L. 42.
FusW, foo-seel\ s. m., gun. L. 49.
Fusilar, /oo-w-Zar', to shoot (military). I,
45.
Futuro, /oo-^oo'-ro, s. m.. future (tense). L
43.
Futuro, adj., future. L. 43.
Q.
Galan, gah4an\ s. m. and adj., gallant, ac>
tor ; gallant. L. 58.
Galante, gak-lan' -tai, adj., gallant, courtly.
L. 58.
Galicismo, gah-lS-theess'-mo, b. m., galli-
cism. L. 61.
Gallcgo, gal-yai'-go, b. m., Galician. L. 55.
Gallina, gal-ye'-na, s. f., hen. L. 5.
Gana, ga/i'-na, s. f., desire, will, appetite.
L. 59.
Ganapierde, gah-nah-pl-air'-dai, b. m.,
game of draughts, or checkers, at which
the loser wins. L. 50.
Ganar, gah-nnr', to gain, to win. L. 27.
Ganso, gan'-so, s. m., goose.— Hablar por
boca de ganso, to eciio what has been
said by others. L. 6Ji.
Garrotazo, gar-rd-tah' -tJiO, 8. m., blow with
a cudgel. L. 44.
Garrote", gar-rv'-(ai, b. m., cudgel. L. 44.
Gastar, gaas-iar', to waste, to use, to spends
to expend. L. 50.
Qatillo, gah-tM'-yo, b. m. (dim.), little cat,
trigger of a gun. L. 53.
GatOj qah'-to, s. m., cat. L. 46.
Gemido, hai-tni'-do, s. m., groan, lamenta-
tion, moan, howling. L. 59.
General, hai-nai-ral\ s. m. and a<y., gen-
eral. L. 4.5.
G6nero, hai'-nai-ro, b. m., gender, genus,
kind, sort, cloth. L. 57.
Gcntillcio, hain-(?-li'-thl-dy a^., peculiar to
a nation. L. -49.
VOCABULAET,
453
Gcntio, hain-te'-o, s. m., great crowd, mul-
titude. L. 40.
Gentualla, hain-too-cd'-ya, s. f., rabble,
dreg3 of the people. L. 49.
Genmdio, hai-rooa'-dl-o, s. m., gerund. L.
43.
Gigantesco, hl-gan-taiss'-Jco, adj., gigantic.
L. 49.
Gineta, he-nai'-ta.—Tener los cascos a la
ginefa, to be hare-brained. L. 64.
Globo, glo'-bo, s. m., globe, balloon. L. 37.
Goberu'ador, gd-bair-nah-dore' , s. m., gov-
ernor. L. 60.
Gobernante, go-balr-nan'-tal, pres. part.,
governing. L. 38.
Gobernar, go-bair-nar\ to govern. L. 34.
Gobierno, gO-be-air'-no, s. m., government.
L. 40.
Goce, go'-thai, s. m., enjoyment, L, 54.
Golpe, gole'-pai, s. m., blow, stroke. L. 61.
Gonzalez, gone-thah'-laith, s. m. (dim).,
Spanish proper name signifying son of
Gonzalo. L. 49.
Gorra, gore'-ra^ s. f., bonnet.— Yivir de
gorra, to live at others' expense, to
sponge. L. 64.
Gozar, go-thar\ to enjoy. L. 25.
Gozo, go'-tho^ s. m., joy, satisfaction, pleas-
ure. L. 51.
Grabado, grah-bah'-do, s. m., engraving,
cut (picture). L. 5*2.
Grabar, grah-bar\ to engrave. L. 52.
Gracia, grah'-thZ-a^ s. f., grace, favor, grace-
fulness, pardon. L. 51.
Gracias, s. m. pi., thank you. L. 23.
Grado, grah'-do^ s. m., grade, degree.— De
grado, willingly. L. 60.
Gramatica, grah-mah'-te-ka^ s. f., grammar.
L. 5.
Gramatical, grah-mah-tl-TcaV ^ adj., gram-
matical. L. 51.
Grande, gran'-dai, adj., great, large. L. 7.
Granizar, grah-ne-thar\ to hail. L. 30.
Grato, grah'-to, adj., grateful, pleasing,
agreeable. L. 56.
Grito, grl'-to^ s. m., cry, shout, scream. L.
59.
Guerra, gair'-ra, s. f., war. L. 56.
Guinada, gheen-yah'-da, s. f., wink. L. 54.
Guipuzcoa, ghl-pooih'-kwa, s. f., Guipuzcoa
(province in Spain). L. 55.
Gustar, gooss-iar', to like, to please, to
taste. L. 31.
Gusto, gooss'-to, s. m., taste, pleasure.— Con
muclio gusto, with great pleasure. L. 23.
Habana (La), lah-ah-bah'-na, s. f., Havana.
L. 12.
Habanero, ah-bah-nai'-ro, adj. and s. m.,
Havancse. L. 49.
Haber, ah-bair\ to have (used only as an
auxiliary verb in this sic^iiiication ; for
exceptions see Lesson 66); impersonal
verb, there to "be.— Hay dos iglesias en
esta calle, there are two churches in this
street. L. 12.
Habil, ah'-bed, adj., able, skilful, expert,
clever. L. 21.
Habilidad, ah-b7.-U-dath\ s. f., ability, skil-
falness, cxpertness, cleverness. L. 36.
Habitante, oh-be-tan'-taL s. m., inhabitant
L. 40.
Hablador, ab-lah-dore', adj. and s. m., talka-
tive ; talker. L. 20.
Hablar, ab-lar\ to talk, to speak.— fio^/ar
a bulto, to talk at random. L. 1.
Hacer, ah-thair\ to do, to make.— ^acer
muy bien, to do well or right, to be right.
—Hacer de, to act as. L. 19.
Hacia, ah'-the-a, adv., toward, towards. L.
19.
Hallar, al-yar\ to find. L. 37.
Hambre, am'-brai, s. f., hunger.— Tener
hamfyre^ to be hungry. L. 25.
Hasta, ass'-ta, adv., until, till, as far as,
even. L. 19.
Hazmereir, ath-^mai-rai-eer\ s.m., laughing-
stock. L. 50.
Hel ai, inter., hoi what? what do you
say ? L. 44.
Hecho, ai'-clvo^ s. m., action, fact. L. 52.
Helar, ai-lar\ to freeze. L. 30.
Helena, ai-lai'-na, s. f., Helen, Ellen. L. 19-
Hermanastro, air-mah-nass'-tro, s. m., aug.,
step-brother, half-brother, L. 49.
Hermano, (ur-mah'-no, s. m., brother. L. 6.
Hermoso, air-mo' -so, adj., beautiful, hand-
some. L. 7.
Hermosura, air-m5-soo'-ra, s. f., beauty,
handsomeness. L. 53.
Herrero, air-rai'-ro, s. m., blacksmith. L. 65.
Hielo, yai'-lo, s. m., ice, frost. L. 30.
Hierro, yair'-ro, s. m., iron. L. 61.
Higo, e'-go, s. m., fig. L. 40.
Hijastro, Z-hass'-tro^ s. m., step-son. L. 49.
Hijo, ?'-/w, s. m., son. L. 6.
Hilar, e-lar\ to spin. L. 65.
Hilo, g'-to, s. m., thread. L. 24.
Hinchar, een-char\ to swell. L. 53.
Historia, eess-td'-r?-a, s. f., history. L. 15.
Hoja, o'-ha, s. f., leaf (of a tree or a book).
L. 59.
Hola I o'-la, inter., hallo 1 L. 46.
Holgazan, ole-gah-than' , adj. and s. m., idle,
lazy, loitering ; idler, loiterer. L. 6.
Hombre, ome'^rai, s. m., man.— Es mas
ho?nbre que su hermano, he is more of a
man than his brother. L. 6.
Honor, o-nore', s. m., honor. L. 39.
Honroso, one-ro'-so, adj., honorable. L. 52.
Hora, o'-ra, s. f., hour. L. 23.
Homo, ore' -no, s. m., oven. — Cocer enhorno,
to bake. L. 60.
Horrendo, ore-rain'-do, adj., horrific (poet.).
L. 55.
Hortelano, dre-tai-lah'-no, s, m., gardener.
L. 65.
Hospital, bce-pl-tal', s. m., hospital. L. 47.
Hotel, o-taW, s. m., hotel. L. 17.
Hueso, wai'-so, s. m., bone.— Bocado sin
Imeso, sinecure, L. 61,
Huesped, waiss'-paid, s. m., guest, host.—
Echar la cnenta sin la huespeda, to reckon
without the host. L. 63.
Huir, loeer, to flee, to make off. L. 34.
Human o, oo-mah'-no, adj., human. L. 48,
Humor, oo-more' s, m., humor, wit. L. 27.
Idea, ^-dai'-a, s. f, ideal. L. 54.
Ideal, l-dal-al', adj.. Ideal. L. 43.
454
VOCABULARY,
Idioma, Z-di-5'-ma, s. m., idiom, language.
L. 55.
Idiota, l-dl-d'-ta, s. m., idiot. L. 48.
Idiotismo, d-de-d-feess'-nu), 8. m., idiom,
form of expression peculiar to a language.
L. 49.
fgleriia, l-glai'-sl-a, s. f., church. L. 10.
■guoraucia, eeg-nd-ran' -tfit-a^ s. f., igno-
rance. L. 52.
■gnoraute, eeg-no-ran'-tcU^ adj., ignorant.
L. Gl.
iguorar, eeg-nd-rar\ to be ignorant of, not
to know. L. 61.
Igual, e-giocU\ adj., equal, alike, like. L. 48.
Igualdad, e-qwcU-datfi', s. f., equality. L. 55.
llusion, d-loo-se-one', s. f., illusion. L. 48.
Imaginacion, i-mah-hl-nah-thl-dne' y b. f.,
imagination. L. 58.
Impedir, eem-pai-deer\ to impede, toliinder.
L. 43.
imperative, eem-pai-rah-tl'-vo^ adj. and s.
m., imperative, imperative mood. L. 43.
Imperfeccion, eem-pair-faik-tM-one\ s. f.,
imperfection. L. 55.
Xmperfecto, eem-pair-faik'-to, adj., imper-
fect. L. 43.
Impersonal, eem-pair-so-nal\ adj., imper-
sonal. L. 01.
Imponer, eem-pd-nair', to impose, to in-
form, to acquaint. L. 44.
Importaute. eem-pore-tan' -tai, adj., impor-
timt. L. 38.
Lmportar, eem-pdre-tar' , to import, to be of
importance, to amount to. L. 31.
mposible, eetn-po-oS'-blai, adj., impossible.
L. 31.
Lmpreso, eem-prai'-so, past part, of Impri-
MIR. L. 61.
imprimir, eem-prlmeer\ to print. L. 61.
Improvisar, eem-pro-vl-sar' y to improvise,
to extemporise. L. .53.
Improviso, eem-prd-vS'-so. — De improviso,
unexpectedly, on a sudden. L. 32.
Imprudencia, eem-jrroo-dain'-thl-a, s. f., im-
prudence. L. 43.
imprndente, eem-proo-dain'-tal, adj., im-
prudent. L. 20.
Impuesto, eem-pwaiss'-tOy past part, of Im-
poner. L. 52.
n, een, Latm prep, ufled in Spanish as a
prefix onlv. and generally with a ncm-
tive Pinrniflcation. L. Tif).
Inccndiar, een-fhaln-(f7-ar' , to kindle. L. 51.
Inchiir, em-cJoo-eer' , to include. L. 49.
Inc6modamentc, fim-l-7i'-mn-d(ih-m.ain-frti,
adv., lncommodioH<'ly, inconveniently,
nncomfortnblv. L. 20.
incomodar, een-M-md-dar\ to Incommode,
to put out. L. 47.
Inc6mndo, epn-W -m^i-do, ftdl., Incommodl-
ons. Inconvenient, uncomfortable. L. 99.
Incompleto, efrt-kome-plai'-to, adj., Incom-
' plete. L. 48.
Inconveriiente, e/>n-'k7in.e-vni.n7-rtin'-taf, b.
m., difficulty. obst<»c1e. obioction. L. Rl.
Increlble, een-krai-i'-blai. adj.. Incredible.
L.61.
Indeflnido, f>m-dai-n-ni'-do, adj., indefi-
nite. L. 01.
IndependoTicia, e^n-dai-nain-daln'-tM-ay B.
f. . indopendencf'. L. 35.
Indlcatlvo, p.en-dl-kah-tl'-vo, ad}., indica-
tive. L. 43.
Indice, een'-dS-tkai, 8. m., index. L. 61.
ludigno, een-deeg'-nOy adj., unworthy, un«
deserving. L. 53.
Indigo, een'-dS-go, e. m. L. 54. (See ARil )
Indirecto, eeu-dl-rcUk' -to, adj., indirect.
L. 51.
Individuo, een-di-vl' -doo-d^ s. m., individu-
al, member (of academies, universities,
&c.). L. 51.
Industrioso, een-doos-tri-d'-so, adj., indus-
trious. L. 35.
Inepto, een-aip' -to, adj., inept, unfit. L. 61.
Inexplicable, een-cukti-pli-kuJi' -blai, adj., in-
explicable. L. 61.
Infaucia, een-fan'-tli^-a, s. f., infancy. L. 54.
Inferior, een-fai-ri-ore' , «dj., inferior. L. 21.
Iniimo, een'-jl-nu), adj., lowest. L. 21 .
Intinidad, een-fl-nl-daUi\ s. f., infinity. L.
40.
Infinitivo, een-fi-nl-tZ'-vo, adj., infinitive.
L. 43.
Intinito, een-fi-riS'-to, adj., infinite. L. 39.
Inlluir, een-jloo-eer\ to influence. L. 48.
Infortunio, een-jore-too'-ne-o^ s. m., misfor-
tune. L. 41.
Ingenio, een-hai'-nl-o, s. m., genius. L. 61.
Ingeuioso, eeiirhai-nl-o'so, tulj., ingenious.
L. 01.
Inglaterra, een-glah-tair'-ra, s. f., England.
L. 9.
Ingles, een-glaiss'. b. m. and a^., English.
L. 2.
Inicial, ?-nUh?-(il\ a_4j., initial. L. 56.
Injusticia, een-hooss-te'-ihe-a, b. f., injustice.
L. 45.
Inmediato, een-mai-dl-ah'-tOy a4j., immedi
ate, near, next. L. 01.
Inmemorial, een-nuU-md-ri-al', a^., imme*
morial. L. 66.
Inocente, l-nd tJiain'-tcU. adj., innocent.
L. 34.
Inquietar, een-kZ-ai-tar' . to make uneasy.
L. 01.
Inquicto, een-k^-ai'-to, adj., uneasy, restless.
L. 01.
Insecto, eensaik'-fo, b. m.. insect. L. 61.
Tnspirar, eens-pl-rar', to inspire. L. 68.
Instante. eena-fav'-ffi. 8. m., instant.— Al
iv.ofar)fe. immedintely. L. 49.
Tnstinto. eem-icen'-fo, p. m., instinct. L. 61.
InPtniccion, eenx-trook thp-7>ne\ s. f., In-
Ptrnotion. leamin?. L. 52.
Instniido, een.<>,<>-fTVO^'-do. a<^.. Instructed,
learned, educated. L. 49.
luBtruir, eem-troo-eer' , to instruct, to teach.
L. 47.
Instrumento, ^enxfroo-main'-fo, b. m., in-
strnmont. L. 61.
Intacbnblp. een-fah-rhnh'-Nai. nf^l., anlnv-
ponchnble. irropronrhnble. I., c-l.
Intencion, e€n-tain-thl-dne\ s. f., intention.
L. 61.
Tntentar, fen-fafn-far'. to attempt. L. 61 .
Interfp. ffin-faj-rahx'. p. m.. interepf. L. M.
Interepanto. efin-tai-rai-san'-tai, adj., inter-
cptiner. L. 47..
Interesar, een-tai-rai-sar'. to Interest. L.
61.
Interln, een'-tai-reen, adv.. In the Interim
L. 61.
Interior, een-tat-rl-dre', acH., Interior. L
4«.
Interior, s. m., interior. L. 46.
VOCABULAEY
456
Interjeccion, een-tair-haik-thl-one' , s. f., in-
terjection. L. 43.
Interrogacion, een-tair-ro-gah-the-one\ s. f.,
interrogation. L. 61.
Interrogante, een-tair-ro-gan'-tai^ s.m., note
of interrogation. (Pres. part, of Inter-
BOGAR.) L. 61.
Interrogar, een-tair-rd-gar\ to interrogate,
to question. L. 61.
Interrumpir, een-iair-room-peer\ to inter-
rupt. L. 64.
Intimidad, een-te-m^-dath', s. f., intimacy.
. L. 56.
/Intimo, een'-tl-mo, adj., intimate. L. 56.
lutroducir, een-trd-doo-tlieer\ to introduce.
L. 40.
Inutil, een-oo'-teel^ adj., useless. L. 50.
Invariable, een-vah-re-alt' -blai, adj., uivari-
able. L. 56.
Inversion, een-vair-sl-dne'^ s. f., inversion.
L. 61.
Invertir, een-vair-teer\ to invert. L. 61.
Invierno, een-ve-air'-no, s. m., winter. L.
S4.
Invitar, een-vl-tar\ to invite. L. 56.
Ir, eer, to go. L. 18.
Iris, e'-reess^ s. f., rainbow. L. 61.
Irlanda, eer-lan'-da, s. f., Ireland. L. 40.
Irregular, eer-rai-goo4ar\ adj., irregular.
L. 43.
Lregularidad, eer-rai-goo-lah-r1-dath\ b. f.,
Irregularity. L. 55.
Isabel, l-sah-baU\ s. f., Isabella, Elizabeth.
L. 55.
Isla, eess'-la^ s. f,, island. L. 61.
Italia, e-tah'-m-a, s. f., Italy. L. 40.
Italiano, l-tah-le-ah'-no^ s. m. »nd adj., Ital-
ian. L. 61.
Izquierdo, eeth-kl-air'-do^ adj., left-handed.
— Mano izquierda^ left hand. L. 50.
Jabon, hah-bdne\ s. m., soap. L. 5.
Jamas, hah-mass\ adv., never. L. 25.
Jaque, hah'-kaU check (at chess).— Jogwe y
mate, checkmate. L. 42.
Jarrlin, har-deen\ s. m., garden. L. 18.
Jardinero, har-dl-nai'-ro, s. m., gardener.
L. 34.
Jose. k5-.oai\ s. m., Joseph. L. 43.
J6ven, ho'-vain, adj. and s. m. and f., young;
young: man, youii'? woman. L. 13.
Jnan, whan. s. m., John. L. 17.
Juana, whah'-na, s. f., Jane. L. 17.
Jueeo, whai'-go^ s. m., game, play, set. L.
6i:
Jn^ves. vfhai'-vaiss, s. m., Thursday. L. 9.
Jnez, whaifh, s. m.. iuflge. L. 9.
Jncror, hon-'^nr'. to play. L. 41.
Juido, v^M'-fhl-o, s. m., judgment, sense,
trial. L. 53.
Julio. hoo'-T?-n. s.m., July, (prop, name)
Julius. L. 24.
Juntar, ho(m-tar\ to join, to place together.
L. 65.
Junto, hoon'-to, adv., near, close to. L. 39.
Juramento, hno-ra-main'-to, s.m., oath, affi-
davit. L. 53.
Justicia. hoofn^-tl' -fM-a. s. f. justice. L. 61.
Ju«to. hooas'-to, adj., Inst. nVht. L. 61 .
JHventnd, 7ioo-ven-tooth' , s. f., youth. L. 48.
L.
La, def. art. f. sin^., the. L. 5.
La, pron. f. sing., ner, it. L. 8.
Laconico, lah-ko'-nS-ko, adj., laconic. L. 38.
Laboriosidad, lah-bo-re-o-ie-daih' , s. f., in-
dustry. L. 51.
Lacre, lah'-krai, s. m., sealing-wax. L. 5,
Lado, lah'-do, s. m., side. L. 18.
Ladron, lah-drone', s. m., tliief. L. 44.
Lago, lali'-go. s. m., lake. L. 40.
Lagrima, lah' -gre-ma, s. f., tear.. L. 51.
Lapiz, lah'-peeth, s. m., pencil. L. 51.
Largo, lar'-go, adj., \ong.— Largo tiempo, a
long time.— A lo largo, alongside. L. 21.
Lastima, lass'-ie-ma, 8. f., pity. L. 25.
Lastimar, lass-te-mar\ to hurt, to wound,
to ofl'end. L. 61.
Latin, lah-teen', s. m., Latin. L. 61.
Latinajo, lah-ie-nah'-ho, 8. m. aug., Dog-
Latin. L. 49.
Latitud, lah-il-tcoth\ 8. f., width, latitude.
L.61.
Lavandera, lah-van-dai'-ra, s. f,, washer-
woman. L. 5.
Lavar, lah-var\ to wash. L. 24.
Le, lai, pron., him, it; to him, to it. L. 10.
Leccion, laik-thl-one\ s. f., lesson, L. 8.
Leche, lai'-chai^ s. f., milk. L. 7.
Lectura, laik-too'-ra, s. f., reading. L. 38
Leer, lai-air\ to read. L. 7.
Legua, lai'-gu-a, s. f., league. L. 61.
Leido, lai-e'-do, adj.— Hombre bien Mdo, a
well-read man. (Past pt. of Leer.) L. 52.
Lejos, lai'-hoce, adv., far ofl".— A lo l^os, in
the distance. L. 31.
Lengua, lain'-gwa, s. f., tongue, language.
L. 23.
Lenguage, lain-gwa'-Jiai, s. m., language,
manner of speaking or writing. L. 66.
Lento, lain'-to, adj., slow, lardy. L. 61.
Leon, lai-dne\ s. m., Hon. L. 54.
Letra, lai'-tra, s. f., letter (character), hand-
writing, letter (of credit) ; pi., letters, lite-
rature.— Bellas letras, Belles-lettres. L.
61.
Levantar, lai-van-tar\ to raise, to lift up.—
Levantarse, to rise, to get up. L. S3.
Levita, lai-ie'-ta, s. m., Levite.— ZcteYa,
s. f., frock-coat. L. 61.
Ley, lai'-S, s. f., law. L. 8.
Liberal, U-bai-ral\ adj., liberal. L. 62.
Libertad, le-bair-tath\ s. f., liberty. L. 40.
Libra, te'-bra. s. f., pound.— X?6m esterlina,
pound sterling. L. 47.
Librar, U-hrar'l to free, to deliver : (com-
mercial) to draw. L. 45.
Libre, Ve'-hraL adj., free. L. 59.
Libren'a, U-brai-rl'-a, s. f., bookstore, book-
seller's shop, book -trade. L. 11.
Llbrero. l?-brai'-ro, s.m., bookseller. L. 11.
Libro, ir-bro, s. m., book. L. 4
Lieero, l?-?>a)/-ro, adj., light, swift. -A la
ligera, lin-htly. L. 46.
Limosna, U-moce'-na, s. f., alms. L. bi.
Limpiar, leem-pl-ar', to clean ^- ?^j,
Limpieza, leem-p^-ai' -tha, s.f., cleanliness.
Limpio, leem'-pS-d, adj., clean, cleanly. L.
20.
Lfnea, W nai-a, s. f., line. L. 61.
Lisboa. l^^.ta-bd'-a. s. f., Lisbon. L. 55.
Lisonja, U-sone'-ha, s. f, flattery. L. 61.
456
VOCABULARY,
Lisonjear, lS-sdne-kal-ar\ to flaftter. L. 61.
Litioujero, IS-KO/ie-hai'-ro, adj. and s. m.,
flattering, flatterer. L. 01.
Lista, leess'-ta, s. f., list. L. 61.
Listo, leess'-lo^ adj., ready, Bliarp, quick. L.
46.
Literato, R-tai-rah' -to, s. m., man of letters,
literatus. L. 51.
Literatura, U-tcU-rah-ioo' -ra, s. f., literature.
L. 52.
Litro, «'-<ro, s. m., litre. L. 60.
La, art. neut., the. (See explanations in
Lessons.)
Lo. pron., it. (and sometimss) him. L. 26.
Local, l(i-k(il\ adj., local. L. 51.
Loco, W-lca, a Jj., mid —A tontas y a loca%
inconsiderately, without reilection. L. 61.
Loco, s. m., madman. L. 61.
Lodo, lo'-do, s. m., mid, mire. L. 45.
Lo^rar, l5-grar\ to succeed, to obtain. L.
38.
Londres, Idne' -drains, s. m., London. L. 12.
Loni'itud, lon,2-hS4ooth\ s. f., length, longi-
tude. L. 61.
Loleria, lo-lai-rd'-a, s. f., lottery. L. 65.
Lucir, loo-theer', to shine, to glitter. L. 65.
LuejfO, loo-ai'-go, adv., by and by, immedi-
ately ;—conj., then, therefore. L. 33.
Lu^ar, loo-gar\ s. m., place, village.— Ea
lujar de, instead of. L. 29.
Luis, l09-eers\ s. m., Levtris, Louis. L. 15.
Luisa, loo-S'-sa, a. f., Louisa. L. 2.
Luna, loo'-na, s. f. moon. L. 61.
Luto, loo'-to, 8. m., mjurning. L. 60.
Luz, lootk, 9. f., light.— Dar a luz, to pub-
lish, to give birth to. L. 61.
liL.
Llamar, lijah-mir', to call, to know. L. 27.
Llave, Imli'-vai, s. f., key. L. 5,).
Lle^ar, lycii-gar\ to arrive.— negar aser, to
become. L. 37.
Llenar, Itjai-nar', to All, to fulfll. L. 54.
Lleno, luai'-no, adj., full. L. 54.
Llevar. hjai-nar\ to take, to carry, to bear.
to bring forth. L. 14.
Llorar, hj5-rar\ to cry, to weep. L. 51.
Lloro, lyd'-ro, s. m,, tear, act of crying. L.
51. "
LL)ver, li/d-vair'to r&m.—Llover 6 cantar-
ros, to pour. L. 3:).
Lloviznar, lya-veeth-iiar', to drizzle. L 30.
Lluvia, lyoo'-vl-a, s. f., rain, L. 30.
Macho, mah'-cho, b. m., male (of animals),
mule. L. 62.
Madera, rnak-dai' -ra, b. f., wood, timber,
luuioer. Li. 4.
"^•^^^ff^^^^^mah-drass'-tra, b. f., Btcp-moth-
Madre. mah'-drat, b. f., mother.— Lengua
i,m"'F-.' '^'^ original language. L. 6.
Madrid, mah-drppfh'. s. m., Madrid. L. 12.
Madrilefio, mah-drli.lfjin'yo, 8. m., Madrlle-
man, native of Madrid. L. 49.
Madrugada, mah-droogah'-da, b. f., that
P'lrt of the night from 12 p. m. until sun
rise. L. 65.
Madrugar, muh-droo-gar\ to rise very early.
L. 62.
Madurez, mah-doo-raUh\ b. f., maturity,
ripeness. L. 51.
Maestro, inah-azss' -tro, b. m., master, teach-
er. L. 62.
Magnifico, mag-)ii'-fl-ko, adj., magnificent.
L. 68.
Mai, 8. m., evil, harm, disease. L. 48.
Mai, adv., badly.— J/a^ de bu grado, m epite
of him. L. 3.
Maldito, mcU-Ul'-to, adj., accursed, perverse.
L. 62.
Maiicia, mah-ll' -Uii-a, b. f., malice, wicked-
ness. L. 62.
Malo, mah'-lo, a^., bad, ill, wicked.— Estar
7ncdo.^ to be sick.— ber jiuUo, to be bad, to
be wicked. L, 7.
Mama, iiiah-ina\ s. f., mamma. L. 5.
Mandar, man-dar'y to send, to command, to
order. L. 17.
Manera, mah-nai'-ra, b. f., manner.— De
inanera que, so as, so that. L. 42.
Mania, mcUi-nl'-a, e. f., mania, whim. L. 57.
Manifestar, mah-n^-fam-tar' , to manifest,
to show. L. 51.
Maniflesto, mah-ni-fl-uiss' -to, adj., mani-
fest. L. 52.
Mano, mah'-no, s. f., hand, quire (of ppper).
— Veuir con bus ma/im lavadas, to wish
to enjoy the fruit of another's labor. L.
28.
Mantcca, man-tai'-Tca, s. f., butter, lard
(South America). L. 62.
Mantequilla, man-tai-keel' -ya^ B. f., butter
(South America), lard. L. 62.
Manuel, mafi.-noo-aU\ 8. m., Emanuel. L. 2.
Manuscrito, mah-nooss-krl -to, s. m., mann-
Bcript. L. 62.
Manzana, man-thah'-na, 8. f., apple, block
(of houses). L. 31.
Manzanar, man-thah-nar'. b. m., apple-or-
chard. L. 49.
Mafiana, man-yah'-na, s. f., morning, to-
morrow.— Pasado mananay the day after
to-morrow. L. .30.
Mar, 9. m. and f., sea.— Quien no se arrles-
ga no pasa la mar, faint heart never woa
fair lady. L. 62.
Marca, mar'-ka, s. f., mark, brand. L. 42.
Marcha, mar'-cha, s. f., march.— Sobre la
marcha, ofl'-hand, on the spot. L. 51.
Marchar, mar-char\ to march. L. 19.
Margarita, mar-gah-ri'-ta, s. f., Margaret.
L. 3.
Maria, mah-rl'-a, b. f.. Marv. L. 44.
Martea, mar'-faUi, b. m.. Tuoedav. L. 9.
Marzo, mai-'-th!), s. m., March. L. 24.
Mas, 7/?a.<.f, adv., more.— i/cw que (or do\
more than. L. 16..
Mascara, moM' kah-rn. h. f , mask, L. 60.
Masculino, mass-koo-ll'-no, adj., masculine.
L. 47.
Matar. mah-taV. to kill. L. 44.
Matomatico. wah-t(ti-mah'-ff-ko. b. m.,
mathematician; adj., mathematical. L.
60.
Materia, mafifai'-rl-a, B. f., matter, subject,
afTair. L. .'iA.
Material, mah-tai^Sal\ adj., material. L.
48.
Matoriallsta. mah-fai-ri-ah-kess'-ta^ b. m.,
materialist. L. 96.
VOCABULAKSr
457
Matrimonio, mah-tre-md'-nl-o, s. m., matri- i
iiiouy, wedlock, marriage. L. (34. |
Mauiiiuo, 7nah-ool-ye'-Uo^ a. m., mew (of a :
cat), L. 4tj.
Maximo, mak'-se-mo, adj. (superlative of
GBANDEh chief, principal, very great.
L. '^1.
Mayo, mah'-yo, s. m., May. L. 24.
Mayor, ma1i-yure\ adj., greater, larger.—
ii.i mayor, tae greatest, ttie largest. L. 20.
Maydscula, malt-yooss'-koo-la, adj., capital
(said of letters). L. 62.
Me, mat, pron., me, to me. L. 26.
Meca, mai'-ka, s. f.— JJe zeca en meca, from
pillar to post, to and fro. L. 61.
Media, mai'-dl-a, s. f., stocking. L. 10.
Medianamente, mai-de-ah-nali-niam' -tai,
adv., middling. L. 39.
Mediania, mai-Ue-ah-ne' -a, s. f., mediocrity,
moderation. L. 52.
Mediauo, mai-dl-ah'-iw, adj., medium, mid-
dling, moderate. L. 39.
Medico, mai'-de-ko, s. m., pliysician. L. 19.
Medida, maz-de-da, s. f., measure. L. 55.
Medio, mai'-de-o, adj., hali.—Mediodia, mid-
day, noon.—Medianoche, midnight. L. 30.
Medio, 8. m., middle, means.— For medio
de, b^ means of. L. 37.
Mediodia, tnai-de-o-de'-a, s. m., noon, mid-
day, south. L. 30.
Medir, mai-deer\ to measure. L. 39.
Mejicano, mai he-kah' -no, s. m. and adj..
Mexican. L. 47.
Mejico, mxxi' -hl-ko, s. m., Mexico. L. 20.
Mejor, mai-hore', adj. and adv., better.
—El mejor, the best. L. 20.
Melocoton, mai lo-ko-tone' , s. m., peach. L.
31.
Melon, mai-lom', s. m., melon. L. 31.
Memoria, mai-mo'-re-a, s. f., memory, re-
collection.— Aprender de memoria, to
learn by heart. L. 38.
Mcmorias, rnai-mo-re-as, s. f. pi., my com-
pliments. L. 39.
Mencion, main-the-dne' . s. f., mention. L.
52.
Mencionar, muin-thl-o-nar', to mention. L.
45.
Menester, mai-naits-tair' , s. m., need, want,
necessity.— Ser m£nester, to be necessary ;
must.— ilabcr menester, to want, to re-
quire, L. 30.
Mcnor, mai-7xdre', adj., less, smaller, minor,
younger ; s. m., minor. L. 20.
Monos, mai'-noce, adv., less. — A lo menos,
at least.— Ni mas mi menos, neither more
nor less. L. 16.
Menoscabo, mai-noce-kah' -Ix). s. m., deteri
oration, detriment, prejudice, diminu
tion. L. 02.
Meno«precio, mai-ndr.e-prai'-thl-d, s. m.,
contempt, scorn.— Mucha familiaridad es
can^ia de m^enosprecio. much familiarity
broeds contempt. L. 65.
Mente, main'-fni. s. f.. mind. L. 62.
Montir, m,ain-teer', to lie. L. 45.
Mcnudo, m.ai-r)00'-do, adj., small, slender,
mean.— A menvdf>. often. L. 25.
Mequetrefe, mai-kai-trai' -fed, s. m., trifler,
jackanapes. L. 63.
Mercader, mair kah-dair' . 8. m., dealer,
trader, shopkeeper. L. 52.
alercado, mair-kah' -do, s. m., market. L. 17.
20
Mercantil, mair-kan-teel' , adj., mercantile.
L,. 56.
Merecer, mai-rai-lhair' , to merit, to de-
serve. L. 52.
Mercndar, mai-rain-dar' , to lunch, L, 34.
Meridiano, mai-re-de-ah'-no, s. m., merid-
ian. L. 62.
Merino, mai-re'-no, s, m., merino (sort of
Spanish sheep). L. 40.
Merito, mcu'-re-to, s. m., merit. L. 55.
Mes, maiss, s. m., month.— Al mes, by the
month. L. 16.
Mesa, mai'-sa, s. f., table, L. 14,
Metal, mai-ial', s. m., metal. L. 62.
Meter, mai-tair', to put, to -^iacQ.— Meter
ruido, to make noise. L. 46.
MetOdico, mai-to'-de-ko, adj., methodical.
L. 35,
Metodo, mai' -to do. s. m., method. L. 47.
MelrOpolt, mai-tro' po-le, s. f., metropohs,
L. 51.
Mi, me, pron., me. L. 25.
Mi, poss. pron., my. L. 5.
Miedo, me-ai'~do, s. f., fear.— Tener miedo,
to be afraid. L. 25.
Miel, me-ail', e. f., honey. L. 65.
Miembro, me-aim'-bro, s. m., member, limb.
L. 62.
Miercoles, m6-air'-kd-laiss, s. m., Thursday.
L. 9.
Mil, 7neel, num. adj. and s. m., a thousand,
one thousand. L. 14.
Mi 11a, meel'-ya, s. f., mile. L. 62.
Millar, med-yar', s. m., the number of a
thousand, thousand. L. 40.
Millou, meel-yoae', num. adj. and s. m., mil-
lion.— J/eYto/i^ de pesos, millions of dol-
lars. L. 40.
Mineral, me-nai-ral' , s. m., mineral. L. 62.
Miniiscula, me-nooce'-koo-la, . adj., small
(said of letters), as opposed to capital.
L. ()2.
Minuto, ml-noo'-to, s. m., minute, L. 23.
Mio, mia, m'e'-d, me.' -a, poss. pron. and poss,
adj., mine, (As a poss. adj., mio is al-
ways placed after the substantive.) L. 13.
Mirar, me-rar', to look, to look at, to ob-
serve. L. 29.
Mismo, rmess'-mo, adj., same, self, self-
same.— El mismo, he himself. L. 27.
Mitad, ml-tath', s. f., half. L. 40.
Moda, mb'-da, s. f., fashion. L. 25.
Modelo, mo-dai'-lo, s. m., model. L. 55.
Moderacion, md-dai-rah-the-one' , s. f., mod-
eration. L. 65.
Modemo, mo-dair' -no, adj., modern. L. .52.
Modificar, mo-de-fe-kar', to modify. L. 61,
Modismo, mo-deess'-mo, s. m., peculiar
manner of expressing the same ideas
in the same language. L. 64.
Modo. mo'-do. s. m., mode, manner.— De
ningun modo. by no means.— De modo
one. so that. L. 42.
Molestar, mo-laiss-tar' . to molest, to dis-
turb. to trouble. L. 43.
Momento, mo-main'-to, s. m., moment. L.
62.
Mona. mo'-na. s. f., female monkey.— Aun-
que la mona se vista de seda. rnxma se
queda, a hog in armor is still but a hog.
L. 65.
Monarouico. mo-var'-kl-ko, adj., mooarchi-
cal. L. 35.
458
VOCABULARY.
Moneda, md-nai'-da, s. f., money, coin.—
Papt'l moneda^ paper money. L. 55.
Mouuir, mdiie-tar\ to mount, to ascend, to
ride (on horseback). L. Ga.
Monturaz, mbm-tah-ratk\ adj., mountain,
wild. L. 54.
Monte, inane' -lai, s. m., mountain.— ifa/ii^
dc piedad, pawn-office. L. 40.
Morder, /nore-dair', to bite, to nip.— No se
rnuerde \oa labios, he epeaks out hie mind.
L. ;3G.
Moribundo, rm-ri-boon'-do, adj., dying. L.
47.
Morir, md-reer\ to die. L. 41.
Mosca, moce'-ka, s. f., fly. L. 44.
Mostrar, 7ndce-irar\ to show. L. 35.
Motivo, mo-tl'-vo^ e. in., motive. L. 34.
Mover, md-vair\ to move. L. ;j6.
Mozo, rnO'-tho, s. m., youth, young man,
waiter. L. G2.
Muchacha, nioo-chah'-cha, b. f., girl. L. 6.
Muchaclio, moo-chali'-cho^ s. m., boy. L. 6.
Mucho, inoo'-clio, adj. and adv., much, a
great deal, very. L. 8.
Mudablc, nwo-dah'-blai, adj., mutable,
changeable, fickle. L. 49.
Mudar, moo-dar', to change.— 3/Mrfars(?. to
move (from one place to another). L. (iS.
Mucla, moo-ai'-la, s. f., back tooth.— Dolor
de muelas^ toothache. L. 50.
Muerte, moo-air' -tai, s. f., death. L. 38.
Muerto, moo-air'-lo^ past part, (of Mobik),
dead, killed. L. 52.
Muestra, moo-aiss' -tra, s. f., sample, sign.
L. 02.
Mujcr, moo-hair', s. f, woman, wife. L. 6.
Multitud, mool-tl-tooth\ s. f., multitude. L.
40.
Mundo, mwn'-do, s. m., world.— Todo el
innndOy everybody. L. 35.
Murmuracion, moor-moo-rah-th'S-dne' ^ b. f.,
murmuring, backbitinc:. L. C2.
Murinurar, mwr-moo-rar', to munnur, to
backbite. L. 02.
Mupco, moo-sai'-d, b. m., museum. L. 51.
Musica, 7noo'-s?-ka, s. f., mneic. L. 15.
Mu'^ico, moo'-sZ-ko^ a. m., musician. L. 15.
Muy, moo'-H^ very. L. 0.
N.
Nacer, nahthair', to be horn.— Xaeer de
pies, to be born to good luck. L. 62.
Nacion, na/i-f/i?-one', p. f., nation. L. 24.
Nada, nah'-da. adv., in no degree.— iVarfa
menos, nothing less. L. 11.
Nada, 8. f.. nothinsr. nononlitv. L. H.
Nadar, nah-dar', to swim. L. 53.
Narlie, vnh'-df-aU Ind. pron., nobody, no
one. L. 11.
Njipolof«. vnh'-pd-lnifm, b. f, Naples. L. 47.
Nnrnnja, vnh-ran'ha, e. f.. orange. L. 31.
Natnr.nl. r>nh-ton-raJ\ 8. m. and adj., natu-
rnl : native. T,. 44.
Natiirale7a, nah-too-rali-Iai'-tJia, b. f., na-
ture, li. 40.
Naturaliflta, nah-too-rah-leeM'-ta, s. m., na-
turalist. L. SO.
Navarra, nah-var'-ra, 8. f.. Navarre. L.
m.
N^vnrm. nnh.vnr'-ro. « ti., Xfudire-t' dm-
Uve of Navarre). L. .'i^.
Navegacion, nah-vai-gah-thi-dne' , b. f, navi-
gation. L. '^.
Navidad, naJt-i£-dat/i\ 8. f., nativity, Chriat-
mas. L. 43.
Navio, nah-ti'-d. 8. m., chip. L. 53.
Necesario, nai-l/iai-m/i'-te-6, adj., necea-
sary. L. 27.
Necesidad, nai-thai-(>l-dalh\ b. C, neceesity
need, want. L. 44.
Necesitar, nai-t/iai-tS-tar', to be necesBary
to neceseilate, to require, to want. L. 5*.
Necio, nai'-tke-o, adj. and s. m, foolit^h •
fool. L. 05. '
Nefas, nai'-fass.—Por fas 6 per n^of, right
or wrong. L. 63.
Negacion, nai-gahthl-dne', s.f., negation.
L. 02.
Negar, nai-gar'^ to deny, to refuse. L. 34.
Negativa, nai-qahte'-ia, b. I., negation, neg-
ative, refuea'l. L. 62.
Negligente, nai-glhhain'-tai, adj., negli-
gent. L. 50.
Negocio, nai-gd'-t/iS-d, b. m., buBincBS,
ahair, matter, L. 27.
Negro, nai'-gro, b. m. and adj., negro,- black.
L. 02.
Neutro, nai'-oo-tro, adj., neuter. L. C2.
Ncvar, nai-var', to Know. L. 80.
Ni, 7?2, conj.. neither, nor.—Ni mas ni m6-
no8, ncitlier more nor less. L. 8.
Nieve, itl-ai'-tai, b. f., enow. L. 30.
Ninguno, neen-gco'-no, prcn.j no one. no-
hody. —AingvTia coea. nothing. L. 11.
Nifia, neen'-ya, B.f., little girl, young girl,
maiden. L. 17.-
Nifio, neen'-yo, s. m., child, infant. L. 17.
No. adv., no, not. L. 1.
Noble, Jio'-Uai, adj., noble. L. 02.
Nobleza, iio-blai' tha, b. f., nobieneeB, no-
bility. L 65.
Noche, nd'-cfiai, b. f., evening, night.— Pue-
nas hccfifs, gcod evening, good ni^iht.—
Aoc/ie buena, Chrisimab eve. — AiiUhe,
last night. L. 23.
Nombrar, 7iotne-l/i'ar\ to name, to appoint.
L. 48.
Nombre, nome'-brai, b. m.. name, noun.—
h'cvibre propio, proper name, proper
noun. L. 40.
Nominativo, iw-ml-nah-tl'-tOy s. m., nomi-
native. L. 62.
Nono. (See Novzno.) L. 15.
No obstante, voZtc-dan' -tai, adv., never-
theless, notM'ithelanding, however. L. 54.
Nolle, ndre'-iai, s. m., north. L. 22.
Nop. noce, pers. pron., ub. to us. L. 26.
Nosotros, nd-sD'-troc(, pron., we, oureelvee.
L. 1. , ^
Nota, nd'-ta. p. f., note. L. 62.
Notar. n^-tar', 1o note, to observe. L 58
Noticia, vr-tr-thha, s. f., notice, nev^e, pi.,
NoveciontoP. vti-rai-fhi-ain'-tOce, num. adj.,
nine hundred. I-. 14. , ♦rnnble
Novoriad, v^vat-datfi', ex, novelty, trouble.
NoVc'la', nd-vai'-ia. e. f., novel, romance. L.
R2 J in
Novono, nd-rai'-no, ord. a^. and s. m-
ninth. L. 15. . ♦„ T
Noveuta. nd-vatn'-ta, num. adj., ninety, i^
14.
VOCABULARY.
459
Noviembre, nd-v^-aim'-brai, s. m., Novem-
ber. L. 24.
Nue.4ro, noo-aiss'-tro. pose, pron., our, ours.
L. 13.
Nueva, noo-at'-va, s. f., news (generally
used in the pi). L. 60.
Nueva York, noo-ai'-va, s, f., New York.
L. 9.
Nueve, noo-ai'-vai, num. adj., nine. L. 14.
Nuevo, noo-ai'-vo, adj., new.— De nuevo,
anew. L. 21.
Nuez, noo-aith\ s. f., walnut. L. 40.
Numeral, noo-mcd-rcU', adj., numeral. L.
14.
Numero, noo'-mai-ro, a.m., number.— i Que
numero tiene su casa de V. ? what is tlie
number of your house ? L. 14.
Nunca, noon'-ka, adv., never. L. 25.
O.
O, conj., or, either. L. 8.
O ! inter., oh ! L. 39.
Obedecer, o-bai-dai-thair' , to obey. L. 48.
Objetivo, obe-hai-te' -vo, adj. and s, m., ob-
jective. L. 62.
Objeto, obe-hai'-to^ s. m., object. L. 48.
Obiiijacion, o-bll-gah-lh^-dite' , s. f., obliga-
tion, duty. L. 24.
Obligar, d-ble-gar\ to oblige, to force, to
compel. L. 61.
Obra, o'-bra, s. f., work (any thing made, as
a book, a house, &c.). L. 15.
Obrar, d-brar\ to work,' to act, to operate.
L 40.
Ob3c?rvar, dbe-sair-var\ to observe, to re-
mark. L. 48.
Obstante, obestan'-tai, present part.— No
obstante. (See no obstante.) L. 54.
Obvio, obe'-vl-o, adj., obvious. L. 43.
Ocasion, o-kah.-se-bm\ s. f,, occasion, oppor-
tunity.— Tomar isiocasion por los cabsllos,
to take time by the forelock. L. 39.
Occidente, oke-the-dain'-lai, s. m., the west.
L 51.
Ochenta, 5-cAam'-^a, num. adj., eighty. L.
Ocho, o'-cho, num. adj., eight. L. 14.
Ochocientos, o-cho-thl-ain' -toce^ num. adj.,
ei'.?ht hundred. L. 14.
Octavo, oke-tah'-vo, ord. adj., eighth.— Eu
octavo, 8vo. L. 15.
Octubre, oke-too' -brai^ s. m., October. L
24.
Ocultar, b kool-tar', to hide. L. 48.
Oculto, b-lcool'-to, adj., hidden. L. 52.
Ocupacion, bkoo-pah-thl-bne\ s. f., occupa-
tion, business, concern. L. 54.
Ocupar, b-koo-par', to occupy, to engage, to
fill (a post). L. 47.
Ocurrir, b-koor-reer\ to occur, to strike.—
- Le ocurre una idea, an idea strikes him.
L. 62.
Oeste, b-aiss'-tai, s. m., west. L. .51.
Ofender, b-Jam-dair', to offend. L. 27.
Oficio, b-je'-tM-o., s. m., office, employ,
trade. L. 38.
Ofrecer, b-frai-lJiair\ to offer L. 49.
Oido, b-l'-do, s. m., hearing, ear.— Hablar al
oido, to whisper in one's ear. L. 61.
Oir, b-eer\ to hear.— (Jeja ! just listen ! L.
41.
Ojalal bhah4a\ inter., would to God I L.
37.
Ojo, b'ho^ s. m., eye. L. 29.
Oler, b-lair\ to smell. L. 41.
Oll'ato, ble-fah'-lo, s. m., the sense of smell.
L. 61.
011a, bte'-ya, s. f., earthen j^oi.— OUa podri-
da, Spanish mixed dish of meats, vegeta-
bles, &c., cooked together. L. 62.
Olor, b-lbre\ s. m., odor, scent, smell. L. 62.
Olivar, b-ll-var\ s. m., olive ground. L. 63.
Olvidar, ble-ve-dar', to forget. L. 40.
Omnibus, brne' -nl-hooce., s. m., omnibus.
L. 51.
Once, bm'-thai, num. adj., eleven.— Hacer
las orice, to lunch about noon. L. 14.
Opera, b'-pai-ra, s. f., opera. L. 25.
Opinion, b-pe-ne-bm' , s. f., opinion. L. 42.
Oponer, b-pb-nair\ to oppose. L. 51.
Optimo, bpe' tS-mo, adj., best, extremely
good. L. 21.
Opuesto, b-pwaiss'-to, adj., opposite, op-
Eosed. (Irreg. past. part, of Oponer.)
.52.
Oracion, b-rah-the-bne\ s. f., prayer, speech,
discourse. L. 45.
Orden, bre'-dain, s. m. and f., order.— A la
orderi de V., at your service. L. 39.
Ordenar, bre-dai-iiar' , to order, to com-
mand. L. 51.
Organista, bre-gah-neess' -ta, s. m., organist.
L. 36.
Oriente, b-rl-aia' -tai, east. L. 51.
Oro, 5'-ro, 8. m., gold.— No es oro todo lo
que reluce, all is not gold that glitters.
L. 8.
Os, bee, pron., you (objective of verbs). L.
26.
0%\A<yi\^bcethbne' ,%.vci. (SeeOsTEA.) L.62.
Ostra, bce'-tra, s. f., oyster. L. 62.
Otono, b-tbne'-yo., s, m., autumn, fall. L. 24.
Otro, b'-tro., indef. pron., other, another,
L. 18.
Oveja, b-vai' ha, s. f., sheep. L. 65.
Ox ! blcs, inter, used to frighten off" fowls,
&c. L. 46.
P.
Paca, pah'-ka, s. f., Fanny. L. 44.
Paciencia, pah-tM-ain' -ihe-a, s. f., patience.
L. 63.
Paco, pah'-ko, s. m., (contraction of Fran-
cisco, Francis), Frank. L. 44.
Padeccr, pah-dai4hair\ to suffer pain. L.
47.
Padrastro, pah-drass' -tro, s. m., step-father.
L. 49.
Padre, 7?«A'-c?m^, s. m., father.— Parirenuea-
tro, the Lord's prayer. L. 6 and 45.
Pagar, pah-gar', to pay. L. 14.
Pagare, pah-gah-rai' , s. m., (comm.) prom-
issory note. L. 59.
Pasma, pah'he-na., s. f., page (of a book,
&c.). L. 50.
Pais, pah-eess', s. m., country.— i Cuanto
licmpo hace que esta V. en este pai^f
how long have you been in this country ?
L. 19.
Paisano, pah-l-sah' -no, e. m., countryman
(one from the same country). L. 50.
Paja, pah'-ha, s. f., straw. L. 63.
460
VOCABULARY.
Pajaro, paJi' -hah-ro, s. m., bird. L. 48.
Pajurraco, pafi-har-rah' -kOy s. m., (aug. of
Pajaro), an u;,'ly, clumsy bird. L. 49.
Palabra, pah-lak' -bra, s. f., word, promise.
—PakUtras may ores, oflensive words. L.
1.5 and G5.
Palacio, pahlah'-tM-o, s. m., palace. L.
48.
Palanf,'ana,;)a/i-/aw-fii'a/i'-na, s. f., washbowl.
L. 46.
Palo, pah'-lo, s. m., stick of wood. L. 62.
Pan. pan, s. m., bread, loaf. L. 7.
Panaderla, pah-rmh-dai-rl' -a, s. f., bakery.
L. 11.
Panadero, pah-nah-dai' -ro, 8. m., baker.
L. 11.
Pantalon, pan-tah-ldne\ s. m., pantaloons,
trousers. L. 17.
Pano, pan'-yo, s. m., cloth. L. 62.
Pafuiclo, pxin-yoo-ai'-lo, s. m., pocket-Iiand-
kerchief. L. 5.
Papa, pah-pa\ s. m., papa. L. 5.
Papel, pak-jmW, s. m., paper, part (in a
play).— Ilacer papel, to cut a figure. L. 4.
Paquito, pah-kl'-to, s. m., (contraction of
Francisco, Francis), Franky. L. 44.
Par, par, s. m., pair, couple. L. 40.
Para, pah'-ra, prep., for, to, in order to,
toward.— Tiene una carta /jora V., he has
a letter for you.— Esta para partir, he is
about to set out. L. 19.
Parabien, pah-rah-hl-ain' , s. m., congratu-
lation, compliment.— Dar el parabien, to
congratulate. L. 62.
Pariiguas, pah-rah'-gwass, s. m., umbrella.
L. 50.
Parar, pah-rar', to stop, to end (in). L. 51.
Parasol, pah-rah-fole' , s. m., parasol. L. 50.
Parecer, pah-rai-lkair' , to appear, to seem.
L. .30.
Pared, pah-raith' , s. f.^ wall. L. 50.
Paris, pah-reess', s. m., Paris. L. 12.
Parque, par'-kai, s. m., park. L. 17.
Parte, par'tai, s. f., part.— Alguna parte,
somewhere.— Ninguna parte, nowhere.—
I)e ocho dias ji esta parte, for the last
eight davs;- 8. m., message, dispatch,
information. L. 27. '
Participar, par-tMhi-par' , to participate, to
partake. L. 57.
Participio, par-li-tM'-pl-d, s. m., partici-
ple. L. 43.
Particula, par-tl'-hoo-la, s. f., particle. L.
50.
Particular, par-tS-koo-tar', adj., particular,
private. L. 49.
Partida, jmr-tl'-da, s. f., departure. L. 42.
Partir. par-teer', to depart, to set out, to
divide, to split. L. 19.
Piirtitivo, par-ilti'-vo, a4j., partitive. L.
6!).
Pasaie, pah-,<>ah'-hai, b. m., passage, fare.
L. .'iS and 63.
Pasar, pah-sar', to pass, to go (from place
to place). L 16.
Pascua, j)af^s' kwa, s. f., Easter. L. 59.
Paseante, pah sai-an'-iai. s. m., passerby,
walker, promenader. (Pres. part, of Pa-
sear.) L. :58.
Pascar, jmh-sai-ar' , to walk, to promenade.
L. M.
Paseo, pah-sai'-o, ». m., walk, promenade.
J.. 51.
Pasiva, pah-sl'-va, b. f., the passive voice
L. 50.
Pasivo, pah-cd'-vo, adj., passive. L. 63.
Paso, pah'-so, s. m., step, pace. L. 54.
Patio, pah'-tl-o, s. m., yard, pit (in theatres).
L. 46.
Patronimico, pah-trO-nl'-mi-ko, adj., patro-
nymic. L. 49.
Paz, path, s. f., peace. L. 43.
Pecho, pai'-cho, s. m., breast.— A lo hecho
pecho, what is done cannot be he'ped. L.
65.
Pechuga, pai-choo'-ga, s. f., breast of fowl
L. 58.
Pedazo, pai-dah'-tlw, s. m., piece, morsel.
bit. L. 63.
Pedir, pai-deer', to ask, to demand, to ask
iov.—A.pedir dc boca, as well as could be
desired. L. 39.
Pedro, pai'-dro, s. m.j Peter. L. 19.
Pegar, pai-gar', to stick, to paste, to beat
L. 63.
Peinar, pai-Z-nar', to comb. L. 46.
Peine, pai-e'-nai, s. m., comb. L. 46.
Peligro, pai-lS'-gro, sr. m., danger, peril. L.
51.
Pelo, pai'-lo, s. m., hair.— A pelo, to the
purpose. L. 33 and 44.
Pelota, pai-lO'-ta, s. f., ball (for playing).
L. 54.
Pena, pai'-na, s. f., pain, penalty.— A duras
pcnOr", with mnchdifiicult}-. L. 59.
Pensamiento, pain-saJi-vi6-ain'-to, s. m.,
thought. L. 48.
Pensar, /?ai/?-sar', to think, to intend. L.
31.
Ponultimo, pai-noot' -ti-mo, adj., penulti
mate, last but one. L. 50.
Penasco, pain-yass'-ko, s. m., a large rock.
L. 5().
Pcor, pai-Ore', adj. and adv., worse. L. 20.
Pepa, pai'-pa, s. f., (contraction of Fean-
ciscA, Frances), Fanny. L. 44.
Pepe. (See Pepito.) L. 44.
Pepito, pai-pi'-to, s. m. (contraction of
JcsE, tfoseph), Joe. L. 44.
Pequeilo, pai-kain'-yo, adj., Bmall, llttl",
youn^. L. 7.
Per, jHiir, Latin prep, used in Spanish as a
prefix only ; as, jxrtitrbar. L. 50.
Pera. pai'-ra, s. f., pear. L. 59.
PcraJ, pai-ral', s. m., pear-tree. L. 59.
Perder, pair-dair', to lose. L. 37.
Perdonar, pair-do-nar' , to pardon. L. 27.
Perczoeo, pai-rai-lho'-so, adj., lazy, sloth
fUl. L. 38.
Perfeccionar. pair-faik-thi-d-nar', to per-
fect, to improve. L. 38.
Perfecto, patr-faik'-to, nc\j., perfect. L. 29.
Perilla, pai-reel'-ya, s. f.. small pear.— Ve-
nir de pertUa, to suit exactly. L. 64.
Peri6dico, pai-ri-O'-ili-ko, s. m., newspaper.
L. 8.
Permanecer, pair-mah-nai-thair' , to re-
main, to stop, to stay. L. 45.
Permanoncia, pair-mah-nain'-th?-a, b. f.,
permanence, duration, stop. stay. L. 51.
Permitir, pair-mi-teer' , to permit, to allow.
L. 44.
Pcro, /xti'-ro, conj., but. L. 3.
Perpendicular, jxiir-pain-di-kochlar' , adj.
perpendicular. L. 51.
Perro, pair'-ro, s. m., dog. L. 03.
VOCABULARY.
461
Perseverancia, pair-sai-vai-ran'-thl-a, s. f.,
perseverance. L. 63.
Persistir, pair-seess-teer' , to persist. L. 50.
Persona, pair-so'-na, s. f., person. L. 38.
Personal, pair-sd-nal\ adj., personal. L.
63.
Pesa, pai'-sa, s. t, weight (for weighing).
L. 55.
Pesame, pai'-sa/i-mal, s. m., condolence.
Jj. — .
Pesar, pai-mr\ to weigh, to regret.— No le
pesa de haber nocido, he has an excellent
opinion of himself. L. 31.
Pesar, s. m., regret, grief, sorrow.— A ^jesar
de, in spite ot, notwithstanding. L. 31.
Pescado, paiss-kah'-do, s. m., fish. L. 7.
Pescar, pcUss-kar\ to fish. L. 63.
Pesimo, pai'-se-mo, adj., worst, very bad.
L. 21.
Peso, /?a^'-so, s. m., weight, heaviness, dol-
lar. L. 14.
Pianista, pl-ah-neess' -ta, s. m,, pianist. L.
15.
Piano, pe-ah'-no, s. m., piano. L. 15.
Picante, pe-kan'-tai, adj., piquant, high-
seasoned, pungent. L. 54.
Picar, pe-kar\ to prick, to bite, to pique.
L. 46.
Picaresco, pe-kah-raiss'-ko, adj., roguish,
L.-19.
Picaro, pe'-kah-ro, adj., rogue, rascal,
scoundrel. L. 32.
Pico, pe'-ko^ 8. m., beak, bill.— Callarse el
pico, to hold one's tongue. L. 61.
Pie, pS-ai\ s. m., foot.— A pie, on foot.—
Nacer de pies, to be born to good luck.
L. 39.
Pierna, pS-air'-na, a. f., leg. L. 33.
Picza, pe-ai'-tha, s. f., piece. L. 64.
Pinar, pe-nar\ s. m., pme-^rove. L. 49.
Pino, pe'-no, s. m., pine. L, 40.
Pintar, peen-iar\ to paint, to represent. L.
54.
Pintor, peen-tore\ s. m., painter. L. 31.
Pintura, peen-ioo'-ra, s. f., painting. L. 31.
Pipa, pe'-pa, s. f., pipe. L. 42.
Pique, pe'-kai, s. m., pique, oflence.— Esta-
bia piqi/e de perderse, he was on the brink
of ruin. L. 62.
Piropos (Decir) pS-ro'-pdce, to say soft
things (to the ladies). L. 58.
Pisaverde, pe-safi-vair'-dai, s. m., fop, cox-
comb. L. 50.
Piso, pe'-so, 8. m., floor, story (of a house).
— Tercer plso, third floor. L. 53.
Pistola, peess-to' -la, s. f., pistol. L. 44.
Pistoletazo, mess-io-lai-tah'-tho, s. m., pis-
tol-shot. L. 44.
Placer, plah-thair', to please. L. 31.
Placer, s. m., pleasure. L. 31.
Plata, plah'-ta, s. f., silver. L. 8.
Plato, plah'-to, s, m., plate, dish (of viands).
Li. 57.
Plaza, plah' tha, s. f, place, situation,
square, market-place.— Pto^a de toros.
Arena (for bull-fights). L. 17 and 54.
Plazo, plah'-tho, s. m., term (of payment).
L. 63.
Plomo, ptb'-mo, 8. m., lead. L. 63.
Pluraa, ploo-wa, s. f., pen, feather. L. 5.
Plural, ploo-rnl', adj., plural. L. 57.
Plnscuamperfecto. ptooce-ktvam-pair-faik'-
to, 8. m,, pluperfect. L. 43.
Pobre, pd'-t^rai, adj., poor, needy, wretched.
L. 13.
Pobreza, po-brai' -tha, s. f., poverty. L 59
Poco, po'-ko, adv., little ; pi., few.— Poco a
poco, gently, softly. L. 32.
Poco, 8. m., little. L. 6.
Poder, po-dair', to be able.— No poder mas,
to be exhausted. L. 32.
Poder, 8. m., power, possession. L. 35.
Podrir, po-dreer' , to rot. L. 41.
Poesia, pc-ai-se'-a, s. f., poesy, poetry, L.
Poeta, po-ai'-ta, s. m., poet. L. 31.
Poetastro, po-ai-tass' -tro, s. m., poetaster.
L. 44.
Poetico, po-ai'-il-ko, adj., poetic, poetical.
L. 35.
Polca, pote'-ka, s. f., polka. L. 23.
Politica, po-te'-tl-ka, s. f., politics ; polite-
ness. L. 52.
Politico, po-le'-f^-ko, adj., political; polite.
L. 52.
Politico, s. m., man of politics. L. 52.
Polio, pole'-yo, s. m., chicken. L. 5.
Polvo, pole'-vo, s. m., powder, dust. L. 62.
Polvora, pole'-vo-ra, s. f., gunpowder, h. 63.
Ponderar, pone-dai-rar' , to exaggerate, to
cry up. L. 54.
Poner, po-nair', to put, to place, to lay, to
set (as the s\m).—P(merse, to become, to
get.— Se puso serio, he became serious.
L. 41.
Por, pore, prep., by, for, in behalf of, in fa-
vor of, about, through.— Por las calles,
through the streets.— Ir por pan, to go
for bread.— Por si acaso, in case, if by any
chance. L. 19.
Porcion, pore-lhl-one' , s. f., portion, part,
lot, number, quantity. L. 63.
Pormenor, pore-mai-nore' , s. m. (generally
used in the plural).— Por»^moreA^ details,
particulars. L. 50.
Porque, pore'-kai, conj., because. L. 18.
Porque, pore-kai', conj., why ? for what
reason V- s. m., reason wherefore. L. 18.
Portarse, pore-tar' -sai, to behave, to conduct
one's self. L. 55.
Portugal, pdre-too-gal\ s. m., Portugal. L.
60.
Portugues, pdre-too-ghaiss' ^. m. and adj.,
Portuguese (language), Portuguese (na-
tive of Portugal). L. 34.
Poseer, po-sai-atr', to possess. L, 34.
Posesivo, po-sai-sl'-vo, adj., possessive. L.
63.
Posible, po-se'-blai, adj., possible. L. 31.
Positivo, po-fMe'-vo, adj., positive. L. 48.
Posponer, poce-po-nazr' , to postpone, to
place after. L. 63.
Potencial, po-iain-ihe-at' , adj., potential.
L. 63.
Practica, prak'-tl-la, s. f., practice. L. 23.
Practicante, »ra^-<e-A:an'-to, e. m., practi-
tioner. (Present part, of Pkacticak.)
L. 38.
Practicar, prak-tl-kar' , to practise. L. 23.
Practico, prak'4l-ko, adj., practical. L. 65.
Pre, prai, Latin prep, used in Spanish as a
prefix only. L. 50.
Preceder, prai-thai-dair' , to precede, to go
before. L. 63.
Precepto, prai-thaip' -to, s. m., precept. L.
53.
462
VOCABULARY.
Precio, prai'-thl-dy s. m., price, prize. L. 50.
Prcciso, prai-tkl' -so, adj., nccer<sary, oblig-
atory, precise.— Es preclso que la leau,
they must read it. L. G3.
Preferir, prai-fai-reer\ to prefer. L. 38.
Prei^unta, pral-goon' -ta, e. f., question, in-
quiry. L. 33.
Preguntar, prai-goon-tar\ to ask questions,
to question. L. 33.
Preliminar, prai-ld-m^-nar' , adj., prelimi-
nary. L. 63.
Premiar, prai-tnl-ar', to reward. L. b2.
Premio, prai'-7tiS-(}, a. m., premium, reward,
prize. L. 59.
Prenda, prain'-da, s. f., pledj^e, jewel ; pi.,
endowments, talents, parts. L. 41, 03.
Prender, prain-(lair\ to take, to take up, to
arrest. L. 39.
Preposicion, prai-pd-sS-tM-dne\ preposi-
tion. L. 43.
Presencia, prai-sain' -tM-a, s. f., presence. —
Presencia de animo, presence of mind.
L. (53.
Prcsentar, prai-sain-tar' , to present, to in-
troduce, to offer. L. 39.
Presente, prai-min'taU adj., present.— Te-
ner pre>iente, to bear in raind. L. 43,
Presidente, prai-sS-dain'-tai, s. m., presi-
dent. L. 4G.
Presidio, prai-s?'-dS-d, s. m., state prison.
L. 59.
rrc-«idir, prai-s^-deer\ to preside. L. 54.
Preso, prai'-sOy irre^. past part, (of Pren-
der), taken. L. 52.
Prestar, pram-tar\ to lend. L. 59.
Presto, praiss'-to, adj., quick, ready,
prompt. L. 20,
Presto, adv., soon, quickly. L. 20.
Pretender, prai-tam-dair', to pretend, to
lay claim to, to claim, to solicit, L. 48.
Pretension, prai-fain-s^-dne', s. f, preten-
sion, claim, thins? solicited. L. 57.
Prcterito, lyrai-tai' -rl-to, adj., preterit, L.
m.
Pretesto, prai-talss'-to, s. m., pretext. L.
58.
Prevenir, prai-vai-neer\ to prevent, to fore-
see, to warn, to prepare. L. 65.
Prever, prai-vai>-\ to foresee. L. 39.
Prlmavera, pri-mah-vai'-ra, b. f., Spring.
Primcro, pr^-mai'-ro. adj., first.- De buenas
dprimef'os, all at once, rashly.— adv., first,
rather, sooner. L. 15.
Primo, prd'-mo, ». m., cousin. L. 13.
Principal, preen-tM-pal\ adj., principal,
cliief. L. 36.
Principiante, preen-(M-p^-an'-fai, s. m. and
pres. part, (of Principiar), beginner. L.
;J8.
Principiar, preen-tM-phar\ to begin, to
commence. L. 23.
Principio, preen-fhF-pS-o, s. m., be':!:inning,
commencement, principle. L. 63.
Prisa, pr?'-sa, a. f. haste, hurry.— Tener
prh'a, to ba in a hurry. L. 30.
Prisionero, pri-ol-d-tuii'-ro, s. m., prisoner.
L. 48.
Prisma, preefn'-ma, p. m., prism. li. 54.
Probable, prd-bah' -blaL adj., probable. L.
29.
Probar, prd-bar\ to try, to prove, to taste.
—El clima de es>te palsle prueba blen, the
climate of this country agrees well with
him. L. 35.
Vrocti^'ion, irrd-thai-sl-dne' , 8. f., processioa
L. 46.
Procurar, pro-koo-rar\ to procure, to en-
deavor, to try. L. 51.
Produccion, prb-'iook-Uil-bn£\ s. f., produc-
tion, L. 4U.
Prcjducir, pro-doo-theer', to produce. L. 40,
Proeza, prb-ai' -Ika, s. f, prowess. L. 54.
Profccia, prb-fai-tkl' -a^ b. f,, prophecy, L.
45.
Profesion, pro-fai-8l-dne\ s, f. , profession.
L. 38.
Profesor, pro-fai-8dre\ s, m,, professor, JL
18.
Prohibir, prb-l-beer\ to prohibit. L. 53.
Pr6jimo, prb'-hl-mo^ s, m., neighbor (fellow-
creature). L. 28.
Promesa, prb-mai'-sa, b, f., promise. L. 57.
Prometer, pr5-mai-tair\ to promise. L. 25.
Pronombre, prb-nJbme' -braU s, m,, pronoun.
L. 43.
Pronominal, pr5-nd-Tru--nal\ adj., pronomi-
nal, L. 61.
Prontitud, prbne-tMooth\ s. f., promptness,
promptitude, quickness. L. 4.3.
Pronto, j!7r5M^'-to,adj., prompt, quick, ready;
—adj., soon, promptly, quickly. L. 20.
Pronunciacion, prb-noon-thl-ah-lM-bm\ b.
f., pronunciation. L. 63.
Pronunciar, prb-ivoon-th^-ar' . to pronounce,
L. 15.
Propiedad, prd-pi-ai-dath\ s. f., propriety,
property. L. 6;3.
Propio, pro'-pi-b, adj., proper, own, self-
same, same. L. 49.
Proponer, prd-pb-nair\ to propose, L. 51,
Prosa, pro -sa, s. f., prose. L. 31.
Proporcionar, pro-pdre-thl-b-nur\ to pro-
portion, to procure, to offer. L. 48.
Protcstante, pro-taiss-tan'-tai, s. m., Prot-
estant. L. 49.
Protestantismo, prb-taiss-tan-teess'-mo, s.
m., Protestantism. L. 49.
Provecho, prb-vai'-cho, s. m., profit, benefit.
L.W,
Proveer, pr5-vai-air' to provide. L. 34.
Proverbio, prb-vair -bi-d. s. m., proverb.
L. 6.5.
Provincia, prd-veen'-tM-a, s. f., province.
L. 19.
Provisto, prb-veess'-to, past part, (of Pro-
veer), provided. L. 52.
Pr6ximo, prbke' -si-mo, adj., proximo, next,
nearest.- El mhado proximo, next Satur-
day. L. 2.3.
Pnidencia, proo-dain'-tfii-a, s. f., prudence.
L. *1.
Pnidente, proo-dain'-tal, adj., prudent. L.
20.
Prueba, proo-ai'-ba, s, f.. proof, L. 46.
Prnsln. proo'-s?-a, s. f , Prussia. L. 46.
Pn))licar, poo-ftti-kar' , to publish. L. 48.
Pfiblico, poo'-bti-ko, s. m. and adj., publi
L. 51.
Pueblo, pwni'-bh, s. m., town, people, L. :.
Piierta. pwair'-ta. s. f . door. L. 27.
Puos. piraisn, coni., then, therefore, in '
much as, since, because :— inter., well :—
Pwft*, qud ? well, what of it ? L. 41.
Pucsto que. ptraif^'-fo. adv., since, inas-
much as, supposing that. L. 87.
VOCABULARY.
463
Pulgada, pool-gah'-da, s. f. inch. L. 63.
Puntapie, pooii-tah-pe,-ai\ s. m., kick. L. 50.
Puuta, poon'-ta, poiut, stitch. L. 50.
Puntilla, poan-teel' -ya^ s. f., small point.—
Do puntiUas, on tiptoe. L. 44.
Punio, poon'-to^ s. m., point (of time or
space), spot, place.— Al punto, at once.
L. 51.
Punluacion, poon-too-ah-the-dne\ s. f., punc-
tuation. L. 63.
Puutual, poon-too-aV ^ adj., punctual, exact,
accurate. L. 63.
Puntualidad, poon-too-ah-U-dath\ s. f.,
punctuality. L. 63.
Purista, poo-reess' -ta^ s. m., purist. L. 36.
a.
Que, Jcai, rel. pron., that, which, who.—
;Que bueno ! how ^ood \—jQue desgracia !
what a misfortune!— §w<s venga, let him
come.— s Que se dice de bueno ? what is
the good news ? — Tarde grue temprano,
sooner or later. L. 3, 16, 17.
Quebrar, kai-brar\ to break, to smash. L.
;m.
Quedar, Tcai-dar', to stay, to stop, to re-
main, to become.— El campo quedo por
los Americanos, the Americans were vic-
torious. L. 38.
Quejarse, Mi-har'-sai, to moan, to com-
plain. L. 48.
Quemar. kai-mar\ to bum. L. 32.
Querer, kai-rair\ to wish, to desire, to will,
to love, to like, to be willing. L. 13.
Querido, kai-re'-do, adj., dear. (Past part.
of QUEBER.) L. 13.
Queso, kai'-so, s, m., cheese. L. 7.
Quien, ke-ain', rel. pron., who, whom. L.
17.
Quienquiera, M-ain-ke-ai'-ra, indef. pron.,
whosoever. L. 50.
Quieto, kl-ai'-to. adj., quiet, still, at rest.
L. 62. .
Quijada, kl-7iah'-da, s. f, jaw. L. 50.
Quince, keen'-thai^ num. adj., fifteen. L. 14,
Quinientos, kl-ne-ain' -toce, adj., five hun-
dred. L. 14.
Quinto, keen' -to, ord. adj. and s. m., fifth.
L. 50.
Qui tar, k^-tar\ to remove, to take away,
ofl", out ; to prevent. L. 53.
Quitasol, ki-tah-sole\ s. m., parasol. L. 50.
Quiza, quizas, ke-thah\ -thass\ adv., per-
haps. L. 34.
R.
Radical, rah-de-kal\ adj., radical. L. 63.
Raiz, rah-eeth\ s. f., root. L. 63.
Rama, rah' -ma, s. f., branch (of trees, fami-
lies, &c.) L. 61.
Ramillete, rah-med-yai' -tai, s. m., bouquet.
L. 27.
Ramo, rah'-mo, e. m., branch, department.
L. .56.
Rana, rah'-na, s. f., frog.— No ser rana, to
be wide awake, expert. L. 65.
Kapaza, rah-pah' -tha, s. f., little girl.— jMi-
ren la rapazuda ! the little vixen ! L. 61.
Baro, rah'-ro, adj., rare, odd, curious,
scarce. L. 63.
Rasgar, rass-gar', to tear, to scratch. L. 64.
Rasgo, rass'-go, s. m., trait, stroke, in-
stance. L. 63.
Rato, rah'-to, s. m., while, moment.— A ra-
tos, from time to time. L. 44.
Raton, rah-tone', s. m., mouse. L. 65.
llaya, rah'-ya, s. f., stroke, dasli.— Tener a
raya, to keep within bounds. L. 64.
Rayo, rah'-yo, s. m., ray, thunderbolt.—
Echar rayos y centellas, to foam with
rage. L. 62 and 63.
Razon, rah-thone', s. f, reason, right.-^
Tener razon, to be right. L. 25.
Razonar, rah-tho-nar' , to reason. L. 63.
Re, rai, always used as a prefix. L. 50.
Real, rai-al', adj., real, royal;— s.m., real
(Spanish coin). L. 47 and 48.
Realidad, rai-ah-le-dath' , s. f., reality. L.
48.
Rebajar, rai-bah-har' , to reduce, to abate,
to lower (prices, &c.). L. 64.
Rebanada, rai-bah-nah'-da, s. f., slice (of
bread, &c.). L. 63.
Rebanar, rai-bali-nar' , to slice. L. 64.
Rebafio, rai-ban'-yo, s. m., flock of sheep.
L. 40.
Eecado, rai-kah'-do, s. m., message, errand.
L. 63.
Recepcion, rai-thaip-the-one' , s. f., recep-
tion. L. 54.
Recibimiento, rai-thl-bl-m^-ain' -to, s, m.,
act of receiving, reception. L. 55.
Recibir, rai-tlie-6eer' , to receive. L. 8.
B,ec\\>o,rai-the'-bo, s. m., receipt. L. 63.
Reciproco, rai-thl' -prb-ko, adj., reciprocal.
L. 63.
Recitar, rai-ihe-tar' , to recite. L. 64.
Recomendacion, rai-ko -main-dah-tlil-dne' ,
s. f., recommendation. L. 60.
Recomendar, rai-k^-main-dar' , to recom-
mend. L. 64.
Reconocer, rai-ko-no-thair' , to recognize,
to acknowledge. L. 39.
Recordar, rai-kore-dar' , to remember, to
remind. L. 35.
Recto, raik'-to, adj., right.- En angulos
rectos, at right angles. X. 55.
Rector, raik-tore', s. m., rector, director.
L. 63.
Recurrir, rai-koor-reer' , to recur, to have re-
course. L. 50.
Recurso, rai-koor'-so, s. m., recourse, re-
source. L. 40.
Reducir, rai-doo-theer' , to reduce. L. 54.
Referir, rai-fai-reer', to refer, to relate. L.
&4.
Reflexivo, rai-flaik-sl'-vo, adj., reflective.
L. 63.
Reflexionar, rai-flaik-se-o-nar' , to reflect.
L. 48.
Reforma, rai-fore'-ma, s. f., reform, refor-
mation. L. 63.
Reformar, rai-f ore-mar' , to reform, to form
anew, to discharge (from an employment
or ofl^ce). L. 48.
Refran, rai-Jran', s. m,, refrain, proverb.
L. 63 and 65.
Resralar, rai-gah-lar' , to regale, to present
with, to make a present of. L. 63.
Recralo, rai-gah'-lo, s. m., gift, present. L.
63,
Regimen, ro,i' -M-main, s. m., regimen, gov-
ernment, object (of verbs). L. 57.
464
VOCABULARY.
Rcgimiento, raiM-mZ-ain'-to, s. m., regi-
meut. L. 19.
Regir, rai-heer\ to govern. L. 57.
Regla, raig'-la, s. f., rule, ruler. L. 63.
Rei,'ular, rai-goo-lar' , adj., re^^ular, tolera-
ble, moderate, ordinary ;— adv., tolerably,
middling ;— v., to regulate. L. 27, 67, and
01.
Regularidad, rai-goo-lah-rl-dath\ b. f., regu-
larity. L. 55.
Regularizar, rai-goo-lah-rl-thar\ to regu-
late. L. 48.
Rehusar, rai-oo-sar'. to refuse. L. 61.
Reina, rai-S'-na, e. f., queen. L. 63.
Reinante, rai-l-nan'-tai^ pres. part., reign-
ing. L. 38.
Reinar, rai-l-nar\ to reign. L. 15.
Reino, rai-l'-no, s. m., kingdom. L. 45.
Reir, rcu-eer\ to laugh. L. 41.
Relacion, rai-lah-the-om' , s. f., relation, ac-
count, recital. L. 43.
Relampago, rai-lam' -pah-go, e. m., flasli of
lightning. L. 63.
Relanipaguear, rai-lam-pah-gai-ar\ to
lighten, L. 30.
Rclalar, rai-lah-tar' , to relate. L. 45.
Religion, rai-lS-M-one', s. f., religion. L.
35.
Religioso, rai-H-hl-o'-so, adj., religious. L.
35.
Reloj, rai-lo\ s. m., watch, clock. L. 28.
Relojcro, rai-lo-hai'-ro, b. m., watchmaker.
L. 63.
Relucir, rai-loo-theer' , to sparkle, to glitter.
—No es oro todo lo que reluce, allis not
gold that glitters. L 65.
Remcdiar, rai-mai-d^-ar\ to remedy. L. 64.
Remedio, rai-mai'-dS-o, s. m., remedy. L.
53.
Remendar, rai-main-dar\ to repair, to
mend. L. 64.
Remunerar, rai-moo-nai-rar\ to remuner-
ate. L. 52.
Rendir, rain-deer', to render, to subdue.—
Rendivfie, to surrender. L. 39.
ReRir, rain-yeer\ to quarrel, to dispute, to
scold. L. 39.
Reo, rai'-o, s. ra., culprit, offender. L. 53.
Repartir, rai-par-teer, to divide. L. 58.
Rcpasar, rai-pah-sar\ to repass, to reex-
amine, to glance over again. L. 64.
Repaso, rai-pah'-so, s. m., revision, act of
going over anew. L. 61.
Repente, rai-nain'-tai.—'De repenie, sudden-
ly, on a sudden. L. 5"!.
Repeticion, rai-pai-te-thl-dne' y b. f., repeti-
tion, L. 63.
Repetir, rai-jmi-teer', to repeat. L. 39.
Reposar, rai-pO-8ar\ to repose, to rest. L.
39.
Rcposo, rai-pd'-80, e. m,, repose, rest. L.
63.
Rcprendcr, rai-prain-dair\ to reprehend,
reprimand. L. 42.
Roprescntar, rai-jrrai-min-tar' , to repre-
sent, to make appear ; to perform (a part),
to enact. L. 64.
Rcprobar, rai-prb-bar\ to reprove, to up-
braid. L. 60.
Ropfiblica, rai-poo'-Mi-ka, b. f., republic.
L. 35. I
Repiitacion, ra?.-])oo-tah-thS-One\ 8. f., repa
tation. L. 24.
Resarcir, rai-sar-t7ieei'\ to indemnify, to
compensate, to make up for. L. 59.
Resentirse, rai-saiii-teer' -mi, to feel the
effects (of), to resent. L. 59.
Reafriado, raU>i-frl-ah' -do, s. m., cold (dis-
ease caused by cold). L. 03.
Resfriarse, rains-frl-ar' -sai. to catch cold.
L. 63.
Residente, rai-Hl-dain' -tai, adj. and papt
Eart. (of Residlb), resident, residing.
I. 38.
Residir, raUl-deer\ to reside. L. 9.
Resistir^ rai-seess-teer' , to resist. L. 51.
Resolucion, rai-sd-loo-thl-dne' , b. f., resola-
tion. L. 63.
Resolver, rai-sole-vair', to solve, to resolve.
L. 64.
Respecta, raiss-paik'-ta. — En lo que respecta,
with respect to. L. 51.
Respetable, raiss-pai-iah'-blai, adj., re-
spectable. L. 39.
Respetar, raiss-pai-tar\ to respect. L. 36.
Respeto, raies-pai'-to, b. m., respect, regard.
L. 56.
Responder, raiss-pone-dair' , to respond, to
answer. L. 33.
Respondon, raiss-pdne-done', adj., always
ready to reply. L. 33.
Respuesta, raiss-pivaiss'-ta, b. f., response,
reply, answer. L. 30.
Restante, raiss-tan' -tai, b. m., and pres.
part, (of Restar), remainder, rest; re-
maining. L. 46.
Resultar, rai-sool-iar\ to result, to turn out,
to occur. L. 43.
Retirar, rai-tl-rar', to retire, to withdraw,
to retreat. L. 63.
Retrato, rai-trah'-to, B. m., portrait, like-
ness. L. 17.
Reumatismo, rai-oo-mah-teess'-mo, e. m.,
rheumatism. L. 63.
Reunir, rai-oo-neer' , to reunite, to assem-
ble. L. 52.
Reves, rai-vaiss', b. m., back part, wrong
side.- Al reves, on the contrary; upside
down. L. 63.
Revoltoso, rai-vdk-td'so, ac^j., tiubulent,
rebellious. L. 44.
Rey, rai'-d, s. m., king. L. 15.
Reyezuelo, ral-mi-thwai'-lo, s. m. (dim. of
Key), pettv kin";. L. 44.
Ricacho, re-mh'-cho, adj., very rich. L. 49.
Rico, r^'-ko, adj.. rich. L. 13.
Ridiculez, rl-dl-koo-laith\ b. f, ridicule.
L. 45.
Ridiculizar, rl-di-koo-H-thar', to ridicule.
L. 48.
Ridiculo, rl-dl'-koo-lo, adj. and b. m., ridicu-
lous, reticule (sort of lady's bas^kct). L. 5.
Rigodon, rl-gd-ddne\ b. m., rigadoon, coun-
try dance. L. 23.
Rincon, reen-kSne', s. m., comer. L. 61.
Rio, r2'-5, s. m.. river. L. 40.
Riqueza, rl-kai'-tfia, s. f., riches. I:. 48.
Rlsa. ri'-sa, s. f.. laugh, laughter. L. 48.
Rivalizar, ri-mh-ti-lMr', to rival, to ^ie
with. L. 51.
Robar. rd-bar\ to rob, to steal. L. 4i.
Rodar, rd-dar', to roll. L. 54.
Rodear. ro-dai-nr\ to surround, to go round,
to revolve. L. 64.
Rodoado, rd-dai-ah'-do, adj. and past part,
(of RoDEAR), surrounded. L. 58.
VOCABULARY,
465
Rodilla, ro-ded'-ya, s. f., knee.— De roddlas,
on one's knees. L. 59. .
Rodriguez, ro-drl-gaith' , 8. m., Rodriguez.
L 49
Rogar,'?o-f7«^', to pray, to beg of. L. 35.
Rojo, ro'-luo, adj., red. L. 54.
Romano, ro-7tiati'-m. adj., Roman L. 54.
Romper, rome-vair\ to break, to tear.-
Romper el silencio, to break the silence.
Ropa,'/5'-iJa, s. f., clothes, wearing apparel.
L. 28.
Rosa, rb'-sa, s. f., rose. L. 63.
Roto, 7-5'-i!o, irr. past part, (of Rompeb),
broken. L. 53.
Rubio, roo'-hl-o, adj., fair (of the complex-
ion), ruddy. L. 63.
Ruido, roo-e'-do^ s. m., noise. L. 46.
Rum, roo-een\ adj., mean, churlish. L. 63.
Ruindad, roo-een-dath\ s. f., meanness,
churlishness. L. 48.
Ruisenor, roo-l-saln-yore\ s. m,, nightin-
gale. L. 63.
R'.imor, roo-more', s. m., rumor. L. 54.
Rutina, roo-tl'-na, s. f., routine. L. 63.
S.
Sabado, sah'-bah-do, s. m., Saturday. L. 9.
Saber, sak-dair', to know, to have knowl-
edge of, to hear from ; to savor, to taste ;
—8. m., learning, knowledge. L. 42 and
21.
Sabio, sah'-bl-o, adj., wise, sage, learned.
L. 21.
Sabor, sah-bore', s. m., savor, taste.— A su
saoor, at his pleasure, taste. L. 62 and 66.
Sacacorchos, sah-kah-kore'-choce, s. m.,
corkscrew. L. 64.
Sacamuelas, sah-kah-mwai' -lass^ s. m.,
tooth-drawer, dentist. L. 50.
Sacar, sah-kar', to take or draw out, to pull
out. L. 50 and 66.
Saco, mh'-ko, s. m., sack, bag. L. 61.
Sacudir, sah-koo-deer\ to shake off, to shake.
L. 51.
Sal, s. f., salt, wit. L. .5.5.
Saldo, sal' -do, e. m., balance (of accounts,
&c.). L. 64.
Salida, sah-ld'-da, s. f., going out, departure,
start. L. 63.
Saliente, sah-le-ain'-tai, adj. and pres. part.
(of Salir), projecting, salient. L. 38.
Salir, sah-leer', to go or come out, to set
out, to leave, to start, to go out, to end or
finish, to rise (said of the sun, &c.) : to
turn out, to turn w(i.—Sali6 a su padre,
he resembled his father. L. 20.
Salon, sah-loiie\ s. m., saloon, large hall. L.
58.
Saltar, sal-tar\ to jump, to leap, to bound,
to spring. L. 58.
Salto, $al'-(o, s. m., leap, jump, bound,
spring. L. 59.
Salud, sah-looth' s. f., health.— A '[^salud de
las seiioras, to the good health of the
ladies. L. 25.
Saludar, sah-loo-dar\ to salute. L. 64.
Sanchez, san' -chaith, s. m., Spanish family
name, signifying son of Sancho. L, 49.
Sansrc, san'-f/rai, s. f., blood. L. 64.
SantiScar, sah-td-jf?-kar\ to sanctify. L. 45.
20*
Santo, san'-to, adj., holy, saintly.— /Santo y
bueno, well ana good. L. 64.
Sastre, sass'-trai, a. m., tailor. L. 11.
feastreria, sa^s-Li ai-re' -a, s. 1"., tailor's shop.
Satirico, sah-ie' -rl-ko, adj., satirical. L. 85.
Satisfacer, sah-teess-jati-UMtr', to saiisly.
L. 42.
Satisiecho, sah-teess-fai' -clw, adj. and past
part, (of bATisFACEB), satisued. L. 4-i
and 52. „ . ^
Sayo, sah'-yo, s. m., sort of loose coat or
jacket. L. 65.
Sazonar, sah-iho-nar\ to season. L. 62.
Se saL pers. pron. (instead of Le, les, to
him to her, to them). L. 26.— Pron. (used
to form the passive voice). L. 32.— Ke-
flective pron. L. 33.-lmper8. pron., we,
they pe»Pl«' Ac-'Se dice, they say.->I^
cree ' it is believed. L. 36.
Se prep., used as a prefix m composition.
L. 50. "'
Secreto, mi-krai'-to, s. m., secret, secrecy.
Sed" saith, s. f., thirst.-Tener sed, to be
thirsty. L. 25.
Seda. sai'-da, s. f., silk. L. 5.
Seguir, sai-gheer\ to follow; to continue.
L. 39.
Segun, sai-goon\ prep., accordinc: to.— 513-
gun y como, just as. L. 40 and 66.
Segundo, sai-goon'-do, ord. adj. and s. m.,
second. L. 15 and 23.
Seguro, mi-goo' -ro. adi., sure, secure. L. 43.
Seis, sai'-eess, num. adj., six. L. 14.
Seiscientos, sai-eests-the-ain'-toce, num. adj.,
six hundred. L. 14.
Semana, sai-mah'-na. s. f , week. L. 8.
Semblante, saim-Uan' -tat s. m-. counte-
nance, face, aspect, appearance, look. L.
Sentar, min-lar\ to set down, to enter (in
a book) ; to fit, to become. L. 34.
Sentencia, sain-tain'-tM-a, s. f., sentence,
phrase. L. 43.
Sentido, sain-t^'-do, s. m., sense. L. 65.
Sentir, sain-teer', to feel; to be sorry for.
L. 38.
Sefior. sain-yore', s. m.. Lord, sir, Mr.—
Muy senor mio, my dear sir. L. 1.
Senora, sain-yo'-ra, s. f., lady, madam., Mrs.
L. 2.
Seiiorita, sain-yd-rd'-fa, s. f., young lady,
miss. L. 2.
Senorito, sain-j/o-r^'-fo, s. m., young gentle-
man, sir (used generally by servants),
Mr. L. 2.
Septimo, saip'-tS-mo, ord. adj., seventh. L.
15.
Ser, sair, to be, to exist. (Not to be con-
founded with EsTAR, which see.) L. 11
and 22.
Ser, s. m., bdnpi-, existence. L. ,54.
Servidor. sair-i:?-dbre' , s. m., servant.— >Si?r-
vidor de V., your servant. L. P^.
Servir, sair-veer'. to serve, to oblige, to do
a ^Qr\\ce.—Serrirse. to be good enough,
kind enough, to please.— 5f?T^<"' V. to-
mar asiento, please to take a ^eQ,t.—Ser'
virf^e de, to use. L. 39.
Sepenta, sai-frtin'-ta, num. adj.. sixty. L. 14.
Setenta, sai-tain'-ta, num. adj., eeventr.
L. 14.
466
VOCABULARY
Setecientoe, sai-tai-tM-ain'-tdce, num. adj.,
Bcveu liuudred. L. 14,
Setiembre, nai-le-aim'-Orai, s. m., Septem-
ber. L. HA.
Sexo, sailc'-sOy s. m., sex.— El bello sexo, the
fair sex. L. 5».
Sexto, aaiks'-tOy ord. adj. and s. m., sixth.
L. 15.
Si, nee, adv., yes. L. 1.
Si, iiidet. prun., self, one's self.— Habl6
para «{, he spoke to himtself. L. 26.
Si, coiij., il; OMt.—tii no viene, hombre,
but he is not comin<^, my dear lellow. L.
Siempre, si-aim' -prai^ adv., always. — Por
sieinpre 'yjunuHy lor ever and ever. L. 25.
Siecita, se-ui^n'-ta, b. 1"., Bieata, afternoon
nap. L. m.
Siete, sd-ai'-iai, num. adj., seven. L. 14.
Siglo, seeg'-lo, s. m., century. L. 52.
Signiticado, seeg-m-J'd-ka/i'-Uo, s. m., signi-
lication, meaning. L. 49.
Siguilicar, seeg-ni-/S-kar'. to signify. L. 64.
Silaba, si'-lah-ba, s. f., syllable. L. 63.
Silencio, sS-lain'-thS-o, s. m., silence. L. 65.
Silencioso, s?-/awi^/i2-i/'-so, adj., silent. L.
04.
Silla, fteel'-ya, s. f., chair. L. 14.
Simpatizar, s.ee7n-pah4S- thar\ to sympa-
thize. L. .51.
Simple, seem'-p?al, adj., simple, single;
simple, silly. L. 43.
Sin, f:eer), prep., without.— -Sin embargo,
notwithsfandinir, howcver.—Sin que ni
para que, without any cause or reason.
L. 10.
Sinceridad, seen-thai-rl-dath' , s. f., sinceri-
ty. L. 45.
Siricero. aeen-thai'-m. adj.. sincere. L. 40.
Singular, seev-noolar' . adj.. singular. L. .57.
Sine, fl'-no. conj., but: if not.— No es el.
nino su hormano, it is not he, but his
brother. I.. 3.
Sin6nimo, sl-nO' -nl-mo, s. m., synonyme.
L. 65.
Sinrazon, aeenrdh-thdne'^ b. f., wrong, in-
justice. L. .50.
Siquiera, sZ-kl-ai'-ra, conj., even, at least.
L. 40.
Sitio. «2'-/2-5, s. m., place, pos^ition, siege.
L. 68.
Situado, si-too-ah'-do, past. part, of Situab.
L. 20.
P.!tnar, f'i-tco-ar' , to situate. L. 64.
So, .»<5. prep., under.— *Sl9 pretesto de, under
pretext of. L. 41 .
Sobrar, sd-brar', to be over and above, to
have more of any thing than one needs.
L. 64.
Sobre. nd'-hrai^ prep., upon, above, over,
about.— Vino unf/re las ocho, he came
fibout pi<rht o'clock. L. 41.
Sobroescrito. sfi-hrai-ais.<i-kre' -fo, s. m., sn-
por«cription. address (of a letter). L. 56.
Sobrlna, so-h)?'-va, s. f., niece. L. 65.
Sobrino. fd-hrT'-rto. s. m., nephew. L. 65.
Socinlismo. sr^-thP-ah-leess' -mo, s. m., social-
ism. L. 50. I
Socicdad, nd-fhT^-ai-finth'^ s. f., society. Arm, j
partnorsbip (commerciaH. L. 32. j
Socio. eO'-thl-o, B. m., partner, companion, i
L. 62.
SofS. ed-fa\ 8. m., so(h. L. 34. '
Sol, s<>le, 8. m., sun. L. 46.
Solas (A;, so'-lass, all alone. L. 64.
Soldado, HoLe-dak' -dOy b. m., soldier. L. 52.
Soledad, so-lai-datk' , s, f., solitude, loneli-
ness. L. 63.
Soiemne, so-laim'-nai, adj., eolenin; thor-
ough, downright. L. 61.
Soler, 6o-lair\ lo be accustomed to, to be
wont. L. 41.
Solicitar, no-ll-thl-tar' ^ to solicit. L. 47.
Soliloyuio, bO-ll-io'-m-Oy s. m., soliloquy.
L. 65.
Solo, hO'-Io^ adj., alone;— adv., only. L. 25.
Soitar, sole-tar', to untie, to loose, to liber-
ate, to let go, to let free. L. 64.
Soltero, soktai'-ro, s. m., bachelor, un-
married man. L. 51.
Sombra, saim'-bra, s. f., shade, shadow
L. 58.
Sombrero, sdme-brai'-ro, s. m., hat. L. 10.
Son, sOne, s. m., sound.— bin ton y sin son^
without rhyme or reason. L. 47.
Sonar, sd-ruir', to sound. L. 45.
Souido, so-nd'-do, s. m., sound. L. 47.
Soureirse, sdne-rai-eer'-sai, to smile. L. 64.
Sonrisa, sone-re'-sa, s. f., smile. L. .54.
Sonrojar, sone-ro-har' , to malie one blush.
L. W.
Sofiar, sdne-yar'. to dream. L. 35.
Sopa, sd'-pa, s. r., soup. L. 44.
Sopeton, 85-pai-(dne' . — De sopeton, nnez
pectedly. L. 44.
Soplar, sd-plar\ to blow ; to prompt. L. 64.
Sordo, H/re'-do. adj., deaf. L. 64.
Sorprender, sore-prain-dair' , to surprise.
L. 42.
Sorpresa. adre-prai'-sa, b. f., surprise. L. 51.
Sospcchar, f<dce-r>ai-char' , to suspect. L. 60.
Su. Roo, poss. adj., his, her, its, their. L.5.
Sub, soch, Latin prep, used in Spanish as
a prefix only. L. 50.
Subida, soo-bd-da, s. f., rising, rise: ascent.
L. m.
Subir, Koo-beer', to eo or come up, to ascend,
to mount, to rise. L. .50.
Subjuntivo, soob-hoon-d'-vo. adj., subjunc-
tive. L. 43. ' •-- '
Suceder, soo-thaf-dair'. to happen, to take
place, to succeed (come after). L. 45.
Sucesivo, soo-fhai-sl'-vo.— En lo sucesivo, in
future. L. 32.
Sucio, soo'-th^-d, adj.. diriy. L. 64.
Sud, sood, 8. m., south. L. 26.
Suegra, swai'-gra, s. f., mother-in-law. L.
63.
Suegro, sttai'-gro, 8. m., fether-in-Iaw. L.
m.
Suela, fiimi'-Ia, s. f., sole. L. 61.
Suelo, fncai'-lo, b. m., ground, floor, soil.
Snelto, ftivail'-fo, adj. and past part, (of
SoT.TAR), loose, free.— A rienda mielta,
with loose rein. L. 64.
Supflo, sirain'-yo, s. m.. sleep, dream.— Te-
ner siiefw, to be sleepy. L. 25.
Suerte. swair'-tai, s. f.."lnck, chance, sort
Echar tn/crffiR, to cast lots. L. 58.
Snflcionte, .ooa-fH-l/if-oin'-fai, adj., sufBcient.
L. 49.
Suft-ir, f!oo-fTver'. to suffer, to bear M-lth, to
undergo. L. (V4.
Sugeto, soo-fiai'-fo, 8. m.. Individual, pe^
eon ; topic, matter, subject. L. 27.
VOCABULARY
467
Sujeto, soo-hai'-to, adj. and past part, (of
buJETAR), subject ; subjected, tied, fast-
ened. L. 65.
Suma, soo'-ma, s. m., sum.— En mma^ in
short. L. 68 and 64.
Superior, soo-pai-rl-ore' ^ adj., superior. L.
iil.
Superlativo, soo-pair-lah-te'-vo, adj., super-
lative. L. 5U.
Supersticioso, soo-pairss-te-the-o'-so, adj., su-
perstitious. L. 45.
Suplicar, soo-pll-kar\ to supplicate, to beg,
to crave. L. 64.
Suponer, soo-pd-nair\ to suppose. L. 64.
Supremo, soo-prai'-mo, adj., supreme, high-
est, most excellent. L. 21.
Supuesto, soo-pwaiss'-to, past part, of Supo-
ner.— For supuestx)^ of course. L. 64.
Sur. (See Sud.) L. 66.
Sus ! sooce, inter., holla ! L. 46.
Suspirar, sooce-pe-rar\ to sigh. L. 64.
Sustancia, sooce-iati'-the-a, s. f., substance.
L. 63.
Sustantivo, sooce-tan-te'-vo, s. m. and adj.,
substantive. L. 64.
Sustentar, sooce-tain-tar' , to sustain. L. 65.
Sutil, soo-ied', adj., subtle, thin, slender.
L. 64.
Sutileza, soo-te-lai'-tha, s. f., subtlety, cun-
ning, thinness, slendemess. L. 63.
Suyo, soo'-yo, his, hers, its, theirs, one's.
L. 13.
T.
Tabaco, tah^ah'-Tco, s. m., tobacco, cigar.
L. 42.
Tablero. tah-blai'-ro, s. m., a smooth board.
— TaUero de ajedrez, chess-board. L. 51.
Tacto. tak'-to, s. m., the sense of touch.
L. 65.
Tal, adi.. such, ^o.— Tal cital, middling, so
■^o.— Tal vez. perhaps. L. 32.
Talento, tah-lain'-to, s. m., talent, abilities.
L. 65- , ,
Tambien, tam-M-ain', conj. and adv., also,
as well, morever. L. 29.
Tampoco, tam-po'-ko, adv., neither, not
either, nor. L. 29.
Tan, adv., so, so much, as, as much. L. 20.
Tanto, fan'-fo. adj., so, in such a manner.—
Tanto mejor, so much the better.— For lo
tanto, therefore. L. 20.
Tapar, tah-par', to cover up, to stop up
(with a cover). L. 65.
Tapete, iah-pai'-tai, s. m., table-cover. L.
Tardar, tar-dar', to delay, to put off. L. 60.
Tarde, tar'-dai, s. f , afternoon ;— adv., late.
— Algo tarde, rather late. L. 20.
TsLxaSi^tah'-rai-a, s. f., task. L. 58.
Tarjeta, tar-hai'-ta, s. f , card, visiting card.
L. 64.
Tate ! tah'-tai, inter., easy ! take care ! L.
4<>.
Taza, tah'-tha, s. f., cup. L. 55.
To, tai, 8. m., tea. L. 55.
Te, pron., thee, to thee. L. 26.
Teatro, tai-ah'-tro, s. m., theatre. L. 17.
Teja, tai'-ha, e. f., tile.— De tejas abajo, hu-
manly spealdnc:. L. 61.
Telegrafico, tai-lai-grah'-fl-lco, adj., tele-
graph. L. 65.
Telegrafo, tai-lai'-grah-fo, b. m., telegraph.
L. 46.
Tema, tai'-ma^ s. m., theme, exercise; —
s. f , dispute, contention. L. 57.
Temer, tai-mair' , to fear. L. 28.
Temerario, tai-mai-rali'-re-o, adj., rash, in-
considerate. L. 54.
Temor, tai-more' .—Fov temor de, for fear of.
L. 42.
Temprano, taim-prah'-no, adv., early, soon.
L. 20.
Tenacidad, tai-nah-thl-dath\ e. f., tenacity.'
L. 65.
Tenedor, tai-nai-dore\ s. m., fork. L. 65.
Tener, tai-nair\ to have, to hold; to be, to
take (place).— Te/ier hambre, frio, sed, to
be hungry, cold, thirsty.— Tener lugar, to
take place.— Tener que hacer, to have
something to do.— Yo tengo para mi, it is
my opinion.— Tew(/a V. la bondad de de-
cirme, be good enough to tell me. L. 10.
Tentacion, tain-tah-thl-one', s. m., tempta-
tion. L. 61.
Tefiir, tain-yeer', to dye. L. 39.
Teoria, tai-o-re'-a, s. f,, theory. L. 23.
Tercero, tair-thai'-ro, ord. adj., third. L.
15.
Tercio, tair'-tTil-o, s. m., third, third part.
L. 40.
Terminacion, tair-nie-nah-the-one' , s. f., ter-
mination. L. 49.
Terminante, tair'-ml-nan'-tai^ aaj., conclu-
sive. L. 65.
Terminar, tair-me-nar' , to terminate. L.
65. ^ . ^.
Termino, tair'-me-no, s. m., termination,
end ; term. L. 65.
Termometro, tair-mo'-mai-tro, s. m., ther-
mometer. L. 60.
Terrenal, tair-rai-nal\ adj., terrestrial. L.
49.
Terreno, tair-rai'-no, s. m., ground. L. 55.
Terrible, tazr-re'-blai, adj., terrible. L. 53.
Terron, tair-rone\ s. m., turned up earth.
L. 49.
Terroso, tair-ro'-so, adj., terreous, earthy.
L. 49.
Terrestre, tair-raiss' -trai, adj., terrestrial,
earthly. L.49.
Tertulia, tair-too'-le-a, s. f., party. L. 39.
Tl, te, pron., thee (governed by a prep.).
L.26.
Tiempo, tl-aim'-po, s.m., time, weather.—
Con el tiewpo, in the course of time. L.
23
Tienda, te-ain'-da, s. f., store, shop. L. 64.
Tierra, td-air'-ra, s. f., earth, land, native
soil. L. 45. ^ T C4
Tijeras, ie-hai'-ras, s. f. pi., scissors. L. 64.
Tinta, i;ee??/-to, s. f, ink. L. 5.
Tintero, teen-tai'-ro, s. m., inkstand.-DeJ
jaree algo en el tintero, to forget to eay
something. L. 4. ,_-..,„„\ t
Tinto, teen'-tx), adj., red (said of wines), h.
Tio, i!2'-o, s.m., uncle. L. 65.
Tirabuzon, tl-rah-boo-thone' , s. m., cork-
screw. L. 65, • „i T
Tiranico, tl-rah' -nl-ko, adj., tyrannical. L,.
Tirar t:^-rar', to throw, to cast, to take
(speaking of a road).-T?re V. por aqm,
take this way. L. 54.
468
VOCABULARY,
Tiro, ti'-ro^ s. m., throw, cast. — A tiro de
pistola, within a pistol-shot. L. 53.
Titulo, tl'-too-lo, B. m., title. L. 55.
Tocante a, tu-kan'-tai a, prep., concern-
in;?, relatin;,' to, touching. L. 38.
Tocar, to-kar', to touch, to play (on an in-
strument). L. 15.
Todavia, W-dah-ve'-a., adv., yet, still. L. 25.
Todo, to' -do, adj., aW.— Todos loa diaa, every
day.— Del todo, entirely.— Con todo, how-
ever, notwithstanding. L. 11.
Todo, s. m., the whole. L. 61.
Tolerar, tO-lai-rar\ to tolerate. L. 65.
Toma! to' -ma, inter., indeed! L. 45.
Tomar, td-mar', to take. L. 14.
Tomo, to' -mo, s. m., volume.— Un libro de
tres tomx)s, a book in three volumes. L.
15.
Toncl, to-naW, s. m., cask, barrel. L. 60.
Tonto, tdne'-to. adj., foolish.— A tontas y a
locas, at random. L. GO.
Tontera, tone-tai'-ra, s. f., foolish action.
L. 00.
Toque, to'-kai, s. ra., roll (of a drum), ring-
ing (of bells).— Ahi esta el toque, that is
where the difficulty lies. L. 65.
Torero, td-rai'-ro, s. m., bull-fighter. L. 53.
Tornar, tore-nar', to return, to begin anew.
L. 65.
Torno, t5re'-no, s. m., lathe.— En tomo,
round about. L. 65.
Toro, t5'-ro, s. m., bull. L. 53.
Tos, toce, B. f., cough. L. (55.
Trabajador, trah-bah-hah-ddre' , adj. and s.
m., hardworking, worker. L. 17.
Trabajar, trah-baJi-har' , to work, to labor.
L. 17.
Trabajo, trah-bah'-ho, s. m., work, labor,
occupation. L. 47.
Traauccion, trah-dook-thl-5ne\ s. f., trans-
lation. L. 6t.
Traducir, trah-doo-theer\ to translate. L.
40.
Traer, trah-air', to bring, to carry, to wear.
L. 42.
Tragar, trah-gar', to swallow. L. 65.
Tragedia, trdh-hai' -dl-a, s. f., tragedy. L.
52.
Tragico, trah'-M-ko, adj., tragic. L. 35.
Trago, trah'-go, s. m., draught, drink.—
Echar un trago, to take a dram. L. 59.
Traje, trah'-hdi, b. m., dress, costume. L.
54.
Trampa, tram' -pa, s. f., trap, swindle.—
Caer en la trampa, to fall into the snare.
L. 64.
Trampeais tram-pai-ar' , to swindle, to im-
pose upon. L. 65.
Trampoao, tram-j^'-so, adj., deceitful,
swindling;— 8. m., cheat, swindler. L.
65.
Tranqullidad, fran-kS-K-dath', s. f., tran-
quillity, peace, quietness. L. 46
Tranqullizar, tran-kUMhar' , to tranquil-
lize. L. 65. *
Tranquilo, tran-kl'-lo, adj., tranquil, quiet,
peaceful. L. 60. ^ ' i
Trapo, trah'.po. s' m., rag. L. 64
rras, prep., behind, after. L. 41.
Xrascnrao. tnm-koor'-w, b. m., course, pro-
cess (of time). L. 51.
Trasnochar, frass-nd-ckar', to sit up all
night. L. 05. ^
Trasquilar, trass-k^-lar', to shear (sheep).—
Ir por lana y volvcr tmsquilado, the biter
bit. L. 05.
Trastienda, trass-iS-ain'-da, b. f., back shop.
L. 01.
Tratado, trah-tah'-do, s. m., treatise, treaty.
L. 40.
Tratante, trah-tan' -tai, b. m., dealer. L. 38.
Tratar, trah-tar', to treat, to have inter-
course or relations with, to trade, to
deal, to traffic, to try. L. 32.
Trato, trah'-to, s. ni., treatment, dealings,
intercourse. L. 65.
Traves, trah-vaiss', prep.— Al traves de,
through. L. 65.
Travesura, trah-vai-soo'-ra, s. f., trick, mis-
chief, naughtiness. L. 53.
Travieso, trah-ve-ai'-so, adj., tricky, naugh-
ty, mischievous. L. 52.
Traza, trah'-tha, s. f., trace.— Tener buena
traza, to look well. L. 64.
Trece, trai'-thai, num. adj., thirteen. L. 14.
Treinta, trai-een'-ta, num. adj., thirty. L.
14.
Tres, traiss, num. adj., three. L. 14.
Tribunal, tre-boo-nal' , s. m., tribunal, court
of justice. L. 53.
Trigo, tre'-go, s. m., wheat. L. 65.
Triguefio, trl-gaiii' -yo, adj., brown, dark
(complexion). L. 05.
Trinchar, treen-cJiai'', to cut up, to carve.
L. 58.
Trineo, trl-nai'-d, s. m., sleigh. L. 65.
Trinidad, irhriS-dath', s. f.. Trinity. L. 21.
Triptongo, treep-tdne'-go, s. m., triphthong.
L. 57.
Triple, treess'-tai, adj., sad, mournful, dull.
L. 21.
Tristeza, treess-tai'-tha, s. f., sadness, dul-
ness. L. 41.
Tronar, tro-nar', to thunder. L. 30.
Tropa, tro'-pa, s. f., troop. L. 40.
Trueco, trwai'-ko, s. m., barter, exchange.
—A trueco, provided that. L. 61.
Tnieno, trwai'-no, b. m., thunder, clap of
thunder. L. 30.
Trueque. (See TRtrECO.) L. 48.
Tu, too, pers. pron., thou ;— poss. adj.,' thy.
L. 1.
Tuerto, twair'-to, a4)., blind of one eye.
L. 65.
Tutear, too-tai-ar', to speak familiarly (In
the second person singular). L. r>5.
Tuteo, ioo-tai'-d. s. m., thoning. L. 65.
Tuyo, too'-yo, poss. pron., thine. L. 13.
U. 00. conj., used instead of p, before words
beginninir with o or ho. L. 8.
Ff! w/; inter.. u?h! L. 46.
Ultimo, ool'-f7>-mo. adi., last.— Por {tlllmo
at last, flnally. L. 61.
Un. ooTt. adj. and indef. art., one. a (always
used before, never nfler. words). L. 4.
Una. oo'-nn. fern, of Uno. which see. L. .'5.
Universidad. on-n^-vnir-s^-dafh', a. f., uni-
versitv. L. .'>5.
Uno. oo'-no. indof. art. and adj., a, one.—
Un/) i\ ■uno. one bv one. L. 14.
Ufla. oon'-ya. s. f.. flnger-nnil. L. 33.
Usar, oo-mr', to use. L. 02.
VOCABULARY,
469
TJso, oo'-so, s. m.j use. L. 61.
TJsted, coss-tait/i\ s. m. and f., you. (Con-
traction of VuBSTRA MERCKD, your Wor-
ship.) L. 1.
TJtil, co'-ted^ adj., useful. L. 13.
Uva, oo'-va^ s. f., grape. L. 40.
Vaca, vah'-ka, s. f., cow, beef. L. 55.
Vacio, vah-the'-o, adj., empty. L. 58.
Valencia, vah-lain'-the-a, s. f., Valencia,
L. 55.
Valentla, vah-lain-ie'-a, s. f., valor, bravery.
L. 54.
Valer, vah-lair\ to be worth, to be good
for.— Mas vcUe tarde que nuuca, better
late than never. — Vulgame DiosI bless
met L. 41.
Valiente, vah-le-ain'-tai, adj., valiant, brave.
L. 47.
Valor, vah-ldre\ s. m., valor, bravery;
worth, value. L. 25.
Vals, valce, s. m., waltz. L. 23.
Vamos ! vah'-moce, inter., come 1 come
sxloncr I L. 46.
Vapor, vah-pore\ s. m., steam, steamboat,
steamer. L. 37.
Vara, vah'-ra. s. f., rod ; yard measure. L.
47.
Vario, vah'-re-o, adj., various, variable;—
pi., several. L. 43.
Varon, vah-rdp.^\ s. m., man, male human
being. L. 62.
Vascongadas, (Las Provincias), vass-kone-
gah'-dass, s. f. pi., the three Spanish pro-
vinces of Alava, Guipuzcoa, and Biscay.
L. 55.
Vascuence, vass-kwain'-thai, s. m., the Bis-
cayan dialect. L. 55.
Vasija, vah-se'-ha^ s. f., cask for liquors.
L. 52.
Vaso, vah'-so, s. m., vase, glass (for drink-
ing), tumbler. L. 61.
Vaya ! vah'-ya, inter., come now I indeed I
L. 42.
Vecino, vai-thl'-no, s. m., neighbor. L. 28.
Veinte, vai'-een-tai, num. adj., twenty. L.
14.
Vela, vai'-la, s. f., sail (of a ship), candle.
L..53.
Veneer, vain-thair\ to vanquish, to over-
come, to conquer. L. 59.
Vender. rain-dair\ to sell. L. 6.
Venlr. rai-neer', to come ; to fit, to suit.—
Venir i\ pelo, to be just the thing.— No
hay mal que por bienno mnqa. it's an ill
wind that blows trood to nobody. L. 18.
Ventaja, vain-tah'ha, s. f., advantage. L.
43.
Ventana. vain-tah'-na. s. f., window. L. 28.
Ver, vair, to see. to look. — A vr. let us
9.ee.— Verse negro, to be in great distress,
L. 29.
Verano, vai-rah'-vo. s. m.. summer. L. 24.
Verbal, vair-hnl\ adj., verbal. L. 49.
Verbo. vair'-ho, s. m., verb. L. 41.
Verdad, rnir-dath'. s. f, truth.— A la ver-
dad. truly : indeed. L. 43.
Verdaderamente. vair-dah-dat-rah-main'-
frii, adv.. trulv. veritablv. I-. s^.
Verde, valr'-dai, adj, green. L. 54.
Verdura, vair-doo'-ra., s, f., verdure; vegeta-
bles. L. 34.
Vergiienza, vair-gwain' -tha^ s. f., shame, —
Teuer vergiienza., to be ashamed. L. 25.
Version, vair-se-dne\ s. f., version. L. 64,
Verso, vair'-so, s. m,, verse; line of poetry,
L, 52.
Vestido, vaiss-te'-do, s. m,, dress, wearing
apparel. L. 39.
Vestir, vaiss-teer\ to dress, to clothe. L. 25,
Vez, vaith, s. f., time.— Una vez, once.—
Dos veces, twice. — En vez de, instead of,
— llacer las veces de, to act as, serve as. —
Tal vez, perhaps.— A mi vez, in my turn.
—A veccfi, at times. L. 25.
Viajar, ve-ah-liar', to travel. L. 21.
Vicerector, ve-tfiai-raik-tore' , s. m., vice-
rector. L. 50.
Vice versa, ve'-thai vair'-sa, vice versa. L.
47.
Vicio, v^'-i/iS-o, s. m., vice. L. 41.
Victoria, veek-to'-re-a, s. f., victory. L. 46.
Vida, ve'-da, s. f., life. L. 50.
Vicjo, ve-ai'-ho, adj., old. L. 13.
Viena, ve-ai'-na, s. f., Vienna. L. 12.
Vieuto, ve-ain'-to, s. m., wind. L. 30.
Viernes, ve-air'-naiss, s. m., Friday.— Vier-
nes santo. Good Friday. L. 9.
Viga, ve'-ga, s. f., beam. L. 65.
Villadiego, veel-rjah-de-ai' -go, s. m.— Tomar
las de Villadiego, to run away ; to take to
one's heels. L. 50.
Vinacho, ve-nah'-cho, s. m., bad wine. L.
49.
Vino, ve'-no, s. m., wine. L. 7.
Violado, ve-o-lah'-do, s. m. and adj., violet
(color). L. 54.
Violeta, ve-o-lai'-ta, s. f., violet. L. 54.
Violin, vl-o-Uen', s. m., violin. L. 15.
Violinista, ve-o-ll-neess'-ta, s. m., violinist.
L. 36.
Virtud, veer-tooth', s. f., virtue.— En vlrtud
de, by virtue of. L. 41.
Visita, ve-se'-ta, s. f., visit. L. 28.
Visitar, ve-sd-iar', to visit ; to examine.
L. 52.
Vista, veess'-ta, s. f., view, sight. -A vista,
at sight.— Perder de vista, to lose sight of.
L. 29 and 51.
Visto, veess'-to, past part, (of Vek), seen,
L. 52.
Vistoso, veess-to'-so, adj., conspicuout
showy L. 54.
Viva! ve'-va, inter., long live! hurrah 1
huzza ! L. 46.
Vivionte, ve-t^-ain'-tai, s. ra. andpres. part.,
living bein.T; living, animated. L. 38.
Vivir, vl-reer'. \<^ live. L. 9.
Vivo, ve'-vo, adj., alive, lively, sprightly.
L. 90.
Vizcaino, ree^'h-l-n'h-l'-no, s. m. and adj.,
Biscayan. L. t^'S.
Vizcnva. rMh-i-nh'-iin. s. f. F-iacay. L. .^.'>.
Vocabulario. ro-lmh-boo-lah'-rl-d, s. m., vo-
cabulary. L. f-^.
Vocal. vo-kaV, adj. and s. m., vocal ; vowel.
L. .58.
Volar, vo-lnr'. to fly. L. 45.
Voliimpn, vo-Joo'-main. s. m., volume. L. 15.
Voluntad. rd-lom-ta.tJi' . s. f.. will. L. 45.
Volver, vole-^'air', to come or ^o 'hfick. to
return, to do atrain. to turn.— Fo'rvr on
sf, to recover one's senees.— Ferrer Alas
470
VOCABULARY,
andadas, to retam to one's old habits.
L. 36.
VoB, voce, pers. pron., you. L. 66.
Vosotros, vO-so'-trOce, pers. prou., you, ye.
L. 1.
Voz, vdth, 8. f., voice; word; rumor; re-
port.— Corre la voz que . . . , it is
rumored that . . . L. 58.
Vuelta, vwaU'-ta, s. f., return, turn, trip.—
A vuella de correo, by return mail.— Dar
una vuelta, to take a walk.— Dar la vv^lta
al parque, to go round the park. L. 46.
Vuelto, vwaU'-to, past part, (of Volvek),
returned. L. 52.
Vuestro, vwaiss'-tro, poss. adj., your. L. 13.
Vulgar, vool-gar', adj., vulgar. L. 59.
Y.
Y, e, conj., and. L. 3.
Ya, adv., already, yet; eometimes.- Fo lo
lino, ya lo otro, sometimes one, some-
times the other. L. 25 and 37.
Yaccr, yah-thair\ to lie. L. 41.
Ycrba, yair'-ba, s. f., herb, grass. L. 60.
Yemo, yaiT'Tio^ s. m., son-iu-law. L. 60.
Yo, pers. pron., l.—To mismo, I my Belt
L. 1.
Yugo, yoo'-go, b. m., yoke. L. 64.
Z.
Zafarse, thah-far' -sai, to escape, to get rid
Zaga, thah'-ga, s. f., rear.-No irlc a uno
en zaga, not to be liar behind any ont-,
L. 44.
shoo
Zapateria, thah-vah tai-il'-a, b. f.,
trade ; shoemaker's thop. L. 17.
Zapatero, thahjiuh-lai'-io, s. m., shoe-
maker. L. 8.
Zapato, thah-pah' -to, s. m., shoe. L. 10.
Zape! thah' pai, inter., used to frighten
away the cats ; God forbid I L. 46.
Zas I zas 1 thass, inter., used to imitate
the sound of repeated knocks or blows.
L. 62.
Zeca en Mcca (Andar de), thai'-la ain
mai'-ka, to wander about from pillar to
post. L. 61.
Zutano, thw-tah'-no, s. m., such a one. X..
55.
Ollendorff's New Method of Learning Languages.
s:E>.A.isrisia:.
A NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ,
Write, and Speak the Spauish Language, after the System of OllenJ
dorff. By Mno. Velazquez and T. Simonne. 1 vol., 12mo. 500
pages. Price, $1.30.
KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN THE NEW METHOD
of Learning to Read, Write, and Speak the Spanish Language, after
the System of Ollendorff. By M. Velazquez and T. Simonne. 1
vol., 12mo. 174 pages. Price, 85 cents.
NUEVO MfiTODO PARA APRENDER 1 LEER,
Hablar, y Escribir el espanol, segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Para
uso de los Alemane. Arreglado por D. H. Wrage y H. M. Mon-
santo. (Neue Methode die Spanische Sprache lesen, sprechen und
schreiben zu lernen, nach dem OUendoiff schen System.) 1 vol.,
12mo. Price, $1.50.
CLAVE DEL ANTERIOR. Price, $1.00.
M£tODO para APRENDER X LEER, ESCRIBIR
y Hablar el Ingles, segun el Sistema de Ollendorff. Por Ramon
Palenzuela y Juan de la C. (Darrefio. Un tomo de 45*7 paginas, en
12°. Price, $1.50.
CLAVE DE LOS EJERCICIOS DEL M^TODO
Para aprender a Leer, Escribir y Ha]3lar el Ingles segun el Sistema
de Ollendorff. Por Ramon Palenzuela y Juan de la C. Carreuo. Un
tomo de 111 paginas, en 12°. Price, $1.00.
UN M£T0D0 para APRENDER 1 LEER, ES-
cribir y Hablar el Frances segun el Sistema de Ollendorflf. Por Teo-
doro Simonn^. Un tomo de 341 paginas, en 12°. Price, $1.50.
CLAVE DE LOS EJERCICIOS DEL M^TODO
Para aprender a Leer, Escribir y Hablar el Frances segun el Sistema
de Ollendorff. Por Teodoro Simonne. Un tomo de 80 paginas, en
12°. Price, $1.00.
D. APPLETON & CO., Publishers, 1, 3, & 5 Bond Street, N. Y.
SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS.
SPANISH.
AHN. A New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish
Language, after the System of F. Ahn, Doctor of Philosophy and
Professor at the College of Neuss. 12mo. 85 cents.
Key to Spanish Grammar. 25 cents.
BUTLER. The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-Book: An
Easy and Agreeable Method of acquiring a Speaking Knowledge
of the Spanish Language. By Francis Butler. 293 pagea
18mo. 50 cents.
DE BELEM. The Spanish Phrase-Book; or, Key to Spanish Con-
versation : containing the Chief Idioms of the Spanish Language,
with the Conjugations of the Auxihary and the Regular Verbs —
on the Plan of the late Abb6 Bossuet. By E. M. de Belem. 88
pages. 18mo. 30 cents.
DE TOR NOB. The Combined Spanish Method. A New, Prac-
tical, and Theoretical System of Learning the Castilian Language,
embracing the most advantageous Features of the bpst known
Methods. With a Pronouncing Vocabulary. 12mo. $1.25.
y\.^ Key to the Combined Spanish* Method. 75 cents.
DE VERE. Grammar of the Spanish Language, with a History
of the Language and Practical Exercises. By Schele de Verb.
12mo. $1.00.
\ DICTIONARY. See Meadows and VelXzqukz.
MEADOWS'S Spanish-English and English-Spunish Dictionary.
18rao. Half roan, $2.20.
MORALES. Progressive Spanish Reader, with an Analytical 8tudy
of the Spanish Language. By Augustin Jose Morales, A. M.
H. M., Professor of the Spanish Language in the New York Free
Academy. 886 pages. 12mo. $1.25.
School and College Text-Books. — (Continued.)
OLLENDORFF. A New Method of Learning to Read, Write,
and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff.
By Mariano Velazquez and T. Simonne. 12mo. $1.00.
Key to the Exercises in the New Method of Learning to Read, Write,
and Speak the Spanish Language, after the System of Ollendorff
By M. Velazquez and T. Simonne. Hi pages. 12mo. 75 cts.
TOLON. The Elementary Spanish Reader and Translator. With
Spanish and English Vocabulary, containing all the words used
in the Lessons. By Miguel T. Tolon. 12mo. 15 cents.
VELAZQUEZ. New Spanish Reader; consisting of Extracts from
the Works of the most approved Authors, in Proee and Verse,
arranged in progressive order, with Notes explanatory of the
Idioms and most difficult Constructions, and a copious Vocabu-
lary. By Mariano Velazquez de la Cadena. 12mo. $1.25.
Seoane's Nemnan and Baretti. By M. Velazquez. A Pronouncing
Dictionary of the Spani-sh and English Languages: composed
from the Spanish Dictionaries of the Spanish Academy, Terreros,
and Salva, upon the Basis of Seoane's edition of Neuman and
Baretti, and from the English Dictionaries of Webster, Worcester,
and Walker ; with the addition of more than 8,000 Words, Idioms,
and Familiar Phrases, the Irregularities of all the Verbs, and a
Grammatical Synopsis of both Languages. In Two Parts, I.
Spanish-English; IL English-Spanish. 1,310 pages, large 8vo.
$5.00.
Seoane's Neuman and Baretti, abridged. By M. Velazquez. A
Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, abridged from
the author's larger work. 84V pages. 12mo. $1.50.
An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conversation. By Mariano Vei az-
QUEZ DE LA Cadena. 100 pages. 18mo. 35 cents.
£>. APFLETON & CO., Publishers, 1, S, db 5 Bond Street, New York,
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
SPANISH GEAMMAES.
Ollendorff s Spanish Grammar.
A New Method of Learning to Read, "Write, and Speak the Spaiuah
Language, with Practical Rules for Spanish Pronunciation, and
Models of Social and Commercial Correspondence. By M. VE.
LASQUEZ and T. T. SIMONNE. 12rao, 5G0 pages.
The admirable system introduced by Ollendorff is applied in this vol>
ume to the Spanish language. Having received, from the two distinguished
editors to whom its supervision was intrusted, corrections, emendations,
and additions, which specially adapt it to the youth of this country, it is
believed to embrace every possible advantage for imparting a thorough
and practical knowledge of Spanish. A course of systematic grammar
underlies the whole ; but its development is so gradual and inductive as
not to weary the learner. Numerous examples of regular and irregular
verbs are presented : and nothing that can expedite the pupil's progress,
in the way of explanation and illustration, is omitted.
KEY to the Same. Separate volume.
Grammar of the Spanish Language :
With a History of the Language and Practical Exercises. By M.
SCHELE DE VERE. 12mo, 273 pages.
In this volume are embodied the results of many years' experience on
the part of the author, as Professor of Spanish in the University of Virginia.
It aims to impart a critical knowledge of the language by a systematic
course of grammar, illustrated with appropriate exercises. The authoi
has availed himself of the labors of recent grammarians and critics ; and,
by condensing his rules and principles and rejecting a burdensome suptt*
fluity of detail, he has brought the whole within comparatively small conv
pass. By pursuing this simple course, the language may be easily asd
quickly mastered, not only for conversational purposes, but for reading i%
Quently, and writing it with elegance.
B. APPLETON db C0:8 PUBLICATIONS.
Elementary Spanish Reader :
By M. F. TOLON. 12mo, 156 pages.
This is one of the best Elementary Spanish Readers, not only for th*
purposes of self-instruction, but also as a class-book for schools, that has
e^er been published. A full Vocabulary of all the words employed is ap-
pended, rendering a large dictionary unnecessary.
Progressive Spanish Reader :
With an Analytical Study of the Spanish Language. By AUGUSTIN
JOSE MORALES, A. M., Prof, of the Spanish Language and Litera-
ture in the College of the City of New York. 12mo, 336 pages.
The prose extracts in this volume are preceded by an historical account
of the origin and progress of the Spanish Langurge, and a condensed,
scholarlike treatise on its grammar ; the poetical selections are introduced
with an Essay on Spanish versification. Prepared in either case by the
preliminary matter thus furnished, bearing directly on his work, the pupil
enters intelligently on his task of translating. The extracts are brief,
spirited, and entertaining ; drawn mainly from writers of the present day,
they are a faithful representation of the language as it is now written and
spoken. The arrangement is progressive, specimens of a more difficult
ciiaracter being presented as the student becomes able to cope with them.
New Spanish Reader :
Consisting of Extracts from the Works of the Most Approved Authors
in Prose and Verse, arranged in Progressive Order ; with Notes
explanatory of the Idioms and Most Difficult Constructions, and a
Copious Vocabulary. By M. VELAZQUEZ BE LA CADENA.
12mo, 351 pages.
This book, being particularly intended for the use of beginners, has been
prepared with three objects in view : First, to furnish the learner with
pleasing and easy lessons, progressively developing the beauties and diffi-
culties of the Spanish language ; secondly, to enrich their minds with valu-
able knowledge ; and thirdly, to form their character, by instilling correct
principles into their hearts. In order, therefore, to obtain the desired ef-
fects, the extracts have been carefully selected from those classic Spanish
writers, both ancient and modem, whose style is generally admitted to be
a pattern of elegance, combined with idiomatic purity and sound morality.
D. APPLETON & CO:S PUBLIC A TIONS.
Grammar for Teaching English to Spaniards.
Gramatica Inglesa :
Un Mctodo para Aprender a Leer, Escribir, y Habler el Ingl6s, segun
el Sisteraa de Ollendorff. Acompanado de un Apendice que com-
prende en Compendio las Reglas contenidas en el Cuerpo Princi-
pal de la Obra ; un Tratado sobre la Pronuneiacion, Division y
Formacion de las Palabras Inglesas ; una Lista de los Yerbos
Kegulares e Irregulares, con sus Conjugaciones y las Distintas
Preposiciones que rigen ; Modelos de Correspondencia, etc., todo
al Alcance de la Capacidad mas Mediana. For RAMON PALEN-
ZUELA y JUAN DE LA C. CARRENO. 12mo, 457 pages.
Key to Exercises. Separate volume.
Spaniards desirous of learning English will find in this volume all that
is needed for its speedy and thorough acquisition. The system adopted
is clear, simple, philosophical, and practical.
Grammar for Teaching French to Spaniarda
Gramatica Francesa :
Un M6todo para Aprender a Leer, Escribir, y Hablar el Frances, seguD
el Verdadero Sistema de Ollendorff. Ordenado en Lecciones Pro-
gresivas, consistiendo de Ejercicios Orales y Escritos; enrique-
cido de la Pronuneiacion Figurado corao se Estila en la Conver-
sacion ; y de un Apendice, abrazando las Reglas de la Sintaxis,
la Formacion de los Verbos Regulares, y la Conjugacion de los
Irregulares. For TEODORO SIMONNE. 12rao, 341 pages.
Key to Exercises. Separate volume.
M. Simonn6 has done a good work in bringing the French language
within the reach of Spaniards by this application of the Ollendorff system.
A few weeks' study of his " Gramatica Francesa " will impart a knowl-
edge of the more common conversational idioms, and a thorough mastery
of it will insure as perfect an acquaintance with French as can be deeired.
With the aid of the Key the study can be pursued without a master ; for
the illustrative exercises at once show whether the grammatical rules and
principles successively laid down are properly understood.
D. AFPLETON & CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
The Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase-
Book.
An Easy and Agreeable Method of Acquiring a Speaking Knowledge
of the Spanish Language. By Professor BUTLER. ISmo, 293
pages.
The object of the author is to make the Spanish language a living,
speaking tongue to the learner ; and the method he adopts is that of na-
ture. He begins with the simplest elements, and progressively advances,
applying all former acquisitions as he proceeds, until the learner has mas-
tered one of the most perfect languages of modern times.
From the New York Jouimal of Commerce.
"This is a good book, and well fitted for the purposes for which it is designed. The
Spanish language is one of great simplicity, and more easily acquired than any other
modern tongue. For a beginner, we recommend this little book, which is small and de-
signed to be carried in the pocket."
An Easy Introduction to Spanish Conver-
sation.
By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 18mo, 100 pages.
This little work contains all that is necessary for making rapid prog-
/ess in Spamsh conversation. It is well adapted for schools, and for
persons who have little time to study or are their own instructors.
Spanish Grammar.
Being a New, Practical, and Easy Method of Learning the Spanish
Language ; after the System of A. F. AHN, Doctor of Philoso-
phy, and Professor at the College of Neuss. First American
Edition, revised and enlarged. 12mo, 149 pages.
Prof. Ahn's method is one of peculiar excellence, and has met with
great success. It has been happily described in his own words : " Learn
a foreign language as you learned your mother tongue " — in the same sim-
ple manner, and with the same natural gradations. This method of the
distinguished German Doctor has been applied in the present instance to
the Spanish Language, upon the basis of the excellent Grammars of Les*
**pada and Martinez, and it is hoped that its simplicity and utility will pro-
cure for it the favor that its German, French, and Italian prototypes have
already found in the Schools and Colleges of Europe.
1). ArPLETON dt CO:S PUBLICATIONS.
Seoane, Neuman^ and Baretti's Spanish-
and-English and English-and-Span-
ish Pronouncing Dictionary.
By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA, Professor of the
Spanish Language and Literature in Columbia College, N. Y., and
Corresponding Member of the National Institute, Washington-
Large 8vo, 1,300 pages. Neat type, fine paper, and strong binding.
The pronunciation of the Castilian language is so clearly set forth in
this Dictionary as to render it well-nigh impossible for any person, who
can read English readily, to fail of obtaining the true sounds of the Span-
ish words at sight.
In the revision of the work, more than eight thousand words, idioms,
and familiar phrases, have been added.
It gives in both languages the exact equivalents of the words in gen>
eral use, both in their literal and metaphorical acceptations.
Also, the technical terms most frequently used in the arts, in chemistry,
botany, medicine, and natural history, as well as nautical and mercantile
terms and phrases — most of which are not found in other Dictionaries.
Also many Spanish words used only in American countries which were
formerly dependencies of Spain.
The names of many important articles of commerce, gleaned from the
price currents of Spanish and South American cities, are inserted for the
benefit of the merchant, who will here find all that he needs for carryuig
on a business correspondence.
The parts of the irregular verbs in Spanish and English are here, for
the first time, given in full, in their alphabetical order.
The work likewise contains a grammatical synopsis of both languages;
arranged for ready and convenient reference.
The new and improved orthography sanctioned by the latest edition
of the Dictionary of the Academy — now universally adopted by the press
— is here given for the first time in a Spanish-English Dictionary.
An Abridgment of Velazquez's Large Dictionary,
Intrnded koe Schools, Collbgbs, ajhv> Tbavellkrs.
In Two Parts :— I. Spanish -Eng-lish : H. Engrlish-Spanish.
By MARIANO VELAZQUEZ DE LA CADENA. 12mo, 888 pagesL
En el lAhro Primero de Zoologia, del Curso de Hisioria Natural, por
el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, obra dedicada a hacer conocer la Historia
Natural a los ninos, el autor no se limita a hacer una relacion de lo con-
cerniente a aquella materia, sino que, con especial habilidad pedagogica,
ha conscuido armonizar los adelantos de la ciencia, con el desarroUo
intelectuai de los nifios, haciendo la obra sumamente interesante. — Los
Avisos, Revista Cienttjica, 1886 (Madrid).
El Libra Primero de Zoologia, correspondiente al Curso de Historia
Natural, por el Dr. D, Juan Garcia Puron, que hemos leido con deteni
miento, puede considerarse como una de las mejores obras de su clase
hasta hoy publicadas.— ii7 Magisterio Toledano, IBS'? (Toledo, Espana).
El Curso de Historia Natural, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, es
una obra de relevante merito, tanto considerada desde el punto de vista
cientifico y literario, como del artistico.— A'^ Clamor del Magisterio, 1885
(Barcelona, EspaiiaJ.
El Lihro Primero de Zoologia, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, co-
rresponde 4 un importante Curso de Historia Natural, debido a la pluma
de dicho Sr. El metodo que sigue en dicha obra es intuitive y deduc-
tivo, y la exposicion de doctriua, clara y breve, ayudando a la interpreta-
cion de las ideas una serie de grabados de una ejecucion tan exacta como
esmerada.
Recomendamos la adquisicion de tan importante obra, que considera-
mos de la mayor utilidad para propagar el conocimiento de las ciencias
fisico-naturales entre la juventud. — El Pro/esorado, 1886 (Barcelona,
Espana).
* *
El Libro Primero de Mineralogia y Geologia, del Curso de Historia
Natural, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, viene a llenar el vacio que se
observa en las obras destinadas a las Escuelas Normales, Superiores, e
Institutos de segunda enseiianza. — El Clamor del Magisterio, 1889 (Bar-
celona, Espana).
El Libro Primero de Zoologia, per el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, es
verdaderamente un libro util, lleno de interns y de amenidad, que cautiva
la atencion del nino enseiiandole los raedios de observacion sencillos, y
lo eleva a la contemplacion de la naturaleza y de su Creador, haciendole
adquirir insensiblemente un caudal de conocimientos provechosos para
estudios superiores. No vacilamos en recomcndarlo como utilisimo para
la enseiianza primaria. — Aiuiles de Instruccion Publica de la Republica de
Colombia, 1887 (Bogota).
El Libro Primero de Zoohgia^ por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Pur on, es
un libro verdaderamente util, no solo come obra de texto en un curse ele-
mental de Ilistoria Natural, slno como libro de Icctura en las Escuelas. —
El Inslructor, 1886 (Aguascalicntes, M6jico). '
En el Curso de Historia Natural, per cl Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron,
las explicaciones estan puestas al alcance de las mks, tiernas inteligencias,
y es una obra que ha tenido la mas favorable acogida en la America
espanola, algunos de cuyos paises la ban adoptado como de texto en
sua escuelas. — El Diario de la Marina, 1887 (Habana).
Recomendamos vivamente cl Libro Primero de Mineralogia y Geo-
logia, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, obra que se distingue por ru
buen estilo y sus exceleutes grabados. — II. VVieghardt, Profesor de cien-
cias naturales y Geografia de la Escuela Normal de Preceptores de
Santiago. — La lievista de Lnstruccidn Primaria^ 1889 (Chile).
Nuestras escuelas y colegios carecen de un texto tan apropiado para
la ensenanza elemental, como el Curso de Historia Natural debido k la
pluma del Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron. — Biario ^e Centro-America, 18St>
(Guatemala). '^'
El Libro de Zoologla del Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron es utillsimo,
ameno y muy instructive, porque en un Jenguaje claro se dan nociones
complctas de Zoologla, pareciendo incrcible que en tan pocas paginas
haya condensado el autor tan prcciosaa 6 iutcresantes lecciones.— ii7
Tiempo, 1886 (M6jico).
El Libro Primero de Zoologia, por el Dr. D. Juan Garcia Puron, es la
mcjor obra que para la cnscMliinza se ha publicado en nuestros dias. — El
Protector de la Lnfancia, 1887 (Barcelona, Espafia).
El Libro Primero de Zoologla del Dr. D. Juan Garcia Pur6n. Esta
obra en nucstro jiilcio estii llamada i\ resolver para la ensenanza de esta
asignatura, cl diflcil probloma de facilitar su conocimiento, atcndiendo &
las especiallsiif as condiciones que en la misma concurren por su m6todo
y e:*posici6n, por cl orden y claridad que en cUa jiresidc, sin que decaiga
un momento ol inter6s que despicvta. — Lm. Scr/ni^da Ensenanza, ^rgaoo
General de los Establccimicntos de la Enscfiauza, 1886 (Cordoba, Espafia).
t
^■■^ca^t
f
m 3570
/v
1,1,^4/ tfic